NBC - 1970 - Structural Design and Commentaries

CANADIAN STRUCTURAL
DESIGN MANUAL
1970
SUPPLEMENT No.4 TO THE

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
OF CANADA
Issued by the
ASSOCIATE COMMITTEE ON THE NATIONAL aUI LDING CODE

NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL OF CANADA
OTTAWA
Price $5.00
NRC No. 11530
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Th. N.tlon.1 BuHdlng Cod. I. publlsh.d by the N.tlon.1 R....rch Council of C.n.d. 'or volunt.ry .doptlon by. provlncl.1 gov.rnm.nt. or munlclp.1 .dmlnlstr.tlon. Th. Cod. Is ...entl.lly
t
0'
minimum regul.tlon. r..pectlng the ,.ty of building. wHh r.f.r.nc. to public h Hh,
fir. protection .nd .tructur.1 .ufflcl.ncy. It I. not .nd Is not Int.nded to b t.xt-book of buDdIng d..lgn, .dvlc. upon which .hould bought from professlon.1 .ourc... Th. Cod. rel.t.. to
buDdlngs .nd .Impltructur.. but It I. not Int.nded for u wHh .peclallzed clvl engineering
.tructur... It.....ntl.1 purpo Is the promotion of public f.ty through the u of d..lr.bI.
buldlng .t.nd.rd. throughout C.n.d.
Th. N.tlon.1 BuDding Cod nd It uppl.m.nt. m.y b. obt.lned

by wrHlng to:
Th. Secr.t.ry,
Aocl.t. Commmee on the N.tlon.1 BuDding Cod.,
N.tlon.1 R....rch Council of C.n.d.
Ott.w.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
CANADIAN STRUCTURAL DESIGN

MANUAL
1970
SUPPLEMENT No. 4 TO THE

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
OF CANADA, 1970
Issued by the
ASSOCIATE COMMITTEE ON THE NATIONAL BUILDING CODE

OTTAWA
Prin ted in Canada
NRC No. 11530

Copyright NRC-CNRC
- ii-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
@ National Research Council of Canada 1970

World rights reserved
-111- Copyright NRC-CNRC
- IV - Copyright NRC-CNRC
PREFACE
Supplement 1\0. 4 to the National Building Code of Canada, 1970, has
been prepared in this form as a Canadian Structural Design Manual
for the convenience of structural designers throughout Canada. The Associate Committee hopes that it will prove convenient in use containing, as
it does, the complete wording of design codes for timber, masonry, concrete,
steel and aluminum with the Design Sections of Part 4 reprinted from the
Code itself. Additional explanatory material, prepared for the Associate
Committee by officers of the Division of Building Research, NRC, together
with the material on wind pressure and snow load coefficients for buildings,
etc., contained previously in Supplement No.3, "Structural Information
for Building Design in Canada", to the 1965 Code, are included for convenient reference.
The Associate Committee on the National Building Code records its
appreciation to the Canadian Standards Association for its cooperation in
the preparation of this volume, even to the extent of permitting the use of
direct offprints of CSA documents, as will be evident from the unavoidable
variation in type font. Special thanks are due to Dr. J. H. Jenkins, past
president of CSA, and members of the CSA staff under Mr. F. A. Sweet
for their personal interest in and assistance with this cooperative venture.
Comments on the utility of this volume will be especially welcome since
it is a new venture in order that the Associate Committee may be guided
in the preparation of the 1975 edition of the Code, work upon which is
a1ready in progress.
Part A and Part B (pages 1 to 509 inclusive) contain the various Sections
of Part 4, Design, NBC 1970 and the appropriate CSA design Standards.
Where a Table of Contents appears at the beginning of these Code Sections
and CSA Standards, the page numbers referred to appear at the top of the
page as in the actual document; the number which appears at the bottom
of each page relates to this Manual.
-v-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
...
- VI Copyright NRC-CNRC
CANADIAN STRUCTURAL DESIGN

MANUAL
1970
SUPPLEMENT No. 4 TO THE
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF CANADA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
PART A - PART 4, DESIGN, NBC, 1970

Structural Loads and Procedures (Section 4.1, NBC).... . . . . . . . . . .
Foundations (Section 4.2, NBC). . . . . . . . . .. . .......... , ... "
Wood Construction (Section 4.3, NBC) ........... , , .... ,
Plain and Reinforced l\1asonry (Section 4.4, NBC) .. , ... '
Plain, Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete (Section 4.5, NBC)... . .
Steel Construction (Section 4.6, NBC) ... , . . . .. ., ...... ',."..
Aluminum Construction (Section 4.7, NBC) .. , , , . , .. , . . . . .
Cladding (Section 4.8, NBC) ......... , . . . .
. , . , , , .. , . . . . ..
1
19
39
43
47
S1
55
59
PART B - DESIGN CODES

Code of Recommended Practice for Engineering Design in Timber
(CSA 086-1970) ............... , , , , . . . . . . . . . , . . , , , , ... , . , . "
Plain and Reinforced :Masonry ..... , .... , . . . . . . . . . . .
Code for the Design of Plain or Reinforced Concrete Structures
(CSA A23.3-1970) ........................ , ... , , ............
Prestressed Concrete (CSA A135-1962) ........ ,
, ....... '
Steel Structures for Building (CSA S16-1969), ..... ,
, , , , , .,
Design of Light Gauge Steel Structural IvI em bers
(CSA S136-1963) .............................. , . , ....... "
The Structural ese of Aluminum in Buildings (CSA S157-1969) ....
Design of Light Gauge Aluminum Products (CSA S190-1968) ......
67
169
205
313
345
433
465
509
PART C - COMMENTARIES ON PART 4 OF THE NBC

C1 Wind Loads by A. G. Davenport and W. A. Dalgliesh. . . . . . . ..
C2 Snow Loads by W. R. Schriever, D. A. Lutes and B. G. W.
Peter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ""
C3 Earthquake Loads by R. H. Ferahian ......... , ........... "
C4 Serviceability Criteria for Deflections and Vibrations by D. E.
Allen ........................................... , . , . . ..
C5 Ponding Loads on Flat Roofs by D. E. Allen ............ , " ,
C6 Load Combinations for Structural Design by D. E. ABen.. '"
C7 Structural Integrity by D. E. Allen, W. R. Schriever and W. G.
Ple\ves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
C8 Temperature Changes in Building Components by W. R.
Schriever ................................... , . . . . . . . . ..
543
567
579
597
601
603
60S
609
PART D - DESIGN DATA FOR SELECTED LOCATIONS

IN CANADA
Table of Climatic Design Data (reproduced from Supplement No.1
to NBC, 1970) ...................................... , . . . . .. 613
-vii-Copyright NRC-CNRC
- yiiiCopyright NRC-CNRC
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
CANADA
PART 4 DESIGN
SECTION 4.1
STRUCTURAL LOADS AND

PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
4.1.1.
4.1.2.
4.1.3.
4.1.4.
4.1.5.
4.1.6.
4.1.7.
4.1.8.
General............. ........
Design Loads and Effects.
Dead Loads .............. " ..
Live Loads Due to Use and Occupancy.
Live Loads Due to Snow and Rain. .
Effects of Wind. . . . . .
.......
Effects of Earthquakes.
Other Effects . . . . . .
-1-
141
143
144
144
147
148
150
156
Copyright NRC-CNRC
1970
-2-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
141
SECTION 4.1
STRUCTURAL LOADS AND

PROCEDURES
SUBSECTION 4.1.1. GENERAL

Application
4.1.1.1.(1) This Section applies to the design of all structural members and
their assemblies used in the following:
(a) all buildings used for the following occupancies:
(i) Group A, Assembly Occupancies
(ii) Group B, Institutional Occupancies
(iii) Group F, Division 1, High Hazard Industrial Occupancies
(b) all buildings exceeding 6000 sq. ft. (558 m2) in building area or exceeding 3 storeys in height used for the following occupancies:
(i) Group C, Residential Occupancies
(il) Group D, Business and Personal Services Occupancies
(iii) Group E, Mercantile Occupancies
(iv) Group F, Divisions 2 and 3, Medium and Low Hazard Industrial
Occupancies.
(2) For buildings not listed in Sentence (1), requirements for design will
be found in Part 9 of this Bylaw.
Definitions
4.1.1.2. Words that appear in italics are defined in Part 2 of this Bylaw.
Design Requirements
4.1.1.3.(1) Buildings and their structural members shall be designed to have
sufficient structural capacity.to resist safely and effectively all effects of loads
and influences that may be expected, and shall in any case satisfy the requirements of this Section.
!vlinimum
safety and
performance
(2) All permanent and temporary structural members of a buildillg shall

be protected against loads exceeding the design loads during the construction
period except when, as verified by analysis or test, temporary overloading of
a structural member would result in no impairment of that member or any
other member. In addition, precautions shall be taken during all stages of
construction to ensure that the building is not damaged or distorted due to
loads applied during construction.
Loads during
construction
4.1.1.4. Buildings and their structural members shall be designed by one of

the following methods:
(a) standard design procedures and practices provided by Sections 4.2 to
4.8 inclusive of this Bylaw and any standards and specifications referred to therein except that in cases of conflict the provisions of this
Bylaw shall govern.
(b) one of the following three bases of design
(i) analysis based on generally recognized theory
(ii) evaluation of a given full-scale structure or a prototype by a loading
test
(Hi) studies of model analogues,
provided the design is carried out to the satisfaction of the authority
having jurisdiction by a person especially qualified in the specific
method appHed and provided the design ensures a level of safety and
performance at least equivalent to that provided for or implicit in
design carried out by the methods referred to in Clause 4.1.1.4.(a).
Design basis
142
Deflections
4.1.1.5.(1) Structural members shall be designed so that their deflections and

vibrations under expected service loads will be acceptable with regard to
(a) the intended use of the building or member
(b) possible damage to nonstructural members and materials
(c) possible damage to the structure itself.
(Information on deflections and vibrations can be found in NBC Supplement No.4.
Canadian Structural Design Manual 1970.)
Creep,
shrinkage
and other
effects
Dellections lisll:U in Sl:ntl'nce (I) shall be: taken into UL'COltnl in all
and structural members made of material susceptible to Jeflections, deformations, or changes in 10aJ distribution due to creer. shrinkage
or other e1ftcts in the material" of which they are composed.
Lateral
deflection of
tall buildings
due to wind
(3) The lateral deflection due to wind of slender buildings whose height is
greater than four times their minimum effective width shall not exceed the
following ratios:
Storey deflection to storey height
11500
Total deflection to total height
11500
These limits may be waived if the design is based on a detailed dynamic
analysis of the deflections and their effects.
(2)
~truclures
(Information on lateral deflection of tall buildings may be found in the chapter on wind
loads of NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian Structural Design Manual. 1970.)
Stability
under
compressive
stress
Structural
integrity
4.1.1.6. Provision shall be made to ensure adequate stability of the structure

as a whole and adequate lateral, torsional and local stability of all structural
parts which may be subjected to compressive stress.
4.1.1.7. Buildings and structural systems shall provide such structural integrity
that the hazards associated with progressive collapse due to local failure
caused by severe overloads or abnormal loads not specifically covered in this
Section are reduced to a level commensurate with good engineering practice.
<Information on structural integrity can be found in NBC Supplement No.4. Canadian
Structural Design Manual. 1970.)
Drawings and
ca 1culations
Drawings and Calculations

4.1.1.8.(1) Drawings submitted with the application to build shall be signed
by, or bear the seal of, the designer.
(2) Drawings submitted with the application to build shall indicate in addition to those items specified in other Sections of Part 4 applicable to a specific
material
(a) the name and address of the person responsible for the structural
design,
(b) the dimensions, location and size of all structural members in sufficient
detail to enable the design to be checked,
( c) sufficient detail to enable the loads due to materials of construction
incorporated in the building to be determined,
(d) all intended uses and occupancies, and
(e) all effects and loads, other than dead loads used in the design of the
structural members.
(3) The calculations and analysis made in the design of the structural members of a building shall be available upon request for inspection by the
authority having jurisdiction.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
..........................
--.~--
143
,I
In
,lnd
to
4,
all
gc
is
~e
ic
y
e
s
Inspection of Construction
4.1.1.9. Engineering inspection of the construction of any building or part
thereof shall be carried out to ensure that construction is consistent with
design, by the person responsible for its design or by another person qualified
in the inspection of building construction.
Inspection of
construction
SUBSECTION 4.1.2. DESIGN LOADS AND EFFECTS

4.1.2.1.(1) Except as provided for in Article 4.1.2.2. the following loads, forces
and effects shall be considered in the design of a building and its structural
members and connections:
D - dead loads as provided for in Subsection 4.1.3.
L - live load due to intended use and occupancy (includes loads due to
movable partitions and vertical loads due to cranes); snow, ice and
rain; earth and hydrostatic pressure; horizontal components of static
or inertia forces.
W-wind
E - earthquake
T - contraction or expansion due to temperature changes, shrinkage,
moisture changes, creep in component materials, movement due to
differential settlement or combination thereof.
Loads
(Information on effects due to temperature changes can be found in NBC Supplement

No.4. Canadian Structural Desii,'D Manual, 1970.)
(2) Minimum design values of these loads as set forth in Subsections 4.1.3.
to 4.1.8. shall be increased to account for dynamic effects where applicable.
4.1.2.2.(1) Where a building or structural member can be expected to be subjected to loads, forces or other effects not listed in Article 4.1.2.1., such effects
shall be taken into account in the design, based on the most appropriate information available.
Loads not
listed
(2) If it can be shown by engineering principles, or if it is known from

experience, that neglect of some or all of the effects due to T do not affect
the structural safety and serviceability, they need not be considered in the
strength calculations.
4.1.2.3.(1) In designing buildings and their structural members all of the

loads listed in Article 4.1.2.1. shall be considered to act in the following
combinations, whichever combination produces the most unfavourable effects
in the buildiJ.~, foundation or structural member concerned, when reduced,
as appropriate, according to Sentence (2). The most unfavourable effect may
occur when one or more of the contributing loads is not acting:
(i) D
(ii) D + L
(iii) D + (W or E)
(iv) D + T
Load
combinations
+ L + (W or E)
+L +T
+ (W or E) + T
D + L + (W or E) + T
(v) D
(vi) D
(vii) D
(viii)
(2) The total of the combined load effects may be multiplied by the fol-
lowing load combination probability factors:

(a) 1.0 for combinations (i) to (iv);
(b) 0.75 for combinations (v) to (vii);
(c) 0.66 for combination (viii).
Probability
factors
144
Stress
reversal
(3) When loads other than D counteract D in a structural member or

joint, special caution shall be exercised by the designer to ensure adequate
safety for possible stress reversal.
(Information on load combinations can be found in NBC Supplement No. 4. Canadiau
Structural Desiarn Manual. 1970.)
Overturning
and sliding
(4) A bUilding shall be proportioned to resist an overturning moment and

sliding force of not less than twice that due to the loads acting on the structure when the structure is considered as an entire unit acting on or anchored
to its bearing stratum or supporting structure. The resistance to overturning
shall be calculated as the sum of the stabilizing moment of the dead load
only plus the ultimate resistance of any anchoring devices.
SUBSECTION 4.1.3. DEAD LOADS
Dead loads
4.1.3.1. The design dead load for a structural member consists of:
(a) the weight of the member itself,

(b) the weight of all materials of construction incorporated into the build
ing to be supported permanently by the member, including permanent
partitions,
( c) the weight of permanent equipment,
(d) forces due to prestressing.
SUBSECTION 4.1.4.. LIVE LOADS DUE TO USE AND OCCUPANCY
Load8 due to
use of floors
aod roofs
4.1.4.1. The design load on an area of floor or roof depends on the intended
use and occupancy and shall not be less than the uniformly distributed load
patterns in Article 4.1.4.3. or the concentrated loads in Article 4.1.4.4.,
whichever produces the most critical effect.
Uses not
stipulated
4.1.4.2. Where the use of an area of floor is not provided for in Articles
4.1.4.3. and 4.1.4.4., the design loads due to the use and occupancy of the
area shall be determined from an analysis of the loads resulting from
(a) the weight of the probable assembly of persons
(b) the weight of the probable accumulation of equipment and furnishing,
and
(c) the weight of the probable storage of materials.
Full and
partial
loading
4.1.4.3.(1) The uniformly distributed load shall be not less than the values
listed in Table 4.1.4.A, reduced as may be provided for in Sentence (4) or (5),
applied
(a) uniformly over the entire area, or
(b) on any portions of the area,
whichever produces the most critical effects in the members concerned.
More
than one
occupancy
(2) Where an area of floor or roof is intended for two or more occupancie!
at different times, the value to be used from Table 4.1.4.A shall be the greatest
value for any of the occupancies concerned.
Change in
occupancy
(3) When the occupancy of a building is changed, the building shall conform to the requirements of this Bylaw for the new occupancy.
Variation
with
tributary
area
(4) Where a structural member supports a tributary area of floor, roof, or

combination of these greater than 900 sq ft (83.70 m2) used for storage.
manufacturing, retail stores, garage or assembly, the design live load due to
-6-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
145
use and occupancy, excluding snow, is the load provided for in Sentence (I)
multiplied by
O.S
ISlVA
where A is the tributary area in square feet for this type of use and occupancy.
(5) Where a structural member supports a tributary area of tloor, roof or
combination of these greater than 200 sq ft (18.60 m2) for any use or
occupancy other than those indicated in Sentence (4), the design live load due
to use and occupancy. excluding snow, is the load provided for in Sentence (1)
multiplied by
0.3 + to/vB
where B is the tributary area in square feet for this type of use and occupancy.
(6) In areas of a building where partitions other than permanent partition.r
are shown on the drawings or where partitions might be added in the future,
allowance shall be made for the weight of such partitions. This allowance
shall be determined from the actual or anticipated weight of the partitions
placed in any probable position, but shall be not less than 20 psf (958 N/m2)
over the area of tloor being considered. Partition loads used in design shall be
shown on the drawings as provided in Clause 4.1.1.8.(2)(e).
Table 4.1.4.A
Forming Part of Sentence 4.1.4.3.(1)
Use of Area of Floor or Roof

Apartment buildings
Living and sleeping quarters, upper floor corridors
Locker rooms
Entrance halls, ground floor corridors, eril3 and
stairs
A tlics and crawl spaces where there is no storage of
equipment or material
Bowling alleys, pool and billiard rooms
Offices and toilets
Corridors, erils and stairs
Churches and Sunday schools
Class rooms, movable seats; assembly areas, fixed
seats; private rooms, toilets
Assembly areas, movable seats; entrance halls, lobbies, exit halls, stairs and kitchens
Courtrooms
Dance halls, gymnasia, including entrance halls, stairs,
corridors and erits
Offices and toilets
Exterior balconies
Factories, warehouses and storage buildings
Separate floors for offices, toilets
Fire escapes
Garages
For passenger cars
For unloaded buses and light trucks
For loaded trucks and buses and all trucking spaces
Minimum
Design Load,
psf
40
SO
100
10
7S
SO
100
50
100
100
100
50
100
125
SO
100
SO
12S
2S0
-7-Copyright NRC-CNRC
146
Table 4.1.4.A (Cont'd)
Use of Area of Floor or Roof
Minimum
Design Load,
psf
Grandstands, stadia, rinks, arenas, reviewing stands

and bleachers
Hospitals
Wards, sleeping and living quarters, general offices
and waiting rooms
Entrance halls, dining rooms, kitchens, stairs, corridors, exits, and X-ray rooms
Operating and lecture rooms
Hotels, motels, restaurants, club houses
Sleeping quarters and related corridors
Offices, toilets and locker rooms
Lobbies, rotundas, assembly halls, kitchens, stairs,
corridors thereto and exits
Retail stores, maintenance and service areas
Libraries
Stack rooms, depending on arrangement of stacks,
not less than
Reading rooms
Office buildings
Basement and first floor, corridors and exits
Upper floors for office use
Retail stores or shops for light merchandise
Separate floors for offices, toilets
Schools and colleges
Sleeping quarters and related corridors
Offices and toilets
Class rooms with or without fixed seats
Lecture and assembly rooms with fixed seats
Entrance halls, assembly halls without fixed seats,
reception rooms, dining rooms, kitchens, exits,
corridors and stairs
Sidewalks and driveways over areaways and basements
Theatres, assembly halls, auditoria
Private rooms, offices and toilets
Seating area with fixed seats, projection and rewind
rooms
Seating area with movable seats, entrance halls, lobbies, foyers, stage, corridors, aisles, exits and stairs
Column 1
Concentrated
loads
100
40
100
1S
40
SO
100
100
ISO
60
100
SO
100
SO
40
SO
SO
SO
100
2S0
SO
SO
100
Column 2
4.1.4.4. The design load due to possible concentrations of load reSUlting from
use of an area of floor or roof shall not be less than that listed in Table
4.1.4.B. applied over an area of 2~ ft (162 mm) by 2~ ft (162 mm) located
so as to cause maximum effects.
-8-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
147
Table 4.1.4..B.
Forming Part of Article 4.1.4.4.

Minimum
Concentrated
Load, Ib
Area of Floor or Roof

Roof iurfaces
Classrooms
Floors of offices, manufacturing buildings, hospital
wards, stages
Floors and areas used by passenger cars
Floors and areas used by vehicles not exceeding 8000 lb
gross weight
Floors and areas used by vehicles not exceeding 20,000
lb gross weight
Floors and areas used by vehicles exceeding 20,000 lb
gross weight
Driveways and sidewalks over areaways and
basements
Column 1
300
1,000
2,000
2,500
4,000
8,000
12,000
12,000
Column 2
SUBSECTION 4.1.5. LIVE LOADS DUE TO SNOW AND RAIN

4.1.5.1. The design load due to the accumulation of snow on a surface shall
not be less than the ground snow load specified in the Table of Climatic Data
in Part 1 of this Bylaw decreased or increased as provided for in Articles
4.1.5.2. to 4.1.5.4.
4.1.5.2.(1) The design snow load on a roof or other building surface subject
to snow accumulation shall be determined by multiplying the ground snow

load given in Article 4.1.5.1. by appropriate snow load coefficient Cs given in
Articles 4.1.5.3. and 4.1.5.4.
Ground
snow Joad
Roof snow
load
(2) A roof or other bUilding surface and its structural members subject to
snow accumulation shall be designed for the following two snow load distributions:
(a) full load distributed over the entire area, or
(b) full load distributed on anyone portion of the area and zero load on
the remainder of the area,
whichever produces the greatest effects on the member concerned.
Full and
partial
loading
4.1.5.3. The basic snow load coefficient Cs is 0.8, except for roofs exposed to
Snow load
coefficients
wind as provided for in Article 4.1.5.4. The basic snow load coefficient shall
be further increased or decreased to account for the following influences
(a) the decrease of snow load because of the effect of slope for roof slopes
exceeding 30 deg.,
(b) the accumulation of nonuniform snow load on gable and hip roofs,
(c) the accumulation of nonuniform snow load on arched and curved roofs,
(d) the accumulation of increased snow loads in valleys of butterfly as well
as multispan curved or sloped roofs,
(e) the accumulation of increased nonuniform snow loads due to drifting
snow on the lower of two-level or multi-level roofs, such as a canopy,
marquee or porch roof provided the upper roof is part of the same
building or of an adjacent building not more than 15 ft (4.6 m) away,
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-9-
148
(f) the accumulation of increased nonuniform snow loads on areas adjacent to roof Fojections such as penthouses. large chimneys, ventilating equipment,
(g) the accumulation of increased snow or ice loads on areas due to snow
sliding or melt water draining onto these areas from an adjacent roof
sloping towards this area. The magnitude and distribution of the increase shall be appropriate to the relative portions and sizes of the
surfaces.
(Information on eoefftcienta for snow loads on roofs ean be found In NBC Supplement
No.... Canadian Structural Desiarn Manual. 1970.)
Roofs
exposed
to wind
4.1.5.4. For roofs exposed to the wind, a basic snow load coefficient C, of 0.6
may be used instead of 0.8 if both the following conditions are satisfied:
Rain loads
4.1.5.5.(1) The design load. due to the accumulation of rain water on a surface whose position and shape, and deflection under load, is such as to make
such an accumulation possible, is that reSUlting from the 24-hr rainfall
specified in the Table of Climatic Data in Part 1 of this Bylaw over the
horizontal projection of the surface and all tributary surfaces. This provision
applies whether or not the surface is provided with drainage. such as rain
water leaders.
(a) if the roof is not shielded from the wind on any side, and is not likely
to become shielded by obstructions higher than the roof within a distance of 10h from the building (where h is the height of the obstruction
above the roof level),
(b) if the roof does not have any projections, such as parapet walls, which
prevent the snow from being blown off.
(Information on pondinar on roofs can be found in NBC Supplement No.... Canadian

Structural Desiarn Manual, 1970.)
(2) Loads due to rain need not be considered to act simultaneously with
loads due to snow.
SUBSECTION 4.1.6. EFFECTS OF WIND
External
pressure
or suction
4.1.6.1.(1) The design external pressure or suction due to wind on a building
as a whole or on cladding shall be calculated from:

where
p
p
= qCeCgC
= the design external pressure acting statically and in a direction
p
normal to the surface either as a pressure (directed towards

the surface) or as a suction (directed away from the surface);
q
the reference velocity pressure as provided for in Sentence (3);
C. = the exposure factor as provided for in Sentence (4);
Co
the gust effect factor as provided for in Sentence (5);
Cp = the external pressure coefficient for the cladding location considered or the shape factor for the bUilding as a whole. The
shape factor is equal to the algebraic difference of the external
pressure coefficients for the windward and leeward sides of
the building.
=
=
(Information on pressure coefficients can be found in the chapter on wind loads In NBC
Supplement No... , Canadian Structural Deaiarn Manual. uno.)
-10-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
r
I
I
149
II
(2) The net design pressure due to wind on cladding shall be the algebraic
difference of the external pressure or suction as provided for in Sentence (1)
and the design internal pressure or suction due to wind calculated from either:
(a)
or
(b)
where
= qCeCpi
Pi = qCeCgCpi
Pl = the design
Pi
Internal
pressure
or suction
on cladding
internal pressure acting statically and in a

direction normal to the cladding either as a pressure
(directed outwards) or as a suction (directed inwards);
q, Ce, C" are as provided for in Sentences (3). (4) and (5) respectively, except that Ce shall be evaluated at the building
mid-height instead of the height of the element considered;
Cpi
the internal pressure coefficient.
Formula (b) shall be used if the building has large openings such that the
effects of wind gusts are transmitted to the internal air space of the building.
In the design of cladding adequate allowance shall be made for regions of
high local external pressure!) or suctions.
(Information on pressure coefficients can be found in the chapter on

Supplement No.4, Canadian Structural DesilCn Manual, 1970.)
WlDCl
loads in NBC
(3) The reference velocity pressure q is the appropriate value specified in

the Table of Climatic Data in Part 1 of this Bylaw for the conditions listed
in Clauses (a), (b), (c) and (d).
(a) The reference velocity pressure q for the design of cladding shall be
based on a probability of being exceeded in anyone year of 1 in 10.
(b) The reference velocity pressure q for the design of structural members
for deflection and vibration shall be based on a probability of being
exceeded in anyone year of 1 in 10.
(c) For all buildings except those listed in Clause (d) the reference velocity
pressure q for the design of structural members for strength shall be
(d) The reference velocity pressure q for the design of structural members
for strength for buildings essential for post-disaster services shall be
(4) The exposure factor C. shall be:

(a) the value shown in Table 4.1.6.A. for the appropriate height of the
surface or part of the surface, or
(b) the value of the function: (h/30)1Al but not less than 1.0 where h is
the height above grade in feet of the surface or part of the surface, or
(c) if a dynamic approach to the action of wind gusts is used, an appropriate value depending on both height and shielding.
(Information on a dynamic approach can be found in NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian
Structural Design Manual, 1970.)
Reference
veJocity
pressure
Cladding
Deflection
of structural
members
Strength of
structural
members
Buildings for
post-disaster
services
Exposure
factor
150
Table 4.1.6.A.
Height, ft
o to
Over
"
tt
"
"
"
"
40
60
90
130
190
270
420
740
Exposure Factor
40
to
60
to
90
to 130
to 190
to 270
to 420
to 740
to 1200
Column 1
Gust effect
factor
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
Column 2
(5) The gust effect factor C g is one of the following values:

(a) 2.0 for structural members;
(b) 2.5 for small elements including cladding;
( c) if a dynamic approach to the action of wind gusts is used, an appropriate value depending on the turbulence of the wind and the size and
natural frequency of the structure.
(Information on a dynamic approach to the action of wind gusts can be found in the
chapter on wind loads in NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian Structural DesiK'n Manual,
1970.)
Dynamic
effects of
wind
4.1.6.2. Buildings whose height is greater than four times their minimum
effective width or greater than 400 ft (122 m) and other buildings whose light
weight, low frequency and low damping properties make them susceptible to
vibration shall be
(a) designed by experimental methods for the danger of dynamic overloading and vibration and the effects of fatigue, or
(b) designed using a dynamic approach to the action of wind gusts.
(Information on dynamic approach to the action of wind gusts can be found In the
chapter on wind loads in NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian Structural Desia-n Manual,
1970.)
Full and
partial
loading
4.1.6.3. Buildings and structural members shall be capable of withstanding

the effects of:
(a) the full wind load over the entire area, or
(b) 0.75 times the full wind load acting over any portion of the area and
zero load on the rest of the area,
whichever produces the greatest effect on the building or member concerned.
SUBSECTION 4.1.7. EFFECTS OF EARmQUAKES

4.1.7.1.(1) The design loading due to earthquake motion shall be determined
(a) by the analysis given in this Subsection, or
(b) by a dynamic analysis.
(Information on loads due to earthquakes can be found In NBC Supplement No. ".
Canadian Structural Design Manual, 1970.)
-12-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
151
(2) Nomenclature
In this Subsection:
D = the dimension of the building in feet in a direction parallel to
the applied forces.
D. = the dimension of the lateral force-resisting system in feet in a
direction parallel to the applied forces.
.
ht, h tl , hz
The height in feet above the base (i
0) to level .. ,..., "nu , or
urn respectively.
Level i
Any level in the building, i
1 first level above the base.
Level n
That level which is uppermost in the main portion of the
structure.
Level r
That level which is under design consideration.
W = Dead load including the following:
25% of the design snow load specified in Subsection 4.1.5.;
for areas used for storage, the full design live load modified
according to Sentence 4.1.4.3.(4);
the full contents of any tanks.
Wi, W z
That portion of W which is located at or is assigned to level
",... or "r" respectively.
I
Numerical reduction coefficient for base overturning moment
as defined in Clause 4.1.7 .1.(7)(a).
I z = Numerical reduction coefficient for moment at level "x" as
defined in Clause 4.1.7.1.(7)(b).
N = The total number of storeys above exterior grade to level ",,".
(N is usually numerically equal to ll).
T = Fundamental period of vibration of the buildillg or stmcture
in seconds in the direction under consideration.
R
Seismic regionalization factor which is a measure of the
seismic activity and risk in the area considered.
K
Numerical coefficient that reflects the material and type of
construction, damping, ductility, andlor energy-absorptive
capacity of the structure.
I = Importance factor of the structure.
F
Foundation factor.
C
Numerical coefficient for base shear as defined in Sentence
4.1.7.1.(4).
Wp = The weight of a part or portion of a structure, e.g. cladding,
partitions, appendages.
Cp
Horizontal force factor for part or portion of a structure, as
given in Table 4.1.7.B.
V p = Lateral force on a part or portion of the structure.
V = Minimum lateral seismic force at the base of the structure.
F, Portion of V to be concentrated at the top of the structure as
defined in Clause 4.1.7.1.(5)(a).
Lateral force applied to levelr.
Fs
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
(3) Earthquake forces shall be assumed to act in any horizontal direction.

Except where required otherwise by the authority having jurisdiction, independent design about each of the principal axes shall be considered to
provide adequate resi.,tance in the structure for earthauake forces applied in
any direction.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-13 -
152
(4) The minimum lateral seismic force assumed to act nonconcurrentIy
in any direction shall be:
V = 1,4 RKCIFW
where R = the values given in the Table of Climatic Data in Part 1 of
this Bylaw.
K = the value given in Table 4.1.7 .A.
C = 0.10 for all one and two-storey buildings
C
O.OS/vT for all other buildings
The maximum value of C shall be 0.10.
Except where properly substantiated technical data are submitted, T shall be
determined by one of the following formulae:
T = 0.05 hnh/D
or
T
0.1 N.
The latter formula applies to all buildings in which the lateral force-resisting
system consists of a moment-resisting space frame which resists lOOper cent
of the required lateral forces and the frame is not enclosed by or adjoined by
more rigid elements that would tend to prevent the frame from resisting
lateral forces.
(Information on natural periods of buildings can be found in the chapter on loads due
to earthquakes in NBC Supplement No.4. Canadian Structural Design Manual. 1970.)
= 1.3
for all buildings designed for post disaster services and

schools.
For all other buildings I = 1.0
1.5 when the structure is founded on soils having low dynamic
shear modulus such as highly compressible soils.
For all other soils F
1.0
n
W=2: W,
i=l
(5) (a) A portion Ft of the total lateral load V shall be concentrated at the
top of the structure, where
F; = 0.004V(hnIDs)2
The remainder V-Ft shall be distributed along the height of the bUilding
including the top level in compliance with the following formula:
F.{"= (V-F t ) W .. h,
n
2:W h,
i
i=1
F/ need not exceed O.ISV and may be considered as zero for

(hnIDs)~3.
(b) The total shear in any horizontal plane shall be distributed to the
various elements of the lateral-force resistive system in proportion to
their rigidities with due regard to the capacities and stiffnesses of the
nonstructural elements.
(6) Parts or portions of buildings and their anchorage shall be designed
for lateral forces V p where
Vp = 1,4 RCpWp
The appropriate values of Cp are given in Table 4.1.7.B. These forces shall act
at the centre of mass of the components considered.
-14-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
153
(7) (a) The overturning moment M at the base of the structure shall be
multipJied by I where
J
0.5 + 0.25/ .,yT2.
I shall not exceed 1.0.
Table 4.1.7.A.
Type or Arrangement of Resisting Elements
Value of K
Buildings with a ductile moment resisting space frame

(1), (2) with the capacity to resist the total required
lateral force.
0.67
Buildings with a dual structural system consisting of a

complete ductile moment resisting space frame and
shear walls designed in accordance with the following
three criteria:
1. The frames and shear walls shall resist the total
lateral force in accordance with their relative rigidIties considering the interaction of the shear walls
and frames.
2. The shear walls acting independently of the ductile
moment resisting space frame shall resist the total
required lateral force.
3. The ductile moment resisting space frame shall have
the capacity to resist not less than 25 per cent of the
required lateral force.
0.80
All building framing systems except as hereinafter

classified.
1.00
Buildings with a box system(3)-
1.33
Structures other than buildings and other than those set

forth in Table 4.1.7.B.
2.00
Elevated tanks plus full contents, on four or more

cross-braced legs and not supported by a building, designed in accordance with the following three criteria:
1. The minimum and maximum value of the product
Kef shall be taken as 0.12 and 0.25 respectively.
2. For overturning the factor J as set forth in Clause
4. 1.7. 1.(7)(a) shall be 1.0.
3. The torsional requirements of Sentence 4.1.7.1.(8)
shall apply.
3.00
Notes to Table 4.1.7.A.:

(1) A apace frame is a three-dImensional structural system composed of interconnected
members laterally supported 80 aa to fUnction aa a complete self-contained unit

with or without horizontal diaphragms.
ductile moment-resistinlr space frame is a space frame that is designed to resist
all the specified seismic forces and that. in addition. baa adequate ductility or
energy-absorptIve capacity.
(Information on ductile moment-resisting space frames can be found in the chapter on
loads due to earthquakes In NBC Supplement No.4. Canadian Structural Design
Manual, 1970.)
(8) A box system is a structural system without a complete vertical 10ad-carrYinll:
space frame.
(2) A
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-15 -
Overturning
154
Table 4..1.:'.11.
Category
Part or Portion of
Buildings
Direction
of Forco
All exterior and interior walls,

except those of category 2 and 3
Normal to
flat surface
Cantilever parapet and other

cantilever walls except retaining
walls
Normal to
flat surface
Exterior and interior ornamenlations and appendages
Any
direction
1.00
Any
direction
0.20(1)
Any
direction
0.10
Any
direction
0.10
Towers, tanks plus contents,

c1limlleys,
smokesr~cks.
and
penthouses - all when connected to or forming part of a
building
Tank plus contents when resting

on the ground
I Floors and roofs acting as diaI
phragms(2)
Connections for exterior and interior walls and elements except

those forming part of the main
structural system as defined in
Table 4.1.7.A.
Any
direction
Value of
Cp
0.20
1.00
I
I
2.00
Notes to Table 4.1.7.B.:

(1)
When "-"ID of any bulldine is equal to or ereater than I to I, Increase value by

t)o
per cent.
(2) Floors and roofs aetiq &8 diaphral1DB sball be desiped for a minimum foree eorr..
eponding to the value of Cp of 10 per eent applied to loade tributary from that
_tore)' unlesa a /l1'eater force F s 18 asaigned to the Iud under eonsideraUon &8 per
Clause -1,1.7.1.(5) (a).
(b) The overturning moment Ms at any level r shall be multiplied by 1:1:

where
Is = I (I-I) (h z
The incremental change..~ in the design overturning moments, in the
storey under consideration, shan be distributed to the various resisting
elements in the same proportion as the distribution of sbears in the
resisting system. Where other vertical members are provided which are
capable of partially resisting the overturning moments a redistribution
may be made to these. memben if framing memben of suffici~nt
strength and stiffness to transmit the required loads are provided.
Where a vertical-resisting element is discontinuous, the overturning
moment carried by the lowest storey of that element shalJ be carried
down as loads to the foundation.
-16-
' ',,)3
Copyright NRC-CNRC
155
(8) (a) Torsional eccentricities about the vertical axis of the building shall
be computed in all storeys. Tbe..design eccentricity shall be taken to be
l.S times the computed eccentricity, increased by an accidental eccentricity equal to O.OS times the plan dimension in the direction of the
computed eccentricity considered.
(b) Where the total torsional eccentricity determined according to Clause
(a) exceeds 2S per cent of the pIan dimension measured parallel to the
eccentricity, either:
(i) a dynamic analysis shall be carried out, or
(li) the effects of torsion in the statical analysis shall be doubled.
TonioDal
Meet.
(9) A building having setbacks wherein each plan dimension of the tower
is at least 7S per cent of the corresponding dimension of the structural system
of the lower part may be considered as a uniform building without setbacks
for the purpose of determining the seismic forces.
For other conditions of setbacks, the tower shall be designed as a separate
structure using the larger of the seismic coefficients at the base of the tower
determined by considering the tower as either a separate structure for its own
height, or as a part of the over-all structure.
4.1.7.2.(1) Lateral deflections or drift of a stor~y relative to its adjacent

storeys shall be considered in accordance with accepted practice.
General
Provisions
(2) All portions of the structure shall be designed to act as an integral unit
in resisting horizontal forces unless separated by a distance sufficient to avoid
contact under deflection from seismic action. Adjacent structures shall be
separated to prevent pounding due to earthquakes.
(3) The nonstructural components shall be detailed so as not to transfer
to the structural system any forces unaccounted for in the design. Any interaction of rigid elements such as walls and the structural system shall be
examined to show that the capacity of the structural system is not impaired
by the action or failure of the rigid elements.
(4) Except where the seismic regional factor R is zero, pile footings of
every building or structure shall be interconnected continuously by ties in at
least two directions, designed to carry by tension or compression a horizontal
force equal to 10 per cent of the larger pile cap loading, unless it can be
demonstrated that equivalent restraints can be provided by other means.
4.1.7.3.(1) Except as provided in Sentences (2) and (3) buildings in Zones I,
2 and 3 more than 200 ft (61 m) in height shall have ductile moment-resisting
space frames capable of resisting not less than 2S per cent of the required
seismic force for the structure as a whole.
(2) Other structural concepts may be approved by the authority having

jurisdiction when evidence is provided that the structure can withstand the
appropriate design earthquake with ductility and energy absorptive capacity
equivalent to that provided in Sentence (1).
(3) Buildings more than 200 ft (61 m) in height in seismic Zone 1 may
have concrete shear walls in lieu of ductile moment~resisting space frames if
these walls are designed with special provisions required for their ductile
behaviour.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-17-
Special
PrOvitiOD1
156
SUBSECTION 4.1.8. OTHER EFFECTS
loads on
railings
4.1.8.1. The minimum design loads on a railing which guards a drop of more
than 18 in. (457 mm) are:
Horizontal load
(a) 150-lb per lineal foot (2188 N/m) applied horizontally at the top of
the railing for all occupancies except those provided for in Clause (b),
(b) a 125-lb (556 N) single point load applied horizontally at any location
at the top of the railing for occupancies where crowding by many people is very improbable, such as industrial catwalk areas.
Vertical load
(c) 100-lb per lineal foot (1459 N/m) applied vertically at the top of the
railing and acting separately from the horizontal load provided for in
Clauses (a) and (b).
4.1.8.2. Grandstands and any building used for assembly purposes to accommodate large numbers of people at one time shall be designed to resist all
inertia sway forces produced by the use and occupancy of the building or
structure. The inertia force shall be not less than 20 lb per lineal foot
(292 N/m) of seat parallel to each row of seats or 10 lb per lineal foot
(146 N/m) of seat perpendicular to each row of seats.
Impact and
vibrations
4.1.8.3. The minimum design load due to equipment, machinery, or other

objects or persons that may produce impact, is the total of the- weight of the
equipment or machinery plus its maximum lifting capacity, or the appropriate
live load, multiplied by an appropriate factor listed in Table 4.1.8.A. Where
dynamic effects such as resonance and fatigue are likely to be important as a
result of vibration of equipment or machinery, a dynamic analysis shall be
carried out.
Table 4.1.8.A.
Impact Due to
Factor
Operation of motor driven cranes

Operation of hand driven cranes
Live loads on hanger supported floors and
stairs
Operation of elevators
Column 1
Horizontal
crane loads
1.25
1.10
1.33
See CSA Standard B 44,
1966, Item 2.6.2.
Column 2
4.1.8.4. The minimum horizontal design loads on crane runway rails are:
(a) the lateral force which shall be
(i) for power-operated crane trolleys, 20 per cent, and for hand
operated trolleys, 10 per cent, of the sum of the weights of the lifted
loads and of the crane trolley excluding other parts of the crane,
(H) applied at the top of the rail, one-half on each side of the runway
and
(iii) considered as acting in either direction normal to the runway rail,
(b) the longitudinal force which sha11 be
(i) 10 per cent of the maximum wheel loads of the crane, and
(ii) applied at the top of the rail.
-18-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
CANADA
PART 4 DESIGN
SECTION 4.2
FOUNDATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
Subsection
4.2.1.
4.2.2.
4.2.3.
4.2.4.
4.2.5.
4.2.6.
4.2.7.
4.2.8.
General..........................
Materials Used in Foundations. . . . . . ..
Design Considerations ........... . ..
Footings, Rafts and Foundation Walls. ..
Piles ............................
Piers and Caissons ..................
Special Foundations . . . .. ..........
Excavating, Placing and Filling ....... ,
159
164
165
167
169
174
175
175
1970
-20-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
159
SECTION 4.2
FOUNDATIONS

Application
U.l.L(l) This Section applies to the design of foundation systems for the
foJ1owing:
(a) all buildings used for the following occupancieJ
(i) Group A. Assembly Occupancies
(ii) Group B.lnstitutiollai Occupancies
(iii) Group F, Division 1, High Ha:.ard Industrial Occupancies
(b) all buildings exceeding 6000 sq ft (558 m:.!) in building area or exceeding 3 storeys in height used for the f01lowing occupancies
(i) Group C, Residelltial Occupancies
(ii) Group D, Business and Personal Services Occupancies
(iii) Group E. Mercantile Occupancies
(iv) Group F, Divisions 2 and 3, Medium and Low Ha::'llrd Ifldlwrial
Occupancies, and
(c) all buildings of smalJer size than in (b),
(i) whose foulldations are erected in fill, very loose sand, very loose
sand and gravel, soft till, very soft clay, soft clay, and clay shale,
(ii) whose superstructures are of metal frame, or reinforced concrete
construction,
(iii) where unusual loading or thermal conditions exist, or
(iv) supported on piles.
(2) For buildings not listed in Sentence (1) requirements for design will be
found in Part 9 of this Bylaw.
(3) Requirements for the control of groundwater around spaces formed
below grade are given in the appropriate articles set forth in Part 9 of this
Bylaw.
Definitions
Nomenclatul'e
4.2.1.3. Soil is that portion of the earth's crust which is fragmentary, or such
that some individual particles of a dried sample may be readily separated by
SoU,
agitation in water; it includes boulders. cobbles, gravel, sand, silt, clay and
organic mauer.
402.1.4.(1) A cohesionless soil identified as:
(a) "graver is a soil consisting of particles smaller than 3 in, (76 mm).
but retained on a No.4 sieve, and
(b) "sand" is a soil consisting of particles passing a No.4 sieve but retained
on a No. 200 sieve.
(2) "Sands" are further subdivided as follows:

(a) "coarse sand" is a soil consisting of particles pas.~ing a No.4 sieve but
retained on a No. 10 sieve,
(b) "medium sand" is a soil consisting of particles passing a No. 10 sieve
but retained on a No. 40 sieve, and
(e) "fine sand" is a soil consisting of particles passing a No. 40 sieve but
retained on a No. 200 sieve.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-11-
Cohesionles5
soil. gravel
and sand
160
Cobbles and
boulders
Density of
cohesionless
soil
(3) Particles identified as:

(a) "cobbles" are rock fragments whose greatest dimensions are between
3 (76 mm) and 8 in. (203 mm), and
(b) "boulders" are rock fragments whose greatest dimensions exceed 8 in.
(203 mm).
4.2.1.5.(1) A cohesionless soil described as
(a) "dense" requires 30 or more blows per foot in a penetration test,
(b) "compact" requires between 10 and 30 blows per foot in a penetration
test,
( c) "loose" requires between 4 and 10 blows per foot in a penetration test,
and
(d) "very loose" requires fewer than 4 blows per foot in a penetration test
where the test is carried out in accordance with CSA A119.1-1960, "Code for
Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils."
(2) Where it is not possible to conduct a penetratioD test, a cohesionless
soil may be described as
(a) "dense" if it is not possible for a man of average weight to push a
wooden picket more than 1Y.z in. (38 mm) into the soil, and
(b) "loose" if it is possible for a man of average weight to push a wooden
picket 8 in. (203 mm) or more into the soil.
(3) The picket referred to in Sentence (2) is 2 in. by 2 in. (51 mm by
51 mm) dimensions, bevelled at 45 on all sides at one end to form a point.
Cohesive
soil, silt
and clay
4.2.1.6. A cohesive soil identified as

(a) "silt" is a soil
(i) the particles of which are not visible to the naked eye,
(ii) dry lumps of which are easHy powdered by the fingers,
(iii) that, after shaking a small saturated pat vigorously in the hand,
exhibits a wet shiny surface that disappears rapidly when the pat
is subsequently squeezed, and
(iv) that does not shine when moist and stroked with a knife.
(b) "clay" is a soil
(i) the particles of which are not visible to the naked eye,
(ii) dry lumps of which are not easily powdered by the fingers,
(iii) that, after shaking a small saturated pat vigorously in the hand, does
not exhibit a wet shiny surface, and
(iv) that shines when moist and stroked with a knife.
Consistencies
of cohesive
soils
4.2.1.7. The consistencies of cohesive soils can be identified according to the

description given in Table 4.2.1.A. and may be related to the approximate
undrained shear strengths as indicated.
-22-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
ri
i
161
II
Table 4.2.1.A.
0:

Approximate
undrained shear
strength
Consistency
Description
"very stiff"
is of a type impossible to indent

with the thumb but readily indented with the thumbnail,
Over 2000 psf
"stiff"
is of a type difficult to indent

with the thumb; with difficulty it
can be remoulded by hand,
1000 to 2000 psf
"firm"
is of a type that can be indented

by moderate thumb pressure,
500 to 1000 psf
"soft"
is of a type that can be penetrated several inches with the

thumb,
250 to 500 psf
"very soft"
is of a type that can easily be

penetrated several inches by the
fist
less than 250 psf
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
4.2.1.8. Organic soils and soils other than those identified in Articles 4.2.1.4.
to 4.2.1.7. shall require special investigations to determine suitable design
properties.
4.2.1.9. In this Section a soil or rock identified as
(a) "clay-shale" is fine-grained, finely laminated, will swell on wetting, and
will disintegrate on its first drying and wetting cycle,
(b) "till" is of glacial origin, unsorted and heterogeneous and can contain
a range of particle sizes including boulders, cobbles, gravel, sands, silts
and clays and can exist at any relative density or consistency, and
(c) "cemented sand and gravel" is a mixture of sand and gravel or boulders
thoroughly cemented together as a hard layer which will not soften in
its natural bed when wet.
4.2.1.10.(1) Rock is that portion of the earth's crust which is consolidated,
coherent and relatively hard, and is a naturally formed mass of mineral matter which cannot be readily broken by the hands.
(2) Rocks vary from "hard" through "medium hard" to "soft,"
(a) "hard" means rock comparable to concrete with a compressive strength
greater than 6000 psi (41,370 kN/m2),
(b) "medium hard" means rock comparable to concrete with a compressive
strength greater than 2500 psi (17,238 kN 1m2), and
( c) "soft" rock is comparable to brick masonry with a compressive strength
greater than 500 psi (3,448 kN/m 2 ).
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-23-
Other soils
Clay-shale
Till
Cemented
sand and
gravel
Rock
Approximate
compressive
strength of
rock
162
Classification
of rock
(3)
(a)
(b)
(c)
Rocks are classified as

igneous, such as granite, diorite, basalt!
sedimentary, such as sandstones, ~hales,limestones. and
metamorphic, such as quartzites, slates, marbles, schists.
Defects in
rocks
(4) Defects in rocks which adversely affect the bearing capacity are:
(a) closely spaced, open, or steeply inclined bedding planes, joints, fault
zones, fractures or shear planes,
(b) unsoundness, such as close]y spaced seams of clay, fault gouge, soil or
softened rock. cavities,
(c) significant alteration of the strength of the rock by weathering, deromposition or disintegration in the mass or in part, and
(d) slaking or swelling behaviour in water.
Rock
considereo
as soil
(5) Some natural materials which geologically may be correctly referred

to as rocks are to be treated as soil under the provisions of this Bylaw. These
materials are:
(a) soft rocks with adverse defects,
(b) very weakly cemented sedimentary or soft metamorphic rocks which
can be scratched by the finger nail,
(c) any material which can be dug by hand with a shovel or a pneumatic
spade,and
(d) cemented sands and gravels in which the cementing may be sporadic.
Loads on
foundations
Design Conditions
4.2.1.11. The foundation of a building shall have a design capacity sufficient
to resist all loads as stipulated in Section 4.1 of this Bylaw.
Total and
differenti:JI
settlement
4.2.1.12. The foundation of a building shall be proportioned so that the

probable total and differential settlements of the fOllndation are not greater
than the movements the building is designed to accommodate.
Design
criteria for
materials
4.2.1.13. In the design of the foundation of a building, the procedures, construction practices and stresses used shaH be those provided for in that Section
applicable to the materials used in the foundation modified as pro'. ided for in
Subsections 4.2.2. to 4.2.6.
Drawinp
4.2.L14.(I) Drawings submitted with the application to build a building shaH

indicate
(a) the type and condition of the soil or rock sustaining the foundation
loads, and
(b) the design bearing pressure of the soils or the design capacity of the
foundation units.
(2) When required by the authority having }urirdiclion evidence shalt be
submitted with the application to build that
(a) identifies the type and condition of the soil or rock, and
(b) justifies the design criteria indicated on the drawings, and
(c) indicates the probable settlement of the foundations.
Explorations
U.1.15. A soil exploration shall be carried out under the direction of a person competent in this field of work, who shall prepare a report on the results
of the site exploration, unless otherwise exempted by the authority having
jurisdiction by reason of the fact that the proposed structure is suffi.cieatly
flexible that differential settlep:lent will not affect its stability.
-24-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
163
4.2.U6.(1) Before any part of a foundation is placed and again before any
superstructure is placed on a foundation
(a) the authority having jurisdiction shall be notified and given an opportunity to inspect the site, and
(b) the permission of the authority having jurisdiction shall be obtained
to proceed.
1napecti0D of
foundation
(2) Where required by the authority having jurisdiction, the soil or rock
directly underlying footings, foundation piers or caissons and foundation walls
shall be inspected by a person competent in this field of work after excavation
and immediately prior to construction of the foundations.
(3) In the case of piled foundations for buildings as described above, the
instal1ation of all piling shall be subject to continuous resident inspection
carried out under the direction of a person who is competent in this field of
work. and who has full knowledge of the piling design requirements, the site
exploration data and the foundation reports for this site.
Inspection
of piles
(4) The person responsible for the inspection described in Sentence (3)
shall prepare a report or reports of such inspections describing the conditions
found and any necessary modifications of the design or of the construction
method. Each report shall carry the signature of the responsible person and
a copy of the report shall be sent to the authority having jurisdiction.
Inspection
report of
4.2.1.17.(1) Where during construction the soil or rock to which a foundation

is to transfer loads is found not to be of the type or in the condition used for
purposes of design. and as indicated on the drawings, the foundation shall be
redesigned and constructed for the existing type or conditions to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction.
.Altered
(Z) Where a foundation has not been placed or located as indicated on the
plans, the error shall be corrected or the design capacity of the foundatio1l
recalculated for the altered conditions to the satisfaction of the authority
having jurisdiction.
Foundations
Incorrectly
located
(3) Where a foundation is damaged, it shall be repaired or the design

capacity of the foundation recalculated for the damaged condition to the
satisfaction of the authority havillg jurisdiction.
Damaged
foundation
foundation
conditions
(4) Where a foundation bears on a soil whose properties may be adversely

changed by climatic or construction conditions which occur before construction is complete, the design capacity of the foundation shan be reassessed by
8 special investigation, to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction.
(5) Where filled ground or organic materials are encountered
(a) the design capacity of the foundation shall be determined on the basis
of exploration and testing in accordance with Ciause 4.2.3.1.(1)(8)
or
(b) such material shall be removed so that the foundation will rest on
stable soil or rock.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-25-
Fil1ed
around
organic
material
164
SUBSECTION 4.2.2. MATERIALS USED IN FOUNDATIONS
Preservative
treatment
Timber
4.2.2.1.(1) Where timber is exposed to soil or air above the permanent water
table it shall be treated with preservative in accordance with CSA 080Cl-1965, "Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process - All Timber Products," and also in accordance with
(a) CSA 080-C2-1966, "Preservative Treatment of Lumber, Timbers,
Bridge Ties and Mine Ties by Pressure Processes," or
(b) CSA 080-C3-1965, "Preservative Treatment of Piles by Pressure
Processes" and CSA 080-CI2-1965, "Creosoted Wood Foundation
Piles."
(2) Where timber has been treated as set forth in Sentence (1) it shall be
cared for as provided for in CSA 080-M4-1962. "Instructions for the Care of
Pressure-Treated Wood After Treatment:'
Concrete
4.2.2.2. Concrete used in foundation units shall be in accordance with Section
4.5 of this Bylaw but the minimum compressive strength shall be 3000 lb
per square inch (20,685 kN/m 2 ).
Reinforced
concrete
4.2.2.3. Where reinforced concrete foundation members except piles, are to be

in contact with the soil, all steel reinforcement shall be protected by a thickness of concrete cover conforming with the appropriate requirements of
Section 4.5 of this Bylaw.
4.2.2.4. Where reinforced concrete piles are to be in contact with the soil. the
steel spirals or ties shall be protected by a thickness of concrete cover, cast
monolithically with the core, not less than:
(a) the diameter of the longitudinal bars. nor
(b) 1~ times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate. nor
(c) 3 in. (76 mm) where the concrete is cast-in-place without forming, nor
(d) 2 in. (51 mm) for bars larger than No.8 bars or 1~ in. (38 mm) for
No. 8 bars or smaller. (or concrete cast-in-place within forms, nor
(e) 1~ in. (38 mm) for precast concrete of 28-day strength under 7000 psi
(48,265 kN/m2), nor
(f) 1 in. (25 mm) for precast concrete 28-day strength of 7000 psi (48.265
kN/m2) or greater.
Prestressed
concrete
4.2.2.5. The concrete cover for steel ties and prestressed tendons in prestressed
concrete piles shall comply with the cover requirements for steel reinforcement in Article 4.2.2.4.
Sulphate
attack
4.2.2.6. Where concrete in foundations may be subject to attack by sulphates

in the soil or groundwater, the selection of the cement type, the proportions
of the concrete, the placing procedure and the method of compaction of the
concrete shall be treated as a special engineering problem and in accordance
with CSA A23.1-1967, "Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Conslruction.'
4.2.2.7. Where concrete is placed against a soil containing sulphates and exposed to the atmosphere at the opposite surface, precautions shall be taken to
protect the concrete from deterioration by the resulting accelerated movements of sulphates through it.
-26-
Copyright NRC-CNRC

165
4.2.2.8. Where concrete in foundations is placed in contact with highly acid
soils it shall be made with a normal cement and thoroughly compacted to
reduce permeability to a minimum.
Acid attack
on concrete
Steel
4.2.2.9. Where steel is used in foundations, it shaH be in accordance with
requirements of Section 4.5 or 4.6, and

(a) where steel pipes or tubes are used as piles or as shells to form cast-inplace concrete piles and act as permanent load-carrying members, the
steel shall be in accordance with one of the following standards:
ASTM A252-69 Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles
ASTM A245-64 Flat-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets of Structural
Quality
ASTM A303-64 Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Strip of Structural Quality
ASTM A283-67 Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
Plates of Structural Quality
ASTM A366-68 Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets Commercial
Quality
ASTM A415-64 Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets Commercial
Quality
4.2.2.10(1) Steel is not considered to be exposed to soil where it is encased in
dense concrete and separated from the soil by the thicknesses and types of
concrete described in Articles 4.2.2.3., 4.2.2.4., and 4.2.2.5.
Steel pipe
and tube
piles
Corrosion
of steel
(2) Where conditions are corrosive, adequate protection of exposed steel

shall be provided.
Deterioration of Materials
4.2.2.11. Where a foundation is to be in contact with soil, water, or air that
is in a condition conducive to the deterioration of the materials of the

foundation, adequate measures shall be taken to protect the material and
prevent detrimental deterioration.
SUBSECTION 4.2.3. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
4.2.3.1.(1) The properties of the soil and rock, the design capacity of the
foundation, and where required in Article 4.2.3.8., an estimate of the settlement of the structure shall be determined on the basis of:
(a) exploration, testing and the application of generally accepted soil
mechanics principles conducted by a person competent in this field of
work, or
(b) well-established local practice where such practice includes successful
experience both with soils and rocks of similar type and condition and
with a foundation of similar type.
Basis of
design
(2) The soil exploration shall be carried to that depth to which the
proposed structure will significantly increase the stress in the soil.
(3) Where a soil or rock below the bearing surface has a lower design
bearing pressure than that at the bearing surface as may be indicated by the
bearing values in Article 4.2.4.2., the design capacity of the foundation shall
not be greater than would cause the weakest soil or rock to be stressed beyond
its design bearing pressure.
Consideration
of weaker
underlying
soils
4.2.3.2.(1) The bearing surface of a foundation shall be below the level of

potential damage from frost except as provided in Sentence (2), and the
foundation shall be designed to prevent damage resulting from adfreezing.
Frost action
and
adfreezing
Copyright NRC-CNRC
- 2.7-
166
(2) The bearillg surface of a foundation need not be below the level of
potential damage from frost where the foundation
(a) is designed against frost action, or
(b) bears directly on material not susceptible to frost action.
Sloping
ground
-1,.2.3.3. Where a foundation is to rest on sloping ground, existing stresses

within the soil or rock shall be considered in the design.
Eccentric
loads
4.2.3.4. Eccentricity of loading in foundation units shall be fully investigated.

The maximum pressure on the basis of a straight-line pressure distribution
shall not exceed the ma>..imum safe bearing pressure. Unless special safeguards are incorporated in the design, the resultant force shall faU within the
middle thin1 of the foundation unit.
Dynamii:
loading
4.2.3.5. Where dynamic loading conditions apply, bearing pressures shall be

assessed by a special investigation of the particular conditions.
Hydrostatic
uplift
4.2.3.6. Where a foundation is subject to hydrostatic uplift, this effect shall be

provided for in the design.
High gronnd
water level
4.2.3.7. Where a foundation bears on gravel, sand or silt and where the water
table is within a distance below the bearing surface equal to the width of the
foundation U!lit, the design bearing pressure shall be 50 per cent of that
determined in Article 4.2.4.2.
Cases
requiring
determination
of settlement
4.2.3.8. The magnitude and rate of settlement of a structure shall be determined by exploration and analysis as provided for in Article 4.2.3.1. for the
following conditions:
(a) where a foundation or a surcharge adjacent to a building is to be placed
(i) above very soft clay or very loose sand, or weak organic soils, or
(ii) above soft clay where the load transferred will cause a net increase
of pressure on the clay of 250 psf (11,970 N/m2) or more, or
(iii) above firm clay where the load transferred wil1 cause a net increase
of pressure on the clay of 500 psf (23,940 N/m2) or more, or
(b) where dynamic loads are to be transferred by the foundation to
cohesionless soils in the very loose or loose condition.
Permafrost
4.2.3.9. Where conditions of perennially frozen soils are encountered or known

to exist the design of the foundations for:
(a) buildings exceeding three storeys in height or having a building area
more than 6000 sq ft (558 m2), or smaller structures with special
thermal or structural loading conditions, shall be based upon desl'gn
properties of the soil or rock determined from a special investigation
and by a person competent in this field of work; and
(b) buildings other than those described in Clause (a) shall be carried out
in accordance with the provisions of the Canadian Code for Building
in the North, 1970 issued by the NRC Associate Committee on the
National Building Code.
-28-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
167
4.2.3.10. Where swelling or shrinking soils in which movements resulting from
moisture content changes may be sufficient to cause damage to a structure are
encountered or known to exist, the foundation conditions shall be assessed by
(a) a special investigation, or
(b) reference to recorded information in the form of successful local experience in the construction of bUildings with similar structural requirements, design bearing pressures and subsoil conditions.
Swelling and
shrinking
soils
Note to Article 4.2.3.10.

Deep rooted trees capable of rapid rates of Krowth may seriously affeet the performance of nearby buildings founded in clay soils which are known to shrink with
dryinK and swell with wetting.
During drought or periods of rapid I'rowth such trees may extend their root systema
and tap the supply of water available within the soil structure which in turn results in
shrinking of the clay and settlement of everything above and within the zone of rooting.
In shrinking soils this is essentially an irreversible process that may be stopped by
removinl' the trees. Structures founded on soils that swell upon rewetting (swelling and
shrink ina soils). however. may be subjected to cycles of settlement and heave. When
buildings are constructed on swelling and shrinkinl' soils at sites from which trees have
been removed. subsequent rewettinK of the soil may cause excessive heavina of the
building. Measurements show that under these various conditions differential movements
may exceed 2 in. (51 mm) in a single year.
To avoid Buch difficulties where these soil types are encountered. buildings on shallow
foundations should not be constructed closer to existing trees than a distance equal to
the height the trees will attain at maturity. Nor should fast growing trees be planted
closer to a structure on shallow foundations than a distance equal to their heiKht at
maturity. (Shallow foundations in this context are considered to be those whose bearina
surfaces lie within the depth of the 1'oot systems which may in some instances exceed
25 ft. (7.6 m).)
If substantial total and differential settlements can be tolerated. shallow foundations
may be adequate but, where it is essential to eliminate or minimize foundation movements under conditions of moderate to severe potential volume chanae, it may be
necessary to place a building on deep foundations.
In some instances differential movements may be minimized by expertly executed
I'eotechnieal methods such a prefloodinll. Bubarade stabilization and stress equalization.
but such techniques should be desianed and closely supervised by a person competent
in this field.
SUBSECTION 4.2.4. FOOTINGS, RAFTS and FOUNDATION WALLS

Footings and Rafts
4.2.4.1. The design capacity of footings and rafts shall be determined in
accordance with the appropriate requirements of Subsection 4.2.3., and also
with the following requirements.
I
l
4.2.4.2. For buildings three storeys or fewer in height and having a building
area of 6000 sq ft (558 m2) or less, the design properties of the soi; and the
bearing capacity of the foundation may be determined on the basis of clauses
(a) or (b) provided the type and condition of the soils or rock below the
bearing surface has been identified to a depth of at least twice the width of the
foundation unit below the bearing surface of the foundation unit.
(a) a plate load test, where the footing is 3 ft (915 mm) wide or less,
carried out in accordance with ASTM 01194-57(1966), "Bearing
Capacity of Soil for Static Load on Spread Footings." except that the
bearing plate shall be 12 in. by 12 in. (305 mm by 305 ml11) and the
de.\ign hcaring pressure of the soil is
(i) 1h the ultimate bearing capacity of the soil or,
(ii) 1h the pressure that would cause the bearing plate to settle 1 in.
(25 mm) whichever is the lesser, or
(b) the design bearing pressures appearing in Table 4.2.4.A, column 2,
where the type and condition d the soil or rock listed in column 1 can
be identified and described as set forth in Articles 4.2.1.3. to 4.2.1.7.,
4.2.1.9., and 4.2.1.10., and adjusted as may be required by the design
considerations described in Subsection 4.2.3.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-29-
Design
capacity
Plate
load test
168
Table 4.%.4.A.
Forming Part of Clause 4.2.4.2.(b)
I~
!Des;gn Bearing (1).(3),(4)

Pressure, psf
Type and Condition

of Soil or Rock
Cohesionless soils
(see Articles 4.2.1.4. and 4.2.1.5.)
Dense sand, dense sand and gravel
Compact sand. compact sand and gravel
Loose sand, loose sand and gravel
Very loose sand, very loose sand and gravel
Cohesive soils
(see Articles 4.2.1.6. and 4.2.1.7.)
Dense silt
Compact silt
Loose silt
Very stiff clay
Stiff clay
Firm clay
Soft clay
Very soft clay
Miscellaneous soils and rock
(see Article 4.2.1.9.)
Till, dense or hard
Till, compact or firm
Till. soft
Cemented sand and gravel
Clay shale
Filled Ground
6,000
3,000
1,000
(2)
3.000
2,000
(2)
6.000
3.000
I.SOO
7S0
(21
8,000
3,000
12,
10,000
Rock
(see Article 4.2.1.10.)

Without defects
With defects
Column
Up to
20,000
(2)
Column 2
Sotcs to Table 4.2.4.A.

Values above those shown in thE' table may be used when it ean be shown to the
satisfaction of the authoTitfl ha"ing iUTi.8diction that on the basis of past experience
such values are justified.
(2) Desion beaTing pTe'BllTp.. shall be determined in aecordance with Sentences
4.2.S.1.0) and (2).
(3) Where load test values or the values given in Table 4.2.4.A. are used as provided for
in Article 4.2.4.1 . the desion capacitll of the foundatio", unit is the beaTing .uTfac.
area times the desig" beaTing pTfl88'UTe of the soil or rook reduced as may be necessary by the requirements cuntained in Subsection 4.2.3.
~4) For purpOl'es of determininsr the vertieal stress in soils or rook below the bt'!J""'D
Bur/ace the load from the foundation unit shall be aflsumed to be distributed uniformly over the area of any horizontal plane within a frustum extending downward
from the foundation unit perimeter at 60" to the horizontal. but the area considered
as 8upportinlr the load shall not extend beyond the intersection of 60" plane!! to
adjacent /ound.atW'll Imi"'.
(1)
-30-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
169
4.2.4.3. The settlement of footings shall be determined as described in Sub-
section 4.2.3. except that for a building of the size provided for in Article
4.2.4.2. the settlement may be determined in accordance with Article 4.2.4.4.
4.2.4.4. Where a load test has been carriell out as provided for in Clause
4.2.4.2.(a) the settlement of footings not exceeding 3 ft (91.5 mm) in width

may be calculated using the formulae:
(2B)2
h
h
"1 .
h' 1
( a) S
S 1 X (B+
1)2 were t e supportmg SOl IS co eSlOn ess, or
Settlement
of footings
Estimate of
settlement
(b) S = SIB where the supporting soil is cohesive

where S = the calculated settlement of the footings. in inches,
SI = the measured settlement of the test plate at the design
bearing pressures,
B
the width of the footing, in feet.
Foundation Walls
4.2.4.5.(1) A foundation wall shall have sufficient thickness to support the
loads bearing on it and against it.
Wall
construction
(2) A foundation wall built of:
l a) masonry shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 4.4.

(b) plain concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section
4 ..5., or
( c) reinforced concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Section 4 ..5.
4.2.4.6. The lateral pressure against foundation walls and other types of re-
taining waJls shall be determined by a recognized method of analysis. To

ensure stability against overturning, sliding, excessive foundation pressure,
and water uplift, a retaining wall shall be designed to resist the pressure of
the retained material, including both dead and live load surcharges to which
it may be subjected. Unless a drainage system is provided which effectively
drains the backfiJl under all conditions, the wall shall be designed to resist a
hydrostatic pressure due to a head of water equal to the depth of water plus
the pressure caused by the submerged weight of the soil. Particular attention
shall be paid to the type of backfill, to restraints and to forces reSUlting from
freezir.g, to surcharge or other effects that may cause substantially larger
earth pressure.
Stresses on
retaining
walls
srBSECTION 4.2.5. PILES
General
4.2.5.1. Piles shall be designed according to the requirements of this Subsec-
tion together with those appropriate design requirements in Subsection 4.2.3.
Design Capacity of Piles

4.2_!i.2.(1) The maximum design capacity of the pile shall be determined on
the basis of:
(al a load test carried out in accordance with Article 4.2 ..5.3., or
(b) the provisions for end-bearing piles in Sentence 4.2 ..5.4.(1) and Article
4.2.5.5., or
(c) the provisions for friction piles in Sentence 4.2 ..5.4.(2) and Article
4.2.5.5.
(d) local experience as described in Article 4.2 ..5 ..5.
(2) Piles subjected to lateral loads shall be provided with lateral support
where the strength of soil is found to be inadequate.
- 31-Copyright NRC-CNRC
Pile
capacity
170
Pile load
test
4.2.5.3.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (3), the maximum design capacity
of a pile may be determined on the basis of a load test carried out in accordance with ASTM D1143-61T, "Load Settlement Relationship for Individual Piles Under Vertical Axial Load."
(2) Where a load test is carried out as provided for in Sentence (1) to twice
the proposed design capacity of the pile, the pile shall be deemed acceptable
provided its performance falls within all of the folio .ving limits:
(a) the rate of settlement under full test load is not more than 0.01 in.lbr
(0.25 mm/hr)
(b) the gross settlement under full test load is not more than 1.5 in.
(38 mm)
( c) the gross settlement under working load is not more than 0.75 in.
(19 mm)
(d) the net settlement after final rebound is not more than 0.75 in. (19 mm)
except that these values may be increased where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction that such values are appropriate.
Special
load tests
(3) Where, on the basis of a soils investigation, a test carried out in accordance with Sentence (1) for the types of buildings described in Clauses
4.2.1.1.(1)(a) and (b) would fail to provide sufficient data to determine
adequately the long-term distribution of stress in the soil, the maximum
design capacity of the pile shall be determined by a test or tests designed for
the appropriate soil and loading conditions conducted and interpreted by a
person competent in this field of work.
(4) The maximum design capacity of a pile determined as provided for in
Sentences (1), (2) and (3) may be assigned to other piles where these piles are:
( a) of the same type and design,
(b) placed in the same type and condition of soil,
(c) driven or placed using the same driving equipment or placing methods,
and
(d) driven to meet the same criteria as the tested pile.
The number and location of additional load tests shall be as required by the
End bearing
resistance
4.2.5.4.(1) The design capacity of an end-bearing pile may be taken as the

design bearing pressure of the soil or rock times the area of the end of the
pile. The area of the end of the pile shall be taken as the minimum crosssectional area of the shaft.
Frictional
resistance
(2) The design capacity of a friction pile may be determined on the basis
of frictional resistance between its surface and the ground with which it is in
permanent contact.
4.2.5.5. The design bearing pressure and the frictional resistance of the soil
shall be determined from:
(a) the properties of the soil by an appropriate investigation, or
(b) the records of successful local experience provided the piles are:
(i) of the same type and design,
(ii) placed in the same type and condition of soil,
(iii) driven or placed using the same type of driving equipment or
placing methods. and
(iv) driven to approximately the same final resistance, or

( c) the results of load tests on the same type and design of piles at the site.
-32-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
171
4.2.5.6. The total design capacity of a group of piles shall be determined by
an analysis satisfactary to the authori1y having jurisdiction but shall not:
(a) exceed the design capacity of a single pile times the number of piles
in the group, nor
(b) exceed the design bearing pressure of the supporting soil times the area
under the group plus the allowable unit shear stress times the bounding
length around the group times the thickness of the soil in which the
piles are embedded, nor
(c) cause settlements exceeding those described in Article 4.2.1.12.
Design
capacity of
pile groups
4.2.5.7. Where a pile or a group of piles is placed in subsiding fill or soil, no

frictional resistance from the subsiding strata shall be considered to contribute to support of the load, but the frictional drag shall be considered.
Piles in
subsiding
strata
Structural Details of Piles

4.2.5.8.(1) A pile shall be considered to act as a column and where necessary
shall be designed to withstand tensile stresses due to uplift or other causes.
Piles as
columns
(2) The portion of a pile permanently in contact with soil providing

adequate lateral support shall be considered to be in simple compression and
the full allowable stresses in Article 4.2.5.15. may be used. Reinforcement
need not be provided in a cast-in-place pile unless it is subjected to tensile
stresses.
(3) The portion of a pile in contact with air, water, peat, very soft clay, or
soils that do not provide adequate lateral support shall be considered to be
laterally unsupported and shall be designed in accordance with the appropriate requirements in Sections 4.3., 4.5., or 4.6. using the allowable stresses
in Article 4.2.5.15.
4.2.5.9. Where it is necessary to join together two parts of a pile the connection between the two parts shall be so constructed as to prevent their separation, to maintain their alignment, to support the load and, where necessary,
to be watertight.
connections
4.2.5.10.(1) When round timber piles are used they shall meet the requirements specified and be in accordance with CSA 056-1962, "Round Timber
Tunber
Pile
piles
Piles."
(2) For an end-bearing pile the stress shall be calculated by applying the
maximum load to the minimum cross-section.
(3) For a friction pile the maximum load may be applied to the crosssectional area at a point one-third of the length of the embedded portion of
the pile up from the tip.
4.2.5.11. Where a pile is of structural steel

(a) the minimum thickness of material shall be % in. (10 mm)
(b) the minimum over-all section dimension shall be 6 in. (152 mm)
(c) the projection of any flange or leg shall not be greater than 14 times
its thickness, and
(d) the ratio of the section modulus in the strongest direction to that in the
weakest direction shall not be greater than 8.
Structural
steel piles
4.2.5.12. Where precast concrete piles are used, they shall

(a) have adequate end protection when driven to rock or through soils
containing stones or boulders, and
(b) have sufficient strength to withstand all stresses resulting from handling, driving and loading.
Precast
concrete
piles
172
Precast
prestressed
concrete
piles
Composite
piles
Connections
Spacing
Design
capacity
Stresses in
pile materials
4.2.5.13. Where precast prestressed concrete piles are used

(a) the concrete shall have a minimum compressive cylinder strength of
5000 psi (34,475 kN/m~) at the time of driving.
(b) the unit prestress after losses shall be chosen to ensure safe and crack
free performance under all conditions of handling, driving and loading, and
(c) the ends of prestressing wires or strands shall be cut flush with the ends
of the pile.
4.2.5.14. A composite pile shall fulfil the requirements for the appropriate
pile type as described in this Section and in addition the fonowing requirements:
(a) The connections between the parts shall be so constructed as to prevent
their separation, to maintain their alignment, to support the load and
to be watertight where concrete must be placed subsequent to driving.
(b) The centre-to-centre spacing of the piles shall be governed by the
largest of the spacings for the pile types composing the composite pile.
(c) The design capacity of a composite pile shall be that a)Jowed by the
weakest member of the combination. The connections shall be at least
as strong as the weakest member.
4.2.5.15. The aUowable compressive stresses in pile materials shaH not exceed
the values in Table 4.2.5.A.
Table 4.2.5.A.
Type of Pile
Material
Timber
Unsawn
(a) Douglas fir or other woods
of comparable strength(l'))
(b) Jack pine, lodgepole pine, or
other woods of comparable
strength (5)
( c) Red pine or other woods of
comparable strength(ri)
Maximum allowable
stress
in compression (1)
1200 psi parallel to
grain
1000 psi parallel to
grain
7SO psi parallel to
grain
( a)
(b)
( c)
(a)
(b)
(c)
Sections
Pipe or tubing(2)
} 0.3 times yield steess
Reinforcing
Precast
Precast prestressed (3)
0.2 times
Cast in-situ in steel pipe left
compressIve
in place
strength
(d) Cast in-situ against the
soii(4)
Steel
Concrete
Column 1
Column 2
s~ified
Column 3
Notes to Table 4.2.S.A.

(1) The pile capadties arrived at by calculation from the stresses given in Table
(2)
(3)
(")
(6)
4.2.6.A may be exceeded where hillher values can be substantiated on the basis of
reliable test data and demonstrated to the satisfaction of the authority ItIJ11inf1
jurisdiction.
Metal thinner than 0.18 in. shall not be considered as contributing to the structural
strength of the pile section.
Exclusive of the prestress.
The outer 1 in. of concrete shall not lie considered to be a structurlll part of the
pile unless the concrete is placed in small batches within the protection of a forming tube and is compacted prior to attaining an initial set.
CSA Stand:.lfd 086-1970, Code of Recommended Practice for Engineering Design in
Timber 'provides information on.\oods of comparable strength as well as other properties.
173
Arrangement of Piles
4.2.5.16. Where a column supported by a pile foundation does not have
adequate lateral structural support, it shall be supported by:

(a) a single pile embedded in a soil that has adequate lateral support. or
(b) a group of at least three piles.
".2.5.17.(1) Where a strip footing or a wall that does not have adequate
lateral structural support is supported by a pile foundation, the foundation
shall be either:
(a) one row of piles embedded in a soil that has adequate lateral support,
or
(b) at least two rows of piles.
Piles
supporting
columns
Piles
supporting
strip footings
or walls
(2) Where a wall that does have adequate lateral support is supported by a
pile foundation. the foundation may be a single row of piles.
4.2.5.18. 'Where piles are end-bearing the distance centre-to-centre of two piles
'5hall not be less than 1 ft (305 mm) plus the average butt diameter or diagonal
of the two piles.
Spacing of
piles
1.2.5.19.(1) Except as provided for in Sentence (2), where piles are not end
bearing, the distance centre-to-centre of two piles shall not be less than 2Yz
times the average butt diameter or diagonal of the two piles (see Clause
4.2.5.14.(b) ).
(2) Where piles are of unencased cast-in-place concrete and are placed
using a driven forming tube, the distance centre-to-centre of two piles shall
not be less than 2Yz times the average of the greatest shaft diameters of the
piles.
4.2.5.20. A pile shall be placed in such a manner as to minimize impairment

of the strength of the pile and the properties of the soil in which it is placed.
4.2.5.21.(1) Where a pile is driven into position in the ground, a record shall
be kept for each pile of hammer weight and drop, or energy per blow, type
Pile driving
records
of head and packing, and number of blows per foot or inch as appropriate
during the driving process. These records shall be used to compare the behaviour of one pile with another, and in particular with a pile that has been
test-loaded.
(2) The ability of a driven pile to develop its design capacity may be
checked on the basis of its driving resistance where:
(a) the pile design capacity is less than 60 tons (534 kN), and
(b) it is impractical to determine the capacity as provided for in Articles
4.2.5.3. and 4.2.5.4., and
(c) the penetration per blow after a period of at least 24 he after driving
does not exceed that immediately after driving.
(3) Where a pile is known to be damaged or the driving records for any
pile indicates that the pile has been damaged, the load-carrying capacity shall
be a~sessed by the person referred to under Sentence 4.2.1.16.(3).
Damaged
piles
4.2.5.22.(1) Where a pile is driven into place and the tip or bead of the pile
Protection
of piles
during
driving
is likely to be damaged during driving, the tip or head shall be protected.

(2) Where the head of a pile is damaged during driving, the pile shall be
cut back to sound material.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-35-
174
(3) For prestressed concrete piles the driving cap or helmet shall be suffi.dently large and shallow so as not to bind the pile head if it twists during
driving, and thick cushion blocks of soft compressible wood or other
approved material shall be used to protect the pile heads from direct impact
in driving.
Movement
of adjacent
piles during
driving
4.2.5.23.(1) Where a group of piles is to be placed in silt or clay, measures

shall be taken to indicate any movement of each pile during the installation
of adjacent piles.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), piles shall not be redriven. Notification of the condition shall be given to the authority having jurisdiction who
may require that the condition of the foundation be assessed by a special
investigation.
(3) Where other than cast-in-place piles are used they shall be redriven
providing the pile movement is upward and without lateral displacement.
Jetting
or preexcavation
4.2.5.24. When jetting, predrilling or other pre-excavation methods have been

used during pile installation, the pile tip shall be driven below the depth of
pre-excavation to the required
(a) resistance, or
(b) penetration, or
(c) resistance and penetration.
Tolerance of
alignment
4.2.5.25.(1) A pile shall be placed

(a) not more than 2 per cent of its length out of plumb for vertical piles,
and
(b) not more than 3 in. (76 mm) off centre at the top.
Misaligned
piles
(2) Where piles deviate from required axial alignment or plan location by
more than permitted in Sentence (1), the condition of the foundation shall be
assessed by a special investigation and, where required, correction made by
the installation of additional piles, by strengthening the piles, by reduction in
capacity, by lateral bracing or other means acceptable to the authority having
jurisdiction.
Cast-in-placc
concrete
4.2.5.26. Where a concrete pile is cast-in-place measures shall be taken

(a) to ensure a pile of full cross-section throughout its length,
(b) to exclude soil from the concrete,
(c) to control the water and the strength of the concrete,
(d) to ensure that the fresh concrete in one pile is not disturbed by the
construction of adjacent piles, and
(e) to ensure that the concrete at the base of the pile is in contact with
undisturbed soil and to ensure that the concrete along the shaft is in
contact with the soil where such contact is assumed in the design.
SUBSECTION 4.2.6. PIERS AND CAISSONS
4.2.6.1. Piers and caissons shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of this Subsection and those appropriate design considerations described in Subsection 4.2.3.
4.2.6.2. The provisions of Articles 4.2.1.16., 4.2.2.9., 4.2.5.2. to 4.2.5.7. inclusive, 4.2.5.14. and 4.2.5.18. relating to pile foundations shall also govern
the design, installation, inspection and testing of pier and caisson foundations.
-36-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
175
4.2.6.3. Mter the excavation for a pier or caisson has been completed, the
ground at the bottom of the excavation shall be inspected immediately and
the excavation shall be filled with concrete or other material forthwith. In no
case shall an excavation be left open overnight.
Inspection
of piers or
caissons
4.2.6.4. Where a pier or caisson is of concrete the appropriate requirements

of Articles 4.2.2.2. to 4.2.2.4. inclusive shall apply, except that
(a) the maximum allowable compressive stress in the concrete shall be
0.25 times the specified compressive strength, and
(b) the outer lY.1 in. (38 mm) of concrete shall not be considered to be a
structural part of the pier or caisson unless the concrete is placed in
small batches within the protection of a forming tube and is compacted
prior to attaining an initial set.
Piers or
caissons of
concrete
4.2.6.5. Where a pier or caisson is of concrete and may be subject to tensile

stresses caused by uplift or other causes, it shall be reinforced to withstand
such stresses.
Tensile
stresses
4.2.6.6. Where a pier or caisson is of unreinforced concrete and has sloped

sides or a belled-out bottom, the slope of the sides shall not be greater than
1 in 2 from the vertical.
Maximum
slope of bell
4.2.6.7. Outer shells of steel pipe or steel tubing thinner than 0.18 in. (4.6 mm)
shall not be considered as contributing to the structural strength of a pier or
caisson.
SUBSECTION 4.2.7. SPECIAL FOUNDATIONS

4.2.7.1. New or special systems of design of foundation units not covered by
this Section may be used where such systems are based on analytical and
engineering principles, and where reliable test data demonstrate to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction the safety of the foundation for
the purpose intended.
SUBSECTION 4.2.8. EXCAVATING, PLACING AND FILLING
Excavating
4.2.8.1. Where during excavations or placing of the foundation any condition
described in Article 4.2.1.17. is encountered, the foulldat ion design shall be
reassessed to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction.
Altered
conditions
4.2.8.2.(1) Every excavation shall be undertaken in such a manner as to

prevent movement of adjacent property, prevent damage to existing structures, utilities, roads and sidewalks, and prevent personal injury in accordance
with the appropriate requirements of Part 8 of this Bylaw.
Protection
of adjacent
property
(2) The authority having jurisdiction may require

(a) that the excavation procedure and the design of the banks or shoring
of the walls of the excavation be approved before excavation is started;
(b) the submission of detailed calculations, drawings and specifications and
of evidence defining the type and condition of the soil and rock at and
adjacent to the site;
(c) that the design of shoring be undertaken by a person competent in this
field of work; and
(d) that the installation of shoring be carried out under continuous inspection by a person competent in this field of work.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-37-
Excavation
procedure
176
Placing of Foundations
Sensitive
soils
4.2.8.3.(1) Where soil that loses strength when remoulded is intended to support a foundation, precautions shall be taken to ensure that the soil is not
disturbed.
(2) Where cohesive soils which exhibit excessive tendencies to swell and
shrink are encountered, precautions shall be taken to limit moisture content
changes in the supporting soil so that detrimental effects will not occur.
(3) Where such precautions are not successful, the requirements of Sentence 4.2.1.17.(4) shall apply.
Freezing of
supporting
soU
4.2.8.4.(1) A foundation shall not be placed in or above any soil that is

frozen and may subsequently thaw.
(2) Where a foundatioll is placed on frost-susceptible soil during freezing
weather, the soil shall be kept from freezing.
Bearing
surface
on rock
4.2.8.5. Where a foundation is to be placed on rock:

(a) the bearing surface of the rock shall not have a slope greater than 1 in
6, or the foundation shall be adequately keyed, and
(b) the bearing surface of the rock shall be cleaned of loose and decomposed material before the foundation is placed.
Backfilling
4.2.8.6.(1) Where an excavation is being backfilled, the backfill shall be placed

so as to
(a) provide lateral support to the soil adjacent to the excavation, and
(b) prevent detrimental settlement.
Slag as fill
(2) Where a slag is to be used as fill to support a foundation or a floor on

grade, it shall be of a type that is not subject to detrimental movement with
changes in moisture content and temperature.
Compaction
of fill
4.2.8.7. A fill consisting of natural inorganic soil, slag or other material demonstrated to be suitable may be used for the support of the foundation of a
building provided it is compacted in a manner satisfactory to the authority
Pre]oading
4.2.8.8. A fill of natural soil of highly compressible material other than a

refuse disposal area may be used for the support of the foundation of a
building provided it is preloaded for a sufficient length of time, and in a
manner satisfactory to the authority having jurisdiction.
Filling
-38-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
l
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
CANADA
PART 4 DESIGN
SECTION 4.3
WOOD CONSTRUCTION
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-39-
1970
-40-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
179
SECTION 4.3
WOOD CONSTRUCTION
Application
4.3.1.1.(1) This Section applies to:
(a) all buildings used for the following occupancies
(iii) Group F, Division I,High Hazard Industrial Occupancies
(b) all buildings exceeding 6000 sq ft (558 m2) in building area or exceeding 3 storeys in height used for the following occupancies
Occupancies
Scope
4.3.1.2. This Section applies to buildings and their structural members made
from wood with respect to structurally graded lumber, lumber not structurally
graded, glued-laminated timber, plywood, piling, pole construction and major
fastenings.
Definitions
Minimum Safety and Performance
4.3.1.4. Buildings and their structural members shall be designed to resist
effectively all effects of loads and influences that may be expected and shall
satisfy the requirements of Section 4.1 of this Bylaw.
SUBSECTION 4.3.2. DESIGN REQmREMENTS
4.3.2.1. Except as set forth in Article 4.1.1.4., buildings and their structural
members made of wood shall conform to CSA Standard 086-1970, "Code of
Recommended Practice for Engineering Design in Timber," as contained in
NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian Structural Design Manual, 1970.
SUBSECTION 4.3.3. CERTIFICATION
Sawn Lumber
4.3.3.1. Sawn lumber for use in conformity with the requirements of CSA
Standard 086-1970 "Code of Recommended Practice for Engineered Design
in Timber", shall be identified by the grade stamp of an association or
independent grading agency approved to grade lumber by an appropriate
organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
Glued-Laminated Timber
4.3.3.2. All fabricators of glued-laminated timber shall be certified by an
appropriate organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, in
conformity with the requirements of CSA Standard 0117-1965 "Qualification
Code for Manufacturers of Structural Glued-Laminated Timber".
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-41-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-42-
"T
t
I
I
I,
i
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
CANADA
1970
PART 4 DESIGN
SECTION 4.4
PLAIN AND REINFORCED

MASONRY
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-43-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-44-
SEcrION 4.4
PLAIN AND REINFORCED

MASONRY
AppUcation
(i) Group A, A.ssembly Occupancies
(iii) Group F, Division 1, High Hazard Il1dustrial Occupancies
(b) all buildings exceeding 6000 sq ft (SS8 m2) in building area or exceeding 3 storeys in height used for the following occupancies
(ii) Group D, Busine.ss and Personal Services Occupancies
(iii) Group B, Mercantile Occupancies
(iv) Group F, Divisions 2 and 3, Medium ami Low Hazard Industrial
Occupancies
(Z) For buildings not listed in Sentence (1), requirements for design will
'
Scope
from plain or reinforced masonry.
Definitions

effectively an effects of loads and influences that may be expected, and shall
SUBSECTION 4.4.2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.4.2.1. Bxcept as set forth in Article 4.1.1.4., buildings and their structural
members made of plain and reinforced masonry shall conform to the requirements for masonry design in NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian Structural
Design ManuaJ, 1970.
-46-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
CANADA
PART 4 DESIGN
SECTION 4.5
PLAIN, REINFORCED AND

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
1970
-48-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
187
SECI10N 4.5
PLAIN, REINFORCED AND

81JBSBCI'ION 4.5.1. GENBB&L

ApplieatiOD
f.5.L1.(I) This Section applies to:
(a) all buildings used for the following occupancie&
(ii) Group B, I1UIitutional Occupancies
(iii) Group F, Division 1, High Hazard Industrial Occupanciu
(b) all buildings exceeding 6000 sq ft (SS8 m2) in building area or exceedina 3 &toreys in heiaht used for the followina occupanciu
(i) Group C, Reside1ltiol Occupancies
(n) Group D, BusiMss and Personal Services Occupancia
(iii) Group B, Mercantile Occupancies
(iv) Group F, Divisions 2 and 3, Medium and Low Hazard Industrilll
Occupancies
(Z) For buildings not listed in Sentence (1), requirements for desip will
Seope
4.5.12. This Section applies to buildings and their structural members made
from plain, reinforced and prestressed concrete whether precast or cast in
place.
Definitions
MinbD1IIIl Safety and Perfol'lll8Dee
U.1A. Buildings and their structural members shall be desianed to resist
eftectively all effects of loads and influences that may be expected and shall
SUBSECI'ION 4.5.%. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.52.1. Except as set forth in Article 4.1.1.4. buildings and their structural
members made of plain and reinforced concrete shall conform to CSA
A23.3-1970. "Code for the Design of Plain or Reinforced Concrete Struc
tures," as contained in NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian Structural Desip
Manual,1970.
4.s2.z. Except as set forth in Article 4.1.1.4. buildings and their structural
members made of prestressed concrete shall conform to CSA A13S-1962,
"Prestressed Concrete," as contained in NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian
Structural Desian Manual, 1970.
-50-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
,.
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
CANADA
PART 4 DESIGN
SECTION 4.6
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
- 51- Copyright NRC-CNRC
1970
191
SECI10N 4.6
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SllBSECTION 4.6.1. GENERAL
Application
Occupancies.
Scope
from structural and light gauge steel.
Definitions
4.6.1.4. Buildings and their structural members shan be designed to resist
effectively all effects of loads and influences that may be expected and sha11
SllBSECTION 4.6.2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.6.2.1. Except as set forth in Article 4.1.1.4., ,buildings and their structural
members made of structural steel shall conform to CSA S16-1969, "Stee]
Structures for Buildings," as contained in NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian
Structural Design Manual, 1970.
members made of light gauge steel shall conform to CSA S136-1963, "Design
of Light Gauge Steel Structural Members." as contained in NBC Supplement
No.4, Canadian Structural Design Manual, 1970.
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
CANADA
1970
PART 4 DESIGN
SECTION 4.7
ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-56-
195
SECI10N 4.7
ALUMINUM CONSTRUCI10N
AppHeation
(il) Group B, Institutional Occupancies
(iii) Group F, Division 1, High HaZlJrd Indurial Occllpancies
(b) all bllildings exceeding 6000 sq ft (558 m2) in building area or exceeding 3 storeys in height used for the following occupancies
(ill) Group E, Mercantile Occupancies
Occllpancies
(2) For buildings not listed in Sentence (1), requirements for design will be
found in Part 9 of this Bylaw.
Seope
from structural and light gauge aluminum.
Deftnitions

effectively all effects of loads and inftuences that may be expected and shall
SUBSECTION 4.7.2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
members made of structural aluminum shall conform to CSA 8157-1969,
"8tructural U$C of Aluminum in Buildings," as contained in NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian Structural Design Manual, 1970.
members made of light gauge aluminum shall conform to CSA 8190-1968,
"Design of Light Gauge Aluminum Products," as contained in NBC Supplement No.4, Canadian Structural Design Manual, 1970.
-57-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-58-
~~--r
I
t
I,
NATIONAL
BUILDING
CODE
OF
CANADA
PART 4 DESIGN
SECTION 4.8
CLADDING
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-59-
1970
199
SECTION 4.8
CLADDING
SUBSECI'ION 4.8.1. GENERAL
Application
(ii) Group B, IllStitutional Occupallcies
Occupancies.
Scope
4.8.1.%.(1) This Section applies to the design of a building assembly with
respect to the control of groundwater, condensation, and the penetration of
wind and rain.
(2) The design and structural requirements of other Sections of this Part
and of other Parts of this Bylaw shall apply.
Definitions
Control of Condensation
4.8.1.4.(1) Where a building assembly is to be subjected to a temperature
differential and differential in water vapour pressure .and will be adversely
affected by condensation the assembly shall be designed to prevent condensation by providing a continuous vapour and air barrier in the assembly on the
high vapour pressure side of the material that has the major thermal resistance.
(2) Where a material or combination of materials that have a resistance
to water vapour flow equivalent to that of a vapour barrier are used on the
low vapour pressure side of the material that has the major thermal resistance
in a building assembly:
(a) a vapour barrier, for use in above-grade building construction, shall be
installed on the high vapour pressure side, and
(b) an air space ventilated to the outside or other method of equal effectiveness shall be provided for removing the water vapour that may pass
from the high vapour pressure side through the material with the major
thermal resistance.
(3) The requirements of Sentences (1) and (2) do not apply where proof is
provided to the authority having jurisdiction to show that the performance of
a building assembly is satisfactory with respect to the control of condensation.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-61-
Vapour and
air barriers
200
Joints
Air
infiltration
and
exfiltration
Control of Wind and Rain Penetration

4.8.1.5.(1) A junction of components of an exterior surface and a junction of
different exterior surfaces of a building shall be constructed to minimize the
entrance of rain water into the building assembly.
(2) Components of a building assembly shall be so constructed as to limit
the amount of air infiltration and exfiItration at junctions of components.
(3) An opening in an exterior wall or roof shall be so constructed as to
prevent the entrance of rain or snow into the building.
Roofing
(4) Roofing shall be installed so as to

(a) shed or drain water effectively,
(b) reduce the likelihood, when the roofing is comprised of overlapping
units, of water backing up under the units due to ice damming or other
cause,
( c) be resistant to damage due to wind.
Parapets
(5) Where the top of a wall is exposed to the weather

( a) it shall be capped and
(b) a through-wall flashing shall be installed immediately under the cap of
the wall, and at such other points in the wall as are necessary to prevent
rain water penetration into the building or adjacent building assemblies.
Exterior
cladding
(6) Exterior wall cladding shall be so installed that it sheds water to prevent its entry into other components of the building assembly. Where there is
a likelihood of some penetration, drainage shall be provided to take water
back to the outside.
Through-wall
flashing
Control of Groundwater
4.8.1.6.(1) Where moisture from the ground can move upward into a wall
and cause deterioration of the materials in the wall assembly, a through-wall
flashing shall be installed in the wall below the materials likely to be so
affected.
(2) The portion of an exterior basement or cellar wall below ground level
or any floor slab in contact with the ground shall be dampproofed or waterproofed as appropriate in accordance with the requirements in Part 9 of this
Bylaw where such wall or floor is not impervious to water.
SUBSECTION 4.8.2. MATERIALS
Material
specifications
4.8.2.1. A material used as cladding, vapour barrier, flashing, thermal insulation or fastening device shall comply with the appropriate material requirements as set forth in Part 9 of this Bylaw.
Materials
resistant to
deterioration
Fastening
devices
4.8.2.2. A material exposed to corrosive conditions shall be corrosion resistant

or shall be resistant to deterioration under those conditions.
4.8.2.3. Fastening devices shall be made of a material which is compatible
with the materials to be so joined and shall be resistant to the type of corrosion likely to be present.
-62-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
'. 201
SUBSBCTtON 4.8.3. PRACTICES
4.8.3J.. Where a ~aterial is used as cladding, vapour barrier, thermal insulation, sheathing paper, flashing or fastening device, the practices to be followed
in installing it shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth in the
appropriate sections of Parts 3, 4 and 9 of this Bylaw.
InitaUation
,radices
4.8.3.2.(1) Cladding shall be securely fastened to backing that is
(a). a structural clement of a building, or

(b) a material added to the structure for the purpose of supporting such
cladding.
(2) Backing for cladding as provided for in Sentence (1) shall be so located,
secured and of a kind suitable for the type of fasteners to be used to attach
the cladding.
4.8.3.3. Cladding shall be designed and attached so as to accommodate stresses

and deformations caused by wind and earthquake forces, and to dimensional
changes due to temperature and moisture.
Attacllment
to
accomDlOdate
dCformatiol1$
I
,I
I
PART B
I
j
DESIGN CODES
Code of Recommended Practice for Engineering Design in Timber (CSA
086-1970)
Plain and Reinforced Masonry
Code for the Design of Plain and Reinforced Concrete Structures (CSA
A23.3-1970)
Prestressed Concrete (CSA A135-1962)
Steel Structures for Building (CSA Sl6-1969)
Design of Light Gauge Steel Structural lVlembers (CSA S136-1963)
The Structural Use of Aluminum in Buildings (CSA S157-1969)
Design of Light Gauge Aluminum Products (CSA S19(}-1968)
-65-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-66-
""
(SA STANDARD 086-1970
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRACTICE

FOR
ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
PUBLISHED, DECEMBER, 1970

BY THE
CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION
(INCORPORATED 1919)
178 REXDALE BOULEVARD
REXDALE 603. ONTARIO. CANADA
COPYRIGHT REGISTERED, CANADA. 1959
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
CONTENTS
Page
Members of the CSA Committee on Engineering Design in Timber. . .
Preface.... . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. ...... . . .. .. . . .. ... ..
STANDARD
1. Scope ........................... , . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. . . . ..
1.1 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1 . 2 Reference Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11
11
11
2. Definitions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
2. 1 Technical Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Lumber Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
14
3. General Design Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

3.1 General... . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.1.1 Structural Adequacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.1.2 New or Special Systems of Design or Construction. . . ..
3.1.3 Conditions of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.1. 4 Service Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.1.5 Workmanship....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3. 1.6 Dimensions...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.1. 7 Contact With Masonry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.1. 7.1 Untreated Wood.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.1. 7.2 Pressure Treated Wood ................... "
3 . 1.8 Stress Reversals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3 . 1. 9 Net Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3. 2 Grouping of Species .................................... "
3.3 Allowable Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.3. 1 GeneraL.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.3.2 Modification Factors. .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.3.2. 1 Service Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.3.2.2 Duration of Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.3.2.3 Fire-Retardant Treatment ..... " . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.3.2.4 Preservative Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3. 3.2. 5 Length of Bearing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.4 Design of Structural Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.4.1 Bending Members..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ..
3.4.1.1 GeneraL.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3 .4. 1. 2 Deflection Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.4.1. 3 Shear In Rectangular Beams..... .. . . . . . . . . ..
3.4. 1. 4 Notched Rectangular Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.4.1.5 Round and Tapered Beams..................
3.4.2 Compression Members.... . . . .. .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. ...
3.4.2.1 General... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.4.2.2 Simple Columns............................
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
19
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
22
22
22
22
eSA STANDARD 086
3.4.2. 3 Spaced Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.3 Tension :Members.. . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..................
3.4.4 1\1 embers Subjected to Combined Axial Load and
Bending l\loment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.4.5 1\lembers Subjected to Load at Angle to Grain. . . . . . . ..
27
27
4. Sawn Lumber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.1 Scope..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .............................
4.2 :Materials........ . . . . . . .. ......... .....................
4.2.1 GeneraL ........................................ "
4.2.2 Identification of Lumber.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .........
4.2.3 Regraded Lumber ...... , ..........................
4.2.4 Sizes..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.3 Allowable Unit Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.3.1 Structurally Graded Lumber.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ....
4. 3 . 2 Ti m ber Not Structurally Graded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4. 3. 3 Service Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.3.4 Lumber Graded by Non-Destructive Test. . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.3.5 Additional Species and Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.4 Design of Structural Units. . . . . . . . .. ......................
4.4.1 Bending lVlembers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.4.1.1 Continuity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..... ...
4.4.1. 2 Lateral Support..... ... ...................
4.4.1.3 Decking....... .. .......... ..............
4.4.2 Slenderness Ratio for Stud vValls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
32
33
5. Glued-Laminated Timber. . . . . . . .. ...........................

5.1 Scope..... . . . . . . . . .. .............. ....................
5.2 General Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.1 Reference Standards. . . . . . . . . . . .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.3 Allowable Unit Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.3.1 GeneraL ........................................ "
5.3.2 Modification for Curvature Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.3.3 Allowable Unit Stresses in Bending for Beams ....... "
5.3.3.1 Beams Without Lateral Support.............
5.3.3.2 Beams vVith Lateral Support................
S. 3.3.3 Slenderness Factor of a Beam .............. "
5.3.3.4 l!nsupported Length ........................
5.3.3.5 Allowable Unit Stresses for Slender Beams ....
5.4 Design of Structural Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.4.1 Curved lVlembers ............... , ....... , ......... "
5.4.2 Pitched Cambered Beams.. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . ..
5.4.3 Vertically Laminated Beams....... ..................
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
44
44
44
46
48
6. Plywood........................... ........................
49
6. 1 Scope........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
49
23
27
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRAGI'ICE FOR ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
6.2 General Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

6.2. 1 Reference Standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2.2 Adhesives for Bonding Plywood Structural Assemblies..
6.2.2. 1 Dry Service Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2.2.2 Wet Service Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
49
49
49
49
49
6.3 Allowable Unit Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......

6.3.1 General.......... .. ..............................
6.3.2 Radial Tension.. .. . . .. . . . . . .. .....................
6. 3. 3 Radial Com pression. .. ............................
6.3.4 Stress Concentrations. . . .. .........................
49
49
49
49
49
6.4 Design of Plywood Structural Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

6.4.1 General... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4. 1. 1 Effective Portions of Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.1. 2 Flange-vVeb Shear...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.2 Deflection............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.2.1 General... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..
6.4.2.2 Plywood Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.2.3 Modulus of Elasticity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.3 Plywood Web Beams ..............................
6.4.3.1 General... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.3.2 Lateral Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.3.3 Stiffeners...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.3.4 Web Stabilizers. . .. .......................
6.4.4 Flat Stressed Skin Panels........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.4.1 General ............................... , . ..
6.4.4.2 Flange Width. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.4.3 Compression Stress Modification.. . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.5 End Joints. . . .. .. . . . . .... . . . .. ...................
6.4.5.1 Plywood End Joints in Shear.. ..............
6.4.5.2 Plywood End Joints in Tension.. . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4.5.3 Plywood End Joints in Compression. . . . . . . ..
6.4.5.4 Scarf-Jointed Sawn Lumber.................
6.4.5.5 Butt-Jointed Sawn Lumber...... ............
50
50
SO
50
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
53
53
53
53
54
54
54
54
S4
S5
55
7. Timber Piling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
56
7. 1 Scope..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
56

7 . 2. 1 Reference Standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
7.2.2 Preservative Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
7.3 Design..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
7.3.1 Buildings..........................................
7.3.2 Bridges, Wharves and Similar Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
56
56
56
56
56
56
8. Pole Construction ......... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
57
8.1 Scope..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.2 General Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .......
8.2 . 1 Reference Standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.2.2 Preservative Treatment ........................... "
57
57
57
57
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-71-
GSA STANDARD 086
8.3 Design..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.3.1 GeneraL..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.3.2 Column Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.3.3 Embedded Portion. . ... . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.4 Allowable Unit Stresses for Poles... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.4.1 Round Poles ................. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..
8.4.2 Sawn Poles .................... , . . .... . . .. .... . .. ..
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
9. Timber Fastenings. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9. 1 Scope..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2.1 Materials..........................................
9.2. 1. 1 Split Ring Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2 . 1. 2 Shear Plate Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2. 1 . 3 Bolts and Lag Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2. 1.4 Truss Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2.2.1 GeneraL..................................
9.2.2.2 Tightening and Initial Maintenance. . . . . . . . ..
9.2.2.3 Washers..... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2.2.4 Maintenance of Edge Distance and End
Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2.2.5 Fabrication................................
9.2.2.6 Bolt Holes........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. 2.2. 7 Lag Screw Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2. 2 . 8 Connector Grooves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2.3 EccentricJoints ....................................
9.2.4 Group of Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2.4.'1 GeneraL .............. " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2.4.2 Row of Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2.4.3 Allowable Load............................
9.2.4.4 Cross-Sectional Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.3 Design of Timber Connector Joints ....................... "
9. 3. 1 General Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.3. 1. 1 Connector Unit .......................... "
9.3.1 .2 Concentric Grooves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.3.1.3 Distance Factors. . . . . . . .. .................
9.3.1.4 Moisture Content Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.3.1.5 Lumber Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.3.1.6 Lag Screw Connector Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.3.1.7 Net Section........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.3.2 Allowable Loads ..................... , . . . . .. .. . . . ..
9.4 Design of Bolted Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.4.1 GeneraL .......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
9.4.2 Condition of Timber ................................
9.4.3 Service Conditions........ . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. .. ... ..
9.4.4 Side Members ... , ., ., ..................... , . . .....
9.4.4.1 Materials .............. , ............... , .,.
9.4.4.2 Dimensions...... . .... . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
59
59
59
59
-72.-Copyright NRC-CNRC
60
60
60
60
60
61
62
62
62
62
62
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
67
74
74
74
74
75
75
75
9.4.5 Single and Multiple Shear...........................

9.4.5.1 Single Shear...............................
9.4.5.2 Multiple Shear.............................
9.4.6 Combined Shear and Axial Load.. . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .....
9.4.7 Placement of Bolts iq.Joints.... . . . . .. . . .. .. .. . . . . ...
9.4.7.1 Net Section........ ........................
9.4.7.2 Spacing of Bolts in a Row...................
9.4. 7 . 3 Spacing Between Rows of Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.4.7.4 End Distance..............................
9.4.7.5 Edge Distance....... . .. .. .. . ... .. .. .......
9.4.8 Allowable Loads. .... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5 Design of Lag Screw Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.1 Lag Screw Unit .......................... , .... .. ...
9.5.2 Condition of Timber.. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.3 Service Conditions ................................ "
9.5.4 Side Members ............. , . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . .......
9.5.4.1 Materials........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.4.2 Dimensions...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.5 Penetration of Threads ............................ "
9.5.6 Placement of Lag Screws in Joints. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.7 Allowable Loads in Lateral Resistance.. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.7.1 SideGrain .................................
9 . 5 . 7 . 2 End Grain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.8 Allowable Loads in Withdrawal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.8.1 Root Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.8.2 Side Grain........ ...... ...................
9.5.8.3 End Grain.............. ...................
9.6 Design of Glulam Rivet Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9. 6. 1 GeneraL.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.6.2 Calculation of Allowable Load.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.6.3 Limitations..................... ...................
9. 6.4 Allowable Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.6.5 Spacing of Glulam Rivets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.7 Design of Truss Plate Joints..... . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. ...
9.7.1 Joint Design Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
75
75
75
75
76
76
76
76
76
76
77
79
79
80
80
80
80
80
80
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
82
82
82
83
83
84
90
90
Appendix A-Weight of Structural Timbers and Shrinkage

Characteristics of Canadian Woods. ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 91
Appendix B-Camber Allowances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 92
Appendix C-Properties of Sections for Douglas Fir Plywood.. ... .. .. 94
Appendix D-Minimum Design Values of Effective Length Factor K
for Compression Members ................................... "
96
Appendix E-Allowable Unit Stresses for Lumber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 97
Appendix F-Solution of Formula (27).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 99
Appendix G-Nominal and Minimum Dressed Sizes of Dimension
Lumber and Timbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 101
Appendix H-Commercial Species Designations for Lumber .......... 102
CSA STANDARD
086
COMMITTEE ON ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER

R. F. DEGRACE (Chairman) . ........ Canadian Wood Council, Ottawa.
A. P. JESSOME (Secretary) .. ......... Department of Fisheries & Forestry, Ottawa
H. W. ARGENT ..................... Western Archrib Structures Ltd., South Edmonton
T. A. ELDRIDGE .................... Lamco Structures Ltd., Montreal
L. E. GOWER ...................... Gower, Yeung & Associates Ltd., New Westminster
R. A. HEWETT ..................... Canadian Wood Council, Ottawa
K. W. HICKS ...................... Domtar Chemicals Limited, Montreal
D. E. KENNEDy .................... Department of Fisheries & Forestry, Ottawa
J. C. KERR (Alternate) . ............. Central Mortgage and Housing Corporation, Ottawa
C. E. LOCKE ....................... Central Mortgage and Housing Corporation, Ottawa
J. LONGWORTH ..................... University of Alberta, Edmonton
A. J. M CGRA W.................... Council of Forest Industries of British Columbia
Vancouver
B. MADSEN ........................ Glulam Products Limited, New Westminster
S. J. MAZUR ...................... Nova Scotia Technical College, Halifax
C. F. MORRISON ................... Morrison, Hershfield, Millman & Huggins Ltd.,
Toronto
J. M. ROBERTSON (Associate) . ....... National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa
G. D. ROGERS ..................... MacMillan Bloedel Limited, Vancouver
W. R. SCHRIEVER .................. National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa
W. J. SMITH ....................... Forest Products Laboratory, Vancouver
S. STAMER ......................... Department of Public Works, Ottawa
F. A. TAYELOR ... '" .. , ............ Council of Forest Industries of British Columbia,
Vancouver
J. WYNAND ........................ TPL Industries Limited, New Westminster
In addition to the Members of the Committee the following Subcommittee members made
valuable contribution to the development of this Standard:
E. N. APLIN ....................... Department of Fisheries & Forestry, Ottawa

E. E. BUSWELL .... , ............... Department of Industry, Trade and Commerce,
Ottawa
]. G. BURCHILL .................... Geo. Burchill & Sons (Plywood) Ltd., South Nelson
R. BARRY ......................... Quebec Lumber Manufacturers' Association, Quebec
C. C. BUSCH ....................... Cariboo Lumber Manufacturers' Association,
Williams Lake, British Columbia
A. F. ByERS ....................... Maritime Lumber Bureau, Amherst
A. B. DOVE ....................... The Steel Company of Canada Limited, Hamilton
R. A. DOWNING .................... Glulam Products Limited, New Westminster
J. E. GOODMAN .................... J. E. Goodman Sales Limited, Toronto
R. J. GALLAGHER .................. Northern Interior Lumbermen's Association, Prince
George, British Columbia
R. F. HOOLEY ..................... The University of British Columbia, Vancouver
M. HUEPEDEN ..................... Department of National Defence, Ottawa
]. C. KING ........................ Canadian National Railways, Montreal
G. LANTOS ....................... Canadian Wood Council, Ottawa
D. D. LOCKHART. . . .. .... . ....... Canadian Lumbermen's Association, Ottawa
A. C. MIDDLETON .................. Automated Building Components, Inc., Scarborough
A. D. MACDONALD ................. Interior Lumber Manufacturers Association,
Penticton, British Columbia
J. W. MARSHALL ................... Canadian Institute of Timber Construction, Toronto
W. ED. MUNRO .................. Manitoba Forest Products Association, Winnipeg
J. S. NISBET ....... , ............... Saskatchewan Timber Board, Prince Albert
M. PATERSON ..................... TPL Industries Ltd., New Westminster
S. A. ROBINSON.. . ............... Vancouver
A. A. RYTz ........................ Alberta Forest Products Association, Edmonton
J. W. SPOONER ..................... Ontario Lumber Manufacturers Association, Toronto
V. WOOD .......................... Allied Building Supplies, Ottawa
W. A. WARD ...................... Department of Public Works, Ottawa
*deceased
PREFACE
This new edition of CSA Standard 086, Code of Recommended Practice
for Engineering Design in Timber, supersedes the first edition published
in 1959.
CSA Standard 086 has been prepared to provide an engineering basis
for design in wood products and some fastenings. I t assumes the use of
standard engineering design procedures and formulas, but includes engineering
assumptions and formulas unique to these materials. It also includes data on
applicable design methods, allowable unit stresses for materials, and allowable
loads on fastenings. Some useful data, including the methods used in assigning
allowable unit stresses for lumber, are included in the Appendices.
When applied to buildings, CSA Standard 086 is intended to be used in
conjunction with the National Building Code of Canada, and is incorporated
by reference in the 1970 edition of that Code. In the preparation of CSA
Standard 086, liaison has been maintained with the Secretariat and appropriate
Committees of the National Building Code of Canada, in order to assure that
it is consistent throughout.
The first edition, published in 1959, brought together design information
previously dispersed in technical periodicals and individual standards. In
this second edition, revisions have been made to incorporate the results of
the most recent research. Species groupings have been changed to conform to
commercial practice, revised working stresses have been given, the scope of
the plywood section has been broadened, and new material on fastenings is
incorpora ted.
This Standard was prepared by a Committee of professional engineers,
with balanced representation from producers of wood products, consulting
engineers, universities, government, and others. The Committee received
valuable advice and counsel from five Subcommittees, covering sawn lumber,
glued-laminated timber, plywood, poles and piles, and fastenings. Preparation
of this edition took place over a three-year period, with the aid of many
comments from interested segments of the general public.
This Standard sets out minimum requirements for the design of timber
buildings and other structures of usual proportions. It should not be con
sidered a textbook, and, of course, should be used only by competent engineers.
When members or structures are of such specialized nature or complex treatment that the provisions of this Standard are not directly applicable, such
competent engineers would be expected to provide minimum requirements
equivalent to those set out in this Standard.
Cooperation of the Forest Products Laboratories of Canada, of the De
partment of Fisheries and Forestry, Ottawa, the U.S. Forest Products Laboratory, the Division of Building Research of National Research Council, and
of the research facilities of the University of British Columbia and of Nova
Scotia Technical College, as well as the cooperation of many other research
and academic organizations in Canada and the United States, is gratefully
acknowledged.
This Standard was prepared by the CSA Committee on Engineering
Design in Timber under the jurisdiction of the Sectional Committee on
Structures, and was formally approved by these Committees.
REXDALE, DECEMBER, 1910
NOTE: In order to keep abreast of progress in the industries concerned, CSA
Publications are subject to periodic review. Suggestions for improvement
will be welcomed at all times. They will be recorded and in due course
brought to the attention of the appropriate committee for consideration.
Also, requests for interpretation will be accepted by the Committee. They
should be worded in such a manner as to permit a simple "yes" or "no"
answer based on the literal text of the requirement concerned.
All enquiries regarding this Standard should be addressed to Canadian.
Standards Association, 178 Rexdale Boulevard, Rexdale 603, Ontario.
REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
A LIST OF PUBLICATIONS
REFERRED TO IN THIS STANDARD
IS INCLUDED IN CLAUSE 1.2.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-75-
-76-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
11
086
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
FOR
ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
1. SCOPE
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 This Standard provides design criteria for structurally graded
lumber, lumber not structurally graded, glued-laminated timber, plywood,
piling, pole construction, and major fastenings.
1.1.2 This Standard is intended for use in the design or appraisal of

structures or structural elements made from wood or wood products.
1.2 Reference Publications. This Standard refers to the following
publications, and where such reference is made it shall be to that edition
of such publication as listed below:
eSA Standards
C15(E)-1948, Douglas Fir Poles;
G40. 8-1960, Structural Steels with Improved Resistance to Brittle Fracture;
G40.12-1964, General Purpose Structural Steel;
015.1-1950, Eastern White Cedar Poles;
015.2-1969, The Physical Properties of Western Red Cedar Poles and
Reinforcing Stubs;
015.3-1960, The Physical Properties of Jack, Lodgepole, and Red Pine
Poles, and Reinforcing Stubs;
056-1962, Round Timber Piles;
080-1970, Wood Preservation;
0112.3-1960, Casein Glues for Wood;
0112.5-1960, Urea Resin Adhesives for Wood (Room- and High-Temperature Curing);
0112.7-1960, Phenol and Resorcinol Resin Adhesives for Wood (Roomand Intermediate-Temperature Curing);
0121-1961, Douglas Fir Plywood;
0122-1969, Structural Glued-Laminated Timber;
0141-1970, Softwood Lumber;
0177-1965, Qualification Code for Manufacturers of Structural GluedLaminated Timber;
S6-1966, Design of Highway Bridges.
ASTM * Standards
A47-68, Malleable Iron Castings;
A307-67, Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard
Fasteners;
A446-67, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheets of Structural Quality Coi1s,.
and Cut Lengths;
"'American Society for Testing and Materials.
12
eSA STANDARD 086
D245-70, Establishing Structural Grades and Related Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber;
DI761-68, Testing l\Jetal Fasteners in vVood.
General
Department of Forestry of Canada Publication 1104, Strength and
Related Properties of \\Tood Grown in Canada;
SAE Handbook, 1969;
National Building Code of Canada, 1970.
NLGA * Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 1970.
*National Lumber Grades
Authority.
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 Technical Terms. The following definitions apply in this Standard:
Adhesive means a substance capable of holding materials together by
surface attachment;
Butt-joint means a plain square joint between the ends of two pieces.
of wood or plywood;
Column
Solid column means a compression member consisting of a
single piece, or of pieces properly glued or fastened together to form a single
solid member;
Spaced column means a column consisting of two or more
individual members with their longitudinal axes parallel, separated at the
ends and intermediate points of their length by blocking, and joined at the
ends by connectors capable of developing the required shear resistance;
Density means weight per unit volume. In the case of wood, density
is usually expressed as pounds per cubic foot at a specified moisture content;
Depth means, in a bending member, the dimension of the member
parallel to the direction in which load is applied;
Edge distance means the distance from the edge of the member to the
centre of the nearest fastening;
End distance means the distance measured parallel to the axis of a
piece from the centre of a fastening to the square cut end of the member.
In the case of a connector, if the end of the member is not square cut, the
end distance shall be taken from any point on the centre half of the connector diameter drawn perpendicular to the centre line of the piece to the
nearest point on the end of the member measured parallel to the axis of a
piece (see Figure 5);
Fibre saturation point means the moisture content at which the cell
walls are saturated and the cell cavities are free of water-approximately
25-30 per cent moisture content;
Frame construction means structures erected with studs, joists and
rafters;
Glue means a substance capable of holding materials together by
surface attachment. Through general use the term is now synonymous with
the term "adhesive";
Glued-laminated timber (Glulam) means a structural timber
product obtained by gluing together a number of laminations having their
grain essentially parallel;
13
Grade means the designation of the quality of a piece of wood;

Joist means one of a series of horizontal members, with narrow face up,
to which flooring or roof shea thing is fastened;
Laminations means the elements of wood of appreciable width and
length which, when superimposed on each other and fastened together
with their grain essentially parallel, make up cross-sections of considerable
depth or width;
Load duration means the period of continuous application of a given
load or the aggregate of periods of intermittent applications of the same
load;
Load-sharing system means a construction composed of three or more
essentially parallel members spaced at 24-inch centres or less, so arranged or
connected that they mutually support the load;
Lumber
Sawn lumber means the product of a saw mill not further
manufactured than by sawing, resawing, passing lengthwise through a
standard planing mill, and cross-cutting to length;
Nominal size lumber means the size by which lumber is known
and sold on the market. Actual size may differ considerably from the size
by which it is designated, depending upon sawing and dtessing procedures;
Rough lumber means lumber as it comes from the saw;
Yard lumber means lumber of those sizes and patterns which is
intended for general building purposes. The grading of yard lumber is
based on the intended uses of the particular grade and is applied to each
piece with reference to its size and length when graded, without reference
to further manufacture;
Moisture content means the weight of water in wood expressed as a
percentage of its oven-dry weight;
Ply means a thin layer or sheet of wood (veneer) ;
Plywood means sheets or panels of wood made of three or more layers
of veneer joined with glue and laid with the grain of adjoining veneers at
right angles.
Pole construction means a form of construction in which the principal
vertical members are round or sawn wood poles embedded in the ground and
extending vertically above ground to provide both foundation and vertical
framing members for the structure;
Preserva tive
Preservative treatment means, unless otherwise noted, impregnation under pressure with a wood preservative;
Wood preservative means any suitable substance that is toxic
to fungi, insects, borers, and other living, wood-destroying organisms;
Rolling shear means shear causin! wood fibres at right angles to the
principal shearing forces to tend to roll;
Scarf means a sloping cut, plain, hooked, serrated, or fingered, made
a t the end of a piece of wood or plywood for the purpose of joining pieces
together longitudinally;
Scarf-joint means a longitudinal end joint made by joining two
scarfs with glue;
14
CSA STANDARD 086
Service condition
Dry service condition means a condition in which the average
equilibrium moisture content over a year is 15 per cent or less;
Wet service condition means all service conditions other than
dry;
Sheathing means either the first layer of exterior wall covering fastened
to the studs or the load-carrying surface fastened to the rafters or joists of
a roof;
Shrinkage means the decrease in the dimensions of wood owing to a
decrease of moisture content;
Slenderness factor means a factor used to modify allowable unit
stress in bending in the design of slender beams;
Slenderness ratio means the ratio of the effective length of a compres~
sion member to its least actual dimension;
Spacing of fasteners means the distance between fastenings measured
between centres;
Stiffener means a piece of wood of rectangular cross-section which is
glued or otherwise fastened to the webs between the inner surfaces of the
top and bottom flanges of a built-up beam;
Stressed skin means a form of construction in which the outer skin,
in addition to its normal function of providing a surface covering, acts
integrally with the frame members contributing to the strength of the
uni t as a whole;
Stress-graded lumber means lumber in which strength is the
controlling factor in its selection, and whose characteristics are so limited
that it may adequately fulfil a specific end use in a calculable manner;
Structurally graded lumber means lumber which has been stress
graded according t~ the provisions of specifications which have been established by methods prescribed in ASTM Standard D245, Establishing Structural Gradesand Related Allowable Properties For Visually Graded Lumber,
and to which allowable unit stresses for engineered design of single members
have been assigned in this Standard;
Stud means one of a series of slender wood structural members placed
vertically as supporting members in a wall, partition, or similar structural
unit;
Timber connector means a metal ring or plate that by being embedded in adjacent wood faces or in one wood face, acts in shear to transmit
loads from one timber to the other or from a timber to a bolt and thence
to a steel plate, respectively.
2.2 Lumber Terms*. The following definitions apply to lumber in this

Standard:
Grading rules for lumber are prepared and published by various regional grading authorities.
Beam means a timber with nominal width more than 2 inches greater
than nominal thickness, usually graded for use in bending with the load
applied to the narrow face (grading rules sometimes designate beams as
"beams and stringers");
Board means a piece of lumber that is less than 2 inches in nominal
thickness;
15
Dimension lumber means lumber from 2 to 4 inches inclusive in

nominal thickness;
Dressed size means the actual cross-sectional dimensions in inches

of lumber after planing. Such dimensions are less than nominal thickness
and width depending on grading rules and size of lumber;
Joist means a piece of dimension lumber 6 inches or more in nominal
width, intended to be loaded on its narrow face;
Light framing means dimension lumber 2 to 5 inches in nominal width;
Plank means a piece of dimension lumber 6 inches or more in nominal
width, intended to be loaded on its wide face;
Post means a timber with nominal width not more than 2 inches
greater than the nominal thickness, usually graded for use as a column
(grading rules sometimes designate posts as "posts and timbers");
Timber means a piece of lumber 5 inches or more in least nominal
dimension.
16
eSA STANDARD 086
3. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

3.1 General
3.1.1 Structural Adequacy
3.1.1.1 All wood structural members, assemblies, and fastenings
shall be of adequate size and quality to carryall the dead, live, and wind
loads, or other forces coming upon them during construction or use without
exceeding the allowable unit stresses specified in appropriate Clauses of
this Standard.
3.1.1.2 All members shall be so framed, anchored, tied, and
braced together as to provide the strength and rigidity necessary for the
purpose for which they are used.
3.1.2 New or Special Systems of Design or Construction. New or

special systems of design or construction of wood structures or structural
elements not already covered by this Standard may be used where such
systems are based on analytical and engineering principles, or reliable test
data, or both, which demonstrate to the satisfaction of the authority having
jurisdiction the safety of the resulting structure for the purpose intended.
3.1.3 Conditions of Use. Design using stress values and stress
modifications contained in this Standard shall be based on the assum ption
that:
(a) The design loads are realistic in size, kind, and duration;
(b) The wood product is normal for its species, kind, or grade;
(c) Consideration is given to service conditions;
(d) Temperature of the wood does not exceed 125F, except for occasional exposures to 150F;
(e) Design is competent, fabrication good, grading or inspection
reliable, and maintenance normal; and
(f) Wood products are used as graded or manufactured for a designated
end use and reselected for any other use.
3.1.4 Service Conditions. Plywood and glulam shall be either exterior
or interior type grade as required to meet the service conditions. Interior
grade may be used where the equilibrium moisture content in service will
average 15 per cent or less over any year. Exterior grade shall be used for
all other service conditions.
3.1.5 Workmanship. Workmanship in fabrication, preparation, and
installation of materials shall conform throughout to accepted good practice.
3.1.6 Dimensions. Actual dimensions .shall apply throughout this
Standard unless otherwise noted.
3.1.7 Contact with Masonry
3.1.7.1 Untreated Wood.
Untreated wood in permanent

structures shall not be in direct contact with masonry or concrete where
moisture transfer to wood is likely to be excessive. A minimum Y2-inch clear
ventilated air space around a member or other method which eliminates
transfer of moisture shall be considered adequate protection.
3.1.7.2 Pressure Treated Wood. Wood which has been pressure
treated in accordance with the requirements of CSA Standard 080, \Vood
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-82-
17
Preservation, may be in continuous contact with masonry or concrete

when moisture conditions which favour decay are present. All boring,
grooving, cutting, and other possible fabrication shall be completed before
treatment. All fabrication carried out after treatment shall be locally
treated in accordance with CSA Standard 080.
NOTE:
The fungi that cause decay in wood require air, moisture, warmth, and a food source
of unpoisoned wood. A ir does not occur in wood until the wood cells are partially empty
of water, therefore continuously submerged wood does not decay. Decay may occur at
any moisture content between 20 per cent and complete saturation. Decay occurs from
about 40F to 115F and is optimum at 75F to POF. Wood may be treated by pressure
with approved preservatives. Some species may contain natural constituents which resist
decay depending on the species.
3.1.8 Stress Reversals. In erection or use, when a member or fastening

is subject to a condition of stress reversal, calculations for both stress
conditions shall be made and the more conservative value for the member
or the fastening shall be used, taking into account the duration of the
applied loads.
3.1. 9 Net Section
3.1.9.1 The net section, obtained by deducting from the gross
section the projected area of all material removed by boring, grooving,
dapping, notching, or other means, shall be used in calculating the loadcarrying capacity of a member, and the effects of any eccentricity of loads
applied to the member at that section shall be taken into account.
3.1.9.2 In no case shall the material removed by dapping a 1d/or
notching exceed one-quarter of the gross section.
3.1.9.3 In the design of intermediate or long columns, the net
section as described in Clause 3.1.9.1 need not be used in calculating the
load-carrying capacity of the column unless the reduced section occurs at
or near a point of maximum bending moment due to buckling. The design
shall be checked, hmvever, for adequacy as a short column after deduction
for net section has been made.
NOTE :
Method of determining net section for fastenings in joints is given in Clause P.
3.2 Grouping of Species. In this Standard, species are classified according

to the groups given in Table 1.
1
1
:
18
eSA STANDARD 086
TABLE 1
SPECIES GROUPS
Group
Species
Douglas Fir, Western Larch
Pacific Coast Hemlock

Fir (Amabilis and Grand only)
Pacific Coast Yellow Cedar

Tamarack
Jack Pine
Eastern Hemlock
Balsam Fir
Pine (Lodgepole and Ponderosa only)
Spruce (all species)
Alpine Fir
Western Red Cedar

Red Pine
Western White Pine
Eastern White Pine
Poplar (Aspen, Large*tooth Aspen, and Balsam only)
NOTE: Names of species in Table 1 are standard commercial names. Additional information
01f, botanical names, commercial names and
species combinations are given in
Appendix H.
3.3 Allowable Values

3.3.1 General. The allowable unit stresses for various wood products
and all loads on fastenings shall not exceed the values specified in Tables of
the appropriate Clauses of this Standard, as modified by Clause 3.3.2 and
by such other modifications in appropriate Clauses as may apply.
3.3.2 Modification Factors

3.3.2.1 Service conditions. The modification of allowable unit
stresses, or loads on fastenings, due to service conditions are specified for
sawn lumber, glued laminated timber, plywood, piling, and fastenings in the
appropriate Clauses of this Standard.
3.3.2.2 Duration of Loading. The allowable unit stresses and
loads hereinafter given are based on normal duration of full design load.
For durations of full design load other than norma), allowable unit stresses
and allowable loads on fasteners shall be modified by multiplying the
values given for normal duration of full design load by the appropriate
factor from Table 2 (or Table 43 if applicable). When the total design load
is made up of loads acting for different durations, all possible combinations
of load and load duration shall be considered and the design based on the
most severe combination.
19
TABLE 2
MODIFICATION FACTORS FOR VARIOUS DURATIONS OF LOADING
Duration
of
Loadlna
Typical A.pplicationsf
Factor *
Continuoust
Tanks, bins, retaining 'lvalls, floors continuously

subjected to full design load,' support of dead
loads.
NormaU
},,fost floors, bridges, miscellaneous structures;

some retaining walls.
2-Month
Structures subjected to snow loads; some temporary structures.
7-Day
Some concrete formwork and falsework.
I-Day
Wind and earthquake loads; some concrete

formwork.
Instantaneous
Impact Loads.
... Factors listed are not cumulative. (See also Clause 3.3.2.2). Factors are not applicable to
modulus of elasticity. Modification factors for allowable loads on glulam rivets are given in
Table 43; factors given in Table 2 do not apply.
tContinuous application of full design load means that condition of loading under which a
structure is subjected to more or less continuous full design load as obtains in most storage
occupancies.
tNormal application of full design load means that condition of loading under which a structure
is subjected to the full design load only occasionally (as generally obtains in assembly, residential, business, and commercial occupancies, and under moving loads such as in bridges),
such that the cumulative period of full design load application does not exceed 10 years.
TypicaZ applications shown in Table 2 are not mandatory but are included for the guidance
of the designer.
3.3.2.3 Fire-Retardant Treatment. When wood is impregnated

with fire-retardant chemicals, strength and stiffness properties may be
modified in accordance with the results of appropriate tests acceptable
to the authority having jurisdiction. When no such data are available,
allowable unit stresses and allowable loads on fastenings otherwise permitted shall be reduced at least by the percentages given in Table 3.
TABLE 3
REDUCTION FACTORS FOR WOOD IMPREGNATED WITH
FIRE-RETARDANT CHEMICALS
(See Clause 3.3.2.3)
Per Cent
Reduction
Material or Fastenlq
Sawn lumber
Glued laminated lumber
Bolts
Lag screws
Truss plates installed in wood seasoned after treating
10
Plywood
Split ring and shear plate connectors
Truss plates installed in wood not seasoned after treating
20
NOTE:
The effect of fire-retardant treatment varies with the treatment, process, species, and the
wood product treated; a single factor cannot be established to cover all conditions.
20
eSA STANDARD 086
3.3.2.4 Preservative Treatment. Allowable unit stresses otherwise permitted for wood and wood products need not be reduced because
of preservative treatment carried out in accordance with CSA Standard
080, \Vood Preservation, except as provided in Clause 3.3.2.3.
3.3.2.5 Length of Bearing. vVhen lengths of bearing or diameters of washers are less than 6 inches, and no part of the bearing area is
closer to the end of the member than 3 inches, the allowable bearing stress
may be multiplied by the appropriate modification factor as set forth in
Table 4 provided such bearing areas do not occur in positions of high
flexural stress.
TABLE 4
MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR VARIOUS LENGTHS OF BEARING
Length of Bearing
(Inches)
Y2
..~Y2
6 or more
Modification
Factor
1. 7S
1.38
1. 2S
1.19
1.13
1. 10
1.00
3.4 Design of Structural Units

3.4.1 Bending Members
3.4.1.1 General. The unit stress in bending shall not exceed the
values listed in Tables of appropriate Clauses of this Standard. Unless
otherwise noted, stresses and deflections in beams shall be calculated from
recognized engineering formulae. The span shall be the distance from face
to face of supports plus one-half the required length of bearing at each end;
for continuous beams the span shall be the distance between centres of
supports over which the beam is continuous.
3.4.1.2 Deflection Limitations. Deflection of trusses, beams,
and similar structural units shall not exceed 1/360 of the span when used
with plaster and ceramic materials. Other deflection-span ratios may be
used provided the characteristics of complementary materials are not
exceeded, but they shall not exceed 1/180 of the span in any case.
NOTE:
Timber, in common with some other materials, is subject to increasing deflection under
continuous loading of long duration. Some of this deflection is non-recoverable when
the load is finally removed from the timber. The designer should take cognizance of this
fact when designing timber structures in which excessive deflection is likely to become
unsightly or create other problems such as with sliding doors, or ponding of retained
water. In the most serious situations (such as continuous application of full design
load to green timbers in wet locations), the non-recoverable deflection is likely to equal
the original elastic deflection when the load was first applied. For timber used dry under
normal loading and with a limiting deflection span ratio of 1/360, long term nonrecoverable deflection may be disregarded. For other situations, the non-recoverable
deflection will be relative, depending upon the ratio of dead load to live load and the
cumulative effect of live load application during the life of the structure.
3.4.1.3 Shear in Rectangular Beams

3.4.1.3.1 General. For members subjected to static
loads, the longitudinal shear stress obtained from Formulae (1) to (3) shall
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRACI'ICE FOR ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
21
not exceed the allowable stresses specified in the appropriate Clauses of

this Standard as modified by Clause 3.3.2.
3.4.1.3.2 Shear Calculation Conditions. The following

conditions shall be applied in the calculation of longitudinal shear:
(a) All loads imposed within a distance from the support equal to the
depth of the beam may be neglected; and
(b) For moving loads, the largest load shall be considered as acting at
a distance from the support equal to three times the depth of the
beam, or at the quarter point, whichever is closer to the support.
All other loads shall be considered in their normal position and
shall be treated in the usual manner.
3.4.1.3.3 Shear Formulae. Longitudinal shear in rectangular beams shall be calculated in accordance with Formula (1):
Fv =
where Fv
b
d
V
3V
(1)
unit shearing stress, psi;

breadth of beam, inches;
depth of beam, inches;
shearing force, pounds as calculated by the formulae
given in items (a) or (b) as follows;
(a) For concentrated loads on rectangular beams shearing force (V)

shall be calculated in accordance with Formula (2):
V
(a)'
91 [2 + (a)']
= lOP (I-x)
(2)
where 1
span, inches;
P
concentrated load, pounds;
distance from reaction to load, inches; or
x
(b) For uniformly distributed loads on rectangular beams shearing
force (V) shall be calculated in accordance with Formula (3):
V = W(1-
21)
(3)
where W = total uniform load, pounds.
3.4.1.4 Notched Rectangular Beams. The longitudinal shear

stress obtained from using Formulae (4) to (6) for rectangular beams at
the location of a notch shall not exceed the allowable stresses specified in
the appropriate Clauses of this Standard as modified by Clause 3.3.2:
(a) Notched at lower (tension) face at the support;
3Vd
Fv
2b(d 1)2
(4)
(b) Notched at upper (compression) face where e
3V
Fv = 2bd 1
> d;
(5)
22
eSA STANDARD 086
(c) Notched at upper (compression) face where e

Fv =
3V
< d;
2b [d-(~)eJ
where F v
V
b
d
d1
d2
e
NOTE :
(6)
unit longitudinal shearing stress, psi;

shearing force, pounds;
breadth of beam, inches;
depth of beam at notch, inches (d-d 2);
depth of notch, inches;
the length of the notch measured along the beam span
from the inner edge of the support to the farthest edge of
the notch, inches.
Notches or abrupt changes of section that will produce tension perpendicular to grain
stresses at the notch should be avoided. Stress concentrations produced are likely to cause
spliUing at the notch at low tension values and no satisfactory means are available for
determining this tension stress. A gradual change of section will reduce these stress
concentrations. Notches that produce compression perpendicular to grain are satisfactory,
subject to shear analysis outlined in Clause 3.4.1.4.
3.4.1.5 Round and Tapered Beams

3.4.1.5.1 A round beam shall be considered as having
the same strength in flexure as a beam of square cross-section having the
same cross-sectional area. If a circular beam is tapered it shall be designed
as an equivalent square beam of variable cross-section.
3.4.1.5.2 Allowable unit stresses for piles and poles shall
be those given in Clauses 7 and 8.
3.4.2 Compression Members

3.4.2.1 General. The unit stress in compression shall not exceed
the value listed in the appropriate Table of this Standard as modified by
the provisions of Clauses 3.3.2 and 3.4.2. Stresses shall be calculated from
formulae for concentrically loaded columns of rectangular cross-section
except as otherwise noted. In no case shall the slenderness ratio exceed
50 for single member columns and 80 for individual members of spaced
columns.
NOTE:
The formulae for allowable unit stresses in columns are for columns having rectangular
cross-sections. They may be used for other column cross-sections by substituting rvIZ
for d in the formulae, where r is the applicable radius of gyration of tJ,e column crosssection.
3.4.2.2 Simple Columns

3.4.2.2.1 Effective Length. Effective lengths shall be
used in determining slenderness ratio and in formulae for simple columns.
NOTE:
Recommended effective length factors "K" for compression members are contained in
Appendix D.
3.4.2.2.2 Short Columns. When the slenderness ratio

of a column does not exceed 10, the maximum permissible unit stress,
F' e, shall be obtained using Formula (7):
where P
A
Fe
F'e =
,(7)
Fe
-p
A- Fe
maximum allowable load, pounds;
area of column cross-section, square inches;
allowable unit stress in compression parallel to grain;
allowable unit stress in compression parallel to grain
adjusted to lid ratio.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-88-
pa
23
3.4.2.2.3 Intermediate Columns. When the slenderness ratio of a column is greater than 10 but does not exceed C k , the maximum permissible unit stress F' c shall be obtained using Formula (8):
p. =
where C k
where fa
d
E
NOTE!
When
F. [ 1 - 1/3
'n:JT
2"
(d:dy]
(if
6F c = O. 641~Fo
effective length of simple column, inches;
least cross-sectional dimension, inches;
modulus of elasticity, psi.
~ = C)c, then F'o
(8)
(9)
Z:o
3.4.2.2.4 Long Columns. When the slenderness ratio

exceeds C k , the maximum permissible unit stress F' c shall be obtained
using Formula (10):
n:2 E 0.274E
P
(10)
F'o
where Ie
36(~)' = (~)'
= effective length of simple column, in inches.
3.4.2.2.5 Tapered Columns. Tapered columns shall be

designed according to the preceding Clauses, but the least radius of gyration
of a round column tapered at one or both ends shall be based on the sum
of the minimum diameter and % the difference between the minimum
diameter and the maximum diameter, but in no case shall it be based on
more than 1~ times the minimum diameter. The induced unit stress at
the small end of a round tapered column shall not exceed the allowable
unit stress for a short column. Tapered columns of rectangular cross-section
shall be designed according to the same principles as round tapered columns.
3.4.2.2.6 Built-up Columns. The compressive strength
of built-up columns or compression members, except spaced or gluedlaminated columns, when composed of two or more members spiked or
bolted together either with or without spacing blocks between members,
shall be taken as the combined compressive strength of the individual
pieces considered as independent columns. However, when compression
members are fastened together at intervals not exceeding six times the
thickness of each piece by bolts and ring connectors, the strength of the
composite member may be calculated as having 80 per cent of the compressive strength of a column having a slenderness ratio based on the least
dimensions of the composite member.
3.4.2.2.7 Combined Stresses. When axial compression
is combined with bending stresses, Formula (17) of Clause 3.4.4 shall be~used.
3.4.2.3 Spaced Columns
3.4.2.3.1 General. The spaced-column formulae shall
apply when individual members of the spaced column are joined with
timber connectors and with spacer and end blocks installed as specified
herein. The maximum permissible load for the spaced-column equals the
allowable unit stress multiplied by the total cross-sectional area of the
individual members. Provisions of Clause 3.4.2.2.1 and Appendix D shall
not apply.
24
CSA STANDARD 086
3.4.2.3.2 Spacer and End Blocks. Requirements for

spacer and end blocks shall be as follows:
(a) End blocks shall be so placed that sufficient end and edge distances
and spacing, as required in Clause 9 for the required minimum
size and number of connectors, are maintained in end blocks and
in individual members. Connectors shall be placed so that the
limits according to Clause 3.4.2.3.3, depending on the fixity factor
assumed, are met. In compression members of trusses, a panel
point which is stayed laterally may be considered as the end of
the spaced member;
(b) A single spacer block shall be located within the middle 10 per cent
of the column length; when so located, connectors are not necessary
for this block. When more than one spacer block is used, the
distance between any two blocks shall not exceed one-half the
distance between centres of connectors in the end blocks. The
requirements for connectors shall be the same as for end blocks,
when two or more spacer blocks are used; and
(c) The thickness of spacer and end blocks shall be not less than that
of the individual members of the spaced column, except that
spacer and end blocks of a thickness between that of the individual
members and one-half that thickness may be used provided that
the length of the blocks is made inversely proportional to the
thickness in relation to the required length of a full-thickness
block. Spacer and end block sizes shall be adequate to develop
the required strength as provided by Clause 9.
3.4.2.3.3 Fixity Classes. Spaced columns shall be
classified as to end fixity either as Condition Han or as Condition Hb" (see
Figure 1):
(a) For Condition "aI!, the centroid of connectors or of the connector
group in the end block shall be within one-twentieth of the length
I from the column end; and
(b) For Condition lib", the centroid of connectors or connector group
in the end block shall be between one-twentieth and one-tenth of
the length l from the column end.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-90-
25
_---End Block
Condition "a" with the connectors
, - - - - within 1/20 from the column end
1= Distance between points

of lateral support of
continuous or simple spaced
columns, in inches.
d L and
d~ =
Dimension, in inches, of
sides of individual member
/.,.I++----Spacer Block
Condition "b" with the connector

placed from l/20 to 1/10 from the
columll end
'-------End Block
FIGURE 1
SPACED COLUMN (CONNECTOR JOINED)
3.4.2.3.4 Load Capacity of Connectors in End

Spacer Blocks. The connectors in each pair of contacting surfaces of end
blocks and individual members at each end of a spaced column shall be
at least of a size and number to provide a load capacity equal to the required
cross-sectional area in square inches of one of the individual members
multiplied by the appropriate end spacer block constant listed in Table 5.
End spacer block constants shall be adjusted for moisture conditions in
accordance with the provisions of Table 30.
3.4.2.3.5 Short Spaced Columns. When the slenderness ratio of an individual member does not exceed 10, the maximum
permissible load on a spaced column shall not exceed the sum of the maximum permissible loads on the individual members computed as simple
short columns.
3.4.2.3.6 Intermediate Spaced Columns. When the
slenderness ratio of an individual member is between 10 and C k for Condition "a", or C kb for Condition lib", the maximum permissible unit stress
shall be obtained as follows:
26
CSA STANDARD 086
(a) For Condition "a"
(_l )4J
F' e -- A
~ = Fe [1 - 7::S
1
Ckad 1
(11)
where C k ,. = !E ~ 12~2E = 1 01 IE
2 " 6F e
. ~Fo
(b) For Condition "b"
F' ()
F () [1 -
(12)
~ (_l
)4J
Ck~l
(13)
(14)
dimension of the least side of individual members of a
spaced column, inches (Figure 1);
distance between points of lateral support of continuous
or spaced columns, inches.
d1
TABLE 5
END SPACER BLOCK CONSTANTS FOR SPACED COLUMNS
End Spacer Block Constantt
lId Ratio of
Individual Member in
the Spaced Column'"
o to
Group A
Woods
11
Groups
BandC
Woods
Groups D.
EandF
Woods
15
20
33
73
27
61
25
30
35
114
155
94
128
40
195
236
162
195
45
50
55
277
318
358
229
263
296
60 to 80
399
330
o
21
48
75
101
128
154
181
208
234
261
*Constant for intermediate lid ratios may be obtained by straight line interpolation.
t For grouping
of species, see Table 1.
3.4.2.3.7 Long Spaced Columns. \Vhen the slenderness

ratio of an individual member exceeds C ka for Condition "a", or Ckb for
Condition "b", the permissible unit stress for long columns shall be obtained
using Formula (15) or (16):
(a) For Condition "a"
F ' () -- ~
A
(;~) (f.y = \f.)~
(b) For Condition "b"
F', =
~ = (;~)
(r)'
oar
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-92.-
(15)
(16)
27
3.4.2.3.8 Design Check of Spaced Columns. The

maximum permissible load capacity determined by spaced column design
shall be checked against the sum of maximum permissible loads of individual
members taken as simple columns. In this check, the term "d" of the
slenderness ratio
~ is to be d 2 of Figure 1 and 1 is the
length between lateral
supports which provide restraint in a direction parallel to d 2 Of the permissible loads derived from the two methods of assessing a column, the
lesser shall not be exceeded.
3.4.2.3.9 Combined Stresses. When axial compression
in spaced columns is combined with bending stresses, the provisions of
Clause 3.4.4 shall be used only if the bending is in a direction parallel to the
dimension d 2 of the individual member (see Figure 1).
3.4.3 Tension Members. The unit stress in tension parallel to grain

shall not exceed the values listed in appropriate Clauses; of this Standard,
as modified by Clause 3.3.2.
3.4.4 Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load and Bending
Moment
3.4.4.1 When a member is subjected to both direct stress and
bending stress,
P/ A
a
where A
P
M
S
Fb
+ MF/S shall not exceed unity
(17)
area of cross-section, square inches;

concentrated axial load, pounds;
bending moment, inch pounds;
section modulus, inches cubed;
allowable unit stress in bending that would be permitted
if bending load only existed, psi;
allowable unit stress in tension (Ft ) or compression
(F' c) in psi, that would be permitted if axial load only
existed, taking into account slenderness ratio of columns
by modifying allowable axial compressive stresses for
members in accordance with Clause 3.4.2 for the greater
of the following slenderness ratios:
effective length associated with width
member width
or
effective length associated with depth
member depth
NOTE:
Recommended effective lengths for some conditions are shown in Appendix D.
3.4.4.2 Maximum depth to breadth ratio for glulam or sawn

members with rectangular cross-sections which may be subjected to both
flexural and axial compression loading shall be governed by the approximate
rules set forth in Clause 4.4.1.2.1.
3.4.5 Members Subjected to Load at Angle to Grain. The allowable
unit stress normal to a plane inclined to the grain of a wood member shall
not exceed that determined by the Hankinson formula:
(18)
28
eSA STANDARD 086
where Fn
allowable unit stress, normal to a plane inclined to the

grain of a wood member, psi;
allowable unit compressive stress parallel to grain, psi;
allowable unit compressive stress perpendicular to
grain, psi;
angle between the direction of load and the direction of
grain, degrees.
29
4. SAWN LUMBER
4.1 Scope. Clause 4 applies to the engineering design of sawn lumber.

4.2 Materials
4.2.1 General. Design tables, methods and data specified herein apply
only to lumber complying with the requirements of, and graded to the
specifications of the authorities listed in Table 6. In addition, no lumber of
obviously unsuitable quality shall be used in any construction.
4.2.2 Identification of Lumber. All lumber for use under this

Standard shall be identified by the grade mark of, or certification of inspection issued by, an association or independent grading agency in accordance
with the grade marking provisions of CSA Standard 0141, Softwood Lumber.
NOTE:
A list of approved agencies may be obtained from Canadian Standards Association.
4.2.3 Regraded Lumber. Lumber which is resawn, or used in a

manner not originally intended, shall be assigned an allowable unit stress
as regraded for the intended use.
NOTE:
See Appendix Efor basis of assignment of allowable unit stresses.
4.2.4 Sizes. For design purposes, the actual size (net dimensions)
of lumber shall be used. In Clause 4 of this Standard dimensions referred
to are nominal.
NOTE:
In developing allowable unit stresses in this Standard, variables of moisture content and
shrinkage, and their relaNonship to strength and stiffness, have been taken into account.
Accordingly, for either wet or dry service conditions standard lumber sizes applicable tv
dry lumber manufacture should be used in conjunction with Tables 8A. 8B, and 8D,
and actual mamtfactured size with Table 8C. Standard nominal sizes and net dimen.
sions of lumber and timbers are given in CSA Standard 0141, Softwood Lumber (reproduced in part in Appendix G of this Standard).
4.3 Allowable Unit Stresses

4.3.1 Structurally Graded Lumber. Allowable unit stresses for
structurally graded lumber shall not exceed the values listed in Tables 8A,
8B, 8C, and 8D as modified by Clause 3.3.2 and Tables 9 and 10 except
that in load-sharing systems all such values other than modulus of elasticity
may be increased 10 per cent.
30
eSA STANDARD 086
TABLE 6
GRADING RULES FOR SAWN LUMBER
Species
Gradlna Rule
All
NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, published by

the National Lumber Grades Authority, December, 1970, effective
March, 1971.
Species
NOTES:
1 The NLGA Standard Grading Rules fM Canadian Lumber incorporate the

II National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber", a uniform set of grade descriptions and other requirements for softwood dimension lumber that fMms pare of all
so/twood lumber grading rules in the United States. Thus all dimension lumber
throughout Canada and the United States is graded to uniform requirements
2. Recommended allawable unit stresses also apply to all corresponding grades in the
1971 editions of standard grading rules published by the West Coast Lumber
Inspection Bureau, Western Wood Products Association, Northern Hardwood and
Pine Manufacturers Association and Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers
Association.
3. Grades should be specified by intended end use and size classification (e.g. light
framing, joist and plank, beam and stringer, post and timber, plank decking), as
well as species and grade. Designers are advised to check the availability of grade,
species, and size of members required before specifying.
4.3.2 Timber Not Structurally Graded. Allowable unit stresses may

be assigned to Standard grade post and timber sizes, and beam and stringer
sizes, of timbers not structurally graded and which therefore do not appear
in Table 8C, used singly, when graded to the specifications of the authorities
listed in Table 6. Allowable unit stresses, when assigned to such sizes and
grades, shall not exceed the following percentages of allowable unit stresses
listed in Table 8C:
Per Cent of
Select
Structural
Bending stress at extreme fibre
Longitudinal shear
Compression parallel to grain
Compression
perpendicular to grain
Modulus of elasticity
Allowable unit stresses in tension parallel to grain may
timbers not structurally graded.
50
66
50
100
80
not be assigned to
4.3.3 Service Conditions

4.3.3.1 For wet service conditions, the values listed in Tables
8A, 8B, 8C, and 8D shall be decreased in accordance with Table 9.
4.3.3.2 Values listed in Tables 8A, 8B, and 8D may be increased
in accordance with Table 10 when the lumber is manufactured at a maximum
moisture content of 15 per cent and used in a condition where the moisture
-content will not exceed 15 per cent provided that the maximum moisture
-content when manufactured be indicated in the identification required by
Clause 4.2.2.
4.3.4 Lumber Graded by Non-Destructive Test. Lumber stress
graded by means of a non-destructive test method in accordance with CSA
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-96-
31
Standard 0141, Softwood Lumber, or meeting the requirements of the

Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee, may be
assigned allowable unit stresses, provided that the certification agreement
stipulates that 95 per cent of the pieces in any stress grade shall be required,
at a level of confidence of 95 per cent, to meet the following criteria:
(a) l\:lodulus of rupture shall be not less than 2.1 times the allowable
unit bending stress at extreme fibre; and
(b) Ultimate tensile strength shall be not less than 2.1 times the
allowable unit stress in tension parallel to grain.
4.3.5 Additional Species and Grades. Allowable unit stresses for

species and grades not listed in Tables 8A, 8B, 8C, or 8D may be established
in accordance with the principles set forth in Appendix E.
4.4.1 Bending Members
4.4.1.1 Continuity. When simple or built-up beams, or deck
systems, are so constructed that continuity is obtained, consideration shall
be given in accordance with good engineering practice to that continuity
in calculating bending moments, stresses and deflections. Allowance for
continuity shall not apply in design of beams for bending strength unless
beams are graded according to the requirements for continuous spans of
ASTIVI Standard D245, Methods for Establishing Structural Grades, and
Related Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber, although
continuity may be considered in deflection and shear calculations whether
the lumber is regraded or not.
NOTE: All grades listed in Tables 8A, 8B, and 8D are graded for continuity. Grades listed in
Table 8e are graded for continuity except as noted in the footnote to the Table.
4.4.1.2 Lateral Support

4.4.1.2.1 Depth to Breadth Ratio. l\'laximum depth
to breadth ratios for various degrees of lateral support for sawn beams or
joists with rectangular cross-sections shall be governed by the following
approximate rules, based on nominal dimensions:
(a) 2:1 When no lateral support is provided;
(b) 3: 1 When the ends are held in position;
(c) 4:1 \\Then the ends are held in position and the member is held in
line as by purl ins or tie rods;
(d) 5:1 When the ends are held in position and the compression edge
is held in line as by direct connection of sheathing, deck, or joists;
(e) 6:1 \\Then the ends are held in position and the compression edge
is held in line as by direct connection of sheathing, deck, or joists,
together with adequate bridging or blocking spaced at intervals not
exceeding 8 times the nominal depth; or
(f) 7:1 \\Then the ends are held in position and both edges are firmly
held in line.
4.4.1.2.2 Vertically Laminated Beams. Calculation

of lateral support of vertically laminated beams, made up of two or more
members of the same depth, which are securely fastened together at intervals
not exceeding four times the depth, may be based on the total width of
the beam.
32
eSA STANDARD 086
4.4.1.3 Decking. To utilize continuity in the design of decking,

the following conditions shall apply:
(a) Plank Decks
(i) lVfaterial shall be 4 inches or more in nominal width and shall
be tongued and grooved or splined. Planks 2 inches or less in
thickness sllall be nailed to the supporting members with
nails not shorter than twice the nominal thickness of the
plank and in no case less than 272 inches. Planks thicker than
2 inches shall be nailed to the supporting members with one
5-inch toe-nail and one or more face nails not less than 6
inches in length. Planks 6 inches or less in nominal width shall
be nailed with 2 nails to each support. Planks more than
6 inches in nominal width shall be nailed with 3 nails to each
support;
(ii) In bridges each plank shall extend over at least one support.
In roofs and floors, planks not extending over at least one
support in any span are permitted, provided that they are
double tongue-and-groove plank more than 2 inches in nominal
thickness and that they shall be flanked by planks that rest
on both supports of that span and shall be separated by at
least six planks in that span each of which extends over at
least one support;
(b) Laminated Decks
(i) Material shall be 2 inches or more, in nominal thickness and
3 inches or more in nominal width, and shall be laid on edge
and spiked together. Nails used to spike the laminations
together shall be at least 4 inches long for 2-inch nominal
thickness laminations, and 6 inches long for 3-inch nominal
thickness laminations. Decking 6 inches or less in depth shall
be spiked together with a single row of nails at intervals of not
more than 18 inches in the row. One nail shall be placed not
more than 4 inches from the end of each lamination. Decking
more than 6 inches in nominal depth shall be spiked together
with a double row of nails at intervals of not more than 18
inches in each row. Two nails shall be placed not more than
4 inches from the end of each lamination. Each lamination
shall be adequately toe-nailed to each support with not less
than 4-inch nails;
(ii) In bridges each lamination shall extend over at least one
support. In roofs and floors, laminations not extending over
at least one support in any span shall be flanked by laminations
that rest on both supports of that span, and shall be separated
by at least six laminations in that span, each of which extends
over at least one support;
(c) Deflection Calculations. For uniform design loads, decking
deflections for the laying patterns described in Table 7 shall be
calculated by the formulae given in Table 7. For other loading
conditions or laying patterns, deflections shall be calculated by
recognized engineering formulae;
(d) Bending. Bending stresses for decking laid in a controlled random
pattern, as described in Table 7, shall be calculated on the basis
of simple span moments. For other deck patterns, bending stresses
shall be calculated on th~ basis of recognized engineering formulae.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-98-
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRAGrICE FOR ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
33
TABLE 7
DECK LAYING PATIERNS AND DEFLECTION FORMULAE
Pattern
Simple Span
All pieces bear on two

supports only
Controlled Random
Decking continuous for

three or more spans
End joints staggered in
adjacent planks not
less than 2 feet
Joints in same general
line separated by at least
two intervening courses
End joints in first half
of end spans avoided
Each plank bears on at
least one support.
Continuous Over Two

Spans
s
I
J
J
t
t
g
'r
Description
*where.6.
w
I
E
I
All pieces bear on three

supports
Deflection Formula.
5wl4
.6.1 = 384EI
.6.2
wl4
l00EI
w/4
.6. 3 = 185EI
= 0.77
.6.1
= 0.42 .6.1
= maximum deflection. inches, of the decking
= uniform design load in pounds per inch of decking span

= span of decking, in inches
= modulus of elasticity, psi

= moment of inertia of the decking, inches4.
4.4.2 Slenderness Ratio for Stud Walls. When stud walls

are adequately sheathed on at least one side as in light frame construction,
the dimension of the stud normal to the sheathing shall be used in calculating
the slenderness ratio.
n
n
is
e
IS
d
ls
m
is
;!S
e.
...o
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Species
Group
No.1
No.2
No.3
Select Structural
Grade*
1,400
1,150
600
800
450
200
600
1,900
1,650
1,350
750
950
550
250
750
2,200
1,850
1,500
850
1,100
600
300
85-0--
Stress at
Extreme :Fibre
Shear
85
75
90
Lon~itudinal
RendinA
950
600
600
800
500
950
750
500
500
1,350
1,050
850
500
950
800
500
500
1,600
1,250
1,000
600
Parallel to
Grain
335
-------
235
460
Perpend Icular
to Grain
Compression
1,250
1,100
900
500
650
360
150
500
950
800
650
350
500
250
100
350
1,100
950
800
450
550
300
150
450
Tension
Parallel
to Grain
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR LIGHT FRAMING SIZES OF SAWN LUMBER CONFORMING TO
THE NLGA STANDARD GRADING RULES FOR CANADIAN LUMBER, Psi
THICKNESS-2 TO 4 INCHES; WIDTH-2 TO 4 INCHES
DRY SERVICE CONDITIONS
NORMAL DURATION OF LOAD
TABLE SA
(Continued)
1,930,000
1,930,000
1,740,000
1,540,000
1,540,000
1,540,000
1,540,000
1,540,000
1,620,000
1,620,000
1,460,000
1,300,000
1,300,000
1,300,000
1,300,000
1.300,000
1,400,000
1,400,000
1,260,000
1,120,000
1,120,000
1,120,000
L 120,000
1,120,000
Modulus
of
Elasticity
~
o
z
o
;..
;..
CN
.-6
.-6
Copyright NRC-CNRC
1,500
1,300
1,050
600
750
450
200
600
1,400
1,200
1,000
550
700
400
200
550
1,500
1.300
1,050
600
---7scr-450
200
60
65
60
800
650
400
700
600
400
400
850
700
550
350
600
500
3S0
1,150
900
700
450
800
650
450
180
235
245
900
750
600
350
450
250
100
350
850
700
600
300
400
250
100
300
900
750
600
350
1,350,000
1,350,000
1,220,000
1,080,000
1,080,060
1,080,000
1,080,000
1,080,000
1,210 ,000
1,210,000
1,080,000
970,000
970,000
970,000
970,000
970,000
1,250,000
1,250,000
1,130,000
1,000,000
1,000,000
1,000,000
1,000.000
1,000,000_
SIZE: Allowable unit stresses for Construction, Standard and Utility grades apply only to members four inches in nominal width.
Altuwable unit stresses for Select Structural, No.1, No.2, No.3 and Stud grades of 3 inch X 4 inch, and 4 inch X 4 inch sizes shall be the tabulated values multiplied by the factors below:
All
Modulus
Extreme
Tension
Other
of
Fibre in
Parallel
Stresses
Bending
Elasticity
to Grain
1.00
Select Structural
1.00
0.93
0.93
No.1
1.00
0.80
0.62
0.62
No.2
1.00
0.89
0.42
0.42
No.3
1.00
1.00
0.35
0.35
Stud
1.00
1.00
0.35
0.35
NOTES: 1. Allowable unit stresses for Appearance grade meeting the requirements of the authorities listed in Table 6 shall be those listed for No.1 grade,
except that allowable unit stress in compression parallel to grain may be increased by 19 per cent.
2. Yellow Birch. Hard Maple. and Red and Whi&e Oak conforming to the grades in this Table haoe the same allowable unit stresses as the corresponding grades of Group A species.
3. An approximate mlue for modulus of rigidity may be estimated as 0.065 times the modulus of elasticity.
No.1
No.2
No.3
Select Structural
TABLE SA (Continued)
VI
:=
tt:I
1:1:1
...s:..,
CIl
...C'l
tt:I
1;1
C'l
=
Z
C'l
~
::=
~
tt:I
>
t='
tt:I
s:
s:t-J
t-J
::=
.",
t-J
0
0
t='
Ii
...
Copyright NRC-CNRC
NOTES:
1,900
1,600
1,300
750
1,400
1,200
950
550
1,650
1,400
1,150
650
1,300
1, toO
900
500
1,250
1,050
850
500
1,300
1,100
900
500
Select Structural
Select Structural
Select Structural
Select Structural
Select Structural
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.1
No.2
No.3
Select Structural
Grade
60
65
60
85
75
90
Longitudinal
Shear
Bending
Stress at
Extreme Fibre
750
700
550
350
900
800
650
400
1,000
900
750
500
1,200
1,050
900
550
1,150
1,050
850
550
1,400
1,250
1,050
650
180
235
245
335
235
460
Perpendicular
to Grain
Compression
Parallel to
Grain
1,350,000
1,350,000
1,220,000
1,080,000
1,210,000
1,210,000
1,080,000
970,000
1,250,000
1,250,000
1,130,000
1,000,000
850
750
600
350
800
700
550
300
850
750
600
350
1,620,000
1,620,000
1,460,000
1,300,000
900
800
650
350
1,400,000
1,400,000
1,260,000
1,120,000
1,930,000
1,930,000
1,740,000
1,540,000
1,250
1,050
850
500
1,toO
950
750
450
Modulus
of
Elasticity
Tension
Parallel
to Grain
except that allowable unit stress in compression parallel to grain may be increased by 19 per cent.
2. YellO'W Birch, Hard Maple, and Red and White Oak conforming to the grades in this Table have the same allowable unit stresses as the corresponding grades of Group A species.
3. A n approximate value for modulus of rigidity may be estimated at 0.065 times the modulus of elasticity.
1. AllO'Wable unit stresses for Appearance grade meeting the requirements of the authorities listed in Table 6 shall be those listed for No.1 grade,
Species
Group
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR JOIST AND PLANK SIZES OF SAWN LUMBER CONFORMING TO
THICKNESS-2 TO 4 INCHES; WIDTH-6 INCHES OR MORE
TABLE 8B
CI'
CoN
0'\
...oI
Copyright NRC-CNRC
2. Yellow Birch, Hard Maple, and Red and White Oak conforming to -the grades in thts Table have the same allowable unit stresses as the corresponding grades of Group A species.
3. An approximate value for modulus of rigidity may be estimated at 0.065 times the modulus of elasticity.
...o
Copyright NRC-CNRC
85
85
1,150
950
1,100
900
1,150
950
Select Structural
No.1 Structural
Select Structural
No. 1 Structural
Select Structural
No.1 Structural
85
85
95
95
120
120
100
100
125
125
1,500
1,200
1,250
1,000
1.700
1,350
SeJect Structural
No. 1 Structural
Select Structural
No.1 Structural
hear
Lon~itudlnal
Parallel to
Grain
Perpendicular
to Grain
Compression
Tension
Parallel
to Grain
600
500
700
600
800
650
180
180
235
235
245
245
335
335
235
235
900
750
950
800
460
460
1,100
900
700
500
650
450
700
500
850
600
750
500
1,000
700
(a) BEAMS AND STRINGERS. - Depth more than 2 Inches Ill'eater than thickness
Stress at
Extreme Fibre
Select Structural
No.1 Structural
Grade
Species
Group
Bending
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURALLY GRADED SAWN TIMBER,

CONFORMING TO THE NLGA STANDARD GRADING RULES FOR CANADIAN LUMBER, Psi
MINIMUM DIMENSION 5 INCHES
TABLE 8e
(Continued)
1,160,000
1,160,000
1,120,000
1.120,000
1,210,000
1,210,000
1,250.000
1,250,000
1,450,000
1,450,000
1,720,000
1,720,000
Modulus
of
Elasticity
~
~
o
<:H
00
...o
\II
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Select Structural
No. 1 Structural
650
550
750
650
850
750
1.000
850
950
850
1,200
1.050
180
180
235
235
1,120,000
1,120,000
1,160,000
1.160,000
700
550
750
600
1,210,000
1,210,000
750
600
245
245
1,250,000
1,250,000
900
750
335
335
1,450,000
1,450,000
1,720,000
1,720,000
800
650
1.050
850
235
235
460
460
Allowable unit stresses in tension parallel Ie grain for "beam and stringer" grades may be increased by 14 per cent when grade restrictions applicable
to the middle third of the piece are applied over the full length of the piece.
NOTES: 1. Bending stresses for "beams and stringers" apply only when a member is loaded on the narrow face.
2: "Posts and timbers" graded to "beam and stringer" rules may be assigned beam and stringer stresses.
3. Yelluw Birch, Hard Maple, and Red and White Oak have the same allowable unit stresses as Group A for Select Structural or No.1 Structural
grades respectively.
4. A n approximate value for modulus of rigidity may be estimated as 0.065 times the modulus of elasticity.
5. With sawn members thicker than 4 inches, which season slowly, care should be exercised to avoid overloading in compression before apprecwble
seasoning of tlte outer fibres has taken place, otherwise compression stresses for wet service conditions shall be used.
6. All grades listed in Table Be are graded for continuity except for all grades of beam and stringer size class.
85
60
Select Structural
No. 1 Structural
85
60
1,100
900
1,100
900
Select Structural
No. 1 Structural
120
80
95
65
1,400
1,100
Select Structural
No. 1 Structural
100
70
125
85
1,050
850
1,150
950
Select Structural
No.1 Structural
1.550
1.300
Select Structural
No. 1 Structural
(b) POSTS AND TIMBERS - Depth not more than 2 Inches greater than thickness
TABLE 8C (Continued)
\0
(",,)
:j
'""'
Z
Z
Cl
!:
40
CSA STANDARD 086
TABLE 8D
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR PLANK DECKING, CONFORMING TO
THICKNESS-l TO 4 INCHES; WIDTH-6 INCHES OR MORE
CoInpression
Perpendicular
to
Grain
Grade
Bendlnll
Stress at
Extreme
Fibre
Select
Commercial
1,800
1,550
460
1,930,000
1,740,000
Select
Commercial
1,350
1,150
235
1,620,000
1,460,000
Select
Commercial
1,600
1,350
335
1,400,000
1,260,000
Select
Commercial
1,250
1,050
245
1,350,000
1,220,000
Select
Commercial
1,200
1,000
235
1,210,000
1,080.000
=roup
es
NOTES:
Modulus
of
Elasticity
1. Bending stresses apply only when decking is loaded on the wide face.
2. An approximate value for modulus of rigidity may be estimated at 0.065 times the
modulus of elasticity.
TABLE 9
MODIFICATION FACTORS FOR SAWN LUMBER
UNDER VARIOUS SERVICE CONDITIONS
Modification Factor
Compression
Bendlnll
Nominal
Lumber
Service Thlckne
Condition: Inches
Stress
at
Extreme
Fibre
Lonllltudlnal
Shear
Parallel
to
Grain
PerpendicuJar
to
Grain
Tension
Parallel
to
Grain
Modulus
of
EIasticity
1.00
Dry
All
Thicknesses
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Wet
4 or Less
0.84
0.96
0.69
0.67
0.84
Over"
1.00
1.00
0.91
0.67
1.00
0.94
1.00
For lumber manufactured at more than 19 per cent moisture content, and used under either wet
or dry service conditions, the modification factor for "wet" service conditions shall be used for
longitudinal shear.
41
TABLE 10
MODIFICATION FACTORS FOR SAWN LUMBER OF 2- TO 4-INCH
NOMINAL THICKNESS WHEN MANUFACTURED
AT MAXIMUM 15 PER CENT MOISTURE CONTENT
ModiOcadon Factor
Bending
Moisture
Content at
Time of
Manufacture
(Per Cent)
15
Per Cent
Maximum
Service
Condition
Moisture
Content
Will Not
Exceed
15 Per Cent
at AnyTime
Stress
at
Extreme
Fibre
1.08
Compression
Longltudlnal
Shear
Parallel
to
Grain
Perpendlcular
to
Grain
Tension
Parallel
to
Grain
Modulus
of
Elastl-
1.05
1.17
1.00
1.08
1.05
-107-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
dty
42
eSA STANDARD 086
5. GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
5.1 Scope. Clause 5 applies to the engineering design of glued-laminated
timber.
5.2 General Requirements

5.2.1 Reference Standards. Design tables, methods and data specified
herein apply only to glued-laminated timber manufactured in accordance
with CSA Standards 0122, Structural Glued-Laminated Timber, and 0177,
Qualification Code for Manufacturers of Structural Glued-Laminated
Timber.
5.2.2 Conditions of Use. Design tables, methods and data for bending
members specified herein apply to horizontaHy laminated members, the
wide faces of whose laminations are normal to the direction of load, except
for vertical laminating (see Clause 5.4.3).
5.3.1 General
5.3.1.1 Unit stresses for normal duration of full design load for
stress grades of Douglas Fir glulam shall not exceed the values given in
Table 12, or bending stresses for beams calculated from Clause 5.3.3 as
modified by Clauses 3.3.2 and 5.3.2.
5.3.1.2 Allowable unit stresses for normal duration of full
design load for the same stress grades of other species groups shall be the
values obtained in Clause 5.3.1.1, multiplied by the factor for the appropriate species from Table 13.
5.3.1.3 When glued-laminated members are used in load-sharing
systems as defined in Clause 2.1, the allowable unit stress otherwise permitted for single member uses (but not modulus of elasticity) may be
increased 10 per cent.
5.3.2 Modification for Curvature Factor

5.3.2.1 For the curved portion only of members, the allowable
unit stress in bending shall be multiplied by the curvature factor of Formula
(19) in which the ratio ~ shall not exceed 1/125 for softwoods and 1/100 for
hardwoods:
1 _ 2,000
(~)2
(19)
the thickness of the lamination, in inches;

the radius of curvature of the innermost lamination,
inches.
5.3.2.2 No curvature factor shall be applied to the allowable
unit stress in the straight portion of a member, regardless of curvature
elsewhere.
where t
R
5.3.3 Allowable Unit Stresses in Bending for Beams

5.3.3.1 Beams Without Lateral Support. When the depth
of a beam does not exceed its breadth, no lateral support is required and
the allowable unit stresses in bending as modified by Clause 3.3.2 may be
used directly.
:i
43
5.3.3.2 Beams with Lateral Support. When the depth exceeds

the breadth, lateral support shall be provided at the points of bearing, so
arranged as to prevent rotation of the beam at those points in a plane
perpendicular to its longitudinal axis, and the allowable unit stress in
bending shall be calculated by the formulae given in Clause 5.3.3.5.
5.3.3.3 Slenderness Factor of a Beam. The slenderness factor
of a beam shall be calculated from Formula (20):
C.
where C.
Ie
d
b
~lb~
(20)
slenderness factor, unitIess;

effective length of the beam, inches from Table 11;
breadth of beam, inches.
TABLE 11
EFFECTIVE LENGTH I. OF BEAM
Values of
EftecdTe Lenath
Kind of Beam SupPOrt and

Nature of Load
Simple beam, load concentrated at centre
1. 611
Simple beam, uniformly distributed load
1.921
Simple beam, equal end moments
1.841
Cantilever beam, load concentrated at unsupported end
1.691
Cantilever beam, uniformly distributed load
1.061
Simple or cantilever beam, any load (conservative value)
1.921
Nom: Where I = unsupporteillength as defined in Clause 5.3.3.4, inches.
5.3.3.4 Unsupported Length

5.3.3.4.1 When lateral support to prevent rotation is
provided as required in Clause 5.3.3.2, and no other support to prevent
rotation or lateral displacement is provided throughout the length of a
beam, the unsupported length shall be the distance between such points of
bearing, or the length of a cantilever.
5.3.3.4.2 When beams are provided with lateral support
to prevent both rotation and lateral displacement at intermediate points
as well as at the ends, the unsupported length may be the distance between
such points of intermediate lateral support. If lateral displacement is not
prevented at points of intermediate support, the unsupported length shall
be as defined in Clause 5.3.3.4.1.
5.3.3.4.3 When the compression edge of a beam is
supported throughout its length so as to prevent its lateral displacement,
and the ends are supported as in Clause 5.3.3.4.1, the unsupported length
may be taken as zero. For a wood deck to provide such support each piece
of decking shall be securely fastened directly to the beam, and to adjacent
pieces, so as to provide a rigid diaphragm. For any other type of deck to
provide such support, it shall provide equivalent rigidity as a diaphragm.
-109-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
44
GSA STANDARD 086
5.3.3.5 Allowable Unit Stresses for Slender Beams

5.3.3.5.1 Short Beams. When the slenderness factor
of a beam does not exceed 10, the allowable unit stress in bending shall be
the values obtained from Table 12 for Douglas Fir, or from Table 12 multiplied by the appropriate factor from Table 13 for other species.
5.3.3.5.2 Intermediate Beams. When the slenderness
factor is greater than 10, but does not exceed C k , the allowable unit stress
in bending, F'b, shall be calculated by Formula (21):
F'b
Fb [ 1 -
%(
~JJ
(22)
where Ck =
where E
Fb
(21)
modulus of elasticity, from Table 12 or Table 13;

allowable unit stress in bending, from Table 12, or
Table 12 multiplied by the factor for the appropriate
species from Table 13.
5.3.3.5.3 Long Beams. When the slenderness factor
exceeds C k the allowable unit stress in bending shall be calculated by
Formula (23), and in no case shall the slenderness factor exceed 50:
F'b
= 0.40E
C2
(23)

5.4.1 Curved Members
5.4.1.1 The radial stress induced by bending in a curved member
of constant cross-section shall be limited to the allowable unit stress when
computed by Formula (24):
3M
fr = 2Rbd
(24)
where fr
M
R
b
d
actual unit radial stress, perpendicular to grain, psi;

bending moment, inch-pounds;
radius of curvature of centre line of member, inches;
breadth of cross-section, inches;
depth of cross-section, inches.
45
TABLE 12
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES (Psi) FOR GLUEDLAMINATED DOUGLAS
FIR AT NORMAL DURATION OF LOAD
Dry
Service Conditions
'S
CSA Stress Grade'"
,S
18c
Compresslon
Grade:
Type
of
Stress
:)
2M
Bending
Gradet
Bending at
Extreme Fibre
Longitudinal
Shear
Axial
Compression
Wet Service Conditions

CSA Stress Grade'"
I
26t
Tension
Grade
2M
Bending
Gradet
lSc
Compres~
sion
Grade:
16t
Tension
Grade
2,400
1,600
2,200
1,900
1,300
1,800
165
165
165
145
145
145
1,900:
1,200
1,400
1,500:
1,900:
1,400
1,400
1,500t
1,600
1,800
i
..,
Axial Compression
When Combined
With Bending
1,800
1,800
460
460
460
305
305
305
Tension Parallel
to Grain Where
Section Reduced
by Notches,
Daps, Connectors
or Abrupt
Changes in
Section
1,600
1,800
1,900
1,200
1,400
1,500
Tension Parallel
to Grain Where
no Stress
Concentration
Exists
2,000
2,300
2,400
1,600
1,800
1,900
65
65
65
55
55
55
1.93
1.93
1.93
1.69
1.69
1.69
Com pression
PeCer:dicular
to ram
Tension
Perpendicular
to Grain
Modulus of
Elasticity (X1OS)
Stress grades shall meet requirements of CSA Standard 0122, Structural Glued-Laminated
Timber.
tBending Grade should be used for members stressed in bending or in bending combined with
axial stress.
tCompression Grade should be used for members primarily stressed in axial compression.
Tension Grade should be used for members stressed in axial tension.
NOTE: Modify values for other species and load durations per Tables 2 and 13.
46
CSA STANDARD 086
TABLE 13
FACTORS FOR ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESS FOR SPECIES GROUPS
Bending
Species
Group
Stress at
Extreme
Fibre
Compreaslon
Longltudlnal
Shear
Parallel
to
Grain
Tension
P~n-
dleu ar to
Grain
Pe~n-
Parallel
to
Grain
dleu
to
Grain
Modulus of
Elasticity
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.74
0.81
0.82
0.51
0.74
1.00
0.84
0.88
0.94
0.85
0.73
0.88
1.00
0.73
0.70
0.78
0.72
0.53
0.70
0.60
0.70
0.65
0.73
0.63
0.51
0.65
0.60
0.65
0.70
0.68
0.55
0.37
0.70
0.60
0.67
For Sitka spruce the factor for longitudinal shear shaU be 0.68.
5.4.1.2 When the bending moment is in the radial direction that

tends to decrease curvature (increase the radius), the stress is tension
perpendicular to grain and it shall be limited to the allowable tension
perpendicular to grain.
5.4.1.3 When the bending moment is in the radial direction that
tends to increase curvature (decrease the radius), the stress is compression
perpendicular to grain and it shall be limited to the allowable compression
perpendicular to grain.
5.4.2 Pitched Cambered Beams
5.4.2.1 The radial stress induced by bending in a pitched cambered beam of rectangular cross-section (see Figure 2) is maximum near the
mid-depth of the apex (ridge), and shall be calculated from either Formula
(25) or (26):
fr = Kr
(~~fa;) , or
3Ma
f r = 2Rbd
'
(25)
. t h e Iarger,
w h'IChever IS
(26)
actual unit radial stress perpendicular to grain, psi;

gross depth of cross-section at apex, inches;
radius of curvature at mid-depth of member at apex,
inches;
b
breadth of cross-section, inches;
l\tIa
bending moment at apex, inch-pounds;
Kr = stress factor, non-dimensional;
where fr
da
R
and
Kr = A
+ B (~ ) + C (~ )2
where A, B, C
NOTE:
(27)
= constants, given in Table 14.

Formulae 25, 26, and 27 of Clause 5.4.2.1, give exact values of the radial stress at the
apex (ridge) only for the case of beams whose upper and lower faces are parallel; i.e.,
beams of constant depth except for the built up portion at the apex. It does, however,
give a conservative approximation for all cases in which the legs are tapered and converge
toward the supports; i.e., beams whose upper face is at a steeper slope than the lower face.
-112-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
47
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRAGI'ICE FOR ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
TABLE 14
VALUES OF CONSTANTS FOR DETERMINATION OF RADIAL STRESS
IN PITCHED CAMBERED BEAMS
Slope of Upper
Surface of Beam
(Deiree8 from Horizontal)
230'
5
730'
10
15
20
25
30
Value of Constant
A
0.0079
0.0174
0.0279
0.0391
0.1747
0.1251
0.1284
0.1939
0.0937
0.0754
0.2162
0.2119
0.1722
0.0629
0.0893
0.1214
0.1649
0.0619
0.0608
0.0605
0.0603
0.1393
0.1238
0.1115
NOTE: Values of Krfor slopes given in Table 14 are shown graphically in Appendix F.
5.4.2.2 The radial stress at the points of tangency on either side

of the apex (ridge) shall be calculated in accordance with Clause 5.4.1.1.
5.4.2.3 The radial stress fr as calculated in 5.4.2.1 or 5.4.2.2
shall not exceed the allowable unit radial stress permitted in Clause 5.4.1.
5.4.2.4 The bending stress at the apex (ridge) in a pitched
cambered beam of rectangular cross-section is maximum at the soffit and
shall be calculated by Formula (28):
fb
where a
= [1.0
+ 2.7 tan a] ~~a;
(28)
= the slope of upper surface of beam, degrees from hori-
zontal.
5.4.2.5 The bending stress at points of tangency on either side
of the apex (ridge) in a pitched cambered beam of rectangular cross-section
shall be calculated by Formula (29):
6Mt
(29)
f b = bd 2
t
where M t = bending moment at point of tangency, inch-pounds;
d t = depth of beam at point of tangency, inches.
5.4.2.6 The bending stress fb, as calculated in Clause 5.4.2.4 or
5.4.2.5, shall not exceed the allowable unit bending stress permitted in
Clause 5.3.1.
-113-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
48
CSA STANDARD 086
Upper
face
FIGURE 2
PITCHED CAMBERED BEAM
5.4.3 Vertically Laminated Beams. Allowable unit stresses for

beams made up of vertical laminations shall be calculated as for load-sharing
systems of sawn 1urn ber.
49
6. PLYWOOD
6.1 Scope. Clause 6 applies to the engineering design of plywood structural

assemblies.
6.2.1 Reference Standard. The provisions of this Clause apply only
to plywood manufactured in accordance with CSA Standard 0121, Douglas
Fir Plywood.
NOTE:
See Appendix C for properties of plywood lmanufactured in accordance with CSA

Standard 0121.
6.2.2 Adhesives for Bonding Plywood Structural Assemblies

6.2.2.1 Dry Service Conditions. Adhesives for the assembly of
structural components for use under dry service conditions shall conform
to one of the following CSA Standards, except that this shall not preclude
the use of high-temperature-curing melamine resin adhesives or high~
temperature-curing phenol resin adhesives suitable for use in the manufacture of exterior-type plywood:
(a) 0112.3, Casein Glues for Wood (Type I only);
(b) 0112.5, Urea Resin Adhesives for Wood (Room- and High-Temp~
erature Curing); or
(c) 0112.7, Phenol and Resorcinol Resin Adhesives for Wood (Roomand Intermediate-Temperature Curing).
6.2.2.2 Wet Service Conditions. Adhesives for the assembly of

structural components for use under all service conditions other than those
referred to in Clause 6.2.2.1 shall conform to CSA Standard 0112.7, Phenol
and Resorcinol Adhesives for Wood (Room- and Intermediate-Temperature
Curing), except that this shall not preclude the use of high-tern peraturecuring melamine resin adhesives or high-temperature-curing phenol resin
adhesives suitable for use in the manufacture of exterior-type plywood.
6.3.1 General. Allowable unit stresses for normal duration of full
design load for Douglas Fir plywood shall not exceed the values listed in
Table 15 as modified by Clauses 3.3.2 and 6.3.4.
6.3.2 Radial Tension. Allowable unit stresses in radial tension shall

not exceed one-half the value specified in Clause 6.3.1 for rolling shear in
the plane of the plies, parallel or perpendicular to the face grain, with no
further reductions for stress concentrations required.
6.3.3 Radial Compression. Allowable unit stresses in radial compression shall not exceed the value specified in Clause 6.3.1 for compression
perpendicular to the grain.
6.3.4 Stress Concentrations. Allowable unit stresses in rolling shear
as specified in Clause 6.3.1 shall be reduced SO per cent at the junction of
the web and the flange of a plywood web beam, and at the junction of the
outermost longitudinal framing member and a plywood skin of a stressedskin panel.
-115-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
50
eSA STANDARD 086
6.4 Design of Plywood Structural Assemblies

6.4.1 General
6.4.1.1 Effective Portions of Panels. For calculation of
stresses in tension, compression, and bending, only the plies whose grain
direction is parallel to the stress shall be considered, except when panels
are oriented so that the grain direction is at 45 degrees to the direction of
the principal stress, in which case the full cross-sectional area of the panel
shall be considered. In shear through the thickness, the full cross-sectional
area of the panel shall be considered. In rolling shear, when a plywood
panel is loaded perpendicular to the plane of the panel, the full shear area
of the panel shall be considered; in box beams or I-beams, or stressed skin
panels having plywood skins, only the area of contact between the plywood
and the flange or framing members shall be considered.
6.4.1.2 Flange-Web Shear. The flange-web shear stress shall
not exceed the allowable unit stress in rolling shear for the plywood specified
in Clause 6.3.
-116-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
......
I
..&
..&
Copyright NRC-CNRC
A. Extreme Fibre in Bending

1. Face Grain Parallel to Span
2. Face Grain Perpendicular to Span,
3 Plies.
3. Face Grain Perpendicular to Span
5 or more Plies.
B. Tension
1. Parallel to Face Grain, 3 plies
2. Parallel to Face Grain, 5 or more plies
3. Perpendicular to Face Grain
4. 45 to Face Grain
C. Compression in Plane of Plies
1. Parallel to Face Grain, 3 Plies
2. Parallel to Face Grain, 5 or more Plies
3. Perpendicular to Face Grain
4. 45 to Face Grain
D. Bearing (on Face), Normal to
Plane of Plies
E. Shear, Rolling, in Plane of Plies
1. Parallel or Perpendicular to Face Grain
2. 45 to Face Grain
F. Shear Through Thickness
1. Parallel or Perpendicular to Face Grain
2. 45 0 to Face Grain
G. Modulus of Elasticity in Bending
1. Face Grain Parallel to Span
2. Face Grain Perpendicular to Span
H. Shearing Modulus
1. Face Grain Parallel or
Perpendicular to Span
2. Face Grain 45 to Span
Type of Stress
TABLE 15
56
75
223
451
1,800,000
1,125,000
117,000
375,000
243
493
1,800,000
1,125,000
117,000
375,000
440
56
75
440
1,610
1,360
1,055
416
2,080
1,875
1,665
295
2,220
1,875
1,665
303
1,760
1,450
1,055
432
1,665
1,665
1,665
2,430
2,000
1,665
321
----
_I.--
117,000
375,000
1,800,000
1,125,000
210
425
56
75
440
1,510
1,360
1,055
400
2,500
2,500
2,500
1,770
1,890
Good
1 Side
2,065
Good
2 Sides
117,000
375,000
1,600,000
1,000,000
211
428
56
75
352
117,000
375,000
1,600,000
1,000,000
194
392
56
75
352
1,290
1,090
845
333
1,775
1,500
1,330
242
1,330
2,000
1,510
Good
1 Side
117,000
375,000
1,600,000
1,000,000
182
370
56
75
352
1,210
1,090
845
320
1,665
1,500
1,330
236
1,330
2,000
1.415
Solid 2 Sides,
Solid 1 Side.
Select
Sheathlnll,
Sheathinll.
Wet Service Conditions
1,410
1,160
845
346
1,945
1,600
1,330
257
1,330
2,000
1,650
Good
2 Sides
Allowable Unit Stress Psi
Solid 2 Sides,
Solid 1 Side.
Select
Sheathinll.
Sheathinll.
Dry Service Conditions
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR DOUGLAS FIR PLYWOOD

Vt
.....
COl
COl
"~
~
d
t:1
o't:I
52
eSA STANDARD 086
6.4.2 Deflection
6.4.2.1 General. The deflection of plywood structural assemblies
shall be calculated using standard engineering formulae.
NOTE:
For some plywood structural assemblies the deflection due to shear may be significant
and should be considered.
6.4.2.2 Plywood Panels. When a plywood panel is loaded

perpendicular to the plane of the panel, the moment of inertia used for
calculating deflection of the panel may include a contribution of 1/20 of
the moment of inertia of the plies perpendicular to the span.
6.4.2.3 Modulus of Elasticity. If deflection due to shear is
not calculated separately, the modulus of elasticity for sawn lumber,
glued-laminated timber or plywood shall be as specified in appropriate
Clauses of this Standard. When deflection due to shear is calculated separately and added to the bending deflection, the modulus of elasticity
specified in Clause 4.3 for sawn lumber and in Clause 6.3.1 for plywood
may be increased 5 per cent and 10 per cent respectively, when calculating
the bending deflection.
6.4.3 Plywood Web Beams
6.4.3.1 General. For the design of beams consisting of one or
more vertical plywood webs to which lumber flanges are glued along the
top and bottom edges, allowable unit stresses shall not be excee<.led in:
(a) Tension or compression in flanges;
(b) Longitudinal shear in webs; and
(c) Flange-web shear (rolling shear),
6.4.3.2 Lateral Stability. Lateral stability of a beam shall be
determined by considering the upper flange as a column which tends to
deflect sidewise between points of support, or by application of one of the
following rules:
(a) If the ratio of the moment of inertia of the cross-section about the
neutral axis to the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular
to the neutral axis does not exceed 5 to 1, no lateral support is
required ;
(b) If the ratio of the moments of inertia is between 5 to 1 and 10 to 1,
the ends of the beam shall be held in position at the bottom flange
at supports;
(c) If the ratio of the moments of inertia is between 10 to 1 and 20 to 1,
the beam shall be held in line at the ends;
(d) If the ratio of the moments of inertia is between 20 to 1 and 30 to 1,
one edge shall be held in line;
(e) If the ratio of the moments of inertia is between 30 to 1 and 40 to 1,
the beam shall be restrained by bridging or other bracing at intervals
of not more than 8 feet; or
(f) If the ratio of the moments of inertia is greater than 40 to 1, the
compression flanges shall be fully restrained.
6.4.3.3 Stiffeners. At reaction points, and at the location of
heavy concentrated loads, load distribution stiffeners shall be provided.
These stiffeners shall be adequately fastened to the webs and shall bear
on the inner surfaces of the top and bottom flanges. The stiffeners shall
be made as wide as the flanges and their dimension parallel to the span
shall be adequate to support the applied concentrated loads or reactions.
53
mblies
'1ificant
The cross-sectional area of a load-bearing stiffener shall be determined by

dividing the concentrated load or reaction by the allowable unit stress
perpendicular to the grain for the flange material.
6.4.3.4 Web Stabilizers. Web-stabilizing stiffeners shall be
provided as necessary to prevent buckling of the webs.
Jaded
~d for
20 of
6.4.4 FlatS tressed Skin Panels

6.4.4.1 General. These provisions apply only to the analysis of
~ar is
nber,
iriate
;epaicity
flat stressed skin panels having continuous or spliced longitudinal framing

members and having plywood skins on one or both panel faces, with the
:skins glued to the longitudinal framing members. The clear distance between
.longitudinal framing members shall not exceed 2b, where b is calculated
using\Formula (30) or (31):
For 3-ply plywood;
vood
lting
31t
"t;
"t.
-IT
(30)
For 5-ply or more than 5-ply plywood;

b
e or
the
be
to
the
where t
36t ... 1t
total thickness of one plywood skin (or of the thinner

skin if two skins of different thicknesses are employed);
and
t I = total thicknesses of plies parallel to the span, in the skin
used to determine t;
from which the values of Table 16, valid for plywood constructions
given in Appendix C, have been calculated.
TABLE 16
BASIC SPACING
:he
lar
is
1,
ge
Values of b
Aj!pUcable
ormula
1,
1,
1,
Is
(31)
(30)
(31)
Nominal
Thickness
of Plywood
(Inches)
,.
Face Grain
Parallel to Loniltudlna1
Members
(Inches)
Sanded
10.1
Unsanded
Face Grain
Perpendicular to Lollllltudlna1
Members
(Inches)
Sanded
UD88nded
12.1
17.5
11.0
15.3
15.5
15.6
16.5
Y2
25.6
33.1
40.3
23.0
26.8
36.3
25.3
30.7
36.3
28.2
38.8
40.2
%
%
6.4.4.2 Flange Width. The net effective stressed skin panel

cross-section shall consist of the framing members plus the skin(s), Where
the clear distance between longitudinal framing members exceeds basic
spacing b, the effective centre to centre distance between longitudinal
framing members shall be taken as b plus the framing member thickness.
Only those plies in the skin(s) whose grain is parallel to the span of the
stressed skin panel shall be considered.
54
CSA STANDARD 086
6.4.4.3 Compression Stress Modification. When the clear

distance between framing members does not exceed b/2, the allowable unit
stresses shall be as specified in Clause 6.3.1. When the clear distance between
framing members is b or greater, the allowable unit stress in compression
parallel to grain shall be reduced by one-third, and for spacings intermediate
between b/2 and b it shall be adjusted in direct proportion.
6.4.5 End Joints
6.4.5.1 Plywood End Joints in Shear. Joints along or across
the face grain of a plywood panel may be considered as transmitting 100 per
cent of the shear-through-thickness strength of the panel when fabricated
in accordance with either:
(a) Scarf Joints. When slope of scarf is not steeper than 1 in 8; or
(b) Butt Joints. When backed with a glued plywood splice plate on
one side no thinner than the panel itself, and of length perpendicular
to the joint equal to at least 12 times the panel thickness and
extending the full depth or width of the panel between framing
members.
6.4.5.2 Plywood End Joints in Tension

6.4.5.2.1 Scarf Joints. Scarf joints across the face grain
shall not be considered to transmit more than the following percentages
of the allowable tensile stress:
Slope of Scarf
1 in
1 in
1 in
1 in
Percentage
12
10
8
5
85
80
75
60
6.4.5.2.2 Butt Joints. When spliced with a glued

plywood plate having its face grain perpendicular to the joint, of a grade
and thickness at least equal to the plywood being spliced and having a
length no less than the minimum length shown as follows, the butt joint
shall not be considered to transmit more than the percentages of the allowable tensile stress as specified in Table 17.
TABLE 17
MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION OF ALLOWABLE TENSILE STRESS
Plywood
Thickness
(Inches)
}i
%l
% Sanded
% Unsanded
Yz
%
~
Minimum Length of
Splice Plate Measured
Perpendicular to the Joint
(Inches)
6
8
10
12
14
16
16
Percentage
I
Splice Plate
on One Side
Splice Plate
on Both Sides
6i
67
67
67
67
50
50
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
6.4.5.3 Plywood End Joints in Compression. Joints across

the face grain may be considered as transmitting 100 per cent of the allowable
55
compressive stress of the plywood when fabricated in accordance with

either:
(a) Scarf Joints. When slope of scarf is not steeper than 1 in 5; or
(b) Butt Joints. When spliced in accordance with Clause 6.4.5.2, and
having minimum splice plate lengths as prescribed in Table 17.
The allowable compression'"stress shall be reduced proportionally
for shorter splice plate lengths.
6.4.5.4 Scarf-Jointed Sawn Lumber. Scarf joints in sawn
lumber framing members shall not be steeper than 1 in 8 for tension members
or 1 in 5 for compression members for dry service conditions, nor steeper
than 1 in 10 for wet service conditions of use. Scarf joints shall be fabricated
and glued in accordance with Clause 6.3 of CSA Standard 0122, Structural
Glued-Laminated Timber. Allowable stresses for scarf-jointed lumber
framing members shall be as specified in Clause 4 for the grade and species
of lumber used.
6.4.5.5 Butt-Jointed Sawn Lumber

6.4.5.5.1 Butt joints may be used in sawn lumber tension
and compression framing members when members are composed of two or
more laminations. The effective cross-sectional area of the member shall be
computed by subtracting from the gross cross-sectional area, the area of all
laminations containing butt joints at a single cross-section. In addition,
laminations adjoining those containing butt joints, and themselves containing butt joints, shall be considered only partially effective if the spacing
of butt joints in adjoining laminations is less than 50 times the lamination
thickness. The effective area of such adjoining laminations shall be reduced
to the following percentages:
Butt Joint Spacing in
Adjoining Lamina dons
Percentage
50t
100
30t
90
20t
80
60
lOt
where t = lamination thickness.
6.4.5.5.2 Butt joints in adjoining laminations spaced
closer than lOt shall be considered as occurring in the same section.
6.4.5.5.3 The allowable stress in tension for sawn
lumber laminations shall be as specified in Clause 4.3 for sawn lumber
but shall be reduced by 20 per cent at sections containing butt joints.
6.4.5.5.4 The allowable stress in compression for buttjointed sawn lumber framing members shall be as specified in Clause 4.3
for sawn lumber.
NOTE: "Sawn lumber framing members" in these Clauses refers to component parts of plywood
structural assemblies, such as flange laminations in plywood web beams and longitudinal
framing in stressed skin panels.
-12.1- Copyright NRC-CNRC
56
CSA STANDARD 086
7. TIMBER PILING
7.1 Scope. Clause 7 applies to the engineering design of piling; calculation
of the bearing capacity of the soil is not included.

7.2.1 Reference Standard. Design data and requirements specified
herein apply to piling com plying with the requirements of CSA Standard
056, Round Timber Piles.
7.2.2 Preservative Treatment. Design data and requirements

specified herein are based upon the use of piling pressure-treated in accordance with the requirements of CSA Standard 080, Wood Preservation,
for all purposes and conditions of use, except that untreated piling may be
used in permanent construction if cutoff is below a known permanent water
level, or for falsework or temporary construction.
7.3 Design
7.3.1 Buildings. Foundation piling for buildings shall be designed in
accordance with Section 4.2, Foundations, of the National Building Code
of Canada.
7.3.2 Bridges, Wharves and Similar Structures. Piling for bridges,

wharves and similar structures containing foundation piling or piling
projecting above ground level shall be designed in accordance with the
requirements for Foundations and Substructures as prescribed, in CSA
Standard S6, Design of Highway Bridges.
57
8. POLE CONSTRUCTION
8.1 Scope. Clause 8 applies to the engineering design of pole type structures; calculation of the bearing capacity of the soil is not included.

8.2.1 Reference Standard
8.2.1.1 When round poles are used they shall comply with the
requirements of the appropriate CSA Standard as follows:
(a) 015.1, Eastern White Cedar Poles;
(b) 015.2, The Physical Properties of Western Red Cedar Poles
and Reinforcing Stubs;
(c) 015.3, The Physical Properties of Jack, Lodgepole, and Red
Pine Poles, and Reinforcing Stubs; or
(d) C15(E), The Physical Properties and Preservative Treatment
of Douglas Fir Poles.
8.2.1.2 Pole lengths shorter than those given in the Standards
listed in Clause 8.2.1.1 may be used, provided that the same taper and
:same minimum circumference at top are used in calculations.
8.2.1.3 When sawn timber poles are used, they shall comply
with the requirements of Clause 4.
8.2.2 Preservative Treatment. Poles and other wood components in

contact with ground shall be preservatively treated in accordance with
the requirements of CSA Standard 080, Wood Preservation.
8.3 Design
8.3.1 General
8.3.1.1 Design of pole structures shall be in accordance with the
provisions of this Standard. Design of fastenings shall be in accordance
with recognized engineering principles.
8.3.1.2 Poles shall be designed to transmit to the soil all loads
which may be applied and shall be suitable for the soil conditions at the site.
8.3.2 Column Design. Poles shall be designed as members subjected

to combined axial load and bending moment in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 3.3.4. Round poles shall be designed as tapered members
as provided in Clauses 3.4.1.5 and 3.4.2.2.5.
8.3.3 Embedded Portion. That portion of the pole embedded in
ground may be considered as a short column. Bearings on footings shall be
sq uare and true.
8.4 Allowable Unit Stresses for Poles
8.4.1 Round Poles. Allowable unit stresses for round poles, except
Eastern White Cedar, shall be 80 per cent of the allowable unit stresses for
Select Structural grade beams and stringers of the appropriate species
group in Clause 4.3.1. Allowable unit stresses for round Eastern White
Cedar poles shall be 50 per cent of the allowable unit stresses for Select
Structural grade beams and stringers of group E in Clause 4.3.1.
8.4.2 Sawn Poles. Allowable unit stresses for sawn poles shall be
those listed in Clause 4 for the appropriate grade and species.
-123-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
58
CSA STANDARD 086
9. TIMBER FASTENINGS
9.1 Scope. Clause 9 applies to the engineering design of connections using
timber connectors, bolts, lag screws, glulam rivets, and truss plates.

9.2.1 Materials
9.2.1.1 Split Ring Connectors. Tabulated loads and design
methods for split ring connectors given herein are for connectors whose
dimensions are in accordance with Table 18 and which shall be manufactured from hot-rolled carbon steel SAE 1010, meeting the requirements
of the SAE Handbook. Each ring shall form a closed true circle with the
principal axis of the cross-section of the ring metal parallel to the geometric
axis of the ring. The ring shall be bevelled from the central portion toward
the edges to a thickness less than that at mid-section so that it will fit
snugly in a precut groove, or such other means as will accomplish the
equivalent performance shall be used. It shall be cut through in one place
in its circumference to form a tongue and slot.
9.2.1.2 Shear Plate Connectors. Tabulated loads and design
methods are for shear p1ate connectors whose dimensions are in accordance
with Table 18 and which shall be:
(a) Pressed Steel Type. Pressed steel shear plates shall be manufactured from hot-rolled carbon steel, SAE 1010, meeting the
requirements of the SAE Handbook. Each plate shall be a true
circle with a flange around the edge, extending at right angles to
the face of the plate from one face only. The plate portion shall
have a central hole and two small perforations on diametrically
opposite sides of the hole each midway from the centre and circumference; or
(b) Malleable Iron Type. Malleable iron shear plates shall be manufactured according to the requirements of ASTM Standard A47,
l\1alleable Iron Castings (Grade 35018). Each casting shall consist
of a perforated round plate with a flange extending at right angles
to the face of the plate and projecting from one face only. The
plate portion shall have a central bolt hole, reamed to size, with an
integral hub concentric to the bolt hole and extending from the
same face as the flange.
9.2.1.3 Bolts and Lag Screws. Design requirements and data
herein for connector joints, bolted joints, lag screw joints, and lag screw
connector joints are based upon the use of bolts and lag screws of material
conforming to the requirements of ASTM Standard A307, Low-Carbon
Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
9.2.1.4 Truss Plates

9.2.1.4.1 Design requirements herein for truss plate
joints are for light-gauge metal plates that depend upon extended teeth
or nails embedded into the wood to transfer load and which conform to the
requirements of Clause 9.2.1.4.2.
9.2.1.4.2 Truss plates shall be manufactured from
galvanized sheet steel conforming to Grade A or B, ASTM Standard A446,
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheets of Structural Quality, Coils, and
Cut Lengths, having the following minimum properties:
-124-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
59
Ultimate strength .............................. , ........ 48,000 psi

Yield point ............................................ 33,000 psi
Elongation (at failure) in two-inch length ................. 18 per cent.
For such steel, the allowable unit stresses shall be:
Allowable stress in tension ................................ 18,000 psi
Allowable stress in shear ................................ 12,000 psi.
NOTE: Galvanizing may be carried out before manufacture, and should be 1.25 ounces per
square foot, commercial class hot dip process, or approved equal.
TABLE 18
CONNECTOR DIMENSIONS
Dimensions
(Inches)
Spilt Ring
Inside Diameter at Centre when Closed

Thickness of Metal at Centre
2%
0.163
Depth of Metal
0.750
4-Inch Malleable Iron
l%-Inch
Pressed Steel
(Inches)
"-Inch Bolt
(Inches)
Yi-Inch Bolt
(Inches)
Diameter of Plate
2.62
4.02
4.02
Diameter of Bolt Hole
0.81
0.81
0.94
Thickness of Plate
0.17
0.20
0.20
Depth of Flange
0.42
0.62
0.62
Shear Plate
9.2.2 Conditions of Use

9.2.2.1 General. Design data for fastenings given herein are
based upon the conditions of use set forth in Clauses 9.2.2.2 to 9.2.2.8.
9.2.2.2 Tightening and Initial Maintenance. Joints shall be
assembled and bolts tightened so that the surfaces are brought into close
contact. Structures which have been assembled with unseasoned or partially
seasoned timbers shall be inspected regularly at intervals not exceeding
six months until it becomes apparent that further shrinkage of the timbers
will not be appreciable, and at each inspection the fastenings shall be
tightened sufficiently to bring the faces of the connected members into
close con tact.
9.2.2.3 Washers
9.2.2.3.1 A standard cut washer or its equivalent, or in
lieu thereof a metal plate or strap, shall be placed between the wood and
the bolt head, and between the wood and the nut, when a fastening is in
shear.
9.2.2.3.2 When a bolt head or nut bears directly on a
steel plate, washers may be omitted.
9.2.2.3.3 All bolts in direct tension or with a calculated
tension component shall be provided with steel plate washers, standard
-125-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
60
eSA STANDARD 086
ogee washers, or malleable iron washers under heads and nuts. The area of
such washers shall be such that the unit bearing stress on the wood under
the washer shall not exceed the allowable unit stress in compression perpendicular to grain. If steel washers are used, the thickness shall be not
less than one-tenth the diameter or one-tenth the length of the longer side
of the washer (see Table 19).
TABLE 19
MINIMUM STANDARD WASHER SIZES FOR CONNECTOR JOINTS
Washer Sizes
(Inches)
4-lnch Shear Plate
2%-Inch
Shear Plate
~-Inch
Split Rinl!t
4-Inch
Split Rinl!t
Bolt
;::1-Inch
Bolt
2Ys
3%
Square or Round Plate:

Length of Side or Diameter
Thickness
Ys
Type of Washer
Round, Cast Iron or

Malleable Iron Diameter
2~-Inch
9.2.2.4 Maintenance of Edge Distance and End Distance.

At no time subsequent to the erection of the structure shall the projecting
end of a member be trimmed or otherwise altered in such a manner as to
reduce the end distance below the stipulated minimum.
9.2.2.5 Fabrication. Grooves, daps, and holes shall be fabricated
and oriented accurately in the contacting faces. Holes in steel plates shall
be accurately placed to line up with holes in the adjoining wood and shall
be not more than K6 inch larger than the diameter of the bolts or lag screws.
9.2.2.6 Bolt Holes. Bolt holes in wood shall be accurately
aligned and drilled not less than ~ inch larger or more than ~ inch larger
than the bolt diameter.
9.2.2.7 Lag Screw Holes. Lag screw holes shall be in accordance
with the following:
(a) The lead hole for the shank shall have the same diameter as the
shank, and the same depth as the length of the unthreaded shank;
(b) The lead hole for the threaded portion shall have a diameter equal
to 60 to 75 per cent of the shank diameter for Group A species and
40 to 70 per cent of shank diameter for Groups B through F species,
with the larger percentage figure in each range applying to the
larger and longer screws;
(c) The threaded portion of the screw shall be inserted in its lead hole
by turning with a wrench, not by driving with a hammer; and
(d) Soap or other lubricant, not petroleum based, may be used on the
screws or in the lead hole, to facilitate insertion and prevent
damage to the screw.
9.2.2.8 Connector Grooves. Dimensions of connector grooves
and bolt hole sizes shall be in accordance with Table 20.
ea of
nder
pernot
side
61
TABLE 20
CONNECTOR FABRICATION DIMENSIONS
2~-Inch
4-Inch
Ring
(Inches)
Ring
(Inches)
Spilt Ring Groove
Bolt Hole Diameter

Inside Diameter
Width
Depth
%
4.08
0.21
0.50
2.56
0.18
0.375
4-Inch Plate
e
:h
2%-Inch
Plate
(Inches)
Shear Plate Groove
SHEAR PLATE GROOVE:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
~e.
::lg
to
0.19
0.45
0.25
2.25
4.03
1. 55
4.03
1. 55
%
0.97
0.27
0.64
0.22
0.50
3.49
0.97
0.27
0.64
0.22
0.50
3.49
3V
(32)
2bd e
vertical shear, pounds;
the depth of the member less the
distance from the unloaded edge of the
member to the nearest edge of the
nearest connector, inches (See Figure 3) ;
the depth of the member less the
distance from the unloaded edge of the
member to the centre of the nearest
bolt, inches;
width of member, inches.
.II
where V
de (with connectors)
:r
U-Inch
Bolt
(Inches)
Bolt
(Inches)
9.2.3 Eccentric Joints. Eccentric connector and bolted joints and

beams supported by connectors or bolts shall be designed so that F v in
Formula (32) does not exceed the allowable unit stress for longitudinal
shear:
!d
.11
s.
y
2.63
~-Inch
de (with bolts)
...,;---::----r-rUn looded Edge
Connector Joint
Bolted Joint
FIGURE 3
"de" FOR MEMBERS WITH VARIOUS FASTENINGS
-117-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
62
GSA STANDARD 086
9.2.4 Group of Fasteners

9.2.4.1 General. A group of fasteners consists of one or more
rows of fasteners, arranged symmetrically with respect to the axis of the
load.
9.2.4.2 Row of Fasteners

9.2.4.2.1 A row of fasteners consists of:
(a) One or more bolts of the same diameter loaded in single or multiple
shear; or
(b) One or more connector units as defined in Clause 9.3.1.1, or lag
screws of the same type and size, loaded in single shear,
aligned with the direction of load.
9.2.4.2.2 When fasteners in adjacent rows are staggered.
and the distance between adjacent rows is less than one~fourth the distance
between the closest fasteners in adjacent rows measured parallel to the
rows, the adjacent rows shall be considered as one row for purposes of
determining the allowable load on the group. For groups of fasteners having
even numbers of rows, this principle shall apply to each pair. For groups
of fasteners having odd numbers of rows, the more conservative interpretation shall apply.
9.2.4.3 Allowable Load

9.2.4.3.1 The allowable load on a row of fasteners of
the same size and type shall be not greater than the value of P r (pounds)
as determined by Formula (33):
P r = PK nf
(33)
where P = the allowable load on a single fastener as determined
by the relevant requirements of Clause 9.3, 9.4, or 9.5,
pounds;
K = the modification factor appropriate for the type of side
member, member sizes and number of fasteners in a row,
as given in Table 21 or 22;
nf = number of fasteners in one row.
9.2.4.3.2 The allowable load on a group of fasteners is
the sum of the allowable loads on the rows in the group.
9.2.4.4 Cross-Sectional Areas

9.2.4.4.1 Gross cross-sectional areas shall be used, with
no deductions for net section, in calculating cross-sectional area ratios from
Table 21 or 22.
9.2.4.4.2 When a member is loaded perpendicular to
grain direction, its equivalent cross-sectional area shall be the product of
the thickness of the member and the overall width of the fastener group
for calculating cross-sectional area ratios.
t-I
-0
..
Copyright NRC-CNRC
12
> 19
> 28
> 40
>64
< 12
>
>
>
>
19
28
40
64
12
19
19
28
28 - 40
40
64
64
Al (in )t
< 12
,;.no..~
wo
.........,-
NOTES: 1. Al =
2. A2 =
;:;J
co aq
Ii "0
o-n 0..
_t'lI t'lI ~
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.97
0.98
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.92
0.95
0.97
0.98
1.00
1.00
0.92
0.94
0.97
0.99
1.00
1.00
0.84
0.88
0.93
0.96
0.97
0.98
0.85
0.89
0.93
0.96
0.97
0.99
0.76
0.82
0.88
0.92
0.94
0.95
0.78
0.84
0.89
0.92
0.94
0.96
0.68
0.75
0.82
0.87
0.90
0.91
0.71
0.78
0.85
0.89
0.91
0.93
0.61
0.68
0.77
0.83
0.86
0.88
'1
0.65
0.72
0.80
0.86
0.88
0.91
0.55
0.62
0.71
0.79
0.83
0.85
Number of Fastener8 in a Row
cross-sectional area of main member(s) before boring or groovin,g.

sum of the cross-sectional areas of side members before boring or grooving.
*When AdA2 exceeds 1.0, use A 2/A 1
tWhen AdA2 exceeds 1.0, use A2 instead of AI.
tFor AI/A2 between a and 1.0, interpolate or extrapolate from the tabulated values.
1.0
0.5
AI/AJ
..."G~
aq
10
I.J
Ii>
11
o-~
t'lIt'lI
0.59
0.66
0.76
0.83
0.85
0.88
0.49
0.57
0.67
0.75
0.79
0.82
0.54
0.61
0.72
0.80
0.84
0.87
0.43
0.52
0.63
0.71
0.76
0.80
0.49
0.56
0.68
0.78
0.82
0.86
0.38
0.48
0.59
0.69
0.74
0.78
0.44
0.51
0.64
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.34
0.43
0.55
0.66
0.72
0.76
12
0'\
tN
1:11
a:
::!
c=
~
~
a:
a:
=
8
'"
iii'
MODIFICATION FACTORS FOR CONNECTOR, BOLT AND LAG SCREW JOINTS

WITH WOOD SIDE PLATES
;:J;:::r
~o
TABLE 21
I.J
....
W
Copyright NRC-CNRC
NOTES:
35-42
30-35
24-30
0.90
0.93
0.96
0.98
0.93
0.94
0.98
1.00
0.94
0.96
0.98
1.00
0.96
0.97
0.99
1.00
0.98
0.99
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
40 - 64
65
119
120 - 199
200
64
40
65 - 119
120 - 199
200
0.95
0.97
0.98
0.99
0.82
0.88
0.93
0.96
0.86
0.90
0.95
0.97
0.92
0.95
0.97
0.98
0.96
0.98
0.99
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
40 - 64
65 - 119
120
199
200
0.89
0.93
0.96
0.98
0.90
0.93
0.96
0.98
0.94
0.97
0.98
0.99
0.98
0.99
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
40 - 64
65 - 119
120 - 199
200
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
40 - 64
65
119
120
199
200
0.80
0.87
0.91
0.95
0.87
0.92
0.95
0.97
0.94
0.96
0.98
0.99
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
:2
39
64
119
199
25
40
65
120
Al (inS)
1. Al = Cross-sectional area of main member before boring or grooving.

2. A2 = Sum of cross-sectional areas of metal side plates before drilling.
18-24
12-18
2-12
AI/As
TABLE 22
0.75
0.82
0.89
0.93
0.80
0.86
0.92
0.95
0.85
0.90
0.94
0.97
0.89
0.92
0.96
0.98
0.85
0.90
0.94
0.97
0.73
0.81
0.87
0.92
0.69
0.77
0.85
0.90
0.74
0.81
0.88
0.93
0.80
0.86
0.92
0.95
0.84
0.89
0.94
0.96
0.80
0.86
0.92
0.95
0.67
0.75
0.82
0.89
0.63
0.71
0.81
0.87
0.68
0.76
0.85
0.90
0.74
0.82
0.89
0.93
0.58
0.67
0.78
0.84
0.64
0.72
0.82
0.89
0.69
0.79
0.87
0.92
0.74
0.83
0.90
0.93
0.70
0.79
0.86
0.91
0.75
0.82
0.89
0.93
0.79
0.86
0.92
0.95
0.56
0.66
0.75
0.84
0.61
0.70
0.78
0.86
Number of Fasteners in a Row
to
0.53
0.63
0.76
0.82
0.60
0.68
0.80
0.87
0.65
0.76
0.85
0.90
0.69
0.80
0.88
0.92
0.67
0.75
0.83
0.90
0.51
0.62
0.72
0.81
MODIFICATION FACTORS FOR CONNECTOR, BOLT AND LAG SCREW JOINTS

WITH METAL SIDE PLATES
0.49
0.59
0.73
0.80
0.57
0.65
0.78
0.86
0.61
0.73
0.83
0.89
0.64
0.76
0.86
0.92
0.62
0.72
0.80
0.88
0.46
0.58
0.69
0.79
11
0.46
0.56
0.71
0.78
0.55
0.62
0.77
0.85
0.58
0.71
0.81
0.89
0.59
0.73
0.85
0.91
0.58
0.69
0.78
0.87
0.42
0.55
0.66
0.78
11
CI>
~
o00
~
~Z
65
9.3 Design of Timber Connector Joints

9.3.1 General Requirements
9.3.1.1 Connector Unit. For purposes of specifying allowable
connector loads herein, a connector unit shall consist of one of the following,
in any joint of any number of members:
(a) One split ring connector with its bolt in single shear;
(b) One shear plate connector with its bolt in single shear used in
conjunction with a steel strap or shape in a timber-to-metal joint; or
(c) Two shear plate connectors used back-to-back in the contact
faces of a timber-to-timber joint with their bolt in single shear.
9.3.1.2 Concentric Grooves. If grooves for two sizes of split

rings are cut concentric in the same timber surface, rings shall be installed
in both grooves and the total allowable load shall be the tabulated load for
the larger ring only.
9.3.1.3 Distance Factors. Connectors installed at any edge
distance or end distance less than the minimum distance for which a tabulated value appears in the appropriate column of Table 27 or 28, or at a
spacing less than the values for K., = 0.75 in Table 29, shall not be considered to carry load. Factors for reduction of load for edge distance, end
distance and spacing shall be separately determined and the lowest factors
so determined for anyone connector shall be applied to all connectors
resisting a common force in a joint.
9.3.1.4 Moisture Content Factor. For purposes of assigning
moisture content factors specified in Table 30, lumber which has been
seasoned to approximately 15 per cent moisture content to a depth of
%' inch from the surface shall be considered seasoned. For lumber which
has been partially seasoned, proportional intermediate moisture content
factors maybe used.
9.3.1.5 Lumber Thickness. Connectors installed in lumber of a
thickness less than the minimum specified in Table 26 for the connector
type and use, shall not be considered to carry load.
9.3.1.6 Lag Screw Connector Joints. When lag screws instead
of bolts are used with connectors, the allowable load shall vary uniformly
with penetration into the member receiving the point, from the full allowable
load for one connector unit with bolt for standard penetration, to 0.75
times the full allowable load for one connector unit with bolt for minimum
penetration. Penetration shall be in accordance with Table 23, and shall
be not less than the minimum value.
9.3.1.7 Net Section.
9.3.1.7.1 Load-carrying capacities of connector joints
shall be checked for net section in accordance with Clause 3.1.9. The area
deducted from the gross section shall include the projected area of that
portion of the connectors within the member fl.nd that portion of the bolt
hole not within the connector projected area, located at the critical plane.
Where connectors are staggered, adjacent connectors shall be considered as
occurring in the same critical transverse plane, unless their spacing centreto-centre parallel to grain is two connector diameters or more (see Figure 4).
-131-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
66
CSA STANDARD 086
Example: A 3-inch by 12-inch nominal sawn member has 4-inch shear plate
grooves in a staggered pattern on both faces, joined by a bolt
hole for a :u; -inc~ diameter bolt.
Case 1: Spacing parallel to grain equal to 8 inches (two connector diameters) or greater.
8" or greater
Gross area = 2.50 (11.25) = 28.125 in2

Deduct projected area of connectors and bolt = 1 x 6.15
= 6.150 in 2
= 21.975 in 2
Net area
Case 2: Spacing parallel to grain equal to 6 inches (less than two connector
diameters).
less than 8"
Gross area = 2.50 (11.25) = 28.125 in 2

Deduct projected area of connectors and bolts = 2 x 6.15
12.300 in 2
Net area
15.825 in 2
FIGURE 4
EXAMPLES OF DETERMINING NET SECTION
9.3.1.7.2 For sawn lumber, the compression or tension

stresses in the net section shall not exceed the applicable allowable unit
stress in compression or tension shown in Table 8A, 8B, 8C, or 8D, modified
by Clause 3.3.2.
-132Copyright NRC-CNRC
ate
wIt
lia-
67
9.3.1.7.3 For glued-laminated timber, the tension or

compression stress in the net section shall not exceed the allowable unit
stress in tension parallel to grain permitted for sections reduced by daps or
connectors shown in Table 12, modified by Clause 3.3.2.
TABLE 23
ALLOWABLE LOAD FACTORS FOR SPLIT RINGS AND SHEAR

PLATES USED WITH LAG SCREWS AT STANDARD AND MINIMUM
PENETRATION
Penetration of Lag Screw Into Member
Receiving Point
(Shank Diameter Inches)
1!4"
Penetration
B.D.F
Factors for
Allowable
Load on one
Connector
Unit and Bolt
Standard
10
11
1.00
Minimum
3~
4~
0.75
Standard
1.00
Minimum
3~
472
0.75
Species Group
Connector
2~-Inch
Split Ring,
4-Inch Split
Ring, or 4Inch Shear
Plate
2% Shear
Plate
ctor
When steel side Plates are used, full allowable loads may be used with minimum penetration..
9.3.2 Allowable Loads. The load on a connector unit shall be not

greater than the value of P (pounds) as determined by Formula (34) and
as modified by Clause 3.3.2, but in no case shall the load on a shear plate
exceed the appropriate value given in Table 31:
(34)
P = X Kg K t K. Km
where X = Allowable load on a connector unit loaded at angle e to
grain, as given in Table 24, pounds, when
Kg = K t = K. = Km = 1.00, pounds
(35)
Kg = Factor for species, Table 25;
K t = Factor for thickness, Table 26;
K. = The lowest of the appropriate factor for spacing, end
distance, or edge distance, Tables 27, 28, and 29.
Km = Factor for moisture condition, Table 30.
lsion
unit
ified
-133 -
Copyright NRC-CNRC
68
eSA STANDARD 086
TABLE 24
VALUES OF X
FOR
NORMAL DURATION OF FULL DESIGN LOAD
X, Allowable Load on Connector Unit, Pounds
Shear Plate Connectors
Spltt Ring
Connectors
(J
Angle of
Load
to Grain
(Degrees)
2J.i-Inch
O-P
4-Inch
Metal Side Plates
4-Inch
2~-Inch
Wood
Side
Plates
Group A
Woods
Group B
and e
Woods
GroupO,
E, and F
Woods
2,130
5,260
2,890
4,360
4,840
4,580
4,360
10
2,695
5,190
2,855
4,305
4,155
4,510
4,305
20
2,605
5,005
2,150
4,150
4,525
4,325
4,150
30
2,480
4,140
2,610
3,935
4,215
4,065
3,935
40
2,335
4,455
2,455
3,695
3,890
3,185
3,695
50
2,205
4,185
2,305
3,415
3,590
3,530
3,415
60
2,090
3,960
2,185
3,290
3,350
3,320
3,290
10
2,010
3,195
2,095
3,150
3,180
3,165
3,150
80
1,955
3,695
2,040
3,010
3,015
3,010
3,010
90-0
1.940
3.660
2.020
3.040
3,040
3,040
3.040
NOTE:
For intermediate values of e, interpolate on a straight line basis.
TABLE 25
FACTORS FOR SPECIES (KJ
[Species Group
Values of K.
A*
B
C
D
E
F
1.000
0.808
0.876
0.720
0.663
0.816
*For Yellow Birch, Hard Maple, Red and White Oak, use 117 per cent of value of Group A
Woods.
-134-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
TABLE 26
FACTORS FOR THICKNESS (KJ
CoDDector Type
and Size
Number of Faces
of a Piece
Contalnlni
CoDDectora
on a Bolt
Net
Thickness
of Timber
(Inches)
Values
of
K,
1%
1
1.000
0.831
2
1%
1.000
0.777
1%
1
0.982
0.666
3
2%
2
1%
1.000
0.947
0.806
0.667
1~
0.933
2~
2
1%
1.000
0.945
0.750
1~
1~
1.000
0.866
372
3
2%
2
1.000
0.950
0.863
0.744
0.667
2%-inch Split Ring
4-inch Split R in&,
1
2%-inch Shear Plate
2
1
4-inch Shear Plate
2
1~
-135-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
69
70
CSA STANDARD 086
TABLE 27
VALUES OF K. FOR EDGE DISTANCE
Values of It.. Load at flO to Grain
Edge
Distance
(Inches)
1~
1%
2
2%
2M
2%
2~
2%
2%
2%
3
3%
3~
3%
3~
3%
3%
NOTES:
2~-Inch
SlJlIt Ring or 2%-Inch

hear P18te
6 _ 15
8 - 30
8_45 _90
0.935
0.957
0.978
1.000
0.880
0.900
0.920
0.940
0.830
0.851
0.873
0.894
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.960
0.980
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.915
0.936
0.958
0.979
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
4-Inch Split Ring or Shear Plate
8 - 15
--
0.930
0.953
0.977
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
6 _ 30
8_45_910
0.880
0.900
0.920
0.940
0.830
0.851
0.873
0.894
0.960
0.980
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.915
0.936
0.958
0.979
1.000
e = 0, the minimum edge distance for the particular

connector size gives a value of K. = 1,000. For intermediate values of e not shown
in the Table, straight line interpolation may be used.
2. Values of K. apply to loaded edge distance only. Minimum edge distance for
loaded or unloaded edge is 1% inches for 2'Y2-inch split rings and 2%-inch SMar
plates, and 2% inches for 4-inch split rings and shear plates.
1. At angle of load to grain
F
71
TABLE 28
VALUES OF K. FOR END DISTANCE
Compression
4-Inch SpUt Rlna or
Shear Plate
2:n-Inch Spilt Rlna or

%-Inch Shear Plate
,,0
End
Distance
(Inches)
i~
2"
3
3}(
3%
3~
3"
4
4:}(
4:~
4:"
5
Ui
5"
6
~~
6~
ar
111
Tenalon
2~-Inch
Spilt
RID!. or
.2%- nch
Shear
Plate
!
4-Inch
Split
Ring
or
Shear
Plate
0 .. 45
0.625
0.648
0.672
0.719
0.766
0.625
0.645
0.684
0.724
0.625
0.659
0.693
0.625
0.789
0.813
0.859
0.906
0.953
0.743
0.763
0.803
0.842
0.882
0.710
0.727
0.761
0.795
0.830
0.646
0.667
0.708
0.750
0.797
0.625
0.641
0.674
0.707
0.739
0.625
0.652
0.679
0.705
0.710
0.727
0.761
0.795
0.830
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.921
0.961
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.866
0.898
0.932
0.967
1.000
0.833
0.875
0.917
0.958
1.000
0.772
0.804
0.837
0.870
0.902
0.732
0.759
0.786
0.812
0.839
0.866
0.898
0.932
0.966
1.000
0.732
0.759
0.786
0.812
0.839
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.935
0.967
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.866
0.893
0.920
0.946
0.973
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.866
0.893
0.920
0.946
0.973
1.000
(I _
(1 .. 90
--
(I ..
---
(I _
45
----
(1 .. 90
---
(I -
0 to (I-OOto
90
90
0.625
0.659
0.693
---0.625
0.652
0.679
0.705
NOTE: Values of a shown are for angle of load to grain. For intermediate mlues of
shown in the Table, straight line interpolation may be used.
-137-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
nol
72
CSA STANDARD 086
I maintain edge
dista.nce
..
A = End distance
D Connector diameter
FIGURE 5
END DISTANCE FOR MEMBER WITH SLOPING END CUT
A = End distance
B = Unloaded-edge distance
C = Loaded-edge distance
R = Spacing
FIGURE 6
END DISTANCE, EDGE DISTANCE, AND SPACING
-138-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
F
OODE OF REOOMMENDED PBAGrICE FOR ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
73
TABLE 29
CONNECTOR SPACING FOR VALUES OF K. BETWEEN 0.75 AND 1.00
Anale of
Load to
Grain
Anale of
Connector
Row to
Grain
Degrees
Deareea
15
30
45
2M-Inch Split Rinas

and
2%-Inch Shear Plates
0
15
30
45
60
75
90 min.
Minimum Spaclna Between Connectors

Measured Centre-to-Centre
NOTE:
6%;
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
4%
0
15
30
45
60
75
90
3%
3%
3%
3%
6
5%;
578
0
15
30
45
60
75
90
3%
0
15
30
45
60
75
90
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
4J4
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
6~
5~
3~
3%
3%
3~
3%;
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
15
30
45
60
75
90
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
9
8%
5
5
8
7%
7
7~
678
5%
578
5
6~
5%
5%
5J4
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
578
5
4%;
4%
478
3~
K. - 1.00
5
5
5
5
478
3%
3%
K .... 0.75
4Y2
3Y2
o min.
60-90
K. = 1.00
K. - 0.75
4-Inch Split Rinas

and
4-Inch Shear Plates
3~
3~
4~
4~
4%:
478
478
478
3~
4
478
4~
6~
6~
678
5%;
5%
5Y2
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5~
5~
5%;
5%;
5%;
5~
5%
5%;
5~
Intermediate values of K. between 0.75 and 1.00 for intermediate connector spacing$:
may be interpolated on a straight-line basis.
TABLE 30
FACTORS FOR MOISTURE CONTENT (Km)
Condition of Timber
At Time of Fabrication
Seasoned
Unseasoned
Seasoned or Unseasoned
In Service
Seasoned
Seasoned
Unseasoned or Wet
Values of La
1.00
0.80
0.67
74
eSA STANDARD 086
TABLE 31
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOADS ON SHEAR PLATES
Maximum Allowable Load
Pounds
Type of Load
2"'-lnch
Shear Plate
4-lnch Shear Plate

~-Inch
Bolt
U-Inch Bolt
A. Washers Provided, No Bearing on

Threaded Portion of Bolt:
1. All loads other than wind
2. Wind load only
2800
3870
4970
6630
6760
9020
B. When Bearing May Occur on the

Threaded Portion of the Bolt:
1. All loads other than wind
1: Wind load only
2580
3440
4420
5890
6010
8020
9.4 Design of Bolted Joints

9.4.1 General
9.4.1.1 For purposes of specifying allowable loads on bolted
joints herein, tabulated values are given for one bolt in double shear in a
3-member joint, consisting of a main (centre) member and two side members.
Bolt lid ratio is the ratio of its length I in the main member to its diameter d.
9.4.1.2 Tabulated values for calculating loads apply to species
groups irrespective of grade of lumber used. Loosening of nuts, resulting
from any shrinkage, is allowed for in the tabulated values. Tabulated
values shall apply also for tight nuts.
9.4.1.3 A standard cut washer or its equivalent, or a metal
plate or strap in lieu thereof, shall be placed between the wood and the
bolt head and between the wood and the nut.
9.4.2 Condition of Timber

9.4.2.1 Tabulated values are for bolts in timber seasoned to a
moisture content approximately equal to that to which it will eventually
come in service.
9.4.2.2 For timber installed unseasoned and which becomes
seasoned in place, the allowable bolt loads derived in accordance with
Clause 9.4.8 shall be modified by the appropriate factor from Table 32.

9.4.3.1 Allowable loads calculated from tabulated values as
adjusted for condition of timber, apply to bolted joints used under dry
service conditions as in most covered structures.
9.4.3.2 When a joint is to be used in a location that is continually
wet, the allowable load on the bolt shall be reduced by one-third.
-140-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
p
75
TABLE 32
MODIFICATION FACTORS FOR ALLOWABLE LOADS ON
BOLTS AND LAG SCREWS IN TIMBER SEASONED IN PLACE
Arrangement of Bolts
or Lag Screws
I.
s
5
f
Splice
Plate
Direction of Loading
Parallel
to Grain
Perpendicular
to Grain
One Fastener Only
All
1.0
1.0
Single Row
Parallel to Grain
Wood
Metal
1.0
1.0
0.4
1.0
Two Rows Per Splice

Plate Parallel to Grain, With
Spacing Between Rows 5 Inches or
Wood
1.0
0.4
Metal
0.4
0.4
Multiple Rows With Separate

Splice Plates for Each Row
All
1.0
0.4
All Other Arrangements
0.4
0.4
Less
d
a
Type of
9.4.4 Side Members

9.4.4.1 Materials. Tabulated values are for side members of
wood. When steel plates are used for side members, the allowable loads
calculated from tabulated values for parallel-to-grain loading may be
increased by 25 per cent but no increase shall be made for perpendicularto-grain loads.
9.4.4.2 Dimensions
9.4.4.2.1 Tabulated loads apply when side members of
wood are each at least one-half the thickness of main member. If side
members are thicker than one-half the thickness of the main member, no
increase is permitted.
9.4.4.2.2 When wood splice plates are used on both
sides of a timber which is more than twice the thickness of one splice plate,
the allowable bolt load shall' be computed on the basis that the centre'
timber is exactly twice the thickness of one splice plate, or of the thinner
splice plate if the splice plates are not of equal thickness.
9.4.5 Single and Multiple Shear

9.4.5.1 Single Shear. The allowable load for a bolt in a joint
consisting of two members only (single shear) shall be one-half the allowable
load calculated for a 3-member joint having a main member twice the
thickness of the thinner member.
9.4.5.2 Multiple Shear. For multiple-member joints other than
those of two or three members, the allowable load shall vary directly as the
number of shear planes involved. The allowable load for each shear plane
shall be equal to the strength of a two-member joint in single shear as
calculated above.
9.4.6 Combined Shear and Axial Load. Tabulated loads are for
loading acting perpendicular to the axis of a bolt. If the load in a twomember joint acts at an angle to the axis of a bolt, the allowable load
-141-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
76
eSA STANDARD 086
component acting perpendicular to the bolt axis shall be equal to one-half

the tabulated load for a bolt twice the length of the bolt length in the
thinner piece. Washers or plates of adequate thickness and size to resist the
load component parallel to axis of bolt shall be installed.
9.4.7 Placement of Bolts in Joints (See Figure 7)

9.4.7.1 Net Section
9.4.7.1.1 For parallel-to-grain loading with staggered
bolts, adjacent bolts shall be considered to be placed at the critical section
unless their spacing centre-to-centre parallel to grain is 8-bolt diameters
or more.
9.4.7.1.2 For splice joints, in which the loading and the
bolt rows are parallel to the grain, any eccentricity of loads applied to the
member by the bolts shall be taken into account in determining the adequacy
of the member.
9.4.7.2 Spacing of Bolts in a Row. In a row of bolts aligned
with direction of load regardless of direction of grain and measured from
centres of bolts, minimum spacings and distances shall be:
(a) For parallel-to-grain loading, four times the bolt diameter; and
(b) For perpendicular-to-grain loading:
(i) If the design load approaches the bolt bearing capacity of side
members, spacing shall be the same as for parallel-to-grain
loading;
(ii) If the design load is less than the bolt bearing capacity of
the side members, spacing may be reduced.
9.4.7.3 Spacing Between Rows of Bolts

9.4.7.3.1 For parallel-to-grain loading, the spacing between rows shall be not less than twice the bolt diameter.
9.4.7.3.2 For perpendicular-to-grain loading, the spacing
shall be at least 272 times the bolt diameter for bolt lid ratio of 2, and 5
times the bolt diameter for bolt lid ratios of 6 or more. For ratios between
2 and 6, the spacing shall be obtained by straight line interpolation.
9.4.7.3.3 Where the spacing between two rows of bolts
exceeds 5 inches in a direction perpendicular to grain, or where more than
two rows are required, separate splice plates shall be used for each row
of bolts.
9.4.7.4 End Distance. The end distance shall be not less than:
(a) Seven times the bolt diameter for a softwood member in tension;
(b) Five times the bolt diameter for a hardwood member in tension; or
(c) Four times the bolt diameter or 2 inches, whichever is the greater
for a member of any species in compression.
9.4.7.5 Edge Distance. For members loaded perpendicular to
grain, the loaded edge distance shall be at least four times the bolt diameter.
For members loaded parallel to grain, the edge distance shall be at least
172 times the bolt diameter, or half the distance between rowsZof bolts,
whichever is the greater.
.alf
:he
;he
Load, perpendicular to Grolll
Loads parallel to Grain
Edge maroin
Row of bolts -
.....L.-.:.-.
T.
~ spaci1g
.--L.
perpe~iCUlar
I
Edoe maroin
to Grain
EdO' margin toword which bolt I, octino-
Center to center
T iI -.
-LJ ll
-=--..L
perpendicular to Grain
L.-t, __-
77
ed
:>0
~rs
le
le
;y
!e
n
FIGURE 7
PLACEMENT OF BOLTS IN JOINT
9.4.8 Allowable Loads. The allowable load on one bolt in a joint

shall be not greater than the values of P, Q, or N (pounds) as determined
by Formula 36,37, or 38, as applicable, modified by Clauses 3.3.2.1, 3.3.2.2,
3.3.2.3, and 3.3.2.4, but in no case shall the allowable stress of the steel
parts be exceeded:
(a) For loads parallel to grain;
P = Yp AK,
(36)
(b) For loads perpendicular to grain;
(37)
Q = YcAKrK ..
(c) For loads at angle to grain;
where P
Q =
N
Yp =
Yc =
K, =
Kr =
KT
PQ
(38)
P sin2S + Q cos2S
allowable load on bolt parallel to grain, pounds;
allowable load on bolt perpendicular to grain, pounds;
allowable load on bolt at any angle a to grain, pounds;
angle of load to grain, degrees;
allowable unit stress in bolt bearing parallel to grain, psi,
Table 33;
allowable unit stress in bolt bearing perpendicular to
grain, psi, Table 33;
projected area of bolt in main member, square inches;
factor for lid of bolt in main member for loads parallel
to grain, Table 34;
factor for lid of bolt in main member for loads perpendicular to grain, Table 35;
factor for diameter of bolt for loads perpendicular to
grain, Table 36.
-143-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
78
CSA STANDARD 086
TABLE 33
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES IN BOLT BEARING
FOR
(SIDE MEMBERS OF WOOD)
Allowable Unit Strees
Psi
Parallel
to Grain Yp
Species Group
Perpendicular
to Grain Y.
A
B
C
1,140
300
875
930
150
770
160
750
670
150
120
Yellow Birch, Hard Maple,

Red and White Oak
220
440
1,320
Allowable loads parallel to grain may be increased 25 per cent if steel side plates are used.
TABLE 34
FACTORS FOR lId OF BOLT IN MAIN MEMBER PARALLEL TO GRAIN
Value of Kl
lid of Bolt
In Main Member'
Group A
Woods
GroupB
and C Woods
Gr0'W D
and E oods
GroupF
Woods
1 to 2
2.5
3
3.5
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.99
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
4
4.5
5
6
0.96
0.92
0.85
0.72
0.99
0.97
0.92
0.80
1.00
0.99
0.97
0.88
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.94
7
8
9
10
12
0.62
0.54
0.48
0.43
0.36
0.69
0.60
0.53
0.48
0.40
0.76
0.66
0.59
0.53
0.44
0.81
0.71
0.63
0.56
0.47
NOTE:
Yellow Birch, Hard Maple, and Red and White Oak have the same factors as group A
Woods.
-144-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
p
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRAGrICE FOR ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
79
TABLE 35
FACTORS FOR lId OF BOLT IN MAIN MEMBER PERPENDICULAR TO
GRAIN
Value of .K.r
Yellow Birch
urt:'~&le
Group A
Woods
Group C
Woods
GroupB, D, E
and FWoods
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.99
0.96
0.92
7
7.5
8
8.5
0.99
0.97
0.92
0.87
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.98
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.87
0.81
0.75
0.70
9
9.5
10
11
12
0.81
0.76
0.71
0.62
0.55
0.93
0.88
0.83
0.73
0.64
1.00
1.00
0.98
0.87
0.75
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.48
0.43
lId of Bolt
In Main Member
1 to 5 inc.
5.5
6
6.5
WhiteOak
TABLE 36
FACTOR FOR DIAMETER OF BOLT LOADS PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN
Bolt Diameter'
(Inches)
Value of.K.y
2.50
1.95
1.68
1.52
Ys
~
~
1.41
1.33
1.27
1.19
1~
1.14
1.10
1.07
1.03
1.00
1~
1~
2~
3 up
9.5 Design of Lag Screw Joints

9.5.1 Lag Screw Unit
9.5.1.1 For purposes of specifying allowable loads on lag screw
joints, values tabulated in this Standard shall apply to one lag screw either
in withdrawal or in lateral resistance to single shear in a two-member joint.
9.5.1.2 Allowable loads for lag screw joints in a given species
group apply irrespective of grade of lumber used.
-145-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
80
eSA STANDARD 086
9.5.2 Condition of Timber

9.5.2.1 The allowable loads given are for lag screws in timber
seasoned to a moisture content approximately equal to that which it will
eventually reach in service,
9.5.2.2 For timber installed unseasoned and which become
seasoned in place, the allowable lag screw load determined in accordance
with Clause 9,5,8 shall be modified by the appropriate factor from Table 32,

9.5.3.1 Allowable loads given herein apply to joints used indoors
or in a location which is always dry.
9.5.3.2 When a joint is to be used in a location that is occasionally
wet but quickly dried, the allowable load on the lag screw shall be reduced
by one-quarter; and when used in a location that is continually wet, the
allowable load shall be reduced by one-third.
9.5.4 Side Members

9.5.4.1 Materials. When metal side plates are used, allowable
loads determined by the formula for parallel-to-grain loading may be
increased 25 per cent but no increase shall be made to the allowable loads
for perpendicular-to-grain loading. The stresses induced in the metal plate
and at the bearing of the lag screw on the plate shall not exceed the allowable
stresses for the metal used.
9.5.4.2 Dimensions
9.5.4.2.1 Tabulated values are for side members of wood
having a thickness equal to 3}/2 (or more) times the shank diameter of the
lag screw.
9.5.4.2.2 For wood side plates having a thickness equal
to twice the lag screw diameter, allowable loads determined from tabular
values shall be multiplied by a factor of 62 per cent; for intermediate values
straight-line interpolation may be used.
9.5.5 Penetration of Threads

9.5.5.1 In determining the penetration of a lag screw into a
member, the reduced portion (threaded or gimlet point) shall not be considered a part of the threaded portion.
9.5.5.2 The formulae for determining allowable loads on lag
screws are based on methods of insertion and predrilling of lead holes
required in Clause 9.2.2.7.
9.5.5.3 Penetration of Lag Screw into the Main Member

9.5.5.3.1 The formulae for determining allowable loads
in lateral resistance on lag screws are based on the following lag screw
penetrations into the main member:
(b) Group A Woods ................... 9 times shank diameter;
(c) Group B, C, and F Woods ...... " .. 10 times shank diameter; and
(d) Group D and E Woods ............. 11 times shank diameter.
9.5.5.3.2 If the required penetrations of Clause 9.5,5.3.1
can not be obtained, the allowable loads shall be reduced in direct proportion
to the ratio of actual penetration to required penetration; allowable loads
shall not be increased for penetration greater than that required.
-146-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
p
81
9.5.6 Placement of Lag Screws in Joints. The spacings, end distances, edge distances and net section for lag screw joints shall be the same
as for joints with bolts of a diameter equal to the shank diameter of the
lag screw used (See Clause 9.4.7).
9.5.7 Allowable Loads in Lateral Resistance
9.5.7.1 Side Grain. The allowable load on one lag screw in a
joint shall be not greater than the value of P, Q, or N as determined by
Formula (39), (40), or (41), as applicable, modified by Clauses 3.3.2.1,
3.3.2.2, 3.3.2.3, and 3.3.2.4, but in no case shall the strength of steel parts
be exceeded :
(a) For loads parallel to grain;
P = Krd 2
(39)
(b ) For loads perpendicular to grain;
(40)
Q = K f K nd 2
(c) For loads at angle e to grain.
N =
PQ
(41)
Psin 2 e + Q cos2e
where Kf = constant for species group, Table 37;
Kn = factor for perpendicular-to-grain loads, Table 38;
shank diameter of lag screw, inches;
d
P
allowable load on lag screw parallel to grain, pounds;
allowable load on lag screw perpendicular to grain,
Q
pounds;
N
allowable load on lag screw at an angle e to grain, pounds.
9.5.7.2 End Grain. The allowable load on lag screws in lateral
resistance, when the lag screw is inserted parallel to grain in the end grain
of the main member, shall be no greater than two-thirds the resistance to
lateral loads perpendicular to grain when in side grain. No increase for
metal side plates shall be permitted.
9.5.8 Allowable Loads in Withdrawal

9.5.8.1 Root Strength. In determining withdrawal resistance,
the allowable tensile strength of the lag screw at the root of its threads
shall not be exceeded.
9.5.8.2 Side Grain. The allowable load for lag screws in withdrawal from side grain, with the axis of the lag screw perpendicular to the
fibres, shall be determined from Formula (42), modified by Clauses 3.3.2.1,
3.3.2.2, 3.3.2.3, and 3.3.2.4.
(42)
p = Kwd~
where p
allowable load per inch of penetration of threaded portion
of lag screw into member receiving the point, pounds;
Kw = constant for species group, Table 37;
d
shank diameter of lag screw, inches.
9.5.8.3 End Grain. The allowable load for lag screws in withdrawal from end grain shall not be taken as more than three-fourths of that
for withdrawal from side grain.
NOTE: Use of lag screws in
end grain should be avoided whenever possible.
82
eSA STANDARD 086
TABLE 37
CONSTANTS FOR SPECIES GROUP
(SIDE MEMBERS OF WOOD-NORMAL DURATION OF LOAD)
Species Group
Value of Kf.
Value of K ..
2,100
1,800
1,900
1,650
1,550
1,800
360
320
435
2,400
860
Yellow Birch, Hard Maple,

Red and White Oak
590
430
480
*K, may be increased ZS per cent Jor steel side plates in parallel-Io-grain loading O1f,ly.
TABLE 38
FACTOR FOR PERPENDICULAR-TO-GRAIN LOADS
Lag Screw Diameter
(Inch)
Value of K.
1.00
0.91
0.85
0.16
0.11
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.52
0.50
9.6 Design of Glulam Rivet Joints

9.6.1 General
9.6.1.1 The design criteria for the giulam rivet joint are primarily
applicable to parallel- and perpendicular-to-grain loading in single shear
with steel side plates.
9.6.1.2 Design criteria are based on glulam rivets and steel side
plates in accordance with Figure 8. Side plates shall be of adequate crosssection to resist tension and compression forces as well as buckling at
cri tical sections.
9.6.1.3 Design criteria are based on giulam rivets driven through
circular holes in the steel side plates until the conical head is firmly seated.
The rivets shall, in all cases, be placed with their major cross-sectional axis
aligned parallel to the grain.
9.6.2 Calculation of Allowable Load. The allowable load in tension

of a timber member into which glulam rivets have been driven shall be
-148-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
p
83
calculated by multiplying the gross area of the member by the allowable

unit stress given in Table 12 for "tension parallel to grain where section
reduced by notches, daps, connectors, or abrupt changes in section I t .
NOTE: Designers should exercise due caution to assure that 'he stress in shear and tension
parallel to grain outside and adjacent to glulam rivet group does not exceed the appropriate values given in Table 12. The area resisting shear is equal to twice the glulam rivet
penetration plus the distance between the outer rows multiplied by the length of rows
plus the end distance. The area resisting tension parallel to grain is equal to the glulam
rivet penetration times the distance between the outer rows of the glulam rivet group.
9.6.3 Limitations
9.6.3.1 Load values determined from Tables 39, 40, 41, 42, and
43 apply to glued-laminated Douglas Fir (species Group A).
9.6.3.2 Allowable load values determined from Table 39 or 40
shall be adjusted for service conditions of the timber in accordance with
Table 42.
9.6.4 Allowable Loads

9.6.4.1 Allowable loads parallel to, and perpendicular to grain
are given for one glulam rivet row in Table 39 or 40 respectively. A glulam
rivet row is defined as a series of glulam rivets aligned in the direction of
the load (regardless of rivet orientation) and spaced in accordance with
Clause 9.6.5. The provisions of Clause 9.2.4 do not apply.
9.6.4.2 When the load is applied at an angle to grain other
than 0 degrees (parallel) or 90 degrees (perpendicular), the allowable load
on the connection may be approximated by Formula (43) :
N =
P xQ
(43)
P sin 2 8 + Qcos 2 8
where N
allowable load at angle 8 to the grain direction;
P
allowable load parallel to grain;
allowable load perpendicular to grain;
Q
e
angle between the direction of grain and the direction of
load.
shall be adjusted for depth of glulam rivet penetration into timber, in
accordance with Table 42.
are based upon normal duration of load. These values shall be modified in
accordance with Table 43, for other duration of load.
9.6.4.5 Allowable loads given in Tables 39 and 40 are based on
plates not less than U inch thick with U inch diameter holes. For different
plate thicknesses and hole sizes, these allowable loads shall be adjusted
according to Tables 39 and 40 (see Footnotes to these Tables).
9.6.4.6 When glulam rivets are used in end grain, load values
shall be 50 per cent of those for perpendicular-to-side grain applications
when the slope of cut is 90 degrees to the side grain. For sloping end cuts
these values can be increased linearly to 100 per cent when slope of cut is
parallel to side grain.
9.6.4.7 When several rows are placed side by side and loaded
parallel to grain the total load is equal to the sum of the loads per row.
For perpendicular-to-grain loading, reduction values as shown in Table 41
shall be used.
-149-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
84
CSA STANDARD 086
9.6.5 Spacing of GIuIam Rivets (Figure 9)

9.6.5.1 For both parallel-to-grain and perpendicular-to-grain
loading the minimum spacing of glulam rivets shall be 0.5 inches perpendi.
cular to the grain and 1.0 inches parallel to the grain.
9.6.5.2 For parallel-to-grain loading the edge distance shall be
not less than 1.5 inches.
9.6.5.3 For perpendicular-to-grain loading, the loaded edge
distance measured from the nearest rivet shall be not less than 0.25 inches
times the number of rivets in the row. In no case shall the edge distance be
less than 2 inches.
9.6.5.4 For perpendicular-to-grain loading the end distance shall
be not less than 4 inches.
9.6.5.5 Where joints are made by driving glulam rivets from
opposite sides of the timber member so that their points overlap, their
combined spacing shall be not less than stated in Clause 9.6.5.1.
-150-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
\II
Copyright NRC-CNRC
NOTES:
A
B
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
3
4
5
6
A
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
.5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
4.
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
I-
} L dIll
1.98
2.15
2.31
2.32
2.32
1.48
1.65
1.82
Load
(Kips)
2.93
3.05
3.05
2.25
2.38
2.52
2.66
2.79
2.10
8
9
11
3
4
5
6
7
I-
---
Load
(Kips)
For ~-inch holes in 'U-inch plates use 90 per cent of these values.
For 'U-inch holes in ~-inch plates use 90 per cent of these values.
For ~-inch holes in !-M-inch plates use 81 per cent of these values.
Minimum End Distance, Inches
------
0.95
1.16
1.37
1.37
1.37
Load
(Kips)
1
---._---
;:::
Load
(Kips)
10
W
("t)
(p
12
j';::l
Load
(Kips)
- -- - - --'--
C'P
1.5
1.5
1.5
1..5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.92
3.03
3.26
3.48
3.48
2.48
2.59
2.70
2.81
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
11
13
2
3
4
5
7
9
11
13
15
2.85
2.95
3.06
3.16
3.37
3.58
3.80
4.00
4.00
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
11
3.98
4.14
4.30
4.38
4.38
13
15
17
19
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
3
5
7
9
3.23
3.32
3.48
3.65
3.81
- - --- - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - -
Load
(Kips)
== Minimum Edge Distance, Inches

oa para e to graJn.
The values in Table 39 are for steel side plates not less tban 'U-inch thick with 'U-inch diameter holes.
22
24
26
28
30
13
14
16
18
20
8
9
10
11
12
5
6
1
"
Minimum Total Lenllth

Glulam Rivet Joint
(Inches)
GJuJam
Rivets per Row
;J
ALLOWABLE LOAD FOR ONE GLULAM RIVET ROW (NORMAL DURATION)

PARALLEL TO GRAIN-FOR 3 INCH PENETRATION-DOUGLAS FIR
TABLE 39
"1
00
Vt
~
t:I:I
:j
zc
Z
~
C
lid
a~
!i
~
~
lid
oIS!:!
..'"
Copyright NRC-CNRC
0.8
2.5
NOTES:
"
Load
(Kips)
Minimum Total Length

Glulam Rivet Joint
(Inches)
D
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
Load
(Kips)
"
4
2.4
Load
(Kips)
"
3.2
Load
(Kips)
Mi?,i~um Loailed.Eilge Distance InChes} Load perpendicular to rai

Mtmmum End DtStance, Inches
g n
These values are for steel side plates not less than ,,-inch thick with ,,-inch diameter holes.
For %a-inch holes in 7!-inch plates use 90 per cent of these fJalues.
For ~-inch holes in ~-inch plates use 90 per cent of these values.
For ~-inch holes in ~-inch plates use 81 per cent of these values,
8.S
1.0
5.5
4.5
3.5
Glulam
Rivets per Row
4.0
Load
(Kips)
2.5
10
ALLOWABLE LOAD FOR ONE GLULAM RIVET ROW (NORMAL DURATION)

PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN-FOR 3-INCH PENETRATION-DOUGLAS FIR
TABLE 40
4.8
Load
(Kips
12
CIl
00
0'\
87
TABLE 41
FACTOR FOR ADJUSTING PERPENDICULAR-TO-GRAIN
LOADS WHEN MORE THAN ONE ROW IS USED
1
Number of Rows
1.00
Factor
...
6 or more
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
TABLE 42
MODIFICATION FACTORS TO
ALLOWABLE LOADS FOR ONE GLULAM RIVET ROW
FOR RIVET PENETRATION INTO TIMBER
PARALLEL- OR PERPENDICULARTO-GRAIN LOADING
Glulam Rivet
Penetration
Into Timber
(Inchee)
Dry Service Condition
Averaae EquUlbrJum
Moisture Content
15 Per Cent or Leaa
Other Than Dry

Service CondltioDa
lU
0.67
0.80
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.00
0.57
0.68
0.77
0.82
0.85
0.85
1~
2U
2~
3
3U
TABLE 43
MODIFICATION OF ALLOWABLE LOADS
FOR GLULAM RIVET ROW
FOR DURATION OF LOAD
Duration of Load
Typical ApplicatioDa
ModUlcatlon Factor
Continuous
Tanks, Bins, Retaining Walls,

Floors Continuously Subjected
to Full Design Load
0.95
Normal
Most Floors, Bridges,

Miscellaneous Structures
1.00
Two Months
All Roof Subjected to Snow Load
1.13
Seven Days
Concrete Formwork,
Arch centering.
1.18
Wind or Earthquake
1.22
Instantaneous or Impact
1.48
88
CSA STANDARD 086
TI
o.~
O~~5~
rRockwell C4550
180,000 psi, minimum
165,000 psi, minimum
Heat treated finish
1~ to 3~ ~ inch
Hardness:
Ultimate tensile strength:
Yield strength:
Finish:
Length Overall (l)
All Dimensions in Inches
GLULAM RIVET
Va
Typical
.... Grain
o
o
o
o
o
Orientation or
rivet in plate
.....----1~-1 Minimum
~
Minimum
Plate thickness:
Holes:
Steel:
~-inch diameter to ~-inch diameter

Conforming to CSA Standard G40.8, Structural
Steels with Improved Resistance to Brittle
Fracture, or G40.12, General Purpose Structural Steel
All Dimensions in Inches
inch, Minimum
STEEL SIDE PLATE
FIGURE 8
GLULAM RIVETS AND STEEL SIDE PLATES
-154-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
p
,
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRACI'ICE FOR ENGINEERING DESIGN IN TIMBER
89
L
End Distance fiN'
(See Table 39)
Minimum 1 Inch
[>P
Steel Plate
PARALLEL-TO-GRAIN LOADING
Steel Plate
~
v
0.-. s
::v~ ~:
g..Y Cl::s
<,:\.!:l
t:'
Ot:
1------.,. . -'t~
<':\
Q(:t-t
ii1~
13~
C'-" "0
Minimum 1 Inch
;i;l
....:l
PERPENDICULAR-TO-GRAIN LOADING
ANGLE-TO-GRAIN LOADING
FIGURE 9
SPACING OF GLULAM RIVETS
-155-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
90
eSA STANDARD 086
9.7 Design of Truss Plate Joints

9.7.1 Joint Design Requirements
9.7.1.1 Each metal plate connector shall be of sufficient size to
transfer the required load without exceeding the allowable load on the
plate nor the allowable stress in tension provided in Clause 9.2.1.4.2 for
the net section of the plate, except that allowable tension stress in steel
may be increased 31 for wind or earthquake, or wind or earthquake in
combination with other loads. For joints subjected to shear, the allowable
shear stress on the net section of the plate shall not exceed that provided in
Clause 9.2.1.4.2.
9.7.1.2 The load capacity of each type of truss plate assembly,
loaded parallel to grain and perpendicular to grain, shall be determined by
tests carried out in accordance with ASTlVI Standard D1761, Methods of
Testing Metal Fasteners in Wood, for each species of wood to be used.
When the load is applied at an angle to grain other than 0 degrees (parallel)
or 90 degrees (perpendicular), the allowable load on the connection shall be
determined by Formula (44):
N =
PxQ
(44)
P sin 2 e Q cos2 e
where N
allowable load at angle e to the grain direction;
P
allowable load parallel to grain;
allowable load perpendicular to grain;
Q
e
angle between the direction of grain and the direction of
load.
9.7.1.3 The allowable design load for normal duration of load
shall be determined by dividing the "test load" at wood-to-wood slip of
0.030 inches by 1.6, or by dividing the ultimate test load by 3.0, whichever
is the lesser. The "test load" used in these determinations shall be the
average of not less than ten tests.
9.7.1.4 For load durations other than normal, the provisions of
Clause 3.3.2.2 shall apply. For material treated with fire retardant chemicals,
the provisions of Clause 3.3.2.3 shall apply. For various seasoning and
service conditions of timber, the factors given in Table 30 shall apply.
9.7.1.5 Joint design shall be based on the use of truss plates
on at least two opposite faces of all members connected at the joint.
9.7.1.6 Design shall be based upon installation of truss plates in
such a way as to prevent buckling of the plate or insertion of the teeth at
any angle other than normal to the direction of load application. Tooth
penetration in production joints shall be not less than that used in the
tests referred to in Clause 9.7.1.2.
9.7.1.7 Thickness of members used in production joints shall be
not less than that used in the tests referred to in Clause 9.7.1.2.
9.7.1.8 Only those teeth or nails having the following end and
edge distances shall be considered to be effective when calculating the
allowable load on a joint:
(a) End Distance. The greater of 3~ inch or one-half the length of the
tooth or nail;
(b) Edge Distance. The greater of Y2 inch or one-quarter the length
of the tooth or nail.
9.7.1.9 Truss plates shall not be considered to be effective in
transferring compression load at a joint.
-156-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
p
91
APPENDIX A
WEIGHT OF STRUCTURAL TIMBERS AND
SHRINKAGE CHARACTERISTICS
OF CANADIAN WOODS
:0
Ie
>r
el
n
Ie
n
NOTE:
This Appendix is not a mandatory part of this Standard.
TABLE Al
WEIGHT OF STRUCTURAL TIMBERS AND SHRINKAGE
CHARACTERISTICS OF CANADIAN WOODS
y
.f
Weight of Structural
Timbers
(Pounds Per Cubic Foot)
[.
)
e
Species
Cedar. Eastern White

Cedar. Western Red
Cedar, Pacific Coa&t
Yellow
Douglas Fir
Fir r Amabilis
Fir, Balsam
Hemlock, Eastern
Hemlock, Pacific Coast
Tamarack
Larch. Western
Pine, Jack
Pine, Lodgepole
Pine, Red
Pine, Western White
Pine, Ponderosa
Pine, White
Spruce, Black
Spruce, Red
Spruce, White
Spruce, Engelmann
Spruce, Sitka
Birch, Yellow
Maple, Sugar
Oak, Red
Oak, White
NOTES:
Shrlnkale
of Green Ize
(Per Cent)
From Green to Oven Dry
Green
12 Per Cent
Moisture
Content
Radial
TanaentJal
34
29
21
24
1.7
2.1
3.6
4.5
2.7
3.3
35
40
39
46
61
44
48
52
40
40
52
36
47
46
37
35
38
37
31
57
59
63
62
30
34
27
24
30
30
35
40
31
29
28
26
32
27
30
28
26
28
27
43
46
43
47
3.7
4.8
4.2
2.7
3.6
5.4
2.8
5.1
4.0
4.7
3.5
3.7
4.6
2.4
3.7
4.0
3.4
4.2
4.6
5.8
4.7
3.6
4.7
6.0
7.4
8.9
7.5
6.9
8.5
6.2
8.9
5.9
6.8
5.9
6.8
5.9
6.3
6.9
8.0
6.4
8.2
7.8
7.1
8.6
6.7
6.0
4.9
6.1
6.6
5.1
5.3
7.0
4.5
7.0
5.0
5.8
4.7
5.3
5.3
4.4
5.3
6.0
4.9
6.2
6.2
6.5
6.7
5.2
5.4
Averalle
1. The values in Columns 2 and 3 may be used as approximate shipping weights.

2. There is considerable variation of density within each species. Within a species,
density is related to strength, and pieces of unusually light weight are unsuitable.
Density is also related to holding power of screws, nails, and the strength of connections, generally.
3. Shrinkage in wood commences between 30 and 25 per cent moisture content and
continues as the wood dries out. Shrinkage varies slightly with the speed of drying
and size of the piece. It may develop defects in timber in the process. Between wet
to airdry conditions, a shrinkage allowance of ~.inch per inch of width is common
practice.
4. Longitudinal shrinkage. For most structural uses of wood, longitudinal shrinkage
of wood may be disregarded. However, in long straight members such as truss
chords and continuous roof decking some allowance should be made for expansion
and contraction of wood if the moisture content is likely to vary widely. A good
deal of this shrinkage along the piece may be due to the component which results
from tangential and radial shrinkage combined with slope of grain.
92
eSA STANDARD 086
APPENDIX B
CAMBER ALLOWANCES
NOTE: This A ppendix is not a mandatory part of this Standard.
B1. Camber in Trusses. The amount of camber built into a truss varies
with the use to which the truss is put and the expectancy of fuJI design load.
The following camber limits are suggestions only and for trusses in simple
span only:
(a) Bowstring Trusses
(i) With continuous glued laminated top chord, camber in bottom
chord only, U inch per 10 feet of span;
(ii) Segmental overlapping sawn chord trusses, camber in bottom
chord only, % inch per 10 feet of span;
(b) Triangular Trusses. Where possible camber should be built
into both top and bottom chords:
(i) With sawn timber or rod and sawn timber trusses, % inch
per 10 feet of span on bottom chord, at mid~point of half span
on top chord, % inch per 10 feet of span;
(ii) With glulam or rod and glulam timber trusses, % inch per
10 feet of span on bottom chord, at mid-point of half span on
top chord, U inch per 10 feet of span;
(c) Pratt and Howe Trusses. Camber both top and bottom chords
similarly:
(i) For sawn timber, or rod and sawn timber trusses, % inch
per 10 feet of span;
(ii) For glulam or rod and gIulam trusses, % inch per 10 feet of span.
B2. Crown in Sawn Timber Joists. Crown in sawn timber joists, beams,
etc., should be up, as with camber.
B3. Beams. A suggested camber for built~up and laminated beams is
equivalent to the deflection under twice dead load.
-158-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
94
CSA STANDARD 086
APPENDIX C
PROPERTIES OF SECTIONS FOR
DOUGLAS FIR PLYWOOD*
Plywood
Thickness
(Inches)
Nominal
~S
Representative
Veneer Thicknesst
(Inches)
No.
of
Plies
Faces
Cores
Perp.
to Face
I
I
I!
PRes ParaRel-to-Face Graln

(12-lnch Widths)
Centres
Para.
to Face
Net
Thickness
(Inches)
1. 78
2.33
1.99
2.33
2.98
0.117
0.163
0.233
0.236
0.292
Area
In.I
Section
Modulus
In.'
%S
3
3
3
3
5
0.074
0.097
0.083
0.097
0.061
0.102
0.097
0.210
0.168
0.126
0.126
0.148
0.194
0.166
0.194
0.248
"S
[~
5
5
5
7
7
0.099
0.061
0.138
0.074
0.069
0.099
0.168
0.099
0.118
0.138
0.099
0.168
0.138
0.093
0.099
0.297
0.290
0.414
0.334
0.336
3.56
3.48
4.97
4.01
4.03
0.388
0.390
0.634
0.566
0.608
"U
"U
ifS
?flU
IS
5
7
7
7
7
0.098
0.096
0.057
0.100
0.068
0.168
0.093
0.158
0.158
0.198
0.218
0.135
0.145
0.100
0.135
0.414
0.462
0.4040.400
0.406
4.97
5.54
4.85
4.80
4.87
0.699
0.778
0.722
0.923
0.900
1S
lU
lU
HiS
1~ S
9
7
9
7
9
0.076
0.095
0.117
0.068
0.087
0.095
0.155
0.117
0.198
0.121
0.156
0.155
0.095
0.198
0.156
0.620
0.500
0.519
0.532
0.642
7.
6.00
6.23
6.38
7.70
1.28
1.10
1.30
1.17
1.53
I~U
7
9
9
11
9
0.095
0.095
0.058
0.088
0.120
0.198
0.155
0.162
0.130
0.120
0.155
0.095
0.162
0.106
0.178
0.500
0.475
0.602
0.600
0.774
6.00
5.70
7.22
7.20
9.29
1.27
1.31
1.46
~U
U~
Ir
1
1
1
S
S
U
1.72
2.11
U indicates unsanded panel grades.

S indicates sanded panel grades.
Select Sheathing
Good 2 sides
Sheathing
Good 1 Side
Solid 2 Sides
Solid 1 Side
*Plywood panel lay-up varies slightly among manufacturers. In each case the Table shows the
most conservative figure for plies parallel to face grain.
tTable shows representative veneer thicknesses. In practice, actual veneer thicknesses may vary
slightly from those shown. Veneers must be measured if precise values are desired.
*First moment (statical moment) of area about the neutral axis of aU material lying outside
(above or below) the critical rolling shear plane excluding the plies perpendicular to the span.
For approximate weight of overlaid plywood add 60 pounds per thousand square feet for each
overlay face.
p
95
APPENDIX C (Continued)
PROPERTIES OF SECTIONS FOR DOUGLAS FIR PLYWOOD
Plies Parallel-to Face
Grain
(12-lnch Widths)
Plies peoendicUlar-to.Face Grain

12lnch Widths)
Moment First Moment

Net
Thickness Area
Cofluertla
of Areat
in.2
(Inches)
in.'
in.'
Section
Modulus
in.'
Moment
of Inertia
in.'
Approximate
Weight
Pounds
First Moment
perM
of Areat
Square Feet
tn.-
0.0146
0.0237
0.0439
0.0427
0.0730
0.0781
0.113
0.146
0.154
0.161
0.102
0.097
0.210
0.168
0.252
1.22
1.16
2.52
2.02
3.02
0.0208
0.0188
0.0882
0.0564
0.275
0.00106
0.000913
0.00926
0.00474
0.0520
0
0
0
0
0.190
790
950
1.125
1.125
1.525
0.0961
0.122
0.194
0.195
0.228
0.235
0.207
0.392
0.390
0.423
0.198
0.336
0.198
0.354
0.414
2.38
4.03
2.38
4.25
4.97
0.170
0.489
0.210
0.485
0.634
0.0252
0.123
0.0353
0.131
0.194
0.118
0.339
0.141
0.299
0.392
1.525
1,825
1,825
2.050
2,225
0.262
0.288
0.317
0.403
0.450
0.383
0.556
0.544
0.619
0.650
0.336
0.279
0.474
0.474
0.594
4.03
3.35
5.69
5.69
7.13
0.576
0.432
0.942
0.784
1.27
0.160
0.118
0.360
0.264
0.550
0.389
0.254
0.574
0.489
0.791
2,225
2.225
2,600
2,600
3,000
0.638
0.530
0.640
0.659
0.864
0.891
0.784
0.852
0.902
1.06
0.380
0.465
0.468
0.594
0.484
4.56
5.58
5.62
7.13
5.81
0.855
0.951
0.855
1.55
1.18
0.362
0.369
0.322
0.768
0.564
0.572
0.577
0.595
0.941
0.804
3,000
3.000
3.000
3.375
3.375
0.694
0.717
0.916
1.07
1.33
0.898
0.855
1.04
1.21
1.45
0.594
0.620
0.648
0.650
0.480
7.13
7.44
7.78
7.80
5.76
1.36
1.32
1.83
1.64
1.28
0.615
0.596
1.04
0.880
0.646
0.839
0.930
1.26
1.10
0.858
3.375
3.375
3,750
3,750
3,750
-161-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
96
eSA STANDARD 086
APPENDIX D
MINIMUM DESIGN VALUES OF EFFECTIVE
LENGTH FACTOR K FOR COMPRESSION MEMBERS
TABLE Dl
Degree of End Restraint
of Compression Member
Minimum Effective
Lenath Factor, k*
Effectively held in position and

restrained against rotation at both ends
0.65
Effectively held in position at both ends,

restrained against rotation at one end.
0.80

but not restrained against rotation.
1.00
Effectively held in position and restrained

against rotation at one end, and at the
other restrained against rotation but not
held in position.
1.20
IT
;r
I'~

other partially restrained against rotation
but not held in position.
1.50
I "-,
Symbol
I
1
L..,.....l
I
Effectively held in position at one end

but not restrained against rotation, and
at the other end restrained against
rotation but not held in position.
2.00

against rotation at one end but not held
in position nor restrained against rotation
at the other end.
2.00
'"
I .-,
Lj....l
I
I
",'"
J(
-Effective length Ie = Kl, where I is the length of the compression member taken as <the distance
between centres of members supporting the compression member in the plane in which buckling
is being considered. At a base or cap detail, the distance shall be measured from the outer
surface of the base or cap plate. The effective length factor K shall not be less than what would
be indicated by rational analysis. Where conditions of end restraint cannot be evaluated closely,
a conservative value for K shall be used.
p
97
APPENDIX E
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR LUMBER
tS
NOTE:
E1. GENERAL
ELI Allowable unit stresses for visually graded sawn lumber for use in
this Standard were developed in accordance with the principles of ASTM
Standard ~245-70..!.. Establishing Structural Grades and Related Allowable
Propertiesor VIsually Graded Lumber, except that:
(a) Strength and variability values for clear wood were obtained from
Department of Forestry of Canada Publication 1104, Strength
and Related Properties of Woods Grown in Canada;
(b) Reduction factors for softwoods were applied to poplar species;
(c) Clauses 3.1.9, 3.2.6, and 4.6 of ASTl\1 Standard 0245-70 were
not applied to Douglas Fir for use in Canada.
(d) The increase in bending stress permitted for structurally graded
lumber used in load sharing systems was 10 per cent; and
(e) Increases of 10 per cent in other allowable unit stresses (not
including modulus of elasticity) were permitted for structurally
graded lumber used in load-sharing systems.
E1.2 Individual pieces of lumber, as manufactured, represent a wide range

in quality and appearance with respect to knots, cross grain, shakes, and
other natural growth characteristics. Such individual pieces likewise represent a wide range in physical properties and utility for specific purposes.
Some lumber grades are established on the basis of appearance and physical
characteristics, without regard for strength. Other grades, called listructurally graded lumber", are established on the basis of features that relate to
strength and to uses in which strength and related physical properties are
important. In these grades the size, number and location of characteristics
affecting strength are adequately controlled.
E1.3 Allowable unit stresses derived by ASTl\1 Standard 0245-70
procedures are based on lumber that is Hstructurally graded", with each
individual member carrying its assigned load. Allowable unit stresses
suitable for "single member uses" for such structurally graded lumber are
given in Tables SA, SB, SC, and SO.
E1.4 Often load-carrying members are so arranged that loads are distributed
among several individual pieces. In such cases, advantage can be taken of
variability, which makes most pieces stronger and stiffer than the specified [
minimum. Allowable unit stresses for structurally graded lumber may be
increased 10 per cent when used in such "load-sharing systems" as defined
in Clause 2.1. Provision for such increase is given in Clause 4.3.1.
E1.5 Some lumber grades are established on the basis of the appearance
and general performance of the piece, with some characteristics affecting
strength not fully controlled. For these grades, allowable unit stresses have
not been assigned. Conservative estimates have been made, however, taking
into account the most severe limiting characteristics that can occur with some
additional limitations. These strength estimates are reflected in the provisions of Clause 4.3.2.
98
eSA STANDARD 086
E2. LONGITUDINAL SHEAR

E2.1 Tabulated longitudinal shear values for dimension lumber (2 to 4
inches thick) in Tables 8A and 8B are based on the maximum shake, check
or split that could develop in such lumber, as if the piece were split in two.
E2.2 Tabulated longitudinal shear values for timbers (5 inches or more in

least dimension) in Table 8e are based on the maximum shake, check or
split permitted in the grading rules for each grade listed.
E2.3 For purposes of structurally appraising existing structures, or if
requirements additional to grading rules are to be incorporated in specifications, allowable unit stresses in longitudinal shear for dimension lumber
may be established by use of Table El, developed from ASTlVI Standard
0245-70.
TABLE El
Thlckness
When Lenllth
Lumber
Split Is
of
of
Multiply
Tabulated
Lo~ltudlnal
hear
Values by:
2-Inch Thick
No split
Y2 X width (wide face)
1 X width (wide face)
1Y2 X width (wide face), or more
2.00
1.67
1.33
1.00
3- and 4-Inch Thick
No split
Y2 X thickness (narrow face)
1 X thickness (narrow face)
1Y2 X thickness (narrow face)
1% X thickness (narrow face), or more
2.00
1.72
1.42
1. 12
1.00
NOTE:
For intermediate values of split length, use linear interpolation.
E3. COMPRESSION PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN

E3.1 Allowable unit stresses in compression perpendicular to grain (bearing
across grain) are the same as clear wood for all grades of any species, because
knots, regardless of size, have at least the bearing strength of the intervening
wood.
CODE OF RECOMMENDED PRAl,.'TrCE FOR ENGINEERING DESIGr\ IN TIMBER
APPENDIX F
4
!\ OTE: This A ppendix is not a mandatory part of this Standard.
:k
o.
n
SOLUTION OF FORMULA (27)

(CLAUSE 5.4.2.1)
)r
if
1-
!r
e
g
FIGURE Fl
-165-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
C)0
100
eSA STANDARD 086
TABLE Fl
CALCULATIONS FOR PLOTTING CURVES
FOR FORMULA 27
(CLAUSE 5.4.2.1)
Values of Kr for d./R
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
20 30'
0.0079
0.1747
0.1284
0.0079
0.0267
0.0479
0.0719
0.0983
0.1274
50
0.0174
0.1251
0.1939
0.0114
0.0318
0.0502
0.0124
0.0984
0.1285
100
0.0391
0.0754
0.2119
0.0391
0.0487
0.0626
0.0808
0.1032
0.1298
150
0.0629
0.0619
0.1122
0.0629
0.0708
0.0822
0.0970
0.1153
0.1310
200
0.0893
0.0608
0.1393
0.0893
0.0968
0.1011
25 0
0.1214
0.0605
0.1238
0.1214
0.1287
0.1385
0.1507
0.1654
0.1821
300
0.1649
0.0603
0.1115
0.1649
0.1120
0.1815
0.1930
0.2068
0.2230
NOTE:
Formula 27 - Kr
A+ B
(~)
+ C
0.1545
(~r
101
APPENDIX G
NOMINAL AND MINIMUM DRESSED SIZES
OF DIMENSION LUMBER AND TIMBERS
NOTE:
This A ppendix is not a mandatory part of this Standa,rd.
SOURCE:
CSA Standard 0141-1970, Softwood Lumber.
Thicknesses
Face Widths
Mlnlmum Dressed
Item
Nominal
Dry.
Greent
Inches
Inches
o
5
Nominal
Dimension
Lumber
2
2%
3
3%
1%
2
2%
3
1~
2~6
2~
3~6
Dimension
Lumber
4
4%
3%
4
3~6
4~6
5 and
Thicker
% Off
Greent
Inches
7~
9~
11~
13~
15~
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
1%
2~-1l
3%
4%
5H
7~'4
9~
1l~
12
Timbers
Dry*
Inches
1%
2%
3%
4%
5%
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
14
16
Mlnlmum Dressed
5 and
Wider
1~
2~
3~
4%
5%
7Y2
9Y2
11%
13%
15%
1~
2~
3~
4%
5%
7%
9%
11%
13%
15%
% Off
*Dry Lumber. For the purpose of this Standard, dry lumber is defined as lumber which has
been seasoned or dried to a moisture content of 19 per cent or less.
tGreen Lumber. For the purpose of this Standard, green lumber is defined as lumber having
a moisture content in excess of 19 per cent.
-167-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
102
eSA STANDARD 086
APPENDIX H
COMMERCIAL SPECIES DESIGNATIONS FOR LUMBER
NOTE:
This A ppendix is not a mandatory part of this Standard.
HI. STANDARD COMMERCIAL NAMES

Hl.l l'\ames of species in Table 1, with the exception of the Poplars, are
standard commercial names given !n CSA Standard 0141, Softwood Lumber.
Standard names for the Poplars (hardwoods) are from Native Trees of
Canada, published by the Canadian Forestry Service, Department of Fisheries and Forestry. Other common names and botanical names are also given.
H2. SPECIES COMBINATIONS

H2.1 A number of Canadian lumber species are grown, harvested, manufactured and marketed together, and have similar performance properties
which make them interchangeable in use. For purposes of simplification and
standardization, and because some species cannot be separated by visual
inspection when in lumber form, certain combinations of species are given
a single species designation in trade practice and on grade marks. Those
most frequently combined for identification under a single species designation are given in Table HI. Because of special conditions, other combinations
may sometimes be shipped.
H2.2 The appropriate species groups (Table 1) for the determination of
allowable unit stresses and other design values are given in Table H1 for
most-frequently used combinations. When other combinations of species
are shipped, the design values for the combination should be those for the
species in the combination having the lowest design values.
TABLE HI
Applicable Species
Group (Table)
Commercial Desi~na tion

for Species Combination
Species That May Be Included

in the Combination
Douglas Fir-Larch
Douglas Fir
Western Larch
Hem-Fir
Pacific Coast Hemlock

Amabilis Fir
Grand Fir
Hemlock-Tamarack
Eastern Hemlock
Tamarack
Spru("e-Pine- Fir
White Spruce
Black Spruce
Engelmann Spntce
Red Spruce
Jack Pine Lodgepole Pine
Alpine Fir
Balsam Fir
Western Cedars
Pacific Coast 'lellQ~r

Western Red Cedar
Northern Pine
Jack Pine
Red Pine
A
B
SUPPLEMENT NO.4, "CANADIAN STRUcrURAL

DESIGN MANUAL 1970"
ERRATA
Page 3S8
Clause 3.2-Add to the definition of b the following:
.. lor one half the flange for detennining width-thickness ratios (b/ t)".
Page 373
Clause 16.2.4-ln the last line of Clause 16.2.4 (b) (ii), delete "Fbt;'.
Page 428
Appendix D-Change notes to graph on Page 84 (Appendix D) as follows:
"Co = 30
Fy/S but not more than 20"
.
..
m=
0.6F)'
ft
2E /1.92 (Cp )2"
--"--:--=C-p-_.:..........,COc::---'--"~
Page SS8
Notes to Figure CI-7-Add the following note:

"7. Windward Wall C p : The pressure coefficient is 0.8 for the entire height The
variation shown in pressure is due to variation in exposure factor C e "
Page S83
Equation (3) for Coefficient C-delete equation and replace with:
C= 0.05
VI'
Copyright NRC-CNRC
SUPPLEMENT No. 4
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
PLAIN AND REINFORCED MASONRY

are
ber.
5
of
EXPLANATORY NOTE
ishreno
nuties
md
ual
This material originally appeared as Section 4.4 of Part 4 of the National

Building Code. In preparing for the 1970 edition of the Code, the Associate Committee on the National Building Code decided to remove
this material from Part 4 and to include it in its revised form as part
of this Supplement. In transferring this material to the Supplement,
the numbering system and format used in the Code have been retained.
'en
)se
lams
of
TABLE OF CONTENTS
or
les
he
Subsection 4.4.1
Page
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 170
Subsection 4.4.2
Materials..................................... 171
Subsection 4.4.3
Design of Plain and Reinforced Masonry Based on

Engineering Analysis ........................... 174
Subsection 4.4.4
Conventional Design of Plain Masonry ........... 192
Subsection 4.4.5
Construction Practice.......................... 195
Subsection 4.4.6
Masonry Veneer ............................... 199
Subsection 4.4.7
Prefabricated Masonry ......................... 202
Subsection 4.4.8
Laying, Placing and Erection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 203
-169-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
SECTION 4.4 PLAIN AND REINFORCED MASONRY

SUBSECTION 4.4.1 GENERAL
AppUcation
4.4.1.1 This Section applies to buildings described in 'Sentence 4.4.1.1.(1) of the National Building Code of Canada, 1970.
Definitions
4.4.1.2 In this Section. the following definitions apply:
Ashlar masonry means masonry of natural or cast rectangular stone, usually laller
in size than brick, having sawed, dressed or squared beds, and joints laid in mortar wlth
proper bond;
.
Bearing, support means a structural member or system of structural members supporting
masonry and resisting all applied loads;
BuDding, helg,ht (in storeys) means the number of storeys contained between the roof
and the floor of the first storey;
Cast stone means a precast building stone manufactured from concrete;
Cavity wall means a construction of masonry laid up with a cavity between the wythes
tied together with metal ties or bonding units, the cavity of which mayor may not
contain insulation;
Column means a vertical compression member whose height exceeds three times its
thickness (least dimension) and having a width not exceeding three times the thickness;
Corrosion resistant (as applying to anchoring or bonding material) means treated or
coated to retard harmful oXldation or other corrosive action, e.g. steel, galvanized after
fabrication;
Curtain wall means a non-Ioadbearing exterior wall more than one storey in height,
vertically supported only at its base, or, having bearing support at prescribed vertical
intervals greater than one storey;
Faced wall means a wall in which the masonry facing and backing are so bonded as to
exert common action under load;
Gross cross-sectional area means the area parallel to the bearing surface of a masonrv
member calculated by using the over-all actual dimensions of the member:
Grout means a mixture of cementitious material and aggregate to which sufficient

water is added to produce pouring consistency without segregation of the constituents;
Grouted reinforced masonry is that form of reinforced masonry construction made of
two or more wythes ofbrick or solid concrete units in which the cavities between wythes
contain reinforcing and are filled with grout;
Hollow unit means a structural masonry unit with a net cross-sectional area less than
75 per cent of its gross area in any plane parallel to its bearing surface;
Lateral support means a structural member or system of structural members resisting
the horizontal component of loads applied to masonry;
Load bearing, (as applying to a building element) means subjected to or designed to
carry loads in addition to its own dead load excepting a wall element subjected only to
wind or earthquake loads in addition to its own dead load;
Masonry means that type of construction made up of masonry units laid up with mortar
or other accepted method of jointing:
Masonry, plain means masonry without steel reinforcement;
Masonry, reinforced means masonry in which steel reinforcement is embedded in
such a manner that the two materials act together in resisting forces;
Mortar means a plastic mixture of cementitious materials, fine aggregates and water
used to bond masonry or other structural units;
Net cross-sectional area means the gross"cross-sectional area minus the area of cores
or cellular space;
Noncorrosive (as applying to anchoring or bonding materials) means resistant to
harmful oxidation or other corrosive action because of its composition, e.g. stainless
steel, bronze or copper;
Panel wall means a non-Ioadbearing exterior masonry wall having bearing support
at each storey;
-170-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
ion-
ing
)Of
les
ot
its
is;
lr
er
t;
11
o
Partition means an interior wall, one storey or part-storey in height, that is not load
bearing;
Pilaster means a projecting part of a masonry wall bonded thereto for the purpose of
strengthening such wall against lateral loads;
Rubble masonry means masonry ~f ~rregular or rough shaped stone units;
Solid masonry means masonry of solid or hollow units that does not have cavities
between the wythes;
Solid unit means a structural masonry unit with a net cross-sectional area of at least
15 per cent of its gross cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to its bearing surface;
Transformed section means an assumed section of one material having the same
elastic properties as the section of two materials;
Veneer means a non-Ioadbearing facing of masonry attached to the backing but not
bonded so as to exert a common reaction under load;
Virtual eccentricity means the eccentricity of the axial load plus the value calculated
by dividing the moment at the section by the axial load;
Wall means a vertical member whose width exceeds three times its thickness (least
dimension) ;
Wythe means a vertical section of a masonry wall, one unit in thickness;
Design Conditions
4.4.1.3 Materials used in masonry shall conform to Subsection 4.4.2.
4.4.1.4.(1) Masonry shall be designed to resist all loads prescribed in Section 4.1 of the
National Building Code of Canada, 1970, except as provided in Article 4.4.3.33.
(2) The structura I design and dimensioning of plain masonry shall be based on
(a) an engineering analysis conforming to Subsection 4.4.3, or
(b) in non-seismic areas, and in zone 1 seismic areas, the conventional methods conforming to Subsection 4.4.4.
(3) The structural design and dimensionin~ of reinforced masonry shall be based on an
engineering analysis conforming to Subsection 4.4.3.
4.4.1.5.(1) The construction of masonry shall conform to the appropriate requirements in
Subsections 4.4.3. to 4.4.8.
(2) Control joints shall be provided in masonry when necessary to relieve excessive
temperature and shrinkage stress.
4.4.1.6 The maximum thickness of a mortar joint in load-bearing masonry shall be
% in.
Drawings and Specifications

4.4.1.7.(1) Drawings and specifications submitted with the application to build a building
incorporating masonry shall indicate
(a) the materials to be used in masonry,
(b) the dimensions of masonry (see Articles 4.4.3.5. and 4.4.4.2.),
(c) the details of bonding and anchorage of masonry,
(d) the details and location of chases and recesses;
(e) the details and location of control joints,
(f) the compressive strength (j'M) of masonry for all parts of the structure when designed
in accordance with Subsection 4.4.3. (see Article 4.4.3.4.).
SUBSECTION 4.4.2. MATERIALS
Masonry Units
4:.4.2.1.(1) Masonry units of concrete shall conform to the following:
CSA A165.1-1964, "Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units";
CSA A165.2-1964, IIHollow Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units";
CSA A165.3-1964, "Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units";
CSA A165.4-1965, IIConcrete Brick Masonry Units".
(2) Cast stone shan conform to Table 4.4.2.A.
-171-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
TABLE 4.4.2.A
Absorption and
Stren~th
Requirements(l)
Maximum absorption after

48 hr submersion in water
of 28-day -old specimens,
per cent of dry wei~ht
Minimum
compressive
stren~th after 28 days,
psi
6500(2)
Notes to Table 4.4.l.A.

(1) Based on test specimens of 2-in. cubes or 2-in. x 2-in. cylinders.
(2) Minimum value of three tests.
(3) Maximum value of three tests.
4.4.2.2 Masonry units of clay or shale shall conform to the following:

CSA A82.1-1965, "Burned Clay Brick";
CSA A82.2-1967, "Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick";
CSA A82.4-1954, UStructural Clay Load-Bearing Wall THe";
CSA A82.5-1954, "Structural Clay Non-Load-Bearing Tile";
ASTM C126-69, "Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick and Solid
Masonry Units".
4.4.2.3.(1) Sand-lime (calcium-silicate) masonry units shall conform to
(a) CSA A82.3-1954, "Sand-Lime Building Brick", and
(b) the specifications for concrete masonry units as provided for in Article 4.4.2.1. except
for ingredien ts.
4.4.2.4.(1) Masonry units of granite shall conform to ASTM C615-68, "Structural Granite".
(2) Masonry units of natural stone other than s-ranite shall conform to ASTM C170-50
(1958), "Compressive Strength of Natural Buildmg Stone," and ASTM C99-52 (1958),
"Modulus of Rupture of Natural Building Stone".
4.4.2.5.(1) Masonry units of gypsum shall conform to CSA A82.25-1950, "Gypsum
Partition Tile or Block".
(2) Masonry of gypsum units shall not be exposed to soil, dampness or the weather.
(3) Unreinforced masonry of gypsum units shall not be used for loadbearing elements.
(4) Gypsum masonry units shall not be plastered with' other than gypsum plaster.
4.4.2.6.(1) Masonry units of glass shall conform to BSI Standard BS1207-1953, ClHollow
Glass Block".
(2) Masonry of glass units shall be used only in a partition or a non-load-bearing panel
set into an opening in a wall.
4.4.2.7.(1) Masonry units, other than those provided for in Articles 4.4.2.1. to 4.4.2.6.,
may be used provided they are:
(a) tested to show they are suitable for their proposed use; and
(b) manufactured so that their quality is uniform.
Mortar
4.4.2.8 Portland cement used in mortar shall conform to CSA A5-1961, "Portland Cements".
4.4.2.9 Where lime putty is used in preparing mortar, it shall be made by slaking quicklime in water for at least 24 hr or by soaking hydrated lime in water for at least 12 hr.
4.4.2.10 Gypsum used in mortar shall conform to CSA A82.21-1950, "Gypsum".
-172-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
--....,p-----'----------------------4.4.2.11 Masonry cement used in mortar shall conform to CSA A8-1956, "Masonry
Cement".
4.4.2.12.(1) Aggregate used in mortar shall conform to CSA A82.56-1950, "Aggregate for
Masonry Mortar".
(2) Where mortar is proportioned by volume, the aggregate shall be measured in a
damp, loose condition.
4.4.2.13 Water used in mortar shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious
substances such as oils, acids, alkalis, and organic materials.
4.4.2.14 Admixtures may be used when permitted by the authority having jurisdiction.
4.4.2.15.(1) Mortar types referred to in this Section shall:
(a) be proportioned as set forth in Table 4.4.2.B, or
(b) have a compressive strength conforming to Table 4.4.2.B determined in accordance
with CSA A179-1967, "Mortar for Unit Masonry."
(2) Type 0 or Type K mortar shall not be used where masonry is to be:
(a) directly in contact with soil, such as in a foundation wall, or
(b) exposed to the weather on all sides such as in a parapet wall, a balustrade, a chimney,
steps and landings.
TABLE 4.4.2.B
Type
of
mortar
Minimum
average
compressive
strenlth
at 28 ays,
psi
2500
1800
750
350
75
I
Composition in parts by volume
Portland
cement
Masonry
cement
Lime
1 (type H)
none
none
72
1 (type H)
none
none
none
1 (type H)
none
none
1 (type H
or L)
none
none
none
none
over
Aggrega te(l)
t<)<1)
c..c::
c1:\ ....
to
..c::'.... 0
~ rn
0(1)"C
.J1
I
none
M to
over
1~
none
over
1~
to
:72
1
over
272 to 4
S?Jl
....
_ ;::s
0~\1.)
C
E
"t:! (1) .....
~-5:;
~o~
NE"i::
c;::s\1.)
~ rn E
:;] 2:i
rn ....
(1)
-..... \1.)
rn
05
Z.;:l
Note to Table 4.4.1.B,

(l)Volume of damp sand shall be adjusted to compensate for bulking in accordance with CSA Standard
AI79-1967. "Mortar for Unit Masonry",
4.4.2.16 Where masonry units of glass are used, they shall be laid up with a mortar consisting of 1 part portland cement, 1 part high-calcium lime and not more than 4 parts
aggregate by volume.
4.4.2.17 Where masonry units of gypsum are used, they shall be laid up with a mortar
consisting of 1 part gypsum and not more than 3 parts aggregate, by weight.
4.4.2.18 Grout for use in grouted masonry shall conform to Table 4.4.2.C.
. ..
---~-- ~ ~~
TABLE 4.4.2.C
Parts by volume
Aggregate measured in damp, loose state
Description
Cement
Lime
Fine
Fine
Grout
o to 1/10
2 ~ to 3 times the
sum of the cementitious materials.
Coarse
Grout
o to 1/10
2 ~ to 3 times the
sum of the
cementitious materials.
Coarse
0
1 to 2 times the sum

of the cementitious
materials.
Metal Ties
4.4.2.19.(1) Steel structural members, anchors, ties or other supports for masonry required
to be corrosion resistant shall be galvanized in accordance with
(a) ASTM A153-67, uZinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware", (class 8.3
coating), for bonding or anchoring stone facing and for all bolts and hardware;
(b) ASTM A116-66, "Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Farm-Field and Railroad
Right-of-Way Wire Fencing", (class 3 coating), for masonry ties other than provided
for in (a); or
(c) ASTM A123-68, "Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from
Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip", for structural
supports including shelf angles.
(2) Copper-coated metal tie wire shall conform to ASTM B227-65, "Hard-Drawn
Copper-Clad Steel Wire, (Grade 30HS)".
4.4.2.20 Insulation used between wythes in cavity walls shall be an approved water
repellent or water resistant type.
SUBSECTION 4.4.3 DESIGN OF PLAIN AND REINFORCED MASONRY BASED
ON ENGINEERING ANALYSIS
4.4.3.1. In this Subsection
gross cross-sectional area.
net cross-sectional area.
effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement.
cross-sectional area of web reinforcement.
a
angle between inclined web bars and axis of beam.
b
width of rectangular beam or column, or width of flange of T beam.
b'
width of web of a T beam.
C"
bending coefficient.
C.
eccentricity coefficient.
C.
slenderness coefficient.
d
effective depth of flexural members.
Em
modulus of elasticity of masonry in compression.
E.
modulus of elasticity of steel.
E"
modulus of rigidity of masonry.
e
virtual eccentricity,
el
the smaller virtual eccentricity occurring at the top or bottom of a vertical member
at lateral supports.
et
the larger virtual eccentricity occurring at the top or bottom of a vertical member
at lateral supports.
ell
virtual eccentricity about the principal axis which is normal to the width, b, of
the member.
e,
virtual eccentricity about the principal axis which is normal to the effective thickness, t, of the member.
f",
compressive stress in masonry.
/b
bearing stress on masonry.
fe.
compressive stress due to vertical loads.
f,
tensile stress in masonry.
A II
A..
A.
A"
P
f'.
f.
f.
111
h
j
P
Pfl
r
fb
s
t
u
V
'P
t1".
ed
'P11II
~o
compressive strength of masonry at 28 days.

stress in reinforcement.
stress in web reinforcement.
yield strength of reinforcement.
effective height of a wall or column.
ratio of distance between centroid of compression and centroid of tension to the
effective depth, t1.
allowable vertical load.
ratio of the area of tensile reinforcement to effective masonry area, btl.
ratio of effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement, A., to the gross crosssectional area, A fl.
radius of gyration.
ratio of area of bars cut off to the total area of bars at the section.
spacing of stirrups, paralJel to direction of main reinforcement.
effective thickness of a wall or column.
bond stress per unit of surface area of bar.
total shear.
shear stress in masonry having shear reinforcement.
shear stress in masonry having no shear reinforcement.
shear stress in a shear wall.
sum of perimeters of bars.
.3
ld
General Requirements
~d
al
'n
[)
4.4.3.2.(1) This Subsection applies to the design and construction of plain masonry and
reinforced masonry where the design is based on engineering analysis of the structural
effects of the loads and forces acting on the- structure.
(2) Engineering inspection of masonry construction shall be carried out to ensure that the
construction is consistent with the design by the person responsible for its design or by
another person qualified in the inspection of masonry construction.
4.4.3.3 Mortar shall be of type M, S or N conforming to Sentence 4.4.2.15.(1),
4.4.3.4 The allowable stresses in masonry shan be based on its compressive strength,
as established in Article 4.4.3.6.
J'""
4.4.3.5 The actual dimensions of masonry shall be used in stress calculations.
Determination of f'm
for the purpose of design
4.4.3.6.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (4), the compressive strength, I'm. shall be
established in advance of design by tests of specimens which:
(a) are built of the same type of materials under the same conditions. and insofar as
possible, of the same thickness and bonding arrangements as for the structure;
(b) if of hollow masonry, have unfilled cores, except for solid filled construction;
(c) are constructed so that the moisture content of the units, mortar consistency, mortar
joint thickness and workmanship are the same as will be used in the structure;
(d) if of brick masonry, are not less than 12 in. in height and have a height-to-thickness
ratio (hit) not less than 2 nor more than 5;
(e) if of concrete block or structural clay tile, are not less than 16 in. in height and
have a height-to-thickness ratio, hit, not less than 1.5 nor more than 3; and
(f) are stored in air at a temperature not less than 68 F and are tested after 28 days in
conformance with CSA A23.2.13-1967, 44Test for Compressive Strength of Moulded
Concrete Cylinders".
(2) The compressive strength of each specimen in Sentence (1) shall be calculated by
dividing its ultimate test load by its net cross-sectional area and the result multiplied by the
appropriate correction factor in Table 4.4.3.A.
-175-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
TABLE 4.4.3.A
Correction factor(l)
Ratio of
height-to-thickness
hit
Brick
masonry
Concrete block or
structural clay tile
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
NA
0.73
0.80
0.86
0.91
0.95
0.98
1.00
0.86
1.00
1.11
1.20
NA
NA
NA
NA
Note to Table 4 .. 3.A.

(l)Correction factors for values of hIt not listed may be interpolated from the values shown.
(3) At least five specimens described in Sentence (1) shall be tested and the compressive
strength. J'"" shall be obtained by multiplying the average compressive strength determined
in conformance with Sentence (2) by
1 _ ~ .... /2:(x -xro!

n - 1
an individual test result;
average of individual test results;
number of specimens.
l'
where x
(4) Where the value of the compressive strength of masonry J'", is not determined in
accordance with Sentences (1) to (3), it shall be based on tests of the masonry units and
mortar in conformance with Sentences (5) to (11).
(5) Compressive strength test of clay or shale brick shall be conducted in conformance
with CSA A82.2-1967, "Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick", and for concrete brick in
conformance with CSA AI65.4-1965. "Concrete Brick Masonry Units".
(6) Compressive stren~th tests shall be made in conformance with
(a) CSA AI65.3-1964, "Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units", for solid concrete block;
(b) CSA A165.1-1964, "Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units". for hollow
concrete block; and
(c) CSA A82.6-1944, "Standard Methods for Sampling and Testing Structural Clay
Tile", for structural clay tile.
(7) At least five units shall be tested as described in Sentence (5) or (6) and the compressive
strength shall be obtained by multiplying the average compressive strength of the specimens
by:
1 _
where x
x
n
0 . . /2:(x
x
- X)2
n-l
an individual test result;

average of individual test result;
number of specimens.
(8) At least five 2-in. mortar cubes shall be prepared from the same materials and in the
same proportions as those to be used in the masonry, cured and tested in accordance with
CSA A179-1967, HMortar for Unit Masonry". The average strength determined from
these tests shall conform to Article 4.4.3.3 for the type of mortar specified.
(9) The value of the compressive strength, J' fII' to be used in design of brick masonry
shall conform to Table 4.4.3.B.
-176-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
TABLE 4.4.3.B
Forming part of Sentence 4.4.3.6.(9)
Compressive strength of brick masonry (j'.) psi
Compressive
strength of
units, psi
Type M mortar
Type S mortar
Type N mortar
14,000 plus
12,000
10,000
8,000
6,000
4,000
2,000
4600
4000
3400
2800
2200
1600
1000
3900
3400
2900
2400
1900
1400
800
3200
2800
2400
2000
1600
1200
800
(to) The value of compressive strength, f'tn, to be used in the design of masonry constructed with solid concrete units, hollow concrete or structural clay tile units, or hollow
units filled with concrete or grout having a compressive strength at least equal to that of
the units shall conform to Table 4.4.3.C.
TABLE 4.4.3.C
Compressive Strength of concrete block,
masonry or structural clay tile masonry
(f'.) psi
Compressive strength
of units(l),
psi
Types M and S mortar
Type N mortar
6,000 plus
4,000
2,500
2,000
1,500
2,400
2,000
1,550
1,350
1,150
1,250
1,250
1,050
950
800
Note to Table t.t.l.C.

(1) Based on gross cross-sectional area for units without voids and filled hollow units, and net cross-sectional
area for units with voids.
(11) In composite, faced walls, cavity walls or other structural members constructed"of
different kinds or grades of units or mortars the value of J''" used in design shall correspond
to the weakest combination of units and mortars of which the member is constructed.
except that in a cavity wall where only one wythe supports the vertical load the value of
f'. shall be appropriate for the materials in the loaded wythe.
Field Control Tests
4.4.3.7.(1) Where the value of J'", used in design is determined in accordance with Sentences 4.4.3.6. (1) to (3):
(a) at least four test specimens shall be made on site for each 5000 sq ft or portion thereof,
of wall constructed but not less than four test specimens per storey,
(b) at least five such test specimens shall be made for each type and strength of masonry
used in any building,
(c) the field control test specimens shall be constructed on the site without using a
jig near the walls being built and using the same materials and workmanship as the
site work and of a size conforming to clause 4.4.3.6.(I)(d) or 4.4.3.6. (l)(e),
(d) field control test specimens shall be wrapped in polyethylene and stored at the site
for 24 hr and stored in air temperatures not less than 68F thereafter,
(e) except as provided in (f), the test specimens shall be tested 28 days after being
constructed,
(f) field control test specimens may be tested at 7 days provided that the relationship
between 7 and 28-day strengths of the masonry has been established by previous
tests, or the compression strengths obtained from 7-day test results shall be assumed
to be 90 per cent of the 28-day value. and
-177-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
(g) the compressive strength of every test specimen shall be calculated in conformance
with Sentence 4.4.3.6.(2) and the average compression strength from any five consecutive 28-day field control tests or from the 28-day strengths predicted from
7-day tests in accordance with Clause (f) shall exceed the value of J'm used in the
design, and no individual test result shall have a value less than 0.80 J' ....
(2) If the requirements in clause (1) (g) are not met, the authority having jurisdiction
shall require proof that the strength of the structure is adequate.
4.4.3.8.(1) Where the value of f'm used in design is determined in accordance with Sentences
4.4.3.6.(4) to (11), at least five masonry units and five 2-in. mortar cube specimens shall
be made for each 5000 sq ft, or portion thereof. of wall but not less than five test specimens
of both units and mortar for each storey height and not less than five test specimens of
both units and mortar for any building.
(2) For tests of units referred to in Sentence (1), units shall be selected and tested in
conformance with:
(a) CSA A82.2-1967, "Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick", for clay or shale
brick units;
(b) CSA A165.4-1965 HConcrete Brick Masonry Units", for concrete brick units;
(c) CSA A165.1-1964, uHollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units", for hollow
concrete units;
(d) CSA A165.3-1964, uSolid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units", for solid concrete units; and
(e) CSA A82.6-1944, "Methods for Sampling and Testing Structural Clay Tile", for
tile units.
(3) The average of any five consecutive compressive test results for units referred to in
Sentence (1) shall exceed the compressive strength of the units used in the selection of
Jf", as provided in Sentence 4.4.3.6.(9) or (10), and no individual test result shall be less
than 0.80 of that compressive strength.
(4) For tests of mortar cubes referred to in Sentence (1):
(a) the mortar shall be taken at random from the mortar boards currently in use but
care shall be taken that no old mortar from the edges of the boards is included;
(b) mortar test cubes shall be made, cured and tested in accordance with CSA A179-1967,
"Mortar for Unit Masonry";
(c) except as provided in (d), compression strength tests of mortar cubes shall be made
at an age of 28 days; and
(d) tests may be made after 7 days on mortar test cubes provided that the relationship
between 7- and 28-day strength of the mortar has been established by previous
tests, or the compression strengths obtained from 7-day test results may be assumed
to be 90 per cent of the 28-day value.
(5) The average compression strength of mortar cubes obtained from any five consecutive
28-day field control tests or from the 28-day strengths predicted from 7-day tests in accordance with Clause (d) referred to in Sentence (4) shall be at least 0.80 of the compressive
stren~th determined in accordance with Article 4.4.3.3 for the type of mortar used, and no
indiVidual test result shall have a value less than 0.67 of that strength.
(6) If the requirements in Sentences (3) or (5) are not met, the authority having jurisdiction shall require proof that the strength of the structure is adequate.
4.4.3.9 Loads and associated reduction factors shall conform to Section 4.1 of the National
Building Code of Canada, 1970, except as provided in Article 4.4.3.33.
4.4.3.10.(1) Except as permitted in Sentences (2) (3) and (4), all masonry in buildings
shall be reinforced to resist the effects of seismic forces, but such reinforcement shall not
be less than that required in Articles 4.4.3.30 and 4.4.3.32.
(2) Reinforcement need not be provided in seismic zone 1 provided the masonry is
designed to resist seismic forces without such reinforcement.
(3) Reinforcement need not be provided in seismic zone 2 provided it can be shown to
the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction that the masonry can resist seismic
forces without such reinforcement and the masonry does not enclose an elevator shaft or
stairway.
(4) Reinforcement to resist seismic forces need not be provided in masonry partitions
provided the partitions:
(a) do not exceed 40 lb/sq ft in weight;
(b) do not exceed 10 ft in height and are laterally supported at the top; and
(c) do not enclose elevator shafts or stairwells in seismic zones 2 and 3.
-178-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
p
Ice
In)m
Allowable Stresses
4.4.3.11 The allowable stresses in plain masonry of brick shall conform to Table 4.4.3.D.
he
TABLE 4.4.3.D
on
Maximum Allowable stresses in Plain Brick Masonry
:es
:111
ns
of
Type of Stress
or modulus
in
Compressive, AxiaI(l)
Walls
Columns
Compressive, flexural(1)
Walls
Columns
Tensile, Flexural (4,5)
Normal to bed joints(1)
M or S mortar
N mortar
Parallel to bed joints(2)
M or S mortar
N mortar
Shear(6)
M or S mortar
N mortar
,Ie
IW
It
Designation
Maximum allowable
stress or modulus,
psi
im
im
0.251'm
0.201'm
im
im
0.321'm
0.261'm
it
it
36
28
it
72
56
it
Vm
V1'm but not to exceed 50

Vi'm but not to exceed 35
Bearing on masonry
ib
0.251'm(3)
Em
1000 I'm but not to exceed

3,000,000 psi
Modulus of rigidity
Ev
400 1'm but not to exceed

1,200,000 psi
Vm
7,
e
p
s
:i
e
e
Notes to Table 4.4.3.D.

(l)Direction of stress is normal to bed joints.
(2)Tensile stresses parallel to bed joints are not permitted in stack bond masonry.
(3)Where a vertical load is supported on a masonry surface and the ratio of the loaded surface to the total
surface is not more than 1 :3, jb may be increased to 0.375 j'm provided the least distance between the
edges of the loaded and unloaded surfaces is at least 34 of the length of the edge of the loaded area perpendicular to such least distance. The allowable bearing stress on a reasonably concentric area greater
than one-third the full area may be interpolated between the values given.
(ClFor computing flexural stresses. the section modulus of a cavity wall shall be assumed to be equal to the
sum of the section moduli of the wythes.
(llAllowance shall be made for unusual vibration and impact forces.
(elSee also Article 4.4.3.33. for shear walls.
-179-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
4.4.3.12 The allowable stresses in plain masonry of concrete block or structural clay tile
shall conform to Table 4.4.3.E.
TABLE 4.4.3.E
Maximum Allowable Stresses and Moduli for Plain Concrete Block Masonry
and Structural Clay Tile Masonry(l)
Maximum allowable stress or modulus,.
psi
Type of stress
or modulus
Compressive, axial(2)
Walls
Columns
Compressive, flexural(2)
Walls
Columns
Tensile, flexural(i.6)
Normal to bed joints(2)
M or S mortar
N mortar
Parallel to bed joints(8}
M or S mortar
N mortar
Shear (8)
M or S mortar
N mortar
Bearing on masonry(4)
Units without voids

or filled hollow
units(7) based on
gross cross-sectional
Designation
area
Units with voids

based on net
cross-sectional
area
fm
fm
0.20 f'm
0.181'm
0.225 f'm.
0.20 f'm
fm
fm
0.301'm
0.24 f'm
0.30 f'm(l}
0.241'm(l)
it
it
36
28
23(1)
16(1)
ft,
ft,
56
46(1)
32(1)
Vm
Vm
fb
34
23
0.25 f'm
34(1)
23(1)
0.25 f'm
TO'
1000 1'm but not to

exceed 3,000,000 psi
1000 f'm but not to

Modulus of rigidity
E...
400 f'm but not to

400 f'm but not to

'ID
Notes to Table ".".3.E.

(1lShear and flexural calculations shall be based on net mortar bedded area.
(2)Direction of stress normal to bed joints.
(I)Direction of stress parallel to bed joints. Tensile stresses in the horizontal planes are not permitted in
stack bond masonry.
('lWhere a vertical load is supported on a masonry surface and the ratio of the loaded surface to the total
surface is not more than 1:3,!. may be increased to 0.375 E'm provided the least distance between the
edges of the loaded and unloaded surfaces is at least ~ of the length of the edge of the loaded area perpendicular to such least distance. The allowable bearing stress on a reasonably concentric area greater
(I)For computing flexural stresses, the section modulus of a cavity wall shall be assumed to be equal to
the sum of the section moduli of the wythes.
(')Allowance shall be made for unusual vibration and impact forces.
(T)For filled-hollow units the strength of tbe concrete or grout fill shall be at least equal to that of the units.
(I)See also Article 4..4..3.33 for shear walls.
--"P-.--.----~~----~-----ile
4.4.3.13 The allowable stresses in reinforced masonry of brick shall conform to Table
4.4.3.F.
TABLE 4.4.3.F
Maximum Allowable Stresses in Reinforced Brick Masonry
8,.
Type of stress
or modulus
Compressive, axial
Walls
Columns(l)
Compressive, flexural
Walls and beams
Columns(l)
Shear
No shear reinforcement
Flexural members
Shear walls(3)
With shear reinforcement
taking en tire shear
Flexural members
Shear walls(3)
Bond
Plain bars
Deformed bars
Bearing(2)
Maximum allowable
stress of modulus, psi
Desi~nation
I'm
I'm
0.40 I'm
0.32 I'm
0.25
0.20
fm
fm
fm
fm
Vm
Vm
O. 7 YJi: but not to exceed 50

O. 5~but not to exceed 100
v
v
2.
u
u
fb
ov:r: but not to exceed 120
1.5~but not to exceed 150
80
160
0.25 f'm
Em

3,000,000 psi
Modulus of rigidity
E ...

1,200,000 psi
Notes to Table 4.4.3.F.

(I)See Article 4.4.3.31.
(2'Where a vertical load is supported on a masonry surface and the ratio of the loaded surface to the total
surface is not more than 1 :3, jb may be increased to 0.375 I'm provided the least distance between the
edges of the loaded and unloaded surfaces is at least ~ of the length of the edge of the loaded area perpendicular to sllch least distance. The allowable bearing stress on a reasonably concentric area greater
(I)See also Article 4.4.3.33 for shear walls.
-181-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
4.4.3.14 The allowable stresses in reinforced masonry of concrete block or structural cla,'
tile shall conform to Table 4.4.3.G.
.
TABLE 4.4.3.G
Maximum Allowable Stresses in Reinforced Concrete Block and Structural
Clay Tile Masonry
Type of stress
or modulus
I Desi~nation
Maximum allowable
stress or modulus, psi
Jm
Jm
0.225 I'm
0.20 I'm
Jm
Jm
0.33 I'm
0.28 I'm
Compressive, axial
Walls
Columns(l)
Compressive, flexural
Walls and beams
Columns(l)
Shear
No shear reinforcement
Flexural members
Shear walls(2)
With shear reinforcement
taking entire shear
Flexural members
Shear walls{'t)
Bond
Plain bars
Deformed bars
Bearing on masonry{l)
u
u
J'b
Em
1000 J'm but not to exceed

3,000,000 psi
Modulus of rigidity
Ev

1,200,000 psi
Vm
Vm
0.02 J'm but not to exceed 50

0.015 J'm but not to exceed 50
v
v
0.05 I'm but not to exceed 150

0.04J'm but not to exceed 75
80
160
0.25 J'm
Notes to Table 4.4.3.G.

(1)See Article 4.4.3.31.
(OSee also Article 4.4.3.33 for shear walls.
(3)Where a vertical load is supported on a masonry surface and the ratio of the loaded surface to the total
surface is not more than 1:3, fo may be increased to 0.375 f'm provided the least distance between the
edges of the loaded and unloaded surfaces is at least U of the length of the edge of the loaded area perpendicular to such least distance. The allowable bearing stress on a reasonably concentric area greater
4.4.3.15.(1) The allowable tensile stress in reinforcement shall not exceed:

(a) 18,000 psi for billet-steel or axle-steel reinforcing bars of structural grade;
(b) 24,000 psi for deformed bars with a yield strength of at least 60,000 psi and not
exceeding No. 11 size; and
(c) 20,000 psi for all other reinforcement.
(2) The allowable compressive stress in vertical column reinforcement shall not exceed
40 per cent of the yield strength of the steel and shall be not greater than 24,000 psi.
(3) The allowable compressive stress for compression reinforcement in flexural members
shall be not greater than the allowable tensile stress shown in Sentence (1).
4.4.3.16 The modulus of elasticity of steel reinforcement shall be assumed as 29,000,000 psi.
4.4.3.17 The allowable shear on steel bolts and anchors shall conform to Table 4.4.3.H.
:::lay
TABLE 4.4.3.
Maximum Allowable Shear on Bolts and Anchors(l)
Diameter of bolt or
anchor, in
Minimum
embedment, in.(2)
Maximum
allowable shear, lb
4
4
4
4
270
410
5
6
7
8
550
750
1100
1500
1850
2250
Notes to Table 4.4.l.H.

(l)In determining the stress in masonry, the eccentricity due to loaded bolts and anchors shall be considered.
(2)Bolts and anchors shall be solidly embedded in mortar or grout to develop adequate resistance to the
design shear forces except that the embedment shall not be less than given in Table 4.4.3.H.
Design of Masonry Walls and Columns

4.4.3.18.(1) The slenderness ratio of a load bearing masonry wall (the ratio of its effective
height, h, to the effective thickness, t) shall not exceed:
10 (3 - (el)/(e2))
(2) The value ede2 in Sentence (1) shall be assumed to be positive where the wall is bent
in single curvature and negative where the wall is bent in double curvature.
4.4.3.19.(1) The slenderness ratio of a loadbearing masonry column (the greatest value
obtained by dividing the effective height, h, by the effective thickness, t) shall not exceed
5 (4 - (el)/(e2)
(2) The value ede2 in Sentence (1) shall be assumed to be positive where the column
is bent in single curvature and negative where the column is bent in double curvature.
4.4.3.20 The slenderness coefficient, C., shall conform to Table 4.4.3.1.
tal
:he
er
ter
ot
~d
rs
ii.
TABLE 4.4.3.1
Forming Part of Sentence 4.4.3.20.
Slenderness Coefficients (C.)(l)
eI/e'}.
hIt
-1.0 -0.8
-5 or less 1.00 1.00
0.98 0.98
6
0.97 0.96
7
0.95 0.95
8
0.94 0.93
9
12
13
14
0.92
0.90
0.89
0.87
0.86
15
16
17
18
19
0.84
0.82
0.81
9
8
10
11
0.91
0.90
0.88
0.86
0.84
-0.6 -0.4 -0.2
20
21
22
23
24
6
L 4
). 3
0.70
25
26
27
28
29
0.68
0.66
0.65
0.63
0.62
30
31
32
33
34
0.60
0.58
0.57
0.55
0.54
35
36
37
38
39
40
0.52
0.50
0.49
0.47
0.46
0.44
J. 1
+0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 +1.0
1.00
0.98
0.96
0.94
0.92
1.00
0.98
0.96
0.94
0.92
1.00
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.91
1.00
0.98
0.95
0.92
0.90
1.00
0.97
0.94
0.92
0.89
1.00
0.97
0.94
0.91
0.88
1.00
0.97
0.93
0.90
0.87
1.00
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.85
1.00
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.84
0.91
0.89
0.87
0.85
0.83
0.90
0.88
0.86
0.84
0.81
0.89
0.86
0.84
0.82
0.80
0.88
0.85
0.82
0.80
0.78
0.86
0.84
0.85
0.82
0.83
0.80
0.77
0.73
0.70
0.82
0.78
0.74
0.71
0.67
0.80
0.76
0.72
0.68
0.64
0.81
0.79
0.77
0.75
0.74
0.79
0.77
0.75
0.'
0:
0.75
0.72
0.70
0.68
0.65
0.70
0.67
0.64
1-
0.83
0.81
0.79
0.77
0.76
0.79
0.76
0.73
I-~-
). 7
L 5
. 3
0.70
0.68
1-
0.70 0.67 0.64 0.60

0.67 0.63 0.60 0:56
0.64 0.60 0.56 0.52
0.61 Cf:57 0.52 0.48
0.58 0.53 0.49 0.44
- -- -
0.66 0.62 0.59 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.40

0.74 0.72 0.(
--0.72 0.70 0.(
0.64 0.60 0.56 0.52 0.47 0.42
0.43
0.38
0.71 0.68 0.65 0.61 0.58 0.53 0.48
0.69 0.66 0.62 0.59 0.55 0.50 0.46 0.40
0.67 0.64 0.61 0.57 0.52 0.48 0.42 0.37
--- - -- - - - - - - - - - - -- - 0.65 0.62 0.59 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.39
0.36
0.64 0.60 0.57 0.52 0.48 0.42 1
0.62 0.58 0.54 0.50 0.45 0.40
0.57
0.52
0.42
0.37
0.60
0.48
0.58 0.55 0.50 0.46 0.40 - I
0.57
0.55
0.53
0.52
0.50
0.53
0.51
0.49
0.47
0.45
0.48
0.46
0.45
0.43
0.43
0.42
0.48
0.46
0.44
0.42
0.40
0.43
0.41
0.39
-0.38-
--
- - - -- -- - - - - - - - - - - -- --
--
Note to Table 4.4.3.1.

(1)
Cs -
1- C" (~ - 5)
Where C" - 0.003 ( (el)/(el) )2
+ 0.012 ( (eM(el) ) + 0.025
4.4.3.21.(1) Where a wall is laterally supported at more than one level, the effective
height, h, between supports shall be assumed as the clear height between such supports.
(2) Where a wall is not laterally supported at the top, its effective height, h, shall be
assumed as twice the height of the wall above the lateral support.
4.4.3.22.(1) Where a column is laterally supported at more than one level in the directions
of both principal axes, the effective height, h, in relation to any axis shall be...assumed as
the clear distance between such supports.
(2) Where a column is provided with lateral support in the directions of both principal
axes at the bottom and one principal axis at the top, its effective height in relation to the
axis about which the column has support top and bottom shall be assumed as the distance
between such supports and its effective height at right angles to this axis shall be assumed
as twice this distance.
(3) Where a column is not provided with lateral support at the top, its effective height
relative to two principal axes shall be assumed as twice its height above the lower support.
4.4.3.23.(1) Except as provided in Article 4.4.3.25, for all solid masonry walls the effective
thickness, I, shall be assumed as~the actftal thickness.
(2) Except as provided in Article 4.4.3.25, for cavity walls loaded on not more than one
wythe, the effective thickness shall be assumed as the actual thickness of the loaded wythe.
(3) Except as provided in Article 4.4.3.25, for cavity walls loaded on both wythes, each
wythe shall be considered to act independently and the effective thickness of each wythe
shall be assumed as its actual thickness.
4.4.3.24.(1) Except as provided in Article 4.4.3.25, for rectangular columns, the effective
thickness in the direction of each principal axis shall be assumed as the actual thickness in
that direction.
(2) Except as provided in Article 4.4.3.25, for non-rectangular columns, the effective
thickness, t, in relation to each principal axis shall be assumed as 3.5 times its radius of
gyration about the axis considered.
4.4.3.25 Where raked mortar joints are used, the effective thickness shall be assumed as
the effective thickness in Articles 4.4.3.23 and 4.4.3.24 reduced by the depth of the raking.
4.4.3.26.(1) Lateral movements due to loads, thermal effects and other causes shall be
taken into account in calculating the virtual eccentricity of loads on walls or columns.
(2) Where members are constructed of different kinds or grades of units or mortar, the
variation in the moduli of elasticity shall be taken into account and the eccentricity of the
load shall be measured from the centroid of the transformed section of the member.
(3) Where a cavity wall is loaded on one wythe, the eccentricity of the load shall be
measured from the centroid of the loaded wythe.
(4) Where a cavity wall is loaded on both wythes, the load shall be distributed to each
wythe according to the eccentricity of the load from the centroidal axis of the wall.
(5) For walls or columns of solid masonry subject to bending about not more than one
principal axis,
(a) the eccentricity of any load shall be measured from the centroid of the member, and
(b) the eccentricity coefficient C. shall be computed by:
(i) C. =
(ii)
C. =
+1
~(1
/ where the virtual eccentricity, e, does not exceed t/6 j

6e t
- ) where the virtual eccentricity exceeds t/6 but does not exceed
t/3; or
1
(iii) C. = - - - - where the virtual eccentricity exceeds t/3.
6 ~
1
t
(6) Where walls and columns are subject to bending about both principal axes, the
eccentricity coefficient, C(I, shall be computed by:
1
6eb/b
6etlt where (etb
ebt) does not exceed bt/6; or
(a) C, =
(b)
C. = % (1 - 2Zb - 2;t) where (e,b -I- ebt) exceeds bt/6 but does not exceed bt/3.
4.4.3.27.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), for cavity walls loaded on both wythes
A" shall be assumed as the gross cross-sectional area of the wythe under consideration.
(2) Where raked mortar joints are used, the thickness used in determining A" shall be
the actual thickness of the member reduced by the depth of the raking.
4.4.3.28.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), the allowable vertical load, P, on a plain
masonry wall or column subject to bending about not more than one principal axis shall
be computed by:
(a) P = CaimAn where the virtual eccentricity is less than t/20 and 1m is the allowable
axial compressive stress, or
-185-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
(b) P - C.C./,,.A .. where the virtual eccentricity is at least tl20 but does not exceed
113 and f m is the allowable flexural compressive stress.
(2) Where the virtual eccentricity exceeds t13, P in Sentence (1) shall be computed in
accordance with Clause (l)(b) except that the allowable flexural tensile stress.!t, in Articles
4.4.3.11 and 4.4.3.12 shall be substituted for fm.
(3) Except as provided in Sentence (4), the allowable vertical loads on rectangular
plain masonry walls and columns subject to bending about both principal axes shall be
calculated in conformance with:
(a) Clause (l)(a) where (etb + elit) is less than bt120, or
(b) Clause (l)(b) where (etb
elit) is at least equal to bel20 but does not exceed bel3.
(4) Where (e,b
ellt) exceeds btl3, walls and columns subject to bending about two
principal axes shall be reinforced and designed in accordance with Articles 4.4.3.29 and
4.4.3.31.
4.4.3.29.(1) Except as permitted in Sentences (2) and (4), the allowable load, P, on a
reinforced masonry wall subject to bending about not more than one principal axis shall be:
(a) P == C.fmA ft where the virtual eccentricity is less than e/l0 and fm is the allowable
axial compressive stress, or
(b) P = C.C.jmAft where the virtual eccentricity is at least tll0 but does not exceed tl3
or a value which would produce tension in the reinforcement and fm is the allowable
flexural compressive stress.
(2) Where the virtual eccentricity exceeds tl3 or a value which would produce tension
in the reinforcement, P in Sentence (1) shall be determined on the basis of a transformed
section and linear stress distribution. Reinforcement in compression shall be neglected
except as provided in Sentence (4). The compressive stress in the masonry shall not exceed
the al10wable flexural compressive stress, fm, and the tensile stress in the reinforcement shall
conform to Article 4.4.3.15. The vertical load determined in accordance with this Sentence
shall be modified by the slenderness coefficient in Article 4.4.3.20.
(3) Except as provided in Sentence (4), the allowable vertical load, P, on a reinforced
masonry wall subject to bending about both principal axes shall be calculated in conformance with:
(a) Clause (l)(a) where (e,b + ellt) is less than bellO,
(b) Clause (l)(b) where (e,b
e"t) is at least equal to btllO but does' not exceed bel3
or a value which would produce tension in the reinforcement, or
(c) Sentence (2) where (e,b + e,J) exceeds btl3 or a value which would produce tension
in the reinforcement.
(4) When the reinforcement in bearing walls is desi~ned, placed and tied in position as
for columns, the walls may be designed as columns In accordance with Article 4.4.3.31
provided the length of the wall considered as a column does not exceed the centre-to-centre
distance between concentrated loads nor exceed the width of the bearing plus four times
the wall thickness.
4.4.3.30.(1) Reinforced masonry walls shall be reinforced horizontally and vertically

with steel having a total cross-sectional area not less than 0.002 times the cross-sectional
area of the wall so that not less than one-third of the required steel is either vertical or
horizontal.
(2) The principal reinforcing bars shall be spaced not more than 6 times the wall thickness nor more than 48 in. apart.
(3) Horizontal reinforcement shall be provided in the wall immediately above every
footing, at the bottom and top of every wall opening, at roof and floor level, and at the top
of every parapet wall.
(4) All required wall reinforcement in Sentences (1) to (3) shall be continuous or shall
be spliced in accordance with Sentence 4.4.3.51.(4).
(5) In addition to the minimum reinforcement or that required by the structural design,
there shall be not less than the equivalent of one No. 4 bar around all window and door
openings extending at least 24 in. beyond the corners of the openings.
4.4.3.31.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), the allowable vertical load, P, on a reinforced masonry column subject to bending about not more than one principal axis, shall be:
(a) P == C.(j. + 0.80 Pgf$) Aft where the virtual eccentricity is less than ell0 and f.
is the allowable axial compressive stress, or
(b) P = C.C, (fm + 0.80 pgf.) A" where the virtual eccentricity is at least tll0 but does
not exceed tl3 or a value which would produce tension in the reinforcement and f.
is the allowable flexural compressive stress.
p
ed
in
les
ar
be
ld
a
e:
Ie
13
Ie
n
d
d
d
II
(2) Where the virtual eccentricity exceeds t/3 or a value which would produce tension
in the reinforcement, P in Sentence (1) shall be determined on the basis of a transformed
section and linear stress distribution. The compressive stress in the masonry shall not exceed
the allowable flexural compressive stress and the stresses in the reinforcement, I., shall
conform to Article 4.4.3.15. The vertical load determined in accordance with this Sentence
shall be modified by the slenderness coefficient in Article 4.4.3.20.
(3) Allowable vertical loads on rectangular reinforced masonry columns subject to
bending about both principal axes shall be calculated in conformance with:
(a) Clause (l)(a) where (e,b + e,J) is less than bt/l0.
(b) Clause (l)(b) where (e,b + eft) is at least equal to bt/lO but does not exceed bt/3
or a value which would produce tension in the reinforcement, or
(c) Sentence (2) where (e,b + e,J) exceeds bt/3 or a value which would produce tension
in the reinforcement.
4.4.3.32.(1) The cross-sectional area of vertical reinforcement in columns shall be at least
0.5 per cent and not more than 4 per cent of the gross cross-sectional area of the column
except that a column stressed to less than half of its allowable stress may have its reinforcement reduced to not less than 0.27 per cent.
(2) Lateral ties shall be not less than No.9 ASWG wire (0.1483 in. diameter) and the
spacing shall not exceed 16-bar diameters, 48-tie diameters, nor the least dimension of the
column whichever gives the smallest spacing. Ties may be placed in horizontal mortar
joints or in contact with the vertical steel.
(3) The ties shall be so arranged that every corner bar and intermediate bar is laterally
supported by a tie forming an included angle of not more than 135 degrees at the bar except
that an intermediate bar that is not more than 6 in. from a laterally supported bar need
not be supported, and where the bars are located around the periphery of a circle a circular
tie maybe used.
Shear Walls
4.4.3.33.(1) A plain masonry shear wall shall be designed so that no part of the wall is in
tension.
(2) Reinforced masonry shear walls shall be designed in conformance with Article
4.4.3.29.
(3) The maximum horizontal shear stress in a shear wall, V. w, shall not exceed the value:
(v or tim + 0.3Ic8)
where v or 11m = the allowable applicable shear stress.
(4) In computing the shear resistance of a shear wall, flanges or projections formed by
intersecting walls shall be neglected.
(5) In calculations of shear stresses in masonry shear walls subjected to earthquake
forces, the load probability combination factor in Section 4.1 of the National Building
Code shall not apply.
4.4.3.34.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (3), where masonry shear walls intersect a
masonry wall or walls to form symmetrical T or I sections, the effective flange width shall
not exceed one-sixth of the total wall height above the level being analyzed and its overhanging width on either side of the shear wall shall not exceed six times the thickness of
the intersected wall.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), where masonry shear walls intersect a masonry
wall or walls to form L or C sections, the effective overhanging flange width shall not
exceed one-sixteenth of the total wall height above the level being analyzed nor six times
the thickness of the intersected wall.
(3) Limits on effective flange width in Sentences (1) and (2) may be increased where it
can be shown that such increases are justified.
(4) The vertical shear stress at the intersection of masonry walls shall not exceed the
allowable shear stress in Articles 4.4.3.11 to 4.4.3.14 for shear walls if the intersection is
laid up in true masonry bond conforming to Clause 4.4.5.18.(l)(a) or shall not exceed the
allowable shear values in Article 4.4.3.17 where metal bolts or anchors are provided.
Metal anchors shall be embedded to the depth required to develop the tensile strength
of the anchors.
4.4.3.35.(1) When floors or roofs are designed to transmit horizontal forces to walls, the
anchorage of the floor or roof to the wall shall be designed to resist the horizontal force.
(2) Steel anchors to resist shear force shall be designed in conformance with Article
4.4.3.17.
-187-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Flexural Members
4.4.3.36.(1) The design of flexural members of reinforced masonry shall be in accordance
with the following assumptions:
(a) A section that is plane before bending remains plane after bending,
(b) Moduli of elasticity of the masonry and of the reinforcement remain constant,
(c) Tensile forces are resisted only by the tensile reinforcement, and
(d) Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and bonded to masonry material.
4.4.3.37.(1) All members shall be designed to resist at all sections the maximum bending
moment and shears as determined by the principle of continuity and relative rigidity.
(2) The clear distance between lateral supports of a beam shall not exceed 32 times the
least width of the compression flange or face.
(3) Where compression steel is required in beams, it shall be anchored by ties or stirrups
not less than }4 in. in diameter, spaced not more than 16-bar diameters or 48-tie diameters
apart, whichever is less.
(4) In computing flexural stresses in walls where reinforcement occurs, the effective
width shall be not greater than four times the wall thickness.
4.4.3.38 Where tensile reinforcement at any section of a flexural member is required, the
ratio, p, of the area of tensile reinforcement to effective masonry area shall be at least
80lfll unless the tensile reinforcement at every section, positive or negative, is at least
one-third greater than that required by analysis.
4.4.3.39.(1) The shearing stress, v, as a measure of diagonal tension in reinforced masonry
flexural members shall be calculated by:
V
v == btl
except for members of I or T section where b' shall be substituted for b.
(2) Except for corbels, brackets and other short cantilevers, the maximum shear in a
flexural member shall be assumed as that occurring at a distance equal to the effective
depth d, of the member, from the face of the support.
(3) The effects of flexural compression in variable-depth members and the significant
effects of torsion shall be included in calculating the shear stress.
(4) Where the value of the calculated shearing stress exceeds the allowable shearing
stress permitted on masonry without web reinforcement, web reinforcement shall be provided to carry the entire shearing stress. Such reinforcement shall be continued for a
distance equal to the depth, d, of the member beyond the point theoretically required.
4.4.3.40.(1) Web reinforcement shall consist of:
(a) bars or stirrups perpendicular to or at an angle of at least 45 degrees with the longitudinal tension reinforcement,
(b) longitudinal bars bent so that the axis of the inclined portion of the bar makes an
angle of at least 30 degrees with the axis of the longitudinal portion of the bar, or
(c) combination of (a) and (b).
4.4.3.41.(1) The area of steel, AI" required in stirrups placed perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement shall be calculated by:
Vs
A" = f.,d
4.4.3.42.(1) The required area, A", of inclined stirrups or parallel bars bent up at different
distances from the support shall be calculated by:
A _
Vs
,,- f.,d (sin a + cos a)
(2) When the web reinforcement consists of a single bent bar or of a single group of
parallel bars all bent up at the same distance from the support, the required area, A", of
such bar or bars shall be calculated by:
A,,=--ff) sin a
(3) Only the centre three-fourths of the inclined-portion of a bent bar shall be considered effective as web reinforcement.
4.4.3.43 Where web reinforcement is required, it shall be spaced so that every 45-degree
line, representing a potential diagonal crack, extending from the mid-depth, d12, of the
-188-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
lce
beam to the longitudinal tension bars shall be crossed by at least one line of effective web
reinforcement.
4.4.3.44.(1) In flexural members in which tensile reinforcement is parallel to the compressive face, the bond stress, u, shall be calculated by:
V
U
ng
he
ps
~rs
V'e
Ie
5t
st
y
= "Zojd
(2) The tension or compression in any bar at any section shall be developed on each
side of that section by adequate embedment length, end anchorage, or hooks. A tension bar
may be anchored by bending it across the web at an angle of not less than 15 degrees with
the longitudinal portion of the bar and making it continuous with the reinforcement on
the opposite side of the member.
(3) Except at supports, every reinforcing bar shall be continued beyond the point at
which it is no longer needed to resist flexural stress, for a distance of not less than the
effective depth of the member but not less than 12 bar diameters.
(4) Tension bars shall not be terminated in a tension zone except where:
(a) the shear is not over one-half that permitted,
(b) additional stirrups in excess of those required are provided each way from the termination point, a distance equal to the depth of the beam. The stirrup spacing shall
not exceed sd where

rb
r" is the ratio of the area of bars terminated to the total area
of bars at the section, or

(c) the continuing bars provide double the area required for moment resistance at the
termination point or double the perimeter required for bond.
(5) Tensile reinforcement for negative moment in any span of a continuous, restrained
.or cantilever beam, or in any member of a rigid frame shall be adequately anchored by
bond, hooks or mechanical anchors in or through the supporting member.
a
e
(6) At least one-third of the total reinforcement required for negative moment at a
support shall be extended beyond the extreme position of the point of inflection a distance
at least one-sixteenth of the clear span but not less than the effective depth of the member.
(7) At least one-third of the total reinforcement required for positive moment in simple
beams or at the simply supported end of continuous beams shall extend along the same
face of the beam at least 6 inches past the edge of the support. At least one-quarter of the
total reinforcing required for positive moment in a continuous beam shall extend along the
same face of the beam past the face of intermediate supports at least 6 inches.
(8) Plain bars in tension shall terminate in standard hooks, except that hooks shall not
be required on the positive reinforcement at interior supports of continuous members.
4.4.3.45.(1) Single separate bars used as web reinforcement shall be anchored at each
.end by
(a) welding to longitudinal reinforcement,
(b) hooking tightly around the longitudinal reinforcement through 1S0 degrees,
(c) embedment above or below the mid-depth of the beam on the compression side a
distance sufficient to develop by bond the stress in the bar, or
(d) standard hook as specified in Article 4.4.3.46 developing 7500 psi, plus embedment
sufficient to develop by bond the remainder of the stress in the bar; the effective
embedded length shall be assumed not to exceed the distance between the mid-depth
of the beam and the tangent of the hook.
(2) The ends of bars forming a single U-Stirrups or multiple U-stirrups shall be anchored
by one of the methods of Sentence (1) or shall be bent through an angle of at least 90
degrees tightly around longitudinal reinforcing bars not less in diameter than the stirrup
bar, and shall project beyond the bend at least 12 diameters of the stirrup bar.
(3) The loops or closed ends of single U-stirrups or multiple U-stirrups shall be anchored
by bending around the longitudinal reinforcement through an angle of at least 90 degrees,
.or by being welded or otherwise rigidly attached to such reinforcement.
(4) Hooking or bending stirrups or separate web reinforcing bars around the longitudinal reinforcement shall be considered effective only when these bars are perpendicular
to the longitudinal reinforcement.
(5) Longitudinal bars bent to act as web reinforcement in tension zones shall be continuous with the longitudinal reinforcement. The tensile stress in each bar shall be fully
.developed in both the upper and lower half of the beam by anchorage through bond or hooks.
-189-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
4.4.3.46.(1) A hook used for anchoring reinforcement shall have:

(a) a complete semicircular bend with a radius on the axis of the bar of at least 3- and
not more than 6-bar diameters, plus an extension at the free end of the bar equal to
at least 4-bar diameters,
(b) a 90-degree bend having a radius of at least 4-bar diameters plus an extension beyond
the bend equal to at least 12 diameters, or
(c) for stirrup anchorage only, a US-degree turn with a radius on the axis of the bar of
3 diameters plus an extension at the free end of the bar of at least 6-bar diameters.
(2) Hooks having a radius of bend of more than 6-bar diameters shall be considered
merely as extensions to the bars.
(3) Hooks shall not be assumed to carry a load which would produce a tensile stress in
the bar greater than 7500 psi.
(4) Hooks shall not be considered effective in anchoring bars in compression.
(5) Any mechanical device capable of developing the strength of the bar without damage
to the masonry may be used in lieu of a hook provided test evidence is submitted to show
the adequacy of such device.
Grouted Reinforced Masonry
"
4.4.3.47 Grouted reinforced masonry shall be constructed so that:

(a) at the time of laying, all masonry units are free of excessive dust or dirt;
(b) type S mortar is used,
(c) the proportions of materials in fine or coarse grout conform to Article 4.4.2.18,
(d) fine grout is used in grout spaces except that coarse grout may be used in grout
spaces 2 in. or more in least horizontal dimension,
(e) the grout completely fills all spaces intended to receive grout,
(f) grout is used before it has begun to set but not more than 1}1 hr after initial mixing,
and
(g) the units in all wythes are laid with full head and bed mortar joints.
4.4.3.48 Where grouted masonry is grouted in low lifts,
(a) masonry headers shall not project into the grout space,
(b) all spaces to be grouted shall be not less than ~ in. in width,
(c) grout shall be puddled immediately after pouring,
(d) wythes shall be carried up to a height not greater than that required to accommodate one grout lift, except that one wythe may be carried to a height of not more
than 16 in. before grouting,
(e) grout shall be placed in lifts of not more than 8 in. but not more than 6 times the
width of the grout space, and
(f) the grout shall be stopped 1 in. below the top of the lowest wythe where the work
may be stopped for 1 hr or longer.
4.4.3.49.(1) Where grouted masonry is grouted in high lifts the wythes may be constructed
to the full wall height and grouting carried out in conformance with Sentences (2) to (6)
after the mortar has set.
(2) The outer wythes of grouted masonry in Sentence (1) shall be bonded together with
wall ties of not less than No.9 ASWG (0.1483 in. diameter) corrosion-resistant wire bent
into rectangles 4 in. wide and 2 in. less in length than the over-all wall thickness, or other
ties providing equivalent strength, stiffness and bond. Kinks or other deformations in the
ties shall not be permitted. One wythe of the. wall shall be built up not higher than 16 in.
above the other wythe. Ties shall be laid not more than 24 in. o. c. horizontally and 16 in.
o. c. vertically for running bond, and not more than 24 in. o. c. horizontally and 12 in. o. c.
vertically for stack bond.
(3) Cleanouts shall be provided for each lift in grouted masonry in Sentence (1) by
omitting every second unit in the bottom course of the section being placed. Mortar fins
and other foreign matter shall be removed from the grout space by a high pressure jet of
water or air. Such c1eanouts shall be sealed after inspection and before grouting.
(4) The grout space in grouted masonry in Sentence (1) shall be not less than 3 in. in
width, and vertical grout barriers of solid masonry not more than 25 ft apart shall be built
across the grout space the entire height of the wall.
(5) Grout used in grouted masonry in Sentence (1) shall be mixed thoroughly to a consistency suitable for pumping without segregation and placed by pumping or other approved method.
-190-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
and
(al to
yond
Olr of
~ters.
ered
ss in
lage
how
out
ng,
:0-
ore
le
i)
h
t
(6) Grouting of grouted masonry in Sentncee (1) shall be done in a continuous pour in
lifts of not more than 4 ft. It shall be consolidated by puddling or vibrating during pouring
and again after excess moisture has been absorbed and while the grout is plastic. The grout~
ing of any section between vertical grout barriers shall be completed in one day with no
interruptIons greater than 1 hr.
Reinforced Masonry of Hollow Units

4.4.3.50.(1) Reinforced masonry of hollow unit construction shall be constructed of
hollow masonry units in which certain cells contain reinJorcement and are filled with concrete
or grout.
(2) All reinforced masonry of hollow units shall be built so that walls and cross webs
forming cells to be filled shall be fully bedded in mortar to prevent leakage of grout. All head
joints shall be filled with mortar for a distance in from the face of the wall or unit not less
than the thickness of the face shells. Bond shall be provided by lapping units in successive
vertical courses or by equivalent mechanical anchorage.
(3) Vertical cells of hollow units to be filled in Sentence (1) shall have vertical alignment
sufficient to maintain an unobstructed continuous cell of at least 2 in. by 3 in. except that
where the total grout pour exceeds 8 ft such cells shall be at least 3 in. by 3 in.
(4) Cleanout openings shall be provided at the bottoms of all cells to be filled at each
lift or pour of grout where such lift or pour of grout exceeds 4 ft in height. Any overhanging
mortar or other obstruction or debris shall be removed from the insides of such walls. The
cleanouts shall be inspected before being Sf>::I.led.
(5) Vertical reinforcement shall be held in position at top and bottom and at intervals
not exceeding 192 diameters of the reinforcement.
(6) All cells containing reinforcement shall be completely filled with grout in lifts not exceeding 8 ft except that where the total grout pour exceeds 8 ft in height the grout shall be
placed in lifts not exceeding 4 ft. Grout shall be consolidated at the time of pouring by
puddling or vibrating during pouring and again after excess moisture has been absorbed
and while the grout is plastic.
(7) When the grouting is stopped for more than 1 hr, horizontal construction joints
shall be formed by stopping the pour of grout 1% in. below the top unit.
(8) The proportions of materials in fine or coarse grout shall conform to Article 4.4.3.18.
(9) All grout shall be used within 1% hr of initial mixing but before it has begun to set.
Placing Reinforcement
4.4.3.51.(1) The thickness of grout or mortar between masonry units and reinforcement
shall be not less than U in. except that U in. bars may be laid in %-in. horizontal mortar
joints, and No.6 ASWG (0.192-111. diameter) wires may be laid in VB-in. horizontal joints.
Spaces containing both horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall be not less than % in.
larger than the sum of the diameters of such horizontal and vertical reinforcement.
(2) Except in columns the clear distance between parallel bars shall be at least equal to
the diameter of the bar.
(3) Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and fixed rigidly in position during grouting
except that horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the work progresses.
(4) Splices shall be made so that the structural strength of the member is not reduced.
Lapped splices shall provide sufficient lap to develop by bond the working stress of the
reinforcement. Mechanical connections shall develop the strength of the reinforcement
and welded connections shall conform to CSA W186-1969, "Welding of Reinforcing Bars
in Reinforced Concrete Construction".
4.4.3.52.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), all reinforcing bars shall be completely
embedded in mortar or grout and have a coverage of masonry not less than:
(a) 3 in. at the tops and bottoms of footings and masonry in contact with soil,
(b) 2 in. over bars in masonry exposed to the weather except that 1% in. shall be per.
mitted over bars %-in. or less and not located in the upper face of the masonry,
(c) 1% in. over reinforcement in columns not exposed to weather or soil,
(d) 1% in. on the bottom and sides of beams or girders not exposed to weather or soil,
(e) ~ in. from the face of all walls not exposed to weather or soil,
(f) % in. at the upper face of any member not exposed to weather or soil, and
(g) one bar diameter over all bars.
(2) Reinforcement consisting of bars or wire U in. or less in diameter embedded in the
horizontal mortar joints shall have not less than %-in. mortar coverage from the exposed
face.
-191-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
SUBSECTION 4.4.4 CONVENTIONAL DESIGN OF PLAIN MASONRY

General
4.4.4.1 This Subsection applies to the design and construction of plain masonry except
for plain masonry designed in accordance with Subsection 4.4.3.
4.4.4.2.(1) Dimensions of masonry units or masonry in this Subsection are nominal except
when otherwise noted.
(2) Minimum actual dimensions of masonry units or masonry shall be determined in
accordance with CSA A31-1959, "Modular Co-ordination in Buildings".
4.4.4.3.(1) The compressive stresses in plain masonry shall conform to Table 4.4.4.A.
(2) Mortar joints shall not exceed ~ in. in thickness.
(3) Where a type of masonry unit or type of mortar is not provided for in Sentence (1),
the maximum allowable compressive stress of the masonry shall be 15 per cent of the
ultimate compressive strength of the masonry as determined by tests performed in accordance with ASTM E72-63, "Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction".
TABLE 4.4.4.A
Max. allowable
compressive stress,
psi (I)
Type of Mortar(lI}
Type of
masonry
Solid
masonry
Cavity
walls
Type of masonry units
- - - - - - - -- M
N
0
S
K
- - - - -- - -
...
...
...
Rubble stone
Ashlar granite
Ashlar limestone and marble
Ashlar sandstone and cast-stone
140
800
500
400
120
720
450
360
Solid units, except concrete block, with an

ultimate compressive strength of:
over 10,000 psi
8,000 psi to 10,000 psi
4,500 psi to 8,000 psi
2,500 psi to 4,500 psi
1,500 psi to 2,500 psi
500
400
250
175
125
450
350
225
160
115
350
300
200
140
100
250
200
150
110
75
100
100
100
75
50
Solid concrete block

over 2,750 psi to 4,000 psi
1,800 psi to 2,750 psi
1,200 psi to 1,800 psi
250
175
125
225
160
115
200
140
100
150
100
75
...
...
...
Hollow load bearing units

over 1,000 psi to 1,399 psi
700 psi to 999 psi
100
85
90
75
85
70
Solid units, except concrete block, with an

ultimate compressive strength of:
over 2,500 pSI
1,500 psi to 2,500 psi
140
100
130
90
110
80
--
Solid concrete block

over 1,800 psi
1,200 psi to 1,800 psi
140
100
130
90
110
80
Hollow load bearing units
70
60
55
100
80
640 500
400 325
320 250
- - - -I -
...
... ...
... ...
- -- -- -- -
.. . ...
.. . ...
-- - ... ...
.. . ...
... ...
- - ---
Notes to Table 4.4A.A.

(J)Based on gross cross-sectional area.
(2)See Article 4.4.2.15 for type of mortar.
4.4.4.4.(1) Where a masonry unit of natural stone directly supports a concentrated load,.
the maximum allowable compressive stress for th~t unit shall be 10 per cent of its compressive strength.
(2) The maximum allowable flexural stress for natural stone shall be one"sixth its modulus
of rupture.
(cept
:cept
din
4.4.4.5 The thickness of every masonry wall shall conform to the appropriate requirements
in Articles 4.4.4.8 to 4.4.4.16 and shall have a bearing capacity conforming to Article
4.4.4.7.
4.4.4.6 Every masonry partition or wall, including panel walls and curtain walls, shall be
laterally supported in conformance with the appropriate requirements in Articles 4.4.4.21.
4.4.4.22, 4.4.4.23, 4.4.5.8, and 4.4.5.10.
Bearing Capacity
(I),
the
:coron".
00
00
00
75
50
4.4.4.7.(1) The maximum allowable bearing capacity of masonry shall be the product of
its maximum allowable stress, provided for in Article 4.4.4.3 and
(a) its gross cross"sectional area when it is solid masonry, or
(b) its gross cross"sectional area minus the area of space between the wythes when it is
a cavity wall.
(2) For the purpose of calculating the areas of masonry the actual dimensions of the
cross-section of the masonry shall be used.
(3) Where masonry is constructed of more than one type of masonry unit its maximum
allowable bearing capacity shall be determined on the basis of the weakest unit.
Height and Thickness of Solid Masonry

4.4.4.8.(1) Where a solid masonry wall is made up of two or more wythes, the thickness
of the wall shall not include any wythe less than 4 in. nominal thickness for loadbearing
masonry walls or 3 in. actual thickness for panel walls or curtain walls.
(2) Veneer shall not be considered part of the wall when computing the required thickness
of the wall.
4.4.4.9.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (3) and (4) and Articles 4.4.4.12 and 4.4.4.16,
the tbickness of a loadbearing wall of solid masonry above the top of a foundation wall,
and not including basement and cellar walls, shall be at least 12 in.
(a) for walls up to 36 ft in height if constructed of hollow units, and
(b) for walls up to 48 ft in height if constructed of solid units.
(2) Where a solid masonry wall exceeds the height limits in Sentence (1), the thickness
requirements for the top 36 ft of walls made with hollow units or the top 48 ft of walls
made with solid units shall conform to Sentence (1) and the wall thickness below these
heights shall be increased in increments of at least 4 in. for each increment of 36 ft of height
or part thereof measured down from the top.
(3) Where a loadbearing wall of solid masonry is not over 36 ft in height above the top
of the foundation wall and where the design live load on any floor above the first storey
does not exceed 50 psf, the minimum wall thickness shall be 8 in. except that for rubble
stone the minimum thickness shall be 12 in.
(4) Loadbearing walls of solid units 6 in. in thickness may be built to a height not exceeding 9 ft at the eave and 15 ft at the peak of a gable:
(a) in one-storey buildings, and
(b) for the top storey of two-storey buildings where the wall of the first storey is permitted to be 8 in. in Sentence (3).
(5) Masonry foundation walls shall be designed in accordance with Section 4.4.3.
(6) When a change in thickness due to minimum thickness requirements occurs between
floor levels, the greater thickness shall be carried up to the next higher floor level.
(7) Where a change in thickness of a masonry wall occurs, the top 8 in. of the thicker
portion shall be of solid units.
4.4.4.10.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2) and Article 4.4.4.12, the thickness of a
solid masonry panel wall shall be not less than 7 in. actual thickness.
(2) Panel walls of solid masonry of solid units not less than 6 in. in thickness may be
built to a height not exceeding 10 ft provided Type S mortar is used.
d,.
~s-
4.4.4.11.(1) The thickness of every solid masonry curtain wall shall be at least 7 in. in
actual thickness for walls up to 36 ft in height above its bearing support.
(2) \~There a solid masonry curtain wall exceeds 36 ft in height, the top 36 ft of the wall
shall be at least 7 in. actual thickness and the wall thickness below this height shall be
increased in increments of at least 4 in. for each increment of 36 ft of height or part thereof
measured down from the top.
4.4.4.12.(1) Where a solid masonry wall is stiffened by pilasters of plain masonry the wall
thickness required in Articles 4.4.4.9 and 4.4.4.10 may be reduced between pilasters by
one-half of the thickness added by the pilaster to the wall thickness required without
pilasters, provided:
(a) no part of the wall after reduction is less than 8 in. in thickness,
(b) the centre-to-centre spacing of pilasters is not more than 25 times the reduced thickness of the stiffened wall, and
(c) the width of the pilasters is not less than one-eighth of their centre-to-centre spacing.
Height and Thickness of Cavity Walls

4.4.4.13.(1) A cavity wall shall not be built to a height greater than 36 ft above its bearing
support.
(2) The minimum thickness of a wythe in a cavity wall shall be 4 in.
(3) The width of a cavity in a cavity wall shall be not less than 2 in. and not more than
3 in. when tied with metal ties.
(4) The width of a cavity in a cavity wall shall be not less than 3 in. and not more than
4 in. when tied with masonry bonding units.
4.4.4.14.(1) Where a cavity wall is loadbearing the total thicknesses of wythes and cavities
shall be at least:
(a) 10 in. for the top 12 ft,
(b) 12 in. for that portion more than 12 ft but not more than 24 ft, from the top, and
(c) 14 in. for that portion more than 24 ft from the top.
(2) Where a cavity wall is non-Ioadbearing the total thickness of wythes and cavities
shall be at least 10 in.
Height and Thickness of Partitions

4.4.4.15.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), the height of any masonry partition
between horizontal lateral supports shall not exceed 36 times the partition thickness.
(2) Where lateral support of a partition is provided by walls or columns spaced at
horizontal intervals not exceeding 36 times the partition thickness, the height of a partition
shall not exceed 72 times its thickness.
Height and Thickness of Shaft and Penthouse Walls
4.4.4.16.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (4), every interior loadbearing wall that
encloses a stair shaft, elevator shaft or other vertical shaft and does not exceed 20 ft between
vertical lateral supports shall be at least 8 in. thick for walls up to two storeys in height.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (4), where interior loadbearing walls in Sentence (1)
exceeds two storeys in height ,the top two storeys shall be at least 8 in. in thickness and the
minimum thickness below this height shall be lOcreased in increments of at least 4 in. for
each increment of three storeys measured downward from the top.
(3) Loadbearing masonry walls not more than 12 ft in height above the main roof level
and enclosing mechanical rooms or elevator or stairway penthouses having an aggregate
area not exceeding 15 per cent of the roof area, but not to exceed 5000 sq ft shall be not
less than 8 in. in thickness except that where such exterior wall supports beams carrying
elevator loads the wall thickness shall be at least 12 in. up to the underside of such beams.
(4) Where penthouse walls described in Sentence (3) are supported on interior masonry
walls described in Sentences (1) and (2), they need not be considered in computing the
allowable height and thickness of such interior walls except as provided in Article 4.4.4.17.
Changes in Thickness
4.4.4.17 The thickness of a wall of masonry at any height shall, not be greater than the
thickness of the wall immediately below except as provided in Article 4.4.5.21.
Chases and Recesses
4.4.4.18.(1) Chases or recesses shall not be made in walls 8 in. or less in thickness.
(2) Chases or recesses shall not be closer than 2 ft to any pilaster, buttress, cross wall or
other vertical structural member that provides lateral support for any wall.
hereof
e wall
~rs by
[thout
icing.
~ring
: than
: than
vities
md
vities
tition
~d at
~ition
that
ween
ight.
e (1)
::l the
t. for
(3) Except as provided in Article 4.4.4.20, the depth of any chase or recess in any wall
shall not exceed one-third the thickness of the wall.
(4) The clear distance between chases in a wall shall be not less than four times the wall
thickness.
4.4.4.19.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), every chase or recess or bearing in masonry
walls of hollow units shall be built in as construction proceeds.
(2) Where necessary to cut a chase, dry pack concrete shall be used to form a chase of
required size in a wall of hollow masonry after the wall has been constructed.
4.4.4.20.(1) Every chase or recess having a width exceeding 20 in. or a depth exceeding
one-third the thickness of the wall shall be considered as an opening and any masonry
above such chase or recess shall be supported on a lintel or arch.
(2) The width of any sloping or horizontal chase or recess shall be assumed as the horizontal distance between the vertical lines through its extremities.
Lateral Support
4.4.4.21.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), a wall of masonry shall have lateral
supports at either horizontal or vertical intervals spaced not more than:
(a) 20 times the thickness of the wall where the wall is of solid masonry of solid units, or
(b) 18 times the thickness of the wall where the wall is of solid masonry of hollow units
or a cavity wall.
(2) Every partition shall be supported laterally at either horizontal or vertical intervals
of not more than 36 times the thickness of the wall.
4.4.4.22.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), where a wall of masonry does not have
lateral support along its top and if its height exceeds four times its thickness, it shall have
vertical lateral supports at horizontal intervals spaced in accordance with Sentence
4.4.4.21.(1).
(2) The portion of a wall extending from the sill of a window to the floor immediately
below shall be laterally supported along its top or have vertical lateral supports at horizontal
intervals spaced in accordance with Sentence 4.4.4.21.(1) where:
(a) its height exceeds three times its thickness, and
(b) the length of the wall below the window exceeds the limits in Sentence 4.4.4.21.(1).
Allowable Openings
4.4.4.23 Evidence shall be provided to show that openings do not cause stresses in the
wall greater than the values given in Article 4.4.4.3.
Columns
4.4.4.24.(1) Every masonry column shall be constructed of solid masonry of solid units
or hollow units filled with grout or concrete.
(2) Every masonry column shall have lateral supports spaced so that the vertical distance
between supports is not greater than ten times the least dimension of the column.
SUBSECTION 4.4.5 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE
level
~gate
~ not
ying
ams.
onry
the
t17.
the
11 or
4.4.5.1.(1) The bearing support for any masonry shall have lateral stability and shall
provide:
(a) a level bearing surface or surfaces, and
(b) be of noncombustible material except for support of minor masonry decorative
features.
4.4.5.2.(1) The projection of a wall beyond the edge of a supporting member such as a
shelf angle or edge of a beam shall not exceed 17,;( in. except that this projection may be
increased to:
(a) 1% in. where ashlar facing not less than 3% in. in thickness with continuous horizontal joints is supported,
(b) 4Y2 in. in any masonry panel wall bonded by masonry units where such projection
does not exceed two-thirds of the distance between the outer face of the wall and
the centre of gravity of the wall and the first Cl)urse of masonry above the supporting
member is a full header course projecting at least 3% in. over the supporting member,
or
(c) 2 in. where beams are fireproofed in concrete or masonry units so that the space
between the web of the beam and the face of the fireproofing is completely filled or
-195-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
where there is at least 5 in. of solid masonry not less than 8 in. in width directly
above the beams, provided such projection does not exceed two-thirds the distance
between the outer face of the masonry and the centre of gravity of the supported
masonry.
(2) Where the projecting wall in Sentence (1) is of hollow units the first course on the
bearing support shall be of solid ul1its.
4.4.5.3 Masonry shall be tied or bonded to the lateral support so as to provide support
in both the inward and outward directions in accordance with Sentence 4.4.5.10.(1).
Support on Masonry
4.4.5.4.(1) Where masonry supports a concentrated load so that the resultant vertical
component of the applied loads passes through the axis of the width of the masonry, the
maximum allowable bearing capacity of the support shall conform to Articles 4.4.4.6,
4.4.4.7 or Subsection 4.4.3.
(2) Where applied loads in Sentence (1) have a horizontal thrust this thrust shall be
resisted by construction designed for that purpose.
4.4.5.5.(1) Except as provided in Article 44.5.6, where a wall of masonry supports a
continuous load such as a slab, a deck or wood joists spaced not more than 30 in. o. c.
(a) the support shall be continuous and of solid units to a depth at least 272 in. measured
down from the bearing surface, or a course of hollow units filled solidly with concrete
having a compressive strength of at least 2000 psi., and
(b) the width of bearing shall be at least 4 in. measured horizontally in from the face
of the wall.
4.4.5.6 Where a wooden plank deck is supported directly by a wall of masonry. the support
may be a corbelled ledge projecting 4 in. from the face of the wall.
4.4.5.7 Where masonry supports a load applied other than as provided in Article 4.4.5.5
and 4.4.5.6, the support shall be of solid brick units or other solid units with voids filled
with concrete, having a compressive strength of at least 2000 psi, to a depth of at least 8 in.
measured down from the bearing surface.
4.4.5.8 Where anchor bolts are to be placed in the top of a column, the column shall be
capped with concrete having a compressive strength of at least 3000 psi or 12-in. thick
reinforced masonry.
4.4.5.9.(1) \Vhere a wooden structural member is supported on masonry, the support shall
be constructed so that in the event of a fire the member can collapse without dislodging
the masonry in exterior walls.
(2) Where the end of a wooden structural member is built into an exterior masonry wall,
a 72-in. air space shall be provided at the sides, top and end of such member and a moistureproof barrier shall be installed on the bearing surface, or the wood shall be treated in accordance with CSA 080-1966, "Wood Preservation."
Anchora~e
of Masonry
4.4.5.10.(1) Masonry shall be anchored to its lateral supports by:

(a) corrosion-resistant metal anchors spaced not more than 1 ft 4 in. o. c. vertically and
not more than 6 ft 8 in. o. c. horizontally where the lateral support is other than
masonry.
(b) appropriate bonding as provided in Article 4.4.5.18 where the lateral support is
masonry, or
(c) other approved construction systems.
(2) Except as provided in Sentence (3), metal anchors in Clauses (1)(a) shall:
(a) be steel straps at least 172 in. wide and 7i in. thick,
(b) have 2 in. at the end completely embedded in mortar and bent up or down at 90
degrees into the masonry, and
(c) be of a length at least twice the thickness of the masonry.
(3) Metal anchors other than as described in Sentence (2) may be used where such
anchors provide equivalent strength or stiffness and bond.
(4) Wedges may be used to anchor the top of a masonry partition to its top horizontal
support.
4.4.5.11.(1) Where a cornice, belt course or sill depends entirely upon masonry for its
support, it shall have at least 65 per cent of its mass within the masonry and shall have a
bearing area at least 4 in. deep measured inwards from the face of the masonry.
(2) All cornices shall be adequately doweled or anchored with noncorrosive anchors.
tly
Ice
ted
:he
ort
Bonding
4.4.5.12 Except as required in Articles 4.4.5.16 and 4.4.5.17, where masonry walls have
two or more wythes, the wythes shall be bonded with masonry bonding units in conformance with Article 4.4.5.13 or with corrosion-resistant metal ties in conformance with
Article 4.4.5.14.
4.4.5.13.(1) Where masonry bonding units are used as provided in Article 4.4.5.12 they
shall:
(a) in the case of solid masonry walls;
ja
(i) extend through two wythes as continuous units; or

(ii) overlap both wythes at least 4 in.;
(b) in the case of cavity walls and faced walls, be continuous, extending at least 4 in.
into the backing and facing wythes;
(c) constitute not less than 4 per cent of the exposed face area; and
(d) be spaced vertically and horizontally not greater than
(i) 24 in. o. c. when brick masonry is used, and
(ii) 36 in. o. c. when block or tile is used.
'ed
4.4.S.14.(I) Where metal ties are used as provided in Article 4.4.5.12, they shall:
(a) extend from within 1 in. of the outer face of the wall to within 1 in. of the inner face
cal
~he
:.6,
be
be
lck
of the wall,
(b) be spaced not greater than 18 o. c. vertically and 36 in. o. c. horizontally,
(c) be staggered from course to course where individual ties are used, and
(d) be placed on webs where hollow units are used and completely embedded in mortar,
or be anchored into a bedding surface containing not more than 25 per cent voids.
(2) Metal ties in Sentence (1) shall be at least %;-in. diameter corrosion-resistant steel
rods of continuous weld connected type or of individual type with 2 in. at each end bent
at 90 degrees or of other metal or shape providing equivalent strength, stiffness, bond and
corrosion resistance.
(3) Where the space between metal-tied wythes is filled with mortar or grout, the allowable stresses and other provisions for masonry bonded walls shall apply, and, where the
space is not filled, such walls shall conform to the requirements for cavity walls.
all
ng
4.4.S.15 Where there is an opening in a masonry wall of two or more wythes, the wythes
shall be bonded together with masonry bonding units or metal ties located within 12 in. of
and spaced not more than 36 in. o. c. around such openings.
~te
Lce
)rt
5.5
led
in.
4.4.5.16.(1) Solid masonry walls of rubble masonry shall be bonded with masonry bonding
)r-
units that:
(a) extend from face to face of the wall either as continuous units or by overlapping at
least 6 in.,
(b) constitute not less than one-seventh the face area of the wall, and
(c) are uniformly spaced.
nd
an
4.4.S.17.(1) The actual thickness of any ashlar facing unit shall be not less than 3% in.
LIl,
re-
Ashlar Masonry
is
90
at
ts
a
but not less than one-twentieth of the height of the unit.

(2) All ashlar facing shall be backed with masonry that provides solid bearing for bond
stones, and anchors bedded in joints that have solid planes at bearing. Where anchors are
required in addition to bond stones such backing shall be at least 8 in. thick.
(3) Ashlar facing units shall be bonded by bonding units extending at least 3% in. into
the backing.
(4) Bonding units in Sentence (3) shall be uniformly distributed throughout the wall
and the area of the bond stones shall be not less than 10 per cent of the area of the facing.
(S) Every ashlar unit exceeding 1 ft in height, other than a bond stone, shall be anchored
to the backing by corrosion-resistant metal anchors except that where each alternate
course consists entirely of bond stones having an area not less than one-third the total
area of the facing, the anchors may be omitted.
(6) Every anchor in Sentence (5) shall be at least 0.187 sq in. (%; in. by 1 in.) in crosssectional area and be completely embedded in mortar and shall have at least a l-in. bent
portion at each end embedded in the facing and backing.
(7) Every anchored stone shall have not less than one anchor for every 4)1 sq ft of surface
area, or portion thereof. At least one anchor shall be provided for every 2 ft in length, or
portion thereof along the top of every ashlar unit. and if such stone exceeds 30 in. in height
it shall be provided with an equal number of anchors at or near the bottom.
(8) For piers and buttresses each alternate course of ashlar facing having an area not
less than one-third the total surface area of the facing shall extend not less than 3 % in.
into the backing.
(9) Continuous vertical joints shall not be used in ashlar facing except where:
(a) the joints are not more than 4 in. in depth,
(b) bond stones have an area not less than one-third the surface area of the wall,
(c) bond stones are located so that in any tier of stones there are not more than two
stones between bond stones, and
(d) bond stones are distributed so that each bond stone is in contact with four 4-in.
stones unless alternate courses are continuous bonding courses and each bond
stone is recessed at each side for its height so that it laps the two adjacent stones.
Intersecting Walls
4.4.5.18.(1) Where two load bearing walls of plain masonry intersect or where a shear
wall intersects a wall, the joint at the intersection shall be:
(a) bonded in true masonry bond so that at least SO per cent of the units of one wall are
embedded in the other wall, or
(b) regularly toothed or blocked with 8-in. maximum offsets and the joints provided
with metal anchors conforming to Sentence (2) spaced at vertical intervals not
exceeding 9 ft, or
(c) provided with metal anchors conforming to the requirements of Sentence (2) spaced
at vertical intervals not exceeding 1 ft 4 in.
(2) Where metal anchors are used to connect intersecting walls:
(a) the anchors shall be of corrosion-resistant steel at least 0.375 sq in. (U by 1~ in.)
in cross-section or bolts of equivalent area,
(b) the anchor shall extend into the masonry at least 18 in. on each side of the joint
where possible and have a 2-in. 90-degree bend at the ends or shall be provided with
cross-pins at the ends for anchorage, and
(c) where there is not sufficient thickness of masonry to embed the anchors 18 in. into
the masonry, equivalent anchorage shall be provided by cross-pins or other means.
Glass Block
4.4.5.19.(1) Where a masonry wall is constructed of glass blocks:
(a) reinforcement shall be provided to resist all stresses due to wind, temperature and
shrinkage,
(b) reinforcement shall be placed in the horizontal joints and the vertical spacing between
such reinforcement shall not exceed 24 in. where the blocks are not greater than 8 in.
in height, and
(c) where the blocks are greater in height than 8 in., reinforcement shall be placed in
every horizontal joint.
(2) The reinforcement in Sentence (1) shall be of corrosion-resistant 20-gauge expanded
metal strips not less than 3 in. wide or two parallel corrosion-resistant steel wires not less
than No.9 ASWG (0.1483 in. diameter) spaced at least 3 in. apart.
(3) The reinforcement in Sentence (I) shall be continuous or lapped at least 6 in. at
splices.
Balustrades
4.4.5.20 Masonry balustrades shall be anchored to withstand the loads prescribed in
Article 4.1.8.1. fo the National Building Code of Canada, 1970.
CorbelUng
4.4.5.21.(1) Where a wall of masonry is corbelled:
(a) the corbel shall not project more than one-third the thickness of the wall,
(b) the corbel shall bear on at least an 8-in. depth of solid masonry of solid units or of
hollow units in which all voids are filled solidly with concrete to a depth of at least
8 in. measured down from the bearing surface,
(c) the corbel shall be of solid units,
(d) the projection of each course shall not exceed 1 in., and
(e) the courses shall be laid up using alternate courses of headers and stretchers so that
the top course is a header course.
-198-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
f
ot
In.
10
n.
ld
s.
Stack Bond
4.4.5.22.(1) Where stack bond is used in which vertical mortar joints between units in
masonry are continuous between courses, each wythe shall be reinforced longitudinally at
vertical intervals not exceeding 18 in. with:
(a) a fabricated mesh of two No.9 ASWG (0.1483 in. diameter) corrosion-resistant rods
spaced not more than 1 in. from each face of the stack bonded wythe and lapped
at least 6 in. at each splice, or
(b) other metal reinforcement providing equivalent stiffness, bond and corrosion resistance.
(2) Wythes of stack bonded walls shall be bonded together in accordance with Article
4.4.5.12.
Wood Built Into Masonry

lr
4.4.5.23.(1) Except as provided in Article 4.4.5.9, wood shall not be built into masonry
construction except as plugs, blocks or strips for fastening strapping, flashing, conduits
and other light coverings and service equipment.
(2) Where wooden blocks or strips are used they shall not exceed 8 in. in length and shall
not be placed less than 32 in. o. c. horizontally and vertically.
Parapet Wall
4.4.5.24.(1) Every parapet wall shall be constructed of solid masonry of solid units or of
hollow units in which all voids are filled with concrete or mortar.
(2) Every parapet wall and masonry balustrade shall be ca{>ped with an impervious
coping of metal, vitrified tile, stone or other equivalent matenal except that coping of
concrete, stone or permeable masonry may be used provided such copings are flashed on
the top and back with corrosion-resistant metal, or through flashing shall be provided
under such coping for the full thickness of the wall.
(3) Every parapet wall less than 12 in. in thickness shall be protected on the back by
a noncorrosive flashing extending from the roof to the underside of the coping or to a line
at least 3 ft above the adjacent roof level.
Draina~e
of Walls
4.4.5.25 Weep holes at least Ys in. in diameter shall be provided immediately above the
base flashing in veneered walls having bearing support, and in cavity walls, at horizontal
spacing not exceeding 24 in. o. c.
SUBSECI'ION 4.4.6 MASONRY VENEER

4.4.6.1(1) Masonry veneer shall not be considered to be part of a wall when computing
its strength or thickness.
(2) Masonry veneer shall be anchored or tied to resist all lateral forces.
(3) Masonry veneer shall not be considered as loadbearing.
Veneer of Masonry Units

4.4.6.2.(1) Unit masonry veneer shall be of solid units not less than 3 in. actual thickness
laid with full mortar joints.
(2) Raked mortar joints shall not be used in unit masonry veneer except when the veneer
is at least 4 in. thick.
(3) Unit masonry veneer more than 36 ft above the top of the foundation wall shall
bear on masonry, concrete or other noncombustible bearmg supports spaced not more
than 12 ft vertically.
(4) Veneer attached to wood-frame construction shall not extend more than 36 ft above
the top of the foundation wall.
4.4.6.3. Veneer above openings shall be supported On lintels of noncombustible material.
4.4.6.4 Masonry veneer 3 in. or more in thickness and resting on a bearing support shall
be tied to masonry back-up or to wood framing members with not less than 28-gauge
%-in.-wide corrosion-resistant straps spaced in accordance with Table 4.4.6.A, and shaped
to provide a key with the mortar.
TABLE 4.4.6.A
Forming Part of Article 4.4.6.4
Maximum Vertical
Spacing, in.
Maximum Horizontal
Spacing, in.
16
20
24
32
24
16
Thin Masonry Veneer-Individually Secured by Metal Anchors

4.4.6.5.(1) The minimum thickness of masonry units for veneers of limestone, marble,
granite, precast stone, travertine and terrazzo shall be 17.l in.
(2) Veneer units in Sentence (1) shall not exceed 25 sq ft in face area and shall have
no dimension greater than 6 ft.
(3)~Individual masonry veneer units in Sentence (1) shall not support any other veneer
unit.
(4) Back-up for masonry veneer in Sentence (1) shall be solid masonry of solid units.
(5) Each masonry veneer unit in Sentence (1) shall be anchored with:
(a) at least two anchors at the top and two anchors at the bottom, spaced not more
than 2 ft o. c.
(b) anchors at the sides where the units are greater than 30 in. in height, and
(c) at least one anchor for every 2 sq ft of surface area.
(6) Anchors in Sentence (5) shall be at least equivalent to Va-in. by 17.l-in. clip angles,
secured to the back-up with 7.l-in. by 2;1-in. expansion bolts in lead shields and secured
to the veneer units with 7.l-in. by 2-in.-Iong steel dowels passing through the anchors and
extending 1 in. into each stone.
(7) Materials used for anchorage in Sentence (6) shall be corrosion-resistant.
i'
ilil
,1
Thin Masonry Veneers-Secured by Mortar Adhesion

4.4.6.6.(1) Except as provided in Article 4.4.6.7, veneers of natural or artificial stone or
other approved masonry materials secured by mortar shall:
(a) be not less than % in. thick and not more than 1% in. in thickness with individual
units,
(i) not exceeding 144 sq in. in area,
(ii) not less than 2 in. in height, and
(iii) having a greatest face dimension not more than ten times its least face dimension.
(b) be supported by backing conforming to backing for glass veneer in Sentence
4.4.6.8.(6),
(c) comply with the compressive strength and the absorption requirements for the materials used but in no case shall the absorption be more than 16 per cent or less than 5
per cent,
(d) extend not more than 36 ft above the top of foundation wall on masonry walls or
24 ft above the top of foundation wall on frame walls,
(e) be flashed at the top to prevent the penetration of moisture,
(f) have all joints grouted and pointed with an approved waterproofing cement compound,
(gr be secured to the backing by the equivalent of
(i) metal lath fastened in place by not less than 2;1-in. galvanized nails spaced
not more than 8 in. o. c. vertically and 16 in. o. c. horizontally, and
(ii) a full undercoat of Type M mortar at least % in. thick applied to the back of
the veneer units to provide full embedment of the units.
Tile Veneer 1 in. or less in Thickness
4.4.6.7.(1) Except as provided in Sentence (2), tile veneer secured by mortar shall:
(a) extend not more than 36 ft above the top of foundation wall,
(b) not exceed 1 in. in thickness with individual units
(i) not exceeding 144 sq. in. in area,
(ii) not exceeding 16 in. in any dimension, and
(iii) corrugated or scored on the back for increased bond when the tile exceeds 36 sq.
in. in area,
- 2.00- Copyright NRC-CNRC
t'
(c) be supported by backing conforming to backing for glass veneer in Sentence 4.4.6.8.
(6),
Cd) be applied to its backing by means of full embedment in Type M mortar or other
approved means with all jomts filled, and
(e) be flashed at the top to prevent the penetration of moisture.
(2) Mosaic tile not exceeding U in. in thickness or 2U sq. in. in area, applied to a wall
on a mortar or plaster bed shall not De~deemed to be a veneer.
Glass Veneer
ve
~er
~s.
ed
Id
Dr
al
1.
:e
~-
4.4.6.8.(1) Glass veneer shall not be applied to the exterior of a wall at the height of more
than 18 ft or less than 6 in. above the top of foundation wall.
(2) Glass veneer shall be not less than U in. in thickness.
(3) Glass veneer units shall not exceed 8 sq ft in area and shall not exceed 4 ft in any
dimension.
(4) Glass veneer shall be set in approved asphaltic mastic cement applied over a priming
or bonding coat of a composition to ensure adequate adhesion of the two materials.
(5) Jointing or pointing cement used to butter the edges of glass veneer units shall be
subject to approval of the authority having jurisdiction.
(6) The backing for glass veneer shall provide a sound, dry, rigid plane surface consisting
of masonry, reinforced concrete, cement plaster on metal lath, or other approved noncombustible material.
(7) Cement plaster in Sentence (6) shall be at least !}i-in. thick conforming to the requirements of Section 29 of Part 9 of the National Building Code of Canada, 1970, applied
to metal lath supported vertically and horizontally at intervals not exceeding 12 in.
(8) Wood sheathing shall not be used as a base for the direct application of glass veneer.
(9) In addition to the mastic cement in Sentence (4), glass veneer more than 4 ft above
the top of foundation wall shall be supported by approved corrosion-resistant metal shelf
angles:
(a) not less than 2 in. in length,
(b) of not less than No. 16 gauge,
(c) located near each end of each glass unit and spaced not more than 2 ft o. c. horizontally and 3 ft o. c. vertically except that units not exceeding 1 ft in width may be
supported on a single support located near the centre of the unit,
(d) located so that the outside edge of the shelf angle is approximately Y8 in. from the
face of the veneer, and
(e) attached to the masonry backing by means of approved expansion bolts.
(10) Horizontal joints in glass veneer shall be cushioned with pads of adhesive cork or
of other approved pads extending from the back of the glass to within Y8 in. from the face.
(11) No glass unit shall touch any other glass unit.
(11) Every joint shall be filled with an approved joint cement to ensure watertight
construction.
(13) Every exposed edge of glass veneer shall be protected from the weather by noncorrosive flashing, and uncompleted exterior glass veneer shall be made watertight when
work is not in progress.
(14) Individual glass veneer units used in soffits shall not exceed 4 sq ft in area and shall
not exceed 30 in. in any dimension. Such units shall be held in place by wood or metal
mouldings providing a continuous bearing of not less than !}i in. for the glass.
(15) Where four corners of adjoining glass veneer units meet, moulding described in
Sentence (14), may be replaced by an approved screw and metal rosette attached to a
wood ground provided mastic cement is used behind the glass.
Facing on Precast Concrete
4.4.6.9 Where a thin slab of stone or other approved materials forms a facing for a precast
concrete wall panel such stone slabs shall not be deemed to be a veneer provided:
(a) the stone is bonded to the concrete back-up when the wall panels are cast, and
(b) evidence is provided to show that the facing and concrete back-up will act monolithically.
-201-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Limestone Veneer
4.4.6.10.(1) Veneers of Hmestone shall:
(a) conform to ASTM C568-67, "Dimension Limestone," classified as type II, medium
density,
(b) have an ultimate compressive dry strength not less than 5,000 psi when tested in
accordance with ASTM C170-50 (1958), "Compressive Strength of Natural Building
Stone",
(c) have a modulus of rupture of at least 850 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM
C99-52 (1958), "Modulus of Rupture of Natural Building Stone,"
(d) have a percentage absorption by weight not exceeding 5.3 when tested in accordance
with ASTM C97-47 (1958), "Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Natural
Building Stone",
(e) have no visible bedding or cleavage plane, and
({) be not less than 3% in. in actual thickness.
(2) Except as otherwise specified, all limestone veneer shall conform to all other applicable
requirements of this Subsection.
(3) All limestone veneer that is applied more than 18 ft above finished ground level shall :
(a) bear on noncorrosive bearing supports spaced vertically not more than 36 times
the actual thickness of the stone,
(b) be supported against lateral loads by corrosion-resistant supports spaced so that
the allowable stresses in the stone are not exceeded but not farther apart vertically
than 30 times the thickness of the stone,
(c) be tied to each bearing support and to each lateral support with noncorrosive anchors
capable of resisting all inward and outward lateral loads, and
(d) be anchored to a backing with corrosion-resistant anchors spaced not more than
18 in. O.c. along the perimeter of each unit.
(4) The allowable stresses in limestone veneer units shall not exceed one-tenth of the
appropriate value determined in accordance with the standard methods of test listed in
Sentence (1).
(5) All limestone veneer shall be anchored and supported so that normal building movements will not cause loads to be transmitted from panel to panel or from floor to floor.
(6) Limestone that shows evidence of cracking or other deterioration shall not be used.
SUBSECTION 4.4.7
PREFABRICATED MASONRY
4.4.7.1 All provisions of this Section except Subsections 4.4.4, 4.4.5 and 4.4.6 shall
apply to prefabricated masonry except as provided in this Subsection.
4.4.7.2.(1) All details of jointing, inserts, anchors and openings shall be shown on the
drawings.
(2) Lifting devices designed for 100 per cent impact shall be provided in prefabricated
masonry sections and the material used in the lifting device shall:
(a) not be brittle, and
(b) be capable of resisting all forces which might arise during the process of erection.
4.4.7.3.(1) Elements shall be stored, transported and placed so that they will not be overstressed or damaged.
(2) Prefabricated masonry elements shall be adequately braced and supported during
the erection to ensure proper alignment and safety and such bracing or support shall be
maintained until permanent connections are made.
4.4.7.4.(1) Design and detailing of all joints and bearings shall be based on the forces to
be resisted and the effects of dimensional changes due to shrinkage, elastic deformation,
creep and temperature.
(2) Joints and connections shall be detailed to allow1mfficient tolerances for manufacture
and erection of the elements.
(3) Bearings shall be detailed to provide for stress concentrations, rotations and the
possible development of horizontal forces by friction or other restraints.
f
SUBSECTION 4.4.8
1m
in
ng
M
ce
al
Ie
I:
LAYING, PLACING AND ERECTION
Workmanship and Tolerances

4.4.8.1.(1) Masonry shall be built true and plumb with tolerances at vertical surfaces
of not more than:
(a) }i in. in 10 ft,
(b) % in. in any storey or 20 ft except as provided in (c),
(c) }i in. in any storey or 20 ft for external corners, expansion joints or other conspicuous
lines, and
(d) ~ in. in 40 ft or more.
4.4.8.2.(1) Except for head joints used for weep holes and ventilation, solid masonry units
shall be laid with full head and bed joints.
(2) Hollow masonry units shall be laid with full head joints and full bed joints under
the full bearing areas of the face shells and under webs surrounding cells to be filled with
grout.
4.4.8.3 To ensure proper drainage. the cavity in a cavity wall or a veneer wall shall be
kept free of mortar droppings.
:8
4.4.8.4 Where the cleavage plane of stone masonry units is pronounced, the stone shall
be laid in the direction of its cleavage plane.
4.4.8.5 All nailing blocks, anchors, bolts, ties and inserts shall be placed as the work
proceeds.
'{
Weather Protection
4.4.8.6 Frozen materials or materials containing ice shall not be used in masonry.
4.4.8.7 Masonry shall not be laid when the temperature of the outside air is below 40F
unless means approved by the authority having jurisdiction are provided to heat the masonry
materials and protect the completed work.
4.4.8.8 Uncompleted masonry exposed to the weather shall be covered on the top surface
with a waterproof material except when construction is in progress.
Construction Safety
4.4.8.9 Masonry walls shall be adequately braced to resist wind pressure and other lateral
forces during construction as required by Part 8 of the National Building Code of Canada,
1970.
-2.04-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
(SA STANDARD A23.3-1970
CODE FOR THE DESIGN OF PLAIN

OR REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
PU8USHED. MAY. 1970
BY THE
CMADIAN STANDARDS ASSOClAnON
(INCORPORATED 1919)
178 REXDALE 80UIlYARD
REXDALE 603, ONTARIO. CANADA
COPYRIGHT R!GISTERED. CANADA. 1959
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-206-
p
CODE FOR THE DESIGN OF PLAIN OR REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
Page
List of l\tIembers of Joint CSA/NBC Committee on Reinforced Concrete Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Preface..... . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10
STANDARD
1. Scope...... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1.1 Scope... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1.2 Special Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1.3 Reference Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11
11
11
11
2. Definitions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11
3. General Requirements.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.1 Drawings......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.2 Inspection... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... .................
3.3 New or Special Systems of Design or Construction. . . . . . . . . . ..
13
13
13
13
4. Load Tests of Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

4.1 Notations .............................................. "
4.2 Tests of New Systems of Design or Construction. . . . . . . . .. ..
4.3 Static Load Tests of Existing Structures-General. . . . . . . . . . ..
4.4 Load Test of Floor or Roof Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.5 Criteria for Evaluation of Load Tests of Floor or Roof Constructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13
13
14
14
14
5. Materials and l\lethods of Construction.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

5.1 Materials, Testing and Construction ...................... "
5.2 Details of Construction. . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.1 Hooks and Bends. .. . .. . .. ..........................
5.2.2 Cleaning of Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.3 Placing of Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.4 Spacing of Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.5 Splices in Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.5.5 Splices of Bars in Tension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.5.6 Splices of Bars in Compression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.5.7 Splices of Load Transfer in Metal Cores. . . . . . . ..
5.2.5.8 Splices of Welded Wire Fabric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.6 Lateral Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.6.1 Spiral Columns. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.6.2 Tied Columns .............................. "
5.2.6.3 Beams and Girders..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.7 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement-Floor and
Roof Slabs. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.8 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement ............... "
5.2.9 Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete. . . . . . . . . . . ..
15
15
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
20
21
-207 ....
Copyright NRC-CNRC
15
21
21
22
eSA STANDARD A23.3
5.2.10 Construction and Expansion Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

5.2.11 Concrete in Corrosive Environments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2.12 Splitting Ratio F 8p . . .
24
24
24
6. Structural Analysis and Proportioning of Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

6.1 General................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.1 Notations...........................................
6.1.2 Design Methods and Loads. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.2.1 Design Method ............................. "
6.1.2.2 Loads...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.2.3 Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3 Frame Analysis ................................... "
6.1.3.1 GeneraL...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3.2 Approximate Methods ....................... "
6.1.3.3 Moment and Shear Coefficients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3.4 Modification of Moments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3.5 Arrangement of Live Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3.6 Combination of Dead and Live Loads. . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3.7 Span Length Assumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3.8 Moments at Faces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3.9 Minimum Positive Bending Moment... . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3.10 Stiffness Assumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.4 General Requirements for Design of Flexural Members..
6.1.4.1 Requirements for T-beams.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.4.2 Effective Depth of Beam or Slab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.4.3 Distance Between Lateral Supports. . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.4.4 Control of Deflection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.4.5 Control of Cracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.4.6 Deep Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4.7 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members. . .
6.1.5 General Column Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.5.1 GeneraL.................................. . ..
6.1.5.2 Limits for Reinforcement of Columns .......... "
6.1.5.3 Bending Moments in Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.5.4 Length of Columns........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.5.5 Strength Reductions for Length of Compression
Members.. .......... .......... . .... .........
6.1.5.6 Transmission of Column Load Through Floor
System .......... '" ................... , . . . ..
6.1.6 Anchorage.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.6.1 General Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.6.2 Anchorage of Web Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1. 7 Transfer of Moments and Effect of Openings in Slabs and
Footings..... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2 Working Stress Design ... , ., " ... . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2.1 Notations......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2.2 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2.3 Allowable Stresses in Concrete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2.4 Allowable Stresses in Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2.4.1 Stresses in Steel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2.4.2 Spiral Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24
24
24
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
30
31
31
31
32
32
33
33
33
34
35
35
35
37
37
38
38
40
40
41
41
42
-r ..----
--........
4
4
4
4
4:
:!
5
5
......
--------~-------.--- -~~~~~~~~~
6.2.5 Combined Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

6.2.5.1 Reduction of Load Effects for Load Combinations
6.2.6 Flexural Computations .............................. .
6.2.6.1 Design Assumptions .......................... .
6.2.6.2 Modulus of Elasticity-Concrete ............... .
6.2.6.3 Modulus of Elasticity-Steel. ................. .
6.2.6.4 Modular Ratio, n ............................ .
6.2.7 Shear and Diagonal Tension ......................... .
6.2.7.1 Nominal Shear Stress ......................... .
6.2.7.2 Web Reinforcement .......................... .
6.2.7.3 Stirrups ................................... .
6.2.7.4 Bent Bars ................................... .
6.2.7.5 Torsion ..................................... .
6.2.7.6 Stress Restrictions ........................... .
6.2.7.7 Web Reinforcemen t Restrictions ............... .
6.2.7.8 Shear Friction ............................... .
6.2.7.9 Shear Stress in Slabs and Footings ............. .
6.2.7.10 Structural Lightweight Concrete .............. .
6.2.8 Bond and Anchorage. . . . . .. . ....................... .
6.2.9 Reinforced Concrete Columns ........................ .
6.2.9.1 Limiting Dimensions ......................... .
6.2.9.2 Spirally Reinforced Columns .................. .
6.2.9.3 Tied Columns ............................... .
6.2.9.4 Columns Subjected to Axial Load and Bending .. .
6.2.9.5 Composite Columns-GeneraL ................ .
6.2.9.6 Composite Columns-Spiral Bound Concrete
Around a Structural Steel Core ................ .
6.2.9.7 Composite Columns-Laterally Tied Concrete
Around a Structural Steel Core ................ .
6.3 Ultimate Strength Design ................................. .
6.3.1 Notations....................................... .,.
6.3.2 General .................... " .................... .
6.3.2.1 GeneraL...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .... .
6.3.2.2 Design Assumptions .......................... .
6.3.2.3 Design Strengths for Reinforcement ............ .
6.3.2.4 Load Factors ................................ .
6.3.2.5 Computed Ultimate Strength Capacity.. . .. . .. .
6.3.2.6 Control of Deflections and Cracking............ .
6.3.2.7 Crack Widths ............................... .
6.3.3 Flexural Computations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.3.1 Rectangular Beams with Tensile Reinforcements
Only... .. ..... ..... .. . . ... . . . . . . . .. . . . . .....
6.3.3.2 Rectangular Beams with CompressioN Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.3.3 1- and T-Sections.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.3.4 Other Cross Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.4 Shear and Diagonal Tension. ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.4.1 Ultimate Flexural Shear Strength Calcttlation. . ..
6.3.4.2 Web Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.4.3 Stirrups. . . . . . . . . . . .. ... ...................
6.3.4.4 Bent Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..........
6.3.4.5 Torsion...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
44
45
45
45
47
47
47
48
49
49
50
50
50
50
50
51
-209-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
52
53
53
53
56
56
56
57
57
58
58
58
58
58
58
59
59
60
60
60
61
61
62
CSA STANDARD A23.3
6.3.4.6 Stress Restrictions-lVIembers with Web Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

6.3.4.7 \Veb Reinforcement Restrictions .............. "
6.3.4.8 Shear Friction .............................. "
6.3.4.9 Shear Stress in Slabs and Footings. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.4.10 Structural Lightweight Aggregate Concretes.. ..
6.3.5 Bond and Anchorage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.5.1 Ultimate Bond Stress... . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.6 Combined Axial Compression and Bending ............ "
6.3.6.1 Definitions..... . . . . . . . . . . . .. ................
6.3.6.2 General Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.6.3 Bending and Axial Load Capacity of Short
Members-Rectangular Sections with Bars in One
or Two Faces ................ , . . . . . . . .. . . . . ..
6.3.6.4 Bending and Axial Load of Short MembersCircular Sections with Bars Circularly Arranged
6.3.6.5 Bending and Axial Load of Short MembersSquare Sections with Bars Circularly Arranged..
6.3.6.6 Bending and Axial Load of Short MembersGeneral Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
63
63
63
64
65
65
65
66
66
66
67
68
68
69
7. Concrete Joist Floor Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

7.1 Notations........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
7.2 Details of Concrete Joist Floor Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
69
69
69
8. Two-Way Systems With Supports on Four Sides.... . . . . . . . . . . . ..

8.1 Notations .......................................... " ...
8.2 Application... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.3 Support Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.4 Corner Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.5 General Design Requirements ............................ "
8.6 Minimum Slab Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.7 l\Iaximum Spacing of Reinforcement.. . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.8 Two-Way Ribbed Construction. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.9 Acceptable Design Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.10 Loads on Slab Supports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
70
70
70
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
72
9. Flat Slabs Wi th Sq uare or Rectangular Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

9.1 Notations........ . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .................
9.2 Definitions ............................................. "
9.3 General ............................................... "
9.3.1 Slabs....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.3.2 Column Capital. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.4 Ultimate Strength Design of Flat Slabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5 General Design Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.1 Methods of Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.2 Cri tical Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
75
75
75
76
76
76
76
76
76
77
p
3
3
3
4,
5
5
5
5
9.5.3 Size and Thickness of Slabs and Drop Panels... . .. . . . . ..

9.5.4 Arrangement of Slab Reinforcement. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.5 Openings in Flat Slabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.5.6 Design of Columns .................................. ,
9.5.7 Transfer of Bending Moment Between Column and Slab.
9.6 Design by Elastic Analysis. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.6.1 Assumptions... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.6.2 Critical Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.6.3 Distribution of Panel lVloments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.7 Empirical lV1ethod... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.7.1 Flat Slabs ........................................ "
9.7.2 Columns................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...
9.7.3 Determination of "c" (Effective Support Size). . . . . . . . . ..
9.7.4 Slab Thickness... . . . . .. ............................
9.7.5 Drop Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.7.6 Bending lVloment Coefficients. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.7.7 Length of Reinforcement ................. , . . . . . . . . . ..
9.7.8 Openings in Flat Slabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
77
77
78
78
78
78
78
79
79
80
80
81
81
82
82
84
87
87
10. vValls ............ , ........................................

10.1 Notations........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.2 General... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.3 Walls Designed as Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.4 Walls Not Designed as Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.4.1 Allowable Compression..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.4.2 Effective Length Concentrated Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.4.3 Thickness Limitations for Walls.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.4.4 Wall Anchorage.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.4.5 Walls on Piers .................................. "
10.4.6 Stud Walls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.5 Plain Concrete.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.6 Wall Reinforcement Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
94
94
94
94
94
94
94
95
95
95
95
95
95
11. Footings.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11.1 Scope........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11.2 Notations ............................................ "
11.3 Loads and Reactions .................................. "
11.4 Sloped or Stepped Footings. . . . . .. ......................
11.5 Bending Moment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11.6 Shear and Bond. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11. 7 Transfer of Stress at Base of Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11.8 Plain Concrete Pedestals and Footings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11.9 Footings Supporting Round Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11.10 Minimum Edge Thickness... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
95
95
96
96
96
96
97
98
99
99
99
CSA STANDARD A23.3
12. Precast Concrete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

12.1 Scope.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
12.2 Aggregates....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
12.3 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
12.4 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
12.5 Curing.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
12.6 Identification and Marking ..............................
12.7 Transportation, Storage, and Erection.. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
12.8 Splicing of Reinforcement ................................
12.9 Load Bearing and Non-Load Bearing Wall Panels. . . . . . . . ..
12.10 Minimum Size of Precast Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
12.11 Joints and Bearings for Precast Members .................
12.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement for Precast Slabs
12.13 Anchorage Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
99
99
99
99
99
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
101
101
13. Composite Concrete Flexural Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

13.1 Notations ..............................................
13.2 Definition.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.3 Design Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.4 Special Design Considerations............................
13.5 Working Stress Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.6 Ultimate Strength Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.7 Shear Connection .......................................
13.7.1 Calculation .................................... "
13.7.2 Shear Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.7.3 Ultimate Load Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.7.4 Vertical Ties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.7.5 Web Reinforcement ...............................
101
101
101
101
101
101
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
Appendix A-Illustrative Examples of Effective Area of Concrete in

Tensile (Act) In Connection ~ith Clause 6.1.4.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 103
Appendix B-Criteria For Estimating Effective Column Lengths ..... 104
'9
9
9
9
9
o
o
[)
)
)
)
JOINT CSA/NBC
COMMITTEE ON REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN
R. N. McMANUS (Chairman) ........ T. Lamb, McManus & Associates Ltd., Edmonton
W. G. !'LEWEs (Secretary) .......... . National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa
L. H. BUSH ........................ Dexter, Bush & Associates Ltd., Vancouver
T. A. CROSIER ..................... Crosier & Greenberg, Winnipeg
D. M. CURZON ...... , .............. Canadian Prestressed Concrete Institute, Toronto
T. M. DEVROOM ................... Department of Public Works, Ottawa
A. B. DOVE ....................... The Steel Company of Canada, Hamilton
R. H. DUNN ....................... Siporex Company, Toronto
E. J. GRANT ....................... University of New Brunswick, Fredericton
W. H. HASEGAWA ................... Portland Cement Association, Edmonton
B. A. HESKETH .................... Ecole Polytechnique, Montreal
H. W. HOPKINS .................... Canadian Pacific Railway Company, Montreal
M. W. HUGGINS ......... " ......... University of Toronto, Toronto
J. G. MACGREGOR ................. University of Alberta, Edmonton
G. E. MUNRO ...................... St. Lawrence Cement Company, Clarkson
P. ROBERGE ....................... Lalonde, Valois, Lamarre, Valois & Assoc., Montreal
J. W. STRZELECKI. ................. Canadian National Railways, Montreal
In addition to the members of the Committee, the following Subcommittee members made
valuable contribution to the development of this Standard:
W. R. BALL ......................... M. S. Yolles Associates Ltd., Toronto

L. BOHLMAN ......................... Reid, Crowther & Partners Ltd., Vancouver
S. BORGFORD ........................ Green, Blankstein, Russell and Assocs. Winnipeg
J. BRADSTOCK ....................... Reicher, Bradstock Assoc. Ltd., Toronto
R. DORTON .......................... Pratley & Dorton, Consulting Engineers, Montreal
J. DUDRA ........................... Phillips, Barratt.HiIler, Jones and Partners,
Vancouver
V. C. FENTON ........................ Adjeleian & Assoc. Ltd., Ottawa
R. M. FRANCIS ...................... University of New Brunswick, Fredericton
C. HOWARD ......................... Manitoba Institute of Technology, Winnipeg
J. JABLONSKY ........................ Farkas, Barron & Jablonsky, Toronto
J. H. MCCALLA ...................... J. L. Richards & Assocs. Ltd., Ottawa
R. H. B. McLAUGHLIN ............... University of New Brunswick, Fredericton
D. R. MORRIS ....................... University of New Brunswick, Fredericton
G. MORRIS .......................... University of Manitoba, Winnipeg
G. D. MORRISON ..................... Associated Engineering Services Limited,
Edmonton
H. S. RAGAN ....................... McBride Ragan Consulting Engrs. Ltd.,
Vancouver
P. REIMER .......................... University of Saskatchewan, Saskatoon
S. H. SIMMONDS....................... University of Alberta, Edmonton
J. SPRINGFIELD ...................... C. D. Carruthers & Wallace Consultants Limited
Toronto
M. UZUM'ERI. ........................ University of Toronto, Toronto
J. WARWARUK ....................... University of Alberta, Edmonton
C. E. WELSH ....................... C. D. Carruthers & Wallace Consultants Limited.
Toronto
A. WILLIAM'S ........................ Assoc. Engineering Services Ltd., Vancouver
-213-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
10
CSA STANDARD A23.3
PREFACE
This new edition of CSA Standard A23.3. Code For the Design of Plain
or Reinforced Concrete, supersedes previous editions published in 1959 and
1966.
It differs mainly from the previous edition in that it has been editorially
rearranged to permit its inclusion, en toto, in the 1970 National Building
Code, Design Supplement. Although no major changes have been introduced
numerous changes of a minor nature have been made.
This Standard was prepared by the joint CSAjNBC Committee on

Reinforced Concrete Design under the jurisdiction of the Sectional Committee on Structures and was formally approved by these Committees.
REXDALE,
NOTE:
MAY,
1970
In order to keep abreast of progress in the industries concerned, CSA

Publications are subject to periodic review. Suggestions for impr01Jement
A II enquiries regarding this Standard should be addressed to Canadian
A LIST OF PUBLICATIONS
REFERRED TO IN THIS STANDARD
IS INCLUDED IN CLAUSE 1.3
Copyright NRC-CNRC
- 214-
11
A23.3-1970
CODE FOR THE DESIGN OF PLAIN OR
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
1. SCOPE
1.1 Scope This Standard applies to the design of building structures of
plain or reinforced concrete.
1.2 Special Structures For special structures such as arches, tanks,
reservoirs, grain elevators, shells, blast resistant structures, and chimneys,
the provisions of this Standard shall govern so far as they are applicable.
1.3 Reference Publications This Standard makes reference to the following publications and where such reference is made it shall be to that edition
of such publication as listed below:
CSA Standards
A23.1-1967, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction;
A23.2-1967, Methods of Test for Concrete;
A23.2.12-1967, Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure
Test Specimens in the Laboratory;
A23.2.13-1967, Compressive Strength of Moulded Concrete Cylinders;
A197-1968, Precast Concrete Wall Panels;
G30.6-1967, Minimum Requirements for the Deformations of Deformed
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement;
G30. 7-1961, Special Large Size Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcemen t;
G30.1Q-1964, Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
with 60,000 Psi Minimum Yield Point;
S16-1965, Steel Structures for Buildings;
W186-1970, Welding of Reinforcing Bars m Reinforced Concrete
Construction.
ASTM * Standards
C33D-69, Lightweight Aggregate for Structural Concrete;
C496-69, Method of Test for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens .
.National Building Code of Canada.
American. Society lor Testing and Materials.
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 The following defini tions apply in this Standard:
Aggregate means inert material which is mixed with cement and water
to produce concrete;
Aggregate, coarse means aggregate, subject to specified tolerances,

retained on a %-inch sieve, and of a maximum size generally not larger
than 4 inches;
- 2.15-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
12
CSA STANDARD A13.3
Aggregate, structural lightweight means aggregate conforming to

the requirements of ASTM Standard C330, Lightweight Aggregates for
Structural Concrete;
Column means an upright compression member the length of which
exceeds three times its least lateral dimension;
Column, composite means a column in which a steel or cast iron
structural member is completely encased in concrete containing spiral and
longi tudinal reinforcement;
Composite concrete flexural construction means precast concrete
and cast-in-place reinforced concrete so interconnected that they act
together as a flexural unit;
Compressive sttength of concrete means the strength in compression
of concrete cylinders made and tested in accordance with CSA Standard
A23.2, Methods of Test for Concrete;
Concrete means a mixture of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,.
and water;
Concrete, plain means concrete without steel reinforcement;
Concrete, precast means a plain or reinforced concrete building element cast in other than its final position in the structure;
Concrete, prestressed means concrete in which there have been
introduced internal stresses of such magnitude and distribution that the
stresses resulting from service loads are adjusted to the desired degree;
Concrete, reinforced means concrete in which steel reinforcement is
embedded in such a manner that the two materials act together in resisting
forces;
Concrete, structural lightweight means concrete which contains
structural lightweight aggregates and has a compressive strength in excess
of 2,500 psi at 28 days;
Deformed bar means a reinforcing bar conforming to CSA Standard
G30.6, Minimum Requirements for the Deformations of Deformed Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, or CSA Standard G30. 7, Special Large
Size Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. Welded wire
fabric with welded intersections not farther apart than 12 inches in the
direction of the principal reinforcement, and with cross wires not more
than six gauge numbers smaller in size than the principal reinforcement
may be considered equivalent to a deformed bar when used in slabs;
Effective area of concrete means that area of cross-section of a
flexural member which lies between the centroid of the tension reinforcement
and the compression face of the member;
Effective area of reinforcement means the area obtained by multiplying the right cross-sectional area of the reinforcement by the cosine of
the angle between its direction and the direction for which the effectiveness
is to be determined ;
Pedestal means an upright compression member whose height does not
exceed three times its average least lateral dimension;
Plain bar means reinforcement that does not conform to the definition
deformed bar;
'F'
Reinforcement means steel used to reinforce concrete and which

conforms to the requirements of Clause 5.1;
Specified strength of concrete (fo') means the compressive strength
of concrete, at 28 days age or at such earlier age as the concrete is to receive
its maximum stress, as specified in the drawings or in the specifications for
the structure;
Splitting tensile strength (see Clause 5.2.12);
Yield strength or yield point (f,.) means specified minimum yield
strength or yield point of reinforcement in pounds per square inch, determined in tension according to applicable CSA or ASTM Standards.
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
13
3.1 Drawings. Construction drawings for reinforced concrete shall clearly

indicate:
(a) Type, size and position of all steel reinforcement;
(b) Strength and kind (type of aggregate) of concrete at a specified age
for which the various parts of the structure were designed; and
(c) Locations and details of expansion or contraction joints and the
permissible locations and details for construction joints.
3.2 Inspection. Concrete work on the site shall be inspected by a com-
s
s
I
I
petent engineer or architect, preferably the one responsible for its design,
or by a competent representative responsible to him, who shall keep a
record which shall cover:
(a) Quality and quantity of concrete materials;
(b) Mixing, placing, and curing of concrete;
(c) Placing of reinforcing steel;
(d) Sequence of erection and connection of precast members; and
(e) General progress of the work.
3.3 New or Special Systems of Design or Construction. New or special
systems of design or construction of concrete structures or structural elements not already covered by this Standard may be used where such systems
are based on analytical and engineering principles and reliable test data
which demonstrate to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction
the safety of the resulting structure for the purpose intended. (See Clause
4.2.)
:l
4. LOAD TESTS OF STRUCTURES
4.1 Notations. The following notations apply in this Clause:

f
s
t
t1
D
L
dead load (see National Building Code of Canada, Section 4.1)

live load (see National Building Code of Canada, Section 4.1)
span of a flexural member under load test (the shorter span of
flat slabs and of slabs supported on four sides). The span, except
as provided in Clause 4.5.1(c), shall be taken as the distance
between the cen tres of the supports or the clear distance between
supports plus the depth of the member, whichever is smaller
(in inches)
14
CSA STANDARD A23.3
total thickness or depth of a flexural member under load test

(in inches)
A
maximum deflection, produced by a test load, of a flexural
member relative to the ends of the span, or of the free end of a
cantilever relative to its support
fa' = specified strength of concrete (see Clause 2)
4.2 Tests of New Systems of Design or Construction. Load test data.

submitted with respect to the provisions of Clause 3.3, shall be obtained
from tests made at a time after placing of the concrete in the structure not
greater than the minimum age at which the structure is to be put in
service or is assumed to have the specified strength (fe') (usually 28 days).
4.3 Static Load Tests of Existing Structures-General
4.3.1 The authority having jurisdiction, or his authorized representative, shall have the right to order load tests of any portion of a structure
when conditions are such as to cause doubt about the safety of the structure.
4.3.2 When load tests of a structure are required, a qualified engineer

acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, shall conduct the tests.
4.3.3 A load test of a structure shall not be made until the portion subjected to load is at least 56 days old, unless the owner of the structure, or his
authorized representative, and the contractor mutually agree to the test
being made at an earlier age.
4.3.4 When the whole structure is not to be tested, the portion of the
structure thought to provide the least margin of safety shall be selected for
loading.
4.3.5 Prior to the application of the test load, a load which simulates
the effect of that portion of the dead load which is not already present shall
be applied and shall remain in place until all required tests have been completed.
4.3.6 The test load shall not be applied until the structural members to
be tested have borne the full dead load for at least 48 hours.
4.4 Load Test of Floor or Roof Constructions
4.4.1 Immediately prior to the application of the test load to floor or
roof constructions, the necessary initial readings shall be made for the
measurements of deflections caused by the application of the test load.
4.4.2 The members selected for loading shall be subjected to a superimposed test load equivalent to 0.30 times the dead load plus 1. 7 times the
live load (0.30D
1.7L).
4.4.3 The test load shall be applied without shock to the structure and
in a manner to avoid arching of the loading materials.
4.4.4 The test load shall be left in position for 24 hours whereupon
readings of the deflection shall be taken.
4.4.5 The test load shall then be removed and additional readings of
deflections shall be taken 24 hours after removal of the test load.
test
L1ral
of a
ata t
ned
not
In
's).
Ita-
ure
Ire.
eer
ubhis
:est
the
for
15
4.5 Criteria for Evaluation of Load Tests of Floor or Roof Constructions

4.5.1 If the structure shows evident failure or fails to meet the following criteria, the changes needed to make the structure adequate for the rated
capacity shall be made or a lower rating may be established:
(a) If the maximum deflection, d, of a reinforced concrete floor or roof
exceeds l2/20,000t the recovery of deflection within 24 hours after
the removal of the test load shall be at least 75 per cent of the
maximum deflection;
(b) If the maximum deflection, d, is less than l2/20,000t the requirement on recovery of deflection in (a) may be waived;
(c) In determining the limiting deflection for a cantilever, the length, l,
shall be taken as twice the distance from the support to the end,
and the deflection shall be adjusted for any vertical movement or
rotation at the support;
(d) Constructions failing to show 75 per cent recovery of the deflection
may be retested in which case the second test loading shall not be
made until at least 24 hours after removal of the test load for the
first test; and
(e) The structure shall show no evidence of failure in the retest, and
the recovery of deflection caused by the second test load shall be at
least 80 per cent.
5. MATERIALS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION

5.1 Materials, Testini and Construction. l\:laterials, methods of
tes
.all
m-
to
or
he
~r
he
of
materials testing, and construction practices used in or for plain concrete and
reinforced concrete shall conform to the following CSA Standards:
(a) A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction;
and
(b) A23.2, Methods of Test for Concrete.
5.2 Details of Construction

5.2.1 Hooks and Bends
5.2.1.1 The term "standard hook" as used herein shall mean
either:
(a) A semicircular bend plus an extension of at least four bar
diameters but not less than 2Y2 inches at the free end of a
reinforcing bar;
(b) A 90-degree bend plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of the bar; or
(c) For stirrup and tie anchorage only, either a 90-degree or a
135-degree bend plus an extension of at least six bar diameters
but not less than 2Y2 inches at the end of the bar.
5.2.1.2 The radii of bend, measured on the inside of the bar, for
standard hooks shall be not less than the values given in Table I! except that
for sizes No.6 to No. 11 inclusive, in structural and intermediate grades only,
the minimum radius shall be 2Y2 bar diameters.
-219-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
16
eSA STANDARD A23.3
TABLE 1
MINIMUM RADII OF BEND
Bar Size
#3, #4, or #5
#6, #7, or #8
#9, # 10, or # 11
# 145 or # 185*
Mlnlmum. RadII of Bend
231 bar diameters

3 . bar diameters
4 bar diameters
5 bar diameters
Special fabrication is required for bends exceeding 90 degrees for bars of these sizes and grades
having a specified yield point of 50,000 psi or more.
5.2.1.3 For bends other than standard hooks:

(a) The radius of bend on the inside of the bar shall be not less
than one bar diameter in the case of a stirrup or tie; and
(b) Bends for all other bars shall have radii on the inside of the
bar not less than the values given in Table 1, and in any case
when a bend is made at a point of high stress in a bar, an
adequate radius of bend shall be provided to prevent crushing
of concrete.
5.2.1.4 All bars shall be bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by
the authority having jurisdiction.
5.2.1.5 No bars partially embedded in concrete shall be field
bent except as shown on the plans or specifically permitted by the authority
5.2.2 Cleaning of Reinforcement
5.2.2.1 Metal reinforcing bars or wires, at the time concrete is
placed, shall be free from loose flaky rust, mud, oil, or other coatings which
would destroy or reduce the bond.
5.2.2.2 If there is a delay in depositing concrete, reinforcement
shall be reinspected and cleaned if necessary just before resumption of the
concrete placing,
5.2.3 Placing of Reinforcemen t
5.2.3.1 Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and adequately
supported by chairs, spacers or ties made of concrete, metal, or other
material approved by the authority having jurisdiction and secured against
displacement within tolerances permitted.
5.2.3.2 Unless otherwise specified by the engineer, reinforcement
shall be placed in specified positions within the following tolerances:
(a) Depth, d, in flexural members, walls and columns where d is
24 inches or less: 3i inch;
(b) Depth, d, in flexural members and columns where d is more
than 24 inches: 72 inch; and
(c) Longitudinal locations of bends and ends of bars: 2 inches,
except that specified concrete cover at ends of members shall
not be reduced.
5.2.3.3 If wire or other reinforcement, not exceeding 3i inch in
diameter is used as reinforcement for slabs not exceeding 10 feet in span, the
f'
17
reinforcement may be curved from a point near the top of the slab over the
support to a point near the bottom of the slab at mid-span, provided such
reinforcement is either continuous over, or securely anchored to, the support.
5.2.4 Spacing of Bars

5.2.4.1 The clear distance between parallel bars (except in
'les
!ss
he
se
in
ag
)y
ld
ty
is
:h
rlt
Ie
ly
er
st
columns and between mul tiple layers of bars in beams) shall be not less than:
(a) The nominal diameter of the bars;
(b) 1%' times the maxim urn size of the coarse aggrega te; or
(c) 1 inch.
5.2.4.2 If reinforcemen t in beams or girders is placed in two or
more layers, the clear distance between the layers shall be not less than
1 inch and the bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above those
in the bottom layer.
5.2.4.3 In walls and slabs other than concrete joist construction,
the principal reinforcement shall be centered not farther apart than:
(a) Three times the wall or slab thickness; or
(b) More than 18 inches.
5.2.4.4 In spirally reinforced and in tied columns, the clear distance between longitudinal bars shall be not less than:
(a) 1Y2 times the bar diameter;
(b) lY2 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate; or
(c) 1Y2 inches.
5.2.4.5 The clear distances between bars stipulated in this Clause
shall also apply to the clear distance between a contact splice and adjacent
splices or bars.
5.2.4.6 Groups of parallel reinforcing bars bundled in contact to
act as a unit:
(a) May be used in flexural members or columns;
(b) Must be deformed bars with not over four in anyone bundle;
and
(c) Shall be used only when stirrups or ties enclose the bundle.
5.2.4.7 Bars in a bundle shall terminate at different points with
at least a 40-bar diameter stagger between terminations unless all of the
bars end in a support.
5.2.4.8 Where spacing limitations are based on bar size, a unit
of bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar of equivalent area.
It
5.2.5 Splices in Reinforcement

5.2.5.1 No splices of reinforcement shall be made except as
is
shown on the design drawings, or as specified, or as authorized by the

5.2.5.2 All welding of reinforcement splices shall conform to
CSA Standard W186, Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete
Construction.
5.2.5.3 An "approved welded splice" means one in which the
bars are butted and welded so that the weld will develop in tension at least
125 per cent of the specified yield strength of the reinforcing bars, or of the
smaller bar, if the bars being spliced are of different sizes.
~e
s,
11
n
e
18
CSA STANDARD A23.3
5.2.5.4 Approved positive connections for bars designed to carry

critical tension or compression shall be equivalent in strength to an approved
welded splice.
5.2.5.5 Splices of Bars in Tension. For splices of bars in which
the cri tical design stress is tensile:
(a) Lapped splices in tension shall not be used for bar sizes larger
than # 11;
(b) Splices at points of maximum tensile stress shall be avoided
wherever possible, but where such splices are used they shall
be welded, lapped, or otherwise fully developed;
(c) In any case the splice shall transfer the entire computed
stress from bar to bar wi thout exceeding three-fourths of the
permissible bond values given in this Standard; however, in
lapped splices the length of the lap for deformed bars shall
be not less than:
(i) 24, 30, 36, and 45 bar diameters for specified yield
strengths of 40,000, 50,000, 60,000, and 75,000 psi
respectively; or
(ii) 12 inches;
(d) For plain bars the minimum length of lap shall be twice that
for deformed bars;
(e) For contact splices spaced laterally closer than 12 bar diameters or located closer than 6 inches or 6 bar diameters from
an outside edge:
(i) The lap lengths shall be increased by 20 per cent; or
(ii) Stirrups as prescribed in Clause 6.1.6.1.4(b), or closely
spaced spirals shall enclose the splice for its full length;
(f) Where more than one-half of the bars are spliced within a
length of 40 bar diameters or where splices are made at points
of maximum stress, special precautions shall be taken, such
as increased length of lap and the use of spirals or closely
spaced stirrups around and for the length of the splice.
5.2.5.6 Splices of Bars in Compression. For splices in reinforcement in which the critical design stress is compressive:
(a) If lapped splices are used and if the concrete has a specified
strength of 3,000 psi or more the minimum length of lap for
deformed bars shall be:
(i) 20, 24, and 30 bar diameters for specified yield strengths
of 50,000 and under, 60,000 and 75,000 psi respectively;
(ii) Not less than 12 inches;
(b) If the specified concrete strength is less than 3,000 psi, the
amount of lap shall be one-third greater than the values
stipulated in (a);
(c) For plain bars the minimum amount of lap shall be twice
that specified for deformed bars;
(d) Welded splices or other positive connections may be used
instead of lapped splices, and, where the bar size exceeds # 11,
welded splices or other positive connections shall preferably
be used;
(e) In bars required for compression only, the compressive stress
may be transmitted by bearing of square-cut ends held in
- 222-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
..
19
concentric contact by a suitably welded sleeve or mechanical

device;
(f) If longitudinal bars in columns are offset at a splice:
(i) They shall be bent before they are placed in the forms
(see Clauses 5.2.1.4 and 5.2.1.5);
(ii) The slope of the inclined portion of the bar with the axis
of the columns shall not exceed 1 in 6;
(iii) The portions of the bar above and below the offset shall
be parallel to the axis of the col umn ;
(iv) Adequate horizontal support at the offset bends shall be
treated as a matter of design and shall be provided by
metal ties, spirals, or parts of the floor construction;
(v) Metal ties or spirals so designed shall be placed near (not
more than eight bar diameters from) the point of bend;
(vi) The horizontal thrust to be resisted shall be assumed as
172 times the horizontal component of the nominal stress
in the inclined portion of the bar;
(g) If reinforcement is spliced at cross-sections having more than
4 per cent steel, account shall be taken of any reduction in
strength due to the arrangement of the bar splices; and
(h) In columns the amount of reinforcement spliced by lapping
shall not exceed a steel ratio of 0.04 in any 3-foot length of
column.
5.2.5.7 Splices and Load Transfer in Metal Cores. In composite columns:
(a) Splices of structural steel cores shall be made in accordance
with the requirements of CSA Standard S16, Steel Structures
for Buildings;
(b) Provision shall be made at column bases to transfer the loads
to the footings at safe uni t stresses in accordance wi th Clause
6.2.3(a); and
(c) The base of the metal section shall be designed to transfer
the load from the entire composite column to the footing, or
it may be designed to transfer the load from the metal section
only, provided it is so placed in the pier or pedestal as to leave
ample section of concrete above the base for the transfer of
load from the reinforced concrete section of the column by
means of bond on the vertical reinforcement and by direct
compression on the concrete.
5.2.5.8 Splices of Welded Wire Fabric. Splices in welded wire
fabric used as reinforcement in structural slabs shall be made in accordance
wi th the following provisions:
(a) Lapped splices of wires in regions of maximum stress (where
they are to carry more than one-half of the permissible str.ess)
shall be avoided wherever possible but such splices, where
used, shall be so made that the overlap measured between the
outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than the
spacing of the cross wires plus 2 inches; and
(b) Splices of wires stressed at not more than one-half the permissible stress shall be so made that the overlap measured
between ou termost cross wires is not less than 2 inches.
- 2.2.3-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
20
eSA STANDARD A23.3
5.2.6 Lateral Reinforcement

5.2.6.1 Spiral Columns. In spiral columns:
(a) Lateral reinforcement shall consist of evenly spaced continuous spirals held firmly in place and true to line by vertical
spacers;
(b) If the spiral rods or wires are less than % inch in diameter, at
least two spacers shall be used for spirals 20 inches or less in
diameter, three for spirals 20 to 30 inches in diameter and
four for spirals more than 30 inches in diameter;
(c) When spiral rods or wires are % inch or larger, three spacers
shall be used for spirals 24 inches or less in diameter and four
for spirals more than 24 inches in diameter;
(d) The spirals shall be of such size and so assembled as to permit
handling and placing without being distorted from the design
dimensions;
(e) The material used in spirals shall have a minimum diameter
of U inch for rolled bars or No.4 AS&W gauge (0.2253 inch
diameter) for drawn wire;
(f) Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by 1Y2
extra turns of spiral rod or wire at each end of the spiral unit;
(g) Splices when necessary in spiral rods or wires shall be made by
welding or by a lap of 1Y2 turns;
(h) The centre to centre spacing of the spirals shall not exceed
one-sixth of the core diameter;
(i) The clear spacing between spirals shall not exceed 3 inches
nor be less than 1% inches or lY2 times the maximum size of
coarse aggregate used;
(j) Spiral reinforcement shall extend from the floor level in any
storey, or from the top of the footing, to the level of the
lowest horizontal reinforcement in the slab, drop panel or
beam above; and
(k) If a column has a capital, the spiral reinforcement shall extend
to a place at which the diameter or width of the capital is
twice that of the column.
5.2.6.2 Tied Columns. In tied columns:
(a) All longitudinal bars shall be enclosed by ties at least # 2
but not greater than #4 in size;
(b) Within any length of 16 diameters of the smallest size
principal reinforcement or 16 diameters of the smallest bar
in a bundle, a tie shall be provided with a cross-sectional
area of 1 per cent of the area of all the longitudinal bars
to which it provides lateral support;
(c) In any case the tie spacing shall not exceed:
(i) 16 times the diameter of the longitudinal bars or the
smallest bar in a bundle;
(ii) 48 tie diameters;
(iii) the least dimension of the column;
(iv) 12 inches in columns containing bundled bars;
(d) Ties shall be so arranged that every corner and alternate
longitudinal bar shall have lateral support provided by the
corner of a tie having an included angle of not more than
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-224-
r
con:ical
:-,
~t
,s In
and
::::ers
'our
mit
;ign
~ter
lch
L~
li t;
by
les
of
ny
he
or
Id
IS
le
3.r
al
~s
e
e
21
135 degrees and no bar shall be farther than 6 inches from

such a laterally supported bar;
(e) A corner of a tie having an included angle of not more than
135 degrees shall be provided at each bundle; and
(f) If the longitudinal bars are located around the periphery of
a circle, a complete circular tie may be used.
5.2.6.3 Beams and Girders. In beams and girders containing
compression reinforcement:
(a) All compression reinforcement shall be enclosed by ties or
closed stirrups at least ~ inch in diameter;
(b) The spacing of such ties or stirrups shall not exceed
(i) 16 times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar
or the smallest bar in a bundle of compression bars;
(ii) 48 tie diameters;
(iii) 12 inches in beams containing bundled compression
bars; and
(c) At least one stirrup or tie at each spacing shall extend
completely around all longitudinal bars and such stirrups or
ties shall be used throughout the distance where the compression reinforcement is required.
5.2.7 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement-Floor and

Roof Slabs
5.2.7.1 Reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature stresses
normal to the principal reinforcement shall be provided in structural floor
and roof slabs where the principal reinforcement extends in one direction
only.
5.2.7.2 Such reinforcement shall provide at least the following
ratios of reinforcement area to gross concrete area, but in no case shall such
reinforcing bars be placed farther apart than fi ve times the slab thickness or
more than 18 inches:
(a) Slabs where plain bars are used .................... 0.0025;
(b) Slabs where deformed bars with specified yield strengths less
than 60,000 psi are used .................. , ....... 0.0020;
(c) Slabs where deformed bars with at least 60,000 psi specified
yield strength or welded wire fabric having welded intersections not farther apart in the direction of stress than
12 inches are used ................................ 0.0018.
5.2.7.3 The ratios of reinforcement stipulated in this Clause shall
also apply to other reinforced concrete elements if so specified in other
Clauses of this Standard.
*See
5.2.8 Concrete* Protection for Reinforcement
Supplement No. 2 to the National Building Code of Canada, regarding thicknesses

cover for fire endurance.
OJ
5.2.8.1 The reinforcement of footings and other principal structural members in which the concrete is deposited against the ground shall
have not less than 3 inches of concrete between it and the ground contact
surface.
5.2.8.2 If concrete surfaces after removal of the forms are to be
exposed to the weather or to be in contact with the ground, the reinforcement shall be protected with not less than:
-225-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
22
CSA STANDARD A23.3
(a) 2 inches of concrete for bars larger than # 5; and

(b) 1% inches for # 5 bars or smaller.
5.2.8.3 The concrete protective covering for any reinforcement
at surfaces not exposed directly to the ground or weather shall be not less
than:
(a) ~ inch for slabs and walls;
(b) 1% inches for beams and girders; and
(c) ~ inch for joist floors in which the clear distance between
joists is not more than 30 inches.
5.2.8.4 Column spirals or ties shall be protected everywhere by
a covering of concrete, cast monolithically with the core, the thickness of
which shall be not less than:
(a) 1~ inches; or
(b) Less than 1~ times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate.
5.2.8.5 Concrete protection for reinforcement shall in all cases
be at least equal to the diameter of bars, except for concrete slabs and joists
for which the minimum protection stipulated in Clauses 5.2.8.2 and 5.2.8.3
need not be exceeded for any bar sizes.
5.2.8.6 In extremely corrosive atmospheres or other severe
exposures, the amount of protection shall be suitably increased.
5.2.8.7 Exposed reinforcing bars, inserts, and plates intended
for bonding with future extensions shall be protected from corrosion by
concrete or other adequate covering.
5.2.8.8 If thickness of cover is increased for reasons of fire resistance, this shall be an addition to the dimensions of the column assumed
in the design unless the radius of gyration is computed on the transformed
area.
5.2.8.9 For special requirements for precast construction see
Clause 12.
5.2.9 Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete

5.2.9.1 Electric conduits, and other pipes or their fittings,
whose embedment is allowed * shall not displace more than 4 per cent of the
area of the cross-section of a column on which stress is calculated or which is
required for fire protection.
Special care should be taken to ensure that the physical and chemical properties of nonjerrous
malerials which may be available for use are not harmful to concrete.
5.2.9.2 Sleeves, conduits, or other pipes passing through floors,

walls, or beams shall be of such size or in such location as not to impair the
required strength of the construction; such sleeves, conduits, or pipes may
be considered as replacing structurally in compression the displaced concrete, provided they:
(a) Are not exposed to rusting or other deterioration;
(b) Are of uncoated or galvanized iron or steel not thinner than
standard steel pipe;
(c) Have a nominal inside diameter not over 2 inches; and
(d, Are spaced not less than three diameters on centres.
5.2.9.3 Except when plans of conduits and pipes are approved
by the structural engineer, embedded pipes or conduits, other than those
merely passing through, shall not be:
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-226-
,
23
ent
.ess
(a) Larger in outside diameter than one-third the thickness of

the slab, wall, or beam in which they are embedded;
(b) Spaced closer than three diameters on centre; or
(c) So located as to impair the required strength of the construction.
!en
5.2.9.4 Sleeves, pipes, or conduits of any material not harmful

to concrete and within the limitations of this Standard may be embedded in
the concrete with the approval of the authority having jurisdiction, provided
they are not considered to replace the displaced concrete.
by
of
.te.
ses
sts
8.3
~re
led
by
reed
ed
;ee
;s,
he
is
~s,
1e
ly
n-
~d
5.2.9.5 Pipes which will contain liquid, gas, or vapour may be

embedded in structural concrete under the following additional conditions:
(a) The temperature of the liquid, gas, or vapour shall not exceed
150F;
(b) The maximum pressure to which any piping or fittings shall
be subjected shall be 200 psi above atmospheric pressure;
(c) Immediately prior to concreting all pipes and fittings shall
be subjected to a leakage test in which:
(i) The testing pressure above atmospheric pressure shall
be 50 per cent in excess of the pressure to which the pipes
and fittings may be subjected in service but not less
than 150 psi; and
(ii) The test pressure shall be held for 4 hours with no drop
in pressure except that which may be caused by air
temperature;
(d) Pipes carrying liquid, gas, or vapour which is explosive or
inj urious to health shall again be tested as specified in I tern
(c) after the concrete has hardened;
(e) No liquid, gas, or vapour, except water not exceeding 90F or
20 psi pressure, shall be placed in the pipes un til the concrete
has thoroughly set;
(f) In solid slabs the piping, except for radiant heating and snow
melting, shall be placed between the top and bottom reinforcement;
(g) The concrete covering of the pipes and fittings shall be not
less than 1 inch;
(h) Reinforcement with an area equal to at least 0.2 per cent of
the area of the concrete cross-section shall be provided
normal to the piping;
(i) The piping and fittings shall be assembled by welding,
brazing, solder-sweating, or other equally satisfactory method
but screw connections shall be prohibited;
(j) The piping shall be so fabricated and installed that it will
not require any cutting, bending, or displacement of the
reinforcement from its proper position;
(k) No liquid, gas, or vapour which may be injurious or detrimental to the pipes shall be pl<'l.ced in them; and
(1) Drain pipes and other piping designed for pressures of not
more than 1 psi above atmospheric pressure need not be
tested as required in Item (c).
24
eSA STANDARD A23.3
5.2.10 Construction and Expansion Joints

5.2.10.1 Construction joints shall be so made and located as
not to impair the required strength of the structure.
5.2.10.2 Where a construction joint is to be made, the surface
of the set concrete shall be suitably roughened, thoroughly cleaned of
foreign matter and laitance saturated with water and left in a damp condition
with no free water on the surface, immediately before placing new concrete.
5.2.10.3 At least 2 hours must elapse after depositing concrete
in columns or walls before depositing in beams, girders or slabs supported
thereon.
5.2.10.4 Beams, girders, brackets, column capitals and
haunches shall be considered as part of the floor system and shall be placed
monolithically therewith, except as advised by the designer.
5.2.10.5 Deep beams shall be given special consideration.
5.2.11 Concrete in Corrosive Environments. Special attention shall

be given to the spacing of expansion joints, the details of construction
joints, the amount of shrinkage steel provided and the amount of protection
afforded the reinforcing steel in structures in whic1ll danger of steel corrosion
is increased due to the presence of salt or acid solutions or vapours.
5.2.12 Splitting Ratio Flip. When required for concrete made from a
particular aggregate, the splitting ratio F 8P ' shall be determined from tests
as follows:
(a) Twenty-four 6-inch by 12-inch cylinders shall be made in accordance
with CSA Standard A23.2.12, Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory;
(b) Twelve of the cylinders shall have a compressive strength level of
approximately 3,000 psi and twelve of approximately 4,000 or
5,000 psi;
(c) After 7 days moist curing followed by 21 days drying at 73F and
50 per cent relative humidity, 8 of the test cylinders at each of the
2 strength levels shall be tested for splitting strength and 4 for
compressive strength;
(d) The splitting tensile strength shall be determined in accordance
with ASTM Standard C496, Method of Test for Splitting Tensile
Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens and the compressive
strength in accordance with CSA Standard A23.2.13, Compressive
Strength of Moulded Concrete Cylinders; and
(e) The ratio, F ap, of splitting tensile strength to the square root of
compressive strength shall be obtained by using the average of all
16 splitting tensile tests and all 8 compressive tests.
6. STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND
PROPORTIONING OF MEMBERS
6.1 General
6.1.1 Notations. The following notations apply in this Clause:
Ac
area of the core of a spirally reinforced column measured to

the outside diameter of the spiral
area of concrete within the core of a composite column
p
.s
e
,f
n
e
d
b'
d
d
II
n
n
n
s
e
1-
1
I'
e
e
e
,f
I
p'
Pf
PI
pw
R
25
area of concrete surrounding the tension reinforcing bars and

having the same centroid as the total tensile reinforcement
gross area of spirally reinforced or tied column
area of the concrete of composite columns
area of tension reinforcement
area of compression reinforcement
area of reinforcement to develop compressive strength of overhanging flanges in 1- and T-sections
width of compression face of a flexural member
width of web in 1- and T-sections
distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension
reinforcemen t
in working stress design, the eccentricity of the resultant load
on a column, measured from the gravity axis
in ultimate strength design, eccentricity of axial load at the
end of a member measured from the plastic centroid of the
section
in working stress design, the maximum permissible eccentricity
of Nb
in ultimate strength design, the eccentricity of load P b measured from the plastic centroid of the section
specified strength of concrete (see Clause 2)
calculated stress in reinforcement
yield strength or yield point of reinforcement (see Clause 2)
actual unsupported length of column
effective length factor
live load, as defined and stipulated in The National Building
Code of Canada, Section 4.1
span length of slab or beam
clear span for positive moment and shear and the average of
the two adjacent clear spans for negative moment
m Formula (1) number of bars constituting total tensile
reinforcement
in working stress design, eccentric load normal to the crosssection of a column
in ultimate strength design, the value of N below which the
allowable eccentricity is controlled by tension, and above
which by com pression
in ultimate strength design, axial load capacity at simultaneous crushing of concrete and yielding of tension steel
(balanced conditions)
ratio of area of tension reinforcement to effective area of concrete in a rectangular beam or in the web of a flanged member
ratio of area of compression reinforcement to effective area of
concrete
reinforcement ratio producing balanced conditions at ultimate
strength as defined by Formula (54)
A II t/b 'd
ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of the
core (out to out of spirals) of a spirally reinforced concrete
AII/b'd
a factor to adjust for the effects of slenderness and end conditions of columns
- 2.2.9-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
26
eSA STANDARD A23.3
R'
for columns controlled by tension, the value of R given by

Formula (6)
radius of gyration of gross concrete area of a column
the ratio of the area of bars cut off at a section to the total area
of bars
t
thickness of flexural member
V
the total shear at a beam support
Wmu: = maximum crack width in inches
W
total load per unit length of beam or per unit area of slab
6.1.2 Design Methods and Loads

6.1.2.1 Design Method. The design of reinforced concrete
members shall be made either:
(a) With reference to allowable working stresses, working loads,
and the accepted straight-line theory of flexure as outlined in
Clause 6.2; or
(b) With reference to load factors and strengths as outlined in
Clause 6.3.
6.1.2.2 Loads. The minimum design loads or forces that a plain
or reinforced concrete structural element must be able to resist are those
stipulated in the National Building Code of Canada, Section 4.1.
6.1.2.3 Stress
6.1.2.3.1 The moment, shear or stress effects of shrinkage
and temperature changes, determined in accordance with recognized
methods, shall be added to the computed moment shear or stress effects
at any cross-section due to loads, except that in monolithic beam and slab,
or slab construction, temperature changes and shrinkage may usually be
neglected if expansion joints are spaced at a maximum of 150- to 200-foot
centres, depending on the climate and the rigidity of the structure.
6.1.2.3.2 The effects of shrinkage and temperature
changes may be calculated on the basis of the expected temperature change
in the structure plus a shrinkage allowance equivalent to a 40F temperature
drop for shrinkage in the case of normal stone concrete and 50F for lightweight concrete.
6.1.3 Frame Analysis*

See also Clause 6.1.5.3 regarding analysis of bending moments in columns.
6.1.3.1 General. All members of frames or continuous construction shall be designed to resist at all sections the maximum effects of the
prescribed loads as determined by the theory of elastic frames.
6.1.3.2 Approximate Methods. Approximate methods of frame
analysis may be used for buildings of usual types of construction, spans and
storey heights, in which:
(a) The simplifying assumptions given in this Clause may be
used; and
(b) The assumptions shall be consistent throughout the analysis.
6.1.3.3 Moment and Shear Coefficients. In the case of two or
more approximately equal spans (the larger of two adjacent spans not
exceeding the shorter by more than 20 ~er cent) with loads uniformly distributed, where the unit live load does not exceed three times the unit dead
- 2.30Copyright NRC-CNRC
f
CODE FOR THE DESIGN OF PLAIN OR REINFORCED CONCRETE ST.l:WCTURES
)y
27
load, the following moments and shears may be used in design in lieu of
more accurate analyses:
Positive moment
End spans
If discontinuous end is unrestrained ............... .!
11 w1'2
If discontinuous end is integral with the support ...
1~
wl'2
Interior spans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 116 wl'2

te
s,
Negative moment at exterior face of first interior

support
Two spans ........................................
.n
M ore th an two spans ............................. .l

10 w1'2
n
it!
wl'2
Negative moment at other faces of interior supports .... 111 w1'2

Negative moment at face of all supports for (a) slabs with
spans not exceeding 10 feet, and (b) beams and girders
where ratio of sum of column stiffnesses to beam stiffness 1
exceeds eight at each end of the span .................. 12 w1'2
Negative moment at interior faces of exterior supports for
members built integrally with their supports
1
Where the support is a spandrel beam or girder. . . . . .. 24 w1'2
Where the support is a column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .!
16 wl'l
Shear in end members at first interior support .......... 1.15
Shear at all other supports.......................... .
e
:l
"
r
t
:l
w~'
wI'
6.1.3.4 Modification of Moments. Except where approximate

values for bending moments are used, the negative moments at the supports
for any assumed arrangement of loading may each be adjusted by not more
than 15 per cent, provided that these modified negative moments are used
for the calculation of the corresponding positive moments in the span; such
an adjustment shall only be made when the section at which the moment is
reduced is so designed that p, (p-p') or (pw-Pf), whichever is applicable,
is equal to or less than 0.50 times the reinforcement ratio Ph, producing
balanced conditions at ultimate strength as calculated by Formula (54).
6.1.3.5 Arrangement of Live Load. The live load may be considered to be applied only to the floor or roof under consideration, and the
far ends of the columns may be assumed as fixed.
6.1.3.6 Combination of Dead and Live Loads. Consideration
may be limited to combinations of dead load on all spans with full live load
on two adjacent spans and with full1ive load on alternate spans.
28
CSA STANDARD A23.3
6.1.3.7 Span Length Assumptions

6.1.3.7.1 The span length 1, of members that are not
built integrally with their supports shall be considered the clear span plus
the depth of the slab or beam but shall not exceed the distance between
cen tres of supports.
6.1.3.7.2 In analysis of continuous frames, centre to
centre distances shall be used in the determination of moments.
6.1.3.7.3 Solid or ribbed slabs with clear spans of not
more than 10 feet, that are built integrally with their supports may be
designed as continuous slabs on knife edge supports with spans equal to the
clear spans of the slab and the width of beams otherwise neglected.
6.1.3.8 Moments at Faces. Moments at faces of supports may
be used for design of beams and girders.
6.1.3.9 Minimum Positive Bending Moment. For continuous
slabs and beams of different span lengths, the positive bending moment shall
in no case be assumed less than would be the case for a fixed condition at
the support or supports as the case may be.
6.1.3.10 Stiffness Assumptions

6.1.3.10.1 Any reasonable assumptions may be adopted
for computing the relative flexural stiffness of columns, of walls, and of floor
and roof systems. The assumptions made shall be consistent throughout
the analysis.
6.1.3.10.2 In computing the value of I for the relative
flexural stiffness of slabs, beams, girders, and columns, the total uncracked
cross-sectional area of the concrete may be considered and the reinforcement
may be neglected.
6.1.3.10.3 If the total torsional stiffness in the plane of
a continuous system at a joint does not exceed 20 per cent of the flexural
stiffness at the joint in the same plane, the torsional stiffness need not be
taken into account in the analysis.
6.1.4 General Requirements for Design of Flexural Members

6.1.4.1 Requirements for T-beams
6.1.4.1.1 In T-beam construction, the slab and beam
shall be built integrally or otherwise effectively bonded together.
6.1.4.1.2 The effective flange width to be used in the
design of symmetrical T -beams shall not exceed 0040 of the span length of a
simply supported beam, or 0.25 of the span length of a continuous beam, and
its overhanging width on either side of the web shall not exceed:
(a) 12 times the thickness of the slab; or
(b) One-half the clear distance to the next beam.
6.1.4.1.3 For beams having a flange on one side only, the
effective overhanging flange width shall not exceed:
(a) 1/12 of the span length of the beam (simple or continuous);
(b) Six times the thickness of the slab; or
(c) One-half the clear distance to the next beam.
6.1.4.1.4 Where the principal reinforcement in a slab
which is considered as the flange of a T-beam (not a joist in concrete joist
floors) is parallel to the beam:
lot
us
en
to
.ot
be
he
ay
us
all
at
ed
or
ut
ve
ed
nt
of
'al
)e
Ie
a
d
29
(a) Transverse reinforcement shall be provided in the top of the

slab;
(b) This reinforcement shall be designed to carry the load on the
portion of the slab required for the flange of the T -beam;
(c) The flange shall be assumed to act as a cantilever; and
(d) The spacing of the bars shall not exceed five times the thickness of the flange, nor in any case 18 inches .
6.1.4.1.5 Isolated beams in which the T-form is used

only for the purpose of providing additional compression area may be
designed under the provisions of Clause 6.1.4.1.2, if adequate reinforcement
is provided in the flanges.
6.1.4.1.6 The overhanging portion of the flange of the
beam shall not be considered as effective in computing the shear and diagonal
tension resistance of T -beams.
6.1.4.1.7 Provision shall be made for the compressive
stress at the support in continuous T-beam construction.
6.1.4.2 Effective Depth of Beam or Slab
6.1.4.2.1 The effective depth, d, of a beam or slab shall
be taken as the distance from the centroid of its tensile reinforcement to its
compression face.
6.1.4.2.2 Adequately bonded concrete toppings may be
considered as contributing fully to the effective depth of the section provid ing that:
(a) The topping is at least 1 inch thick at the thinnest point;
(b) The shear stress at the interface between the topping and base
does not exceed 40 psi;
(c) The surface of the slab has been roughened, preferably by
brooming in a direction transverse to the direction of the
interface shear;
(d) The surface is clean, free of loose particles and laitance and
has been saturated with water and left in a damp condition
with no free water standing on the surface;
(e) The calculations take into account any differences between
the strength of the concrete of the base and the topping; and
(f) The requirements of Clause 5.2.9 are complied with if any
pipes or conduits are installed in the topping.
6.1.4.3 Distance Between Lateral Supports

6.1.4.3.1 The clear distance between lateral supports of a
:e
b
t
beam shall not exceed 50 times the least width, b, of compression flange
or face for beams supported at two or more points, or for cantilevers fully
supported laterally at the fixed and free ends.
6.1.4.3.2 Where a cantilever is laterally supported at

its fixed end only, the cantilever distance shall not exceed 25 times the least
width, b, of compression flange or face.
6.1.4.3.3 The effect of lateral eccentricity of load shall be
taken into account in determining the spacing of lateral supports for a beam.
m'
30
CSA STANDARD A23.3
6.1.4.4 Control of Deflection

6.1.4.4.1 Reinforced concrete members subject to bending shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to prevent deflections or
other deformations which may adversely affect the strength or serviceability
of the structure.
6.1.4.4.2 Consideration of deflections shall take into
account:
(a) Elastic and inelastic properties of the concrete and steel;
(b) Shrinkage in the concrete;
(c) Effects of temperature and humidity;
(d) Curing conditions;
(e) Age of concrete at the time of loading;
(f) Amount of reinforcement;
(g) Dimensions of the members; and
(h) Any other relevant factors.
The provisions of Clauses 6.1.4.4.3 to 6.1.4.4.7 shall be taken as minimum requirements for the purposes of this Standard.
6.1.4.4.3 The minimum thickness, t, stipulated in Table 2
shall apply to flexural members of normal weight concrete, except when
calculations of deflections prove that lesser thicknesses may be used without
adverse effects.
TABLE 2
MINIMUM THICKNESSES
(Forming part of Clause 6.1.4.4.3)
Minimum Overall Thickness'"
Member
Simply
Supported
One End
Continuous
Both Ends
Continuous
cantilever
One-way solid slabs
1/25
1/30
1/35
1/12
Beams
1/20
1/23
1/26
1/10
"'The values given in Table 2 shall be used directly for reinforced concrete members made with
normal weight concrete (w = 145 pc/) and reinforcing steel with a yield point of 40,000 psi.
For other conditions, the values shall be modified as follows:
(a) For structural lightweight concrete having unit weights in the range 90-120 pounds per cubic
foot, the values in Table 2 shall be multiplied by 1.65 - 0.005w but not less than 1.09
where w is the unit weight in pounds per cubic foot;
(b) For reinforcement having yield strengths other than 40,000 psi, the values in Table 2 shall'
be multiplied by 0.5
0.0125 f" where f" is the yield strength in kips per square inch.
6.1.4.4.4 In calculations of those deflections which occur

immediately upon application of working load (computed by the usual
methods and formulae for elastic deflection) :
(a) The modulus of elasticity for concrete specified in Clause
6.2.6.2 shall be used;
(b) The moment of inertia shall be based on the gross section
when pfy is equal to or less than 500 for normal weight conCopyright NRC-CNRC
-234-
d-
or
ty
to
:-
2
1
31
crete and 400 for lightweight concrete, and on the transformed cracked section when pfy is greater; and
(c) In continuous spans, the moment oi inertia may be taken as
the average of the val ues obtained for the posi tive and
negative moment regions.
6.1.4.4.5 The additional long-time deflections may be
obtained by multiplying the immediate deflection caused by the sustained
part of the load by:
(a) 2.0 when A.' = 0;
(b) 1.2 when A.' = 0.5 As; and
(c) 0.8 when A.' = As.
6.1.4.4.6 lVlaximum limits for immediate deflection due
to live 10p-d, L, computed as in Clause 6.1.4.4.5 are:
(a) For roofs which do not support plastered ceilings ..... . l/180;
(b) For roofs which support plastered ceilings or for floors
which do not support partitions .................... . l/360.
6.1.4.4.7 For a floor or roof construction intended to
support or to be attached to partitions or other construction likely to be
damaged by large deflections of the floor, the allowable limit for the sum of
the immediate deflection due to live load, L, and the additional deflection
due to shrinkage and creep under all sustained loads computed as above
shall not exceed l/360.
6.1.4.5 Control of Cracking

6.1.4.5.1 If, in working stress design the computed tensile
stress in reinforcing steel exceeds 24,000 psi, or in ultimate strength design
the specified yield strength or yield point exceeds 40,000 psi, crack widths
shall be investigated; and:
(a) The width of flexural cracks calculated by Formula (1)* shall
not exceed the following:
(i) Members exposed to the weather ............ 0.008 inch
(ii) Members not exposed to the weather ......... 0.012 inch
W max =
f." ii.tX
~/-
10-
(1)
(b) Tension reinforcement shall be well distributed in the zones

of maximum concrete tension and in the flanges of T -beams;
and
(c) Where the effective depth of T -beams minus the thickness of
the slab, if any exceeds 30 inches:
(i) Stirrups equal to at least 0.0015 of the horizontal crosssection of the web shall be provided throughout the entire
length of the beam and shall extend in to the slab; and
(ii) The spacing of such stirrups shall not exceed the effective
depth of the beam.
See Appendix A for example interpretations of A e ,.
6.1.4.5.2 If concrete flexural members are to be exposed

to more than ordinarily corrosive atmospheres, the effect of crack width
shall be given special consideration.
6.1.4.5.3 Except for stirrups, ties or spirals, only deformed bars shall be used if the working stress exceeds 20,000 psi or the
specified yield point used in ultimate strength design exceeds 40,000 psi.
-235-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
32
eSA STANDARD A23.3
6.1.4.6 Deep Beams. If beams have depth/span ratios greater
than
Ys for continuous spans, or Ys for simple spans:
(a) They shall be designed as deep beams taking into account

nonlinear distribution of stress, lateral buckling, and other
pertinent effects; and
(b) Horizon tal and vertical shrinkage and temperature reinforcement having a ratio at least equal to that given in Clause
5.2.7 shall be distributed equally between the two side faces
of the beams.
6.1.4.7 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members

6.1.4.7.1 If at any section of a flexural member (except
slabs of uniform thickness) positive reinforcement is required by analysis,
the ratio, p, supplied shall be not less than 200/fY1 unless the area of reinforcement provided at every section, positive or negative, is at least one-third
greater than that required by analy&is.
6.1.4.7.2 In structural slabs of uniform thickness, the
minimum amount of flexural tension reinforcement at any cross-section in
the direction of the span shall be not less than the ratio given in Clause 5.2.7.
6.1.4.7.3 In unsupported compression faces of beams,

the minimum area of compression reinforcement shall be 0.003bd.
6.1.5 General Column Requirements
6.1.5.1 General
6.1.5.1.1 Minimum Dimensions for Columns. Principal columns, other than precast shall have a minimum diameter of:
(a) 11 inches, or
(b) In the case of rectangular columns, a minimum thickness of
772 inches and a minimum gross area of 86 square inches;
with the exception that columns having a height of 7 feet or less shall have a
minimum thickness of 6 inches and a minimum gross area of 50 square
inches.
6.1.5.1.2 Isolated Column with Multiple Spirals. If
two or more interlocking spirals are used in a column, the outer boundary
of the column shall be taken at a distance outside the extreme limits of the
spiral equal to the thickness of cover specified in Clause 5.2.8.4.
6.1.5.1.3 Limits of Section of Column Built Monolithically With Wall. For a spiral column built monolithically with a
concrete wall or pier, the outer boundary of the column section shall be taken
either as:
(a) A circle at least 172 inches outside the column spiral; or
(b) As a square or rectangle, the sides of which are at least
172 inches outside the spiral or spirals.
6.1.5.1.4 Equivalent Circular Columns. As an exception to the general procedure of utilizing the full gross area of the column
section, it shall be permissible to design a circular column and to build it
with a square, octagonal, or other shaped section of the same least lateral
dimension; in such case, the allowable load, the gross area considered, and
the required percentages of reinforcement shall be taken as those of the
circular column.
-236-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
f
.ter
6.1.5.1.5 Minimum Effective Area of OYersized

Columns. In a column which has a larger cross-section than required by
lnt
considerations of loading, a reduced effective area, Ag, not less than one-half
of the total area may be used for determining minimum steel area and load
capacity.
6.1.5.2 Limits for Reinforcement of Columns. In columns:
(a) Area of vertical reinforcement shall be not less than 0.01 or
more than 0.08 times the gross cross-sectional area; *
(b) l\1inimum size of bar shall be # 5 ;
(c) l\1inimum number of bars shall be six for spiral columns and
four for tied columns; and
(d) In spiral columns the ratio of spiral reinforcement, PSt shall
be not less than the value given by:
(2)
Ps= 0.45(A g /A e -1)f c '/fy
wherein fy is the yield strength of spiral reinforcement stipulated in Clause 6.2.4.2 but not more than 60,000 psi.
ler
celse
~es
pt
is,
e
:-d
le
in
7.
s,
33
... If the use of 8 per cent of steel would involve serious practical difficulties in the placing and
compacting of concrete, a lower percentage of steel should be used. The percentage of steel in a
column should not usually exceed 4 per cent if the bars in the column have to be lapped with
the bars from a column below.
6.1.5.3 Bending Moments in Columns

6.1.5.3.1 Columns shall be designed to resist the axial
forces from loads on all floors, plus the maximum unbalanced bending due
to loads on a single adjacent span of the floor under consideration and
moments due to horizontal loading, if any.
6.1.5.3.2 Account shall also be taken of the loading
condition giving the maximum ratio of bending moment to axial load.
6.1.5.3.3 In building frames, particular attention shall be

given to the effect of unbalanced floor loads on both exterior and interior
columns and of eccentric loading due to other causes.
6.1.5.3.4 In computing moments in columns due to gravity loading, the far ends of columns which are monolithic with the structure
may be considered fixed.
6.1.5.4 Length of Columns
6.1.5.4.1 For purposes of determining the limiting
dimensions of columns, the unsupported length, h, of reinforced concrete
columns shall be taken as the clear distance between floor slabs, except that:
(a) In flat slab construction, it shall be the clear distance between
the floor and the lower extremity of the capital, the drop
panel, or the slab, whichever is least;
(b) In beam and slab construction, it shall be the clear distance
between the floor and the underside of the deeper beam
framing into the column in each direction at the next higher
floor level;
(c) In columns restrained laterally by struts, ties, or beams, it
shall be the clear distance between such lateral supports in
each vertical plane, provided that such supports can safely
resist a lateral force equal to at least 4 per cent of the axial
column load; and
34
CSA STANDARD A23.3
(d) In columns restrained laterally by struts or beams, with

brackets used at the junction, it shall be the clear distance
between the floor and the lower edge of the bracket, provided
that the bracket width equals that of the beam or strut and
is at least half that of the column.
6.1.5.4.2 For rectangular columns, that length shall be
considered which produces the greatest ratio of length to radius of gyration
of section.
6.1.5.4.3 The effective length of columns in structures
shall be taken as kh, where the effective length factor, k, shall not be less
than indicated by rational analysis, subject to the conditions of Clauses
6.1.5.4.4 and 6.1.5.4.5. *
*Effective length coefficients, k, may be taken from Appendix B for the appropriate conditions
of end restraint, or other authoritative data may be used.
6.1.5.4.4 In structures where lateral stability or resistance to lateral forces is provided by shear walls, rigid bracing, or by other
means, and where conditions of end restraint cannot be adequately determined, a hinged end shall be assumed.
6.1.5.4.5 Sidesway buckling shall be considered in defining the effective length, kh, in all structures which depend on the column
and beam stiffness for lateral stability.
6.1.5.5 Strength Reductions for Length of Compression
Members kh/r~70
6.1.5.5.1 The design of columns whose slenderness ratio
kh/r is not greater than 70 shall be based on the following:
(a) When compression governs the design of the section, the
axial load and moment computed from the analysis shall be
divided by the appropriate factor R as given in Items (i), (ii),
or (iii) below, and the design shall be made using the appropriate formulae for short members in Clauses 6.2.9.1 to 6.2.9.7
inclusive, and Clauses 6.3.6.1 to 6.3.6.6 inclusive:
(i) If relative lateral displacement of the ends of a column
is prevented and if the column is bent by applied
moments and forces so that there is a point of contraflexure between the ends, no correction for length shall
be made unless kh/r exceeds 27. If kh/r exceeds 27,
the factor:
R
1.20-0.0075 kh/r
(3)
shall be used, or the design shall be made according to
Clause 6.1.5.5.2;
(ii) If relative lateral displacement of the ends of a column is
prevented and if the column is bent in single curvature
by applied moments and forces, no correction for length
shall be made unless kh/r exceeds 10. If kh/r exceeds 10,
the factor:
R
1.07 -0.0075 kh/r
(4)
shall be used, or the design shaH be made according to
Clause 6.1.5.5.2;
(iii) The design of a restrained column for which relative
lateral displacement of the ends is not prevented shall be
made using the factor given in Formula (5), using an
effective length kh in the determination of which the
-238-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
r
th
ce
~d
Id
)e
m
::s
5S
~s
ts
,:r
35
effect of sidesway has been considered as required by

Clause 6.1.5.4.5. No correction for length shall be made
unless kh/r exceeds 20. If kh/r exceeds 20, the factor:
R = 1.15 -0.007 khjr
(5)
shall be used or the design shall be made according to
Clause 6.1.5.5.2.
When the design is governed by lateral loads of long
duration the factor R shall be computed from Formula
(4) using an effective length kh in accordance with
Clause 6.1.5.4.5;
(b) When tension governs the design of the section, the axial load
and moment computed from the analysis shall be increased as
required in Clause 6.1.5.5.1(a) except that they shall either
be considered to vary linearly on an interaction diagram from
the values given in Clause 6.1.5.5.1(a) at the balanced condition (as defined in Clauses 6.2.9.4.1 or 6.3.6.1.2) to a value
corresponding to R = 1 when the axial load is zero, or R
shall be replaced by R' from Formula (6):
R' = 1 - (1 - R)( 1.5
r:t
~) ~
(6)
(c) When a column design is governed by the miflimum eccentricities specified for ultimate strength design in Clause 6.3.6.2.1,
the strength reduction for length shall correspond to the
actual conditions of curvature and end restraint.
6.1.5.5.2 The maximum slenderness ratio kh/r permitted
is 105. Columns exceeding kh/r = 70 shall be designed on the basis of calculations taking into account elastic and plastic deformations and the
duration of the loads. Such calculations shall be based on actual end restraints against rotations and on the lateral support conditions at the top
of the column, and they shall show that such a column is safe in bending
and buckling.
6.1.5.6 Transmission of Column Load Through Floor

System. When the specified strength of concrete in a column exceeds that
specified for the floor system by more than 40 per cen t, proper transmission
of load through the weaker concrete shall be provided by one of the following means:
(a) The capacity of the column through the floor system shall be
com pu ted using the weaker concrete strength and adding
vertical dowels and spirals as required;
(b) For columns laterally supported on four sides by beams of
approximately equal depth or by slabs, the capacity may be
computed by using an assumed concrete strength in the
column formulas equal to 75 per cent of the column concrete
strength plus 35 per cent of the floor concrete strength; and
(c) Other means acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
""
6.1.6 Anchorage
6.1.6.1 General Requirements
6.1.6.1.1 The calculated tension or compression in any
bar at any section must be developed on each side of that section by proper
embedment length, end anchorage, or hooks.
-239 ....
Copyright NRC-CNRC
36
CSA STANDARD A23.3
6.1.6.1.2 A tension bar may be anchored by bending it

across the member at an angle of not less than 15 degrees with the longitudinal portion of the bar and making it continuous with the reinforcement
on the opposite face of the member.
6.1.6.1.3 Except at supports, every reinforcing bar shall
be extended beyond the point at which it is no longer needed to resist
flexural stress, for a distance equal to the effective depth of the member or
12 bar diameters, whichever is greater.
6.1.6.1.4 No flexural bar shall be terminated in a tension
zone unless one of the following conditions is satisfied:
(a) The shear is not over half that normally permitted, including
allowance for shear reinforcement, if any;
(b) Stirrups in excess of those normally required are provided
each way from the cut off a distance equal to three-fourths of
the depth of the beam, where;
(i) Excess stirrups shall be at least the minimum specified in
Clauses 6.2.7.7.2 or 6.3.4.7.2; and
(ii) Stirrup spacing shall not exceed dj8rb where rb is the
ratio of the area of bars cut off to the total area of the
bars at the section;
(c) The continuing bars provide double the area required for
flexure at that point or double the perimeter required for
flexural bond.
6.1.6.1.5 Tensile negative reinforcement in any span of
a continuous, restrained or cantilever beam, or in any member of a rigid
frame shall be adequately anchored by bond, hooks, or mechanical anchors
in or through the supporting member.
6.1.6.1.6 At least one-third of the total reinforcement
provided for negative moment at the support shall be extended beyond the
extreme position of the point of inflection a distance not less than KG of the
clear span, or the effective depth of the member, whichever is greater.
6.1.6.1.7 At simple supports of beams or slabs, at least
one-third of the positive moment reinforcement shall be extended along
the same face of the beam into the support a distance sufficient to develop
by bond a force equal to two-thirds of the shear at the support but not less
than 6 inches. At continuous supports of beams or slabs, at least one-fourth
of the positive moment reinforcement shall be extended along the same
face of the beam into the support at least 6 inches. (For flat slabs see Clauses
9.5.4 and 9.7.7.)
6.1.6.1.8 Within a distance of KG of the clear span or the
effective depth, whichever is greater, from the extreme positions of the point
of inflection, in beams subjected to an axial tension force or those in which
shrinkage movements are restrained, both positive and negative reinforcement shall be provided with a ratio, p, not less than 200jfy
6.1.6.1. 9 Plain bars (as defined in Clause 2) in tension,
except bars for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement, shall terminate in
standard hooks except that hooks shall not be required on the positive
reinforcement at interior supports of continuous members.
6.1.6.1.10 Standard hooks in tension may be considered
as developing 10,000 psi in Clause 6.2, or 19,000 psi in Clause 6.3 in the bars,
or may be considered as extensions of the bars at appropriate bond stresses.
-2.40-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
it
~i
nt
ill
st
::>r
37
6.1.6.1.11 Hooks shall not be considered effective in

adding to the compressive resistance of bars.
6.1.6.1.12 Any mechanical device may be used in lieu of
a hook, if test results demonstrate to the satisfaction of the authority having
jurisdiction that the device is capable of developing the strength of the bar
without damage to the concrete.
6.1.6.1.13 Reinforcing bars in tension shall not be bent
around re-entrant corners near the inside surface without adequate provision
for preventing bars from breaking out of the concrete.
6.1.6.2 Anchorage of Web Reinforcement
6.1.6.2.1 The ends of bars forming simple V- or multiple
V-stirrups shall be anchored by one of the following methods:
(a) By a standard hook, considered as developing 50 per cent of
the allowable stress in the bar, plus embedment sufficient to
develop by bond the remaining stress in the bar (the effective
embedment of a stirrup leg shall be taken as the distance
between the middepth of the member, d/2, and the centre of
radius of bend of the hook) ;
(b) Welding to longitudinal reinforcement;
(c) Bending tightly around the longitudinal reinforcement
through at least 180 degrees; or
(d) Embedment above or below the middepth, d/2, of the beam
on the compression side, a distance sufficient to develop by
bond the stress to which the bar will be subjected, at the bond
stresses permitted by Clauses 6.2.8 and 6.3.5 but, in any case,
a minimum of 24 bar diameters.
6.1.6.2.2 Between the anchored ends, each bend in the
continuous portion of a simple V- or multiple V-stirrup shall be made
around a longitudinal bar.
6.1.6.2.3 Hooking or bending stirrups around the longitudinal reinforcement shall be considered effective only when stirrups are
perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement or make an angle of at least
45 degrees with deformed longitudinal bars.
6.1.6.2.4 Longitudinal bars bent to act as web reinforcement shall, in a region of tension, be continuous with the longitudinal
reinforcement and in a compression zone shall be anchored as in Clauses
6.1.6.2.1(a) or (d).
6.1.6.2.5 In all cases web reinforcement shall be carried
as close to the compression surface of the beam as fireproofing regulations
and the proximity of other steel will permit.
6.1.6.2.6 The ends of bars making up closed stirrups shall
be spliced by lapping or welding in accordance with the requirements of
Clause 5.2.5.
6.1.7 Transfer of Moments and Effect of Openings in Slabs and

Footings
6.1.7.1 When unbalanced gravity load, wind, or earthquake cause
transfer of bending moment between column and slab, the additional shears
on the critical section shall be investigated by a rational analysis.
-141-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
~---
38
eSA STANDARD A23.3
6.1.7.1 When openings in slabs are located at a distance less than

ten times the thickness of the slab from a concentrated load or reaction or
when openings in flat slabs are located within the column strips as defined
in Clause 9.2, that part of the periphery of the critical section for shear
which is covered by radial projections of the openings to the centroid of the
loaded area shall be considered ineffective.
6.1 Working Stress Design
Ao
area of concrete within a pipe column
Ag
gross area of spirally reinforced or tied column
the total area of the concrete encasement of a combination
column
area of concrete of a composite column
gross area of section (in shear calculations)
Ar
area of steel or cast-iron core of a composite, combination, or
pipe column
A.
A.t
total area of longitudinal reinforcing bars
At
total area of stirrups for torsion within a distance, s, measured
in a direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement
Au
total area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement
Av
total area of web reinforcement in tension within a distance, s,
measured in a direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement
Avf
required area of shear-friction reinforcement
b
width of compression face of flexural member
b'
width of web in 1- and T-sections (transverse shear calculations)
thickness of thinnest walls in a box section (torsion calculations)
bo
periphery of critical section for shear in slabs and footings
C1
a torsion factor as defined in Clause 6.2.7.5.2(i)
C2
a torsion factor as defined in Clause 6.2.7.5.2(ii)
D
nominal diameter of bar, inches
D.
diameter of circle through centres of the longitudinal reinforcement in spiral columns
d
reinforcemen t
d'
distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of compression reinforcement
Eo
modulus of elasticity of concrete (see Clause 6.2.6.2)
E.
modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000,000 psi
e
eccentricity of the resultant load on a column, measured from
the gravity axis
eb
maximum permissible eccentricity of Nb
Fa
term by defined Formula (37)
Fb
allowable bending stress that would be permitted for bending
alone
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-242-
r
E
.n
)r
d
lr
,e
m
N
LO
39
ratio of splitting tensile strength to the square root of compressive strength (see Clause 5.2.12)
axial load divided by area of member, Ac
the bending moment component about the X-axis of a column
divided by the section modulus of the transformed un cracked
section
the bending moment component about the V-axis of a column
divided by the section modulus of the transformed uncracked
section
allowable compressive stress in concrete
specified strength of concrete (see Clause 2.1)
allowable compressive stress in the structural steel core of a
composite column (see Clause 6.2.9.5)
allowable stress on unencased metal columns and pipe columns
allowable stress in column longitudinal reinforcement
tensile stress in web reinforcement
yield strength or yield point of reinforcement (see Clause 2.1)
unsupported length of col umn
ratio of distance between centroid of compression and centroid
of tension to the depth, d
radius of gyration of concrete in pipe columns
radius of gyration of metal pipe in pipe columns
bending moment
mom en t capacity at simultaneous crushing of concrete and
yielding of tension steel (balanced conditions) = N b eb
allowable bending moment about a principal axis of a column
subject to bending about that axis only and without axial load
torsional moment on a cross-section
torsional moment carried by web reinforcement
for a given axial load the bending moment capacity about the
X-principal axis of a column cross-section
the component about the X-axis of the allowable bending
moment of a column subject to bending about two axes
for a given axial load, the bending moment capacity about the
V-principal axis of a column cross-section
the component about the V-axis of the allowable bending
moment of a column subject to bending about two axes
f y /O.85fc'
load normal to the cross-section, to be taken as positive for
compression, negative for tension, and to include the effects of
tension due to shrinkage and creep (in shear calculations)
eccentric load normal to the cross-section of a column
in column design, the value of N below which the allowable
eccentricity is controlled by tension, and above which by compression
ratio of modulus of elasticity vf steel to that of concrete
sum of perimeters of all effective bars crossing the section on
the tension side, if of uniform size; for mixed sizes, substitute
4A s/D, where As is the total steel area and D is the largest bar
40
CSA STANDARD A23.3
p'
pg
pw
R
s
t
u
V
V'
v
v'
v Cl
vt
Vt'
w Cl
x
y
Xl
X2
Yl
Y2
a
P
J1.
diameter. For bundled bars, use the sum of the exposed

portions of the perimeters
allowable axial load on a reinforced concrete col umn wi thou t
reduction for length or eccentricity
allowable axial load on a composite column without reduction
for eccentricity
ra tio of area of tension reinforcement to effective area of
concrete
ratio of area of compression reinforcement to effective area of
concrete
ratio of area of longitudinal reinforcement to the gross area, Ag
AII/b'd
a factor to adjust for the effects of slenderness and end
conditions of columns
spacing of stirrups or bent bars in a direction parallel to the
longitudinal reinforcement
overall depth of rectangular column or the diameter of a round
column
bond stress
total shear
shear carried by web reinforcement
shear stress
proportion of excess shear stress attributed to direct shear
shear stress carried by concrete
torsional shear stress
proportion of excess shear stress attributed to torsion
weight of concrete, pounds per cubic foot
the smaller overall dimension of a rectangular section
the larger overall dimension of a rectangular section
the smaller dimension of a closed stirrup
the smaller dimension of the hole in a box section
the larger dimension of a closed stirrup
the larger dimension of the hole in a box section
angle between inclined web bars and the longi tudinal axis of
the member
the angle which the sloping face of a beam makes with the
beam axis
coefficient of friction
6.2.2 General. For structures designed with reference to allowable

stresses, working loads, and the accepted straight-line theory of stress and
strain, the allowable stresses set forth in Clause 6.2 shall be used, and designs
shall conform to all provisions of this Standard except Clause 6.3.
6.2.3 Allowable Stresses in Concrete. In all plain or reinforced concrete members designed in accordance wi th Clause 6.2 :
(a) Flexure and bearing stresses shall not exceed the values given in
Table 3;
-2.44- Copyright NRC-CNRC
r
41
(b) Shear stresses shall not exceed the values given in Table 3 except
as provided in Clauses 6.2.7.1 to 6.2.7.10 inclusive;
(c) Bond stresses shall not exceed those given in Clause 6.2.8; and
(d) Stresses due to torsion or combined torsion and shear shall not
exceed those given in Clauses 6.2.7.5 and 6.2.7.6.
TABLE 3
ALLOWABLE STRESS
(Forming part of Clause 6.2.3)
Allowable Stress in Concrete
For Any Strenllth
of Concrete In
Accordance with
Clause 5.1
Description
Flexure: fo
Extreme fibre stress in compression
fo
Extreme fibre stress in tension in plain concrete
fo
For Strength of Concrete Shown Below

f.' ==
2,500
Psi
fe' ==
3,000
Psi
fe' ==
4,000
Psi
fo' ==
5,000
Psi
1,125
1,350
1,800
2,250
1.6Vfc'
80
88
102
113
0.45f,,'
Shear: v (as a measure of

diagonal tension)
Beams with no web reinforcement*
Va
1.1 Vfe'
55*
60*
70*
78*
Joists with no web reinforcement
Vo
1.2Vfc'
61
66
77
86
Members with vertical or

inclined web reinforcement or properly combined bent bars and
vertical stirrups
v
5Vi7
250
274
316
354
Slabs and footings (peripheral shear

Clause 6.2.7.9)*
2Vfo'
100*
110*
126*
141*
On full area
0.25f,,'
625
750
1,000
1,250
On one-third area or less t
0.375f,,'
938
1,125
1,500
1,875
Vo
Bearing: fc
*For shear values for
lightweight aggregate concrete see Clause 6.2.7.10.

tThis increase shall be permitted only when the least distance between the edges of the loaded
and unloaded areas is a minimum of one-fourth of the least lateral dimension of the loaded area.
The allowable bearing stress on a reasonably concentric area greater than one-third but less
than the full area shall be interpolated between the values given.
6.2.4 Allowable Stresses in Reinforcement

6.2.4.1 Stresses in Steel. Unless permitted elsewhere in this
Standard, the stresses in steel for concrete reinforcement shall not exceed
the following limi ts;
-245-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
42
eSA STANDARD A23.3
(a) Tension in all reinforcing bars:*

(i) Structural grade .......................... 18,000 psi
(ii) Intermediate grade ........................ 20,000 psi
(iii) All steels having a yield point or yield strength,
fyo equal to or greater than hard grade ....... 24,000 psi
except that, the allowable stress may be taken as 50 per cent
of fyo with a maximum of 30,000 psi, if the crack control
provisions of Clause 6.1.4.5 are implemented;
... See definition of deformed bar, Clause 2.1 with regard to welded wire fabric.
(b) Compression reinforcement in flexural members (see Clause

6.2.6.4.3); and
(c) Compression in longitudinal reinforcing bars in columns:
(i) In spiral columns, 40 per cent of the minimum
yield strength or yield point, but not to exceed ...................................... 30,000 psi
(ii) In tied columns ..................... see Clause 6.2.9.3
6.2.4.2 Spiral Reinforcement. The yield strengths or yield

points, fyo of spiral reinforcement for columns in connection with Clause
6.1.5.2(d) shall be taken as follows:
(a) Hot rolled rods, intermediate grade ............. 40,000 psi;
(b) Hot rolled rods, hard grade .................... 50,000 psi;
(c) Hot rolled rods, conforming to CSA Standard
G30.10 Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement with 60,000 Psi Minimum Yield
Point .................................... 60,000 psi; and
(d) Cold-drawn wire .............................. 60,000 psi.
6.2.5 Combined Loads
6.2.5.1 Reduction of Load Effects For Load Combinations
For design under this Clause the load combinations stipulated in The
National Building Code of Canada, Section 4.1, Article 4.1.2.3, shall be
considered and the reductions of load effects permitted therein may be
applied.
6.2.6 Flexural Computations

6.2.6.1 Design Assumptions. In the design of reinforced concrete structures by the working stress design method, the following assumptions shall be made:
(a) A section plane before bending remains plane after bending;
strains vary as the distance from the neutral axis;
(b) The stress-strain relation for concrete is a straight line under
working loads within the allowable working stresses;
(c) Stresses vary as the distance from the neutral axis except for
deep beams (Clause 6.1.4.6);
(d) The steel takes all the tension due to flexure; and
(e) The tension reinforcement is replaced in design computations
wi th a concrete tension area equal to n times that of the
reinforcing steel.
SI
si
51
it
>1
6.2.6 .2 Modulus of Elasticity-Concrete

6.2.6 .2.1 The modulus of elasticity, Eo. for concrete shall
be taken as w 01.6 33v17 in psi for values of w 0 between 90 and 155 pounds
per cubic foot.
6.2.6.2.2 For normal weight concrete, w 0 may be taken
as 145 pounds per cubic foot.
6.2.6.3 Modulus of Elasticity-Steel. The modulus of elasticity, E I for steel reinforcement shall be taken as 29,000,000 psi.
6.2.6.4 Modular Ratio, n

6.2.6.4.1 The modular ratio n = E./Eo used in design of
;e
5i
normal weight reinforced concrete may be calculated on the basis of the

values of E. and Eo stipulated in Clauses 6.2.6.2 and 6.2.6.3 or may be
assumed within the range of values given in Table 4 for the compressive
strength of the concrete being considered.
TABLE 4
d
e
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH-MODULAR RATIO

(Forminl1 part of Clause 6.2.6.4)
Compre&8lve StreDf,th
of Concrete fo'
['
t
..
Rante of Values
for Modular
Ration
I'
2,500
3,000
4,000
5,000
:l
e
e
e
43
10-12
9-10
7-8
6-7
6.2.6.4 .2 The values of the modular ratio, n, used in the

design of lightweight reinforced concrete shall be assumed the same as for
normal weight concrete of the same compressive strength, except in the
calculation of deflections where the value of n used shall be the ratio of the
values of E. and
as given in Clauses 6.2.6.2 and 6.2.6.3.
6.2.6.4.3 In doubly reinforced beams and slabs, an
effective modular ratio of 2n shall be used to transform the compression
reinforcement and compute its stress, which shall not be taken as greater
than the allowable tensile strength.
6.2.7 Shear and Diagonal Tension *
* For
brackets and short cantilevers and other situations where pure shear dominates, that is,
where it is appropriate to consider shear as a measure of diagonal tension, see Clause 6.2.7.8.
6..2.7.1 Nominal Shear Stress

6.2.7.1.1 The nominal shear stress, as a measure of
diagonal tension, in reinforced concrete members other than brackets and
other short cantilevers shall be computed by;
(a) For members of uniform depth
(7)
v = V/bd
and
(b) For members of varying depth
M
V(f tanp
v=
bd
(8)
44
CSA STANDARD A23.3
in which the negative sign applies where the bending moment, M, increases
numerically in the same direction as the depth, d, increases, and the positive
sign where the moment decreases in this direction.
6.2.7.1.2 For beams of 1- or T-section, b ' shall be substituted for b in Formulae (7) and (8).
6.2.7.1.3 For design, shear stresses between the face of
the support and a section, a distance, d, therefrom shall not be considered
critical and the maximum shear shall be taken as that at the section a
distance, d, from the face of the support.
6.2.7.1.4 Wherever applicable the effects of torsion shall
also be considered (see Clauses 6.2.7.5 and 6.2.7.6).
6.2.7.1.5 For members subject to flexural shear without
axial load the shear stress*, Va. permitted on an unreinforced web shall not
exceed 1.1 v'f[ unless a more detailed analysis is made in accordance wi th
Formula (9).
va
where,
Va
vt7+1,300p~d
(9)
shall not in any case exceed 1. 75v!7;

V and M are the absolute values of shear and bending moment at
the section considered; and
M shall not be taken less than Yd.
*The permissible stresses for lightweight aggregate concrete are given in Clause 6.2.7.10.
6.2.7.1.6 For members su bject to shear plus axial tension,.

shall not exceed the value given by Formula (10), where N is negative
for tension:
(10)
Va
6.2.7.1.7 For members subject to shear and axial compression Vc shall not exceed the value given by Formula (11) where N is,
positive for compression:
(11}
6.2.7.2 Web Reinforcement
6.2.7.2.1 Wherever the value of the shear stress, v, computed by Formulae (7) or (8) exceeds the shear stress, Ve, permitted for the
concrete of an unreinforced web by Clauses 6.2.7.1.5 to 6.2.7.1.7 inclusive,
web reinforcement shall be provided to carry the excess.
6.2.7.2.2 Such web reinforcement shall also be provided

for a distance equal to the depth, d, of the member beyond the point
theoretically required.
6.2.7.2.3 Web reinforcement between the face of the
support and the section at a distance, d, therefrom shall be the same as
required at that section.
6.2.7.2.4 Web reinforcement may consist of:
(a) Stirrups perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement;
(b) Stirrups making an angle of 45 degrees or more with the
longi tudinal tension reinforcemen t;
es
v-e
bof
~d
It
(c) Longitudinal bars bent so that the axis of the bent portion
makes an angle of 30 degrees or more wi th the axis of the
longitudinal portion of the bar; or
(d) Combinations of (a) or (b) with (c).
6.2.7.2.5 Stirrups or other bars to be considered effective
as web reinforcement shall be anchored at both ends according to the provisions of Clause 6.1.6.2.
6.2.7.3 Stirrups
6.2.7.3.1 The area of steel required in stirrups placed
perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement shall be computed by:
Av = V's/fvd
(12)
6.2.7.3.2 The area of inclined stirrups shall be computed
by Formula (14).
6.2.7.4 Ben t Bars
6.2.7.4.1 The inclined portion of any longitudinal bar
that is bent up for web reinforcement shall not be considered effective for
that purpose within a distance of 4 bar diameters from the centre of the
bends at the top and bottom of the inclined portion.
6.2.7.4.2 If the web reinforcement consists of a single
bent bar or of a single group of parallel bars all bent up at the same distance
from the support, the required area shall be computed by:
Av
I"
s'
45
V'
= fvS in
(13)
in which V' shall not exceed 1.5 bdv'fc'.

6.2.7.4.3 If there is a series of parallel bars or groups of
bars bent up at different distances from the support, the required area shall
be computed by:
A _
V's
(14)
v - fvd (Sina+Cosa)
6.2.7.4.4 Bent bars used alone as web reinforcement shall
be so spaced that the effective inclined portion defined in Clause 6.2.7.4.1
meets the requirements of Clause 6.2.7.7.1.
6.2.7.4.5 If more than one type of web reinforcement is
used to reinforce the same portion of the web:
(a) Total shear resistance shall be computed as the sum of the
resistances computed for the various types separately;
(b) In such computations, the resistance of the concrete, Vc shall
be included only once; and
(c) No one type of reinforcement shall be assumed to resist more
than 2V'/3.
6.2.7.5 Torsion
6.2.7.5.1 Sections subject to torsion or to combined
flexure and torsion shall be designed to withstand the twisting moment due
to torsional forces in addition to any other moment or force.
6.2.7.5.2 In the absence of more precise calculations, the
maximum stress due to torsion may be computed from Formulae (15), (16),
(17), or (18) as follows:
-2.49-Copyright NRC-CNRC
46
eSA STANDARD A13.3
(a) For rectangular sections:

(i) The maximum shear on the long side of the rectangle
C1M t
(15)
Vt = - x2y
where C 1
= 3+1.8~y
(ii) The maximum shear on the short side

C 2M t
Vt = - x2y
(16)
x
y
where C 2 = 2.2+2.6(b) For T, L, and I sections:

3M t b'
Vt= - Ix3y
(17)
where the portion of the y dimension which exceeds 6x shall

not be considered for torsion;
(c) For closed box sections:
2M t
(18)
6.2.7.5.3 Re-entrant corners of all torsion resisting members shall be provided with suitable fillets.
6.2.7.5.4 If the gross shear stress due to torsion only at
any section exceeds 1.1 Vf:i, torsional reinforcement shaH be provided to
resist the excess.
6.2.7.5.5 If a section is subject to transverse shear in
addition to torsion, the sum of the shear stresses calculated separately for
the transverse shear (Formulae (7) or (8) and for torsion.(Formulae (15).
(16), (17), or (18)) shall be considered as the maximum unit shear stress at
the section and shall not exceed 1.1 v'f:i without web reinforcement except
that, where shear stresses due to torsion are less than 0.2Vf7 their effect
may be neglected.
6.2.7.5.6 Torsion reinforcement shall consist of transverse closed stirrups and longitudinal bars or equivalent spiral reinforcement
and at least one longitudinal bar shall be placed in each corner of the
stirrups, except that, if y exceeds 2x, bars shall also be provided at the
middle of each long side.
6.2.7.5.7 Longitudinal torsion reinforcement shall be not
less than # 4 in size.
6.2.7.5.8 The area of stirrups and longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion shall be computed using the following Formulae:
(a) Closed stirrups (total area of two legs):
A _ sM't
(19)
t 0. 6X ly 1f v
(b) Total area of longitudinal torsional reinforcement:
(20)
A tl -- At(Xl +Yt)
s
6.2.7.5.9 For beams subjected to combined transverse
bending and torsion, the web reinforcement required for the transverse shear
and bending shall be added to the reinforcement required for torsion.
r
I
47
6.2.7.5.10 If the sum of the shear stress, v, and the

torsional shear stress, Vt, exceeds 1.1 Vfe', except as allowed in Clause
6.2.7.5.5, reinforcement shall be provided to resist the excess, and this
excess stress shall be distributed between the shear and torsion effects in
accordance with the following Formulae:
V'
v
v' = - = - - X (excess)
(21)
bd
v+Vt
(22)
Vt ' = ~ X (excess)
v+Vt
and in computing M't from Vt / , the appropriate formula from Formulae
(15) to (18) shall be used.
')
6.2.7.5.11 All the stirrups in members subjected to

torsional stresses shall be transverse closed stirrups anchored as described
in Clause 6.1.6.2.6 or by welding to the main reinforcement with sufficient
weld to develop the calculated tensile stress in the bar.
6.2.7.6 Stress Restrictions

6.2.7.6.1 The tensile stress in web reinforcement, fv,
shall not exceed the values given in Clause 6.2.4.1 for allowable tension in
steel reinforcement.
6.2.7.6.2 In members with web reinforcement the sum
of the shear stresses v and Vt shall not exceed 5.5V:i provided v does not
exceed 5v'f:':
()
r
J
t
t
t
6.2.7.7 Web Reinforcement Restrictions

6.2.7.7.1 Where web reinforcement is required:
(a) I t shall be so spaced that every 45-degree line, represen ting a
potential diagonal crack and extending from middepth, d/2,
of the member to the longitudinal tension bars, shall be
crossed by at least one line of web reinforcement; and
(b) When the shear stress exceeds 3Vf7. every such 4S-degree
line shall be crossed by at least two lines of web reinforcement.
6.2.7.7.2 Where web reinforcement is required, its area
shall be not less than 0.15 per cent of the area, bs, computed as the product
of the wid th of the web and the spacing of the web reinforcement along the
longitudinal axis of the member.
6.2.7.8 Shear Friction

6.2.7.8.1 The special prOVISIOns of this Clause appJy
where pure shear dominates*, so that it is inappropriate to consider shear
as a measure of diagonal tension.
Fot' example, suck situations may be found in brackets and skot't cantilevers.
6.2.7.8.2 A crack shall be assumed to occur along the

shear path. Relative shear displacement shall be considered resisted by
friction maintained by shear-friction reinforcement across the crack; this
reinforcement shall be approximately perpendicular to the assumed crack.
6.2.7.8.3 The ultimate shear stress, Vu shall not exceed
5v'V
-251-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
48
eSA STANDARD A23.3
6.2.7.8.4 The required area of shear-friction reinforcement, A vf , shall be computed by:

V
Avf = (23)
fvfl.
where the coefficient of friction, fl., shall be 1.0 for concrete to
concrete, and 0.7 for as-rolled structural steel to concrete.
6.2.7.8.5 Direct tension across the assumed crack shall be
provided for by additional reinforcement.
6.2.7.8.6 The shear-friction reinforcement shall be adequately anchored on both sides of the assumed crack, by embedment, hooks,
or welding to special devices.
6.2.7.8.7 When concrete is placed against hardened
concrete to transfer shear, the interface shall be rough with a full double
amplitude (that is minimum depth of valleys) of approximately ~ inch.
6.2.7.8.8 When shear is transferred between as-rolled
steel and concrete, the steel shall be clean and without paint, and the concrete shall be cast directly against the steel.
6.2.7.9 Shear Stress in Slabs and Footings*
.. For transfer of moments and effects of openings see Clause 6.1.7.
6.2.7.9.1 The shear capacity of slabs and footings in

the vicinity of concentrated loads or concentrated reactions shall be governed
by the more severe of two conditions:
(a) The slab or footing acting essentially as a wide beam, with
a potential diagonal crack extending in a plane across the
entire width, which case shall be considered in accordance
with Clause 6.2.7.1; or
(b) Two-way action existing for the slab or footing, with potential
diagonal cracking along the surface of a truncated cone or
pyramid around the concentrated load or reaction, which case
shall be designed as required in the remainder of this Clause.
6.2.7.9.2 The critical section for shear to be used as a
measure of diagonal tension shall be perpendicular to the plane of the slab
and located at a distance d/2 out from the periphery of the concentrated
load or reaction area.
6.2.7.9.3 The nominal shear stress shall be computed by:
V
v = bod
(24)
in which V and b o are taken at the critical section specified in Clause 6.2.7.9.2
and the shear stress, v, so computed shall not exceed 2VI:'. unless shear
reinforcement is provided in accordance with Clause 6.2.7.9.4 in which
case v shall not exceed 3v17.
6.2.7.9.4 When v exceeds 2Vfc'. shear reinforcement
shall be provided in accordance with Clauses 6.2.7.2 to 6.2.7.7 except that
the allowable tensile stress in shear reinforcement shall be 50 per cent of that
prescribed in Clause 6.2.4.
6.2.7.9.5 Shear reinforcement consisting of bars, rods or
wire shall not be considered effective in members with a total thickness less
than 10 inches.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-252-
49
6.2.7.10 Structural Lightweight Concrete

6.2.7.10.1 When structural lightweight aggregate con-
e
~-
d
e
d
l-
d
h
e
crete is'~used, the provisions of Clause 6.2 shall apply with the following
modifications:
(a) The shear stresses, Ve. and Vt permitted on an unreinforced
web in Clauses 6.2.7.1.5,6.2.7.5.4, and 6.2.7.5.10 shall be:
0.17 F apV'f:'
(25)
(b) Formula (9) shall be replaced by:
= 0 15 F 1,300pw
(26)
Ve
apV 0
1\1 Vd
If'+
(c) Formula (10) shall be replaced by:

Vo = 0.17 FspVfc'(1+0.004 NjAg)
(27)
(d) Formula (11) shall be replaced by:
Ve
0.17 F ap v7:'(1+0.002 NjAg)
(28)
(e) The limiting value for shear stress in slabs and footings, Ve.
in Clauses 6.2.7.9.3 and 6.2.7.9.4 shall be:
0.3 FspVfc'
(29)
and with web reinforcement
0.47 Fsp07
(30)
6.2.7.10.2 Where Fsp has not been determined, permissible values for shear and torsion on an unreinforced web shall be calculated
using the formulae for normal weight concrete given in Clauses 6.2.7.1 to
6.2.7.9 multiplied by 0.75 for all-lightweight concrete and 0.85 for sand-lightweigh t concrete *.
:e
*This provision is not intended to apply to concrete weigMHg less than 95 pounds per cubic
foot dry.
6.2.8 Bond and Anchorage

6.2.8.1 In flexural members in which the tension reinforcement
a
b
is parallel to the compression face:

(a) Flexural bond stress at any cross section shall be computed by:
V
u = 2:ojd
(31)
(b) Bent-up bars that are not more than d/3 from the level of the
main longitudinal reinforcement may be included; and
(c) Critical sections occur at the face of the support, at each point
where tension bars terminate within a span, and at the point
of inflection.
6.2.8.2 To prevent bond failure or splitting, the calculated tension or compression in any bar at any section must be developed on each
side of that section by proper embedment length, and anchorage, or for
tension only, by hooks.
6.2.8.3 Anchorage or development bond stress, u, shall be computed as the bar forces divided by the product cf 2:0 times the embedment
length.
6.2.8.4 The bond stress, u, computed as in Clauses 6.2.8.1 to
6.2.8.3 shall not exceed the limits given below, except that flexural bond
stress need not be considered in compression, nor in those cases of tension
where anchorage bond is less than 0.8 of the permissible:
SO
eSA STANDARD A23.3
(a) For tension bars with sizes and deformations conforming to

CSA Standard G30.6, Minimum Requirements for the
Deformations of Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement:
*
3.4VC:
3-0 pSI.
(1') T op b ars.........................
D
or':'
(ii) Bars oth er t h an top b ars............ 4.8VC:
D
or 500 pSI.
(b) For tension bars with sizes and deformations conforming to
CSA Standard G30.7, Special Large Size Deformed BilletSteel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement:
(i) Top barst ...... : ........................... 2.1
(ii) Bars other than top bars ....................... 3vf/
(c) For all deformed compression bars:
6.SVfc' or 400 psi
(d) For plain bars the allowable bond stresses shall be one-half
of those permitted for bars conforming to CSA Standard
G30.6, Minimum Requirements for the Deformations of
Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, but not
more than 160 psi.
vi:
*Top bars, in reference to bond, are horizontal bars so placed that more than 12 inches of concrete
is cast in the member below the bar.
tTop bars, in reference to bond, are horizontal bars so placed that more than 12 inches of concrete
6.2.8.5 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for the tension

reinforcement in all flexural members to which Formula (31) does not apply,
such as sloped, stepped or tapered footings, brackets, or beams in which the
tension reinforcement is not parallel to the compression face.
6.2.9 Reinforced Concrete Columns
6.2.9.1 Limitin~ Dimensions. The allowable loads determined
by the provisions of Clauses 6.2.9.1 to 6.2.9.7 inclusive apply only when
unsupported length reductions are not required by the provision of Clauses
6.1.5.4 and 6.1.5.5 (see Clause 6.1.S.1 for minimum size).
6.2.9.2 Spirally Reinforced Columns. The maximum allowable axial load, P, on columns with closely spaced spirals (see Clause 6.1.5.2)
enclosing a circular core reinforced with vertical bars shall be that given by:
P
A g(0.2Sfc'+f aPg)
(32)
where fa = allowable stress in column longitudinal reinforcement, to be taken at 40 per cent of the minimum
specification value of the yield strength, but not to
exceed 30,000 psi.
6.2.9.3 Tied Columns. The maximum allowable axial load on
columns reinforced with longitudinal bars and separate lateral ties shall be
85 per cent of that given by Formula (32).
6.2.9.4 Columns Subjected to Axial Load and Bending

6.2.9.4.1 The strength of a column subjected to axial load
and bending is controlled by compression if the load, N, has an eccentricity,
e, in each principal direction, no greater than that given by Formulae (33),
(34), or (35) and by tension if e exceeds these values in either principal
direction, where:
- 2.54-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
()
f
j
f
e
51
(a) For symmetrical spiral columns;

(33)
eb = OA3p g mD s+0.14t
(b) For symmetrical tied columns; and
(34)
eb = (0.67p g m+0.17)d
(c) For unsymmetrical tied columns;
p'm(d -d') +O.1d
(35)
eb =
(p'-p)m+0.6
6.2.9.4.2 Columns controlled by compression shall be
proportioned by Formula (36) except that the allowable load, N, shall not
exceed the load, P, permitted when the column supports axial load only:
fa/F a+hx/Fb+fby/Fb not greater than unity
(36)
where hx and h y are the bending moment components about the x and y
principal axes divided by the section modulus of the respective transformed
uncracked section, 2n being assumed as the modular ratio for all vertical
reinforcement, and for both tied and spiral columns:
(37)
Fa = 0.34(1 +pgm)fo'
6.2.9.4.3 For columns bent about one axis unless a more
accurate analysis is made, the allowable bending moment M on columns controlled by tension shall be considered to vary linearly with axial load, from
Mo when the section is in pure flexure, to Mb when the axial load is equal
to N b ; Mb and Nb shall be determined from eb and Formula (36) and Mo
from Formulae (38), (39), or (40) as follows:
(a) For spiral columns:
Mo = 0.12AstfyDs
(38)
(b) F or symmetrical tied columns:
Mo = OAOAsfy(d -d')
(39)
where As = area of tension reinforcement
(c) For unsymmetrical tied columns:
Mo = OAOAsfyjd
(40)
6.2.9.4.4 For columns bent about two axes and controlled
by tension, the components of the allowable moment about the X- and
Y-axes, Mxx and Myy, shall be computed from Formula (41) as follows:
Mxx+ Myy = 1
(41)
lVl x My
where Mx and My are the moment capacities about the X- and Y-axes
respectively for bending about one axis only and for the given axial load.
6.2.9.5 Composite Columns-General

6.2.9.5.1 A composite column shall consist of a steel
structural shape thoroughly encased in concrete reinforced with both
longi tudinal rei n forcem en t and spirals or ties.
6.2.9.5.2 For the purposes of strength calculations, the
ends of a composite column shall be assumed to be hinged unless definite
provisions are made to resist moments at the ends or at each storey height.
6.2.9.5.3 The maximum allowable axial load on composite columns shall be taken as:
Po = RG[0.25 (Ag-Ar) fo' + Astf s] + frAr
(42)
where fr = allowable compressive strength in the structural
steel element, taken equal to the value given in
CSA Standard S16, Steel Structures for Buildings,
52
eSA STANDARD A23.3
based on the critical slenderness ratio of the

structural steel element if acting alone
long column reduction factor defined in Clause
6.1.5.5.
1.0 for columns designed according to Clause 6.2.9.6,
and 0.85 for columns designed according to Clause
6.2.9.7.
6.2.9.5.4 The concrete shall develop a compressive

strength of at least 2500 psi at 28 days.
6.2.9.5.5 The yield strength of the structural steel

element shall be taken as the specified yield stress or 60,000 psi, whichever
is the lesser.
6.2.9.5.6 The total cross-sectional area of the metal core

and reinforcing bars shall not exceed 20 per cent of the gross area of the
column.
6.2.9.5.7 The structural steel element shall be designed
to carry safely any construction or other load to be plaf,;ed on it prior to its
encasement in concrete.
6.2.9.5.8 Any direct compression load capacity assigned
to the concrete in a cross-section must be transferred to the concrete by
floor members or brackets in direct bearing on column concrete at a stress
of not more than 0.35 fo' based on an area of Ag.
6.2.9.5.9 Transfer of loads to the metal core shall be
by the use of bearing members such as plates, brackets or other
positive connections; these shall be provided at the ends of the metal core
and at intermediate floor levels where required.
pr~.>vided
6.2.9.5.10 If concrete inside a hollow structural section

is used, the concrete shall only be considered in the load carrying capacity
if the section is completely filled.
6.2.9.5.11 The surface of the structural steel member in
contact with the concrete shall be unpainted.
6.2.9.6 Composite Columns-Spiral Bound Concrete
Around a Structural Steel Core
6.2.9.6.1 The requirements of Clause 6.2.9.5 shall apply
to columns consisting of spirally bound concrete around a structural steel
core.
6.2.9.6.2 A clearance of at least 3 inches shall be maintained between the spiral and the metal core at all points except that when
the core consists of a structural steel H-section the minimum clearance
may be reduced to 2 inches.
6.2.9.6.3 Spiral reinforcement shall conform to Formula
(2).
6.2.9.6.4 The amounts of longitudinal reinforcement and

the requirements as to spacing of bars, details of splices and thickness of
protective shell outside the spiral shall conform to the limiting values
specified for a spiral col umn of the same overall dimensions.
fte
se
6,
se
re
el
~r
'e
e
1
s
j
,
I
53
6.2.9.7 Composite Columns-Laterally Tied Concrete

Around a Structural Steel Core
6.2.9.7.1 The requirements of Clause 6.2.9.5 shall apply
to columns consisting of laterally tied concrete around a structural steel core.
6.2.9.7.2 The structural steel section shall be encased in
concrete at least 3 inches thick over all metal except protruding heads or
ends of mechanical fasteners.
6.2.9.7.3 The concrete shall be reinforced with welded
wire fabric or lateral ties.
6.2.9.7.4 The amounts of longitudinal reinforcement and
the requirements as to spacing of bars, details of splices and cover outside
the ties shall conform to the limiting values specified for a tied column of
the same overall dimensions.
6.2.9.7.5 If welded wire fabric is used to reinforce the
cover:
(a) It shall have wires at least equal to 10 AS & W gauge (0.1350
inch in diameter), the wires encircling the column being
spaced not more than 4 inches apart and those parallel to the
column axis not more than 8 inches apart; and
(b) The fabric shall extend entirely around the column at a
distance of 1 inch inside the outer concrete surface and shall
be lap-spliced at least one mesh plus 2 inches.
6.2.9.7.6 If lateral ties are used:
(a) They shall extend completely around the steel core and shall
be properly anchored;
(b) The diameter of lateral ties shall be greater than 1/50 of the
longest side or 1/50 the diameter of the cross-section; and
(c) The vertical distance between lateral ties shall be less than
half the least width of the cross-section.
6.2.9.7.7 Longitudinal bars not smaller than the lateral
tie bars shall be tied to the lateral ties at a spacing less than half the least
width of the cross-section. A longitudinal bar shall be placed at each corner
of rectangular cross-sections.
6.3 Ultimate Strength Design
A,
gross area of section
As
As'
area of compression reinforcement
Ad
area of reinforcement to develop compressive strength of overhanging flanges in I- and T-sections
Ast
total area of longitudinal reinforcement
At
total area of stirrups for torsion within a distance, s, measured
in a direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement
Au
total area of longitudinal torsional reinforcement
Av
total area of web reinforcement in tension wi thin a distance, s,
measured in a direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement
Avf
required area of shear-friction reinforcement
a
depth of equivalent rectangular stress block, defined by
Clause 6.3.2.2 (h) = k1c
- 2.57- Copyright NRC-CNRC
54
CSA STANDARD A23.3
b'
d'
d"
E
e
e'
depth of equivalent rectangular stress block for balanced

conditions = k1Cb
width of compression face of flexural member
wid th of web in I-and T -sections
thickness of thinnest walls in a' box section
periphery of critical section for shear in slabs and footings
a torsion factor (see Clause 6.3.4.5.2)
. a torsion factor (see Clause 6.3.4.5.2)
distance from extreme compression fibre to neutral axis at
ul tima te strength
distance from extreme compression fibre to neutral axis for
balanced conditions = d(87 ,000)/(87 ,000+fy)
nominal diameter of bar, inches
overall diameter of circular section subjected to combined
axial load and bending
dead loads as defined and stipulated in the National Building
Code of Canada, or their related moment, shear or stress effects
diameter of the circle through centres of reinforcement arranged in a circular pattern
reinforcement
distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of compression reinforcement
distance from plastic centroid to centroid of tension reinforcement
equivalent load or force effects of earthquake as stipulated in
the National Building Code of Canada, or their related
moment, shear or stress effects
eccentricity of axial load at end of member measured from
plastic centroid of the section, calculated by conventional
methods of frame analysis
eccentricity of axial load at end of member measured from the
centroid of the tension reinforcement, calculated by conventional methods of frame analysis
eccentricity of load Ph measured from plastic centroid of section
ratio of splitting tensile strength to the square root of compressive strength (see Clause 5.2.12)
calculated stress in reinforcemen t when less than the yield
strength, fy
ratio of distance between centroid of compression and centroid
of tension to the depth, d
a factor defined in Clause 6.3.2.2(h)
live loads as defined and stipulated in the National Building
Code of Canada, or their related moment, shear or stress effects
bending moment at ultimate load
moment capacity at simultaneous crushing of concrete and
yielding of tension steel (balanced conditions) = Pbeb
torsional moment on a cross-section at ultimate load
torsional moment carried by web reinforcement at ultimate
load
moment capacity under combined axial load and bending
ultimate resisting moment of flexural members
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-158-
m'
N
LO
.t
tr
Pb
Po
:l
u
P
P'
Ph
Pf
Pt
pw
q
S
T
t
U
Uu
Vu
V u'
Veu
Vtu
I
Vtu
Vu
Vu '
W
X
Xl
X2
Y
YI
Y2
(3
if>
f1
55
fy/O.85fo'
m-l
load normal to the croas-section, to be taken as positive for
compression, negative for tension, and to include the effects of
tension due to shrinkage and creep
sum of perimeters of all effective bars crossing the section on
the tension side if of uniform size; for mixed sizes, substitute
4As/D, where As is the total steel area and D is the largest bar
diameter. For bundled bars use the sum of the exposed portions
of the perimeters
axial load capacity at simultaneous crushing of concrete and
yielding of tension steel (balanced conditions)
axial load capacity of actual member when concentrically
loaded
axial load capacity under combined axial load and bending
As/bd
As'/bd
reinforcement ratio producing balanced conditions at ultimate
strength as defined by Formula (54)
Asdb/d
Ast/Ag
As/b'd
Asfy/bd fo'
spacing of stirrups or bent bars in a direction parallel to the
longitudinal reinforcement
momen t, shear or stress effects of con tractions or expansions
caused by-moisture changes, temperature changes or creep
flange thickness in 1- and T-sections (in flexural computations)
overall depth of a rectangular section or diameter of a circular
section (in combined bending and axial load calculations)
total required ultimate strength capacity to resist ultimate
loads or forces or their related moment, shear or stress effects
bond stress at ultimate load
total shear at ultimate load
shear carried by web reinforcement at ultimate load
allowable shear stress carried by concrete at ultimate load
torsional shear stress at ultimate load
proportion of excess shear stress attributed to torsion
shear stress at ultimate load
proportion of excess shear stress attributed to direct shear
wind loads as stipulated in the National Building Code of
Canada, or their related moment, shear or stress effects
the smaller overall dimension of a rectangular section
the smaller dimension of a closed stirrup
the smaller dimension of the hole in a box section
the larger overall dimension of a rectangular section
the larger dimension of a closed stirrup
the larger dimension of the hole in a box section
angle between inclined web bars and longitudinal axis of
member
the angle which the sloping face of a beam makes with the
beam axis
strength variability adjustment factor (see Clause 6.3.2.5)
coefficient of friction
56
CSA STANDARD A23.3
6.3.2 General
6.3.2.1 General
6.3.2.1.1 All provisions of this Standard except those of
Clause 6.2 shall apply to the design of members by ultimate strength method,
unless otherwise specifically provided in this Clause.
6.3.2.1.2 Except as provided in Clause 6.1.3.4, analysis of

indeterminate structures, such as continuous beams, frames, and arches,
shall be based on the assumption of elastic behavior.
6.3.2.1.3 For buildings of usual type of construction,
spans, and story heights approximate methods as provided for in Clause 6.1
are acceptable for determination of moments and shears.
6.3.2.2 Design Assumptions. In the design of reinforced concrete structures by ultimate strength design methods the following assumptions shall be made:
(a) Strain in the concrete shall be assumed directly proportional
to the distance from the neutral axis;
(b) Except in anchored regions, strain in reinforcing bars shall
be assumed equal to the strain in the concrete at the same
position;
(c) The maximum concrete strain at the extreme compression
fibre at ultimate strength shall be assumed equal to 0.003;
(d) Stress in reinforcing bars below the yield strength, fy , for the
grade of steel used shall be taken as 29,000,000 psi times the
steel strain;
(e) For steel strain greater than that corresponding to the design
yield strength, fy , the reinforcement stress shall be considered
independent of strain and equal to the design yield strength,
fy;
(f) Tensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected in flexural

calcula tions ;
(g) As an exception to the requirements of Clauses 6.3.3.1 to
6.3.3.3 inclusive and Clauses 6.3.6.1 to 6.3.6.6 inclusive, the
diagram of compressive concrete stress distribution may be
assumed as any shape which results in predictions of ultimate
strength in reasonable agreement with the results of com prehensi ve tests;
(h) The requirements of Item (g) may be considered satisfied by
the equivalent rectangular concrete stress distribution which
is defined as follows:
(i) At ultimate strength, a concrete stress intensity of
0.85 fe' shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an
equivalent compression zone bounded by the edges of
the cross section and a straight line located parallel to
the neutral axis at a distance a = kl c from the fibre of
maxim urn com pressi ve strain;
(ii) The distance c from the fibre of maximum strain to the
neutral axis is measured in a direction perpendicular
to that axis;
(iii) The fraction kl shall be taken as 0.85 for strength, fe'
up to 4,000 psi and shall be reduced continuously at a
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-260-
'.
57
rate of 0.05 for each 1,000 psi of strength in excess of

4,000 psi.
f
6.3.2.3 Design Str~I).gths for Reinforcement

6.3.2.3.1 The yield strength, fy, as a basis for design,
shall not exceed 75,000 psi.
6.3.2.3.2 When reinforcement having a yield strength fy,

in-excess of 60,000 psi is used, the yield strength to be used in design shall be
reduced to 0.85 fy or 60,000 psi whichever is the greater, unless it is shown
by tension tests that at a proof stress equal to the specified yield strength,
fy, the strain does not exceed 0.003.
6.3.2.4 Load Factors
6.3.2.4.1 Structures and structural components shall be
designed to have total ultimate strength capacities at least equal to the
structural effects of the loads and forces stipulated in the National Building
Code of Canada, combined in such manner and multiplied by such numerical
load factors as stipulated in this Clause.
6.3.2.4.2 Apart from the effects of wind, earthquake,
moisture changes, creep and temperature changes, the total ultimate
strength capacity, U, shall be at least equal to:
U = 1.5D+1.8L
(43)
6.3.2.4.3 For structures or structural components subjected to wind load the total ultimate strength capacity, U, shall be at
least eq ual to:
U = 1.15D+1.35(L+W);
(44)
U = 0.9D+1.35W;
(45)
or, U = 1.5D+1.8W
(46)
whichever is the greatest, except that in any case U shall be not less than
required by Clause 6.3.2.4.2.
6.3.2.4.4 For structures or structural components subjected to earthquake effects, the total ultimate strength capacity, U, shall
be at least equal to:
U = 1.15D+1.35 (L+E);
(47)
U = 1.5D+ 1.8E;
(48)
(49)
or, U = 0.9D+ 1.35E
except that in any case U shall be not less than required by Clause 6.3.2.4.2.
6.3.2.4.5 For structures or structural components subjected to the effects of any or all of moisture changes, temperature changes,
or creep, the total ultimate strength capacity, U, shall be at least equal to:
U = 1.15D+1.35(L+T);
(50)
or, U = 1.5D+ 1.8T
whichever is the greater except that in any case U shall be not less than
required by Clause 6.3.2.4.2.
6.3.2.4.6 For those structures or structural components
subjected to wind effects combined with the effects of any or all of moisture
changes, temperature changes, or creep, the total ultimate strength capacity, U, shall be at least equal to:
U = D+1.20(L+T+W)
(51)
except that in any case U shall be not less than required by Clauses 6.3.2.4.2,
6.3.2.4.3, and 6.3.2.4.5.
- 2.61-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
58
eSA STANDARD A23.3
6.3.2.4.7 For those structures or structural components

subjected to earthquake effects combined with the effects of any or all of
moisture change, temperature change, or creep, the total ultimate strength
capacity, U, shall be at least equal to:
U = D+1.20(L+T+E)
(52)
except that in any case U shall be not less than required by Clause 6.3.2.4.2,
6.3.2.4.4, and 6.3.2.4.5.
6.3.2.4.8 In applying Formulae (43) to (52) inclusive,
the possibility of D, L, T, E, or W having at any time values less than
stipulated for design in the National Building Code of Canada, Section 4.1,
shall be taken into account, if this would result in a more severe loading
condition at any section. *
For example, in a short interior continuous beam flanked by long spans, maximum positive
moment in the short span will result from setting the dead load factor at unity for the long spans.
6.3.2.5 Computed Ultimate Strength Capacity. The computed ultimate strength capacity of a structure or structural component
shall be taken as the strength calculated in accordance with the requirements
and assumptions of Clause 6.3, multiplied by a strength variability adjustment factor, if>; and the value of if> shall be taken as 0.90 for flexure; 0.85 for
diagonal tension, bond and anchorage; and 0.75 for columns.
6.3.2.6 Control of Deflections and Cracking. The computed
deflection of members under full design load shall conform to the provisions
of Clause 6.1.4.4, and deflections shall always be checked whenever the
required net reinforcement ratio p, (p-p'), or (Pw-Pf) in any section of a
flexural member exceeds 0.18f//fy, or whenever the specified yield strength,
f y , exceeds 40,000 psi.
6.3.2.7 Crack Widths. In accordance with Clause 6.1.4.5 crack
widths in members under full design load shall be computed whenever the
specified yield strength exceeds 40,000 psi, and the crack widths shall not
exceed the limits stipulated in Clause 6.1.4.5.
6.3.3 Flexural Computations
6.3.3.1 Rectangular Beams with Tensile Reinforcement
Only
6.3.3.1.1 The ultimate design resisting moment of
rectangular beams with tension reinforcement only shall be calculated by:
Mu = [bd'fo'q(l
O.59q)]
[A'fY(d -~) ]
(53)
where q = pfy/fo' and a = Aefy/0.85f/b.

6.3.3.1.2 The reinforcement ratio, p, shall not exceed
0.75 of the ratio, Ph, which produces balanced conditions at ultimate strength
given by:
Ph = (0.85k 1fe')( 87,000 )
(54)
fy
87,000+fy
6.3.3.2 Rectangular Beams with Compression Reinforcement

6.3.3.2.1 The ultimate design resisting moment in rectangular beams with compression reinforcement shall be calculated by:
Mu
[(A,-A")fy(d-~)+A:fy(d-d')J
where a
(A s -A s ')fy/0.85fc'b.
(55)
rlts
of
:th
;2)
.2,
re,
an
.1,
ng
ive
'Js.
n-
nt
ts
it-
or
xl
1S
le
a
1,
:k
le
)t
It
i)
59
6.3.3.2.2 Formula (55) is valid only when the compression steel reaches the yield strength, fyo at ultimate strength which is
satisfied when:
, > 0 85k 1(L/d')(

87,000 )
p-p - '
ofyd
87,000-fy
(56)
6.3.3.2.3 When (p-p') is less than the value given by

Formula (56), so that the compression steel stress is less than the yield
strength, fy. or when effects of compression steel are neglected, the calculated
ultimate moment shall not exceed that given by Formula (53), except when
a general analysis is made on the basis of the assumptions given in Clause
6.3.2.2.
6.3.3.2.4 The quantity (p-p') shall not exceed 0.75 of
the value Pb given by Formula (54).
6.3.3.2.5 When the compression steel does not yield at
ultimate strength, or when effects of compression steel are neglected, p shall
not exceed 0.75 Pb, except when it is shown by a general analysis that the
tension steel ratio, p, does not exceed 75 per cent of that corresponding to
balanced conditions.
6.3.3.2.6 Balanced conditions exist when, at ultimate
strength of a member, the tension reinforcement reaches its yield strength,
{y, just as the concrete in compression reaches its assumed ultimate strain
of 0.003.
6.3.3.3 I .. and T-Sections
6.3.3.3.1 When the flange thickness equals or exceeds the
depth to the neutral axis, 1.18 qd/k 1 the section may be designed by
Formula (53) with q computed as for a rectangular beam with a width equal
to the overall flange width given by Clause 6.1.4.1.
6.3.3.3.2 When the flange thickness is less than 1.18qd/k1o
the ultimate moment shall not exceed that given by:
M. = 't{(A.-Ad)fy(d -n+A.rfy(d-O.5t)]
(57)
in which Au, the steel area necessary to develop the compressive strength of
overhanging flanges is:
(58)
Ad = 0.85(b - b')tfc' /fy
and,
(59)
6.3.3.3.4 The quantity (Pw-Pf) shall not exceed 0.75 of

the value Pb given by Formula (54).
6.3.3.4 Other Cross Sections
6.3.3.4.1 For other cross sections and for cases of nonsymmetrical bending, the ultimate moment shall be computed by a general
analysis based on the assumptions given in Clause 6.3.2.2.
6.3.3.4.2 The amount of tension reinforcement shall be
so limited that the steel ratio, p, does not exceed 75 per cent of that corresponding to balanced conditions as defined by Clause 6.3.3.2.
- 2.63-Copyright NRC-CNRC
60
CSA STANDARD All.a
6.3.4 Shear and Diagonal Tension

6.3.4.1 Ultimate Flexural Shear Strength Calculation
6.3.4.1.1 The nominal shear stress at ultimate load, as a
measure of diagonal tension *, in reinforcoo concrete members other than
brackets and other short cantilevers shall be computed by:
(a) For members of constant depth
(60)
Vu = Vu/bd
(b) And for members of varying depth
M
VU(ftanp
(61)
Vu =
bd
in which the negative sign applies where the bending moment, M, increases numerically in the same direction as the
depth, d, increases and the positive sign where the moment
decreases in this direction.
*For
brackets and short cantilevers and other situations where pure shear dominates, that is~
where it is inappropriate to consider shear as a measure of diagonal tension, see Clause 6.3.4.8.
6.3.4.1.2 For beams of 1- or T-section, b ' shall be substituted for b in Formulae (60) and (61).
6.3.4.1.3 For design, the shear between the face of the
support and a section a distance, d, therefrom shall not be considered
critical, and the maximum shear shall be considered as that at the section
a distance, d, from the face of the support.
6.3.4.1.4 Wherever applicable, the effects of torsion shall
also be considered (see Clause 6.3.4.5).
6.3.4.1.5 For members subject to flexural shear without
axial load the shear stress* v cu permitted on an unreinforced web shall not
exceed 2 Vfa' unless a more detailed analysis is made in accordance with
the following formula:
I
Vcu = ( 1.9Vfc'+2,500P~ud)
(62)
where, Vcu shall not in any case exceed 3.5v'fl.

Vu and M are the absolute values of shear and bending moment at
the section considered, and
M shall not be taken less than Vud.
*The permissible ultimate shear stresses for lightweight aggregate concrete are given in Clause
6.3.4.10.
6.3.4.1.6 For members subject to shear and axial tension,

Vcu shall not exceed the value given by Formula (63) where N is negative
for tension:
(63)
6.3.4.1.7 For members subject to shear and axial compression, Vcu shall not exceed the value given by Formula (64) where N is
positive for compression:
(64)
vcu
6.3.4.2 Web Reinforcement
6.3.4.2.1 Wherever the value of the ultimate shear stress,
Vu, computed by Formulae (60) or (61) exceeds the shear stress, Vcu . per-
.sa
Ian
50)
51)
10-
:he
mt
he
'ed
on
all
ut
ot
th
2)
se
I,
re
I)
t-
,s
61
mitted for the concrete of an unreinforced web by Clauses 6.3.4.1.3 to

6.3.4.f.7 inclusive, web reinforcement shall be provided to carry the excess.
6.3.4.2.2 Such web reinforcement shall also be provided
for a distance equal to the depth, d, of the member beyond the point theoretically required.
6.3.4.2.3 Web reinforcement between the face of the
support and the section at a distance, d, therefrom shall be the same as
required at that section.6.3.4.2.4 Web reinforcement may consist of:
(a) Stirrups perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement;
(b) Stirrups making an angle of 45 degrees or more with the
longitudinal tension reinforcement;
(c) Longitudinal bars bent so that the axis of the bent bar makes
an angle of 30 degrees or more with the axis of the longitudinal
portion of the bar; or
(d) Combinations of Items (a) or (b) with (c).
6.3.4.2.5 Stirrups or other bars to be considered effective
as web reinforcement shall be anchored at both ends according to the provisions of Clause 6.1.6.2.
6.3.4.3 Stirrups
6.3.4.3.1 The area of steel required in stirrups placed
perpeadicular to the longitudinal reinforcement shall be computed by:
Av = Vu's/fyd
(65)
6.3.4.3.2 The area of inclined stirrups shall be computed
by Formula (67).
6.3.4.4 Bent Bars

6.3.4.4.1 The inclined portion of any longitudinal bar
that is bent up for web reinforcement shall not be considered effective for
that purpose within a distance of four bar diameters from the centre of the
bends at the top and bottom of the inclined portion.
6.3.4.4.2 If the web reinforcement consists of a single
bent bar or a single group of parallel bars all bent up at the same distance
from the support, the required area shall be computed by:
A v -
vr::
Vu '
fysina
(66)
where V u' shall not exceed 3 bd

6.3.4.4.3 If there is a series of parallel bars or groups of
bars bent up at different distances from the support, the required area shall
be computed by:
Vu's
Av = -,....,.--,-.,.------
(67)
fyd (sina +cosa)
6.3.4.4.4 Bent bars used alone as web reinforcement shall
be so spaced that the effective inclined portion defined in Clause 6.3.4.4.1
meets the requirements.of Clause 6.3.4.7.1.
6.3.4.4.5 Where more than one type of web reinforcement
is used to reinforce the same portion of the web:
62
CSA STANDARD A23.3
(a) The total shear resistance shall be computed as the sum of

the resistances computed for the various types separately;
(b) In such computations, the resistance of the concrete, Veu
shall be included only once; and
(c) No one type of reinforcement shall be assumed to resist more
than 2Vu' /3.
6.3.4.5 Torsion
6.3.4.5.1 At ultimate load, sections subject to torsion or
to combined flexure and torsion shall be designed to withstand the twisting
moment due to torsional forces in addition to any other moment or force.
6.3.4.5.2 In the absence of more precise calculations, the
maximum shear stress due to torsion may be computed from Formulae (68),
(69), (70), or (71) as follows:
(a) For rectangular sections:
(i) The maximum shear on the longside of the rectangle
Vtu
C1M
= -tu
x2y
68)
69 )
where C 1 = 3+1.8x/y
(ii) The maximum shear on the short side
Vtu
CM
= -
Vtu
(70)
tu
x2y
where C2 = 2.2+2.6x/y
(b) For T, L, and I sections:
3M tub'
Lx 3y
where the portion of the y dimension which exceeds 6x shall

not be considered for torsion;
(c) For closed box sections:
(71)
6.3.4.5.3 Re-entrant corners of all torsion resisting members shall be provided with suitable fillets.
6.3.4.5.4 If the gross shear stress due to toniion only at
any section exceeds 2 Vf7. torsional reinforcement shall be provided to
resist the excess.
6.3.4.5.5 If a section is subject to transverse shear in
addition to torsion, the sum of the shear stresses calculated separately for
the transverse shear, Formula (60) or (61), and for torsion, Formula (68),
(69), (70), or (71) shall be considered as the maximum unit shear stress at
the section and shall not exceed 2 "\/'f: without web reinforcement except
that where ultimate shear stresses due to torsion are less than 0.4 Vfc'
their effect may be neglected.
6.3.4.5.6 Torsional reinforcement shall consist of transverse closed stirrups and longitudinal bars or equivalent spiral reinforcement, and at least one longitudinal bar shall be placed in each corner of
the stirrups, except that, if y exceeds 2x, bars shall also be provided at the
middle of each long side.
6.3.4.5.7 Longitudinal torsion reinforcement shall be not
less than # 4 in size.
t
63
6.3.4.5.8 The area of stirrups and longitudinal reinforcement required shall be computed using the following formulae:
(a) Closed stirrups, total area of two legs
sMtu'
A _
(72)
t 0.6 </>Xly1f y
(b) Total are of longitudinal torsional reinforcement
A tl
- At(Xl +Yl)
(73)
6.3.4.5.9 For beams subjected to combined transverse

bending and torsion, the web reinforcement required for the transverse shear
and bending shall be added to the reinforcement required for torsion.
6.3.4.5.10 If the sum of the shear stress, v u. and the
torsional shear stress, Vtu. exceeds 2 </>Vf!, except as allowed in Clause
6.3.4.5.5, reinforcement shall be provided to resist the excess, and this excess
stress shall be distributed between the shear and torsion effects in accordance
with the following formulae:
X (excess)
(74)
(75)
~u X (excess)
Vu Vtu
and in computing M tu ' from Vtu' the appropriate formula from Formulae (68)
to (71) shall be used.
6.3.4.5.11 All the stirrups in members subjected to
torsional stresses shall be transverse closed stirrups anchored as described
in Clause 6.1.6.2.6 or by welding to the main reinforcement with sufficient
weld to develop the calculated tensile stress in the bar.
Vtu' =
6.3.4.6 Stress Restrictions-Members with Web Reinforcement

6.3.4.6.1 The specified yield point for stirrup reinforcement shall not exceed 49,000 psi.
6.3.4.6.2 In members with web rein forcem en t for shear
and torsion the sum of the shear stresses Vu and Vtu shall not exceed 11 </>Vf!
provided Vu does not exceed 10</>v'f7.
6.3.4.7 Web Reinforcement Restrictions

6.3.4.7.1 Where web reinforcement is required, it shall be
so spaced that every 45-degree line, representing a potential diagonal crack
and extending from middepth, d/2, of the member of the longitudinal tension
bars, shall be crossed by at least one line of web reinforcement and when the
shear stress, Vu, exceeds 6 </>Vf:!. every such line shall be crossed by at least
two lines of web reinforcement.
6.3.4.7.2 Where web reinforcement is required, its area
shall be not less than 0.15 per cent of the area, bs, computed as the product
of the width of the web and the spacing of the web reinforcement along the
longitudinal axis of the member.
6.3.4.8 Shear Friction

6.3.4.8.1 The special prOVISIOns of this Clause apply
where pure shear dominates*, so that it is inappropriate to consider shear
as a measure of diagonal tension.
*For example, such situations may be found in brackets and short cantilevers.
64
CSA STANDARD A23.3
6.3.4.8.2 A crack shall be assumed to occur along the

shear path. Relative shear displacement shall be considered resisted by
friction maintained by shear-friction reinforcement across the crack; this
reinforcement shall be approximately perpendicular to the assumed crack.
6.3.4.8.3 The ultimate shear stress, v u shall not exceed
1007.
6.3.4.8.4 The required area of shear-friction reinforcement, Ave. shall be computed by:
Vu
(76)
fY/Iwhere the yield strength, fy , shall not be assumed greater than 60,000 psi:
and the coefficient of friction, /1-, shall be 1.0 for concrete to concrete, and
0.7 for as-rolled structural steel to concrete.
6.3.4.8.5 Direct tension across the assumed crack shall
be provided for by additional reinforcement.
6.3.4.8.6 The shear-friction reinforcement shall be adequately anchored on both sides of the assumed crack, by embedment,
hooks, or welding to special devices.
6.3.4.8.7 When concrete is placed against hardened
concrete to transfer shear, the interface shall be rough with a full double
amplitude (that is minimum depth of valleys of approximately,%: inch).
6.3.4.8.8 When-shear is transferred between as-rolled
steel and concrete, the steel shall be clean and without paint, and the
concrete shall be cast directly against the steel.
6.3.4.9 Shear Stress in Slabs and Footings*
For transfer of moments and effect of openings see Clause 6.1.7.1.
6.3.4.9.1 The shear strength of slabs and footings in the

vicinity of concentrated loads or concentrated reactions is governed by the
more severe of two conditions:
(a) Slab or footing acting essentially as a wide beam, with a
potential diagonal crack extending in a plane across the
entire width which case shall be considered in accordance
with Clause 6.3.4.1; or
(b) Two-way action existing for the slab or footing, with potential
diagonal cracking along the surface of a truncated cone or
pyramid around the concentrated load or reaction and the
slab or footing in this case shall be designed as specified in
the remainder of this Clause.
6.3.4.9.2 The critical section for shear to be used as a
measure of diagonal tension shall be perpendicular to the plane of the slab
and located at a distance d/2 out from the periphery of the concentrated
load or reaction area.
6.3.4.9.3 The nominal shear stress at ultimate load shall
be computed by:
Vu = Vu/bod
(77)
in which Vu and b o are taken at the critical section specified in Clause
6.3.4.9.2 and the shear stress, Vu so computed shall not exceed 4v'f c'
unless shear reinforcement is provided in accordance with Clause 6.3.4.9.4
in which case Vu shall not exceed 6 VV.
e
y
s
:I
65
6.3.4.9.4 When Vu exceeds 4if>Vfe' shear reinforcement

shall De provided in accordance with- Clauses 6.3.4.2 to 6.3.4.7 inclusive,
except that the design yield strength, fy , for the shear reinforcement shall be
50 per cent of that prescribed in Clause 6.3.4.6.
6.3.4.9.5 Shear reinforcement consisting of bars, rods, or
wires shall not be considered effective in members with a total thickness of
less than 10 inches.
6.3.4.10 Structural Lightweight Aggregate Concretes
6.3.4.10.1 When structural lightweight aggregate concretes are used, the provisions of Clause 6.3 shall apply with the following
modifica tions:
(a) The limiting value for Veu and in Clauses 6.3.4.1.5, 6.3.4.5.4,
and 6.3.4.5.10:
0.3 if>F IPv!f7
(78)
(b) Formula (62) shall be replaced by:
Ven = if> ( 0.28F'PVfe/+2,500Pw~ud)
(79)
(c) Formula (63) shall be replaced by:

Veu = 0.3 if>FspVfc' (1 +0.002 N/Ag)
(80)
(d ) Form ula (64) shall be replaced by:
Veu = 0.3if>FspVfc'(1+0.001 N/A,)
(81)
(e) The limiting value for shearing stress in slabs and footings, Vu
in Clauses 6.3.4.9.3 and 6.3.4.9.4 shall be:
0.62 if> FspVC/
(82)
and with web reinforcement
0.94if> FspVfc'
(83)
6.3.4.10.2 Where F ,P has not been determined, permissible values for shear and torsion on an unreinforced web shall be calculated using the formulae for normal weight concrete given in Clauses
6.3.4.1 to 6.3.4.9 multiplied by 0.75 for all-lightweight concrete, and 0.85
for sand-lightweight concrete*.
*This prOTJision is not intended to apply to concrete weighing less than 95 pounds per cubic
(oot dry.
6.3.5 Bond and Anchorage

6.3.5.1 Ultimate Bond Stress
6.3.5.1.1 In flexural members in which the tension reinforcement is parallel to the compression face:
(a) Flexural bond stress at any cross section shall be computed
by:
Uu =
if>r~jd
(84)
(b) Bent-up bars that are not more than d/3 from the level of the
main longitudinal reinforcement may be included; and
(c) Critical sections occur at the face of the support, at each
point where tension bars terminate within a span, and at the
point of inflection.
6.3.5.1.2 To prevent bond failure or splitting, the calculated tension or compression in any bar at any section must be developed
66
eSA STANDARD A23.3
on each side of that section by proper embedment length, and anchorage,

or, for tension only, hooks.
-
6.3.5.1.3 Anchorage or development bond stress, uu.
shall be computed as the bar force, computed from M/ <p, divided by the
product of ~o times the embedment length.
6.3.5.1.4 The bond stress uu. computed as in Clauses
6.3.5.1.1 to 6.3.5.1.3 shall not exceed the following limits, except that
flexural bond stress need not be considered in compression, nor in those
cases of tension where anchorage bond is less than 0.8 of the permissible:
(a) For tension bars with sizes and deformations conforming to
CSA Standard G30.6, Minimum Requirements for the
Deformations of Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement:
7 Vr:
(1') T op b ars * 6. D
or 560 pSI.
v1:' or 800 pSI.

(1'1') B ars oth er t h an top b ars 9.5 D
(b) For tension bars with sizes and deformations conforming to
CSA Standard G30. 7, Special Large Size Deformed Bil1etSteel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement:
(i) Top bars* 4.2Vfc'
(ii) Bars other than top bars 6Vfc'
(c) For all deformed compression bars; and
13vf/ or 800 psi
(d) For plain bars, the allowable bond stresses shall be one-half
those permitted for bars conforming to CSA Standard
G30.6, l\1inimum Requirements for the Deformations of
Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, but not
more than 250 psi.
*Top bars, in reference to bond, are horizontal bars so placed that more than 12 inches of concrete
6.3.5.1.5 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for the

tension reinforcement in all flexural members to which Formula (84) does
not apply, such as sloped, steeped or tapered footings, brackets or beams
in which the tension reinforcement is not parallel to the compression face.
6.3.6 Combined Axial Compression and Bending
6.3.6.1 Definitions
6.3.6.1.1 The plastic centroid of a section is the centroid
of the resistance to load computed for the assumptions that the concrete is
stressed uniformly to 0.85 fo' and the steel is stressed uniformly to fy; for
symmetrically reinforced members, the plastic centroid will correspond to
the centroid of the cross section.
6.3.6.1.2 Balanced conditions exist when, at ultimate
strength of a member, the tension reinforcement reaches its yield stress just
as the concrete in compression reaches its assumed ultimate strain of 0.003.
6.3.6.2 General Requirements

6.3.6.2.1 All members subjected to a compression load
shall be designed for the eccentricity, e, corresponding to the maximum
CODE FOR THE DESIGN OF PLAIN OR REINFORCED CONCIlETE STRUcrURES

~e,
lu.
he
,es
at
,se
to
he
n-
to
~t-
moment which can accompany this loading condition in service, but not
less than O.OSt for spirally reinforced columns or 0.10t for tied columns
about either principal axis.
6.3.6.2.2 The maximum load capacities for members
subject to axial load as determined"by the requirements of this Clause
apply only to short members and shall be reduced for the effects of length
according to the requirements of Clause 6.1.S.S.
6.3.6.2.3 Members subjected to small compressive loads
may be designed for the maximum moment, Pue, in accordance with the
provisions of Clauses 6.3.3.1 to 6.3.3.4 and disregarding the axial load, but
the resulting section shall have a capacity, P b, greater than the applied
compressive load.
6.3.6.3 Bending and Axial Load Capacity of Short Members

-Rectangular Sections with Bars in One or Two Faces
6.3.6.3.1 The ultimate strength of short members subject to combined bending and axial load shall be computed from the equations of equilibrium, which may be expressed as follows when a is not more
than t and the reinforcement is in one or two faces, each parallel to the axis
of bending and all the reinforcement in anyone face is located at approximately the same distance from the axis of bending
(8S)
P u = </>(0.8Sf e'ba+A.'fy-A.f.)
P ue' =
llf
rd
of
::>t
~te
67"
ct{O.8Sf.'ba(d -~) + A.'fy(d - d ')]
(86)
6.3.6.3.2 Strain compatibility calculations shall be used

to insure that the compression steel will actually yield at ultimate strength
of a member as assumed in Formulae (8S), (86), (87), (88), (89), (90),
and (94).
6.3.6.3.3 The balanced load, Pb. shall be computed using
Formula (8S) with a = ab = k1Cb. and f. = fy.
6.3.6.3.4 The balanced moment, M b. shall be computed by:
Mb
Pbeb
,t{O.8Sf.'ba
b(
d -d" -
~b )+A.'fy(d -d' -d") + A.f.,d ,,]
(87)
6.3.6.3.5.
:s
IS
e.
d
is
Ir
o
e
it
I.
(a) The ultimate capacity of a member is controlled by tension

in Item (b) when P u is less than P b (or e is greater than eb)
and; by compression in (c) when P u is greater than P b (or
e is less than eb);
(b) (i) When a section is controlled by tension, and has reinforcement in one or two faces, each parallel to the axis
of bending, and all the reinforcement in anyone face is
located at approximately the same distance from the
axis of bending, the ultimate strength shall be computed by:
P u = </>[0.8Sf e'bd {p'm' - pm + (1-e'/d)
tJ
+v (l-e' Id)2+2[(e'/d) (pm - p'm')+p'm'(I-d'/d)]

(88)
(ii) For symmetrical reinforcement in two faces, this reduces
to:
P u = </>[ 0.8Sfe'bd ~ - p+ l-e'/d
+ v(1--e' /d)2+2p[m'(1-d' jd)+e'/d]
- 2.71-
tJ
Copyright NRC-CNRC
(89)
68
CSA STANDARD A23.3
(iii) With no compression reinforcement, Formula (88)

reduces to:
p.
(c)
{0.85f.'bd[ -pm+1-e'l.rl+~(1-e'/d)'+2e'~m ]}(90)
(i) When a section is controlled by compression, the

ultimate load shall be assumed to decrease linearly from
Po to P b as the moment is increased from zero to M b.
where
Po = 4>[O.85fc'(Ag-A.t)+Aatfy]
(91)
(ii) For this assumption the ultimate strength is given by
either Formula (92) or (93):
0/::)
-1]e/eb
(92)
P u = 1 + [(P
P u = Po-(Po-Pb)Mu/Mb
(93)
(iii) For symmetrical reinforcement in single layers parallel
to the axis of bending, the approximate value of P u
given by Formula (94) may be used:
A.'fy +
btfc/
]
2
(94)
P u = 4> [ .d~d,+O.5 (3te/d ) + 1.18
6.3.6.4 Bending and Axial Load of Short MembersCircular Sections With Bars Circularly Arranged. The ultimate
strength of short circular members subject to combined bending and axial
load shall be computed on the basis of the equations of equilibrium taking
into account inelastic deformations, or by the empirical expressions given by:
(a) When tension controls:
Pu =
{0.85f.'O{~(o.ge -0.38)' +prsg_(o.ge -0.38)]}
(95)
(b) When compression controls:

Pu
A.tfy +
Agfe'
]
4> 3e
9.6De
[ D.+l (O.8D+O.67D.)2+1.18
(96)
6.3.6.5 Bending and Axial Load of Short Members-Square

Sections With Bars Circularly Arranged. The ultimate strength of short
square members with bars circularly arranged subject to combined bending
and axial load shall be computed on the basis of the equations of equilibrium
taking into account inelastic deformations, or by the following empirical
expressions:
(a) When tension controls:
Pu =
1>{0.85btf.{~r-;-(i---O.5-:--r-+O-.6--=7~""-P-~-(i-o.5 )]}
(97)
(b) When compression controls:
Astfy +
P u = if> 3e
[ D. +1
Agfe'
12te
(t+O.67D.p+1.18
-272-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
(98)
8)
0)
69
6.3.6.6 Bending and Axial Load of Short MembersGeneral Case. When the reinforcement is placed in all four faces, or in
faces which are not parallel to the axis of bending, the design shall be based
on computations considering stress and strain compatibility and using the
assumptions in Clause 6.3.2.2.
Ie
tIl
b.
L)
y
!)
e
I
7. CONCRETE JOIST FLOOR CONSTRUCTION

v 0 = shear stress carried by concrete (working stress design)
v ou = shear stress carried by concrete at ultimate load
7.2 Details of Concrete Joist Floor Construction

7.2.1 In concrete joist floor construction consisting of concrete joists
and slabs placed monolithically with or without burned clay or concrete tile
fillers:
(a) Joists shall be not farther apart than 30 inches face to face; and
(b) Ribs shall be straight, not less than 4 inches wide, and of a depth
not more than three times the width.
7.2.2 When burned clay or concrete tile fillers of material having a unit
compressive strength at least equal to that of the specified strength of the
concrete in the joists are used:
(a) Vertical shells of the fillers in contact with the joists may be included in the calculations involving shear or negative bending
moment; and
(b) No other portion of the fillers may be included in the design calculations.
7.2.3 The concrete slab over the fillers shall be not less in thickness than:
(a) 1~ inches in thickness; or
(b) 1/12 of the clear distance between joists.
7.2.4 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be provided in

the slab at right angles to the joists and the reinforcement ratio shall be at
least equal to that stipulated in Clause 5.2.7.
7.2.5 Where removable forms or fillers not complying with Clause 7.2.2
are used:
(a) The thickness of the concrete shall be not less than 1/12 of the clear
distance between joists and in no case less than 2 inches;
(b) Such slab shall be reinforced at right angles to the joists with at
least the amount of reinforcement required for flexure, giving due
consideration to concentration, if any; but
(c) In no case shall the reinforcement ratio be less than that required
by Clause 5.2.7.
7.2.6 When the finish used as a wearing surface is placed monolithically

with the structural slab in buildings of the warehouse or industrial class, the
thickness of the concrete over the fillers shall be ~ inch greater than the
thickness used for design purposes.
7.2.7 All conduits or pipes located in the slab shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of Clause 5.2.9.
- 2.73-Copyright NRC-CNRC
70
CSA STANDARD A23.3
7.2.8 Shrinkage reinforcement in the slab parallel to the joists may be

omitted ..
7.2.9 Where load concentrations are assumed to be distributed on not

more than two joists, bridging may be omitted.
7.2.10 The allowable shear stress, v e , or vou may be increased 10 per
cent over those prescribed in Clauses 6.2.7.1,6.2.7.10,6.3.4.1, or 6.3.4.10,
provided that bridging is used and spaced as follows:
(a) (i) One in the centre of spans 20 feet to 30 feet long; and
(ii) Two at the third points of spans over 30 feet long;
(b) Have a minimum width of 4 inches, a depth not less than 2/3 of the
depth of the joist, and a gross moment of inertia of the stem of the
diaphragm at least equal to the gross moment of inertia of the stem
of the joist; and
(c) Be reinforced with at least one # 4 bar top and bottom.
7.2.11 The requirements of Clauses 7.2.9 and 7.2.10 shall apply except
where unusual concentrations of loading are to be designed for, in which
case special design calculations shall be made.
8. TWO-WAY SYSTEMS WITH SUPPORTS ON FOUR SIDES

a
A
b'
B
=
=
CAneg CBneg
CAD C BD
CAL CBL
MAneg MBneg
MADpoS MBDPOS
=
=
MALPOS MBLPOS
A
m = B
clear span of supporting beam (ins.)

length of clear span of a two-way slab in short
direction
width of beam stem (inch)
length of clear span of a two-way slab in the long
direction
moment coefficients for negative moments in spans
A and B respectively
moment coefficients for positive dead load
moments in spans A and B respectively
moment coefficients for positive live load moments
in spans A and B respectively
negative moments in spans A and B respectively
positive dead load moments in spans A and B
respectively
positive live load moments in spans A and B
respectively
ratio of short to long span of a two-way slab
=
t,
w
overall thickness of a beam supporting a two-way

slab (inch)
= overall thickness of a two-way slab (inch)
= total uniform load (live plus dead) per square foot
of slab
= uniform dead load per square foot of slab
uniform live load per square foot of slab
8.2 Application. The provisions of this Clause 8 apply to two-way systems

supported on four sides and reinforced in two directions, including:
(a) Solid reinforced concrete slabs;
e
t
r
I,
71
(b) Concrete joists with fillers of hollow concrete units or clay tile, with
- or without concrete top slabs; and
(c) Concrete joists with top slabs placed monolithically with the joists.
8.3 Support Conditions. The slab shall be supported by walls or beams
on all sides and if not securely attached to supports shall be reinforced as
specified in Clause 8.4.
8.4 Corner Reinforcement. Where the slab is not securely attached to
the supporting beams or walls, to prevent corners from lifting, special
reinforcement shall be provided at exterior corners in both the bottom and
top of the slab, as follows:
(a) Reinforcement shall be provided for a distance in each direction
from the corner equal to 1/5 the longest span;
(b) Reinforcement in the top of the slab shall be placed parallel to the
diagonal from the corner or may consist of reinforcement placed in
two directions parallel to the sides of the slab;
(c) Reinforcement in the bottom of the slab shall be placed at right
angles to the diagonal or may consist of bars placed in two directions
parallel to the sides of the slab; and
(d) Reinforcement in each band shall be of equivalent size and spacing
to that required for the maximum positive moment in the slab.
8.5 General Design Requirements. The slab and its supports shall be
designed by methods which take into account:
(a) Effect of continuity and fixity at the supports;
(b) Ratio of wid th to length of the panel; and
(c) Effect of two-way action.
8.6 Minimum Slab Thickness. In no case shall the thickness, ts of cast
in place slabs be:
(a) Less than 4 inches;
(b) Less than the perimeter of the slab divided by 180 in the case of
discontinuous slabs; or
(c) Less than the perimeter of the slab divided by 200 in the case of
fully continuous slabs.
8.7 Maximum Spacing of Reinforcemen t. For solid slab construction
the centre to centre spacing of reinforcement shall be not greater than three
times the slab thickness or greater than 18 inches.
8.8 Two-Way Ribbed Construction. In two-way ribbed construction,
Clauses 7.2.2 to 7.2.7 shall apply, except that, where reinforcement is called
for in one direction it shall be provided in two directions.
8.9 Acceptable Design Method
8.9.1 The method of design given in this Clause satisfies the requirements of Clause 8.5, where dimensions of the supporting beams are such
that the following criterion is satisfied:
b't 3
~ not less than 2.0
(99)
ats
72
eSA STANDARD All.3
8.9.2 A two-way slab shall be considered as consisting of strips in each

direction as follows:
(a) A middle strip ~ panel in width, symmetrical about the panel
centreline and extending through the panel in the direction in which
moments are considered; and
(b) A column strip ~ panel in width, occupying the two quarter-panel
areas outside the middle strip.
8.9.3 Where the ratio, m, of short to long span is less than 0.5 the slab
shall be considered as a one-way slab, but negative reinforcement as required
for a short to long span ratio of 0.5 shall be provided along the short side.
8.9.4 Except as required by Clause 8.4 at discontinuous edges of twoway slabs, a negative moment ~ of the positive moment shall be assumed.
8.9.5 Critical sections for moment shall be assumed as follows:
(a) For negative moment-along the edges of the panel at the faces
of the supports; and
(b) For positive moment-along the centrelines of the panels.
8.9.6 Negative bending moments per foot in width for the middle
strips shall be computed by the use of Formulae (100) and (101) along with
the coefficients given in Table 5:
MAneg = CAnegXwXA2
(100)
MBneg = CBnegXwXB2
(101)
8.9.7 Positive bending moments per foot of width shall be computed as
the sum of Formulae (102) and (104) for the middle strip in the direction of
span A and Formulae (103) and (105) for the middle strip in the direction of
span B, using the coefficients given in Table 6 (the moments thus obtained
take into account the most disadvantageous case of live load in alternate
spans) :
(102)
MALPOS = C AL XwzXA2
(103)
MBLPOS = C BL X WlXB2
(104)
MADpoS
CAD XWdXA2
(105)
MBDPOS = C BD XWdXB2
8.9.8 The bending moments in the column strips shall be gradually
reduced from the full value at the edge of the middle strip to one-third of
these values at the edge of the panel.
8.9.9 Where the negative moment on one side of a support is less than
80 per cent of that on the other side, the difference shall be distributed between the two slabs in proportion to their relative stiffnesses.
8.9.10 The shearing stresses in the slabs shall be computed on the
assumption that the load, w, is distributed to the supports in accordance
with Clause 8.10.
8.10 Loads on Slab Supports
8.10.1 The loads on the supporting beams of a two-way rectangular
panel may be assumed as the load within the tributary areas of the panel
bounded by the intersection of 45-degree lines from the corners with the
median line of the panel parallel to the long side.
73
8.JO.2 The bending moments in the supporting beams may be determined approximately by using an equivalent uniform load per lineal foot
of beam for each panel supported, as follows:
wA
For the short span: 3
(106)
~l
wA (3
For the long span:
(107)
TABLE 5
COEFFICIENTS FOR NEGATIVE MOMENTS

(Formin~ Part of Clause 8.9.6)
(MAne~
m=
A/B Coeff.
C ... neg
1.00 CBneg
CAneg
0.95 CBneg
C. P
~C::I
--
r:r d
0 C
0.050 0.075 0.071

0.033 0.061
0.045
0.071 0.061 0.033
0.045 0.076 0.050
0.050
- 0.055 0.079
0.041 0.072 0.045
0.075
-
- 0.038 0.065
0.067 0.056 0.029
--
0.043 0.068
0.055
- 0.060 0.080 0.079
0.036 0.070 0.040
- 0.062 0.052 0.025
CAneg
0.85 CBneg
0.049 0.072
0;060
0.066 0.082 0.083
0.031 0.065 0.034
- 0.057 0.046 0.021
CAneg
0.80 CBneg
--
0.065
- 0.071 0.084 0.086 - 0.055 0.075
0.051 0.041 0.017
0.026 0.061 0.029
CAneg
0.75 CBneg
0.069
0.022 0.056
CAneg
0.90 CBneg
CAneg
0.70 CBneg
= CAneg x w x A2; MBneg = CBneg x w x B2)
CASE I CASE 2 CASE 3 CASE 4 CASES CASE 6 CASE 7 CASE 8 CASE 9
CAneg
0.65 CBneg
CAneg
0.60 CBneg
0.55
CAneg
CBneg
0.50
CAneg
CBneg
--
0.085 0.088
0.061 0.078
0.044 0.036 0.014
0.074
- 0.068 0.081
"- 0.081 0.086 0.091 0.038
0.029 0.011
0.017 0.050 0.019
-
0.085 0.087 0.093

0.077
- 0.074 0.083
0 .014 0.043 0.015
- 0.031 0.025 0.008
0.084
- 0.092 0.089 0.09E
0.007 0.028 0.008
0.019
0.085 0.086
0.014 0.005
0.086
- 0.094 0.090 0.097
0.006 0.022 0.006
-
I 0.014
0.089 0.088
0.010 0.003
0.089 0.088
0.0811
0.010 0.035 0.011
-
-277-
0.09~
....
0.080 0.085
0.024 0.018 0.006
Copyright NRC-CNRC
74
eSA STANDARD A23.3
TABLE 6
COEFFICIENTS FOR LIVE AND DEAD LOAD POSITIVE MOMENTS
M,A.LPOS
MBI.pos
=
=G uXX
G ..
BL
WL
X A2
X B2
MADPOS
MBDPC?S
=GGAD XX WD
X A2
=
WD X B2
BD
CASE I CASE 2 CASE 3 CASE 4 CASES CASE 6 CASE 1 CASES CASE 9

mB
AlB Coeff.
AD
C. 0
r:r d
0 C
GAL
GAD
G SL
G BD
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.027
0.018
0.027
0.018
0.027
0.018
0.032
0.02'1
0.032
0.02'1
0.032
0.02'1
0.032
0.02'1
0.027
0.018
0.035
0.033
0.032
0.02'1
0.032
0.02'1
0.035
0.033
0.028
0.020
0.030
0.023
0.030
0.023
0.028
0.020
0.95
GAL
GAD
GaL
G BD
0.040
O.NG
0.033
0.033
0.030
0.020
0.025
0.016
0.031
0.021
0.029
0.025
0.035
0.030
0.029
0.024
0.034
0.028
0.024
0.015
0.038
0.036
0.029
0.024
0.036
0.031
0.032
0.031
0.031
0.022
0.027
0.021
0.032
0.024
0.025
0.01'1
0.90
GAL
GAD
G BL
G nD
0.045
0.045
0.029
0.029
0.034
0.022
0.022
0.014
0.035
0.025
0.027
0.024
0.039
0.033
0.026
0.022
0.037
0.029
0.021
0.013
0.042
0.039
0.025
0.021
0.040
0.035
0.029
0.028
0.035
0.025
0.024
0.019
0.036
0.026
0.022
0.015
0.85
GAL
GAD
G BL
GUD
0.050
0.050
0.026
0.026
0.037
0.024
0.019
0.012
0.040
0.029
0.024
0.023
0.043
0.036
0.023
0.019
0.041 0.046
0.031 0.042
0.019 0.022
0.011 0.01'1
0.045
0.040
0.026
0.02~,
0.040
0.029
0.022
0.01'1
0.039
0.028
0.020
0.013
0.80
GAL
GAD
GaL
GaD
0.055
0.055
0.023
0.023
0.041
0.026
0.017
0.011
0.045
0.034
0.022
0.029
0.048
0.039
0.020
0.016
0.044
0.032
0.016
0.009
0.051
0.045
0.019
0.014
0.051
0.045
0.023
0.022
0.044
0.032
0.019
0.015
0.042
0.029
0.017
0.010
0.75
GAL
GAD
G BL
CaD
0.061
0.061
0.019
0.019
0.045
0.028
0.014
0.009
0.051
O.NG
0.019
0.018
0.052
0.043
0.016
0.013
0.047
0.033
0.013
0.00'1
0.055
0.048
0.016
0.012
0.056
0.051
0.020
0.020
0.049
0.036
0.016
0.013
0.046
0.031
0.014
0.00'1
0.70
GAL
GAD
G BL
G BD
0.068
0.068
0.016
0.016
0.049
0.030
0.012
0.00'1
0.057
0.046
0.016
0.016
0.057
0.046
0.014
0.011
0.051
0.035
0.011
0.005
0.060
0.051
0.013
0.009
0.063
0.058
0.017
0.01'1
0.054
0.040
0.014
0.011
0.050
0.033
0.012
0.006
0.65
GAL
GAD
G BL
G BD
0.074
0.0'14
0.013
0.013
0.053
0.032
0.010
0.006
0.064
0.054
0.014
0.014
0.06~
0.050
0.011
0.009
0.055
0.036
0.009
0.004
0.064
0.053
0.010
0.00'1
0.070
0.065
0.014
0.014
0.059
0.044
0.011
0.009
0.054
0.034
0.009
0.005
GAL
GAD
GaL
G BD
0.081
0.081
0.010
0.010
0.058
0.034
0.007
0.004
0.072
0.062
0.011
0.011
0.053
0.009
0.00'1
0.059
0.03'1
0.007
0.003
0.068
0.056
0.008
0.006
0.077
0.0'13
0.011
0.012
0.065
0.048
0.009
0.00'1
0.059
0.036
0.007
0.004
GAL
GAD
G BL
G BD
0.088
0.088
0.008
0.008
0.062
0.035
0.006
0.003
0.080
0.0'11
0.009
0.009
O.OSE
0.007
0.005
0.063
0.038
0.005
0.002
0.073
0.058
0.006
0.004
0.085
0.081
0.009
0.009
0.070
0.052
0.007
0.005
0.063
0.03'1
0.006
0.003
GAL
GAD.
G BL
GaD
0.095
0.095
0.006
0.006
0.066
0.03'1
0.004
0.002
O.OSB
0.08CJ
0.007
0.00'1
0.059
0.005
0.004
0.067
0.039
0.004
0.001
0.078
0.061
0.005
0.003
0.092
0.089
0.007
0.00'1
0.076
0.056
0.005
0.004
0.067
0.038
0.004
0.002
1.00
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.06~
0.07~
0.07~
r
I
CODE .FOR THE DESIGN OF PLAIN OR REINFORCED CONCRETE STltUCTUltES
75
,. FLA_T SLABS WITH SQUARE OR RECTANGULAR PANELS

'9.1 Notations. The following notations apply in this Clause:
distance in the direction of span from centre of support to the
intersection of the centre line of the slab thickness with the
extreme 45 degree diagonal line lying wholly within the concrete
section of slab or other support, including drop panel, capital
and bracket
bo
periphery of critical section for shear
c
effective support size (see Clause 9.7.3)
d
reinforcement
F
as defined in Clauses 9.4(a) and 9.7.6.1
f
as defined in Clause 9.7.2.2
fe'
fy
H
storey height in feet of the column or support of a fiat slab
cen tre to centre of slabs
h
distance from top of slab to bottom of capital
Ie
as defined in Clause 9.7.2.1(a)
K
ratio of moment of inertia of column provided to 10 required
by Formula (109)
L
span length of a fiat slab panel centre to centre of supports
Ll
L2
Mo
numerical sum of assumed positive and average negative
moments at the critical design sections of a fiat slab panel
Rn
factor for increasing negative moment (Clause 9.7, Formula
(110) )
Rp
factor for increasing positive moment (Clause 9.7, Formula
(111) )
t
thickness in inches of slab at centre of panel
tl
thickness in inches of slab without drop panels, or through drop
panel, if any
t2
thickness in inches of slab with drop panels at points beyond
the drop panel
W
total dead and live load on panel
W D = total dead load on panel
W L = total live load on panel, uniformly distributed
w' = uniformly distributed unit dead and live load
A
9.2 Definitions. The following definitions apply in this Clause:

Flat slab means a concrete slab, reinforced in two or more directions,
generally without beams or girders to transfer the loads to supporting
members;
Column capital means an enlargement of the end of a column designed
and built to act as an integral unit with the column and fiat slab;
Drop panel means the structural portion of a fiat slab which is thickened throughout an area surrounding the column, column capital or bracket;
Panel strips means a fiat slab shall be considered as consisting of strips
in each direction as follows:
(a) A middle strip one-half panel in width, symmetrical about panel
centre line; and
76
CSA STANDARD A23.3
(b) A column strip consisting of the two adjacent quarter-panels, one

each side of the column centre line.
9.3 General
9.3.1 Slabs. Slabs with recesses or pockets made by permanent or
removable fillers between reinforcing bars may be considered flat slabs.
Slabs with panelled ceilings may be considered as flat slabs provided the
panel of reduced thickness lies entirely within the area of intersecting middle
strips, and is at least two-thirds the thickness of the remainder of the slab,
exclusive of the drop panel, and is not less than 4 inches thick.
9.3.2 Column Capital. No portion of the column capital shall be

considered for structural purposes which lies outside of the largest right
circular cone with 90-degree vertex angle that can be included within the
outlines of the column capital. Where no capital is used, the face of the
column shall be considered as the edge of the capital.
9.4 Ultimate Strength Design of Flat Slabs. Flat slabs shall be proportioned by Clause 6.2 only, except that Clause 6.3 may be used if the
following modifications are made in the design:
(a) For either empirical or elastic analysis the numerical sum of the
positive and negative bending moments in the direction of either
side of a rectangular panel shall be assumed as not less than:
0.10WLF( 1- ~~)2
Mo
(108)
in which F
1.1S-c/L but not less than 1;
(b) The thickness of slab shall be not less than shown in Table 7
where span L is the longest side of the panel.
TABLE 7*
THICKNESS OF SLAB
(Forming part of Clauses 9.4, 9.5.3.4, 9.5.3.5, and 9.7.4.1)
fy
40,000
50,000
60,000
75,000
With Drop Panelst
L/40
L/36
L/33
L/28
or
or
or
or
4
4
4
4
inches t
inches
inches
inches
Without Drop Panels
L/36
L/33
L/30
L/26
or
or
or
or
5
5
5
5
inches:
inches
inches
inches
.. Notwithstanding the requirements of Table 7, any slab which has been analyzed for deflection
including creep deflections may be considered to meet the requirements of this Standard if the
computed deflections increased by ~ satisfies the deflection limits of Clause 6.1.4.4, except
that, in no case shall the minimum thickness be less than 4 inches with drop panels or 5 inches
without drop panels.
tTo be considered effective, the drop panel shall have a length of at least one-third the parallel
span length and a projection below the slab of at least one-fourth the slab thickness.
:Span L to be taken as the length of the longest side of the panel.
9.5 General Design Requirements

9.5.1 Methods of Analysis. All flat slab structures shall be designed
in accordance with a recognized elastic analysis subject to the limitations of
this Clause and Clause 9.6, except that the empirical method of design
given in Clause 9.7 may be used for the design of flat slabs conforming with
me
or
bs.
he
He
lb,
be
'ht
:he
he
ro-
he
he
ler
)8)
~on
the
e.pt
~es
llel
ed
of
5n
th
77
the liITlitations given therein. Flat slabs within the limitations of Clause 9.7,
when designed by elastic analysis, may have resulting analytical moments
reduced in such proportion that the numerical sum of the positive and
average negative bending moments used in design procedure does not exceed
the sum of the corresponding values as determined from Table 9.
9.5.2 Critical Sections. The slab shall be proportioned for the bending
moments prevailing at every section except that the slab need not be proportioned for a greater negative moment than that prevailing at a distance
A from the support centre line.
9.5.3 Size and Thickness of Slabs and Drop Panels
9.5.3.1 Subject to the limitations of Clause 9.5.3.4 the thickness
of a flat slab and the size and thickness of the drop panel, where used, shall
be such that the compression due to bending at any section, and the shear
about the column, column capital, and drop panel shall not exceed those
permitted in Clause 6.2 or Clause 6.3. When designed under Clause 9.7,
three-fourths of the width of the strip shall be used as the width of the
section in computing compression due to bending, except that on a section
through a drop panel, three-fourths of the width of the drop panel, shall be
used. Account shall be taken of any recesses which reduce the compressive
area.
9.5.3.2 The shear on vertical sections which follow a periphery,
bOt at distance, d/2, beyond the edges of the column, column capital, or drop
panel, and concentric with them, shall be computed as required and limited
in Clauses 6.2.7.1 to 6.2.7.10 inclusive (for design under Clause 6.2) or
Clauses 6.3.4.1 to 6.3.4.10 inclusive (for design by ultimate strength design).
9.5.3.3 If shear reinforcement is used, the first line shall be not
further than d/2 from the face of the support.
9.5.3.4 Slabs with drop panels whose length is at least one-third
the parallel span length and whose projection below the slab is at least onefourth the slab thickness shall be not less in thickness than stipulated in
Table 7.
9.5.3.5 Slabs without drop panels as described above shall be
not less in thickness than stipulated in Table 7.
9.5.3.6 For determining reinforcement, the thickness of the drop

panel below the slab shall not be assumed to be more than one-fourth of the
distance from the edge of the drop panel to the edge of the column capital.
9.5.4 Arrangement of Slab Reinforcement
9.5.4.1 The spacing of the bars at critical sections shall not exceed
two times the slab thickness, except for those portions of the slab area which
may be of cellular or ribbed construction. In the slab over the cellular spaces,
the reinforcement ratio provided shall be as given in Clause 5.2.7.
9.5.4.2 In exterior panels, except for bottom bars adequately
anchored in the drop panel, all positive reinforcement perpendicular to the
discontinuous edge shall extend to the edge of the slab and have embedment,
straight or hooked, of at least 6 inches in spandrel beams, walls, or columns
where provided. All negative reinforcement perpendicular to the discontinuous edge shall be bent, hooked, or otherwise anchored in spandrel beams,
walls, or columns.
78
CSA STANDARD A23.3
9.5.4.3 The reinforcement ratio shall be determined from the

bending moments at the critical sections but shall be not less than required
by Clause 5.2.7.
9.5.4.4 Required splices in bars may be made wherever convenient, but preferably away from points of maximum stress. The length of
any such splice shall conform to Clause 5.2.5.
9.5.4.5 Bars shall be spaced approximately uniformly across
each panel strip, except:
(a) At least 25 per cent of required negative reinforcement in
the column strip shall cross the periphery located at a
distance of d from the column or column capital;
(b) At least 50 per cent of the required negative reinforcement
in the column strip shall cross the drop panel, if any; and
(c) The spacing for the remainder of the column strip may vary
uniformly from that required for Items (a) or (b) to that
required for the middle strip.
9.5.4.6 Welded steel wire fabric used for slab reinforcement shall
be furnished in the form of flat sheets.
9.5.5 Openings in Flat Slabs
9.5.5.1 Openings of any size may be provided in flat slabs if
provision is made for the total positive and negative moments and for shear
without exceeding the allowable stresses, except that when design is based on
Clause 9.7 the limitations given therein shall not be exceeded.
9.5.5.2 When openings are provided within the area common
to two column strips, that part of the critical section shall be considered
ineffective which either passes through an opening, or is covered by a radial
projection of any opening to the centroid of the support.
9.5.6 Design of Columns. All columns supporting flat slabs shall be

designed as provided in Clause 6.2 or Clause 6.3 with the addi tional requirements of this Clause 9.
9.5.7 Transfer of Bending Moment Between Column and Slab.
When unbalanced gravity load, wind or earthquake cause transfer of bending
moment between column and slab, the stresses on the critical section around
the column shall be investigated by a rational analysis, and the section
proportioned accordingly by the requirements by Clauses 6.2 or 6.3. Concentration of reinforcement over the column head by additional reinforcement or closer spacing may be used to resist the moment of the section. A
slab width between lines that are c/2+1.5tl each side of the column centre
line may be considered effective.
9.6 Design by Elastic Analysis

9.6.1 Assumptions. In design by elastic analysis the following assumptions may be used and all sections shall be proportioned for the moments and shears thus obtained:
(a) The structure may be considered divided into a number of bents,
each consisting of a row of columns or supports and strips of supported slabs, each strip bounded laterally by the centre line of the
panel on either side of the centre line of columns or supports. The
bents shall be taken longitudinally and transversely of the building;
he
oed
In-
of
)ss
in
a
nt
Id
ry
at
if
if
m
rl
al
l-
\.
79
(b) Each such bent may be analyzed in its entirety or each floor thereof
and the roof may be analyzed separately with its adjacent columns
as they occur above and below, the columns being assumed fixed
at their remote ends. Where slabs are thus analyzed separately, it
may be assumed in determining the bending at a given support
that the slab is fixed at any support two panels distant therefrom
provided the slab continues beyond that point;
(c) The joints between columns and slabs may be considered rigid,
and this rigidity (infinite moment of inertia) may be assumed to
extend in the slabs from the centre of the column to the edge of
the capital, and in the column from the top of slab to the bottom
of the capital. The change in length of columns and slabs due to
direct stress, and deflections due to shear, may be neglected;
(d) Where metal column capitals are used, account may be taken of
their contributions to stiffness and resistance to bending and shear;
(e) The moment of inertia of the slab or column at any cross section
may be assumed to be that of the cross section of the concrete.
Variation in the moments of inertia of the slabs and columns along
their axes shall be taken into account; and
(f) Where the load to be supported is definitely known, the structure
shall be analyzed for that load. Where the live load is variable but
does not exceed three-quarters of the dead load or the nature of the
live load is such that all panels will be loaded simultaneously, the
maximum bending at all sections may be assumed to occur under
full live load. For other conditions, maximum positive bending near
midspan of a panel may be assumed to occur under three-quarters
of the full live load in the panel and in alternate panels; and maximum negative bending in the slab at a support may be assumed to
occur under three-quarters of the full live load in the adjacent
panels only. In no case, shall the design moments be taken as less
than those occurring with full live load on all panels.
9.6.2 Critical Sections. The critical section for negative bending, in

both the column strip and middle strip, may be assumed as not more than
the distance A from the centre of the column or support and the critical
negative moment shall be considered as extending over this distance.
9.6.3 Distribution of Panel Moments. Bending at critical sections
across the slabs of each bent may be apportioned between the column strip
and middle strip, as given in Table 8. For design purposes, any of these
percentages may be varied by not more than 10 per cent of its value, but
their sum for the full panel width shall not be reduced.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
80
CSA STANDARD A23.3
TABLE 8
DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN COLUMN STRIPS AND MIDDLE STRIPS IN
PER CENT OF TOTAL MOMENTS AT CRITICAL SECTIONS OF A PANEL
Moment Section
Neg,ative Moment at
Exterior Support
Strip
Negative
Moment
at
Interior
Support
Slab Supported
on Reinforced
Slab Supported
Concrete
Bearing Wall or
on Columns
Positive
and on Beams
Columns with
M.oment of Total Depth Beams of Total
Depth Equal
Equal to the
Slab Thlckness* or Greater than
3 Times the
Slab Thlckness*
Column strip
76
60
80
60
Middle strip
24
40
20
40
Total depth of
beam equal to
slab thickness
38
30
40
30
Total depth of
beam or wall
equal
to or
greater than 3
times slab
ness
19
15
20
15
Half column strip

adjacent and
parallel to
marginal beam
or wall
* Interpolate for
NOTE:
intermediate ratios of beam depth to slab thickness.

The total dead and live reaction of a panel adjacent to a marginal beam or wall may be
divided between the beam or wall and the parallel half column strip in proportion to
their stiffness, but the moment provided in the slab shall not be less than that given
in Table 8.
9.7 Empirical Method

9.7.1 Flat Slabs. Flat slab construction may be designed by the
empirical provisions of this Clause when they conform to all of the following
limitations on continuity and dimensions:
(a) Construction shall consist of at least three continuous panels in
each direction;
(b) The ra tio of length to wid th of panels shall not exceed 1.33;
(c) The grid pattern shall consist of approximately rectangular panels.
The successive span lengths in each direction shall differ by not
more than 20 per cent of the longer span. \Vithin these limitations,
columns may be offset a maximum of 10 per cent of the span, in
direction of the offset, from either axis between centre lines of
successive columns; and
(d) Calculated lateral force moments from wind or earthquake may
be combined with the critical moments as determined by the
empirical method, and the lateral force moments shall be distributed between the column and middle strips in the same proportions as specified for the negative moments in the strips for struc-
- 2.84Copyright NRC-CNRC
81
tures not exceeding 125 feet high with maximum storey height
not exceeding 12 feet 6 incnes.
9.7.2 Columns
9.7.2.1 The minimum dimension of any column shall be as
determined by Items (a) and (b) as follows, but in no case less than 10
inches:
(a) For columns or other supports of a flat slab, the required
minimum average moment of inertia, Ie. of the gross concrete section of the columns above and below the slab shall
be determined from Formula (109) and shall be not less
than 1,000 in". If there is no column above the slab, the Ie
of the column below shall be (2-2.3h/H) times that given by
the Formula with a minimum of 1,000 in":
t 3H
10 =
(109)
0.5+~:
where t need not be taken greater than tl or t2 as determined

by Clause 9.7,4, H is the average storey height of the columns
above and below the slab, in feet, and W L is the greater
value of any two adjacent spans under consideration; and
(b) Columns smaller than required by Formula (109) may be
used provided the bending moment coefficients given in
Table 9 are increased in the following ratios:
For negative moments:
(1- K)2
1+ 2. 2 (1+1.4W D;WL)
(110)
For positive moments:
(1- K)2
Rp = 1+1.2(1+0.10WD;WL)
(111)
The required slab thickness shall be modified by multiplying
WI by Rn in Formulae (113) and (114).
9.7.2.2 Columns supporting flat slabs designed by the empirical
method shall be proportioned for the bending moments developed by
unequally loaded panels, or uneven spacing of columns. Such bending
moment shall be the maximum value derived from:
WL 1 -W D L2
(112)
Rn
Ll and L2 being lengths of the adjacent spans (L2 = 0 when considering an

exterior column) and f is 30 for exterior and 40 for interior columns. This
moment shall be divided between the columns immediately above and below
the floor or roof line under consideration in direct proportion to their stiffness and shall be applied without further reduction to the critical sections
of the columns.
9.7.3 Determination of "c" (Effective Support Size)

9.7.3.1 Where column capitals are used, the value of c shall
be taken as the diameter of the cone described in Clause 9.3.2, measured at
the bottom of the slab or drop panel.
9.7.3.2 Where a column is without a concrete capital, the
dimension c shall be taken as that of the column in the direction considered.
82
eSA STANDARD A23.3
9.7.3.3 Brackets capable of transmitting the negative bending

and the shear in the column strips to the columns without excessive unit
stress may be substituted for column eapitals at exterior columns, the
value of c for the span where a bracket is used shall be taken as twice the
distance from the centre of the column to a point where the bracket is
1Y2 inches thick, but not more than the thickness of the column plus twice
the depth of the bracket.
9.7.3.4 Where a reinforced concrete beam frames into a column
without capital or bracket on the same side with the beam, for computing
bending for strips parallel to the beam, the value of c for the span considered
may be taken as the width of the column plus twice the projection of the
beam above or below the slab or drop panel.
9.7.3.5 The average of the values of c at the two supports at
the ends of a column strip shall be used to evaluate the slab thickness tl or t2
as prescribed in Clause 9.7.4.
9.7.4 Slab Thickness
9.7.4.1 The slab thickness shall be:
(a) Not less than stipulated in Table 7 for slabs without drop
panels conforming with Clause 9.7.5, nor tl as computed
using Formula (113);
(b) Not less than stipulated in Table 7 for slabs with drop panels
conforming to Clause 9.7.5 at all supports, nor t2 as computed
using Formula (114).
9.7.4.2 The total thickness, tl, in inches, of slabs without drop
panels, or through the drop panel if any, shall be at least:
tl
Oo028L( 1-
~U~ f 0' I;'~OO + 1Yz
(113)
where tl is in inches, Land c are in feet and w' is in pounds per square foot.
9.7.4.3 The total thickness, t2. in inches, of slabs with drop panels,
at points beyond the drop panel shall be at least:
t, = Oo024L( 1-
;U~f.' I;'~OO + 1
(114)
where t2 is in inches, Land c are in feet and w' is in pounds per square foot.
9.7.4.4 Where the exterior supports provide only negligible
restraint to the slab, the values of tl and t2 for the exterior panel shall be
increased by at least 15 per cent.
9.7.5 Drop Panels

9.7.5.1 The maximum total thickness at the drop panel used
in computing the negative steel area for the column strip shall be 1.5t2.
9.7.5.2 The side or diameter of the drop panel shall be at least
0.33 times the span in the parallel direction.
9.7.5.3 The minimum thickness of slabs where drop panels at
wall columns are omitted shall equal (tl+t2)/2 provided the value of c used
in the computations complies with Clause 9.7.3.
-286-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
83
CODE FOR. THE DESIGN OF PLAIN OR. REINFOR.CED CONCR.ETE STR.UctURES
TABLE 9
MOMENTS IN FLAT SLAB PANELS IN PERCENTAGES OF Mo
(Forming part of Clauses 9.5.1, 9.7.2, and 9.7.6)
A
Strip
Column
Head
Side
Support
Type
Exterior
I Interior
Negatin Positive Negative Positive Netadve
Moment Moment Moment Moment Moment
44
With
drop
36
24
56
36
72
6
40
32
28
50
6
10
40
66
20
20
17*
26
22*
10
20
20
18
24*
Column
strip
Without
drop
With
drop
Middle
strip
Without
drop
With
drop
Half
column
strip
adjacent
to
marginal
beam
or
wall
Without
drop
50
22
46
15
15*
16
16*
10
25
6
22
18
12
28
18
36
17
14
19
14
21
27
C
A
11
14
13
3
20
18
11
23
18
12
20
28
Interior Panel
Erterlor Panel
End
Support
Type
16
3
15
14
25
i
.
20
33
12
11
19
15
25
10
8
13
10
17
Increase negative moments 30 per cent of tabulated values when middle strip is continuou$
across support of Type B or C. No other values need. be increased..
.... ,287~
Copyright NRC-CNRC
84
CSA STANDARD A23.3
B
Percen:t:, of Panel
Load to
Canied
by MaqInal Beam or
Wan In Addition to
Load. Directly SuperImposed Thereon
Type of Support Listed In Table 9A

Side
~
to Strip
EndSupcrt
at Ria t
Analea to
Strip
Side or End EdA:

Condition of Slab. of
pth t
Columns with no beams
20
Columns with beams of total depth lUt
Columns with beams of total depth 3t

or more
40
Reinforced concrete
integral with slab
B
bearing
walls
Masonry or other walls providing

negligible restraint
NOTE:
For intermediate proportions of total beam depth to slab thicknesses, values for loads
and moments may be obtained by interpolation. See also Figures 1 and 2.
9.7.6 Bending Moment Coefficients

9.7.6.1 The numerical sum of the positive and negative bending
moments in the direction of either side of a rectangular panel shall be
assumed as not less than:
Mo
= 0.09 WLF( 1- ~~)2
(115)
in which F = 1.1S-c/L but not less than 1.

9.7.6.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bending moments at
the critical sections of the column and middle strips shall be at least those
given in Table 9.
9.7.6.3 The average of the values of c at the two supports at
the ends of a column strip shall be used to evaluate Mo in determining bending in the strip. The average of the values of Mo. as determined for the two
parallel half column strips in a panel, shall be used in determining bending
in the middle strip.
9.7.6.4 Bending in the middle strips parallel to a discontinuous
edge shall be assumed the same as in an interior panel.
-0
:::IE
::l
..J
Il.
-2
II:
J.--
a
iii J.--
IU
::l
VI
.a..
Il.
II:
SUPPORT
+6
CENTRE
OF SPAN
-1------t
I
- -
SUPPOR:r
lit INTERIOR
I
CENTRE
OF SPAN
~
A
-10
EXTERIOR
SUPPORT
t-
T
',~,,~
:'{;';
EXTERIOR
- - J:~;~:L -
1st INTERIOR
SUPPORT
CENTRE
OF SPAN
lEXTERIOR
SUPPORT
1 1
:~:~:
-46
tEl
-,,*
- 23
J:':.'f.". .1
-18
:.~.'
-12
... 22
+11
+11
+9
~ DIRECTION
~
-50
-18*
- 25
ffiill
-19
-:t.:t:
-13
-32
'Y~"
sUi
I
I
I
I
-20 I
-16
:.:f
-121
I
.... :~.
l~::
-,.
-40 I
-10
-15
.~~:;:
- - :....:~:.:
"':i;~';
.... ~. -
-8
OF ALL MOMENTS ~
+28
+ 20
+ 14
+11
+7
---l\>!L-t
- -- - Jilli
-66
'.:.i'"i.
NKI
-24
-33
t1l
\'I~
- 25
:,~~
.., ....
+40
... 28
+20
+ 15
-6
-6
-3
:- 3
--~ ~
~ -- ~ - --~o------ ---m=-l----l-WF-l------r-~
1~-~
.,:..: 3fl
- - lr~:(L
d
SUPPORT
INTERIOR
MOMENTS IN FLAT SLAB PANELS IN PERCENTAGE OF Mo-WITHOUT DROPS

(See Table 9 for notes and classification of conditions of end supports and side supports)
FIGURE 1
* Increase negative moments 30 per cent when middle strip is continuous across a support of Type B or C; no other values need be increased.
o en
..J
::l
j !:
en
oo II:
-
..J
IU
0
:::IE U
II:
<[
CI
2:
..J VI
~ ii
~
Il.
END
MOMENT
PANEL
Copyright NRC-CNRC
CJ1
00
:.:I
to:!
~
a
z=
~
:.:I
n
12:1
""'
io
:.:I
~
~
0
I
-0
...,
Copyright NRC-CNRC
1&1
en
0..
::>
I--
I ___
-50 -'I
L..
I
II F71,'"
l.::.i.J I
r----,
-15*
SUPPORT
+20
+15
tlO
CENTRE
OF SPAN
INTERIOR
+24
+20
+12
CENTRE
OF SPAN
OF ALL MOMENTS
I
B
II
A
st
1
INTERIOR
SUPPORT
I
+9
CENTRE
OF SPAN
EXTERIOR
SUPPORT
JI
II ',.:."
.i."
IL.. ___
-72 J I
IT]'"
r----,
-22*
L:'!!.._J
+36
+26
+18
+14
-6
L-"L~
--r{JfT-t------=r-T~
--itJFT=i=====-1-l-~
L_:.I!_.1
:':"Lf;a
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
SUPPORT
~,"'-----.
continuous across a support of Type B or C; no other values need be increased.
DIRECTION
r---'
I F?l I
I Iit:d I
I ___
-56 .1I
....
-17*
st
1
INTERIOR
SUPPORT
* Increase negative moments 30 per cent when middle strip is
8~
::I II..
::> it
::I VI
1&1
t.)
..,
~L
f
5 een
8- ~
! ~
<:t
..J
'":r: en::-
"..... 0..
END SUPPORT
MOMENT
PANEL
MOMENTS IN FLAT SLAB PANELS IN PERCENTAGES OF Mo-WITH DROPS

(See Table 9 for notes and classification of conditions of end supports and side supports)
FIGURE 2
(...
>
~
~
>
00
0'1
87
9.7.6.5 For design purposes, any of the moments determined

from Table 9 may be varied by not more than 10 per cent, but the numerical
sum of the positive and negative moments in a panel shall be not less than
the amount specified.
9.7.7 Length of Reinforcement. In addition to the requirements of
Clause 9.5.4, deformed bar reinforcement shall have the minimum lengths
given in Tables 10 and 11. Where adjacent spans are unequal, the extension
of negative reinforcement on each side of the column centre lines as prescribed in Table 10 shall be based on the requirements of the longer span.
If welded wire fabric is used as the main reinforcement, the minimum
lengths shall be as indicated in Figure 4.
9.7.8 Openings in Flat Slabs
8.7.8.1 Openings of any size may be provided in a flat slab in
the area common to two intersecting middle strips provided the total
positive and negative steel areas required in Clause 9.7.6 are maintained.
9.7.8.2 In the area common to two column strips, not more
than one-eighth of the width of strip in any span shall be interrupted by
openings. The equivalent of all bars interrupted shall be provided by extra
steel on all sides of the openings. The shear stresses given in Clause 9.5.3.2
shall not be exceeded following the procedure of Clause 6.1. 7.2.
9.7.8.3 In any area common to one column strip and one middle
strip, openings may interrupt one-quarter of the bars in either strip. The
equivalent of the bars so interrupted shall be provided by extra steel on all
sides of the opening.
9.7.8.4 Any opening larger than described above shall be analyzed
by accepted engineering principles and shall be completely framed as
required to carry the loads to the columns.
------.~
88
CSA STANDARD A23.3
TABLE 10
MINIMUM LENGTH OF NEGATIVE REINFORCEMENT
(Formin~ part of Clause 9.7.7)
Minimum Distance Beyond Centre Line of Support to
End of StraIaht Bar or to Bend Point of Bent Bar
Strip
Column
strip
reinforcement
Middle
strip
reinforcement
Percentalle
of Required
Reinforcinll
Steel Area
to be Extended
at Least as
Indicated
Straillht
Not less than

33 per cent
0.30L t
0.33Lt
o. 27L t
0.30Lt
Not less than

an additional
34 per cent
Flat Slabs Without

Drop Panels
Remaindert
0.2SL
Not less than

50 per cent
0.2SL
Remainder
0.2SL
Bend Point
Where Bars
Bend Down
and Continue
as Positive
Reinforcement
or
0.20L
Flat Slabs With

Drop Panels
Bend Point
Where Bars
Bend Down
and Continue
as Positive
Reinforcement
Straillht
0.2SL
To edge of
drop but at
or
least
0.20L
0.2SL
or
O.lSL
0.2SL
or
O.lSL
*At exterior supports where masonry walls or other construction provide only negligible restraint
to the slab, the negative reinforcement need not be carried further than 0.20L beyond the centre
line of such support.
tWhere no bent bars are used, the 0.27L bars may be omitted, provided the 0.30L bars are at
least 50 per cent of total required.
tWhere no bent bars are used, the 0.30L bars may be omitted provided the 0.33L bars provide at
least 50 per cent of the total required.
Bars may be straight, bent, or any combination of straight and bent bars. All bars are to be
considered straight bars for the end under consideration unless bent at that end and continued
as positive reinforcement.
NOTE: See also Figure 3.
....292 ....
Copyright NRC-CNRC
89
TABLE 11
MINIMUM LENGTH OF POSITIVE REINFORCEMENT
Muimum Distance From Centre Line of Support to
End of Straight Bar or to Bend Point of Bent Bar
Strip
Column
strip
reinforcement
Middle
strip
reinforcement
Percentage
of Required
Reinforcinll
Steel Area
to be Extended
at Least as
Indicated
Flat Slabs Without

Drop Panels
Bend Point
Where Bars
Bend Up
and Continue
as Nellative
Reinforcement
Straight
Not less than

33 per cent
0.12SL
Not less than

50 per cent*
3 inches
Remainder *
0.12SL
50 per cent
0.1SL
SO per cent*
3 inches
Flat Slabs With

Drop Panels
Bend Point
Where Bars
Bend Up
and Continue
as NeiladYe
Reinforcement
Straillht
Minimum
embedment
in drop
panel of
16 bar
diameters
but at least
10 inches
at interior
supports;
6 inches
from faces of
supports at
exterior
supports
or
0.2SL
Minimum
embedment
in drop
panel of or
16 bar
diameters
but at least
10 inches
at interior
supports;
6 inches
from faces of
supports at
exterior
supports
or
0.2SL
O.lSL
0.2SL
3 inches
0.2SL
*Bars may be straight, bent, or any combination of straight and bent bars. All bars are to be
considered straight bars for the end under consideration unless bent at that end lflnd continued
as negative reinforcement.
NOTE: See also Figure 3.
-293-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-0
.....
Copyright NRC-CNRC
FIGURE 3
C
III
0.
-0
",I~
l:
0.
III
ID
... -!..-
b
d
SO ta 67
33 to 50-
34 Remainder _
33 - -
thon 100
toce ot support
Molt. 0.125L
to Exterior
Foee of support
MGx, 0.125 L
MOIt.O.25L
support
~-_----_------_-----L~
Molt.O.ZSL
Ice
i:l!!
I
--
DROP PANELS
b
d
t.
tnlerlor support
Exterior support
Edge of drop - -
4.
t-6" :;.j:;} . . . ---
_ _.:..b_--1-~
Bend outside drop --.-..
Mo O.2SL
.
I
I
I
I
~ t"'(j~t---
~
16 Bar diG.ol 10"
I
___ ~--------=-l-
Edge of drop
~ 16 Bor dia. or 10".011 bars
cl
WITH
:-:F\------------- .... -=.C ____ ...~--------....:;.:t._l
h~~U-I-'
o~ Totol not len
1D:Ii
..,
lie
Remoinder-
50 -
I
I
33 -
or
I
I
34 -
J...--,.
Remainder --
50 -
WITHOUT DROP PANELS
* For bars not terminating in drop panel use lengths shown for panels without drops.
2
~
"
!::;;
=
.,
3
...
fit
a:: .., !;i
0.
_
...
=z
At exterior supports. where masonry walls or other construction provIde only neg,Ug,ible restraint to the slab,
the negatIve reInforcement need not be carried further than O.20L beyond the centre lIne of such support;
any combInatIon of straiaht and bent bars may be used provided minimum requirements are met.
MINIMUM LENGTH OF FLAT SLAB REINFORCEMENT FOR SLABS

DESIGNED BY THE EMPIRICAL METHOD
;...
>-
>-
~
t:!
1.1
VI
10
Copyright NRC-CNRC
~
o
III
4.
I-
100
MINIMUM e", OF
REQUIRED As
AT SECTION
WITHOUT
DROP PANELS
WITH
DROP
_ _d~---';I--""
PANELS
4.
I-
50Remainder...
50Rem~Mer~
III
50-
LENGTH
MARK
/'\.
033L
Mex.0'25L
O'30L
1/
r.......
I-I
Max.0'25L
f
E ,
d\
'\I
YI
Max.0'25L
I/'
V
ct. E xt.rior
0'27L
0'25L
support
O'20L
Face of support
0'15L
Int.rior support
__
I_,_Q-Ext.rior support
__________
Faee of support
At interior 'uPPOfjt L i. longer of adjacent .pcn.
Max. 0'15L-LW-MOI. 0'15L
_---:d=---+--.
f
I
Mox.O'2!5L-
:------~::;~~;o:;:;t-~:J---
~I----------------------------------~
1':..-----------------------1-- i--..!.----------------------.::;t-
t---lfJ
MINIMUM LENGTH' OF BAR
50
:I
\I
r--W~~~C;~f-S~;;;t-------~::.~:;:~ ~ P-=~:.-o~;
I-
III
~ ~~-----------r----T---------------------------------~3"~1l~~~~~.3r-..---------------------------------r-----
!i
I%
Ir !C
>- g
I- ..J
CD
_-'------'--_g-'
FIGURE 3 (Con't)
* For bars not terminating in drop panel use lengths shown for panels without drops.
""""
\0
~
Q
lIi'
"
S
z=
"
>
o~
~
~
I:'
"..,
-0
0-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
MIN.
1/2."
rt. COLUMN
025
i
COLUMN
LZ
L2
t-Z-MAX.
0.30
'~
*14-1.
Lr
Column Strip
-z"tUl(.
0.30
(WITHOUT DROP PANELS, DESIGNED BY THE EMPIRICAL METHOD)
Middle Strip
ONE-HALF MESH PLUS END

EXTENSIONS OF WIRES
50'0 OF POS. AS REao.
AT MID-SECTION
LI
60 Ofp MIN. OF POS. As

REQD. AT SECTION.
REMAINDER FURNISHt)
:::Y CROSS-WIRES OF
COMPANION SHEET.
FIGURE 4
MINIMUM LENGTH OF FABRIC SHEETS FOR SLABS
rt.
JLII
COLUM
t-2"WU
0.30 L
CH
CH
>
CI
>
i:II1
~CI
C'I.)
>
C'I.)
t-.l
\0
10
'I
Copyright NRC-CNRC
NOTES:
LARGER L
0.25
L2
LARGER L
0.33
0"
LARGER L
0.33
1. Welded wire fabric to be in the form of flat sheets (See Clause 9.5.4.6).
2. Splices at locations other than shown on this drawing shall conform to Clause 5.2.5.8.
LI
Column Strip
(WITH DROP PANELS, DESIGNED BY THE EMPIRICAL METHOD)
Middle Strip
60~~"1N. OF POs. AS
REO D. AT SECTION.
REMAINDER FURNISHED
BY CROSS-WIRES OF
COM PANIO" SHEET.
0.25
FIGURE 4 (Con't)
COLUMN
0.33 L
I;.N
\0
==
==
I:I!I
>
o".lj
==
-,
1
94
eSA STANDARD A23.3
10. WALLS
fc
fc'
h
t
allowable compressive stress in concrete

vertical distance between supports
thickness of wall
10.2 General
10.2.1 Reinforced concrete and plain concrete walls whether bearing
or non-bearing, shall be designed for all forces and moments to which they are
subjected.
10.2.2 Proper provision shall be made for stresses due to eccentric,

lateral and wind loads, temperature charige, shrinkage and settlement.
10.2.3 The design of walls shall conform to the requirements of Clause
6.2, except as provided in this Clause. *
*Design
of walls by Ultimate Strength Design is under consideration and is not included at

this time.
10.2.4 Isolated straight walls with a length less than ~ their unsupported height shall be designed as tied columns.
10.2.5 The limits of thickness in Clause 10.4 may be waived where
structural analysis shows adeq ua te strength and stab iii ty.
10.2.6 Consideration shall also be given to requirements for water
tightness, insulation and durability.
10.3 Walls Designed as Columns. When the reinforcement in reinforced
concrete bearing walls is designed, placed, and anchored in position as for
tied columns:
(a) The allowable stresses shall be those for tied columns;
(b) The ratio of vertical reinforcement shall not exceed 0.04; and
(c) The maximum spacing of the vertical reinforcement shall be as
specified in Clause 5.2.4.3.
10.4 Walls Not Designed as Columns
10.4.1 Allowable Compression. When bearing walls are not designed
as tied columns, the effects of any compression steel shall be ignored and the
allowable concrete compressive stress for design by Clause 6.2 shall be as
follows:
(a) For walls subject to compression over the whole of the critical
section the average compressive stress shall not exceed:
I. = 0.2251.'[1-(
4~t )']
(116)
(b) For walls subject to tension and compression, the maximum compressive stress shall not exceed:
I, = 0.451.'[1- (
4~t )']
(117)
10.4.2 Effective Length Concentrated Loads. In the case of concentrated loads, the length of the wall to be considered as effective for each
CODE FOR THE DESIGN OF PLAIN OR REINFORCED CONCRETE STR.UCTURES
95
shall not exceed the centre to centre distance between loads, nor shall it
exceed the width of the bearing plus four times the wall thickness.
10.4.3 Thickness Limitations for Walls

10.4.3.1 Bearing walls shall have a thickness of at least 1/25 of
the unsupported height or width, whichever is the shorter.
10.4.3.2 Bearing walls cast in situ shall be not less than
6 inches thick.
10.4.3.3 Cast in situ panel and enclosure walls shall have a
thickness of not less than 4 inches and not less than 1/30 the distance between the supporting or enclosing members.
10.4.3.4 Exterior basement walls and foundation walls, shall
be not less than 8 inches thick.
10.4.4 Wall Anchorage. Concrete walls shall be adequately anchored

to the floors or to the columns, pilasters, buttresses and intersecting walls.
10.4.5 Walls on Piers. Bearing walls on pile caps or piers shall be
designed as deep beams.
10.4.6 Stud Walls. Where reinforced concrete bearing walls consist

of studs or ribs tied together by reinforced concrete members at each floor
level, the studs shall be considered as columns, but the restrictions as to
minimum diameter or thickness of columns shall not apply.
10.5 Plain Concrete. Plain concrete walls may be used if structural
analysis shows adequate strength and stability and if temperature and
shrinkage effects can be satisfactorily controlled without reinforcing steel.
10.6 Wall Reinforcement Details
10.6.1 The area of the horizontal reinforcement in reinforced walls
shall be not less" than the ratio stipulated in Clause 5.2.7 and the area of
the vertical reinforcement not less than 60 per cent of the horizontal reinforcement.
10.6.2 The area of horizontal reinforcement for exposed exterior walls

shall be increased at least 50 per cent if the wall is longer than 30 feet and
there are not control joints at a maximum spacing of 30 feet.
10.6.3 If welded wire fabric is used it shall be in flat sheets and the
wire of the fabric shall be of not less than No. 10 AS&W gauge (0.1350 inch
diameter).
10.6.4 In addition to the minimum reinforcement as prescribed in
Clauses 10.6.1 and 10.6.2 there shall be not less than two No.5 bars around
all window or door openings and such bars shall extend at least 24 inches
beyond the corner of the openings.
10.6.5 The area of reinforcement stipulated in this Clause shall be
considered as meeting the normal requirements for shrinkage and temperature stresses.
11. FOOTINGS
11.1 Scope. The requirements prescribed in Clauses 11.3 to 11.10 apply
only to isolated footings.
-299-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
96
eSA STANDARD A23.3

(B)
C/
S
as defined in Clause 11.S.7(b)

the ratio of the long side to the short side of a footing.
11.3 Loads and Reactions

11.3.1 Footings shall be proportioned to sustain the applied loads and
induced reactions without exceeding the stresses or strengths prescribed in
Clauses 6.2 or 6.3, and as further provided in this Clause.
11.3.2 In cases where the footing is concentrically loaded and the

member being supported does not transmit any moment to the footing,
computations for moments and shears shall be based on an upward reaction
assumed to be uniformly distributed per unit area or per pile and a downward applied load assumed to be uniformly distributed over the area of the
footing covered by the column, pedestal, wall, or metallic column base.
11.3.3 In cases where the footing is eccentrically loaded and/or the
member being supported transmits a moment to the footing, proper allowance shall be made for any variation that may exist in the intensities of
reaction and applied load consistent with the magnitude of the applied load
and the amount of its actual or virtual eccentricity.
11.3.4 In the case of footings on piles, computations for moments and
shears may be based on the assumption that the reaction from any pile is
concentrated at the centre of the pile.
11.4 Sloped or Stepped Footings
11.4.1 In sloped or stepped footings, the angle of slope or depth and
location of steps shall be such that the allowable stresses are not exceeded
at any section.
11.4.2 Sloped or stepped footings that are designed as a unit shall be

cast as a unit.
11.5 Bending Moment
11.5.1 The external moment on any section shall be determined by
passing through the section a vertical plane which extends completely
across the footing, and computing the moment of the forces acting over the
entire area of the footing and one side of said plane.
11.5.2 The greatest bending moment to be used in the design of a

spread or strip footing shall be the moment computed in the manner prescribed in Clause 11.5.1 at sections located as follows:
(a) At the face of the column, pedestal or wall, for footings supporting
a concrete column, pedestal or wall;
(b) Halfway between the middle and the edge of the wall, for footings
under masonry walls; and
(c) Halfway between the face of the column or pedestal and the edge
of the metallic base, for footings under metallic bases.
11.5.3 The width resisting compression at any section shall be assumed
as the entire wid th of the top of the footing at the section under consideration.
-300-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
CODE FOR THE DESIGN OF PLAIN OR REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUGrURES
91
11.5.4 In one-way reinforced footings, the total tensile reinforcement

at any section shall provide a moment of resistance at least equal to the
moment computed as prescribea -in Clause 11.5.1; and the reinforcement
thus determined shall be distributed uniformly across the full width of the
section.
11.5.5 In two-way reinforced footings, the total tension reinforcement
at any section shall provide a moment of resistance at least equal to the
moment computed as prescribed in Clause 11.5.1; and the total reinforcementlthus determined shall be distributed across the corresponding resisting
section as prescribed for square footings in Clause 11.5.6, and for rectangular
footings in Clause 11.5.7.
11.5.6 In two-way square footings, the reinforcement extending in
each direction shall be distributed uniformly across the full width of the
footing.
11.5.7 In two-way rectangular footings:
(a) Reinforcement in the long direction shall be distributed uniformly
across the full width of the footing;
(b) In the case of the reinforcement in the short direction, that portion
determined by Formula (118) shall be uniformly distributed across
a band-width (B) centered with respect to the centre line of the
column or pedestal and having a width equal to the length of the
short side of the footing:
2
Reinforcement in band-width (B)
(118)
Total reinforcement in short direction
S+ 1
where S is the ratio of the long side to the short side of the footing;
and
(c) The remainder of the reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed
in the outer portions of the footing.
11.6 Shear and Bond

11.6.1 For computation of shear in footings, see Clauses 6.2.7.9 or
6.3.4.9.
11.6.2 Critical sections for bond shall be assumed at the same planes
as those prescribed for bending moment in Clause 11.5.2, also at all other
vertical planes where changes of section or of reinforcement occur.
11.6.3 Computation for shear to be used as a measure of flexural bond
shall be based on a vertical section which extends completely across the
footing, and the shear shall be taken as the sum of all forces acting over the
entire area of the footing on one side of such section.
11.6.4 The total tensile reinforcement at any section shall provide a
bond resistance at least equal to the bond requirement as computed from the
external shear at the section.
11.6.5 In computing the external shear on any section through a
footing supported on piles:
(a) The entire reaction from any pile whose centre is located 6 inches
or more outside the section shall be assumed as producing shear
on the section;
98
CSA STANDARD A2l.l
(b) The reaction from any pile whose centre is located 6 inches or more
inside the section sh<tll.be assumed as producing no shear on the
section; and
(c) For intermediate positions of the pile centre, the portion of the pile
reaction to be assumed as prod ucing shear on the section shall
be based on straight-line interpolation between full value at
6 inches outside the section and zero value at 6 inches inside the
section.
11.6.6 For allowable shearing values, see Clauses 6.2.7.9 and 6.3.4.9.
11.6.7 For allowable bond values, see Clauses 6.2.8.1 and 6.3.5.1.
11.7 Transfer of Stress at Base of Column
11.7.1 The stress in the longitudinal reinforcement of a column or
pedestal
(a)
(b)
(c)
shall be transferred to its supporting pedestal or footing either:

By extending the longitudinal bars into the supporting member;
By dowels; or
By a suitable mechanical device.
11.7.2 In case the transfer of stress in the reinforcement is accomplished by extension of the longitudinal bars, they shall extend into the
supporting member the distance required to transfer this stress to the
concrete by bond.
11.7.3 In cases where dowels are used:
(a) Their total sectional area shall be not less than the sectional area
of the longitudinal reinforcement in the member from which the
stress is being transferred;
(b) In no case shall the number of dowels per member be less than
four; and
(c) The diameter of the dowels shall not exceed the diameter of the
column bars by more than % inch.
11.7.4 Dowels shall extend up into the column or pedestal a distance

at least equal to that required for lap of longitudinal column bars (see
Clause 5.2.5) and down into the supporting pedestal or footing the distance
required to transfer to the concrete, by allowable bond stress, the full
working value of the dowel (see Clause 6.1.6.1.11).
11.7.5 The compression stress in the concrete at the base of a column
or pedestal shall be considered as being transferred by bearing to the top of
the supporting pedestal or footing and the compression stress on the loaded
area shall not exceed the bearing stress allowable for the q uali ty of concrete
in the supporting member as determined by the ratio of the loaded area to
the concentric supporting area.
11.7.6 For allowable bearing stresses, design by Clause 6.2 shall conform to Table 3, and for design by Clause 6.3 to 1.9 times those values.
11.7.7 In sloped or stepped footings, the supporting area for bearing
may be taken as the top horizontal surface of the footing, or assumed as the
area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid or cone contained
wholly within the footing and having for its upper base the area actually
loaded, and having side slopes of one vertical to two horizon tal.
-302-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
CODE FOR THE D.SIGN OF PLAIN OR REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
99
11.8 Plain Concrete Pedestals and Footings

11.8.1 The allowable compression stress on the gross area of a concentrically loaded pedestal under working load shall not exceed 0.25f/.
11.8.2 Where the stress permitted by Clause 11.8.1 is exceeded, reinforcement shall be provided and the member designed as a reinforced concrete column.
11.8.3 The flexural tension in the concrete of a pedestal or footing of
plain concrete shall not exceed 1.6v'77 for design by Clause 6.2 or 3.2v'i:'
for design by Clause 6.3.
11.8.4 The average shear stress shall satisfy the requirements of
Clauses 6.2.7.1 to 6.2.7.10 inclusive or Clauses 6.3.4.1 to 6.3.4.10 inclusive.
11.9 Footings Supporting Round Columns. In computing the stresses
in footings which support a round or octagonal concrete column or pedestal,
the "face" of the column or pedestal may be taken as the side of a square
having an area equal to the area enclosed within the perimeter of the column
or pedestal.
If.l0 Minimum Edge Thickness

11.10.1 In reinforced concrete footings, the thickness above the
reinforcement at the edge shall be not less than:
(a) 6 inches for footings on soil; or
(b) Less than 12 inches for footings on piles.
11.10.2 In plain concrete footings, the thickness at the edge shall be

not less than 8 inches for footings on soil, or less than 14 inches above the
tops of the piles for footings on piles.
12. PRECAST CONCRETE
12.1 Scope. All provisions of this Standard except Clause 7 shall apply to
precast concrete except for the specific variations given in this Clause.
12.2 Aggregates. For precast concrete, the maximum size of aggregate

shall be not larger than one-third of the least dimension of the member.
12.3 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement. At surfaces not exposed
to weather, all reinforcement shall be protected by concrete equal in thickness to the nominal diameter of bars but not less than % inch.
12.4 General
12.4.1 All details of jointing, inserts, anchors, and openings shall be
shown on the drawings.
12.4.2 Lifting eyes or other similar devices shall be designed for

100 per cent impact and the materials used:
(a) Must not be brittle; and
(b) They must be capable of deformation and/or rotation induced by
lifting at any stage without reducing the safe capacity below that
required in the foregoing.
12.4.3 Inserts must not be brittle and the materials used must not
induce corrosion by galvanic action. Adequate protection shall be provided
100
CSA STANDARD A23.3
against corrosion due to the exposure conditions and the protection used
shall not embrittle the insert.
12.5 Curing
12.5.1 Curing by high-pressure steam, steam vapor, or other accepted
processes may be employed to accelerate the hardening of the concrete and
to reduce the time of curing required by Clause 5.1, provided that the
compressive strength of the concrete at the load stage is considered to be at
least equal to the design strength required at that load stage.
12.5.2 Whatever method of curing is employed, it must be carried out

in a manner that will obtain all the required physical properties of the
concrete.
12.6 Identification and Marking. All precast concrete members shall be
plainly marked to indicate the top of the member and its location and orientation in the structure. Identification marks shall be reproduced from the
placing plans.
12.7 Transportation, Storage, and Erection

12.7.1 Units shall be so stored, transported, and placed that they
will not be overstressed or damaged.
12.7.2 Precast concrete units shall be adequately braced and supported

during erection to ensure proper alignment and safety and such bracing or
support shall be maintained until there are adequate permanent connections.
12.8 Splicing of Reinforcement
12.8.1 Where splicing of reinforcement must be made at points of
maximum stress or at closer spacing than permitted by Clause 5.2.5, welding
may be used when the entire procedure is suitable for the particular quality
of steel used and the ambient conditions (see also Clause 5.1).
12.8.2 Unless the welds develop 125 per cent of the specified yield
strength of the steel used, reinforcement in the form of continuous bars or
fully anchored dowels shall be added to provide 25 per cent excess steel area
and the welds shall develop not less than the specified yield strength of the
steel.
12.9 Load-Bearing and Non-Load-Bearing Wall Panels. Precast loadbearing and non-load-bearing wall panels shall conform to CSA Standard
A197, Precast Concrete Wall Panels.
12.10 Minimum Size of Precast Columns. Precast columns may have
a minimum thickness of 6 inches and a minimum gross area of 48 square
inches provided structural adequacy is assured by rigorous analysis.
12.11 Joints and Bearings for Precast Members
12.11.1 Design and detailing of the joints and bearings shall be based
on the forces to be transmi tted, and on the effects of dimensional changes
due to shrinkage elastic deformation, creep and temperature.
12.11.2 Joints shall be detailed so as to allow sufficient tolerances for

manufacture and erection of the members.
12.11.3 Bearings shall be detailed to provide for stress concentrations,
rotations, and the possible development of horizontal forces by friction or
other restraints.
101
12.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement For Precast Slabs

12.12.1 Precast planks or slabs up to 4 feet in width, with or without
longitudinal cores, need not have shrinkage or temperature reinforcement
providing lateral dimension changes are not restricted at the joints by means
of a connection capable of taking tension.
12.12.2 If a connection capable of resisting tension is provided then

the connection anchorage must extend across the full wid th of the uni t.
12.13 Anchorage Requirements. The requirements of Clause 6.1.6.1.7
shall not apply to precast concrete members where tests demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction that alternate anchorage
arrangements are structurally adequate.
13. COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL CONSTRUCTION

be
Ie
Qe
q
V
width of contact surface between a precast concrete element

and cast-in-place concrete
moment of inertia of transformed composite section neglecting
area of concrete in tension
statical moment of the transformed area outside of the contact
surface about the neutral axis of the composite section
stress at a contact surface in composite flexural construction at
the section considered
total shear force at the section considered
13.2 Definition. The following definition applies in this Clause:

Composite concrete flexural construction means flexural members
made up of previously cast or precast concrete elements together with
cast-in-place reinforced concrete so interconnected that they act together
as a flexural unit.
13.3 Design Method. Composite concrete flexural construction may be

designed either on the basis of allowable stresses, working loads and the
accepted straight line theory of flexure in accordance with the provisions of
Clause 6.2, or on considerations of ultimate strength, applying the requirements of Clause 6.3.
13.4 Special Design Considerations
13.4.1 In regions of negative moment, the bending moment, may be
assigned to either the composite section or the precast element.
13.4.2 When the negative moments are assigned to the composite

section, adequate provision for shear transfer must be made.
13.4.3 Limitations on effective flange width for T -beams given in
Clause 6.1.4.1 shall apply to composite T -beams.
13.5 Working Stress Design. In the design of composite reinforced concrete members by working stress design in accordance with the requirements of Clause 6.2:
(a) The effects of creep, shrinkage, and temperature need not be
considered except in unusual cases; and
(b) The effects of shoring, or lack of shoring, on deflections and stresses
shall be considered.
102
CSA STANDARD A23.3
13.6 Ultimate Strength Design

13.6.1 In calculating the ultimate strength of simple spans, no distinction need be made between shored and unshored members.
13.6.2 Composite beams designed by the ultimate strength design

procedure shall be checked for deflection and cracking at all stages up to
full working load.
13.6.3 The reinforced concrete precast element of a composite flexural
member shall be investigated separately to ensure that the loads applied
before the cast-in-place concrete has attained 75 per cent of its specified
28-day strength do not cause moment in excess of 60 per cent of the ultimate
moment capacity of the precast section.
13.7 Shear Connection
13.7.1 Calculation. In composite concrete flexural construction the
horizon tal shear stress along the contact surface between the precast and
cast-in-place elements shall be computed using Formula (119) :
q = VQc
(119)
Icb c
13.7.2 Shear Transfer. Shear shall be transferred along the contact
surface by bond and the shear stresses at the contact surface calculated by
Formula (119) shall not exceed the following for working stress design:
(a) When ties are not provided and the contact surface is rough and
clean and wetted down but with no excess water ......... .40 psi;
(b) When minimum steel tie requirements of Clause 13.7.4 are followed
and the contact surface is smooth, (trowelled, floated, or cast
against a fonn) ........................................ 40 psi;
(c) When minimum steel tie requirements of Clause 13.7.4 are followed
and the contact surface is rough and clean ............ 160 psi;
and
(d) When additional vertical ties are used the allowable bond stress
on a rough surface may be increased at the rate of 75 psi for each
additional area of steel ties equal to 0.1 per cent of the contact
area.
13.7.3 Ultimate Load Design. For ultimate load design, the shear
stresses at the contact surface at ultimate load may be taken as 1.9 times the
values stipulated in Clause 13.7.2 for working stress design.
13.7.4 Vertical Ties. When vertical ties are provided:

(a) Such ties shall be suitably anchored both sides of the interface;
(b) Spacing of such ties shall not exceed four times the thickness of
the slab nor 24 inches;
(c) A minimum cross-sectional area of ties of 0.15 per cent of the
contact area shall be provided; and
(d) It is preferable to provide all ties in the form of extended stirrups.
13.7.5 Web Reinforcement. Web reinforcement for the composite

section shall be designed in the same manner as for an integral beam of the
same shape and all stirrups so required shall be anchored into the cast-inplace slab, where their area may also be relied upon to provide some or all
of the vertical tie steel required in Clause 13.7.4.
-306-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
103
APPENDIX A
1
)
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES OF EFFECTIVE AREA

OF CONCRETE IN TENSILE (Act) IN
CONNECTION WITH CLAUSE. 6.1.4.5
NOTE: This Appendix is not a mandatory part of this Standard.
a
a
t"r---
~I--_ _
_ _ _ ........-- Centre. of Gravity of
Tensile Reinforcement.
EXAMPLE 1.
a
a
...
(Positive bending moment).
Centre of Gravity of
b
EXAMPLE 2.
(Negative bending moment).
....
aa
Centre of Gravity of
b
LEGEND:
EXAMPLE 3.
(Negative bending moment forcement distributed.)
rein~
-1
104
CSA STANDARD A23.3
APPENDIX B
CRITERIA FOR ESTIMATING
EFFECTIVE COLUMN LENGTHS
NOTE:
Two cases influencing the design of columns based on effective length

are considered :
Sidesway of structure prevented; and
Sidesway of structure permitted.
By sidesway is meant the possibility of a lurching sidewards of the
structure under gravity loading only. Since the forces necessary to prevent
sidesway are small, it must be presumed that if sidesway is actually permitted there is a nearly complete absence of walls or lateral restraining
media such as elevator shafts, wind-bracing, etc., that would exist normally
in any conventional building frame. When sidesway is prevented by such
means, the columns may be considered without sidesway as far as their
individual design values are concerned. Since in the usual building frame
not all columns would be loaded so as to reach their buckling loads simultaneously, some conservatism is introduced in the interest of simplification.
For the appropriate conditions of end restraint and sidesway support,
the effective length of columns may be taken from Table B1 or determined
using Figure B 1.
Figure B1 is a nomograph applicable to cases in which the equivalent
IlL of adjacent girders which are rigidly attached to the columns are known,
and is based on the assumption that all columns in the portion of the framework considered reach their individual critical loads simultaneously.
The equations upon which these nomographs are based are:
1. Sidesway prevented:
GuGL(~)2+(GU+GL)(1_~)+2
tan
1
4
k
2
tan nik
2, Sidesway permitted:
G uG L(n/k)2-36
n/k
6(G u +G L)
tan n/k
Subscripts u and L refer to the joints at the two ends of the column section
' conSI'd ere.
d G'IS dfi
LIe/Le
b emg
e ned as G
LI
IL
Ii
in which L indicates a summation for all members rigidly connected to that

joint and lying in the plane in which buckling of the column is being considered, Ie is the moment of inertia and Le the unsupported length of a
column section, and Ig is the moment of inertia and Lg the unsupported
length of a girder or other restraining member. Ie and Ig are taken about
axes perpendicular to the plane of buckling being considered.
For column ends supported by but not rigidly connected to a footing or
foundation, G may be taken as 10 for practical designs, If the column end is
rigidly attached to a properly designed footing, G may be taken as 1.0.
Smaller values may be used if justified by analysis.
1
I
:I
f
105
Refinements in girder IJL g may be made when conditions at the far

end of any particular girder are known definitely or when a conservative
estimate can be made. For the case with no sidesway, multiply girder
stiffnesses by the following factors:
1.5 for far end of girder hinged;
2.0 for far end of girder fixed against rotation (i.e., rigidly attached
to a support which is itself relatively rigid) ;
For the case with sidesway permitted, multiply girder stiffness by:
0.5 for far end of girder hinged.
Having determined G u and G L for a column section, the effective length
factor K is determined by constructing a straight line between the appropriate points on the scales for G u and G L
-309-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
106
CSA STANDARD A23.3
TABLE Bl
MINIMUM DESIGN VALUES OF EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR, k
FOR COMPRESSION MEMBERS
Minimum Bftectlve
Length Factor, k

0.65

0.80 ...

1.00

held in position.
1.20
'7~
I'~

1.50
'*
Symbol
I
!
IT
;,,"
I'
'-".....1
~-,
,."
I
,
Ir~
I.

2.00 ..

against rotation at one end but not held
in position nor restrained against rotation
at the other end.
2.00
'" '"
j ..l
J!
Where fixity is obtained by connections to rotational members use alignment Figure Bl.
...
Copyright NRC-CNRC
0.1-1
0 .6
0.7
0.8
10.0
5.0
0.1
1.0
(b)
Sidesway Permitted
..L
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
4.0
20.0
10.0
CD
GL
C')
1.0
2.0
3.0
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
fIJ
I,!I:I
zC')
C')
:=
C')
'Il
=
Z
:=
>
'Il
I,!I:I
..,
100.0
50.0
30.0
20.0
:=
CD
'Il
I,!I:I
0
0
-l
fIJ
'""'"
0
O...J
1.0
2.0
3.0
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
100.0
50.0
30.0
20.0
CD
GU
ALIGNMENT CHART FOR EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS IN CONTINUOUS FRAMES
LO
t-
0.2
0.3
0.4
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
3.0
2.0
~~'O
GL
FIGURE Bl
(0 )
SideswayPrevented
...1-0.5
0---1
0.9
fO
0.2~
0.3
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
10.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
50!~
'u
(SA STANDARD A13S-1962
PUIUSHED, MAIICN, '962
1Y1III
CANADIAN STANDARDS ASsoalnON
(IIKORPOUTiD 1919)
(OPYIIGNT REGlSTlRED. CMlDl. 1962
-313 -Copyright NRC-CNRC
-314-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
PRItSTRItSS&D CONCRBTB
CONTENTS
Page
List of Members of Committee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Preface..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .... .... . . ...... ..
Reference Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDARD
1. Scope ...................................................... .
2. Definitions and Notation ..................................... .

2.1 Definitions .............................................. .
2.2 Notation ............................................... .
2.2.1 Dimensions and Cross-Sectional Constants ............ .
2.2.2 Loads ............................................. .
2.2.3 Moduli of Elasticity and Stresses. . . . . . . .. . .......... .
2.2.4 Friction Factors .................................... .
3. Design ........................ , ... , . . .. . ... , ............. ,.

3.1 Preliminary ........... , ................................. .
3.1.1 General ........................................... .
3.1.2 Working Load ............................... " .... .
3.1.3 Ultimate Design Load ............................... .
3.1.4 Temporary Load ................................... .
3.2 Allowable Flexural Stresses in Concrete ..................... .
3.2.1 Working Load ..................................... .
3.2.2 "Temporary Load. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................... .
3.3. Allowable Stresses in Prestressing Steel. .................... .
3.3.1 Effective Prestress .................................. .
3.3.2 Temporary Prestress ................................ .
3.4 Load Factors ............................................ .
3.4.1 General ........................................... .
3.4.2 Load Factors ...................................... .
3.5 Ultimate Flexural Strength ............................... .
3.5.1 General ........................................... .
3.5.2 Normally Reinforced Members ......... .
3.5.3 Over-Reinforced Members
3.6 Prestressing Losses
3.6.1 GeneraL ........ .
3.6.2 Calculatioll of Losses. . ....... .
3.6.3 Anchoring... ..,
3.6.4 Friction on Post-Tensioned Steel ......... .
3.7 Shear and Prillcipal Tension. . . . . . . .. ..... .. .... ..
3.7.1 General. . . . .. . . . . . . . .. .
............. , ..... .
3.7.2 Design of Web Reinforcement. ....................... .
-315 -Copyright NRC-CNRC
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
15
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
r
!
GSA STANDARD A135
3.7.3 Minimum Quantity of Web Steel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

3.7.4 Spacing of Web Reinforcement. ..... " . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
3.8 Bond and Anchorage.. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ............
3.8.1 General................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.8.2 Pre-Tensioning ................................... "
3.8.3 Reinforcement of Anchorage Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.9 Non-Prestressed Reinforcement ............................ .
3.9.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ............... .
3.9.2 Working Load .................................... .
3.9.3 Ultimate Load. . . . . . . . . . . .. .................. . ... .
3.10 Continuity ............................................. .
3.10.1 Working and Temporary Load ................... .
3.10.2 Ultimate Load .................................. .
3.11 l\Jodulus of Elasticity ................................... .
3.11.1 Concrete......... . ............................. .
3.11.2 Steel..... . . . . .. . ............................... .
3.12 Composite Construction ................................. .
3.12.1 GeneraL ........................................ .
3.12.2 Design of Composite Structures .... " ... ...... . ..
3.12.3 Design of Shear Connections for Interaction ......... .
3.13 Cover and Spacing of Prestressing Steel. ............. , ... .
3.13.1 Cover ................ " ...................... .
3.13.2 Spacing of Tendons and Ducts ..................... .
17
17
17
17
17
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
4. :\Iaterials.......... . ............. .
4.1 Concrete and Grout. . . . . . . . .
. ........................ .
4.1.1 Concrete. . . .. ... ........... . .......... .
4.1.2 1\1 aximulll Size of Aggregate.. . . . . . . . . .. . ..... .
4.1.3 Grout..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .. . ...... .
4.1.4 Admixture~ ...... .
4.2 Prestressing Steel. ..... .
4.2.1 General. ..... .
4.2.2 High Tensile Strength \Vire... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........ .
4.2.3 Small Diameter High Stn:q,{th Strand ....... .
1.2.4 I.argc Diameter High Stn.'llgth Strand.
1.2.5 High Strength Alloy Bars ...
1 2.6 Testing ....... .
4.2.7 Tagging ... .
1.3 Materials-Auxiliary ..
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
27
27
28
28
28
S. Construction.
28
28
28
29
29
5.1
5.2
S.3
S.4
General
Dimensional Tolerances ..
Construction Sequence ...... .
Fonnwork .................... .
,
5.5
5.6
Concrete............. .................................
Stressing, Stressing -Equipment, and Materials ............. "
5. i Grouting and Jointing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.8 Composite Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.9 Handling and Erection. " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.10 Test Loading ......................... , ............. ,. ...
29
29
30
31
31
31
CSA STANDARD AID
COMMIITEE ON PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

M. W. HUGGINS (Chairman) ...... . University of Toronto, Toronto
P. A. BENN...
. . . . .. . .... Phillipe A. Benn Associates, Montreal
J. A. C. BOWEN. . .
. .......... HydroElectric Power Commission of Ontario,
Toronto
G. W. BOWLBY. . . .. . ............ The Steel Company of Canada Ltd., Hamilton
S. P. BYERS ..................... Byers Construction Co., Ltd., Montreal
L. CAZALY. . . . .
. .... Laurence Cazaly t Consulting Engineer, Toronto
D. M. CURZON .................. Wilson Concrete Products, Belleville
J. L. de STEIN .................. McGill University, Montreal
A. H. DOUGLAS.. . . . . .. . ........ University of Saskatchewan, Saskatoon
R. M. DOULL..
. ........... Canada Gunite Company Ltd., Pointe Claire
A. B. DOVE.. . . . . . .. . .......... The Steel Company of Canada Ltd., Hamilton
G. H. FOURES. . . . .
. .......... Department of Public Works, Ottawa
B. A. HESKETH ..... " .......... Ecole Poly technique, Montreal
W. D. HOUSTON.
. ...... Laurence Cazaly, Consulting Engineer, Toronto
S. D. LASH... . . . .
. ....... Queen's University, Kingston
T. O. LAZARIDES.
. ....... T. O. Lazarides and Associates, Toronto
A. M. LOUNT..
. ............. A. M. Lount and Associates, Toronto
S. J. MAZUR ............. " ...... Nova Scotia Technical College, Halifax
W. G. PLEWES .................. National Research Council, Ottawa
M. B. PiERCE ................... Saskatchewan Department of Highways and
Transportation, Regina
D. O. ROBINSON ................. Canada Cement Company Ltd., Toronto
F. B. ROLPH ............. " ...... Pentagon Construction Co. Ltd., Montreal
R. A. SPENCER ................... R. A. Spencer, Consulting Engineer, Saskatoon
-318-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
....
PREFACE
The need for a national standard on Prestressed Concrete became apparent
in the early stages of the use of this new material. In 1953 the Prestressed
Concrete Development Group of Canada was established to guide and assist
the orderly and safe development of prestressed concrete design and construction. In 1954 this Group suggested the development of a CSA Standard on
Prestressed Concrete.
The purpose of this Code is to provide a basic standard for the design of
prestressed concrete, as well as giving certain fundamental information on
construction practices peculiar to the material. The Code is not intended to
be all embracing for all structures, and it is recognized that individual users
may wish to, or find it necessary to supplement these basic requirements for
a particular structure. The Code does include, among other things, a solid
core of requirements which have been followed successfully around the world.
This Standard was prepared by the Committee on Prestressed Concrete,
under the jurisdiction of the Sectional Committee on Concrete, and was
formally approved by these Committees and the CSA Technical Council.
OTTAWA, MARCH, 1962
In order to keep abreast of progress in tile industries concerned, these
Standards are subject to periodic review. Suggestions for improvement
addressed to the General Manager, Canadian Standards Association, 178
Rexdale Blvd., Rexdale 603, Ont., will be welcomed at all times. They will be
recorded and in due course brought to the attention of the CSA Committee.
This Standard makes reference to the following:
eSA Standard A23.1-1960, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction
-319-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
r
A135-1962
1. SCOPE
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 This Code provides for the use of concrete in combination with a
prestressing element consisting of high tensile strength steel in the form of
wire, strand, or bar.
1.1.2 It is intended that this Code be read in conjunction with CSA

Standard A23.1-1960, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction, the provisions of which shall apply with the exception that:
(a) Use of concrete with values of 1'e less than 3,000 psi is not
permitted; and
(b) I n the case of differences, this Code shall govern.
1.1.3 The use of a particular light-weight aggregate in prestressed
concrete may be permitted by the authority having jurisdiction upon
acceptance of adequate performance data based on standard test procedures.
1.1.4 Notwithstanding the limitations imposed by Clauses 1.1.1 and

1.1,2 above, other materials and methods proposed for use shall be considered as falling within the scope of this Code, if they can be proved to be
satisfactory to the authority having jurisdiction.
2. DEFINITIONS AND NOTATION

2.1 Definitions. The following definitions apply in this Code:
Bonded tendons means tenuons which are bonded to the concrete
either directly or by grouting;
Composite construction means construction in which part of a loadcarrying member is precast and part is cast-in-place;
Creep means the time dependent deforlllat ion of steel or concrete under
sustained stress;
Effective prestress means the prestress in the tendons after all losses
have taken place;
End anchorage means the nlcchall il'ai device used to anchor the end
of a tendon permanently to the concrete:
Engineer means the engineer in re~ponsible charge of the work;
Flanged section means a section, with projecting flanges. in which
the neutral axis lies outside the flange;
Initial prestress means the stress in the tendons immediately after
transferring the prestressing force to the concrete;
Lead of strand means the distance measured along the strand, in
which each outer wire rotates one revolution around the axis of the strand;
Load factor means the factor by which any working load shall be
multiplied to obtain the corresponding part of the ultimate design load;
10
eSA STANDARD AU5
Post-tensioning means the method of prestressing m which the

tendons are tensioned after the concrete has hardened;
Prestressed concrete means concrete in which permanent internal
stresses have been induced by forces caused by tensioned steel;
Pre-tensioning means the method of prestressing in which the tendons
are tensioned before the concrete has been placed;
Rectangular section means a rectangular section, or a flanged
section in which the neutral axis lies within the flange;
Relaxation means the reduction of stress in steel or concrete at
constant strain;
Seilmental Inember means a member comprised of separate precast
ullits subsequently post-tensioned together;
Tendon means the tensioned steel element in the form of wire, strand
or bar, used to prestress concrete.
2.2 Notation
2.2.1 Dimensions and Cross-Sectional Constants
A
= area of prestressing steel;
8
A I, = area of non-prestressed reinforcing steel;

A,! = steel area required to develop the ultimate compressive
strength of the overhanging portions of the flange of a flanged
member;
A,r = steel area required to develop the ultimate compressive
strength of the web of a flanged member;
A II = area of web reinforcement at spacing s, placed perpendicular
to the axis of a member;
b
width of flange of a flanged member or width of a rectangular
member;
b'
= width of web of a flanged member;
btl
width of beam web at which shear stress is a maximum;
d
= distance from extreme compressive fibre to centroid of prestressing force;
d'
= distance from extreme compression fibre to the non-prestressed reinforcement;
dn
depth of compression block at ultimate load;
D, = diameter of prestressing strand;
lu
= embedment length of prestressing strand;
p
= ratio of prestressing steel = A,/b.d;
p' = ratio of compression steel = A',/b.d for rectangular sections
= A ',/b'.d for flanged sections;
1)~
= ratio of non-prestressed reinforcement passing through
contact surface in composite construction;
.'i
= longitudinal spacing of web reinforcement;
l
= average thickness of the flange of a flanged member.
1.2.2 Loads
D
=
L
Mu =
W =
WI =
effect of total dead load;

effect of live load, including impact where applicable;
ultimate fle~ural capacity;
effect of wind load, or earthquake load, or traction forces;
load which reduces the stress in the pre-compressed tensile
zone to zero;
...
WI
Vc
V"
11
= (D+ L) - WI =
= diagonal cracking
remainder of total load;

shear;
net effect of specified minimum ultimate load in shear, not
including prestressing force.
2.2.3 Moduli of Elasticity and Stresses

Ec
E,
l' c
l' ci
1',
fIe
f,i
f.",
tJ.f.
modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi;

modulus of elasticity of steel, psi;
compressive strength of concrete at 28 days, psi;
compressive strength of concrete at time of initial prestress,
psi;
= ultimate strength of prestressing steel, psi;
= effective steel prestress after all losses, psi;
= initial stress in prestressing steel after seating of anchorage,
psi;
= stress in prestressing steel at ultimate load, psi;
= amount by which the stress from Table 3 exceeds 150,000 psi
=
=
=
for the particular value of
~. for which f,,,, is to be determined;
l' fI
= shear stress at contact surface in composite construction, psi.
yield point stress of conventional reinforcement, psi;
2.2.4 Friction Factors

e
= base of Naperian logarithms;
K
L
To
Tz
a
p.
wobble friction coefficient per foot of prestressing steel;

length of prestressing steel from jacking end to point x;
= steel stress at jacking end;
= steel stress at point x;
= total angular change of prestressing steel profile, in radians,
from jacking end to point x;
= curvature friction coefficient.
=
=
3. DESIGN
3.1 Preliminary
3.1.1 General. All structural members shall satisfy the requirements
of this Code for the following conditions of loading, in accordance with the
rules and procedures set forth herein:
(a) Working Load;
(b) Ultimate Load; and
(c) Temporary Load.
3.1.2 Working Load. The workillg load shall be all the dead and live
loads specified in the relevant code. In the investigation of both working
load and temporary load (Clause 3.1.4), calculations shall be based on
elastic analysis. Generally accepted empirical formulae and approximations
may be used when these err on the side of safety.
3.1.3 Ultimate Design Load. The ultimate load for design purposes
shall be that obtained by multiplying the working load by the appropriate
load factors given in Clause 3.4.2. \Vind or earthquake load need only be
investigated at ultimate load.
3.1.4 Temporary Load. A temporary load is designated as any short
term load to which a structural member may be subjected during construction.
-313-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
12
CSA STANDARD A135
3.2 Allowable Flexural Stresses in Concrete

3.2.1 Working Load. The allowable concrete stresses under working
load shall be taken as follows:
(a) Compression
(i) Bridge members ..................... 0040 l' c
(ii) Building members ................... 0.45 l' c
(b) Tension
(i) \Vhere exposed to weather or corrosive
agencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. NIL
(ii) Where not exposeo to weather or corrosive agencies ......................
(iii) Where subjected to dynamic loading .. NIL
(iv) \Vherc tendons are unbonded ......... NIL
(v) Where members with unbonded tendons
are reinforced adjacent to the extreme
tensiOll fibres by means of non-prestressed reinforccment equal to 10 per
cent of the tendon area and where the
members are \lot exposed to corrosive
weather or atmosphere ............... 6VJ';,
(vi) Residual tension due to prestress in
ends of pre-tensioned bridge or building
members exposed to weather or corrosive agencies when non-prestressed
reinforcement is provided. . . . . . . . . . . ..
(vii) For segmental members. .. . . . . . .. . .. NIL at joints
6vK
3VJ":
3.2.2 Temporary Load

3.2.2.1 Allowable Stresses at Release.
Stresses in concrete
upon application of the initial prestress to it shall not exceed the following:
(a) Compression
(i) Factory produced members ........... 0.60 l' Cl
(ii) Field produced members ............. 0.55 i' ei
(b ) Tension
(i) For parts of members without non-prestressed reinforcement, other than those
parts which are subjected to residual ten_
sion in the vicinity of the beam ends.. 3V/'Ci.
(ii) For segmental members .............. NIL at joints
(iii) For members "'ith non-pre~tressed reinforcement ........................ 6Vj'r.'j
Reinforcement shall be placed at the
outer corners of the tensile zone to
resist the total tensile force when the
stress exceeds 3v1J"::. The reinforcement shall be assu med to resist this
force at a unit steel stress not exceeding
0.80 I'll or 40,000 psi, whichever is
smaller. In no case shall the tensile
stress in the concrete exceed 6V1' ,t.
-324-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
13
3.2.2.2 Allowable Stresses During Shipping and ~onstruc

tion. The allowable concrete stresses under temporary load shall be those
given in Clause 3.2.1. Such stresses shall not he imposeo until the connete
has a strength of 0.80 1'e.
3.3 Allowable Stresses in Prestressing Steel
3.3.1 Effective Prestress. The effective prestress after losses, fu, and
before the application of additional loads, shall 110t be assumed to exceed
0.601'" except as noted in Clause 3.9.2(d). For design purposes,1', shall be
taken as the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing
steel.
3.3.2 Temporary Prestress. The initial prestress, f'i, at critical sections shall not exceed 0.701', . Overstressing for a short period of time to
0.801'. is permitted, provided that the stress after seating of the anchorage
does not exceed 0.701'.
3.4 Load Factors

3.4.1 General. The ultimate flexural and shearing capacity of all
structural members shall be investigated at ultimate load, except that, in
composite construction, shear on the plane of contact shall be investigated
at working load only. \Veb shear in composite members shall be investigated
at ultimate load.
3.4.2 Load Factors. The ultimate capacity of the members shall be
made sufficient to resist the effects of dead load, live load, wind, earthquake,
or traction forces multiplied by load factors as follows:
(a) For bridges
1.5D
2.51.,;
(0) For structures other than bridges whichever of the followillg
is greatest:
(i) 1.2D + 2.4L;
(ii) 1.8 (D + L);
(iii) 1.2D + 2.4L + 0.6W;
(iv) 1.2D + 0.6L + 2.4 rv;
(v) 1.8 (D + L + 0.5lV); or
(vi) 1.8 (D + 0.5L + W).
where: D
effect of dead load
L = effect of live load, including impact where
applicable
W = effect of wind load or earthquake load, or traction
forces
In calcula tions of ultimate flexural capacity ]v! u, the factor to be applied
to dead I J In any of the expressions in (a) or (b) above shall be reduced
tc' unity If this increases the value of Jvfu.
3.5 Ultimate Flexural Strength
3.5.1 General. Prestressed concrete members at ultimate load may be
categorized as either:
(a) Xormally reinforced; or
(b) Ovet-reinforced.
3.5.2 Normally Reinforced Members
3.5.2.1 Xormally reillforced members are defined as those III
which either of the following is less than 0.3:
- 32.5-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
14
eSA STANDARD AilS
(a)
P.fll"
l' c
-r-:-
p'.f'l/ for rectangular sections; or
An.jsll
p'.f'll f fl
d
.
(b) b'.dj'
(" or ange sectIOns.
T.
h
were:
. stee I = bd
All
. 0 f prestressmg
= ratIO
f
.
I
A'II f
I
ratio
0 compression stee = b.d or rectangu ar
P
I
.
A'II f or fI anged sections
.
sectIOns,
or b'.d
fsu = stress in p.restressing steel at ultimate load
Asr = As - A,! = steel area required to develop the
ultimate compression strength of the web of a
flanged section
0.85 I'll (b - b') ft
A.!
= steel area required to
1114
develop the ultimate compressive strength of the

overhanging portions of the flange
d
= distance from extreme compressive fibre to
centroid of prestressing force
width of compression I1ange
b
average thickness of the flange of a flanged section
mean width of web of a flanged section
b'
1" 11 = yield point stress of conventional reinforcement
3.5.2.2 I n the absence of a more accurate value substantiated
by tests to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction, and provided that fse is not less than 0.50 I'll' fau shall be computed from the following except that in no case shall f,u be assumed greater than permitted in
Clauses 3.8.2.1, 3.8.2.2, and 3.8.2.3:
(a) f81l =
I'll
(1 - 0.5
P;;:) in pre-tensioned or bonded post
tensioned construction; or
(b) fSII
f ..
15,000 psi in unbonded construction.
3.5.2.3 The ultimate flexural strength, Mv., for normally rem
forced members shall be computed from the following:
(a) Afv. = A,.d. fllu ( 1- 0.6p j~:) for rectangular sections; or

(b) ]I.Iu = As,..d.fllv. (1-0.6
:'~d.;:) + 0.85 I'c (b
/
b ) (d-0.5t)t
for flanged sections.
3.5.3 Over-Reinforced Members

3.5.3.1 Overreinforced members are defined as those m which
either of the following is greater than 0.3:
(a)
PI:" - P~(
,,..j.,,
(b) bA.d.1'
c
'
1/
for rectangular sections; or
p'!, 1/ f
-
I' c
fI
d
.
or ange sectIOns.
f'
PRJtSTlUtSSBD CONCRJl';'1"E
15
3.5.3.2 The ultimate flexural strength in bonded and unbonded

construction shall be computed from the following:
(a) M" = 0.25 l' c.b.d2 for rectangular sections; or
(b) M" = 0.25f'c.b'.d! + 0.851'c (b-b') (d-0.5t)t for flanged
sections.
3.6 Prestressing Losses
3.6.1 General. Allowance shall be made for decrease in prestress in
steel from the following, where applicable:
(a) Shrinkage of the concrete;
(b) Elastic deformation of the concrete during prestressing or at
transfer;
(c) Creep in concrete;
(d) Relaxation of stress due to creep of steel;
(e) Anchoring; and
(f) Friction.
3.6.2 Calculation of Losses. Loss in steel stress not including friction
and anchoring loss shall be either:
(a) Calculated on the basis of the allowances ill ('lallse 3.6.1; or
(b) Assumed as foHows:
(i) For post-tensioning - 25,000 psi; or
(ii) For pre-tensioning - 35,000 psi.
3.6.3. Anchoring. Where applicable, the designer shall make an
allowance for the anchoring loss, the magnitude of which shall be checked
on the site by the supervising authority.
3.6.4 Friction on Post-Tensioned Steel
3.6.4.1 Friction losses shall be computed from the equation:
To = T z.e(KL + 110)
where: To
steel stress at jacking end;
T:J: = steel stress at point x;
e = base of Naperian logarithms;
K = wobble friction coefficient per foot of prestressing
steel;
L = length of prestressing steel element from jacking
end to poin t x in feet;
J1. = curvature friction coefficient;
a
total angular change of prestressing steel eIemen t
in radians from jack to point x.
For small values of (KL + J1.a) the following formula may be used:
ToT z (1
+ KL + J1.a)
'3.6.4.2 Values of K and J1., used in design, shall be indicated 011

the plans for guidance in selection of materials and methods that will
satisfy the assumed values.
Non:: The values of K and
guide.
fJ.
in Tables 1 al1d 2 rfspeclively are typical a'ld may be used as a
16
CSA STANDARD AilS
TABLE 1
WOBBLE FRICTION COEFFICIENT (K)
Type of Duct
Rigid Duct
Flexible Duct
NOTE:
K X .8 4
Wire
Strand
Bar
25
20
Rigid duct will maintain a smooth curve without the presence of the tendon. Flexible
duct may be easily displaced between points of support. Interpolation will be allowed
for semi-rigid ducts. Examples of flexible duct are:
(a) An inflatable rubber duct without interior stiffening; or
(b) A sheath whose whole stiffness is derived from the stiffness of the tendon.
TABLE 2
CURVATURE FRICTION COEFFICIENT (u)
3.7 Shear and Principal Tension

3.7.1 General. l\Iembers shall be designed for the shearing forces due
to ultimate load using the load factors given in Clause 3.4.2.
3.7.2 Desig,n of Web Reinforcement

3.7.2.1 No web reinforcement other than that required by
Clauses 3.7.3.1 and 3.7.3.2 is required where Vc is greater than the shear at
ultimate load.
3.7.2.2 At any section Vc shall be taken as the smallest of the
following:
(a) The shear which produces a principal tensile stress of 4Vf' c
in the web. In calculating this stress, both horizontal and
vertical components of the prestress shall be taken into
consideration. The section investigated shall be no closer to
the support than a distance equal to the depth of the member;
(b) The shear which produces a net tensile stress of 6Vf' c in the
extreme fibre in the region of positive moment in all members
subject to a point load comprising 20 per cent or more of the
total load on the system, including its own weight; or
(c) The shear which produces a net tensile stress of 6Vf' c in the
extreme fibre in the region of negative moment in all members
with negative moments at a support.
3.7.2.3 Where the value of Vc in Clause 3.7.2.2 is exceeded by
V,,, web reinforcement shall be provided as determined by the following
formula:
-318-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
r
17
(V,,- Vc)s d h 11
d
d1'l1
an s a.. not excee
A 11
where: A
'It
7b'.sVJ':
1'11
= area of web reinforcement at spacing s placed
perpendicular to the axis of the mem ber
Vu
= shear due to specified minimum ultimate load
width of web of a flanged member
b'
= longitudinal spacing of web reinforcement
l' c =
1'1/ =
compressive strength of concrete at 28 days

yield strength of web reinforcement
3.7.3 Minimum Quantity of Web Steel

3.7.3.1 Web reinforcement shall be provided at the ends of all
prestressed units with the exception of slab units where tests prove their
adequacy without web reinforcement to the satisfaction of the authority
3.7.3.2 In all members, except solid slabs, which are subject to
dynamic loads or which are in any way restrained or continuous or where a
concentrated load exceeds 20 per cent of total load, or in J beams, web
reinforcement shall be provided regardless of the magnitade of the principal
tensile stress, and the minimum area provided shall be cakul<1ted by the
following formula:
.% Altf'..
s .... /-}A
"1-.
8-U . f'1I" bo.d
where: A 11 = area of web reinforcement at spacing s, placed
perpendicular to the axis of a member
b" = width of beam web at which shear stress is a
maximum
3.7.4 Spacing of Web Reinforcement. \Vhere web reinforcement is

required, the maximum spacing shall not exceed three quarters the dept h
of the member.
3.8 Bond and Anchorage
3.8.1 General. Bond stresses at the cnds of all pre-tensioned members,
and stresses in the anchorage zones of all post-tensioned members shall he
investigated.
3.8.2 Pre-Tensioning
3.8.2.1 At ultimate load, the stresses in seven-wire strand
7-2 inch or less in diameter shall not exceed the values specified ill Table 3
unless evidence can be provided to the satisfaction of the authority havingjurisdiction showing that other values of stress arc justified.
-329-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
18
CSA STANDARD AilS
TABLE 3
PERMISSIBLE STRESS U...) IN PRESTRESSING STEEL
AT ULTIMATE LOAD FOR VARIOUS LENGTHS
OF EMBEDMENT
'ulD.
1pal
50
160,000
100
195,000
150
215,000
200
230,000
250
250,000
In Table 3:
III
D,
NOTE:
embedment length = distance from end of strand

to section at which permissible stress applies,
inches
= strand diameter, inches
=
For values not given in Table 3, interpoldtion is permitted.
3.8.2.2 Table 3 is applicable with strands pre-tensioned to 150,000

psi, and for a concrete strength, J'e, of 5,500 psi. For strands with different
pre-tension and/or with concrete of lower strengths, the allowable stress at
ultimate load shall be adjusted in accordance with the following formula:
fut
f,;
J'c
+ 5,500
X .1f,
= compressive strength of concrete at 28 days, psi

stress in prestressing steel at ultimate load
initial prestress
= amount by which stress from Table 3 exceeds
=
=
150,000 psi for the particular value of ~u for which

f,u is to be determined.
'
3.8.2.3 The allowable stress in single-wire and two-wire strand
at ultimate load shall be computed as for strand in Clause 3.8.2.1 except
that the required embedment length shall be increased by 50 per cent.
3.8.3 Reinforcement of Anchorage Zones

3.8.3.1 Anchorage zones shall be reinforced to resist tensile
bursting and spalling forces introduced by the concentrated loads due to
the action of prestressing.
3.8.3.2 The reinforcement of anchorage zones shall be determined by either of the following methods:
(a) Computation based on recognized elastic or ultimate theories,
in which case the working load shall be the total effective
prestressing force, and the ultimate design load shaH be twice
this value; or
(b) Testing, in which case the anchorage zone shall be capable of
resisting the total ultimate strength of the tendons.
-330-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
19
3.9 Non-Prestressed Reinforcement

3.9.1 General. The use of non-prestressed reinforcement of intermediate, hard grade, rail, or high tensile steel in conjunction with prestressed
reinforcement, is permitted. The stresses in the concrete, non-prestressed
reinforcement, and prestressed reinforcement shall be investigated at both
working and ultimate loads.
In members exposed to corrosive environment, non-prestressed reinforcement may be used in ultimate strength computations but may not be
used in working load computations.
3.9.2 Working Load. Members with non-prestressed reinforcement
shall be anal ysed as follows:
(a) Divide the load acting on the member into two parts WI and
W 2 , in which W l is the load that reduces the stress in the
tension flange to zero, and W 2 is the remainder;
(b) Analyse the member as a prestressed unit under the action of
W lt and compute the stress in the compression flange and
in the prestressing steel;
(c) Analyse the member as a reinforced concrete unit under the
action of W 2 , considering the prestressing steel as normal
reinforcement, taking into account its position and modulus
of elasticity and "Compute the stress in the compression flange,
the stress in the nOll-prestressed reinforcement, and the
increment of stress in the prestressing steel;
(d) The sum of the stresses in the prestressing steel calculated in
(b) and (c) above shall not exceed 0.6 f'.; and
(e) The stress in the non-prestressed reinforcement as calculated
in (c) above shall not exceed 20,000 psi.
3.9.3 Ultimate Load. Where non-prestressed reinforcement is used
in conjunction with prestressed reinforcement, the following procedure shall
be adopted in computing the strength at ultimate load:
(a) Estimate the total tension in both the prestressing steel and
non-prestressed reinforcement;
(b) Assuming that the mean compressive stress in concrete is
0.85 f'c compute the depth of the compression stress block
from the following formula:
d - A.f,u + A',.f' '11
n 0.85 f' c.b
where: d n = depth of compression stress block, inches
(c) Assuming that the ultimate compressive strain in the concrete
is 0.003, check the maximum tension in the steel using strain
relationships, and if necessary, revise the value of d n as
computed in (b);
(d) Compute the ultimate flexural strength, M u , from the
formula:
Mv. = A .f.v. (d-0.5d,,) + A',.f'1I (d'-0.5d n)
where: d' = distance from extreme compression fibre to the
non-prestressed reinforcement.
20
CSA STANDARD A135
3.10 Continuity
3.10.1 Working and Temporary Load. \Vhere prestressed flexural
members are designed for continuity under either working or temporary
loads the requiremeIlts of Clauses 3.10.1.1 to 3.10.1.5 shall apply.
3.10.1.1 I\foments, shears. and thrusts produced by external
loads and prestressing forces shall be determ ined by elastic analysis.
3.10.1.2 The effect of the strains in the structure caused by
the application of the prestress shall be considered.
3.10.1.3 The effect of subsequent creep, shrinkage, and further
prestressing after initial prestressing shall be investigated. This is particubrly important when restraints are added during or after the initial
prestressing.
3.10.1.4 Careful consideration shall be given to the frictional
loss in continuous tendons.
3.10.1.5 The effect of reversals of stresses due to various combinations of loading shall be investigated.
3.10.2 CI tima te Load. I\Iomen ts, shears, and thrusts produced by
external loads shall be distributed by elastic analysis at ultimate load, and
components si1,tll be designed to resist them.
3.11 Modulus of Elasticity
3.11.1 Concrete. l 'nless established by tests to the satisfaction of
the authority having jurjsdictim~, the modulus of elasticity for deflection
purposes sh;l1l be computed from the following:
(a) (1.R X 106 + SOO("J psi for short term loading; or
(b) 0.5 (1.8 X 106 + SOOj'e) psi for permanent loading.
NOTE:
These vailles are approximate and shall not be used to compute creep losses in concrete.
3.11.2 Steel. In all cases the elongation of the prestressing tendons

shall be based on the stress-strain curves supplied by the manufacturer for
each project. However, the following values for the modulus of elasticity
may be assumed for design purposes:
(a) High tensile strength wire
30 X 106 psi;
(b) Small diameter high strength strand
- 27 X 106 psi;
(31 inch and smaller)
(c) Large diameter high strength strand - 24 X 106 psi; and
(d) High strength alloy bar
28 X 106 psi.
3.12 Composite Construction
3.12.1 General. Clause 3.12 governs the design of structural parts
comprising a concrete member to which cast-in-place concrete is added, the
whole being connected in a manner whereby the components function
thereafter as an integral unit.
3.12.2 Design of Composite Structures

3.12.2.1 Interaction between the two components shaH be
achieved ill accordance with Clause 3.12.3. The behaviour of the parts
thereafter shall be investigated as part of an integral homogeneous unit.
3.12.2.2 \Vhen concretes of differen t q uali ties work together,
elast ic strains shall be considered to be as for homogeneous sections and
stresses proportioned in accordance with the moduli of elasticity.
-332-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
----+'------~~-~ -~~--- -~--
21
3.12.2.3 Stresses induced before parts become composite shall

be added to stresses induced in the composite whole by the remaining part
of the working load. The total-elastic stresses thus computed shall not
exceed the permissible elastic stresses for homogeneous sections of the
relevant quality of concrete.
3.12.2.4 The ultimate strength of composite sections shall be
computed in the same manner as the ultimate strength of an integral
member of the same shape.
3.12.3 Desig.n of Shear Connections for Interaction
3.12.3.1 All surfaces against which concrete is to be placed
shall be "rough", as defined in Clause 5.8, when such surfaces are to be
relied upon to resist shear. The shear stress at the contact surface shall be
investigated at working loads only.
3.12.3.2 Floor and roof slabs, and similar light slabs may be
considered as composite with concrete placed on them without the use of
steel ties, provided that the computed shear stress does not exceed 30 psi,
and the concrete surface is clean.
3.12.3.3 All floor and roof slabs and similar light slabs ill
which the computed horizontal shear on the contact surface exceeds 30 psi,
and all beams and any units subject to dynamic loading shall be connected
to the cast-in-place concrete, using steel ties passing through the contact
surface. The allowable shear stress shall be computed from the following:
q = (60 + 10,000 P8) psi
where: q = shear stress at contact surface
P.
area of steel passing through the contact surface divided
by the area of the con tact surface
fhe maximum and minimum values for p. shall be 0.005 and 0.001
respectively.
3.13 Cover and Spacing. of Prestressing. Steel

3.13.1 Cover. The minimum clear concrete covers, as specifieJ in
Table 4, shall be used for prestressing steel, and non-prestressed reinforcement.
TABLE 4
MINIMUM COVER OF PRESTRESSING STEEL
Minimum Concrete
CoYer
Location
Inch.
Beams and girders

(i) Prestressing steel, and main reinforcing steel
(ii) Stirrups and ties
Slabs and joists
Formed surfaces in contact with ground
(i) Prestressing Steel
(ii) Stirrups and Ties
Concrete surfaces poured in contact with ground
(i) Prestressing Steel
(ii) Stirrups and Ties
1~
2~
NOTE: Concrek surfaces exposed to corrosif1e aJmospheres, such as in chemical plants, shall
bf ,we. spuial consitleraJitm.
22
GSA STANDARD AU!
3.13.2 Spacing of Tendons and Ducts

3.13.2.1 The minimum clear spacing between pre-tensioning
steel wires or strands at ends of members shall be three times the diameter
of the steel or 1% times the maximum size of coarse aggregate, whichever
is greater.
3.13.2.2 The clear space between ducts at the ends shall be a
minimum of 1Y2 inches or 1Y2 times the maximum size of coarse aggregate,
whichever is greater.
3.13.2.3 Provided that the minimum spacing as specified in
Clauses 3.13.2.1 and 3.13.2.2 is maintained at the ends of a member, bundling of the prestressing tendons or ducts is permitted, under the following
condi tions:
(a) Bundling of strand or wires shall not be permitted within
250 diameters of the end of the member;
(b) Strands or wires may be bundled vertically in groups not
exceeding 6 strands or 8 wires;
(c) \\There more than one group is bundled in the same plane,
the clear vertical distance between groups shall be not less
than 1% times the maximum size of coarse aggregate and
in no case less than 1 inch. Lateral ties not less than 74 inch
diameter at not greater than 24-inch centres shall pass
through the space between groups and be adequately
anchored in the concrete on both sides;
(d) \Vhere groups of ducts or very large ducts are used, special
precautions shall be taken:
(i) To achieve adequate compaction of the concrete
during concrete placing;
(ii) To avoid rupture of the duct during pre-stressing; and
(iii) To avoid failure of the concrete cover to the duct.
4. MATERIALS
4.1 Concrete and Grout

4.1.1 Concrete. Concrete for use in prestressed work shall be "Controlled Concrete" as specified in CSA Standard A23.1-1960, Concrete
.Materials and l\1ethods of Concrete Construction.
4.1.2 Maximum Size of Aggregate. The maximum nominal size of
aggregate in the concrete shall be not greater than %' the width of the
minimum space through which concrete must pass to completely fill the
forms and surround the prestressing or reinforcing steels.
4.1.3 Grout
4.1.3.1 Except as provided in Clause 4.1.4, grout for filling cable
ducts shall be made of either:
(a) Portland cement and water; or
(b) Portland cement, fine sand, and water.
4.1.3.2 The water:cement ratio used shall be such that it permits
complete entry of the grout without undue segregation.
4.1.3.3 The grading of fine sand used for grouting shall be such
that:
(a) 100 per cent passes a No. 30 sieve;
-334-
Copyright NRC-CNRC

(b)
(c)
23
50 per cen t passes a No. 50 sieve; and

20 per cent passes a No. 100 sieve.
4.1.4. Admixtures. Admixtures"may be used in concrete or grout for

prestressed concrete provided that tests prove they have no harmful effect
on the concrete, grout, or steel. The use of calcium chloride or any admixture
containing calcium chloride will not be permitted.
4.2 Prestressing Steel
4.2.1 General. Prestressing steel may be specified in the form of high
tensile strength wire, high strength strand, or high strength alloy bar.
NOTE:
This Code is not intended to cover wire to be finish-drawn on site.
4.2.2 High Tensile Strength Wire

4.2.2.1 General. Wire which is finish-drawn by the manufacturer may be uncoated or galvanized. \\Tire supplied in coils shall be
capable of being payed out straight. All wire shall be stress-relieved. The
use of oil-tempered wire shall not be permitted.
4.2.2.2 Quality of Finished Wire. The finished wire shall be
sound and free of splits, surface flaws, scoring, and such defects and shall
not carry upon its surface oil, free lubricant, visible lead, scale, loose rust,
or evident pitting.
4.2.2.3 Dimensional Tolerances. All uncoated wires shall
have the following tolerances:
(a) 0.002 inches on nominal diameter; and
(b) 0.002 inches off-round from nominal diameter.
Galvanized wire shall have the following tolerances:
(a) 0.003 inches on nominal diameter; and
(b) 0.003 inches off-round from nominal diameter.
4.2.2.4 Process of Manufacture. High tensile strength wire

shall be cold drawn. The steel shall have the following analysis range:
(a) Carbon
-0.65-0.85 per cent;
(b) Manganese -0.40-1.10 per cent;
(c) Phosphorus-0.045 per cent maximum;
(d) Sulphur
-0.050 per cent maximum; and
(e) Silicon
-0.10-0.35 per cent.
4.2.2.5 Ultimate Tensile Strength
4.2.2.5.1 The minimum ultimate tensile strength of
uncoated wire shall be in conformance with the values in Table 5. While the
values in Table 5 are indicated as minima, the upper limit of the range shall
be 30,000 psi above these values, but all material in a shipment shall lie
within a 20,000 psi range.
-335-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
24
('.sA STANDARD AU!
TABLE 5
MINIMUM ULTIMATE STRENGTH OF UNCOATED WIRE
Nominal Diameter
Inc:hee
Sectional Area
Inc:hee l
Minimum Ultimate
Tenalle Strenath
.,.1
0.276
0.250
0.196
0.192
0.160
0.128
0.120
0.104
0.080
0.0598
0.0491
0.0304
0.0289
0.0201
0.0129
0.0113
0.0085
0.0050
225,000
230,000
240,000
240,000
250,000
260,000
260,000
270,000
280,000
4.2.2.5.2 The minImum ultimate tensile strength of

galvanized wire shall be 90 per cent of the values given in Table 5.
4.2.2.6 Yield Strength. The minimum yield strength, as determined by the 1 per cent extension under load method, measured on a gauge
length of 10 inches shall be 80 per cent of the specified minimum ultimate
tensile strength. The measurements shall be made as follows.
A load equal to 10 per cent of the minimum ultimate tensile strength
shall be applied to the specimen, after which the extensometer is attached
and adjusted to a reading of 0.001 inch per inch of gauge length. The load
shall then be increased until the extensometer indicates an extension of
1 per cent. The load at this value shall be not less than 80 per cent of the
specified minimum ultimate tensile strength. The extensometer used shall
be calibrated with the smallest division not larger than 0.0001 inch per inch
of gauge length.
4.2.2.7 Stress-Strain Curves. One stress-strain curve shall be
made by the manufacturer for each 50 tons of wire produced. A copy of this
curve shall be provided by the manufacturer for each project.
4.2.2.8 Elongation. The minimum elongation after rupture shall
be 3.5 per cent measured on a gauge length of 10 inches from an initiallo<ld
on the specimen equal to 10 per cent of the specified minimum ultimate
tensile strength.
4.2.2.9 Welds. Production welds in wires shall be cut out by the
manufacturer after the last cold reduction operation. No welds shall be
permitted after this operation.
NOTE:
This requirement does not apply to strand, see Clause 42.3.8.
4.2.3 Small Diameter High Strength Strand

4.2.3.1 General
4.2.3.1.1 Small Diameter strand is defined as either:
(a) 7-wire strand of up to and including Yz inch
diameter; or
(b) 2-wire strand of up to and including % inch
diameter, where diameter here shall be
taken as the slim of the diameters of the
two wires.
-336-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
25
4.2.3.1.2 The strands may be uncoated or galvanized

and unless hot galvanized shall be stress-relieved in wire or strand form.
4.2.3.1.3 All wire from which small diameter strand is
fabricated shall conform to the requirements of Clauses 4.2.2.2, 4.2.2.3 and
4.2.2.4.
4.2.3.1.4 Acceptance tests, when required, shaH be performed on the completed strand. Physical properties shall be based on the
total metallic area of the individual wires.
4.2.3.2 Lead of Strand and Diameter of Wires. The lead of
both 7- and 2-wire strand shall be 12 to 16 times the nominal diameter of
the strand. In 2-wire strand, the wires shall be of equal diameter. In 7-wire
strand, the diameter of the centre wire must be larger than the diameter of
any outer wire in accordance with Table 6.
TABLE 6
Nominal Diameter of
Strand
Minimum Difference In Diameter

Between Centre and Outer Wire
Inch
Inch
0.001
f).0015
0.002
0.0025
0.003
4.2.3.3 Breaking Strength of Uncoated Strand

4.2.3.3.1 Strahd may be purchased in two grades, 250 K
and 270 K. For design purposes the minimum ultimate strength of the 250 K
group (High Strength) 1'. may be taken as 250,000 psi. For the 270 K group
(Extra High Strength) 1'. may be taken as 270,000 psi.
4.2.3.3.2 The minimum breaking strength of uncoated
7-wire strand shall be in conformance with either Table 7A for 250 K strand
or Table 7B for 270 K strand.
NOTE:
In tensile testing the ends oj the specimen may be secured in th.e tensile machine by the
use oj V-grips, but in the case oj questionahle values, the ends shall be socketed or
otherwise anchored by a recognized procedure.
TABLE 7A
MINIMUM BREAKING STRENGTH OF
UNCOATED SEVEN -WIRE 250 K STRAND
Nominal Strand
Diameter
Inch
.5~
.\/
: 1\
7'
/Ili
Minimum Breaklna
Strenllth
Pounds
9,000
14,500
20,000
27,000
36,000
Appl'OJ:imate Steel
Area
Square Iru:bea
0.036
0.058
0.080
0.10<)
0.144
-337-
APcroJ:imate
Weill t of Strand
per 1001 feet
Pounds
122
198
274
373
494
Copyright NRC-CNRC
26
CSA STANDARD A135
TABLE 7B
MINIMUM BREAKING STRENGTH OF
UNCOATED SEVEN-WIRE 270 K STRAND
I App,""ma'e
Wel,h' of
Strand Per 1,000 Feet
Nominal Strand
Diameter
Minimum Breaking,
Streng,th
Approximate Steel
Area
Inch
Pounds
Square Inches
Pounds
10,500
17,000
23,000
31,500
41,300
0.039
0.063
0.085
0.117
0.153
132
215
292
.+00
525
~6
h
U6
J':2
4.2.3.3.3 The minimum breaking strength of 250 K uncoated 2-wire strand shall be in conformance with the values in Table 8.
~OTF;:
In tensile testirlg the ends of the specimen may be secured in the tensile machine by the
liSe of V-grips, but in the case nf questionable values, the ends shall br socketed or
otherwise anchored by a recognized procedure.
TABLE 8
MINIMUM BREAKING STRENGTH OF 250 K UNCOATED TWO-WIRE
STRAND
Nominal Strand
Diameter
Incb
0.24
).' OTE:
MinImum Breaking
Strengtb
Pound.
A~J:lmate
ApprOllimate Steel
Area
Square Inches
Weill t of Strand
per 1000 feet
Pounds
0.0226
77
5,650
Two-wire strand of strcngth other titan 250 K is considered as being outside the scope oj
this Standard.
The use of 2-wire strands of diameter other than that given in Table 8
is permitted provided that in such cases the ratio of minimum breaking
strength :steel area in the table is maintained.
4.2.3.4 Breaking Strength of Galvanized Strand. The minimum breaking strengt 11 of galvanized 250 K 7- or 2-wire strands shall be
90 per cent of the values given in Tables iA and 8 respectively.
).'on~:
The galmni:ing oj strand of strength olher than 250 K is considered as being outside lite
scope oj this Standard.
4.2.3.5 Yield Strength. The minimum yield strength, as determined by the 1 per cent extension under load method measured on a gauge
length of 24 inches, shall be 85 per cent of the specified minimum ultimate
tensile strength. The method of measurement shall be as specified for wire
in Clause 4.2.2.6.
4.2.3.6 The minimum total elongation under load shall be 3.5
per cent measured on a gauge length of 2+ inches. The method of measurement shall be as specified for wire ill Clause 4.2.2.8.
4.2.3.7 Stress-Strain Curves. One stress-strain'('urve shall he
made by the manufacturer for each 20 tOilS produced. A copy of this curve
shall be supplied by the manufacturer for each project.
-338-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
----------------~-----------...- - -..-~ ...---~.--- .........:... - - - - . : . -....
27
4.2.3.8 Welds. During the process of drawing the individual

wires for both 7- and 2-wire strands welding is permitted only prior to, or
at the size of the last heat treatment. During fabrication of 7-wire strand
butt-welded joints may be made in the individual wires, provided that there
is not more than one such joint in any 150-foot section of the completed
strand.
4.2.4 Large Diameter High Strength Strand
4.2.4.1 General
4.2.4.1.1 Large diameter is defined as a strand of no-
minal diameter greater than Y2 inch and comprised of 7, 9, 37 or more

uncoated or galvanized wires.
4.2.4.1.2 All wires from which large diameter strand is
fabricated shall conform to the requirements of Clauses 4.2.2.2, 4.2.2.3, and
4.2.2.4.
4.2.4.1.3 Acceptance tests, when required, shall be performed on the completed strand. Physical properties shall be based on the
total metallic area of the individual wires.
4.2.4.1.4 The strands may be uncoated or galvanized. If
the completed strand is not stress-relieved, the individual wires forming the
strand shall be either stress-relieved or hot galvanized prior to stranding.
4.2.4.2 Breaking Strength. The breaking strength or ultimate
tensile strength 1'. of uncoated large diameter strand shall lie in the range
215,000-240,000 psi, while for galvanized strand the range shall be 195,000220,000 psi.
4.2.4.3 Yield Strength. The minimum yield strength shall be
85 per cent of the specified minimum ultimate breaking strength of the
strand, as determined by the method specified in Clause 4.2.2.6.
4.2.4.4 Stress-Strain Curve. Stress-strain curves shall be
~upplied by the manufacturer for each project or for each 50 tons of strand,
whichever is smaller.
4.2.4.5 Elongation. The minimum elongation for stress-relieved
and non-stress-relieved strand shall be 4 per cent and 2 per cent respectively,
measured on a gauge length of 24 inches. The method of measurement shall
be as specified in Clause 4.2.2.8.
4.2.4.6 Prestressing. In cases where strands have not been
stress-relieved' by the manufacturer, the stress in such strands shall be
checked and, if necessary, readjusted 24 hours after completion of the
initial stressing.
4.2.5 High Strength Alloy Bars

4.2.5.1 General. All single prestressing elements having a
diameter greater than 0.300 inches shall be classified as high strength alloy
bars.
4.2.5.2 Process of Manufacture. High strength alloy bars shall
be manufactured from steel having the following analysis range:
(a) Carbon
-0.55-0.65 per cent;
(b) Manganese -0.70-1.00 per cent;
(c) Silicon
-1. 8(}-2. 20 per cent;
(d) Phosphorus -0. 040 maximum per cent; and
(e) Sulphur
-0.040 maximum per cent
28
eSA STANDARD AI3S
After rolling and heat treating, all bars shall be proof stressed, or cold
stretched, to 90 per cent of their specified ultimate strength.
4.2.5.3 Physical Properties. All high strength aHoy bars shall
conform to the following minimum requirements:
(a) Ultimate Tensile Strength
145,000 psi;
(b) Yield Strength at 0.2 per cent
offset
- 0.901'.;
(c) Elongation after rupture measured
on a gauge length of 20 diameters - 4 per cent; and
(d) Reduction of area after rupture - 15 per cent.
4.2.5.4 Stress-Strain Curves. One stress-strain curve shall be
made by the manufacturer for each 50 tons of material produced. A copy of
this curve shall be provided by the manufacturer for each project.
4.2.6 Testing
4.2.6.1 All prestressing steel shall be subject to the approval of
the design Engineer on the basis of tests carried out in a testing laboratory*
approved by the Engineer. Such tests shall be carried out on specimens of
the tendons truly representative of those to be used in the structure.
Svch a laboratory may be at the plant of the manufacturer.
4.2.6.2 Where wire. strand. or bar has rusted in storage, the use
of such material shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. who will
determine whether the steel suffered deterioration in such storage, and
whether it shall be used. The Engineer, at his discretion, may require
physical tests to make such determination.
4.2.7. Tagging. The size of wire, strand, or bar, coil number, mark of
manufacturer, and customer's order number shall be marked on a tag
securely attached to each coil or bundle. This tag shall also identify the
steel with its own stress-strain curve. :0[0 unmarked steel shall be allowed
011 the site.
4.3 Materials-Auxiliary
4.3.1 Details of all auxiliary prestressing materials, if at variance with
the specified details, or if 110 details are specified, must be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. The Engineer may at his discretion require performance tests to be carried out on truly representative specimens of the
materials proposed for lise, and in a manner approved by him.
4.3.2 Anchorage systems s'hall be capable of permanently resisting the
ul t ima te strengt h of the tendons.
5. CONSTRUCTION
5.1 General. Clause S relates to the construction of prestressed concrete,
and designates a minimum sL)J1dard for carrying out the work. The const ruction shall comply wit h ('S.-\. Standard A23.1-1960, Concrete Materials
and :\1 et hods of Concrete Collstrllction.
5.2 Dimensional Tolerances. \Vhere usual construction procedure.:;
would not result in work consistent with design requirements, the design
drawings and/or specifications must designate the allowable tolerances.
The tolerance for the alignment of prestressing tendons shaIl be taken as
(d/100
!/8 inch) unless otherwise specified.
29
5.3 Construction Sequence. \Vhere the drawings or specifications

indicate a sequence in construction operations, this must be followed unless
the designer gives permission for a specific variation in writing.
5.4 Formwork
5.4.1 The face of the forms shall be smooth to impart a good finish to
the concrete and be treated with a release agent to allow easy removal of
the forms without damaging the concrete. Care shall be exercised to keep
all prestressing materials and reinforcing steels free of the release agent.
5.4.2 Soffit forms shall be so constructed as to take into account the

difference in load distribution before and after prestressing. Where the
concrete casting must move along the formwork during the application of
the prestressing force, either in post-tensioning or during the transfer of
prestress in pre-tensioning, the formwork faces in contact with concrete
shall be designed to allow this movement. Where re-entrant angles occur in
the concrete sections, these portions of the formwork should be removed as
soon as possible after the concrete has set, to prevent shrinkage cracks.
5.5 Concrete. All concrete shall conform to CSA Standard A23.1-1960,
Concrete lVlaterials and Methods of Concrete Construction.
5.6 Stressing, Stressing Equipment, and Materials
5.6.1 High tensile steel at the time of its incorporation in the work shall
meet the requirements of Clause 4.2, and be free of kinks.
5.6.2 The drawings shall indicate either the arrangement of tendons

and their profiles, with tolerances, or the t'rajectory of the prestressing force,
again with tolerances. The allowable variation in prestress, unless otherwise
specified, shall be 5 per cent. This shall include any loss due to wire
breakage.
5.6.3 In cases where unbonded prestressing tendons are used because
of some unusual condition, they shall be galvanized (see Clause 4.2) and
further protected by an air-excluding covering (e.g. grease or asphalt held
in place by a sheath). At points of bearing, care shall be taken in the design
and construction to prevent removal of the above protection.
5.6.4 In post-tensioning, a pre-calibrated pressure gauge, tensiometer,
or load capsule shall be used as a check on the elongation. The supervisor
in charge of the tensioning shall be provided with the required extensions
of the tendons, and the maximum allowable jacking pressure. He shall keep
a log of actual extensions, jack pressures and anchorage losses if any. The
accuracy of the jack pressure gauge, tensiometer or load capsule shall be
checked at prescribed intervals.
5.6.5 Tensioning shall be carried out in a manner such that the jack is
coaxial with the tendon.
5.6.6 In pre-tensioning the method of accurately obtaining the prestressing force shall be approved by the Engineer.
5.6.7 In pre-tensioning, if curing is accelerated by application of heat

to the concrete, allowance must be made in the prestressing force to allow
for the change in temperature of the prestressing tendons from that at
initial tensioning to that at the time of final set of the concrete.
30
(;SA STANDARD
A13~
5.6.8 Transfer of the pre-tensioning force from the abutments to the

concrete shall be done in a manner to prevent rupture or overstressing of
the concrete.
5.6.9 If the design requires destruction of bond over certain portions
of the length of a prestressing tendon, such shall be accomplished by
masking the tendon, or other such positive means. The use of grease or
similar bond-breaking material will not be allowed.
5.6.10 Ducts or recessed end anchorage hardware formed in the concrete shall be true to size, line, and location before and after concreting.
The ends of the prestressing tendons shall finally be protected by 1Yz inches
of mortar. I n pre-tensioned units, 2 coats of a water resistant agent approved
by the Engineer shall be permitted in lieu of the mortar.
5.6.11 Where large diameter strands have not been stress-relieved by
the manufacturer, the stress in such strands shall be checked and, if necessary, readjusted <24 hours after the initial stressing operation.
5.7 Grouting and Jointing. The method and materials of groutll1g where
required by the design shan guarantee the complete encasement of the
prestressing tendons, exclusion of unassociated water, and the complete
filling of the duct. Care shall be taken to prevent freezing of fresh grout.
Before grouting commences, injection of water or air under pressure shall
be used to ascertain that grout can freely pass through the space left in the
duct. Ducts shall be wetted immediately prior to grouting. The grout shall
be mix~ in an approved mechanical mixer. From the mixer, the grout shall
pass through a strainer into pumping equipment provided with a re-circulating device for use when the grout is not being injected. Under normal
circumstances, the grout shall be used immediately. However, if it has not
been used after one hour from the time of mixing, or if it becomes too stiff
to pump, it shall be discarded.
NOTE: Examinations of grouted cables frequently reveal voids due to segregation or incomplete
intrusion. Elimination of such voids requires special attention in the selection of
materials and injection methods. Existence of such voids can jeopardize performance
due to disruptive expansion resulting from freezing of entrapped water or in corrosion
of reinforcement, especially if such voids are continuous and allow access of corrosive
salts. Close checks on the materials procedure and final results are therefore essential.
5.7.1 Ducts or recesses to be grouted shall he fitted with an entrance

and an exhaust each of which can be closed off tightly with a plug. The
entrance shall allow tight fitting for the grout injection nozzle. In the case
of eontinuous structures, exhausts shall be provided at all high points in
the ducts or recesses.
5.7.2 Injection shall be carried out from one end or the middle of the
duct or at such points approved hy the Engineer until excess of pure grout
has been forced from the exhaust or exhausts. The injection tubes shall be
kept topped up <with grout if a subsidence of grout occurs after disconnecting the grou t nozzle.
5.7.3
5.7.3.1 Joints between precast sectio:ls subsequently prestressed
together by post-tensioning shall be made in such a manner as to ensure
an even bearing over their contact face or faces. The ducts shall be formed
to accommodate the prestressing tendons, and shall be properly aligned and
kept free from jointing material.
....
31
5.7.3.2
5.7.3.2.1 Buttering the two ends together with mortar
and forcing them together will not be allowed.
5.7.3.2.2 Joints over 2>'2 inches wide shall be made with
vibrated concrete of a strength equal to the parent concrete.
5.7.3.2.3 Joints 7'2 to 2}1 inches shall be made using a
sand: cement mortar of sufficient strength to develop the full strength of
the beam.
5.7.3.3 Care shall be taken to ensure proper curing of the joint,
especially in cold weather.
5.8 Conlposite Construction. \\"here composite construction is used ill
structure, the contact surface of the precast unit shall be rough. In this
context, a rough surface is defined as one in which the variations in the
surface texture are as follows:
(a) ~ inch for light roof or floor slabs; or
(b) % inch for all beams and any units subject to dynamic loading.
;J
5. 9 Handlin~ and Erection. For precast work the drawings and/or

specifications shall indicate any special methods of handling, sequence of
erection and minimum concrete strengths when handled. Any deviation
from the indicated procedure shall be on written approval of the Engineer.
5.10 Test Loading

5.10.1 If there is all error or omission in the design or manufacture
such that the construction is suspect, a load test shall be carried out on the
part or parts of the structure in question.
5.10.2 Such a test shall not be performed until the partion subjected
to the load is at least 28 days old.
5.10.3 The test load shall not be applied until the member or members
involved have borne the full design dead load for at least 48 hours. This
stage shall be taken as the zero for deflection measurements.
5.10.4 The test load shall equal 1Y2 superimposed live loads plus that
part of the dead load, including the partition allowance which is not present,
and shall be applied in a manner that does not impose impact on the construction. This load shall remain in place for 24 hours and on removal of the
load, the deflection recovery in a further 24 hours shall be at least 85 per
cent, or another cycle of loading shall be applied.
5.10.5 If the construction does not recover at least 85 per cent of its
deflection due to the second application of live load measured after a lapse
of 24 hours, it will be deemed to have failed the test and it shall either be
strengthened or replaced.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-344-
r
(SA STANDARD S16-1969
STEEL STRUCTURES FOR BUILDINGS
,UBUSHED. DECEMBER, 1969

8Y THE
(INCORPORATED 1919)
178 RXDAl.E BOULEVARD
REXDAlE 603, ONTARIO, CANADA
COPYRIGHT REGJSTRED. CANADA. 1930
CONTENTS
List of lVlembers of Committee on Steel Structures for Buildings. . . . . .
Page
9
Preface.. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ................
10
Reference Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..........................
10
STANDARD
1. Scope ..................................................... .
13
2. Application ................................................ .
13
3. Definitions and Symbols .................................... .

3.1 Definitions................................. ......... ..
3.2 Symbols..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13
13
13
4. Drawings....................................... ..........
4.1 Design Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.2 Shop Drawings. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ....
4.3 Erection Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
15
15
15
16
5. Types of Construction~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .....

5.1 General .............................................. "
5.2 Continuous Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.3 Simple Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
16
16
16
17
6. Material: Standards and Identification.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

6.1 Standards... ................ .........................
6.2 Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
17
17
18
7. Loads and Forces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .........................
19
8. Deflection Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
21
9. Camber..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .........
21
10. Expansion and Contraction ................................. "
22
11. Corrosion Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...............
22
12. Design Lengths of Members ................................ "

12.1 Simple Span Flexurall\1embers. . . .. ......... ...........
12.2 Continuous Span Flexural Members. . . . . . . . . . . .. ........
12.3 Compression :Members .................. " .............
22
22
23
23
13. Slenderness Ratios ...................... '. ........... .....

13.1 General......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.2 Compression Members in Braced Frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.3 Compression Members in Trusses ..................... , . ..
13.4 Compression Members in Unbraced Frames ...... , .......
13.5 l\1aximum Slenderness Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
23
23
23
23
23
23
-347-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
eSA STANDARD S16
14. Width-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements ...............

14.1 Compression Elements Supported Along One Edge .........
14.2 Compression Elements Supported Along Two Edges .......
14.3 Circular Hollow Sections ...............................
14.4 Compression Elements of Compact Sections in Bending ....
.
.
.
.
.
24
24
24
25
25
15. Gross and Net Areas .......................................

15.1 Application ...........................................
15.2 Computation ..........................................
15.3 Diameter of Holes .....................................
15.4 Net Area of Parts Containing Holes ......................
15.5 Angles ...............................................
15.6 Pin-Connected Tension Members ........................
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
16. Allowable Stresses ..........................................

16.1 General. .............................................
16.2 Structural Steel .......................................
16.2.1 Axial Tension (Ft) ...............................
16.2.2 Axial Compression (Fa) ............... ~ ...........
16.2.3 Shear (Fv) ......................................
16.2.4 Bending (Fb) ....................................
16.2.5 Bearing (Fp) ....................................
16.3 Bolts .................................................
16.3.1 Shear (F v) ......................................
16.3.2 Tension (Ft ) ....................................
16.4 Welds ................................................
16.5 Cast or Forged Steel. ..................................
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
26
26
27
27
27
28
29
31
31
31
32
32
32
17. Allowable Combined Stresses ................................

17.1 Axial Compression and Bending .........................
17.2 Axial Tension and Bending .............................
17.3 Bolts in Shear and Tension .............................
17.4 Combined Shear and Tension in Girder Webs .............
.
.
.
.
.
32
32
33
33
34
18. Allowable Stresses: Repeated Loads ..........................

18.1 General ..............................................
18.2 Up to 10,000 Repetitions of Load ........................
18.3 Over 10,000 Repetitions of Load .........................
.
.
.
.
35
35
35
35
19. Beams and Girders ..........................................

19.1 Proportioning .........................................
19.2 Rotational Restraint at Points of Support ................
19.3 Webs ................. , ..............................
.
.
.
.
37
37
37
37
19.4 Flanges ............................................... .
37
STEEL STRUCTl'RES FOR BUILDINGS
19.5 Bearing Stiffeners ...

19.6 Intermediate Transverse Stiffeners.... .. . .... .. . . . . . . . . . . ..
19.7 Lateral Forces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
19.8 Web Crippling .................... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
19.9 Stability of Thin \Vebs.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
19.10 Openings.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..........................
19.11 Torsion........ . . . . . . . .. . ...........................
38
39
40
40
40
41
41
20. Open-\Veb Steel Joists. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

20.1 Scope... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.2 Definitions.............................................
20.3 Materials..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.4 Design.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.5 Spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.6 \Vidth-Thickness Ratios.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ..
20.7 Allowable Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.8 Tension Chord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.9 Compression Chord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.10 Webs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.11 Bearings..............................................
20.12 Fillers or Battens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.13 Connections and Splices. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.14 Shop Painting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ....
20.15 Anchorage.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ........................
20.16 Deflection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.17 Camber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.18 Span-Depth Ratios .................................. "
20.19 Bridging....... .......................................
20.20 Spacing of Bridging.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.21 Decking.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.22 Inspection................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..,
20.23 Handling and Erection. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.24 lVlanufacturing Tolerances. . . . .. ...................
42
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
44
45
45
45
45
45
46
46
46
46
47
48
48
48
49
21. Com posi te Design.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

21.1 General ........................................ " .....
21.2 Definitions ........................................... "
21.3 Composite Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
21.3.1 Effective Slab \Vidth for Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
21.3.2 Slab Reinforcement. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
21.3.3 Inter-connection........ . . .. .....................
49
49
49
50
50
50
50
L' A'
eSA STANDARD S16
21.3.4 Design of Composite~Beams with Shear Connectors..

21.3.5 Design of Encased Composite Beams Without Shear
Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
21.3.6 Vertical Shear and End Reactions ................ ,.
21.3.7 Shear Connectors .......... , . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
21.4 Concrete-Filled Hollow Structural Sections Used as Columns
50
51
51
52
53
22. General Requirements for Built-Up Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

22.1 General Requirements for Compression lVlembers. . . . . . . . . ..
22.2 General Requirements for Tension Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
22.3 General Requirements for Open Box-Type Beams and
Grillages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
56
23. General Requirements for Bracing ... ' .......... , , ..... , ...... ,
23.1 GeneraL........ . . . . . . .. . ........ ,...................
23.2 Bracing of Structures ............. , , , . , . , , , . . . . . . . . . . . ..
23.3 Bracing of Columns ............. , ................ ,.....
23.4 Bracing of Beams, Girders and Trusses. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
23.5 Special Consideration of Asymmetrical Sections. . . . . . . . . . ..
57
57
57
58
58
58
24. Connections ..................... , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

24.1 Alignment of Members. .. .., ..................... ,.....
24.2 Placement of Fasteners and Welds. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24.3 Unrestrained Members. . . . . . .. . .,.....................
24.4 Restrained Members ........ , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24.5 Connections of Tension or Compression :Members. . . . . .. . . ..
24.6 Bearing Joints in Compression Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24.7 Fillers..................... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24.8 Welds in Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24.9 Fasteners and Welds in Combination. . .. . . . . .. ...........
24.10 High-Strength Bolts (in Friction-Type Joints) and Rivets in
Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24.11 Connections Requiring High-Strength Bolts or Welds. . . . ..
24.12 Special Fasteners... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
58
58
58
59
59
59
59
60
60
60
60
60
61
25. Bolting Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

25.1 High-Strength Bolts.. ........ .. ......... ,..........
25.2 A307 Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.3 Effective Bearing Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.4 Long Grips ............ , . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......... ......
25.5 Minimum Pitch. . . . . . . . . . .. ...........................
25.6 lVlinimum Edge Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
25.7 l\1aximum Edge Distance. .. . .. . . .. .....................
25.8 Minimum Edge Distance in Line of Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
62
62
54
54
56
26. Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 BoIts. .... . . . . . . . ..

26.1 GeneraL..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
26.2 BoIts, Nuts, and Washers/" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
26.3 Bolted Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
26.4 Allowable Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
26.5 Applied Tension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
26.6 Shear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...........................
26.7 Bearing Stress ........................................ "
26.8 Installation...................... .....................
26.9 "Turn-of-N ut" Tightening ............................. "
26.10 Inspection .......................................... "
62
62
62
63
64
64
64
64
64
65
65
27. Welding........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
27.1 Arc-Welding... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
27.2 Resistance Welding ................................... "
27.3 Fabricator and Erector Qualification... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
68
68
68
68
28. Column Bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

28.1 Loads.................................................
28.2 Finishing..............................................
68
68
68
29. Anchor Bolts.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
69
30. Plastic Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

30.1 General................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.2 Permissible Types of Members and Frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.3 Limitations... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.4 Load Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.5 Maximum Slenderness Ratios.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.6 Tension Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.7 Compression Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
30.8 Beam-Columns ....................................... "
30.9 Shear. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.10 Web Crippling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.11 \Vidth-Thickness Ratios. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.12 Connections ......................................... "
30.13 Lateral Bracing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
30.14 Fabrication... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
69
69
69
69
69
69
70
70
70
71
71
72
72
73
74
31. Fabrication....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
31.1 General...............................................
31.2 Straightness of Material.. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
31.3 Gas Cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
74
74
74
74
-351-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
e8A STANDARD 816
31.4
31.5
31.6
31.7
31.8
31.9
Sheared or Gas Cut Edge Finish....... . ... . . . ... . . . ... ...

Holes for Bolts or Other Mechanical Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . ..
Bolted Construction ..........". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Welded Construction....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Finishing of Bearing Surfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Tolerances..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
74
74
74
75
75
75
32. Cleaning, Surface Preparation and Priming.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

32.1 General Requirements. ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
32.2 Requirements for Special Surfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
32.3 Surface Preparation. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
32.4 Primer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
75
75
76
76
76
33. Erection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
33.1 General................ .. .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ..
33.2 Temporary Loads and Stresses ......................... "
33.3 Adequacy of Temporary Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
33.4 Alignn:ent... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
33.5 Surface Preparation for Field Welding. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
33.6 Field Painting ........................................ "
33.7 Erection Tolerances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
34. Inspection................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
34.1 General ............................................. "
34.2 Co-operation..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
34.3 Rejection ............................................ "
34.4 Inspection of High-Strength Bolted Joints.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
34.5 Inspection of Welding. . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
34.6 Identification of Steel By Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
Appendix A - Standard Practice for Structural Steel For Buildings..
79
Appendix B -
Effective Lengths of Compression Members in Frames.
80
Appendix C
Criteria for Estimating Effective Column Lengths in

Con tinuous Frames. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
Graph Showing Allowable Stress for Compression

Members. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Appendix E - Assumed Factors of Safety.. . . ........ . . . . .. .. . . . ..
85
Appendix D -
4
4
4
5
5
5
r
COMMITTEE ON STEEL STRUCTURES FOR BUILDINGS

D. ]. L. KENNEDY (Chairman) ... University of Toronto, Toronto
H. A. KRENTZ (Secretary) . .......... Canadian Institute of Steel Construction, Toronto
P. F. ADAMS ...................... The University of Alberta, Edmonton
D. E. ALLEN ....................... National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa
5
5
W. W. BAIGENT .................... Canron Limited, Rexdale, Ontario
5
5
5
R. L. BOOTH ..................... C. D. Carruthers and Wallace, Consultants Limited,

Toronto
7
7
7
7
7
J. T. BISKUP ....................... Canadian Welding Bureau, Toronto
B. M. COREY ...................... The Steel Company of Canada, Limited, Hamilton

T. DEMBIE ........................ Dominion Bridge Company Limited, Toronto
T. M. DEVROOM ................... Department of Public Works, Ottawa
P. C. DINovo .................. Butler Manufacturing Company (Canada), Ltd.,
Burlington
J. E. DyKEMAN .................... Hawker Siddeley Canada Ltd., Windsor
J. GIOVANETTI ..................... Ontario Hydro, Toronto
M. HUEPEDEN .................... Department of National Defence, Ottawa
W. C. KIMBALL .................... The Algoma Steel Corporation, Limited, Sault Ste.
Marie
J. C. KING ........................ Canadian National Railways, Montreal
F. M. KRAUS ............
G. L. KULAK ............
H. PENNER .....
0.0
Consulting Engineer, Montreal

Nova Scotia Technical College, Halifax
Smith Carter Parkin, Winnipeg
C. J PIMENOFF .................... Dominion Bridge Company, Limited, Montreal

0
H. E. H. Roy ...................... John B. Parkin Associates, Don Mills

J. S. SMITH.
....
Canadian Pacific Railway Company, Montreal
Do L. TARLTON .................... Tarlton Suhanic Consultants, Toronto

G. A. WEBSTER .................... Dominion Foundries and Steel, Limited, Hamilton
]. WINTRIP ....................... Bridge and Tank Company of Canada Ltd.,
Hamilton
D. T. WRIGHT ..................... Committee on University Affairs, Toronto
In addition to the members of the Committee, the following made valuable contribution to
the development of this Standard in his capacity as noted:
N. C. LIND (Alternate)
J. SPRINGFIELD ..
University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario

Co D. Carruthers and Wallace, Consultants Limited
Toronto
10
eSA STANDARD S 16
PREFACE
This edition supersedes the sixth edition published in 1965 which was
preceded by those of 1924, 1930, 1940, 1954 and 1961.
Even though extensive rewriting was done for the 1965 edition, this
seventh edition exhibits quite considerable technical and philosophical changes.
The technical changes, not listed here, based on the latest developments
in world wide research including that done at Canadian Universities, reflect
the increased understanding of the behaviour of steel as a material and the
behaviour of steel elements, members, and structures throughout their
loading history. Such understanding forms the only proper basis for structural
design.
A major philosophical change incorporated in Section 7 on Loads and
Forces is that combinations of loads are multiplied by a factor of one or less
reflecting the probability that the loads will occur simultaneously thus allowing
one basis of allowable stresses to be specified throughout the Standard for
allowable stress design methods.
Throughout, every effort has been made to be simple, concise, and yet
precise.
The Standard sets out minimum requirements for the design, fabrication,
and erection of steel buildings of usual proportions, is not to be considered
as a textbook and, of course, should only be used by engineers competent in
this field. When more complex members or structures require more detailed
treatment than provided in the Standard, such competent engineers would be
expected to provide minimum requirements equivalent to those set out in the
Standard.
The inclusion of clauses relating to the fabrication and erection of
structures in the Standard should serve to remind designers that the supervision of construction by competent engineers is equally important as the
design. Design and construction must be considered together.
This edition has been adopted by the Associate Committee en the
National Building Code as the reference standard for Section 4.6 of the
National Building Code for 1970.
This Standard was prepared by the Committee on Steel Structures for
Buildings, under the jurisdiction of the Sectional Committee on Structures,
and was approved by these Committees.
REXDALE, DECEMBER, 1969
NOTE:

publications are subject to periodic review. Suggestions for improvement
brought to the attention of the appropriate Committee for consideration.
should be worded in such a manner as to permit a simple "yes" or uno"
All enquiries regarding this Standard should be addressed to Canadian
This publication makes reference to the following and the year dates
shown indlcate the latest is<;ues available at the time of printing;
CSA Standards A23.1-1967,
B95-1962,
G28-1968,
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction;
Surface Texture (Roughness, Waviness, and
Lay);
Carbon-Steel Castings for General Application:
r
G38-1953,
G40.1-1966,
G40.8-1960,
G40.11-1969,
G40.12-1964,
G40.13-1969,
G40.16-1969,
G40.17-1969,
G189-1966,
S136-1963,
W47-1947,
W48.1-1969,
W 48.3-1968,
W48.4-1969,
W48.5-1969,
W48.6-1969,
W55.2-1957,
VV55.3-1965,
W59.1-1969,
Heavy Steel Shaft Forgings;

General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled
Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars
for Structural Use;
Structural Steels with Improved Resistance
to Brittle Fracture;
High Strength Low-Alloy Atmospheric Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steels;
General Purpose Structural Steel;
Structural Steel Welded Shapes: Manufacture
and Material;
Hot-Formed Welded or Seamless Hollow
Structural Sections;
Cold-Formed Welded or Seamless Hollow
Structural Sections;
Sprayed Metal Coatings for Atmospheric
Corrosion Protection;
Design of Light Gauge Steel Structural
Members;
Welding Qualification Code for Application to
Fabricating and Contracting Firms;
Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes;
Low-Alloy Steel Arc-Welding Electrodes;
Solid Mild Steel Electrodes for Gas Metal-Arc
Welding;
Mild Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc
Welding;
Bare Mild Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for
Submerged Arc Welding;
Resistance Welding Practice;
Resistance Welding Qualification Code for
Fabricators of Structural Members Used in
Buildings;
General Specification for Welding of Steel
Structures (Metal-Arc Welding);
CGSB* Specifications 1-GP-14d-1964,

1-GP-40d-1968,
Primer: Red Lead in Oil;

Primer: Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd
Type;
1-GP-81d-1967, Primer: Alkyd, for Vehicles and
Equipment (Type 1);
1-GP-140c-1968, Primer: Red Lead, Iron Oxide, Oil
Alkyd Type;
1-GP-166a-1968, Primer: Basic Lead Silico-Chromate,
Oil Alkyd Type;
ASTM t Standards A27 -65,
Mild- To Medium-Strength Carbon-Steel

Castings for General Application;
Structural Steel;
A36-68,
A148-65, High-Strength Steel Castings for Structural
Purposes;
A153-67, Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware;
A235-67, Carbon Steel Forgings for General Industrial
Use;
A237-67, Alloy Steel Forgings for General Industrial
Use;
A242-68a, High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel;
A307-68, Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally
Threaded Standard Fasteners;
-355-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
11
12
e8A STANDARD 816
A32S-68b, High Strength Steel Bolts for Structural Steel

Joints Including Suitable Nuts and Plain
Hardened Washers;
A440-66, High-Strength Structural Steel;
A441-68a, High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Manganese Vanadium Steel;
A490-67, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for
Structural Steel Joints;
AS14-68, High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered
Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding;
AS29-64, Structural Steel with 42,000 psi (29.5 kgf/mm2)
Minimum Yield Point (Y2 in. (12.7 mm)
Maximum Thickness);
AS63-66, Carbon Steel Nuts;
AS72-68, High Strength Low Alloy ColumbiumVanadium Steels of Structural Quality;
AS88-68, High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with
50,000 psi Minimum Yield Point to 4 in. Thick;
American Nationalt Standards B18.2.1-196S, Square and Hex Bolts and
Screws, Including Hex Cap
Screws and Lag Screws;
B18.2.2-196S, Square and Hex Nuts;
SSPC Standards SP2-63,
Hand Tool Cleaning;
SP3-63,
Power Tool Cleaning;
Flame Cleaning of New Steel;
SP4-63,
White Metal Blast Cleaning;
SPS-63,
Commercial Blast Cleaning;
SP6-63,
SP7-63,
Brush-Off Blast Cleaning;
Near-White Blast Cleaning;
SP10-63T,
PS12.00-68T, Guide to Zinc Rich Coating Systems.
Canadian Government Specifications Board.
tAmerican Society for Testing and Materials.
tAmerican National Standards Institute (formerly United States of America
Standards Institute).
Steel Structures Painting Council.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
13
S16-1969

1. SCOPE
1.1 This Standard provides rules and requirements for the design, fabrication, and erection of steel structures for buildings. The term "steel
structures" relates to structural members and frames which consist primarily
of structural steel components, including the detail parts, welds, bolts, or
other fasteners required in fabrication and erection.
1.2 This Standard does not cover the design, fabrication, and erection of
steel structures other than for buildings except as permitted by the authority
1.3 \Vhere reference is made to other publications, such references shall be
considered to refer to the latest edition approved by the organization
issuing that publication.
2. APPLICATION
2.1 This Standard applies unconditionally to steel structures for buildings
except as noted in Clause 2.2.
2.2 Supplementary rules or requirements may be necessary for unusual
types of construction and for steel structures which:
(a) Have great height;
(b) Are required to be movable or be readily disman tIed;
(c) Are exposed to severe environmental conditions;
(d) Are required to satisfy aesthetic, architectural, or other requirements of a non-structural nature;
(e) Employ materials or products not listed in Clause 6;
(f) Have other special features that could affect design, fabrication,
or erection.
2.3 Wherever empirical or semi-empirical formulas are provided in this

Standard as a design convenience, a rational design based on theory,
analysis, and engineering practice acceptable to the authority having
jurisdiction may be used instead. In such cases the design shall provide
nominal factors of safety at least equal to those assumed in the provisions
of this Standard (See Appendix E).
3. DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS
3.1 Definitions. The following definitions apply to this Standard:

Approved means approved by the authority having jurisdiction;
Authority having jurisdiction means the professionally qualified
representa tive of the purchaser or the responsible officials with legal authority to control building construction, as applicable.
3.2 Symbols. The following symbols are used throughout this Standard.
Deviations from them, and additional nomenclature, are noted where they
-357-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
14
CSA STANDARD S16
appear. Dimensions in inches and forces in kips (1,000 pounds) are assumed
unless otherwise noted.
A
Area
Ao
Area of concrete flange in composite design
Af
Flange area
AI!.
Gross area
An
Critical net area
As
Area of steel beam in composite design
Ast
Area of stiffener or pair of stiffeners
Aw
Web area
a
Centre-to-centre distance between transverse web stiffeners
a'
Length of cover plate termination
b
Width of flange or plate, or leg of angle
Co
Maximum slenderness ratio for short columns in column formula
Maximum slenderness ratio for intermediate columns in column
Cp
formula
Cm
Coefficient used to determine equivalent uniform bending stress
in beam-columns
D
Outside diameter of circular section; diameter of rocker or
roller; also stiffener factor
d
Depth; overall depth of a SE"ction
E
Elastic modulus of steel (29,000 ksi assumed)
F
Allowable stress (ksi unless noted)
Fa
Allowable axial stress in compression
Fb
Allowable bending stress
F be
Allowable bending stress in compression
F bt
Allowable bending stress in tension
F' e
Specified compressive strength of concrete at 28 days
Fp
Allowable stress in compression due to bearing
Ft
Allowable axial stress in tension
Fv
Allowable shear stress
Fy
Specified minimum yield point or yield strength
F'e
Euler buckling stress divided by factor of safety
f
Computed stress (ksi unless noted)
fa
Computed axial stress in compression
fb
Computed bending stress
ft
Computed axial stress in tension
fv
Computed shear stress
g
Transverse spacing between fastener gauge lines (gauge distance)
h
Clear depth of web between flanges
I
Moment of inertia
K
Effective length factor
KL
Effective length
k
Distance from outer face of flange to web toe of fillet of I-type
sections
L
Length
Lor
Maximum unbraced length adjacent to a plastic hinge
Moment
M
Ml
Smaller end moment of a beam-column
M2
Larger end moment of a beam-column
Mp
Plastic moment
m
Coefficient used in column formula
N
Length of bearing of an applied load; number of shear connectors required
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-358-
l\u
P
PI
P,
Py
q
R
r
rt
S.
Str
s
T.S.
t
tf
V
V,
w
x
y
a
f3
y;
15
Number of shear connectors required for full composite action

Axial load (kips unless noted)
Euler buckling load
Factored axial load in plastic design
Axial load at yield stress
Value assigned to a shear connector
End reaction or concentrated transverse load applied to a
flexural member (kips unless noted)
Radius of gyration
radius of gyration about its axis of symmetry at a tee section
comprising the compression flange and 3i of the web (inches)
Section modulus of steel beam in composite design
Transformed section modulus of a composite beam
Centre-to-centre spacing (pitch) between successive fastener
holes in line of stress
Specified minimum tensile strength
Thickness
Flange thickness
Statical shear
Statical shear produced by factored load in plastic design
Web thickness
Subscript relating to strong axis of a member
Subscript relating to weak axis of a member
Amplification factor used in design of beam-columns by allowable stress method; also value used in determining combined
shear and tension on bolts
Amplification factor used in design of beam-columns by plastic
method; also value used in determining combined shear and
tension on bolts; also ratio Ss/Str in composite design
Probability factor for various load combinations
4. DRAWINGS
4.1 Design Drawings
4.1.1 Design drawings shall be drawn to a scale adequate to convey
the required information. The drawings shall show a complete design of the
structure with members suitably designated and located, including such
dimensions and detailed description as necessary to permit the preparation
of shop and erection drawings. Floor levels, column centres, and offsets
shall be dimensioned.
4.1.2 Design drawings shall show clearly the type or types of construction as defined in Clause 5 to be employed, and shall designate the material
or product Standards applicable to the members and details depicted (see
Clause 6). Drawings shall be supplemented by data concerning the assumed
loads, shears, moments, and axial forces to be resisted by all members and
their connections when needed for the preparation of shop drawings.
4.1.3 Where high-strength bolted joints are required to resist shear
between connected parts, the design drawings shall indicate the type of
joint, friction, or bearing, to be provided (see Clause 26).
4.1.4 If required, camber of beams, girders, and trusses shall be called
for on the design drawings.
4.2 Shop Drawings. Shop drawings giving complete information necessary
for the fabrication of the various members and components of the structure,
-359-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
16
eSA STANDARD S16
including the required material and product standards and the location,
type and size of all mechanical fasteners and welds, shall be prepared in
advance of fabrication, and submitted for approval when so specified. Shop
drawings shall distinguish clearly between mechanical fasteners and welds
required for shop fabrication and those required in the field.
4.3 Erection Drawings. Erection drawings shall show the sizes and
locations of all members and shall show all necessary dimensions and details
for setting anchor bolts. Elevations of all column bases and bearing plates
shall be shown clearly. Erection drawings also shall show clearly all required
field connections, including the details and information necessary for
assembly of the structure.
5. TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
5.1 General
5.1.1 Two basic types of construction and associated design assumptions, designated "Continuous" and "Simple", are permitted under the
conditions stated in Clauses 5.2 and 5.3 respectively. The proportioning
of members and their connections shall depend upon the type or types of
construction chosen and the forces to be resisted.
5.1.2 Composite construction, defined as construction which depends

upon the participation of structural elements of steel or other materials in
resisting loads and forces jointly with structural steel members, is permitted
under this Standard. Specific types of steel-concrete composite construction
are covered in Clause 21. Other types may be used when approved. In such
cases the design shall be based upon a rational analysis verified by a suitable
testing programme. The nominal factors of safety shall be at least equal
to those implied in this Standard for allowable stress design, except that
the basic design load shall not exceed 50 per cent of the predicted ultimate
load when this prediction is based on a limited number of tests only, or
when information based on tests is extrapolated to cover actual design
situations.
5.2 Continuous Construction
5.2.1 Continuous construction assumes that beams and girders are
generally continuous over, or rigidly framed to, supports and that beam-tocolumn connections at working load have sufficient rigidity to hold virtually
unchanged the original angles between intersecting members.
5.2.2 Two design methods are provided and either may be selected, as
applicable:
(a) Allowable Stress Method. lVlembers and frames shall be proportioned to resist the forces produced by the specified design loads
assuming moment distribution in accordance with the elastic
theory and without exceeding the allowable stresses given in
Clauses 16, 17, and, if applicable, 18;
(b) Plastic Desi~n Method. vVithin the limitations of Clause 30,
members and frames shall be proportioned, in accordance with the
plastic theory and the provisions of Clause 30, to resist the forces
produced by the specified design loads multiplied by the prescribed
load factor.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-360-

17
5.3 Simple Construction

5.3.1 Simple construction assumes that the ends of beams and girders
are connected to transmit transverse shear only and are free to rotate under
load in the plane of loading.
5.3.2 For this type of construction the computed stresses shall not
exceed the allowable stresses given in Clauses 16, 17, and, if applicable, 18.
5.3.3 Simple construction may be used as the basis to design a building
frame for gravity loading. Lateral stability must be ensured by a suitable
system of bracing or shear walls or by the design of part of the structure
as continuous construction, except as provided in Clause 5.3.4.
5.3.4 A building frame designed to support gravity loads on the basis
of simple construction may be proportioned to resist lateral loads due to
wind or earthquake by distributing the moments resulting from such
loading between selected joints of the frame by a recognized empirical
method, provided that:
(a) The connection and connected members be proportioned to resist
the moments and forces caused by lateral loads;
(b) The beam or girder can support the full gravity load when assumed
to act as a sim pIe beam;
(c) The connection has adequate capacity for inelastic rotation when
subjected to full gravity and lateral loading ; and
(d) Tl:te stresses in the mechanical fasteners or welds of the connection
do not exceed the values given in Clause 16 when the connection is
assumed to be carrying the moment at which inelastic rotation
would occur.
6. MATERIAL: STANDARDS AND IDENTIFICATION

6.1 Standards
6.1.1 General. Acceptable material and product Standards (latest
editions) for use under this Standard are listed in Clauses 6.1.2 to 6.1.6
inclusive. Materials and products other than those listed also may be used
if approved. Approval shall be based on published specifications which
establish the properties, characteristics, and suitability of the material or
product to the extent and in the manner of those Standards which are listed.
6.1.2 Structural Steel

(a) CSA G40.8,
(b) CSA G40.11 ,
(c) CSA G40.12,
(d) CSA G40.13,
(e) CSA G40.16,
(f) CSA G40.17,
Structural Steels With Improved Resistance to

Brittle Fracture;
High Strength Low-Alloy Atmospheric CorrosionResisting Structural Steels;
General Purpose Structural Steel;
Structural Steel Welded Shapes: Manufacture and
.Material;
Hot-Formed Welded or Seamless Hollow Structural
Sections;
Cold-Formed Welded or Seamless Hollow Structural
Sections;
-361-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
18
eSA STANDARD S16
(g) ASTl\f A36,

(h) ASTl\1 A242,
(i) ASTlVI A440,
(j) ASTM A441,
(k) ASTl\'1 A514,
(1) ASTTvI A529,
(m) ASTM A572,

(n) ASTM A588,
Structural Steel;
High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel;
High-Strength Structural Steel;
High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Manganese
Vanadium Steel;
High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered
Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding;
Structural Steel with 42,000 psi (29.5 kgfjmm2)
Minimum Yield Point (:Y2 in. (12.7 mm) Maximum
Thickness) ;
High Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Steels of Structural Quality;
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with
50,000 psi l\1inimum Yield Point to 4 in. Thick.
6.1.3 Cast Steel

Carbon-Steel Castings for General Application;
Mild- to Medium-Strength Carbon-Steel Castings
for General Application;
(c) ASTM A148, High-Strength Steel Castings for Structural Purposes.
(a) CSA G28,

(b) ASTM A27,
6.1.4 Forged Steel

(a) CSA G38,
(b) AST11 A235,
(c) ASTM A237,
Heavy Steel Shaft Forgings;

Carbon Steel Forgings for General Industrial Use;
Alloy Steel Forgings for General Industrial Use.
6.1.5 Bolts
(a) ASTM A307,
Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally

Threaded Standard Fasteners:
(b) ASTlVl A325, High Strength Steel Bolts for Structural Steel
Join ts I ncl uding Sui table Nuts and Plain Hardened
\Vashers;
(c) ASTlVl A490, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for
Structural Steel Joints.
6.1.6
Weldin~
Electrodes
(a) CSA W48.1,

(b) CSA W48.3,
(c) CSA W48.4,
(d) CSA W48.5,
(e) CSA \V48.6,
Mild Steel Covered Arc-vVelding Electrodes;

Low-Alloy Steel Arc-Welding Electrodes;
Solid :Mild Steel Electrodes for Gas Metal-Arc
Welding;
Mild Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding;
Bare Mild Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc \Velding.
6.2 Identification
6.2.1 Methods. The materials and products used shall be identified as
to specification, including type or grade, if applicable, by one of the following
means, except as provided in Clauses 6.2.2 and 6.2.3:
Copyright NRC-CNRC
~362-
19
(a) Mill Test Certificates or Producer's Certificates satisfactorily

correlated to the materials or products to which they pertain;
(b) Legible markings on the material or product made by its Producer
in accordance with the applicable material or product Standard.
6.2.2 Unidentified Structural Steel. Unidentified structural steel

shall not be used, unless approved. If approved for use, unidentified structural steel shall be designed on the basis of assumed mechanical properties
in accordance with Clause 16.1.4.
6.2.3 Tests to Establish Identification. Unidentified structural
steel may be tested to establish identification when permitted by the
Testing shall be done by an approved testing agency in accordance with
CSA Standard G40.1, General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel
Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use. The test results,
taking into account both mechanical properties and chemical composition,
shall form the basis for classifying the steel as to specification and for the
determination of allowable stresses.
6.2.4 Affidavit. The fabricator, if requested, shall provide an affidavit
stating that the materials and products which he has used in fabrication conform to the applicable material or product Standards called for by the design
drawings or specifications.
7. LOADS AND FORCES
7.1 Structural steelwork shall be proportioned to sustain the design loads
and forces. When the allowable stress method of design is used, the allowable
stresses given in this Standard shall not be exceeded. When the plastic
method of design is used (see Clause 30), a load factor of 1.70 minimum
shall be employed.
7.2 Design loads and forces shall be those resulting from dead load and
live load acting in the most critical combination, using the appropriate
probability factor, 1/;.
7.3 Dead load shall include the weight of the steelwork plus all other
permanent construction supported thereby, including permanent partitions
and permanent equipment. Prestressing forces, if any, shall be included
wi th dead load effects.
7.4 Live load shall include loads due to use and occupancy of the building,
movable partitions, movable equipment, snow, rain, wind, earthquake,
soil or hydrostatic pressure, impact, and any other live loads stipulated
by the applicable Building By-law or the authority having jurisdiction.
7.5 Unless otherwise specified, the following loads and forces need not be
considered to act simultaneously:
(a) Wind loads in combination with earthquake loads;
(b) Snow loads in combination with rain loads.
7.6 If it can be shown by engineering principles, or if it is known by experience, that temperature or differential settlement affects structural safety
and serviceability, the effect shall be considered in strength computations.
20
eSA STANDARD S16
TABLE 1
LOAD COMBINATIONS AND PROBABILITY FACTORS
Pro ba bi1i;ty
Factorq,
Dead Load
Live Load Other

Than Wind or
Earthquake
Wind or
Earthquake
1.0
0.7S
7.7 Unless otherwise specified, the load combinations given in Table 1

shall be considered. The total of the loads for each combination shall be
multiplied by the appropriate value of the probability factor.1/;.
7.8 Tension and compression members, and their connections, in which a

stress reversal would occur by application of four-thirds of the liye load and
full dead load shall be proportioned for the resultant load of opposite sign
as well as for other load combinations as given in Table 1.
7.9 Tension and compression members, and their connections, in which a

stress reversal would occur by application of four-thirds of the specified
lateral loads acting in conjunction with dead load and no gravity live load
shall be proportioned for the resultant load of opposite sign as well as for
other load combinations as given in Table 1.
7.10 Suitable provision shall be made in the design for the effect of live
load which induces impact and/or vibration. In severe cases, such as structural supports for heavy machinery which causes substantial impact or
vibration when in operation, the possibility of harmonic resonance, fatigue,
or unacceptable vibration shall be investigated.
7.11 In the absence of a dynamic analysis, or if not otherwise specified by

the authority having jurisdiction, live load which causes impact shall be
increased according to the following percentages:
(a) Elevator supports................................. 100 per cent
(b) Girders, and their connections, supporting power-operated cranes
................................................ 25 per cent
(c) Girders, and their connections, supporting hand-operated cranes
................................................. 10 per cent
(d) Supports for light machinery, shaft or motor-driven ............. .
....................................... 20 per cent minimum
(e) Supports for reciprocating machinery or power-driven units ...... .
" ................................. SO per cent minimum
(f) Hangers supporting mezzanines and balconies ......... 33 per cent
7.12 To provide for the effect of moving crane trolleys, the lateral force on
crane runways shall be not less than 20 per cent if power-operated, or 10 per
- -.......
, ...- - - - - - = - - - - - -..
-~--
..-
21
cent if hand-operated, of the sum of the weights of the lifted load and the
crane trolley (exclusive of other parts of the crane) applied at the top of the
rail, one-half on each side of the runway. This lateral force shall be considered to act in either direction normal to the runway rail.
7.13 The longitudinal force on crane runways supporting power-propelled
cranes shall be not less than 10 per cent of the sum of the maximum wheel
loads of the crane, applied at the top of the rail.
7.14 Suitable provision shall be made for loads imposed on the steel structure during its erection and during subsequent construction of the building.
8. DEFLECTION REQUIREMENTS
8.1 Steel members and frames shall be proportioned so that deflection due
to design loads is within acceptable limits for the nature of the materials to
be supported and the intended use and occupancy.
8.2 Unless otherwise specified, deflection due to live load shall not exceed
1/320 of the span for members supporting floors, 1/360 of the span for
members supporting plastered ceilings, 1/240 of the span for members
supporting asphaltic roof coverings, and 1/180 of the span for members
supporting roofs of sheet metal and/or elastic membranes. Roofs with
insufficient slope to prevent ponding shall be designed to withstand any
loads likely to occur as a result of ponding.
8.3 Special consideration shall be given to floor systems which may be
susceptible to vibration (see also Clause 7.10).
8.4 The total sway (or drift) of complete structures under the influence of
design loads shall be computed by a rational method and shall be checked
to en~ure that:
(a) The validity of buckling strength assumptions used in design is
maintained;
(b) Non-structural elements whose nature is known at the time the
structural design is made will not be damaged as a result of deflection of the structure under design wind and gravity loads.
Unless otherwise specified, the total drift per storey under design wind
and gravity loads shall not exceed 1/480 of the storey height when walls
and partitions susceptible to cracking are to be provided nor 1/300 of the
storey height when walls, partitions, and other building elements are known
to be unaffected by such movement. These limits need not apply to industrial
buildings or sheds if it is known by experience that greater movement is
acceptable and does not result in hazard to occupants or adjacent construction.
8.5 In general, structures whose ratio of height to effectively resisting width
exceeds 4 to 1 or other unusually flexible structures shall be investigated
for their response to dynamic as well as static lateral loading. Cumulative
lateral movements shall be investigated and lateral accelerations of the
structure shall be checked to ensure that such accelerations are acceptable
to the intended occupancy of the building.
9. CAMBER
9.1 Camber of beams, trusses or girders, if required, shall be called for on
the design drawings. Trusses of 80 foot or greater span generally should be
-365-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
22
CSA STANDARD S16
cambered for approximately the dead load deflection. Crane girders of

75-foot or greater span generally should be cambered for approximately the
dead-plus-half-live-Ioad deflection (see also Clause 20.17 for requirements
for open-web joists).
9.2 Any special camber requirements necessary to bring a loaded member

into proper relation with the work of other trades shall be stipulated on the
design plans.
10. EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
10.1 Suitable provision shall be made for expansion and contraction com
mensurate with the service and erection conditions of the structure.
11. CORROSION PROTECTION
11.1 Steelwork shall have sufficient corrosion protection to minimize any
corrosion likely to occur in the service environment.
11.2 Corrosion protection shall be provided by means of suitable alloying
elements in the steel, by protective coatings or by other effective means,
either singly or in combination.
11.3 Localized corrosion likely to occur from entrapped water, excessive
condensation, or from other factors shall be minimized by suitable design
and detail. Where necessary, positive means of drainage shall be provided.
11.4 If the corrosion protection specified for steelwork exposed to the
weather, or to other environments in which progressive corrosion can occur,
is likely to require maintenance or renewal during the service life of the
structure the steelwork so protected shall have a minimum thickness of
% inch (exclusive of fill plates and shims).
11.5 The minimum required thickness of steelwork situated in a noncorrosive environment and therefore not requiring corrosion protection,
is governed by the provisions of Clause 14.
11.6 Interiors of buildings conditioned for human comfort may be generally assumed to be a non-corrosive environment; however the need for
corrosion protection shall be assessed and protection shall be furnished in
those areas where it is deemed to be necessary.
11.7 Corrosion protection of the inside surfaces of enclosed spaces per
manentIy sealed off from any external source of oxygen is unnecessary.
12. DESIGN LENGTHS OF MEMBERS
12.1 Simple Span Flexural Members. Beams, girders, and trusses may
be designed on the basis of simple spans whose effective length is the
distance between centres of gravity of supporting members. Alternatively,
the effective span length of beams and girders, for design purposes, when
treated as simple spans, may be the actual length of such members measured
centre-to-centre of end connections. The effective length of trusses designed
as simple spans may be the distance between the extreme working points
of the system of triangulation employed. In all cases the design of columns
or other supporting members shall provide for the effect of any significant
moment or eccentricity arising from the manner in which a beam, girder,
or truss may actually be connected or supported.
23
12.2 Continuous Span Flexural Members. Beams, girders, or trusses

having full or partial end restraint due to continuity or cantilever action,
shall be proportioned to carryall moments, shears, and other forces at any
section assuming the span, in general, to be the distance between centres
of gra vi ty of supporting members. Supporting members shall be proportioned to carryall moments, shears, and other forces induced by the continuity of the supported beam, girder, or truss.
12.3 Compression Members. Compression members shall be designed
on the basis of their effective length (KL), the product of effective length
factor (K), and unbraced length (L). Unless otherwise specified in this
Standard the unbraced length (L) shall be taken as the length of the compression member centre-to-centre of connections of restraining members.
The unbraced length may differ for different cross-sectional axes of the
compression member. At the bottom storey of a multi-storey structure,
or for a single-storey structure, (L) shall be taken as the length from the
top of the base plate to the centre of the connection of restraining members
at the next higher level.
13. SLENDERNESS RATIOS
13.1 General. The slenderness ratio of a compression member shall be
taken as the ratio of effective length (KL) to the corresponding radius of
gyration (r). The slenderness ratio of a tension member shall be taken as
the ratio of unbraced length (L) to the corresponding radius of gyration.
The effective length factor (K) for compression members may be determined from the degree of rotational and translational restraint afforded
at the ends of the unbraced length. (For recommended values of (K) and a
method of computing (K) see Appendices Band C respectively.)
13.2 Compression Members in Braced Frames. Unless otherwise

specified in this Standard, or unless analysis shows that a smaller value is
applicable, the effective length factor (K) shall be taken as 1.0 for compression members in frames which derive lateral stability from in-plane
bracing or shear walls, floors or roofs secured against lateral movement
by walls or bracing systems parallel to the plane of the frame, or by other
positive means (see Clause 23).
13.3 Compression Members in Trusses. Unless otherwise specified in

this Standard or unless analysis shows that a smaller value is applicable, the
effective length factor (K) shall be taken as 1.0 for compression members in
trusses.
13.4 Compression Members in Unbraced Frames. The effective length

factor (K) for compression members in frames which depend on their own
bending stiffness for lateral stability (K > 1.0) shall be determined by
analysis.
13.5 Maximum Slenderness Ratio
13.5.1 The slenderness ratio of a compression member shall not
exceed 200.
13.5.2 The slenderness ratio of a tension member shall not exceed

240 for a main member nor 300 for a bracing member. These limits may be
waived if other means are provided to control flexibility, sag, vibration,
and slack in a manner commensurate with the service conditions of the
structure or if it can be shown that such factors are not detrimental to the
24
eSA STANDARD S16
performance of the structure or of the assembly of which the member is

a part.
14. WIDTH-THICKNESS RATIOS: COMPRESSION ELEMENTS
14.1 Compression Elements Supported Along One Edge
14.1.1 Projecting elements of members subject to compression due
to axial load or bending shall have ratios of wid th-to-thickness (bit) not
greater than the following, except as noted in Clause 14.1.3:
(a) Single angle struts; double angle struts with separators ... bit
:::; 75/yF y
(b) Struts consisting of double angles in contact; angles or plates projecting from beams, columns or other compression members;
compression flanges; plate girder stiffeners ... bit:::; 100/V'F;
(c) Stems of tees ... bit:::; 130/yFy
14.1.2 The width of plates shall be taken from the free edge to the
first row of bolts or welds; the width of legs of angles, flanges of channel
and zees, and of stems of tees shall be taken as the full nominal dimension;
the width of flanges of beams and tees shall be taken as one-half the full
nominal width. The thickness of a tapered flange shall be measured halfway
between a free edge and the corresponding face of the web.
14.1.3 When a projecting element in compression exceeds the widthto-thickness ratio prescribed in Clause 14.1.1 and is stressed to less than
0.60 F y , the element will be acceptable if the ratio bit does not exceed the
value obtained by substituting 1.67 times the computed compressive stress
for the element in lieu of the specified minimum yield stress, Fy. Alternatively
if a portion of the width equal to the maximum value permitted by Clause
14.1.1 would satisfy the stress requirements, assuming the excess width
to be removed, the member will be acceptable. In such cases the sectional
properties of the member shall be based on the assumed effective width of
projecting compression elements. As a further alternative, a rational
buckling analysis of the compression element may be made in which case
the allowable compressive stress shall be 60 per cent of the critical buckling
stress of the element but not more than the allowable compressive stress
for the member as a whole.
14.2 Compression Elements Supported Along Two Edges
14.2.1 In members subject to axial compression, the unsupported
width of web, flange, or diaphragm plates between adjacent lines of mechanical fasteners or welds, or between the flanges in the case of rolled
shapes, or between the rounded corners of hollow structural sections shall
not exceed 255/yF y times the thickness of the element considered.
14.2.2 When the unsupported width exceeds the value given in
Clause 14.2.1 and is stressed to less than 0.60 F y , the element will be acceptable if the unsupported width does not exceed 197/Vfa times its thickness,
where fa. is the computed axial compressive stress in the element. Alternatively if a portion of the wid th no greater than 255/yF y times the thickness would satisfy the stress requirements the member will be considered
acceptable. As a further alternative, a rational buckling analysis of the
compression element may be made in which case the allowable compressive
25
stress shall be 60 per cent of the critical buckling stress of the element but
not more than the allowable compressive stress for the member as a whole.
14.2.3 The unsupported width of cover plates perforated with a

succession of access holes shall not exceed 3201v'F y times their thickness.
For such cover plates the width available to resist compression shall be
taken as the gross wid th less the wid th of the widest access hole.
14.3 Circular Hollow Sections. The outside diameter of circular hollow
sections subject to axial compression shalf not exceed 3300/Fy times the
wall thickness.
14.4 Compression Elements of Compact Sections in Bending.
Rolled shapes, hollow sections, solid rounds or rectangles, and built-up
members which have flanges continuously connected to the web or webs by
means of adequate mechanical fasteners or welds, may be classed as compact
sections when so qualified by the provisions of this Clause. Such sections,
when laterally braced, are permitted an increase in allowable bending
stress in accordance with Clause 16. To qualify as a compact section, there
shall be an axis of symmetry in the plane of bending and the width-thickness
ratio (b/t) of the various elements of the section which are subject to
compression shall not exceed the following limits:
(a) Projecting elements of compression flange ......... bit ~ 64/v'F y
(b) Flange plates of rectangular hollow sections, between rounded corners; flange cover plates between longitudinal lines of mechanical
fasteners or welds.. . . . . . . . . . .. . .............. bit ~ 200/v'F';
(c) Clear depth-thickness ratio of webs ............. h/w ~ 420/v'F y
(d) Clear depth-thickness ratio of webs when subject to axial compression plus bending
(i)
(ii)
i.::; 0.28 ................... h/w ::; 420!vF, [1 is>

~
0.28 ... , ............................ h/w
where
~: =
1.40
i:J
255/v'F';
ratio of computed axial stress to permissible axial
compressive stress when no bending is involved

(e) Ratio of outside diameter (0) to wall thickness (t) of circular
hollow sections ................................ 0 It ~ 3300/Fy
15. GROSS AND NET AREAS

15.1 Application. In general, tension members shall be proportioned on
the basis of net area and compression members on the basis of gross area.
(For beams and girders see Clause 19.)
15.2 Compu tation
15.2.1 Gross arec:. shall be computed by summing the products of the
thickness and gross width of each element, as measured normal to the axis
of the member.
15.2.2 Net area shall be computed by summing the products of the

thickness and net width of each element, as measured normal to the axis
26
eSA STANDARD S16
of the member. Net width and area of parts containing holes shall be
computed in accordance with Clause 15.4.
15.3 Diameter of Holes. In computing net area the diameter of fastener

holes shall be assumed
Us inch
larger than the diameter specified.
15.4 Net Area of Parts Containing Holes

15.4.1 For a series of holes extending across a part in any diagonal
or zigzag line, the net width of the part shall be computed by deducting
from the gross width the sum of all hole diameters in the series and adding
for each gauge distance (g) in the series the quantity:
S2
where s
g
4g
longitudinal spacing (pitch) in inches of any two successive
holes
transverse spacing (gauge) in inches of the same two holes.
15.4.2 The critical net area of the part is obtained from that series
of holes which gives the least net width; however net area taken through
one or more holes shall not be assumed to exceed the following limits:
(a)
F y/T.S. :s;; O. 70 ................ 85 per cent of gross area
(b) 0.70 < Fy/T.S. :s;; 0.85 ................ 90 per cent of gross area
(c) 0.85 < Fy/T.S ......... , .............. 95 per cent of gross area
15.4.3 In computing the net area across plug or slot welds the weld
metal shall not be taken as adding to the net area.
15.5 An~les. For angles the gross width shall be the sum of the widths
of the legs minus the thickness. The gauge for holes in opposite legs shall be
the sum of the gauges from the heel of the angle minus the thickness.
15.6 Pin-Connected Tension Members
15.6.1 In pin-connected tension members, the net area across the
pin hole, normal to the axis of the member shall be at least 1.33 times the
cross-sectional area of the body of the member. The net area beyond the pin
hole measured at any angle of 43 degrees or less to the axis of the member
shall be at least equal to the bearing force on the pin divided by 0.4 times
the yield stress of the part exerting the bearing force.
15.6.2 The distance from the edge of the pin hole to the edge of the
member, measured transverse to the axis of the member, shall not exceed
4 times the thickness of the material at the pin hole.
15.6.3 The diameter of a pin hole shall not be more than
larger than the diameter of the pin.
%2
inch
16. ALLOWABLE STRESSES

16.1 General
16.1.1 \Vhere applicable, the provisions of Clauses 5, 12-15, 17-21
shaH supp1ement the provisions of Clause 16.
16.1.2 Allowable stresses are given in kips per square inch unless
otherwise stated (1 kip = 1 kilo-pound = 1000 pounds),
27
16.1.3 The symbol "Fy" denotes the specified minimum yield point
or yield strength of the steel to be furnished. The symbol "T.S." denotes
the specified minimum tensile strength of the steel to be furnished.
16.1.4 If the use of unidentified steel is authorized, Fy shall be taken
as 30 ksi and T.S. shall be taken as 55 ksi (see Clause 6.2.2).
16.2 Structural Steel
16.2.1 Axial Tension (Ft )
(a) On net area, the lesser of,
F t = 0.60 F"
F t = 0.50 T.S.
except that when the ratio of net to gross area (An/Ag) of the member
is less than the ratio of yield to tensile strength (Fy/T .S.) of the
material comprising the member, F t shall be the lesser of,
F t = 0.60 T.S. (An/Ag)
F t = 0.50 T.S.
(b) On net area across pin holes,
F t = 0.45 Fy
(c) On unthreaded body area of threaded parts,
F t = 0.40 Fy
(If threads are upset, F t = 0.60 Fy on the critical net area)
16.2.2 Axial Compression (Fa)

(a) On gross area of columns and struts (or effective area in the case
of perforated plate columns) *
(i) KL/r
(ii) Co
(iii) C p
<
<
Co ............................ , ..... Fa
0.60Fy
KL/r ~ C p " Fa = 0.60Fy - m (KL/r - Co)
KL/r ................................. Fa =
~~L~~)~
where Co
30 - F y/5 but not more than 20

.../')86 000
C p = ., y ~ 13 but not less than 78
o 60F
m
_ 149,000
(C p )2
--:---~--=..:-
Cp - Co
Values of Co, C p and m as given in Table 2 may be used.
-371-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
28
CSA STANDARD S16
TABLE 2
COEFFICIENTS FOR COMPRESSION FORMULAS
F;,
Co
Cp
33
20
119.5
0.094
36
20
111.5
0.105
38
20
107.0
0.112
40
20
103.0
0.120
42
20
99.3
0.127
44
20
96.1
0,135
46
20
93.2
0.142
50
20
87.9
0.158
55
19
82.5
0.175
60
18
78.0
0.192
65
1i
78.0
0.238
100
10
78.0
0.522
(b) On gross area of a web stiffener

Fa = 0.60Fy
"The expressions defining Fa are based on column strength predictions for rolled WF shapes
and may be assumed to be valid for other doubly symmetric sections. Welded H-shapes should
have flange edges flame-cut. Singly symmetric, asymmetric, or cruciform sections should be
checked as to whether torsional-flexural buckling is critical.
16.2.3 Shear (F v)
(a) Unstiffened webs of beams and girders, on gross area of web:
(i) h/w ~ 380/v'Fy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fv = 0.40F y
(11") 380/-v /-Fy
< hii w _< .)--1, '-v /F-y , . . . . . . . . . . . F v
(iii) 551/v'Fy
< h/'w ~ 12,000/Fy ~ 260 ......... Fv = ~~/!~~
152v'F;
h /w
(b) Transversely stiffened webs of beams and girders, on gross area

of web:
~/Kv
(1'1') 16...,- "F
~ ............................ Fv 0.40F
_rK: ........... F v 65.7v'~
< hi:W ~ 190 ,,~
h/w
JKv
(1'1'1') 190 .,
Fy
... /Kv F
< hi.
," -< -'139 "F
y"
v
. )
JKv
(.Iv
239"F
<
(i) h/w
165
h/ .
'F
F'
1"'~12,000/'y .. v
- 372.-
[65. 7
~] "( + 11 F
hjw
[15,700 Kv]
(h/W)2"(
Copyright NRC-CNRC
29
where Fy = specified minimum yield point of web steel (ksi)

h/w = ratio of web depth to thickness
a/h = ratio of distance between stiffeners to web depth
Kv = shear buckling coefficient
5.34 h
/h
= 4
(a/h)2 w en a
<1
= 5.34
_ 1 _
I -
4
+ (a/h)2
when a/h
~ 1
0.870
V1 + (a/h)2
0.30
7J = V1
(a/h)2
The values given in Table 3 may be used. The gross area of web
shall be taken as the product of web depth (h) and web thickness
(w), except that for rolled shapes the overall depth (d) may be
substituted for h.
TABLE 3
COEFFICIENTS FOR SHEAR FORMULAS
ath
'Y
0.25
0.33
0.50
0.67
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1. 75
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
Inf.
0.155
0.171
0.223
0.276
0.304
0.383
0.456
0.517
0.569
0.612
0.646
0.677
0.703
0.725
1.000
"
0.292
0.286
0.268
0.250
0.240
0.213
0.188
0.167
0.149
0.134
0.122
0.112
0.102
0.095
0
Ky
89.4
52.2
25.4
16.0
13.5
9.34
7.90
7.12
6.65
6.34
6.13
5.98
5.87
5.78
5.34
(c) Average shear stress on gross area of gusset plates

Fv = 0.30F y
(d) Average shear stress on nominal area of pins
Fv = 0.40Fy
16.2.4 Bending (F b)
16.2.4.1 I-type sections; channels prevented from twisting
(a) Tension:
F bt = 0.66 F y for compact sections
F bt = 0.60 Fy for non-compact sections
(b) Compression:
(i) Fbe ~ Fbt
(ii) F be = 1 . 15 F bt (1 _ 0.28
Fl Fbt)
when F bt > Fl ~ % Fbt
-373-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
30
eSA STANDARD S 16
(iii) Fbc = Fl when Fl < % Fbt

where Fl = V(F 2)2
(Fa)2
F _ 12,000
2 Ld/A f
fl'
F a = 149,000
(L/rt)2 or type sectIOns
= 0 for channels
Af
area of compression flange (inches2)
L = unsupported length of compression flange (inches)
d = depth of section (inches)
rt = radius of gyration about its axis of symmetry of
a tee section comprising the compression flange
and 1/6 of the web (inches)
16.2.4.2 Hollow Structural Sections

Tension and compression:
F b = 0.66 F y for compact sections
Fb = 0.60 Fy for non-compact sections
The laterally unsupported length of the portion of a rectangular
section in compression due to bending shall not exceed 2S00/F y
times its width unless analysis would show that a greater unsupported length may be used.
16.2.4.3 Tee Sections with Axis of Symmetry in Plane

of Bending
Tension and compression:
Fb
0.66 F y for compact sections
F b = 0.60 F y for non-compact sections
The laterally unsupported length of the portion of the tee in compression due to bending shall not exceed 240 ry/v"F; where ry
is the radius of gyration of the tee about the axis of symmetry,
unless analysis would show that a greater unsupported length
may be used.
16.2.4.4 Sections without an Axis of Symmetry in Plane

of Bending (Except Channels)
Tension and compression when section is prevented from lateral
buckling and twisting;
Fb = 0.60 Fy
16.2.4.5 Solid Sections

Rounds and pins, tension and compression,
Fb = 0.90 Fy
Rectangles and bearing plates, tension and compression
F b =0.7SFy
The unsupported length of the portion of a rectangular section in
compression shall not exceed 2500/Fy times its width unless analysis would show that a greater unsupported length may be used.
16.2.4.6 Continuous and Fixed-ended Beams Supporting

Gravity Loads: Plastic Design Sections. Continuous or fixed-ended
beams, exclusive of cantilevers, meeting the width-thickness limitations
specified in Clause 30 for plastic design sections and not subject to web shear
stress (fv) in excess of 0.33 Fy, may be proportioned to support gravity loads
on the following basis:
f
31
(a) Bending moments shall be determined by elastic theory;

(b) Within any span the positive bending stress computed on the
assumption that the span is fully loaded and simply supported
shall not exceed 1.32 Fy;
(c) The maximum negative bending stress at supports due to continuity or end-fixity shall not exceed 0.88 F y;
(d) The distance from the face of the support to the point of contraflexure shall not exceed 375 ry/yFy when the flange in compression
is unbraced within this distance, nor 585 ry/v"F; when that flange
is braced at a point not more than 210 ry/yFy from the face of the
support;
(e) The flange in compression between points of contraflexure, in
the region of positive bending shall be braced at intervals not exceeding 210 ry/YFy.
If the negative moment of the beam is resisted by a column rigidly
framed to that beam, the allowable bending stress in the column resulting
from the assumption that the beam-to-column connection provides complete
fixity under gravity load bending moment shall not exceed at the connection:
(i) 0.7 5Fy if the column meets the requirements of a plastic design
section.
(ii) 0.66Fy if the column meets the requirements of a compact section.
(iii) 0.60F y if the column meets the requirements of a non-compact
section.
16.2.5 Bearing (Fp). Bearing stress on contact area shall not exceed
the following:
(a) On machined, accurately sawn or fitted parts,
Fp = 0.90 Fy
(b) Expansion rollers and rockers,
Fp = 0.70D (Fy ;
13) kips per lineal inch
where D = diameter of roller or rocker (inches)

F y = lesser specified yield point of parts in con tact;
(c) In bearing-type connections, on contact area equal to nominal
fastener diameter times thickness of connected part, the lesser of,
Fp = 1. 35 Fy
Fp = T.S.
where Fy and T.S. are those specified for the connected part.
16.3 Bolts
16.3.1 Shear (Fv). Stresses apply to bolt area determined from
nominal bolt diameter.
(a) A307 bolts ............................................ 10 ksi
(b) A325 bolts, friction-type connections; and bearing-type connections having thread included in a shear plane between connected parts ......................................... 15 ksi
(c) A325 bolts, bearing-type connections with thread excluded from
shear planes between connected parts .................... 22 ksi
(d) A490 bolts, friction-type connections ..................... 20 ksi
32
eSA STANDARD S16
(e) A490
shear
(f) A490
shear
bolts, bearing-type connections having thread included in a

plane between connected parts .................... 22.5 ksi
bolts, bearing-type connections with thread excluded from
planes between connected parts .................... 32 ksi
16.3.2 Tension (F t ). Stresses apply to bolt area determined from
nominal bolt diameter.
(a) A307 bolts ............................................ 14 ksi
(b) A32S bolts ............................................ 40 ksi
(c) A490 bolts ............................................ 54 ksi
16.4 Welds. Allowable stresses shall be those given in CSA Standard
WS9.1, General Specification for Welding of Steel Structures (Metal Arc
Welding), for the base metal, filler metal, and type of weld to be used.
16.5 Cast or Forged Steel. Allowable stresses shall be those provided
for structural steel, Clause 16.2, where applicable.
17. ALLOWABLE COMBINED STRESSES

17.1 Axial Compression and Bending
17.1.1 :Members required to resist combined axial compression and
bending (i.e. beam-columns) shall be proportioned so that the following
requirements are satisfied:
(a) _f_8._
hx
f by < 1.0
O.60Fy
F bx
F by Crni!bX ax
Crnyibyay < 1.0
(b) fa
Fa
bx
bywhere Fa = axial stress permitted if only axial load was present
(see Clause 16.2.2) (ksi)
F hx, F by = compressive bending stress permitted if only bending
was present (see Clause 16.2.4) (ksi)
fa = compu ted axial stress (ksi)
f bx , fby = computed bending stress at the point under consideration when used in conj unction with Clause
17.1.1 (a); the maximum computed bending stress
occurring either at or between braced points when
used in conjunction with Clause 17.1.1 (b)
Cmx, Crny = coefficient used to determine equivalent uniform
bending stress (see Clause 17.1.2)
+
+
ax, a y
amplification factor, equal to (1
equ~to
If /F') with F'e

a e
~::L~~~' and KL/r being the
slenderness ratio in the

plane of bending for which a is computed.
When fa/Fa ~ 0.15, the value of each of ax, a y, Cmx and Cmy may
be assumed equal to 1.0.
17.1.2 Except as provided in Clause 17.1.1 the coefficients Cmx and
Cmy shall be determined by analysis, or the following values may be used.
The symbol COl refers to either Crnx or Cmy.
(a) Members Not Subjected to Transverse Loads Between
Supports
(i) For compression members in frames which depend on their
own flexural stiffness to prevent sidesway in the direction
being considered:
Copyright NRC-CNRC
r
33
Cm = 0.85 for members bent in double curvature or subjected to moment only at one end;
Cm = 1.0 for members bent in single curvature due to
moments at both ends;
(ii) For compression members in frames which are braced in
accordance with Clause 23 to prevent sidesway in the direction
being considered :
Cm = 0.6
0.4 Ml/lVh for members bent in single curvature;
Cm = 0.6 - 0.4 MdM2 for members bent in double curvature, but not less than 0.4.
where Ml/lVh = ratio of smaller to larger moments at opposite
ends of the unbraced length, in the plane of
bending considered ;
(b) Members Subjected to Distributed Load or Series of Point
Loads Between Supports
em =
1. 0 for compression members in frames which are braced in

accordance with Clause 23 and for those which depend on
their own flexural stiffness to prevent sidesway in the
direction being considered ;
(c) Members Subjected to a Concentrated Load or Moment
Between Supports
Members subjected to a concentrated load (or moment) between

supports (e.g. crane columns) may be divided into two segments
at the point of load (or moment) application for the purpose of
design. Each segment shall then be treated as a member which
depends on its own flexural stiffness to prevent sidesway in the
direction being considered, using the provisions of Clause 17.1.2
(a) (i). However in computing the slenderness ratio KLjr, for use
in Clause 17.1.1, the total length of the member shall be used.
17.2 Axial Tension and Bending

17.2.1 Members required to resist combined axial tension and bending
shall be proportioned so that:
~t + ~ < 1.0
Ft
Fbt where F bt = tensile bending stress permitted if bending alone was
present (ksi)
F t = axial tensile stress permi tted if axial tension alone was
present (ksi)
ht = computed tensile bending stress at the point under
consideration (ksi)
ft = computed axial tensile stress at the point under
consideration (ksi)
17.2.2 If a net compressive bending stress is developed on a portion
of the section, the member shall be proportioned so that F be. the allowable
compressive bending stress (Clause 16.2.4) is not exceeded.
17.3 Bolts in Shear and Tension. Bolts subject to combined shear and
tension due to forces applied to the connected parts shall be proportioned
so that
34
CSA STANDARD Sl6
where f,
= computed tensile stress on nominal area of bolt due to
applied load (ksi)

shear stress on nominal area of bolt due to
applied load (ksi)
a and P = the appropriate value given in Table 4
In no case shall f t or fv exceed those permitted in Clause 16.3 for
tension and shear stress, respectively.
fv
= computed
TABLE 4
VALUES OF cr and "
Fastener
fJ
A307 bolts
20
12.5
A325 bolts, friction-type connection
60
15
A325 bolts, bearing-type connection
50
30
A490 bolts, friction-type connection
80
20
A490 bolts, bearing-type connection
67.5
40.5
17.4 Combined Shear and Tension in Girder Webs. Transversely
stiffened webs of girders whose web slenderness ratio h/wexceeds 190 ~
(as defined in Clause 16.2.3) shall be proportioned so that the tensile stress
in the web due to bending in the plane of the web shall not exceed 0.60 Fy
nor F y (0.825 - 0.375 fvjF v) where fvjF v is the ratio of the computed
average shear stress in the web at the section being considered to the allowable shear stress given in Clause 16.2.3 (b).
STEEL STRUCTURES J'Oa BUILDINGS
35
18. ALLOWABLE STRESSES: REPEATED LOADS

18.1 General
18.1.1 Members and connections subject to repeated loads inducing
a stress range exceeding 0.75Ft (Clause 16.2.1) shall be designed, detailed,
and fabricated so as to avoid severe stress concentrations and abrupt
changes in cross-section.
18.1.2 Axially loaded tension members and tension flanges of beams
subject to repeated loads shall have no notches, sharp copes, transverse
fillet welds, or other potential stress raisers in regions where the computed
tensile stress (ft or fbt ) exceeds 0.75 F, as given in Clause 16.2.1.
18.2 Up to 10,000 Repetitions of Load. When a load is expected to be
applied not more than 10,000 times in the life of the structure, no special
considerations beyond those specified in Clause 18.1 need apply to members,
connections, mechanical fasteners, and welds. Ten thousand applications
are roughly equal to one application of load each day for a period of 27 years.
18.3 Over 10,000 Repetitions of Load. When a load is expected to be
applied more than 10,000 times in the life of the structure, the loaded
members, connections, mechanical fasteners, and welds shall be proportioned so that the probability of fatigue-type failure is acceptably small.
In such cases the design should be based on the best available information
as to the fatigue characteristics of the materials and components to be used.
In the absence of more specific information, the values given in Table 5
provide guidance in proportioning members and parts subject to 100,000,
or 600,000, or 2,000,000 applications of load. When Table 5 is used as the
basis for design, the members, connections, bolts, and welds shall be proportioned so that the computed stress due to the repeated load does not
exceed the appropriate given value. In addition, neither the maximum
computed stress nor the minimum computed stress shall exceed the values
given in Clauses 16 and 17. A distinction shall be made between the loads
which are considered to be repetitive, hence contributing to fatigue, and
those which are essentially static in nature. Often the magnitude of a
repeated load is less than the maximum static load which the member or
part would be designed to sustain.
-379-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
36
CSA STANDARD S16
TABLE 5
GUIDE TO DESIGN STRESSES FOR MEMBERS AND
CONNEctIONS SUBJEct TO REPEATED LOADS
Allowable Stress
Ksi
Type of Stress Due
to Repeated Load
Item
100,000
ApplicatioDs
F.
1-72 R
Tension; or TensionCompression
F. S 40
Tension; or TensionCompression in the
vicinity of notches,
sharp copes, transverse
fillet welds across
tension elements and
other stress raisers.
As-rolled steel
0.75 F.
1-72 R
F. S 40
F ..
1-72 R
Shear
F .. ;S 27
F,
1-72 R
Tension; or TensionCompression
Full Penetration
Groove Welds
(stress on effective
throat area)
F ..
1-72 R
F ..
Partial Penetration
Groove Welds and
Fillet Welds
(streIB on effective
throat area)
F,
F,
1-" R
1-~
F. $ 36
F.
1-~
0.75 F.
R
0.75 F.
1-" R
F. S 36
F, S 24
F ..
1-~
F .. S 24
22
1-~
24
F ..
1-" R
F .. S 18
16
1-" R
9.6
1-" R
12.4
1-72 R
8.2
1-72 R
15
1-72 R
15
1-72 R
14.4
1-~
20
F .. S 20
15
Shear, Bearing-type
connection (no stress
reversal)
Allowable
static
stress
15
15
l-R
t=1r
Tension
40
40
40
Shear, Frictiontype Connection
20
20
1-72 R
15
1-72 R
Shear, Bearing-type
connection (no stress
reversal)
Tension
NOTES:
F ..
1-72 R
Shear
Shear. Frictiontype Connection
A490 Bolts
2,000,000
Applications
F. S 30
Shear
A325 Bolts
600,000
Applications
Allowable
static
stress
54
20
15
l-R
-r=R
45
40
1. Ft
= allowable tensile stress for static loading or the value given in Table 5, which-
2. Fv
= allowable shear stress for
ever is the lesser.
static loading or the value given in Table 5, whichever is the lesser.

3. R = algebraic ratio of the minimum stress to the maximum stress. (R is negative
in cases of stress reversal).
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-380-
T
I
37
4. For tension or tension-compression stress cycles, the larger numerical tensile stress
is the maximum stress. Thif l!.ther stress (negative value if compression) is the
minimum stress.
5. For tension or tension-compression cycles the maximum computed tensile stress
shall not exceed the allowable stress determined from Table 5.
6. Neither the maximum stress nor the minimum stress shall be greater than the
appropriate allowable stress for static load, as given in Clauses 16 and 17.
7. The allowable repeated stress for a greater number of load applications shall not
exceed that for a lesser number of load applications. (For certain values of R and
with F, > 30 ksi the expressions given in Table 5 may indicate the reverse of thu
statement. In such cases the allowable repeated stress is obtained from whichever
number of load applications results in the least value.)
19. BEAMS AND GIRDERS

19.1 Proportioning. Beams and girders consisting of rolled shapes (with
or without cover plates), hollow structural sections, or fabricated sections
shall be proportioned on the basis of the properties of the gross section or
the modified gross section as noted below. No deduction shall be made for
fastener holes in flanges or webs unless the reduction of flange area by such
holes exceeds 15 per cent of the gross flange area, in which case the excess
shall be deducted. The effect of openings other than holes for fasteners shall
be considered in accordance with Clause 19.10.
19.2 Rotational Restraint at Points of Support. Beams and girders
shall be restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axes at points
of support.
19.3 Webs. The depth of web between flanges (h) shall not exceed
12,000 w/Fy
where Fy = specified minimum yield point of compression flange
steel (ksi)
w = web thickness (inches)
This limit may be waived if analysis indicates that compression
flange buckling into the web will not occur at 1.67 times the flange
design stress.
19.4 Flanges
19.4.1 Width-thickness ratios of compression flanges shall conform
to Clause 14. Width-thickness ratios of compression flange cover-plates
shall not exceed 255/VFy between rows of fasteners or welds and 100/VFy
between an ou ter row and a free edge.
19.4.2 When the web slenderness ratio (h/w) exceeds 760/~ the
maximum stress in the compression flange shall not exceed
F'bc = Fbc [1.0 - 0.0005 Aw/Afc (h/w - 760/VF bc )]
where F'bc = reduced allowable compressive stress (ksi)
Fbc = allowable compressive stress permitted by Clause
16.2.4.1 (ksi)
Aw = web area (inches2)
A,c = compression flange area (inches!)
h/w = ratio of web depth to web thickness.
19.4.3 Flanges of welded girders preferably shall consist of a single
plate or a series of plates joined end-to-end by complete penetration groove
welds.
-381-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
38
eSA STANDARD S16
19.4.4 Flanges of bolted girders shall be proportioned so that the

total cross-sectional area of cover-plates does not exceed 70 per cent of the
total flange area.
19.4.5 Fasteners or welds connecting flanges to webs shall be proportioned to resist horizontal shear forces due to bending combined with any
loads which are transmitted from the flange to the web other than by
direct bearing. Spacing of fasteners or intermittent welds in general shall
be in proportion to the intensity of the shear force and shall not exceed
the maximum for compression or tension members as applicable, in accordance with Clause 22.
19.4.6 Partial length flange cover-plates shall be extended beyond
the theoretical cut-off point and the extended portion shall be connected
with sufficient fasteners or welds to develop a force in the cover-plate at
the theoretical cut-off point not less than
AMeY
P
-I-g
where P = required force to be developed in cover-plate (kips)

A = area of cover-plate (inches2)
Me
moment at point of theoretical cut-off (inch-kips)
y = distance from centroid of cover-plate to neutral axis of
cover-plated section (inches)
Ig = moment of inertia of cover-plated section (inches')
Additionally, for welded cover-plates, the welds connecting the cover-plate
termina tion to the beam or girder shall be designed to develop the force P
defined above within a length a', measured from the actual end of the
cover-plate, determined as follows:
(a) a' = the width of cover-plate when there is a continuous weld
equal to or larger than %: of the cover-plate thickness across
the end of the plate and along both edges in the length a'
(b) a' = lY2 times the width of cover-plate when there is a continuous
weld smaller than % of the cover-plate thickness across the
end of the plate and along both edges in the length a'
(c) a' = 2 times the width of cover-plate when there is no weld across
the end of the plate but continuous welds along both edges
in the length a',
19.5 Bearing Stiffeners

19.5.1 Pairs of bearing stiffeners on the webs of single-web beams
and girders shall be required at points of concentrated loads and reactions
wherever the allowable bearing stress on the web is exceeded (see Clause
19.8). Bearing stiffeners shall be required also at unframed ends of singleweb girders having web slenderness ratios greater than 420/VF y. Box
girders may employ diaphragms designed to act as bearing stiffeners.
19.5.2 Bearing stiffeners shall bear against the flange or flanges

through which they receive their loads, and shall extend approximately
to the edge of the flange plates or flange angles. They shall be designed as
columns in accordance with Clause 16.2.2, assuming the column section
to comprise the pair of stiffeners and a centrally located strip of the web
equal to not more than 25 times its thickness at interior stiffeners, or a
strip equal to not more than 12 times its thickness when the stiffeners are
39
located at the end of the web. The effective column length, KL, shall be
taken as not less than ~ of the length of the stiffeners in computing the
ratio KL/r. Only that portion of the stiffeners outside of the angle fillet
or the flange-to-web welds shall be considered effective in bearing. Angle
bearing stiffeners shall not be crimped. 'Bearing stiffeners shall be connected
to the web so as to develop the full force required to be carried by the
stiffener in to the web or vice versa.
19.6 Intermediate Transverse Stiffeners

19.6.1 Intermediate transverse stiffeners shall be spaced to suit the
allowable web shear stresses determined from the formula shown in Clause
16.2.3 (b); except that at girder end panels or at panels containing large
openings, the smaller panel dimension, a or h, shall not exceed 350 wIve;
where fv is the largest computed average shear stress in the panel.
19.6.2 Intermediate transverse stiffeners are not required when the

computed web shear stress does not exceed that permitted by Clause
16.2.3 (a) and the web slenderness ratio h/w does not exceed 260, or
12,000/Fy, whichever is lesser.
19.6.3 The maximum distance between stiffeners, when stiffeners are
required, shall not exceed the values shown in Table 6. Closer spacing may
be required in accordance with Clause 19.6.1.
TABLE 6
MAXIMUM INTERMEDIATE TRANSVERSE STIFFENER SPACING
Madmum Distance Between StHIenera
(a) in Terms of Clear Web Depth (h)
Web Slenderness Rado (h/w)
3h
Up to 150
Over 150
67,500 h
(h/W)I
19.6.4 Intermediate transverse stiffeners may be furnished singly or

in pairs. Width-thickness ratios shall conform to Clause 14.1. The moment
of inertia of the stiffener, or pair of stiffeners if so furnished, shall be not
less than (h/50)4 inches4 taken about an axis in the plane of the web. The
gross area of intermediate stiffeners, or pairs of stiffeners if so furnished,
shall be given by the expression
A.
~ aw
where a
w =
h =
C =
Kv =
Fy =
Y =
[1 -
V1
::/h)'] CYD
distance centre-to-centre of adjacent stiffeners (Le.

panel length) (inches)
web thickness (inches)
web depth (inches)
45,OOOKv b
I
h
1 - F y(h/w)2 ut not ess t an 0.10
shear buckling coefficient (see Clause 16.2.3 (b) )
specified minimum yield point of web steel (ksi)
ratio of specified minimum yield point of web steel to
specified minimum yield point of stiffener steel
40
GSA STANDARD S16
D = stiffener factor
= 1.0 for stiffeners furnished in pairs
= 1.8 for single-angle stiffeners
= 2.4 for single-plate stiffeners
When the greatest shear stress, fv, in an" adjacent panel is less than that
permitted by Clause 16.2.3 (b), this gross area requirement may be reduced
in like proportion by multiplying by the ratio fv/F v.
19.6.5 Intermediate transverse stiffeners shall be connected to the

web for a shear transfer per pair of stiffeners (or per single stiffener when so
furnished). in kips per lineal inch of web depth (h), not less than
O.OO1h vi (F ,,/3.4)3; except that when the largest computed shear stress fv in
the adjacent panels is less than the maximum permitted by Clause 16.2.3 (b)
this shear transfer may be reduced in the same proportion. However, the
total shear transfer shall in no case be less than the value of any concentrated
load or reaction required to be transmitted to the web through the stiffener.
Fasteners connecting in termediate transverse stiffeners to the web shall be
spaced not more than 12 inches on centre. If intermittent fillet welds are
used, the clear distance between welds shall not exceed 16 times the web
thickness or four times the weld length.
19.6.6 When intermediate stiffeners are used on only one side of the
web, the stiffeners shall be attached to the compression flange. Intermediate
stiffeners used in pairs shall have at least a snug fit against the compression
flange. Stiffeners may be cut short of the tension flange a distance not exceeding four times the girder web thickness. Stiffeners preferably shall be
clipped to clear girder flangeto-web welds.
19.7 Lateral Forces. The flanges of beams and girders supporting cranes
or other moving loads shall be proportioned to resist any lateral forces
produced by such loads.
19.8 Web Crippling. Webs of rolled beams and welded plate girders shall
be proportioned so that the compressive stress at the web toe of the flange
to web fillets, resulting from concentrated loads not supported by bearing
stiffeners, shall not exceed 0.75 Fy where Fy is the specified minimum
yield point of the web; otherwise bearing stiffeners shall be provided. The
stress shall be calculated as follows:
(a) for interior loads,
R
w(N + 2k)
(b) for end reactions,
R
w(N + k)
where R = concentrated load or reaction (kips)
.. N = length of bearing (inches). N shaH be not less than k
for end reactions.
k = distance from outer face of flange to web toe of flangeto-web fillet (inches).
19.9 Stability of Thin Webs. Webs of plate girders shall be so proportioned or stiffened that the sum of all compressive stresses on the compression
edge of the web plate, resulting from concentrated and distributed loads
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-384-
T
41
bearing directly, or through a flange plate, and not supported by bearing

stiffeners, shaH not exceed
10,000 [
4 ]
Fp = (h/w)2 5.5 + (a/h)2
kips per square inch when the flange is restrained
against rotation, or
10,000 [
4 ]
F p = (h/w)2 2 + (a/h)2
kips per square inch when the flange is not so
restrained.
Compressive stresses on the web plate shall be computed as follows:
(a) The distributed load over the panel length, in kips per lineal inch,
shall be divided by the web thickness;
(b) Concentrated loads and loads distributed over partial length of
a panel. in kips, shall be divided by the web thickness times the
Jesser panel dimension. a or h.
19.10 Openings
19.10.1 Except as provided in Clause 19.1, the effect of all openings
in beams and girders shall be considered in the design. At all points where
the stresses in the net section are excessive, adequate reinforcement shall
be added to the member to provide the required strength and stability.
19.10.2 Unreinforced circular openings may be located in the web

of a beam or girder without considering net section stresses provided that:
(a) The specified design load for the member is uniformly distributed;
(b) The section has an axis of symmetry in the plane of bending;
(c) The openings are located within the middle third of the depth and
the middle half of the span of the member;
(d) The spacing between the centres of any two adjacent openings,
measured parallel to the longitudinal axis of the member, is a
minimum of two and a half times the diameter of the larger opening.
19.10.3 If the stresses at openings are determined by an elastic
analysis, the procedure adopted shall be in accordance with published, recognized principles acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. The
stresses determined by such elastic analysis shall not exceed those prescribed by Clauses 16 and 17 and, if applicable, Clause 18.
19.10.4 The strength and stability of the member in the vicinity of
openings may be determined by a limit analysis procedure, provided that:
(a) The analysis is carried out in accordance with Clause 30;
(b) The assumed location of plastic hinges is such that the resulting
stress distributions satisfy equilibrium.
19.11 Torsion
19.11.1 Beams anc! girders subjected to torsion shall have sufficient
strength and rigidity to resist the torsional moment and forces in addition
to other moments or forces. The connections and bracing of such members
shaH be adequate to transfer the reactions to the supports.
-385-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
42
CSA STANDARD 816
19.11.2 Torsional stresses including those due to warping, shall be

combined with stresses produced by plane bending and axial forces. The
resulting combined stresses shall not exceed those prescribed by Clauses 16
and 17, and, if applicable, Clause 18.
19.11.3 Beams and girders and their connections shall have sufficient
torsional rigidity to restrict rotations to a value compatible with all attached
and supported materials.
20. OPEN-WEB STEEL JOISTS
20.1 Scope. Clause 20 provides requirements for the design, manufacture,

and erection of open-web steel joists used in construction of buildings.
20.2 Definitions. The following definitions apply to Clause 20:
Open-web steel joists or joists means steel trusses of relatively
light weight with parallel or slightly pitched chords and triangulated web
systems, proportioned to span between masonry walls and/or structural
supporting members and provide direct support for floor or roof deck.
In general, open-web steel joists are manufactured on a production-line
basis employing jigs, certain details of the members being standardized
by the individual manufacturer. This definition does not include primary
trusses supporting joists or other secondary members;
Deck or decking means the structural floor or roof element spanning

between adjacent joists and directly supported thereby. The terms deck and
decking include cast-in-place or precast concrete slabs, ribbed or corrugated
steel sheets, wood plank or plywood and other relatively rigid elements
suitable for floor or roof construction.
20.3 Materials. Steel for joists shall be of a quality suitable for the applicable welding processes and shall conform to the structural steel material
requirements of Clause 6, except that steel used in cold roll-formed components shall conform to the requirements for such steel as prescribed by
CSA Standard S136, Design of Light Gauge Steel Structural Members.
20.4 Design
20.4.1 The design shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Clause 20. For any requirement not covered in Clause 20, the design shall
conform to the provisions of this Standard or, if applicable, to the provisions
of CSA Standard S136, Design of Light Gauge Steel Structural Members.
20.4.2 In general, open-web steel joists shall be designed as simply
supported, uniformly loaded, pin-jointed trusses with the compression
chord braced against lateral buckling by the deck. The uniform load shall be
assumed to be concentrated at the panel points of the compression chord
for the purpose of determining axial forces. When other design criteria are
specified, or are evident, such as non-uniform load, uplift, concentrated
load, loads suspended from the tension chord, fixed or cantilever ends, or
absence of the lateral support ordinarily furnished by the deck, the joists
shall be designed for these other conditions. Joists intended to act compositely with the deck shall be designed, verified, and approved in accordance
with Clause 5.1.2.
20.4.3 Open-web steel joists shall not be assumed to contribute to

the overall stability of the structural frame unless they are designed for
43
this purpose, in which case they shall be proportioned to resist all moments
and forces necessary to ensure frame stability in addition to all loads
normally applied to the joists.
20.4.4 Joists connected by welding or bolting to flanges of supporting

beams or girders or to chords of supporting trusses may be utilized in
providing lateral support to these members when the requirements of
Clause 20.15.3 are fulfilled.
20.5 Spacing. Joists shall be spaced so that the loading on each joist
does not exceed the allowable load for that particular joist, nor shall the
spacing exceed the permissible span of the supported deck. Maximum joist
spacings, and, where necessary, maximum joist depths, shall be shown on
design drawings.
20.6 Width-Thickness Ratios. Width-thickness ratios of compression
elements of hot-formed sections shall not exceed those given in Clause 14.
Width-thickness ratios of compression elements of cold-formed sections
shall not exceed those given in CSA Standard S136, Design of Light Gauge
Steel Structural Members. To qualify as a compact section, the compression
elements of both hot-rolled and cold-formed sections shall meet the requirements of Clause 14.3 for compact sections.
20.7 Allowable Stresses. Allowable stresses shall be those permitted by

Clause 16 except as otherwise specified by Clause 20.9 provided that,
in the case of compression elements, these elements conform to the limiting
width-thickness ratios of Clause 14. Otherwise, allowable stresses for
compression elements shall be as prescribed by CSA Standard S136, Design
of Light Gauge Steel Structural Members, for the appropriate widththickness ratio and material to be furnished.
20.8 Tension Chord. The tension chord shall be continuous and may be
designed as an axially loaded tension member unless subject to applied
load between panel points. The governing radius of gyration of the tension
chord or any component thereof shall be not less than 1/240 of the corresponding unsupported length. For joists with the web in the V-plane the
unsupported length of chord for computing Lx/rx shall be taken as the panel
length centre-to-centre of panel points and the unsupported length of chord
for computing Ly/ry shall be taken as the distance between bridging lines
connected to the tension chord. Anchored ends of joists may be assumed to
be equivalent to bridging lines.
20.9 Compression Chord

20.9.1 The compression chord shall be continuous and may be
designed for axial compressive stress alone when the panel length does not
exceed 24 inches. When the panel length exceeds 24 inches the compression
chord shall be designed as a continuous member subject to combined axial
and bending stresses.
20.9.2 The slenderness ratio

its components, shall not exceed
panels where
KL = 0.9 times the
points
r = the appropriate
(KL/r) of the compression chord, or of

90 for interior panels nor 120 for end
panel length centre-to-centre of panel
radius of gyration.
-387-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
44
eSA STANDARD S16
For a section symmetrical about an axis in the plane of the joist web consisting of:
(a) A single component; or
(b) Two or more components interconnected in accordance with the
requirements of Clause 22.1.1; or
(c) Two or more components positively connected together between
panel points by means of the decking, so as to act as a single unit;
the radius of gyration shall be computed about the axis perpendicular to
the plane of the joist web.
For a section not symmetrical about an axis in the plane of the joist
web, or for two individual components not inter-connected between panel
points, the least radius of gyration of such section or component shall be
used. The slenderness ratio so determined shall be used to compute the
allowable axial compressive stress.
20.9.3 For panel lengths exceeding 24 inches, the following procedure

shall be used to proportion the compression chord, assuming full load on
the joist:
(a) At panel points
fa
0.60F,.
Ffbb
1.0
(b) At mid-panel
.h..
+ F.!ib -<
Fa
1.0
where fa = computed axial compressive stress in panel under consideration (ksi)

h = computed bending compressive stress at point under
consideration (ksi)
Fa = permissible axial compressive stress (ksi) (see Clause
20.7)
Fb = permissible bending stress (ksi) (see Clause 20.7). At
panel points F b may be taken as 0.75 F y provided that
the chord section meets the requirements of Clause 14.1.
F y = specified minimum yield point or yield strength of
com pression chord steel.
20.9.4 Perpendicular to the plane of the joist the compression chord

shall be stayed laterally by the deck or, if necessary, by lateral bracing
spaced so that the slenderness ratio of the compression chord in the direction
perpendicular to the plane of the joist does not exceed the design slenderness
ratio.
20.10 Webs
20.10.1 Webs shall be designed to resist the shear force at any point
resulting from full uniform loading and any other specified loading but
vertical shear force shall be taken as not less than 50 per cent of the end
reaction for joist spans up to 32 feet and not less than 25 per cent of the end
reaction for joist spans 32 feet or longer.
20.10.2 The effective length of a web member shall be taken as the
clear length of the member between chords.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-388-
T
45
20.11 Bearings
20.11.1 Bearings at ends of joists shall be proportioned so that the
allowable bearing stress on the supporting material is not exceeded.
20.11.2 On a masonry or concrete support, the end of the bearing

shall extend at least 4 inches beyond the face of the support.
20.11.3 On a steel support the end of the bearing shall extend at
least 27-'2 inches beyond the face of the support except that, when the
available bearing area is restricted, this distance may be reduced provided
that the bearing is adequately anchored to the support and the allowable
bearing stress is not exceeded.
20.12 Fillers or Battens
20.12.1 Compression members, other than chords, composed of two
components separated one from the other shall have fillers or battens
spaced so that the slenderness ratio of each component shall not exceed
the slenderness ratio of the member as a whole. Compression chords shall
comply with the requirements of Clause 20.9.
20.12.2 Tension members composed of two components, separated

one from the other, shall have fillers or battens spaced so that the slenderness ratio of each component shall not exceed 240.
20.13 Connections and Splices
20.13.1 Component members of joists shall be connected by welding,
bolting, or other approved methods.
20.13.2 Connections and splices shall develop the design load without
exceeding the stresses given in Clause 16. Butt-welded splices shall develop
the specified minimum tensile strength of the member.
20.13.3 Splices may occur at any point in chord or web members.
20.13.4 Members connected at a joint shall have their gravity axes
meet at a point if practicable. Eccentricity on either side of the neutral
axis of a chord member may be neglected if the eccentricity does not exceed
the distance from the chord neutral axis to an outer fibre of the chord.
Otherwise, provision shall be made for the stresses due to eccentricity.
If a single angle web member is attached to the outside of the stem of a
tee or double angle chord, due consideration shall be given to the resulting
eccen trici ty .
20.13.5 Ends of joists shall be proportioned to resist any bending

produced by eccentricity at the supports.
20.14 Shop Painting. Joists shall have one shop coat of protective paint
of a type standard with the manufacturer unless otherwise specified.
20.15 Anchorage
20.15.1 Joists supporting up to 100 square feet of area shall be
anchored to steel supports at each end bearing by not less than two VB-inch
fillet welds each one inch long, or by a },1-inch diameter bolt, or by other
comparable means. On masonry supports, each joist shall be anchored to
the masonry by means of a %-inch diameter steel rod at least 8 inches long
embedded horizontally in the masonry, or by two 7-'2-inch diameter anchor
bolts embedded vertically in the masonry, or by other comparable means.
46
eSA STANDARD S16
20.15.2 Joists supporting more than 100 square feet of area shall be
anchored to steel supports at each end bearing by not less than two ~-inch
fillet welds each 172 inches long, or by a %:-inch diameter bolt, or by other
comparable means. On masonry supports, each joist shall be anchored to
the masonry by means of a %:-inch diameter steel rod at least 12 inches
long embedded horizontally in the masonry, or by two %:-inch diameter
anchor bolts embedded vertically in the masonry, or by other comparable
means.
20.15.3 Joists required to furnish lateral support to the chords or
flanges of supporting steel members. shall be anchored to such members
and at their opposite ends by connections capable of withstanding a horizontal force of not less than 10 per cent of the end reaction of the joist.
20.15.4 Provision shall be made for any specified uplift force. In roof
construction, each joist shall be anchored to resist a net uplift of 10 pounds
per square foot of supported roof area unless otherwise specified.
20.16 Deflection
20.16.1 Deflections shall not exceed those permitted by Clause 8.
20.16.2 The deflection may be established by test or may be computed
assuming a moment of inertia equal to the gross moment of inertia of the
chords about the centroidal axis of the joist and multiplying the calculated
deflection derived on this basis by 1.10.
20.16.3 Special consideration shall be given to floor systems where

unacceptable vibration may occur (see also Clause 7.10).
20.17 Camber. Unless otherwise specified, joists having spans of 40 feet
or greater shaH have minimum cambers as given in Table 7. Reverse camber
in any joist in excess of 1/1000 of the span shall be cause for rejection.
TABLE 7
MINIMUM CAMBER
Span of Joist
Feet
Minimum Camber
at Centre
Inches
40
50
60
70
to 49
to 59
to 69
to 79
80 to 89
90 to 99
100 to 120
20.18 Span-Depth Ratios. Span-depth ratios of fully stressed joists shall

not exceed 24. In floor construction the span-depth ratio should not exceed
20 if practicable.
20.19 Bridging
20.19.1 Diagonal or horizontal bridging transverse to the span of
joists shall be provided to support the joist chords against lateral movement
and to hold the joists in an approximately vertical plane during con-
r
47
struction. Bridging shall be completely installed before any construction

loads are placed on the joists, except the weight of workmen necessary to
j nstall the bridging.
20.19.2 Each line of bridging shall be adequately anchored at each

end to sturdy walls or to main components of the structural frame, if
practicable. If not practicable, diagonal and horizontal bridging shall be
provided in combination between adjacent joists near the ends of bridging
lines. The ends of joists designed to bear on their bottom chords shall be
held adequately in position by attachments to the walls or to the structural
frame or by lines of bridging located at the ends, except where the ends are
"built-in" to masonry or concrete walls.
20.19.3 Diagonal bridging consisting of crossed members running
from top chord to bottom chord of adjacent joists shall have a slenderness
ratio (L/r) of not more than 200 where ilL" is the length of the diagonal
bridging member, or one-half this length when crossed members are connected at their point of intersection, and "r" is the least radius of gyration.
All diagonal bridging shall be connected adequately to the joists by bolts
or welds.
20.19.4 Horizontal bridging shall consist of continuous members in the
planes of both top and bottom chords. Horizontal bridging members shall
have a slenderness ratio of not more than 300. If a bridging member consists
of a solid round bar the diameter shall be at least % inch for joist spacings
up to 28 inches, ~ inch for joist spacings over 28 inches up to 36 inches,
and % inch for joist spacings over 36 inches up to 48 inches.
20.19.5 Attachment of diagonal and horizontal bridging to joist
chords shall be by welding or mechanical means capable of resisting an
axial force of at least 500 pounds in the attached bridging member.
20.19.6 Bridging systems, including sizes of bridging members, and
all necessary details, shall be shown on the erection drawings. If a specific
bridging system is required by the design, the design drawings shall show
any information necessary for the preparation of shop and erection drawings.
20.19.7 In addition to the bridging requirements of Clauses 20.19.1
to 20.19.6, lateral stiffness of the entire joist system shall be ensured. When
adequate external anchorage of the bridging is not available, and the
diaphragm action of the decking is not sufficient to ensure lateral stiffness,
a combination of diagonal and horizontal bracing in each end bay shall be
provided.
20.20 Spacing of Bridging. Diagonal and horizontal bridging, whichever
is furnished, shall be spaced so that the unsupported length of chord between
bridging lines, or between laterally supported ends of the joist and adjacent
bridging lines, does not exceed:
(a) For compression chords
170 r
(b) For tension chords
240 r
where r is the applicable chord radius of gyration about its vertical
axis.
When horizontal bridging is used in conjunction with top-chord-bearing
joists which do not bear on steel supports, the distance from the face of
the support to the nearest line of bridging in the plane of the bottom chord
shall not exceed 120 r. In no case shall there be less than one line of hori-
-391-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
48
eSA STANDARD S16
zontal or diagonal bridging attached to each joist spanning 12 feet or more.

H only a single line of bridging is required it shall be placed at the centre
of the joist span. H bridging is not used on joists less than 12 feet in span,
the ends of such joists shall be anchored to the supports so as to prevent
overturning of the joist during placement of the deck.
20.21 Decking
20.21.1 Decking shall be of any suitable material capable of supporting
the required load at the specified joist spacing. Non-combustible decking
shall be used where non-combustible construction is required.
20.21.2 In general, decking capable of supporting applied load

between joists shall be sufficiently rigid to provide lateral support to com
pression chords of joists when suitably attached. In special cases where the
decking is incapable of furnishing the required lateral support, the design
of joists and/or bridging shall be modified to compensate for this deficiency.
20.21.3 Decking shall bear evenly along the top chords of the joists.
20.21.4 Attachments of decking considered to provide lateral support
shall be capable of staying the top chords laterally. Attachments shall be
deemed to fulfil this requirement when the attachments as a whole are
adequate to resist a force in the plane of the decking of not less than 5 per
cent of the maximum force in the top chord and assumed to be uniformly
distributed along the length of the top chord. The spacing of attachments
shall be not more than the design slenderness ratio of the top chord times
the radius of gyration of the top chord about its vertical axis nor more
than 36 inches.
20.21.5 Decking required to fulfill the function of a batten plate for

top chords consisting of two separated components shall be attached so
that the chord components will act in unison (see Clause 20.9). '
20.21.6 The method of attachment of decking to top chords shall be
by bolts, screws, studs, welds, clips, or other positive means.
20.21.7 Cast-in-place slabs used as decking shall have a minimum
thickness of 2 inches. Forms for cast-in-place slabs shall not cause lateral
displacement of the top chords of joists during installation of the forms or
the placing of the concrete. Non-removable forms shall be positively
attached to top chords by means of clips, ties, wedges, fasteners, or other
suitable means at intervals not exceeding 36 inches; however, there shall
be at least two attachments in the width of each form at each joist. Forms
and their method of attachment shall be such that the cast-in-place slab,
after hardening, is capable of furnishing lateral support to the joist chords.
20.22 Inspection. Before shipment, all joists shall be thoroughly inspected
by the manufacturer. In addition, the requirements of Clause 34 are applicable.
20.23 Handling and Erection. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage

during transport, unloading, site storage, and erection. Dropping of joists
shall not be permitted. Special precautions shall be taken when erecting
long, slender joists and preferably hoisting cables shall not be released
until the member is stayed laterally by at least one line of bridging. Joists
shall have all bridging attached and be permanently fastened into place
before the application of any loads. Heavy construction loads shall be
r
49
adequately distributed so as not to exceed the capacity of any joist. Field

welding shall not cause damage to joists, bridging, or deck.
20.24 Manufacturing Tolerances

20.24.1 The maximum deviation from the specified joist depth shall
be }4 inch.
20.24.2 The maximum deviation from the specified location of a
panel point measured along the length of a chord shall be Y2 inch when
the web system is a continuous bent bar, and }4 inch in other cases.
20.24.3 The maximum deviation from the specified location of a panel
point measured perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the chord and in
the plane of the joist shall be 7i inch.
20.24.4 The connections of web members to chords shall not deviate
laterally more than Ys inch from that assumed in the design.
20.24.5 The maximum sweep of a joist upon completion of manufacture shall be
IL'
h X No. of feet of total length
78 1nc
5
20.24.6 The maximum tilt of bearing shoes shall be 1 in 100 measured
from a plane perpendicular to the plane of the web.
21. COMPOSITE DESIGN
21.1 General. Clause 21 provides rules and requirements for the design of:
(a) Composite beams which consist of a steel beam or girder interconnected wi th a concrete slab; and
(b) Composite columns which consist of a hollow structural section
filled with concrete.
Other types of composite member are permissible if designed, verified,
and approved in accordance with Clause 5.1.2.
21.2 Definitions. The following definitions apply to Clause 21:
Concrete means controlled concrete in accordance with CSA Standard
A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction;
Concrete slab means a reinforced, cast-in-place concrete slab, with
either a flat or ribbed underside, but otherwise free of voids in the design
effective width. The effective slab thickness shall be at least 2Y2 inches;
Effective slab thickness means the overall concrete slab thickness
if the slab has a flat underside. The effective slab thickness may also be
taken as the overall concrete slab thickness if the slab is cast on sheet steel
forms which have a Y2 inch maximum height of corrugation or which are
ribbed so that the minimum clear distance between the ribs is 5 inches, the
maximum height of the rib is not more than 1Y2 inches nor 40 per cent of
the overall slab thickness, and the average width of the rib is not more
than Y5 of the minimum clear distance between ribs nor 25 per cent of the
overall slab thickness.
If the concrete slab is cast on sheet steel forms or cellular floor units
whose profile does not meet the above limits in all respects, the effective
slab thickness shall be the overall slab thickness minus the height of the
50
e8A STANDARD 816
highest corrugation or rib. In no case shall such height exceed 1% inches

nor shall the average width of any concrete-filled rib be less than 2 inches.
21.3 Composite Beams

21.3.1 Effective Slab Width for Design. For slabs extending on
both sides of a supporting steel beam, the effective design width shall not
exceed :
(a) One-fourth the beam span;
(b) The flange wid th of the steel beam plus 16 times the effective slab
thickness;
(c) The average distance from the centre of the steel beam to the
centres of adjacent steel beams.
For slabs extending on only one side of a supporting steel beam the
effective design projection of slab beyond the edge of the flange of the steel
beam shall not exceed:
(a) One-twelfth the beam span;
(b) Six times the effective slab thickness;
(c) One-half the clear distance to an adjacent steel beam.
21.3.2 Slab Reinforcement. Slabs shall be adequately reinforced to

support all superimposed loads and to control cracking both parallel and
transverse to the span of the composite beam. Special attention shall be
given to slabs which are to continue beyond the ends of steel beams with
flexible end-connections. Slab reinforcement in regions of negative bending
shall be anchored by embedding in concrete which is in compression.
21.3.3 Inter-connection
21.3.3.1 Except as permitted by Clause 21.3.3.2, shear connectors shall be furnished in accordance with Clause 21.3.7.
21.3.3.2 Unpainted steel beams totally encased by at least
2 inches of concrete cover on sides and soffit cast integrally with the concrete
slab may be assumed to be inter-connected by natural bond. Concrete
encasement shall have adequate reinforcement to prevent spalling and the
top of the steel beam shall be at least 1% inches below the top and 2 inches
above the bottom of the slab.
21.3.4 Design of Composite Beams with Shear Connectors

21.3.4.1 The composite section shall be proportioned to resist
the total design load without exceeding the allowable stresses for steel and
concrete respectively.
21.3.4.2 Reinforcement parallel to the beam and within the
design effective width of the slab may be included in computing the properties of composite sections subject to negative bending moment provided
that:
(a) Reinforcement is adequately anchored by embeddment in concrete which is in compression; and
(b) Shear connectors are provided in the negative moment region as
prescribed in Clause 21.3.7.
21.3.4.3 The section properties of the composite section shall
be computed according to elastic theory, neglecting any concrete area in
--,394--Copyright NRC-CNRC

51
tension. The effective area of concrete in compression shall be considered as
an equivalent area of steel by dividing it by the appropriate modular ratio.
21.3.4.4 If fewer than the number of shear connectors required
for full composite action are to be provided (see Clause 21.3.7) the effective
area of concrete in compression to be assumed in design shall be reduced
from that given in Clause 21.3.4.3 in proportion to the ratio N/Nu
where N = number of shear connectors to be provided
Nu
number of shear connectors required for full composite
action according to Clause 21.3.7.
If N < O. 5N u no composite action shall be assumed when computing
load-carrying capacity. If N < 0.25 Nu no composite action shall be assumed
when computing deflections.
21.3.4.5 If the steel beam is unshored during construction, the
value of the section modulus of the transformed composite section used in
stress computations (referred to the bottom flange of the steel beam) shall
not exceed
Str = Sa (1. 35
O. 35 IV1 LiM D)
where l\1L = The moment caused by loads applied subsequent to
the time when the concrete has reached 75 per cent
of its required strength
1\1 D = The moment caused by loads applied prior to the
tim~ when the concrete has reached 75 per cent of its
required strength
S. = section modulus (referred to the bottom flange) of the
steel beam
Str = section modulus (referred to the bottom flange) of the
transformed composite section.
The actual section modulus of the transformed composite section shall
be used in computing compressive bending stress in the concrete. For beams
unshored during construction, this stress may be based on loading applied
after hardening of the concrete.
21.3.4.6 The steel beam alone, supporting loads applied prior
to hardening of the concrete, shall not be stressed beyond the values given
in Clause 16.
21.3.5 Design of Encased Composite Beams Without Shear

Connectors
21.3.5.1 Encased steel beams may be proportioned on the
basis that the steel beam alone supports all loads applied prior to hardening
of the concrete and that the composite section supports all loads applied
after hardening of the concrete. In computing the moment of inertia of the
composite section any concrete area in tension shall be neglected. The
maximum combined bending stress in the steel beam shall not exceed
0.66Fy and the maximum compressive bending stress in the concrete shall
not exceed 0.45 F' e. Allowance shall be made for the effect of shoring, if
employed.
21.3.5.2 As an alternative method of design, encased simple
span steel beams may be proportioned by assuming that the steel beam
alone resists the bending due to all dead and live load at a bending stress
not exceeding 0.75 Fy. Temporary shoring is not necessary.
21.3.6 Vertical Shear and End Reactions. The web of the steel
beam shall be adequate to carry vertical shear forces due to the total design
52
CSA STANDARD S16
load. End connections of the steel beam shall be adequate to transmit end
reactions due to the total design load.
21.3.7 Shear Connectors

21.3.7.1 For composite beams proportioned in accordance with
Clause 21.3.4, it shall be assumed that at ultimate load the entire horizontal
shear at the j unction of the steel beam and the slab is transferred by shear
connectors attached to the top of the beam and embedded in the slab. For
full composite action with concrete subject to flexural compression the
total horizontal shear (V b) to be resisted between the point of maximum
positive moment and points of zero moment shall be taken as the smaller
value obtained from the following expressions
V h = A. Fy and Vb = 0.85 F'e Ae
where Ae = area of concrete equal to effective flange width times
effective slab thickness
A. = area of steel beam
F y = specified yield point of steel beam
F'e = specified compressive strength of concrete at 28 days
21.3.7.2 In continuous composite beams where suitably
anchored longitudinal reinforcement is considered to act compositely with
the steel beam in the region of negative moment, the total horizontal shear
(Vb) to be resisted by shear connectors between the point of maximum
negative moment and points of zero moment shall be taken as
V h = A.r Fyr
where A. r = area of longitudinal reinforcing steel in negative
moment region located within the effective slab width
F yr = specified yield point or yield strength of longitudinal
reinforcing steel
21.3.7.3 The number of shear connectors required for full
composite action, located each side of the point of maximum moment
(positive or negative as the case may be) and distributed between that
point and adjacent points of zero moment shall be not less than Nu = Vh/q
where q is the load per connector given in Table 8.
21.3.7.4 Within a region of positive or negative bending,
shear connectors may be spaced uniformly, except that in regions of positive
bending the number of shear connectors required between any concentrated
load in that region and the nearest point of zero moment shall be not less
than N' as determined from the following expression:
N'
= N
[PM
lVlmax P-
1]
where N = total number of shear connectors to be provided

M = the moment at a concentrated load point
l\1max = maximum positive moment
P = the ratio StriS.
21.3.7.5 Shear connectors shall be embedded in concrete for
their full length and shall have at least 1 inch of concrete cover.
21.3.7.6 The diameter of a welded stud shall not exceed 2.5
times the thickness of the part to which it is welded, unless test data satisfactory to the authority having jurisdiction is provided to establish the
capacity of the stud as a shear connector.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-396-
..,
53
21.3.7.7 The maxImum spacing of shear connectors shall not

exceed 24 inches unless a greater spacing can be justified by analysis and
verified on the basis of a suitable test programme.
TABLE 8
VALUES FOR SHEAR CONNECfORS
Maximum Horizontal Shear Load Per Connector
When Embedded in SoUd Concrete Slabt (KIPS)
Shear Connector
~
inch diam welded stud
% inch diam welded stud
%' inch diam welded stud
Y8 inch diam welded stud

3 inch channel @ 4.1 lB. per foot
4 inch channel @ 5.4 lb. per foot
5 inch channel @ 6.7 lb. per foot
F' 0
= 3,000 psi
F' 0
3,500 psi
F' .. 4,000 psi
10
16
23
11
17
25
12
18
27
31
8L
9L
10L
33
9L
10L
11L
35
10L
llL
12L
Shear connector values given are approximately 80 per cent of computed ultimate and are
intended to be used only when horizontal shear is computed on an ultimate strength basis as
per Clause 21.3.7.
tConcrete shall be as defined in Clause 21.2. For other types of concrete, values for shear connectors must be established by tests.
tWhen concrete slabs are cast on 1 ~ inch deep cellular steel floor units or steel forms of similar
profile the maximum horizontal shear load for a %' inch diameter stud at least 3 inches in
length is 19 kips for all concrete strengths shown.
L = length of channel connector in inches.
21.4 Concrete-Filled Hollow Structural Sections Used as Columns

21.4.1 Hollow structural sections meeting the requirements of Clause
14 may be designed as composite columns when filled solidly with concrete.
21.4.2 The allowable axial compressive load (P a) is given by the

expression
P a = P e + Pc
allowable axial load on steel section alone (kips)
AsFa with Fa as defined in Clause 16.2.2.
Pc
allowable axial load on concrete area Ae (kips)
= AeF e with Fe as defined in Clause 21.4.3
where P e
21.4.3 The allowable concrete axial compressive stress (Fe) (ksi) shall
be computed in accordance with the following formulas. The slenderness
ratio (KL/r) to be assumed is that of the steel section alone.
KL/r ::; Co
Fe
0.40 F'o
<
C
F
4
Co) ]
C o < KL Ir _ p
e
O. 0
e
- (KL/r
(C _ - Co)
I
F' [1
KL/r > C p
Fe
0
where F' e = 28 day specified concrete cylinder strength (ksi)
Co. C p = slenderness ratios as defined in Clause 16.2.2 for the
grade of steel specified for the steel section.
21.4.4 When bending is present in addition to axial load, the bending

shall be resisted by the steel section alone.
54
CSA STANDARD S16
11. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILT-UP MEMBERS

22.1 General Requirements for Compression Members. All components of built-up compression members and the transverse spacing of their
lines of conne\.ting bolts or welds shall meet the requirements of Clauses
13 and 14.
22.1.1 Compression members composed of two or more rolled shapes

separated from one another by intermittent fillers, shall be inter-connected
at fillers spaced so that the slenderness ratio of any shape between points
of inter-connection does not exceed the slenderness ratio of the builtup
member. The least radius of gyration of each component part shall be used
in computing the slenderness ratio of that part between points of interconnection with other component parts.
22.1.2 All component parts in contact with one another at the ends
of built-up compression members shall be connected by bolts spaced
longitudinally not more than four diameters apart for a distance equal to
1.5 times the maximum width of the member, or by continuous welds having
a length not less than the maximum width of the member.
22.1.3 Unless closer spacing is required for transfer of stress, or for
sealing inaccessible surfaces, the longitudinal spacing, in line, between
intermediate bolts or intermittent welds in built-up compression members
shall not exceed the following, as applicable:*
(a) Two rolled shapes in contact
24 inches;
(b) Outside component of the section consisting of a plate,
and bolts provided on all gauge lines or intermittent
welds (not staggered) provided along component edges
125t/yFy but not more than 12 inches, where t = thickness of outside plate;
(c) Outside component of the section consisting of a plate,
and bolts or intermittent welds staggered on adjacent
lines 200t/yFy but not more than 18 inches, where t =
thickness of outside plate.
,. The spacing requirements are maximum spacings which will not always provide a continuous
tight fit between components in contact. When the environment is such that corrosion could be a
serious problem, the spacing of bolts or welds may need to be less than the specified maximum.
22.1.4 Open sides of compression members built-up from plates or

shapes shall be provided with lacing and have tie plates at each end and
also at any intermediate points where the lacing is interrupted, or, alternatively, perforated cover-plates may be provided in accordance with
Clause 22.1.9, or batten plates in accordance with Clauses 22.1.10 and
22.1.11. End tie plates shall be as near the end as practicable and shall
have a length not less than the distance between the lines of bolts or welds
connecting them to the main components of the member. Intermediate
tie plates may have a length not less than one-half that prescribed for
end tie plates.
22.1.5 The thickness of tie plates shall be at least 1/50 of the width
between lines of bolts or welds connecting them to the main components,
and the longi tudinal spacing of the bolts or welds shall not exceed 6 inches.
At least three bolts shall be furnished at each end of a tie plate, or, alternatively, a total length of weld not less than %' the length of the tie plate.
STEEL STRUGrURES FOR BUILDINGS
55
22.1.6 Lacing consisting of bars, rods, or shapes shall be spaced so

that the slenderness ratio of a main component between adjacent points of
intersection with the lacing system shall not exceed the slenderness ratio
for the member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to resist a shear
stress, normal to the longitudinal axis of the member, of .not less than
2Y2 per cen t of the total load on the member.
22.1.7 In single lacing systems, the slenderness ratio of lacing members
shall not exceed 140 between connections to the main components. In
double lacing systems, the lacing members shall be joined at their intersection and the slenderness ratio shall not exceed 140 between the point
of intersection of the lacing members and the connection of a lacing member
to a main component.
22.1.8 Lacing members preferably shall be inclined to the longitudinal
axis of built-up members at an angle of not less than 60 degrees for single
lacing nor 45 degrees for double lacing.
22.1.9 Perforated cover-plates may be used in lieu of lacing and tie
plates on open sides of built-up compression members. For practical reasons
perforated cover-plates should not be considered for built-up members less
than approximately 16 inches wide when bolts are to be used to attach the
perforated cover-plates to the main components of the member. The net
width of such plates at access holes shall be assumed available to resist
axial stress provided that:
(a) The width-thickness ratio conforms to Clause 14;
(b) The length of the access hole does not exceed twice its width;
(c) The clear distance between access holes in the direction of stress
is not less than the transverse distance between lines of bolts or
welds connecting the perforated plate to the main components of
the built-up member;
Cd) The periphery of the access hole at all points has a minimum radius
of 1Y2 inches.
22.1.10 Battens consisting of plates or shapes may be used on open
sides of built-up compression members which do not carry primary bending
stress in addition to axial stress. Battens shall be provided at the ends of
the member, at locations where the member is laterally supported along
its length and elsewhere as determined by the following requirements as
to spacing:
(a) \Vhen the slenderness ratio of the built-up member with respect to
the axis perpendicular to the battens is equal to or less than 80 per
cent of the slenderness ratio with respect to the axis parallel to the
battens, the spacing between battens shaH be such that the
slenderness ratio of a main component between ends of adjacent
batten plates shall not exceed SO, nor shall it exceed 70 per cent of
the slenderness ratio of the built-up member with respect to the
axis parallel to the battens;
(b) When the slenderness ratio of the built-up member with respect to
the axis perpendicular to the battens is more than 80 per cent of
the slenderness ratio with respect to the axis parallel to the battens,
the spacing between battens shall be such that the slenderness
ratio of a main component between ends of adjacent batten plates
shall not exceed 40, nor shall it exceed 60 per cen t of the slenderness
56
CSA STANDARD 816
ratio of the built-up member with respect to the axis perpendicular

to the battens.
22.1.11 Battens shall have a length not less than the distance
between line(of bolts or welds connecting them to the main components of
the member and a thickness not less than 1/50 of this distance if the batten
consists of a flat plate. Battens and their connections shall be proportioned
to resist simultaneously a longitudinal shear force "q" and a moment "M"
where q = Qd (kips)
na
M = Od (inch-kips)
2n
d = longitudinal distance centre-to-centre of battens
(inches)
a = distance between lines of bolts or welds connecting the
batten to each main component (inches)
Q = 27'2 per cent of total axial force in member (kips)
n = number of parallel p]anes of battens.
22.2 General:Requirements for Tension Members
22.2.1 Tension members composed of two or more shapes, plates or
bars separated from one another by intermittent fillers shall have the components inter-connected at fillers spaced so that the slenderness ratio of any
component between points of inter-connection shall not exceed 240.
22.2.2 Tension members composed of two plate components in

contact or a shape and a plate component in contact shall have the components inter-connected so that the spacing between connecting bolts or
welds does not exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner plate nor
12 inches. *
22.2.3 Tension members composed of two or more shapes in contact
shall have the components inter-connected so that the spacing between
connecting bolts or welds does not exceed 24 inches, except where it can be
determined that a greater spacing would not affect the satisfactory performance of the member. *
The spacing requirements are maximum spacings which will not always provide a continuous
tight fit between components in contact. When the environment is such that corrosion could be a
serious problem, the spacing of bolts or welds may need. to be less than the specified maximum.
22.2.4 Tension members composed of two separated main components

may have either perforated cover plates or tie plates on the open sides of
the built-up member. Tie plates shall have a length not less than two-thirds
of the transverse distance between bolts or welds connecting them to the
main components of the member and shall be spaced so that the slenderness
ratio of any component between the tie plates does not exceed 240. The
thickness of tie plates shall be at least 1/50 of the transverse distance
between the bolts or we1ds connecting them to the main components and the
longitudinal spacing of the bolts or welds shall not exceed 6 inches. Perforated cover-plates shall comply with the requirements of Clause 22.1.9.
22.3 General Requirements for Open Box-Type Beams and Grillages.
Where two or more rolled beams or channels are used side-by-side to form
a flexural member, they shall be connected together at intervals of not
more than 5 feet. Through-bolts and separators may be used, provided
that in beams having a depth of 12 inches or more, no fewer than two bolts
57
shall be used at each separator location. When concentrated loads are

carried from one beam to the other, or distributed between the beams,
diaphragms having sufficient stiffness to distribute the load shall be bolted
or welded between the beams. The design of members shall provide for
torsion resulting from any unequal distribution of loads. Where beams are
exposed, they shall be sealed against corrosion of interior surfaces, or spaced
sufficiently far apart to permit cleaning and painting.
23. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BRACING

23.1 General
23.1.1 Steel structures and members shall be braced adequately to
provide stability. Care shall be taken to ensure that the bracing of the
entire structural system is complete, particularly when there is dependence
on walls, floors, or roofs acting as shear resisting elements or diaphragms.
23.1.2 Design drawings shall indicate all bracing essential to the

integrity of the completed structure and shall show any details necessary
to ensure the effectiveness of the bracing system.
23.1.3 Erection drawings shall show all permanent bracing called
for in the design. If specified by the authority having jurisdiction, temporary
bracing req uired during construction also shall be shown.
23.1.4 Clause 23.2 covers minimum bracing requirements for structures or frames as a whole. Clauses 23.3 to 23.5 cover minimum bracing
requirements for individual members or groups of members considered as
single entities. Any bracing requirement specified elsewhere in this Standard
shall govern in the event that such requirement is more stringent.
23.1.5 Upon completion of the structure no structural member or
component shall have an unbraced length exceeding that assumed in design.
23.1.6 The bracing function may be fulfilled by members provided
especially for the purpose, or by members or assemblies provided primarily
for other purposes when it can be safely assumed that the latter will also
be adequate to provide the necessary bracing requirements.
23.2 Bracing of Structures
23.2.1 Bracing shall be provided to resist external lateral loads and
to ensure stability under gravity loads except where adequate resistance
is provided by flexural frame stiffness or other elements such as shear walls.
Bracing shall be proportioned to provide, for the entire portion of the
structure dependent on the bracing under consideration, the following:
(a) Resistance to external lateral loads combined with sway forces
induced by full gravity loads acting on the structure when laterally
deflected by these combined loads. A load probability factor of
0.75 may be used;
(b) Adequate stiffness to prevent instability (i.e. failure in the sidesway
mode) under 1.7 times full design gravity load;
(c) Resistance to any other load combinations to which the bracing
may be subjected, when essential to the design of the bracing or
integrity of the structure.
23.2.2 A steel structure may be designed to resist the forces given in

Clause 23.2.1 by a combination of flexural frame stiffness and bracing. In
-401-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
58
eSA STANDARD Sl6
this case the bracing shall be designed to resist an appropriate proportion

of the total load, as determined by rational analysis.
23.3
Bracin~
of Columns
23.3.1 Bracing shall be proportioned to resist at least 2 per cent of

the axial load in the column at the brace location unless a suitable analvsis
is carried out to determine the appropriate strength and stiffness of ~the
bracing members. Bracing forces shall be taken in addition to any other
forces acting on the bracing members.
23.3.2 Bracing members shall conform to the slenderness ratio requirements of Clause 13.
23.3.3 When two or more bracing members act at one location, the
total assumed bracing force may be shared proportionately, provided that
the nature of the bracing permits combined action.
23.3.4 Lacing, tie plates and battens for columns which consist of
two or more separated main components shall conform to Clause 22.
23.4
Bracin~
of Beams, Girders and Trusses
23.4.1 Individual bracing members providing lateral restraint to the

compression flange of beams and girders or the compression chord of trusses
shall be as specified for columns in Clause 23.3 assuming that the required
force to be resisted by the bracing is at least 2 per cent of the force in the
compression flange at the brace location.
23.4.2 When bracing of the compression flange or chord is effected
by a slab or deck, the slab or deck and the means by which the computed
bracing forces are transmitted between the flange or chord and the slab
or deck shall be adequate to resist a force in the plane of the slab or deck.
This force shall be considered to be uniformly distributed along the length
of the compression flange or chord, and shall be taken as at least 5 per cent
of the maximum force in the flange or chord, unless a lesser amount can be
justified by analysis.
23.5 Special Consideration for Asymmetrical Sections. Channels,
angles, zees, and other asymmetrical sections shall be braced so that any
twisting of the member under load is held to that which will not affect the
load carrying capacity or stiffness assumed in the design.
24.1
Ali~nment
24. CONNECTIONS
of Members. Axially stressed members meeting at a
joint shall have their gravity axes intersect at a common point if practicable;
otherwise the results of bending stresses due to the joint eccentricity shall
be provided for.
24.2 Placement of Fasteners and Welds. Except in members subjected

to repeated loads (as defined in Clause 18), disposition of pairs of fillet
welds to balance the forces about the neutral axis or axes for end-connections
of single angle, double angle, or similar types of axially loaded members is
not required. Eccentricity between the gravity axes of such members and
the gauge lines of bolted end-connections also may be neglected. In axially
loaded members subjected to repeated loads, the fasteners or welds in endconnections shall have their centre of gravity on the gravity axis of the
member unless provision is made for the effect of the resulting eccentricity.
,.
59
24.3 Unrestrained Members. Except as otherwise indicated on the

design drawings, all connections of beams, girders and trusses shall be
designed and detailed as flexible and ordinarily may be proportioned for
the reaction shears only. If, however, the eccentricity or rigidity of the
connection is excessive, provision shall be made for the resulting moment
in proportioning the connection (see also Clause 12.1).
24.4 Restrained Members. When beams, girders, or trusses are subject
to both reaction shear and end-moment due to full or partial end restraint
or to continuous or cantilever construction, their connections shall be
designed for the combined effect of shear, bending, and axial stress.
When beams are rigidly framed to the flange of an I-type column, stiffeners
shall be provided on the column web as follows:
(a) opposite com pression flange of beam if
Af
(F yb)
We < tb
5k (Fye)
and when
he
Wa
< 30
(b) opposi te tension flange of beam if

te < O. 4 v'A-=--f(7:F=--Yb--:'jF=-y-e')
where We = thickness of column web (inches)
k = distance from outer face of column flange to web toe
of fillet, or to web toe of flange-to-web weld in a
welded column (inches)
tb = thickness of beam flange delivering load (inches)
te
thickness of column flange (inches)
he
clear depth of column web (inches)
Af = area of beam flange delivering load (inches2 )
F yb = specified yield point of beam flange (ksi)
F yo = specified yield point of column (ksi)
The area of stiffener, or pair of stiffeners, (Alit) opposite either beam flange
shall be such that:
A. t
;;
[AI
i~::i
w, (tb
+ 5k) ] C
where C is the ratio of specified yield point of the column to specified

yield point of the stiffener.
Stiffener ends shall be welded to the inside face of the column flange
receiving the concentrated load. Stiffeners shall be welded to the web so
as to develop the strength of the stiffener. When beams frame to one side
of a column only, web stiffeners need not be longer than half the depth of
the column.
24.5 Connections of Tension or Compression Members. Connections

at ends of tension members, or compression members not finished to bear,
shall develop the strength required by the computed design load, at the
stresses permitted, but not less than 50 per cent of the effective strength
of the member.
24.6 Bearing Joints in Compression Members

24.6.1 Where columns bear on bearing plates, or are finished to bear
at splices there shall be sufficient fasteners or welds to hold all parts securely
in place.
60
e8A STANDARD 816
24.6.2 Where other compression members are finished to bear, the

splice material and connecting fasteners or welds shall be arranged to hold
all parts in place and shall be proportioned for 50 per cent of the computed
load.
24.7 Fillers
24.7.1 When fasteners carrying computed stress pass through fillers
thicker than U inch, in bearing-type shear connections, and thicker than
two fastener diameters in friction-type shear connections, the fillers shall
be extended beyond the splice material and the filler extension shall be
secured by sufficient fasteners to distribute the total force in the member
uniformly over the combined section of the member and the filler, or
alternatively an equivalent number of fasteners shall be included in the
connection.
24.7.2 In welded construction, any filler thicker than U inch shall

extend beyond the edges of the splice plate and shall be welded to the part
on which it is fitted with sufficient weld to transmit the splice plate stress,
applied at the surface of the filler, as an eccentric load. Welds connecting
the splice plate to the filler shall be sufficient to transmit the splice plate
stress and shall be long enough to avoid overstressing the filler along the
toe of the weld. Any filler U inch or less in thickness shall have its edges
made flush with the edges of the splice plate and the required weld size
shall be equal to the thickness of the filler plate plus the size necessary to
transmi t the splice plate stress.
24.8 Welds in Combination. If two or more of the general types of weld
(groove, fillet, plug, or slot) are combined in a single connection, the effective
capacity of each shall be separately computed with reference to the axis
of the group in order to determine the allowable capacity of the combination.
24.9 Fasteners and Welds in Combination

24.9.1 When approved, high-strength bolts in frictiontype connections may be considered as sharing stress with welds in new work.
24.9.2 In making alterations to structures, existing rivets and highstrength bolts may be utilized to carry stresses resulting from existing dead
loads, and welding may be proportioned to carryall additional loads.
24.10 HighStrength Bolts (in Friction-Type Joints) and Rivets in
Combination. In making alterations, rivets and high-strength bolts in
friction-type joints may be considered as sharing stresses due to dead
and live loads.
24.11 Connections Requiring High-Strength Bolts or Welds

24.11.1 High-strength bolts or welds shall be used for the following
connections unless otherwise permitted by the authority having jurisdiction:
(a) Column splices in structures over 100 feet in height;
(b) Connections of beams, girders, and trusses on which the bracing
of the structure is dependent, in structures over 100 feet in height;
(c) Roof truss splices, connections of trusses to columns, colum . . !
splices, column bracing, knee braces, and crane supports in all
structures carrying cranes over five-ton capacity;
(d) Connections for supports of running machinery, or of other live
loads which produce impact or reversal of stress;
61
(e) Any other connections so stipulated on the design plans.

I
24.11.2 In all cases except those listed in Clause 24.11.1, connections

may be made with A307 bolts.
24.11.3 For the purposes of Clause 24.11, height of a tier structure
is the distance from curb level to the top of the roof beams in flat roofs or
curb level to top of roof beams at mean gable height in the case of sloping
roofs. Penthouses may be excluded in determining the height of a structure.
24.12 Special Fasteners. Fasteners of special types may be used when
approved.
25. BOLTING DETAILS

25.1 High-Strength Bolts. A325 and A490 high-strength bolts and their
usage shall conform to Clause 26.
25.2 A307 Bo1ts. Nuts on A307 bolts shall be tightened to an amount

corresponding to the full effort of a man using a spud wrench of appropriate
size. When so specified, nuts shall be prevented from working loose by the
use of lock washers, lock nuts, jam nuts, thread burring, welding, or other
approved methods.
25.3 Effective Bearing Area. The effective bearing area of bolts shall be
the nominal diameter multiplied by the length in bearing. For countersunk
bolts half the depth of the countersink shall be deducted from the bearing
length.
25.4 Long Grips. A307 bolts which carry calculated loads, the grip of
which exceeds five diameters, shall have their number increased by 1 per cent
for each additional !16 inch in the grip.
25.5 Minimum Pitch. The minimum distance between centres of bolt

holes preferably shall be not less than three bolt diameters and in no case
less than 2% diameters.
25.6 Minimum Edge Distance. The minimum distance from the centre
of a bolt hole to any edge shall be that given in Table 9.
TABLE 9
MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE FOR BOLT HOLES
Bolt Diameter
At Sheared Edge
Inches
Inches
Yz
%
1
%
VB
lYs
l%,
Over lU
1
lYs
I%,
lYz
1%*
2
2%,
1% X Diameter
At Rolled or
Gas Cut Edget
Inches
%
VB
1
lYs
l%'
lYz
1%
lU X Diameter
*At ends of beam framing angles this distance may be 1 %' inches.
tGas cut edges shall be smooth and free from notches. Edge distance in this column may be
decrease(/, Ys inch when hole is at a point where computed stress is not more than 0.2 Fy.
62
e5A STANDARD 516
25.7 Maximum Edge Distance. The maximum distance from the centre
of any bolt to the nearest edge of parts in contact shall be 12 times the
thickness of the outside connected part with a maximum of 6 inches.
25.8 Minimum Edge Distance in Line of Stress. In connection of

tension members having more than two bolts in a line parallel to the direction
of stress, the minimum end distance (from centre of end fastener to nearest
end of connected part) shall be governed by the edge distance values
given in Table 9. In members having either one or two bolts in the line of
stress, the end distance shall be the greater of:
(a) One and one-half bolt diameters;
(b) The load per bolt (kips) divided by the product of the thickness
of the part (inches) times 0.4 F y (ksi).
26. STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS

26.1 General
26.1.1 Clause 26 covers the design, assembly, and inspection of
structural joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts, or equivalent fasteners,
tightened to a specific minimum tension. A325 and A490 bolts are used in
holes slightly larger than the nominal bolt size.
26.1.2 Joints required to resist shear between connected parts shall

be designated on design and shop drawings as either bearing-type or
friction -type.
26.1.3 Friction-type shear joints, in which design load is assumed
to be transferred by the slip-resistance of the clamped faying surfaces,
shall be required :
(a) In connections subject to stress reversal;
(b) Where slippage into bearing cannot be tolerated.
26.1.4 Joints subject to repeated loads shall be proportioned in

accordance with Clause 18.
26.2 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers
26.2.1 Except as provided in Clause 26.2.4, bolts, nuts, and washers
shall conform to ASTM Standards A325, High Strength Steel Bolts for
Structural Steel Joints Including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened
Washers, and A490, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, as applicable.
26.2.2 Except as provided in Clause 26.2.4, bolt dimensions shall be

those prescribed by American National Standard .B18.2.1, Square and
Hex Bolts and Screws, Including Hex Cap Screws and Lag Screws, for
heavy hex structural bolts; and nut dimensions shall be those prescribed by
American National Standard B18.2.2, Square and Hex Nuts, for heavy,
semi-finished hex nuts.
26.2.3 If required, A325 bolts, nuts, and washers may be galvanized,
The coating shall be in accordance with Class C requirements of ASTM
Standard A153, Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
Galvanized nuts shall be over-tapped in accordance with ASTM Standard
A563, Carbon Steel Nuts, for grade C, D, or DH nuts and when installed
on a galvanized bolt in a solid steel connection and with not more than
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-406-
"'..."" ' ......... n .. ..,.'"
FOR BUILDINGS
63
four threads in the grip, shall be capable of producing a tensile-type fracture

of the bolt and of rotating one full turn from snug before failure.
26.2.4 Other fasteners which meet the chemical composition requirements of ASTM Standard A325 or A490 and which meet the mechanical
requirements of the same Standard in full-size tests and which have body
diameter and bearing areas under the head and nut, or their equivalent,
not less than those provided by a bolt and nut of the same nominal dimensions prescribed by Clauses 26.2.1 and 26.2.2, may be used. Such alternative
fasteners may differ in other dimensions from the prescribed bolt and nut
dimensions. When such fasteners are proposed as an alternative to A325
or A490 standard bolts their use shall be subject to the approval of the
26.2.5 If necessary, washers may be clipped on one side to a point
not closer than U of the bolt diameter from the centre of the washer hole.
26.2.6 Design drawings shall indicate the type or types of bolt which
may be used. Shop and erection drawings shall show the type of bolt to
be used.
26.3 Bolted Parts
26.3.1 Bolted parts shall fit together solidly when assembled and shall
not be separated by gaskets or any other interposed compressible material.
26.3.2 Holes may be punched, sub-punched, or sub-drilled and

reamed, or drilled, as permitted by Clause 31.5. The nominal diameter of
a hole shall be not more than KG inch greater than the nominal bolt size
except that, if approved, holes may be made Ys inch larger in diameter
than the nominal bolt size or slotted holes may be used where necessary,
provided that any effects resulting from oversize holes are allowed for in
the design.
26.3.3 When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent
to bolt heads, nuts, and washers shall be free of scale (tight mill scale
excepted), burrs, dirt, and foreign material which would prevent solid
seating of the parts.
26.3.4 Faying surfaces within friction-type joints shall be free of
oil, paint, lacquer, or other coatings except as noted below:
(a) Hot-dip galvanizing, provided that faying surfaces are wire brushed
or "brush-off" blast cleaned after galvanizing and prior to assembly;
(b) Sprayed metal coatings applied in accordance with CSA Standard
G189, Sprayed :Metal Coatings for Atmospheric Corrosion Protection;
(c) Inorganic zinc rich paints as defined in SSPC PS12.00, Guide to
Zinc Rich Coating Systems, covering zinc rich paints with inorganic
vehicles.
Faying surfaces within friction-type joints also may be coated by
other materials and methods provided that these have been sufficiently
tested to establish the performance of full-size similarly coated joints to
the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction and that the tests
form the basis for determining an allowable bolt "shear" stress which will
provide a margin of safety against joint slippage of at least 1.40 under
design load.
-407-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
64
eSA STANDARD S16
26.4 Allowable Stresses. Allowable stresses shall be those given in

Clauses 16, 17, and 18 for A325 and A490 bolts, except as provided in
Clause 26.3.4 for friction-type joints with specially-coated faying surfaces.
26.5 Applied Tension. Bolts required to support load by direct tension
shall be proportioned so that the average tensile stress on the nominal bolt
area, independent of initial tigh tening force, shall not exceed the allowable
tensile stress. The applied load shall be taken as the sum of the external
load plus any tension caused by prying action due to deformation of the
connected parts.
26.6 Shear
26.6.1 Bolts in friction-type joints, assembled in accordance with
Clause 26.3, shall be proportioned so as to provide resistance to joint
slippage when tightened. The slip resistance provided by a bolt shall be
taken as equal to the nominal bolt area times the appropriate allowable
bolt "shear" stress times the relevant number of slip planes between
connected parts.
26.6.2 Bolts in bearing-type joints shall be proportioned so that
the average shear stress on the nominal bolt area shall not exceed the
allowable shear stress, with due recognition of the presence or absence of
threads in a shear plane between connected parts. When an outside part
thickness adjacent to a nut is less than % inch, threads shall be considered
to be present in a shear plane unless special precautions are taken.
26.7 Bearing Stress. In bearing-type joints, the computed bearing
stress, assumed to act on an area equal to the nominal bolt diameter times
the thickness of the connected part, shall not exceed the allowable bearing
stress.
26.8 Installation
26.8.1 Each bolt shall be tightened to provide, when all bolts in the
joint are tight, at least the minimum bolt tension given in Table 10 for the
size and type of bolt used.
26.8.2 Threaded bolts shall be tightened by the "turn-of-nut" method.
If necessary, tightening may be done by turning the bolt while holding
the nut against rotation.
26.8.3 Except as noted in Clauses 26.8.4, 26.8.5, and 26.8.6, A325 and
A490 bolts shall have a flat hardened washer under the element (nut or
bolt head) turned in tightening.
26.8.4 A325 bolts may be installed without a hardened washer
unless a hardened washer is required by the specified method of inspection
(see Clause 26.10.2 (a) and (b) ).
26.8.5 If necessary, bolts in slotted holes shall be installed with
sufficient additional washers to distribute bearing stress under the head
and nut.
26.8.6 Bevelled washers shall be used to compensate for lack of
parallelism where, in the case of A325 bolts, an outer face of bolted parts
has more than a five per cent slope with respect to a plane normal to the
bolt axis. In the case of A490 bolts bevelled washers shall be used to compensate for any lack of parallelism due to slope of outer faces.
65
26.9 "Tum-of-Nut" Tightening

26.9.1 After aligning the holes in a joint, sufficient bolts shall be
placed and brought to a "snug-tight" condition to ensure that the parts
of the joint are brought into full contact with each other. "Snug-tight"
is the tightness attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full
effort of a man using a spud wrench.
26.9.2 Following the initial snugging operation, bolts shall be placed

in any remaining open holes and brought to snug-tightness. Re-snugging
may be necessary in large joints.
26.9.3 When all bolts are snug-tight, each bolt in the joint then shall
be tightened additionally by the applicable amount of nut rotation given
in Table 11, with tightening progressing systematically from the most
rigid part of the joint to its free edges. During this operation there shall be
no rotation of the part not turned by the wrench.
26.10 Inspection
26.10.1 When inspection is performed, the inspector shall determine
that the requirements of Clauses 26.2, 26.3, 26.8, and 26.9 are met. Installation of bolts shall be observed to ascertain that a proper tightening
procedure is employed. The turned element of all bolts shall be visually
examined for evidence that they have been tightened.
26.10.2 When the verification of bolt tension is a required part of

the inspection procedure, one of the following inspection methods shall be
used unless otherwise specified.
(a) General Method. This method may be used for bolts in both
friction-type and bearing-type joints and for bolts subject primarily
to applied tension.
(i) The inspector shall use an inspection wrench which shall be a
manual or power torque wrench capable of indicating a selected
torque value.
(ii) Three bolts of the same grade, size* and condition as those
under inspection shall be placed individually in a calibration
device capable of indicating bolt tension. The surface under
the part to be turned in tightening each bolt shall be similar
to that under the corresponding part in the structure, i.e.
there shall be a washer under the part turned if washers
are so used in the structure or, if no washer is used, the material
abutting the part turned shall be of the same specification as
that in the structure.
Length may be any length representative of bolts used in the structure.
(iii) When the inspection wrench is a manual wrench, each bolt

specified in paragraph (ii) above shall be tightened in the
calibration device by any convenient means to the minimum
tension specified for its size in Table 10. The inspection wrench
then shall be applied to the tightened bolt, and the torque
necessary to turn the nut or head five degrees (approximately
1 inch at 12 inch radius) in the tightening direction shall be
determined. The average torque measured in the tests of three
bolts shall be taken as the job inspection torque to be used in
the manner specified in paragraph (v) below.
66
eSA STANDARD S16
(iv) When the inspection wrench is a power wrench it shall be

adjusted so that it will tighten each bolt specified in paragraph
(ii) above to a tension at least 5 but not more than 10 per cent
greater than the minimum tension specified for its size in
Table 10. This setting of wrench shall be taken as the job
inspection torq ue to be used in the manner specified in paragraph (v) below.
(v) Bolts represented by the sample prescribed in Paragraph (iO
above which have been tigh tened in the structure shall be
inspected by applying, with the inspection wrench, in the
tightening direction, the job inspection torque to 10 per cent
of the bolts but not less than two bolts, selected at random in
each connection. If no nut or bolt head is turned by this
application of the job inspection torque the connection shall
be accepted as properly tightened. If any nut or bolt head is
turned by the application of the job inspection torque, this
torque shall be applied to all bolts in the connection. If further
nuts or bolt heads in the connection are turned by application
of the job inspection torque and it appears evident that the
bolts have been tightened beyond the snug condition the
inspector shall request the fabricator or erector to install in
the connection a new bolt of similar size and condition to those
previously installed. The new bolt shall be tightened under the
observation of the inspector by rotating the turned element
the amount from snug given in Table 11 after which the
inspector shall apply the job inspection torque to the new bolt.
If the nut or bolt head of the new bolt is turned by application
of the job inspection torque the inspector shall recalibrate the
inspection wrench before proceeding with further inspection.
If the nut or bolt head of the new bolt is not turned byapplication of the job inspection torque all bolts in the connection
whose nut or head is turned by the job inspection torque shall
be tightened and re-inspected. Alternatively, if it appears
evident that the bolts in the connection have not been tightened
beyond the snug condition, the fabricator or erector shall
tighten all the bolts in the connection and then re-submit the
connection for inspection. Care shall be exercised by the
inspector to ensure that bolts which have been adequately
tightened by the fabricator or erector are not subjected to
more than 15 degrees of additional rotation of the turned
element when being inspected.
(b) Simplified Method. This method may be used for bolts in bearingtype joints where a washer is used under the turned element. Bolts
shall not be galvanized.
(0 The inspector shall use an inspection wrench which shall be a
manual or power torque wrench capable of indicating a selected
torque value.
(ii) Bolts which have been tightened in the structure shall be
inspected by applying with the inspection wrench, in the
tightening direction, the applicable job inspection torque given
in Table 12 to 10 per cent of the bolts but not less than two
bolts, selected at random in each connection. If no nut or
bolt head is turned by this application of the job inspection
67
torque, the connection shall be accepted as properly tightened.

If any nut or bolt head is turned by the application of the
job inspection torque, this torque shall be applied to all bolts
in the connection, and all bolts whose nut or head is turned
by the job inspection torque shall be tightened and re-inspected,
or alternatively, the fabricator or erector, at his option, may
re-tighten all the bolts in the connection and then re-submit
the connection for the specified inspection.
TABLE 10
BOLT TENSION
Minimum Bolt Tension. (kips)
Bolt Size
Inches
A325 Bolts
31
%
%
A490 Bolts
15
12
19
28
39
51
56
1~
1~
24
35
49
64
80
71
1%
102
121
85
103
1~
1%
148
200
262
Over 2
0.70T.S.
Equal to 70 per cent of specified minimum tensile strength given in A STM Standard A3Z5
and A490, rounded off to the nearest kip.
TABLE 11
NUT ROTATION FROM SNUG-TIGHT CONDITION
Disposition of Outer Faces of Bolted Parts
Both Faces Normal to Bolt Axis, or One Face

Normal to Axis and Other Face Slope 1 :20
(Bevel Washer Not Used}f
Both Faces Sloped 1:20

from Normal to Bolt Axis
(Bevel Washers Not Used)
Bolt Length! Not Exceeding

8 Diameters or 8 Inches
For All Lengths of Bolts
~ turn
Bolt Length! Exceeding

8 Diameters or 8 Inches
% turn
% turn
Nut rotation is rotation relative to bolt regardless of the element (nut or bolt) being turned.
Tolerance on rotation: 30 degrees over or under. For coarse thread heavy hex structural bolts
of all sizes and length ant/, heavy hex semi-finished nuts.
tBevel washers are necessary when A 490 bolts are used.
iBolt length is measured from underside of head to extreme end of point.
68
eSA STANDARD S16
TABLE 12
JOB INSPECTION TORQUE *
Job Inspection Terque
Foot-Poundst
Bolt Size
D
Inches
A325Bolts
A490 Bolts
105
210
370
595
890
1,100
1,550
2,040
2,700
130
260
460
750
1,120
1,575
2,230
2,910
3,880
*To be used in conjunction with Clause 26.10.2(b) only.

tEqual to 17.5 D limes bolt tension given in Table 10, rounded to nearest 5 foot-pound.
27. WELDING
27.1 Arc ..Welding. Arc-welding design and practice shall conform to
CSA Standard W59.1, General Specification for Welding of Steel Structures
(Metal-Arc Welding).
27.2 Resistance Welding. Resistance welding practice shall conform to

the applicable requirements of CSA Standard W55.2, Resistance Welding
Practice.
27.3 Fabricator and Erector Qualification. Fabricators and erectors

of welded construction covered by this Standard shall be fully approved
by the Canadian Welding Bureau to the requirements of CSA Standard
W47, Welding Qualification Code for Application to Fabricating and
Contracting Firms and/or CSA Standard W55.3, Resistance Welding
Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings,
as applicable,
28. COLUMN BASES

28.1 Loads. Suitable provision shall be made to transfer column loads
and moments to footings and foundations.
28.2 Finishing. Column bases shall be finished in accordance with the
following requirements:
(a) Steel-to-steel contact bearing surfaces of rolled steel bearing plates
shall be finished in such a manner that the requirements of Clauses
31.8, 31.9.6, and 33.7.3 are satisfied. In general, rolled steel bearing
plates 2 inches or less in thickness may be used without planing
provided a satisfactory contact bearing is obtained; rolled steel
bearing plates over 2 inches but not over 4 inches in thickness
rna y be straightened by pressing; or, if sui table presses are not
available, by planing on all bearing surfaces, to obtain a satisfactory
contact bearing; rolled steel bearing plates, over 4 inches in thickness, shall be planed on all bearing surfaces except as noted in
Clause 28.2(c);
- 412.- Copyright NRC-CNRC
69
(b) Column bases other than rolled steel bearing plates shall be planed
on all bearing surfaces e2'~ept as noted in Clause 28.2(c);
(c) The bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases which
rest on masonry or concrete foundations and are grouted to ensure
full bearing need not be planed.
29. ANCHOR BOLTS

29.1 Anchor bolts shall be designed to provide resistance to shear, and to
tension due to uplift forces and bending moments. Forces present during
construction as well as those present in the finished structure shall be
resisted.
30. PLASTIC DESIGN

30.1 General
30.1.1 The design of structures or portions of structures proportioned
on the basis of maximum strength, as predicted by the plastic theory, shall
be in accordance with Clause 30 in addition to the other applicable requirements of this Standard. Fabrication shall be in accordance with Clause 30.14.
30.1.2 Plastic design shall be limited to those steels for which Fy ~

0.80 T.S. and which exhibit the load-strain characteristics assumed in the
development of the requirements of Clause 30.
30.2 Permissible Types of Members and Frames
30.2.1 Simple, continuous or rigidly framed members in any structure
prevented from sidesway by bracing, shear walls or other effective means
may be proportioned in accordance with Clause 30, except as noted in
Clause 30.3. The bracing system shall meet the requirements of Clauses 23
and 30.12.
30.2.2 One and two-storey rigid frames dependent upon frame stiffness
alone to prevent sidesway may be proportioned in accordance with Clause
30, except as noted in Clause 30.3.
30.3 Limitations
30.3.1 Members subject to repeated heavy impact or fatigue shall
not be designed by the plastic theory.
30.3.2 Deflections under working loads shall be in accordance with

the requirements of Clause 8.
30.4 Load Factor. Structures or portions of structures proportioned in
accordance with Clause 30 shall have sufficient strength, as determined by
plastic analysis, to support the design loads multiplied by a load factor of
at least 1.70. The load combinations and probability factors given in
Clauses 7.7 to 7.9 are applicable unless otherwise specified.
30.5 Maximum Slenderness Ratios. Maximum slenderness ratios for
members used in plastically designed structures shall be those given in
Clause 13. When the structure is dependent upon the frame stiffness alone
to prevent sidesway and cladding and partitions are absent, the overall
stability of the structure shaH be ascertained by a rational procedure.
70
eSA ST A.t'lDARD S16
30.6 Tension Members. Tension members in plastically designed structures shall be proportioned so that
P, ~~ An Fy
where P f = factored axial load (kips)
An = critical net area of member (inches2)
F y = Specified minimum yield point (ksi)
In addition the ratio An/Ag shall be greater than F yjT.S.
30.7 Compression Members. Compression members in plastically
designed structures shall be proportioned so that
P f :s; 1. 67 Ag Fa
where P, = factored axial load (kips)
Ag = gross area of member (inches2)
Fa = appropriate allowable axial stress given in Clause
16.2.2, based on the largest unbraced slenderness ratio.
NOTE:
In a braced frame the effective length of a column shaU be taken as its actual length.
30.8 Beam-Columns
30.8.1 Published, recognized methods of beam-column analysis
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction may be used to proportion
beam-columns in plastically designed structures. In lieu of such methods,
the requirements of Clause 30.8.2 shall be followed.
30.8.2 Beam-columns shall be proportioned so that the following
conditions are satisfied.
1\1y < 1.0
1\1py -
(a)
(b) P,
Py
(c) 1.
0.85
+ 0.85 1\1y <

lVT py
1.0
!); p + C~::Px + Cm~::Py :s; 1. 0
where P = product of column area and appropriate allowable axial

stress given in Clause 16.2.2, based on the largest
unbraced slenderness ratio (kips)
Pc = factored axial load (kips)
J\.
product of column area and specified yield point of the
steel (kips)
l\lp = plastic moment for column (inch-kips)
1VT x = moment from factored loads about axis x-x at the point
under consideration; the maximum moment about axis
x-x when used in conjunction with Clause 30.8.2 (c)
1\1y = moment from factored loads about axis y-y at the point
under consideration; the maximum moment about
axis y-ywhen used in conjunction with Clause 30.8.2 (c).
em = Coefficient used to determine equivalent uniform
bending moment. (See Clause 17 for values of
{J
= Amplification factor, equal to [ 1 _ ~lIP.
Cm)
with
286,OOOA
Pe
(L/r)2 and A equal to column area and L/r
equal to the slenderness ratio in the plane of bending
for which P is computed.
NOTE:
Ina braced frame the effective length of a column shall be taken as its actual length.
71
30.9 Shear
30.9.1 Unless reinforced by diagonal stiffeners or a doubler plate,
the webs of columns, beams, and girders shall be proportioned so that:
)If ::; O. 55 F y wd
where V, = shear force from factored loads (kips)
F y = specified minimum yield point of the steel (ksi)
d = depth of member (inches)
30.9.2 Within the boundaries of two or more members whose webs

meet in a common plane, the provision in Clause 30.9.1 is satisfied (no
web reinforcement required) when:
> 23M
w - AF'7
where A = gross planar area of the connection web (beam depth
X column depth) (inches!)
M = algebraic sum of clockwise and counter-clockwise
moments applied on opposite sides of the web boundary
(foot-kips)
F y = specified minimum yield point of steel (ksi) in the web
30.10 Web Crippling. Web stiffeners are required on a member at a
point of load application where a plastic hinge would form. At points on a
member where the concentrated load delivered by the flanges of a member
framing into it would produce web crippling opposite the compression
flange or high tensile stress in the connection of the tension flange, web
stiffeners are required:
(a) Opposite the compression flanges when
<
tb
!f
5k
(~yb)
(b) Opposite the tension flanges when

tl
< 0,4 ~AI (
r;;:)
where w = thickness of web to be stiffened (inches)

k = distance from outer face of flange to web toe of fillet
of member to be stiffened (inches)
tb = thickness of flange delivering concentrated load
(inches)
tf = thickness of flange of member to be stiffened (inches)
Af = area of flange delivering concen tra ted load (inches2)
F yb = specified minimum yield point of the steel in the
member delivering the concentrated load (ksi)
Fy = specified minimum yield point of the steel in the
member to be stiffened (ksi)
The area of such stiffeners, Aet . shall be such that
A..
[AI
a::.) -
w (tb
Sk) ] (::..)
where F yet. = specified minimum yield point of the steel in the

stiffener (ksi)
72
e8A STANDARD 816
Their ends shall be fully welded to the inside face of the flange opposite
the concentrated tensile load. They may be fitted against the inside face
of the flange opposite the concentrated compression load. When ilie concentrated load delivered by a beam occurs on one side only, the web stiffener
need not exceed one-half the depth 6f the member, but the welding connecting it to the web shall be sufficient to develop F Y8t A. t
30.11 Width-Thickness Ratios. Elements that would be subject to

compression involving plastic hinge rotation under ultimate loading shall
have an axis of symmetry in the plane of bending and have width-thickness
ratios no greater than the following:
b/t<~
-VF;
(a) Projecting elements of compression flange

(b) Flanges of rectangular hollow sections between
rounded corners.
Flange plates in box sections and flange cover-plates
between longitudinal lines of fasteners or welds
(c) Clear depth-thickness ratio of webs
(d) Clear depth-thickness ratios of webs when subjected
to axial compression plus bending
(i) P f
Py
P
<
-
0.28
1::w -< VF;

420 (1
_1.4 PPI)
y
h
-
255
(ii) I:/ > 0.28
<
_
1y
W - v Fy
where P f = factored axial load (kips)
P y = product of column cross-sectional area and specified
minimum yield point (kips)
(e) Ratio of outside diameter to wall thickness of round tubes
D/t ::;
.J~y
30.12 Connections
30.12.1 All connections which are essential to the continuity assumed
as the basis of the design analysis shall be capable of resisting the moments,
shears, and axial loads to which they would be subjected by either fun or
partial factored loading.
30.12.2 Corner connections (haunches), tapered or curved for architectural reasons shall be so proportioned that the full plastic bending
strength of the section adjacent to the connection can be developed.
30.12.3 Splices located at inflection points occurring under factored
load shall have a flexural capacity at least equal to one-quarter of the
plastic moment capacity of the member.
30.12.4 Stiffeners shall be used, as required to preserve the flange
continuity of interrupted members at their junction with other members
in a continuous frame. Such stiffeners shall be placed in pairs on opposite
sides of the web of the member which extends continuously through the
joint.
I
73
30.12.5 High-strength bolts and A307 bolts shall be proportioned to

resist the forces produced by factored load using allowable stresses equal
to 1.70 times those given in Clauses 16 and 27, except as noted in Clause
30.12.7. Welds shall be proportioned to resist the forces produced by factored
load, using allowable stresses equal to 1.70 times those given in CSA Standard W59.1, General Specification for Welding of Steel Structures (Metal-Arc
Welding),
30.12.6 In general, groove welds are preferable to fillet welds, bu t
their use is not mandatory when the strength of the latter at 1.70 times the
allowable stresses given in CSA Standard W59.1, General Specification for
Welding of Steel Structures, (Metal-Arc Welding) is sufficient to resist
the factored load imposed upon the joint.
30.12.7 High-strength bolts shall be proportioned, on the basis of no
more than 70 per cent of their specified tensile strength, to resist the tension
produced by factored load. High-strength bolts required to resist shear
may be used in joints having painted faying surfaces when these joints are
of such size that the slip required to produce bearing would not interfere
with the formation, under factored load, of the plastic hinges assumed in
the design.
30.13 Lateral Bracing
30.13.1 Members shall be adequately braced to resist lateral and
torsional displacement at the plastic hinge locations associated with the
failure mechanism. The laterally unsupported distance Lor from such
braced hinge locations to the nearest adjacent point on the frame similarly
braced shall not exceed :
_
_ /lVl
Lor
37;, ry/V Fy for Mp ::; 0.5
Lor
_/M
210 r y/ V F y for 1\1
>
O. 5
where ry = the radius of gyration of the member about its weak

axis
~ = the moment gradient on the member segment between
Mp the two braced points; positive when the member is
bent in single curvature and negative when bent in
double curvature.
( - 1. 0 ::;
:i
::;
1. 0 )
The more severe of the above requirements shall govern the

location of the braced point.
30.13.2 The provisions of Clause 30.13.1 need not apply in the region
of the last hinge to form in the failure mechanism assumed as the basis for
proportioning the structure, nor in members oriented with their weak axes
normal to the plane of bending.
30.13.3 Except for the regions specified in Clause 30.13.1 the maximum
unsupported length of members in plastically designed structures need not
be less than that which would be permitted for the same members designed
under the provisions of Clause 16.
74
eSA STANDARD S16
30.14 Fabrication
30.14.1 The provisions of Clause 31 with respect to workmanship
shall govern the fabrication of structures, or portions of structures, designed
on the basis of maximum strength, subject to the limitations of Clauses
30.14.2 to 30.14.4.
30.14.2 The use of sheared edges in the tension area shall be avoided
in locations subject to plastic hinge rotation at ultimate loading. If used
they shall be finished smooth by grinding, chipping, or planing.
30.14.3 In locations subject to plastic hinge rotation at ultimate
loading, fastener holes in the tension area shall be subpunched and reamed
or drilled full size.
30.14.4 The requirements of Clause 30.14 shall be noted on design
and shop drawings when applicable.
31. FABRICATION
31.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, the provisions of Clause 31
shall apply to both shop and field fabrication.
31.2 Straightness of Material. Prior to layout or fabrication, rolled

material shall be straight within established rolling mill tolerances. If
straightening is necessary, it shall be done by means that will not injure
the material. Sharp kinks and bends shall be cause for rejection.
31.3 Gas Cutting. Gas cutting shall be done by machine when practicable.
Gas cut edges which will be subjected to substantial stress or which are to
have weld metal deposited on them shall be free from gouges and nicks;
any such irregularities shall be repaired by grinding or by welding. Reentrant corners shall be free from notches and shall have the largest practical
radii, with a minimum radius of 31 inch.
31.4 Sheared or Gas Cut Edge Finish

31.4.1 Planing or finishing of sheared or gas cut edges of plates or
shapes shall not be required unless specifically noted on the drawings or
included in a stipulated edge preparation for welding.
31.4.2 Burr shall be removed by grinding, chipping or other means,
if excessive, or when required for fit-up for edge preparation for welding.
31.5 Holes for Bolts or Other Mechanical Fasteners. Unless otherwise
shown on design drawings, holes shall be made !16 inch larger than the
nominal diameter of the fastener. Holes may be punched when the thickness
of material is not greater than the nominal fastener diameter plus % inch.
For greater thicknesses holes shall be drilled from the solid or either subpunched or sub-drilled and reamed. The die for all sub-punched holes or
the drill for all sub-drilled holes shall be at least % inch smaller than the
required diameter of the finished hole. Holes in A514 steel over 31 inch in
thickness shall be drilled.
31.6 Bolted Construction

31.6.1 Drifting done during assembly to align holes shall not distort
the metal nor enlarge the holes. Holes in adjacent parts shall match sufficiently well to permit easy entry of bolts. If necessary, some holes may be
enlarged to admit bolts by a moderate amount of reaming; however, gross
mismatch of holes shall be cause for rejection.
-418-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
STEEL STRUmURES FOR BUILDINGS
75
31.6.2 Assembly of high-strength bolted joints shall be in accordance

wi th Clause 26.
31.7 Welded Construction. Workmanship and technique shall conform
to those prescribed by CSA Standard W59.1, General Specification for
\Velding of Steel Structures, or CSA Standard \\155.2, Resistance Welding
Practice, as applicable.
31.8 Finishing of Bearing Surfaces. Compression joints which depend

on contact bearing shall have the bearing surfaces prepared to a common
plane by milling, sawing, or other suitable means. Surface roughness shall
have a roughness height rating not exceeding 500 as defined in CSA Standard
B95, Surface Texture (Roughness, Waviness and Lay), unless otherwise
specified.
31. 9 Tolerances
31.9.1 Structural members consisting primarily of a single rolled
shape shall be straight within the tolerances allowed by CSA Standard
G40.1, General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes,
Sheet Piling, and Bars For Structural Use, unless otherwise specified.
31.9.2 Built-up bolted structural members shall be straight within

the tolerances allowed for rolled wide-flange shapes by CSA Standard
G40.1, unless otherwise specified.
31.9.3 Dimensional tolerances of welded structural members shall be
those prescribed by CSA Standard W59.1, General Specification for Welding
of Steel Structures (Metal-Arc Welding), unless otherwise specified.
31.9.4 Compression members shall have a deviation not more than
one thousandth of the axial length between points which are to be laterally
supported.
31.9.5 All completed members shall be free from twists, bends, and
open joints. Sharp kinks or bends shall be cause for rejection.
31.9.6 Compression joints which depend upon contact bearing, when
assembled during fabrication, shall have at least 75 per cent of the entire
contact area in full bearing and the separation of any remaining portion
shall not exceed 0.01 inch except adjacent to toes of flanges where a localized
separation not exceeding 0.025 inch is permissible.
31. 9. 7 A variation of ~ inch is permissible in the overall length of
members with both ends finished for contact bearing.
31.9.8 Members without ends finished for contact bearing, which
are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure, may have a variation
from the detailed length not greater than 316 inch for members 30 feet or less
in length and not greater than VB inch for members over 30 feet in length.
32. CLEANING, SURFACE PREPARATION AND PRIMING
32.1.1 Steelwork to be subsequently concealed by interior building
finish need not be given a coat of primer unless otherwise specified (see
Clause 11).
32.1.2 Steelwork to be encased in concrete need not be given a coat

of primer. Steelwork designed to act compositely with reinforced concrete
-419-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
76
CSA STANDARD SIb
and depending on natural bond for interconnection shall not be given a

coat of primer.
32.1.3 Except as exempted by Clauses 32.1.1, 32.1.2, and 32.2, all

steelwork, unless otherwise noted on design drawings or in the job specifications, shall be given one coat of primer applied in the shop. The primer
shall be applied by suitable means, thoroughly and evenly, to dry, clean
surfaces.
32.1.4 Steelwork to be shop-primed shall be cleaned of all loose mill
scale, loose rust, weld slag, or flux deposit, dirt, or other foreign matter and
excessive weld spatter prior to application of the primer. Oil and grease
shall be removed by solvent. The fabricator shall be free to use any satisfactory method to clean the steel and prepare the surface for painting
unless a specific method of surface preparation is called for.
32.1.5 Primer shall be dry before loading primed steelwork for
shipment.
32.1.6 Steelwork not to be shop-primed, after fabrication shall be

cleaned of oil and grease by solven t cleaners and shall be cleaned of dirt and
other foreign matter by thorough sweeping with a fibre brush.
32.2 Requiremen ts for Special Surfaces
32.2.1 Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be cleaned, or cleaned
and primed, as required by Clause 32.1, prior to assembly. Inside surfaces
of enclosed spaces entirely sealed off from any external source of oxygen
need not be primed.
32.2.2 In compression members, surfaces finished to bear and assembled during fabrication shall be cleaned before assembly but shall not
be primed unless otherwise specified.
32.2.3 Surfaces finished to bear and not assembled during fabrication
shall be protected by a corrosion inhibiting coating. The coating shall be
of a type that can be readily removed prior to assembly or shall be of a
type that makes such removal unnecessary.
32.2.4 Faying surfaces of high-strength bolted friction-type joints
shall not be primed or otherwise coated except as pennitted by Clause 26.
32.2.5 Joints to be field welded shall be kept free of primer or any
other coating which could be detrimental to achieving a sound weldment.
32.3 Surface Preparation. Unless otherwise specified, or approved, surface
preparation shall be in conformance with one of the following applicable
specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council:
SSPC-SP2
Hand Tool Cleaning;
SSPC-SP3
Power Tool Cleaning;
SSPC-SP4
Flame Cleaning of New Steel;
SSPC-SPS
White Metal Blast Cleaning;
SSPC-SP6
Commercial Blast Cleaning;
SSPC-SP7
Brush-Off Blast Cleaning;
SSPC-SPI0
Near-White Blast Cleaning.
32.4 Primer. Unless otherwise specified, or approved, shop primer shall

conform to one of the following specifications of the Canadian Government
Specifications Board:
77
CGSB 1-GP-14d, Primer: Red Lead in Oil;

CGSB 1-GP-40d, Primer: Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd Type;
CGSB 1-GP-81d, Primer: Alkyd, for Vehicles and Equipment,
Type 1;
CGSB 1-GP-140c, Primer: Red Lead, Iron Oxide, Oil Alkyd Type;
CGSB 1-GP-166a, Primer: Basic Lead Silico-Chromate, Oil Alkyd
Type.
33. ERECTION
33.1 General. The steel framework shall be erected true and plumb within
the specified tolerances. Temporary bracing shall be employed wherever
necessary to withstand all loads to which the structure may be subject
during erection and subsequent construction, including loads due to wind,
equipment and operation of same. Temporary bracing shall be left in place
undisturbed as long as required for safety (see also Clause 29),
33.2 Temporary Loads and Stresses. Wherever piles of material, erection

equipment, or other loads are carried during erection, suitable provision
shall be made to ensure that the loads can be safely sustained during their
duration and without permanent deformation or other damage to any
member of the steel frame and other building components supported thereby.
33.3 Adequacy of Temporary Connections. As erection progresses
the work shall be securely bolted or welded to take care of all dead load,
wind, and erection stresses.
33.4 Alignment. No permanent welding or bol ting shall be done un til as

much of the structure as will be stiffened thereby has been suitably aligned.
33.5 Surface Preparation for Field Welding. The portions of surfaces

that are to receive welds shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter,
including paint film.
33.6 Field Painting. Unless otherwise specified, the cleaning of steelwork

in preparation for field painting, touch-up of shop primer, spot-painting of
field fasteners, and general field painting, shall not be considered to be a
part of the erection work.
33.7 Erection Tolerances
33.7.1 Unless otherwise specified, members of the steel framework
shaH be considered plumb, level, and aligned if the error does not exceed
the following tolerances:
(a) Exterior columns of multi-storey buildings
1 to 1,000; but not
more than 1 inch towards nor 2 inches away from the building line
in the first 20 storeys plus }f6 inch for each additional storey up to
a maximum of 2 inches towards or 3 inches away from the building
1ine;
1 to 1,000; but not more
(b) Columns adjacent to elevator shafts
than 1 inch in the first 20 storeys plus }32 inch for each additional
storey up to a maximum of 2 inches;
1 to 1,000;
(c) Spandrel beams
(d) All other pieces
1 to 500.
33.7.2 Shelf angles, sash angles, and lintels specified to be provided

with adjustable connections shaH be considered within tolerances when
-42.1-Copyright NRC-CNRC
78
CSA STANDARD S16
each piece is level within a tolerance of 1 to 1,000, when adjoining ends of

these members are aligned vertically within Us inch and when the location
of these members vertically and horizontally is within % inch of the location
established by the dimensions on the plans.
33.7.3 Column splices and other compression joints which depend

upon contact bearing, after alignment shall have at least 65 per cent of the
entire contact area in full bearing and the separations of any remaining
portions shall not exceed 0.02 inches except locally at toes of flanges where a
separation of 0.03 inches is permissible; otherwise corrective measures
shall be taken.
33.7.4 The fit-up of joints to be field-welded shall be within the
tolerances shown on the field assembly drawings before welding is begun.
34. INSPECTION
34.1 General. lVIaterial and workmanship at all times shall be subject to
inspection by qualified inspectors representing the authority having
jurisdiction.
34.2 Co-operation. All inspection insofar as possible shall be made at

the fabricator's plant and the fabricator shall co-operate with the inspector,
permitting access for inspection to all places where work is being done.
The inspector shall co-operate in avoiding undue delay in the fabrication
or erection of the steelwork.
34.3 Rejection. :Material or workmanship not conforming to the provisions

of this Standard may be rejected at any time that defects are found during
the progress of the work.
34.4 Inspection of High-Strength Bolted Joints. The inspection of

high-strength bolted joints shall be performed in accordance with the
proced ures prescribed in Clause 26.
34.5 Inspection of Welding. The method of inspection of welding shall

be in accordance with CSA Standard W59.1, General Specification for
vVelding of Steel Structures (lVletal-Arc \Velding). The method and extent
of welding inspection shall be stipulated in the plans and specifications for
bidding or shall be agreed upon between the fabricator and/or erector and
the authority having jurisdiction, prior to commencement of work.
34.6 Identification of Steel by Marking. Steel used for main components

shall at all times in the fabricator's plant be marked to identify its specification (and grade, if applicable). This shall be done by suitable markings
or by recognized colour coding except that cut pieces identified by piece
mark and contract number need not continue to carry specification identification markings when it has been satisfactorily established that such cut
pieces conform to the required material specifications.
79
APPENDIX A
STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STRUCTURAL
STEEL FOR BUILDINGS
NOTE:
This A ppendix is a part of this Standard when applicable.
Al. Matters concerning standard practice not covered by the Standard

but pertinent to the fabrication and erection of structural steel, such as a
definition of structural steel items, the computation of weights, etc., are
to be in accordance with the "Code of Standard Practice for Structural
Steel for Buildings" published by the Canadian Institute of Steel Construction unless otherwise clearly specified in the plans and specifications
issued to the bidders.
-42.3 - Copyright NRC-CNRC
80
CSA STANDARD S16
APPENDIX B
EFFECTIVE LENGTHS OF COMPRESSION
MEMBERS IN FRAMES
NOTE:
B1. The slenderness ratio of a compression member is defined as the ratio

of the effective length to the applicable radius of gyration. The effective
length KL may be thought of as the actual unbraced length L multiplied by
a factor K such that the product KL is equal to the length of a pin-ended
compression member of equal capacity to the actual member. The effective
length factor K of a column of finite unbraced length is therefore dependent
upon the conditions of restraint afforded to the column at its braced locations
and theoretically may vary from 0.5 to infinity. In practical building
applications, K would be somewhat greater than 0.5 in the most favourable
situation and in all probability would not exceed 5 in the most unfavourable
situation.
Bl. A variation in K between 0.65 and 2.0 would apply to the majority
of cases likely to be encountered in actual structures.
B3. When proportioning columns on the basis of effective lengths the
designer is presented with two basic situations which have a pronounced
effect upon the strength of axially loaded columns.
(a) If a structural frame depends entirely on its own flexural stiffness
to provide stability against unchecked lateral movement (sidesway), and if sufficient axial load is applied to the columns, the
effective length of these columns will exceed their actual lengths
or at best will be equal to it. That is, K always will be equal to or
greater than 1.0. The Standard defines such a frame as unbraced.
(b) If a structural frame is braced in such a way that unchecked
lateral displacement of one end of a column with respect to the
other is prevented (restricted translation or sidesway) then the
effective length would be less than or equal to the actual length.
That is K will be equal to or less than 1.0. The Standard defines
such a frame as braced.
B4. Figure B 1 illustrates the above for six idealized cases in which joint
rotation and translation are either fully realized or non-existent. Conditions
(a), (b). and (c) are such that lateral movement (translation) is prevented,
while conditions (d), (e), and (f) assume that translation of one end of the
column with respect to the other is possible.
B5. Figure B2 shows diagrammatically the difference in the effective
column length of a simple portal frame when sidesway is or is not prevented.
B6. If the column base in Figure B2 were truly pinned, K would exceed the
value of 2.0 shown for case (f) in Figure B 1 since the flexibility of the
horizontal member prevents the attainment of complete fixity at the top
of the column.
B7. In practical situations, however, the restraining effect of the normal

flat-ended column base detail exerts a beneficial influence on the true effective
length of the column, even where the footing is .designed only for vertical
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-414-
81
load. Thus in most cases K generally would be less than 2. The use of the
alignment chart (Figure Cl) with G L taken as 10 (or less where justified)
provides a convenient means of assessing K.
(d)
(c)
(b)
(a)
12~ [!~
.I.J(..u
I
Buckled shape of column
,I
is shown by dashed line
\
I
I
\
I
I
I
I
I
I
~~ r!l
,I
I
I
I
f
,,
(C)
I
I
I
I
I
I
(e)
ll,P'
I
t
I
14
mr
7!i 'rr
Theoretical K value
o5
o7
Reoommcnded design
value when ideal condi
tions are approximated
o 65
0.80
--1"
Rotation fixed
Translation fixed
Rotation free
Translation fixed
Rotation fixed
Translation free
Rotation free
Translation free
End condition code
V!flI
y
17 7r
1.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
1.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
FIGURE Bl
~\
(0)
Side$woy
Inhibited
',---------"-
,
I
I'
"-
"-
,;
",;
Kll
,;
\
\
,l,;"
-~
KL
+P
""- "-
,;
"
""
I'
--I'
/
".
"
"-
,,
tP) :
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
'" I
--, - r -
I
I
,,
+p
,;
"-
Sideswoy
Uninhibited
+P
I
(b)
I
I
FIGURE B2
It
82
eSA STANDARD S16
APPENDIX C
CRITERIA FOR ESTIMATING EFFECTIVE
COLUMN LENGTHS IN CONTINUOUS FRAMES
NOTE:
CI. Two cases influencing the design of columns in continuous frames are
considered:
(a) Sidesway of structure prevented;
(b) Sidesway of structure permitted.
Cl. By sidesway, is meant the possibility of a lurching sidewards of the

structure under gravity loading only. Since the forces necessary to prevent
sidesway are small, they can often be accommodated by walls or lateral
restraining media such as elevator shafts, wind-bracing, etc., that would
exist normally in any conventional building frame. When sidesway is
prevented by such means, as determined by a suitable analysis, the columns
may be considered without sidesway as far as their individual design
values are concerned. Since in the usual building frame not all columns
would be loaded so as to simultaneously reach their buckling loads, some
conservatism is introduced in the interest of simplification.
C3. Figure C1 is a nomograph applicable to cases in which the equivalent
I/L of adjacent girders which are rigidly attached to the columns are known,
and is based on the assumption that all columns in the portion of the
frame-work considered reach their individual critical loads simultaneously.
C4. The equations upon which these nomographs are based are:
(a) Sidesway prevented:
GuG L (n/K)2
(Gu + GL) (1 _
n/K )
tan n/K
4
2
(b) Sidesway permitted:
GUG L (n/K)2 - 36
nlK
tan n/K
6 (Gu
GL )
+ 2 tan n/2K =
n/K
C5. Subscripts U and L refer to the joints at the two ends of the column
section being considered. G is defined as
G = 1:l c/Lc
1:lg/Lg
in which 1: indicates a summation for all members rigidly connected to that
joint and lying in the plane in which buckling of the column is being considered, 10 is the moment of inertia and Lo the unsupported length of a
column section, and Ig is the moment of inertia and Lg the unsupported
length of a girder or other restraining member. Ie and Ig are taken about
axes perpendicular to the plane of buckling being considered.
C6. For column ends supported by but not rigidly connected to a footing
or foundation, "G" may be taken as 10 for practical designs. If the column
end is rigidly attached to a properly designed footing, "G" may be taken as
1.0. Smaller values may be used if justified by analysis.
C7. Refinements in girder Ig/L. may be made when conditions at the far
end of any particular girder are known definitely or when a conservative
83
STEEL STRUcrURES FOR BUILDINGS
estimate can be made. For the case with no sidesway, multiply girder
stiffnesses by the following factors:
1.5 for far end of girder hinged
2.0 for far end of girder fixed against rotation
(i.e. rigidly attached to a support which is itself relatively rigid)
CS. For the case with sidesway permitted, multiply girder stiffnesses
by 0.5 for far end of girder hinged.
C9. Having determined G u and G L for a column section, the effective

length factor K is determined by constructing a straight line between the
appropriate points on the scales for Gu and G L
oqQ
~~~~~ ~
d~O d
aQ
VI"
~ N
I I ,. I
0
jt)
,. 1
II I I I
"l:I
00
\11,,111
0
~
iii i
add
N~
II I
:;;
"'"'
E
'cv
10
r/J
Z
o..
:J
...... 0
..::I
1/1
0
0
cv
"l:I
(j)
0
=>
"
I I III
II I I I
II I I I
eqqq q
000000 0
daicrir-.: u) iii -ri-
0000
QIO ~ N
cJ
==
E;r/J
I
0
~
0
~
~
0 q
~ N
000
e 10do .0
\:1"-
"At. hI! I I
'I
OOlm"... to 10
-=00000 0
I I
I I
"'"'r/J
t5:J
~ =:0
~
,.....
~~
~~
..::1<
~~
:~
00
~o
ccv
t-<
cv
0==
"l:I
cv
g
w
en
I"'-;
:>
10
<D,
0
ct
0:>'
_0
1/1
cv
:'S:!
(J)
"'"'
VI=-
A" 1"111 1 I' I
a qq qqq q
00 1O'iIIt~ N
10-
II I I I I' I
(,0 10
00l0) "...
"":0000 0 0
I'I'l
84
eSA STANDARD S16
APPENDIX D
GRAPH SHOWING ALLOWABLE STRESS
NOTE:
This Appendix is a part of this Standard when applicable.
50
KL/r ::; C n
Co < KLJr ::; C p
Cp
40
.~
Co
Fa = 0.6 Fy
F"
0.6Fy -m [KL/r-CoJ
200
< I".OL'/r <
= 30 1'\/5 but
}'
'IC~E
'~ = 1.92 (KC/;:)2
not Jess than 20
30
Plot
F, (ksl)
(1)
36
20
(2)
44
(.1)
(4)
(5)
(6)
50
55
60
65
(i)
100
10
100
150
200
Slenderness Ratio (KLjr)
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-418-
F'.
85
APPENDIX E
ASSUMED FACTORS OF SAFETY
NOTE:
This Appendix is a part of this Standard when applicable.
El. The various provisions of the Standard relating to allowable stress

design are based on a "factor of safety" applied to a predictable limit of
structural usefulness. Such a limit may be the yield strength, the plastic
strength, the tensile strength, the shear strength or the buckling strength.
Buckling may occur in either the elastic or inelastic range and may be such
as to affect the entire member or frame, or may be localized such as to
affect only a part of a member.
E2. In plastic design, there are similar limits of structural usefulness but
in this case the "factor of safety" is converted into a "load factor" by
which the design loads are multiplied. The factored design loads must then
be capable of being carried by a member or frame which has not exceeded a
predictable limit of structural usefulness.
E3. Factors of safety have been established largely by experience. Those
incorporated into this Standard are considered to be adequate for the usual
nature and magnitude of the loads to which buildings are subject. The
load factor provided for plastic design is simply an endorsement of the
basic factor of safety equal to 1.67 which has been successfully employed
in structural steel design for several decades. I t has been rounded off to
1.70 so as not to imply an unwarranted precision.
E4. Notwithstanding the long record of experience justifying the use of a
basic factor of safety equal to 1.67, users of this Standard are reminded
that in terms of real overload capacity the use of a single-value factor of
safety for both dead loads (which are not variable) and live loads (which
are variable) must always lead to some inconsistency. To date there is
insufficient data available to provide a rational correlation between the
range of actual loads on buildings, (as distinct from those assumed for
design purposes) and required factors of safety or load factors. When
sufficient data is available it is anticipated that future issues of this Standard
will recognize and provide for a more rational approach to the factor of
safety.
E5. In the derivation of the various design provisions of the 1969 edition of
the Standard the assumed factors of safety are noted below. While these
may appear to vary somewhat from the basic value of 1.67, in actual construction the variation may be less than indicated because of slight deviations from the idealized situation. For example slender columns have an
assumed factor of safety equal to 1.92 while stocky columns enjoy a value
of 1.67. However the maximum allowable out-of-straightness may reduce
the apparent factor of safety of a slender column but have negligible effect
on the stocky column. Bolts and other mechanical fasteners are traditionally
assigned a slightly higher factor of safety in the belief that they should
not be the weakest link" in the frame or structure.
I4
-429 -
Copyright NRC-CNRC
86
CSA STANDARD S16
TABLE El
ASSUMED FACTORS OF SAFETY
Type of Stress
Clause
Assumed Factor of Safety
Axial tension, members and parts.
16.2.1
1.67 on specified yield stress

at net section.
2.0 on specified tensile
strength at net section.
Gross section to be capable
of attaining specified yield
stress before net section attains specified tensile strength.
Axial tension, bolts.
16.3.2
2.50 minimum on specified

tensile strength.
Axial compression, members and parts.
16.2.2
KL/r
1.67 on specified yield stress

at gross section.
Co
1.67 at Co, increasing to 1.92

at C p, based on predicted inelastIc buckling stress at
gross section.
Cp
<
KL/r
=:;
1.92 on Euler stress equal to
200
Bending:
-rE
.
(KL/r)2 at gross sectIon.
16.2.4
Braced non-compact sections
1.67 on yield moment

My
FyS.
Braced compact sections
1.67 on plastic moment
Mp
1.92 on predicted lateraltorsional buckling strength.
Unbraced sections.
Shear:
U nstiffened webs of beams.
16.2.3
Stiffened webs of beams.
Bolts
FyZ.
1.67 on predicted shear

strength.
1.67 on predicted shear
strength combined with
tension field.
16.3.1
2.50 minimum on predicted

shear strength.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-430-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-432-
DESIGN OF LIGHT GAUGE STEEL

STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
PUIUSHED, .liNE, 1963

BY THE
CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIAnON
(INCORPORATED 19(9)
235 MONTREAL ROAD,
onAWA 7. CANADA
COPYRIGHT REGl5nRED, CANADA, 1963
1
~
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-434-
DESIGN OF LIGIIT GAUGE STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
CONTENTS
Page
List of Members of Committee on Design of Light Gauge Steel
Structural lVlembers ...... , ........... ,
, ........ .
Preface ....... .
Reference Publications ......... , ... .
7
7
STANDARD
1. Scope ...... '
2. Definitions .. '
3. l'ilaterials ........ '
10
4. Design Procedure.
4.1 GeneraL ............ ,
. , . , . , ... ,. ..... . .. ,., .... .
4.2 Properties of Sections. . .
................ .
4.2.1 GeneraL .................... '
4.2.2 Reduced Design \Vidths ............................ .
4.2.3 Effective Design vVidth (b) for Stiffened Compression
Elements and Sub-Elements of Multiple-Stiffened
Elements ......................................... .
4.2.4 Properties of Stiffeners .......... .
4.3 Stiffeners for Compression Elements ...................... .
4.3.1 Edge Stiffeners ................................ " . .
4.3.2 Intermediate Stiffeners for Multi-Stiffened Elements .. .
4.4 Maximum Allowable Flat Width Ratios ................... .
4.5 Maximum Allowable Web Depth ......................... .
4.6 Unusually Short Spans Supporting Concentrated Loads ..... .
11
5. Allowable Design Stresses.. . .. ... ......... . .............. .

5.1 Basic Design Stress ..................................... .
5.1.1 Utilization of Properties of Plain l\1aterial. ........... .
5.1.2 Utilization of Properties After Cold-Working .......... .
5.1.3 \Vind and Earthquake Stresses. '" .................. .
5.2 Compression on Unstiffened Elements and Sub-Elements .... .
5.3 Laterally Unbraced Single Web Beams. . ........... . ... .
5.4 Al10wable Stresses in Webs of Beams ...................... .
5.4.1 Shear Stresses in Webs. . . . . . . . .. ... .. , ............ .
5.4.2 Bending Stress in Webs. . .. ... . .................. .
5.4.3 Combined Bending and Shear Stresses in Webs ........ .
5.5 Web Crippling of Beams ................................. .
5.5.1 Concentrated Loads and Reactions, Single vVeb Beams
5.5.2 Double vVebs and Built-Up Beams .................. .
5.5.3 Application of Clauses 5.5.1 and 5.5.2 ............... .
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-435-
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
CSA STANDARD 8136
5.6 Axially Loaded Compression Members .................... ,

5.6.1 Unit Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.6.2 Shape Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.6.3 Slenderness Ratios ......................... , , , . . . . ..
5.7 Combined Axial and Bending Stresses .......... , . , ... , , .. ,.
5.8 Wind or Earthquake Loads ....... , .............. , ..... , ..
5.8.1 Wind or Earthquake Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.8.2 Combined Forces .................. , . , .. , . , . . . . . . . ..
5.9 Cylindrical Tubular Compression lVlembers ............... "
19
19
19
20
20
21
21
21
21
6. Connections ........ , ..... '.' ...... , ........................ ,

6.1 General, ......................... , ......... , .... , . . . . . ..
6.1.1 Stress in Connections ...... , . , ....... , . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.2 Connections Subject to Stress Reversal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1.3 Fastening Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Welded Connections. . . . . . . .. ...........................
6.2.1 Fusion Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2.2 Resistance Welds ........ , . , , , ... , . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .,.
6.3 Bolted and Riveted Connections ..... " . , .......... , .. , ... ,
6.3.1 l\1aterials,."" .. : ............. ... .
6.3.2 A325 High-Strength Bolts ..... , . , ....... , , , . , ..... "
6.3.3 l\1inimum Spacing and End Distance ... , . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.3.4 Tensile Stress on Net Section .. , ............. , . , . , . "
6.3.5 Allowable Stresses .......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.4 Spacing of Fastenings in Compression Members. . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.5 Connecting Two Channels to Form an I-Section ... " . . . . . . ..
23
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
26
7. Bracing Reqljirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
7.1 General ............................ ..
7.2 Bracing of Compression lVlembers and Elements, . . .. . . . . . . ..
7.3 Box Beams ..... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
7.4 Special Consideration for Asymmetrical Sections. . . . .. . . . . . ..
7.5 Wall Studs ............. , ............ , ...... , . . . . . . . . . . ..
27
27
27
27
27
27
8. Testing ...................... , ................ , , .......... ,

8.1 General .... , .. , ........ , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
29
29
8.2 Procedure", .. ".,." ..... ,.,,,,,

8.2.1 Testing of Plain l\1aterial. ,', , ....... , .. , . , . . . . . . . . . ..
8.2.2 Testing of Cold-Worked l\1aterial. , .... , .. , . , , . . . . . . ..
8.2.3 Bend Test for Residual Ductility .... , , . , ... , ....... "
8.2.4 Frequency of Tests for Cold-Worked l\1aterial. .. , . . . . ..
8.2.5 Quality Control of Members and Assemblies. . . . . . . . . ..
8.2.6 Load Tests for l\1embers, the Capacity of Which
Cannot be Calculated ....... , , ... , ......... , . . . . . . ..
29
29
29
30
30
30
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-436-
30
pi
DESIGN OF LIGHT GAUGE STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
9. Assembly" ........................................... .
9.1 Workmanship.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....
9.2 Forming, Cutting, and Punching ..........................
9.3 Fasteners ..............................................
9.4 Straightening and Flattening ..................... .
9.5 Provision for Expansion and Contraction. .. . .............
9.6 Profiles and Distortion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ...........
9.7 Connections ............................................
.
.
.
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
10. Erection ..................................................

10.1 Handling Requirements ................................
10.2 Temporary Loads durIng Erection. . . . .. . ...............
10.3 Marking of Members ...................................
.
.
.
.
31
31
31
31
11. Protection....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 Corrosion of Thin Materials not Permitted ................ .
11.2 Storing and Protective Coating .......................... .
11.3 Protection during Assembly, Storing, and Handling ........ .
11.4 Quality of Protective Coating ........................... .
11.5 Coatings .............................................. .
11.6 Preparation of Surfaces for Coatings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..
11. 7 Injuries to Coating or Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....... .
11.8 Adequate Adhesion of Protective Coatings.. .. . . . . . . . . . .. .
11.9 Zinc Coated Sections or :Members ........................ .
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
.
.
.
CSA STANDARD 8136
COMMITTEE ON DESIGN OF LIGHT GAUGE

STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
L. B.
MCCURDY (Chairman)
S. H. BONSER.
B. M. COREY .. .
R. DE PAOLI .. .
P. C. DINovo.
R. N. DOBSON.
R. J. GILL ..... .
J.
P.
HARRIS .. .
W. C. KIMBALL.
N. C. LIND . . . . .
G. R. K. LYE .. .
A. H. MACK . . . ,.
W. G. MITCHELL.
H. F.
J.
G. SUTHERLAND ..
D.
J.
PHILLIPS ...... .
L.
TARLTON ...
WINTRIP ..
S. YOUNG ...
.. Dominion Structural Steel Division, Canada

Iron.Foundries, Limited, Montreal
...... Anthes Steel Products Limited, Toronto
. The Steel Company of Canada, Ltd., Hamilton
. . , ... Truscon Steel Works, Montreal
. Butler Manufacturing Company (Canada) Limited,
Burlington
, .. Dominion Foundries & Steel Limited, Hamilton
.. Dominion Bridge Company Limited, Montreal
... McGill University, Montreal
.Algoma Steel Corporation Limited, Sault Ste . .:\-1arie
.. University of \Vaterioo, \Vaterloo
. Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute Inc.,
Port Credit
... Rosco Metal and Roofing Products Limited, Toronto
.. Canadian Bridge Works, Division of Dominion Steel
and Coal Corporation, Limited, Walkerville
... Robertsonlrwin Limited, Hamilton
... Canadian Pacific Railway Company, Montreal
... Canadian Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.,
Toronto
.. Bridge and Tank Company of Canada Limited,
Hamilton
. Hawker Siddeley Canada Limited, Toronto
PREFACE
This Standard for "The Design of Light Gauge Steel Structural Members" is the first
specification of its kind published by the Canadian Standards Association.
The American Iron and Steel Institute first published their specification "Design of
Light Gage Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" in the year 19!6, and have revised
it several times. The latest revision is dated 1962. The data used in compiling this Standard
were obtained chiefly from the results of large testing programs, directed by Dr. George
Winter of Cornell University.
I t has long been customary in structural design to relate working stresses and load
carrying capacity to the properties of the material as determined from standardized tests
of small specimens. It is now known that the mechanical properties of sheet and strip steel
may be significantly altered by the cold work that is exerted on it by forming it into structural sections. Utilization of the increased strength of a cold-formed structural member
that results from the forming process is a recent development that is assuming importance
in some structural applications of sheet and strip steel.
The strengthening effect of forming operations will vary widely, depending on the
composition and prior treatment of the material, the extent to which it is cold worked in
forming, the nature of the forming operation and the proportions of the sections. A compact
section that is formed from narrow strip in roll forming machines may experience a considerable increase in strength relative to the strength of the unformed material. A relatively
wide, thin section may experience such an increase only at the corners, and since in such a
section the corners constitute a small percentage of the total the net effect is slight.
The provisions of the Design Specification and the data contained in this Standard
give accurate results for carbon and low-alloy steels. They do not apply to non-ferrous
metals whose modulus of elasticity is substantially different from that of steel.
The flexibility of the forming processes facilitates the production of a great variety of
shapes, resulting in substantial economies. Designers should consult the manufacturers
when specifying special sections.
The Committee wishes to acknowledge their indebtedness to the many individuals,
Organizations, and Universities for their assistance in preparing this Standard. and wish to
especially thank the following for their generous contributions:
W. G. KIRKLAND ................ American Iron & Steel Institute, New York
DR. GEORGE WINTER ............. Cornell University-Ithaca, N.V.
DR. R. E. JAMIESON .............. McGill University-Molltreal
DR. A. H. CHlLVER ............... University College, London, England
PROF. M. R. HORNE .............. University of Manchester, England
This Standard was prepared by the Committee on Design of Light Gauge Steel Structural Members under the jurisdiction of the Sectional Committee on Steel Construction
and was approved by these Committees and the CSA Technical Council.
OTTAWA, JUNE, 1963
NOTE:
In order to keep abreast of progress in the industries concerned, CSA publications are
subject to periodic review. Suggestions for impruuement addressed to the General
Manager, Canadian Standards Association, 235 Montreal Road, Ottawa 7, will be
welcomed at all times. They will be recorded and in due course brought to the attention
of the appropriate committee for consideration.
This Standard makes reference to the following Publications:
CSA Standards G40.1-1959 -General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates,
Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use;
G40A-1959 -Medium Structural Steel;
G40.8-1960 -Structural Steels with Improved Resistance to Brittle
Fracture;
G40.9*
-Structural Quality Carbon Steel Strip;
G40.1o-1962-Structural Quality Carbon Steel Sheets;
S16-1961
-Steel Structures for Buildings;
W55.2-1957 -Resistance Welding Practice;
W59-1946 -Welding of Steel Structures (Metallic Electric-Arc Process);
CSA STANDARD 8136
ASTM Standards A36-62T -Structural Steel (Tentative);

A242-60 -High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel;
A245-62T-Flat-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets of Structural Quality
(Tentative) ;
A303-62T-Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Strip of Structural Quality
(Tentative) ;
A307-61T-Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded
Standard Fasteners (Tentative);
A325-61T-High-Strength Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints,
Including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers
(Tentative) ;
A370-61T-Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel
Products (Tentative);
A374-62T-High Strength Low Alloy Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip
(Tentative) ;
A375-62T-High Strength Low Alloy Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip
(Tentative) ;
A415-62T-Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets, Commercial Quality
(Tentative) ;
A425-62T-Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Strip, Commercial Quality
(Tentative) ;
A446-60T-Zinc-C;:oated (Galvanized) Steel Sheets of Structural
Quality, Coils and Cut Lengths (Tentative);
E9-62
-Methods of Compression Testing of Metallic Materials.
AISI Specification for the Design of Light Gage Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
1962 Edition.
In course of preparation.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-440-
9
NaTE:
The A ssociation desires to call attention to the fact th(lt this Standard is intended to
include only the technical provisions necessary for the supply of the article herein
referred to, and is not intended to include normal contractual requirements.
S136-1963
DESIGN OF LIGHT GAUGE STEEL STRUCTURAL
MEMBERS
el
,p
,p
s,
1. SCOPE
1.1 This Standard shall apply to the design of structural members fabricated by cold-forming sheet strip and plate, and will apply also to the design
of any structural member fabricated by welding, riveting, and other methods,
in which the width: thickness ratio (wit) of any component may exceed
that normally allowed in other Canadian Standards Association Standards
for the design of steel structural members. It is intended to supplement and
not to conflict with such standards, if used in conjunction with same.
1.2 Properties of sections, for design purposes, are established within
practical limits. Design procedures utilizing suitable working stresses, and
based on the elastic theory, are presented. No attempt is made to specify
load requirements for the several categories into which structures and
structural members may be divided. Loads shall be those stipulated in the
local By-laws under which the structure is being designed or as determined
by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 The following definitions apply in this Standard:
Effective design width (b) means the dimension substituted for the
Flat \Vidth when the flat width of an element is reduced for design purposes.
The Effective Design \Vidth shall be determined in accordance with the
requiremen ts of Clauses 4.2.3 and 4.6;
Effective width ratio (bit) means the ratio of the Effective Design
Width (b) to the thickness (t) of the element;
Flat width (w) means the clear distance between stiffeners or webs
less the fillet radius each side. \Vhen the fillet radius is less than three times
the thickness of material, the full clear distance may be used and the radii
disregarded;
Flat width ratio (wit) means the ratio of the Flat Width (w) to the
thickness (t) of the element;
~1ultiple-stiffened element means an element that is stiffened
between webs, or between a web and an edge, by means of intermediate
stiffeners which are parallel to the direction of stress and which conform to
the requirements of Clause 4.3.2;
Stiffened compression element means a flat compression element
(i.e. plane compression Hanges of flexural members and plane webs and
flanges of compression memhers) of which both edges parallel to the direction of ~tress are stiffened by connection to a stiffening means (i.e. web,
flange, stiffening lip, intermediate stiffener or the like) conforming to the
requiremen ts of Clause 4.3;
10
CSA STANDARD Sl36
Sub-element of a multiple-stiffened element means the portion

of such element between adjacent stiffeners or between web and inter
mediate stiffener or between edge and intermediate stiffener;
Thickness (t) of an element means the thickness of the steel, exclusive
of any protective coating, metallic or otherwise;
Unstiffened compression element means a flat element which is
stiffened at only one edge parallel to the direction of stress;
Unstiffened compression sub-element means a flat compression
element between an unstiffened edge and adjacent intermediate stiffener.
3. :MATERIALS
3.1 Steel for the manufacture of structural members under this Standard
shaH conform to one of the following standards or to other similar standards
as approved by the authority having jurisdiction:
(a) CSA Standard G40A-1959, Medium Structural Steel;
(b) CSA Standard G40.8-1960, Structural Steels with Improved
Resistance to Brittle Fracture;
(c) CSA Standard G40.1Q-1962, Structural Quality Carbon Steel
Sheets;
(d) ASTlVl Standard A36-62T, Structural Steel;
(e) ASTlVl Standard A242-60, High Strength Low Alloy Structural
Steel;
(f) ASTl\1 Standard A24S-62T, Flat-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets of
Structural Quality;
(g) ASTrvl Standard A303-62T, Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Strip of
Structural Quality;
(h) ASTM Standard A374-62T, High Strength Low Alloy Cold-Rolled
Steel Sheets and Strip;
(i) ASTlVI Standard A37S-62T, High Strength Low Alloy Hot-Rolled
Steel Sheets and Strip;
(j) ASTM Standard A41S-62T, Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets,
Commercial Quality;
(k) ASTl\1 Standard A425-62T, Hot-RoBed Carbon Steel Strip,
Commercial Quality;
(I) ASTM Standard A446-60T, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheets
of Structural Quality, Coils and Cut Lengths.
3.2 The listing in Clause 3.1 does not exclude the use of other steels, the
properties and suitability of which are established by either the producer
or the purchaser through analyses, tests, and other controls to the extent
and in the manner prescribed in Clause 8 and as approved by the authority
3.3 The suitability of any steel after cold-forming shall be demonstrated by
the requirements of Clause 8.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-442-
11
4. DESIGN PROCEDURE
4.1 General. All computations for safe loads, stresses, deflections and the
like, shall be in accordance with conventional methods of structural design
except as otherwise specified herein.
is
i
s
4.2 Properties of Sections

4.2.1 General. Properties of sections such as cross-sectional area,
moment of inertia, section modulus, and radius of gyration, shall be determined in accordance with conventional methods of structural design, except
that for elements having inside bend radii not greater than three times the
thickness of the element, the radii at the bends may be disregarded, and
that for any element of which the flat width is reduced to the effective
design width in accordance with the requirements of Clauses 4.2.3, 4.2.4
and 4.6, the effective design width shall be substituted for the flat width in
the calculation of section properties, except as otherwise hereinafter
specified.
4.2.2 Reduced Desi~n Widths. In computing the properties of

sections of flexural members and in computing values of the factor Q
(Clause 5.6.2) for compression members, the effective design width shall
be used instead of the flat width of any stiffened compression element of
which the Hat width ratio exceeds the limiting value, (wIt) lim, as hereinafter
defined. The effective design width shall be determined in accordance with
Clauses 4.2.3, 4.2.4, or 4.6, whichever is applicable. That portion of the
total width which is considered removed to arrive at the effective design
width shall be located symmetrically about the centre line of the element.
4.2.3 Effective Desi~n Width (b) for Stiffened Compression
Elements and Sub-Elements of Multiple-Stiffened Elements.
Variations of stress intensity across the width of a stiffened compression
e1ement or sub-element shall be provided for by substituting the effective
design width (b), for the flat width (w), where required by the terms of this
Clause, and subject to the requirements of Clause 4.6.
For determination of the actual maximum stress in an element or subelement, and of the deflection and deformation of a member, the flat width
(w) of an element or sub-element shall be considered fully effective up to the
limiting value determined by the equation:
5160
(wIt) lim
vi
For such elements or sub-elements in which (wIt) exceeds (w/t)um the

effective design width shall be:
b
10320t [1
vr-
2580 ]
(w/t)Vf
Rb
For determination of the permissible load on a member, the above

formulae shall be replaced by the following:
4020
(W/t)lim =
8040~ [1 -
Vf
2010 ]
(w/t)Vf
12
CSA STANDARD SI36
\Vhere: w
Flat width of element or sub-element, as defined in

Clause 2;
t = Thickness of element or sub-element, as defined in
Clause 2;
b
Effective design width of element or sub-element, as
defined in Clause 2;
= "Maximum unit stress in the compression element or subelement, computed on the basis of the effective width;
Rb 0.10(w-60t), except where it equals ZERO for the
following:
(a) When
(~) ratios.do not exceed 60;
(b) When stiffened compression elements or subelements, are stiffened at each edge by means of a
web or flange.
4.2.4 Properties of Stiffeners. For computing the effective structural

properties of a member having compression elements, or sub-elements, with
flat width ratios exceeding 60, the areas of stiffeners (edge stiffeners and
intermediate stiffeners) shall be considered reduced to an effective area as
follows:
For (wit) between 60 and 90;
Auff = (k)Afull
Where (k) = (3 -
~) - 3~ (1
~) ~
For (wit) greater than 90:
Aeff =
(~) A full
Where Acff and Afull refer only to the area of the stiffener section
exclusive of any portion of adjacent elements. The centroid of the stiffener
is to be considered located at the centroid of the full area of the stiffener,
and the moment of inertia of the stiffener about its own centroidal axis shall
be that of the full section of the stiffener.
4.3 Stiffeners for Compression Elements
4.3.1 EdJ1e Stiffeners. In order that a flat compression element may
be considered a stiffened compression element, it shall be stiffened along
each longitudinal edge parallel to the direction of stress by a web, lip, or
other stiffening means having not less than the following minimum moment
of inertia
Imin = 1.83t4 V (w It)2 - 144 but not less than 9.2t 4
Where wit = flat width ratio of stiffened element;
I min = minimum allowable moment of inertia of stiffener (of any
shape) about its own centroidal axis parallel to the
stiffened elemen t.
\Vhere the stiffener consists of a simple lip bent at right angles to the
stiffened element, the required overall depth, Cd), of such lip may be determined as follows:
d = 2.St [(w/t)2 - 144]1/6 but not less than 4.8t
A simple lip shall not be used as an edge stiffener for any element having
a flat width ratio greater than 60.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-444-
13
4.3.2 Intermediate Stiffeners for Multi-Stiffened Elements. In

order that a flat compression element may be considered a multiple-stiffened
element, it shall be stiffened between webs, or between a web and an edge,
by means of intermediate stiffeners parallel to the direction of stress, and
the moment of inertia of each such intermediate stiffener shall be not less
than twice the minimum allowable moment of inertia specified for edge
stiffeners in Clause 4.3.1. The following limitations also shall apply:
(a) If the spacing of stiffeners between two webs is such that the flat
width ratio of the sub-element between stiffeners is larger than
(w/t)lim as defined in Clause 4.2.3, only two intermediate stiffeners
(those nearest each web) shall be considered effective;
(b) If the spacing of stiffeners between a web and an edge stiffener is
such that the flat width ratio of the sub-element between stiffeners
is larger than (W/t)lim as defined in Clause 4.2.3, only one intermediate stiffener shall be considered effective;
(c) If intermediate stiffeners are spaced so closely that the flat width
ratio between stiffeners does not exceed (W/t)lim as defined in
Clause 4.2.3, all the stiffeners may be considered effective. In
computing the flat width ratio of the entire multiple-stiffened
element, such element shall be considered as replaced by an
element without intermediate stiffeners whose width, w is the
whole width between webs or from web to edge stiffener, and
whose equivalent thickness, til' is determined as follows:
ts
1/ 12 1.
ll ,
WI
\Vhere Is = moment of inertia of the full area of the multiplestiffened element, including the intermediate stiffeners, about its
own cen troidal axis.
4.4 Maximum Allowable F1at Width Ratios. lVlaximum allowable

overall flat width ratios, (w/t) , disregarding intermediate stiffeners and
taking, as (t), the actual thickness of the element, shall be as follows:
(a) Stiffened compression element having one longitudinal edge connected to a web or tiange element, the other stiffened by:
Simple lip bent at right angles to the element. ........ " 60;
Any other kind of stiffener ............................ 90;
(b) Stiffened compression element with both longitudinal edges connected to a web or Hange element (D-type or box-type sections)SOO;
(c) Unstiffened compression element ......................... " 60;
Unstiffened compression elementstha.t h:we jla.t width mtios exceeding ap/Jroximrztely
30 and stWened compression elements that have jld width ratios exceeding approximately 250 are likely to develop notice:zble deforml,tirm III the full allowable working
stresses, without detriment to the ability of the member to carry design loads.
2. Stiffened elements IZ:IVing jla.t width ratios ktrger than 500 may be used 71.'ith safety
to support lnads, b,tt substfwtial defrmwlti.m of such elements under load tnly occur
and may render in:tpplicable the design formulae of this 5'tcmdard.
NOTES 1.
(d) Curling of Flanges: \\there a flange of a flexural member is unusually

wide and it is desired to limit the maximum amount of curling or
movement of the flange towards the neutral axis, the following
formula applies to compression and tension flanges, either stiffened
or unstiffened:
14
CSA STANDARD S136
_ ~I,800,OOOth X ~100C
f
h
_ . av
Wmax -
Where
the width, in inches, of flange projecting beyond

the web, or half the distance between webs for box
or U -type beams;
t = thickness of flange in inches;
h = clear distance between flanges in inches;
c = the amount of curling in inches;
fay = the average stress in the full, unreduced flange
width.
Where members are designed by the effective design width procedure, the average stress equals the maximum stress multiplied by
the ratio of the effective design width to the actual width.
NOTE:
W max =
The amount of curling that can be tolerated will vary with different kinds of sections
and must be established by the designer. Amount of curling in the order of 5 per cent of
the depth of the section is usually not considered excessive.
4.5 Maximum Allowable Web Depth. The ratio (hft) of the webs of
flexural members shall not exceed 150
Where h = clear distance between flanges, inches;
t
thickness of web, inches.
Where a web consists of two or more sheets, the hft ratio of the individual sheets shall not exceed ................................ " 1SO
4.6 Unusually Short Spans Supporting Concentrated Loads. \Vhere
the span of the beam is less than 30w' (w' as defined in Table 1) and it
carries one concentrated load, or several loads spaced farther apart than
2w', the effective design width of any flange, whether in tension or compression, shall be limited by the ratio given in Table 1.
TABLE 1
SHORT WIDE FLANGES
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE RATIO OF EFFECTIVE DESIGN WIDTH
TO ACTUAL WIDTH
L/w'
30
2S
20
18
16
In Table 1: L
w' =
Ratio
L/w'
Ratio
l.OO
14
0.96
0.91
0.89
0.86
12
0.82
0.78
0.7.3
0.67
0.55
10
8
6
full span for simple spans; or the distance between

inflection points for continuous beams; or twice the
length of cantilever beams;
width of flange projection beyond the web for I -beam
and similar sections or half the distance between
webs for box-or U-type sections. For flanges of
I-beams and similar sections stiffened by lips at the
outer edges, w' shall be taken as the sum of the flange
projection beyond the web plus the depth of the lip.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-446-
&
15
5. ALLOWABLE DESIGN STRESSES

Id
)x
)-
y
s
5.1 Basic Design Stress

5.1.1 Utilization of Properties of Plain Material
5.1.1.1 Axial or flexural tension or compression stresses shall not
exceed the values given below except as otherwise specifically provided
herein:
F = fy/1.65, but not to exceed 0.50 fult.;.
where F = basic design unit stress;
fy
specified minimum yield strength in tension;
= specified minimum tensile strength.
fu1t
5.1.1.2 The compression strength and the compression yield
strength shall be considered equal to those in tension, except for steels
which have been cold-worked after production to specifications. Values of f,.
and fult shall be determined as prescribed in Clause 8.2.1.
5.1.2 Utilization of Properties after Cold-Working

5.1.2.1 Utilization, for design purposes, of any change in material
strength that results from a cold-working or a cold-forming operation is
permissible provided the change in strength is applicable to the kind of
stress, tension or compression, that is to be imposed on the final product in
service, and under the limitations prescribed in Clauses 5.1.2.2(a) and (b).
Axial and flexural tension and compression stresses shall not exceed
the values given below except as otherwise specifically provided herein:
F
= fy' /1.65, but not to exceed 0.50' ult;
Where F = basic design stress;
f/
= specified minimum yield strength in tension or compression, as applicable, of the material after ,cold-working, as
determined by 0.2 per cent strain offset, drop-of-the-beam,
or halt-of-pointer method;
fl ult
= specified minimum ultimate strength in tension or compression, as applicable, of the material after cold-working;
f/ and fl ult shall be determined as prescribed in Clause 8.2.2.2.
5.1.2.2 The provisions of Clause 5.1.2 shall apply only to the

following types of sections:
(a) Axially loaded members in which the value of Q, Clause 5.6.2
is unity;
(b) Flanges of flexural members, whose stiffened elements are
fully effective (Clause 4.2.3) and whose unstiffened elements
are not subject to reduction in compressive stress as required
by Clause 5.2;
(c) Steel tubing.
5.1.2.3 Application of the provisions of Clause 5.1.2 shall be confined to the following Clauses of this Standard:
(a) 5.1, Basic Design Stress;
(b) 5.2, Compression on Unstiffened Elements, Clause 5.2 (a)
only;
(c) 5.3, Laterally Unbraced Single Web Beams;
(d) 5.6, Axially Loaded Compression Members;
(e) 5.7, Combined Axial and Bending Stresses;
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-447-
16
CSA STANDARD SIl6
(f) 5.8, Wind or Earthquake Loads;

(g) 5.9, Cy1indrical Tubular Compression Members;
(h) 7.5, Wall Studs.
Application of all other provisions of the Standard shall be based upon
the properties of the plain material before forming or cold-working.
5.1.2.4 The effect of welding shall be determined on the basis of
full section tests through a welded section, and due allowance for such effect
shall be made in the structural use of the member.
5.1.3 Wind and Earthquake Stresses. For special provisions for

membe,rs resisting wind or earthquake loads see Clauses 5.8.1 and 5.8.2.
5.2 Compression on Un stiffened Elements and Sub-Elements.
Average compression, (Fe), in pounds per square inch, on flat unstiffened
elements:
(a) For (wit) not greater than 1-0, and (F) not greater than 30,000 psi:
Fe
F
When (F) exceeds 30,000 psi, the maximum wit ratio for which Fe
may be taken equal to (F) shall not exceed
300,000
F
When (F) exceeds 30,000 psi and the ratio wit is less than 10 but
greater than that established above, the allowable value of (Fe)
shall be calculated as follows:
Fe = F (1
l~t) + 30,000
(b) For wit greater than 10, but not greater than 25:
Fe =
~ (F
- 5184) - 115 (F - 12,950)
For steels with yield point in excess of 50,000 psi, the value of (F)
to be used for the determination of (Fe) when wit exceeds 10 shall
be 30,000 psi;
(c) For (wit) from 25 to 60:
8,090,000
F or angIe struts: F e =
(w/t)2
For all other sections: Fe
20,000 - 282 (wit).
In the above formulae, (wit) is the flat width ratio as defined in
Clause 2.
Unstiffened compression elements having ratios of (wit) exceeding
approximately 30 may show noticeable distortion of the free edges under
allowable compressive stress without detriment to the ability of the member
to support load.
When (wit) exceeds approximately 60, distortion of the flanges is likely
to be so pronounced as to render the section structurally undesirable unless
load and stress are limited to such a degree as to render such use uneconomical.
17
5.3 Laterally Un braced Single Web Beams. To prevent lateral buckling,
.f
t
the maximum average compressive stress (F u) in pounds per square inch.

on extreme fibres of compression flanges of laterally unsupported straight
(1)-, (Z)-, or channel-shaped flexural members (not including multiple-web
deck, (U)- and closed box-type members and curved or arch members) shall
not exceed the allowable strt~SS as specified in Clauses 5.1.1 or 5.2 nor the
following maximum stresses:
(a) For (1)- or channel-shaped sections:
(i) When L/ry is greater than 10,OSO/VF'but less than 22,400/VV
Fu = 1.11F-[(L/ry)Fj30,100]2
(ii) \Vhen L/ry is equal to or greater than 22,400/VF
F u = 280,000,000/(L/ry)2
(b) For (Z)-shaped sections:
(i) When L/ry is greater than 7,100/VFbut less than 15,900/VF
Fu
l.11F [(L/ry)F/21,300]2
(ii) When L/ry is equal to or greater than 15,900/VF
Fu = 140,000,000/(L/ry)2
where L = unbraced length of compression flange of member, in inches;
r y = the radius of gyration of the entire section of the member
about its gravity axis parallel to the web;
F
basic design stress in pounds per square inch as defined in
Clauses 5.1.1 and 5.1.2.
5.4 Allowable Stresses in Webs of Beams

5.4.1 Shear Stresses in Webs. The maximum average shear stress,
F v, in pounds per square inch, on the gross area of a flat web shall not
exceed:
h
.
f 2F
F v = 64,000,000.
(h/t)2
Wit a maximum 0 3
\Vhere t = web thickness, inches;
h = clear distance between flanges, inches;
F = basic design stress as defined in Clause 5.1.1.
Where the web consists of two or more sheets, each sheet shall be considered as a separate member carrying its share of the shear.
5.4.2 Bending Stress in Webs. The compressive stress, (F w), in

pounds per square inch in the flat web of a beam due to bending in its plane,
shall not exceed (F), nor shall it exceed
F
520,000,000
w
(h/t)2
Where (h) and (t) are defined as in Clause 5.4.1.
5.4.3 Combined Bending and Shear Stresses in Webs. For webs
subject to both bending and ,shear stress, the member shall be so proportioned that such stresses do not exceed the allowable values specified in
Clauses 5.4.1 and 5.4.2 and that the quantity
fw
( Fw
)2 + (Fvf v)2 does not exceed unlty

.
18
CSA
srANDARD
S136
Where f", = calculated compressive stress at junction of flange and web,

psi;
fv
calculated average shear stress in web, psi;
F", and Fv are as defined in Clauses 5.4.2 and 5.4.1.
5.5 Web Crippling of Beams

5.5.1 Concentrated Loads and Reactions, Single Web Beams.
Beams having single unreinforced webs shall not be subjected to concentrated loads or reactions greater than the values of P max given below:
(a) For end reactions and for concentrated loads on the outer ends of
can tilevers :
Pm~= lOOt' [980+ 4~B -
0.22 Bh
O.~ lh ]
[ 1.15-0.15n ] [ 1.33-0.33k ] k
(b) For reactions of interior supports or for concentrated loads located

anywhere on the span:
Pm~ = lOOt' [ 3050+ 2~B -
0.09Bh - 5h] [1.06

t
0.06nJ [ 1.22 - 0.22k ] k
5.5.2 Double Webs and Built-Up Beams. I beams made of two

channels connected back to back, or similar sections which provide a high
degree of restraint against rotation of the web, such as I sections made by
welding two angles to a channel, shall not be subjected to concentrated
loads or reactions greater than the values of P max given below:
(a) For end reactions and for concentrated loads on the outer ends of
cantilevers:
Pm ..
= t'F [ 7.4 + 0.93
~J
(b) For reactions of interior supports or for concentrated loads anywhere on the span
Pm~
t'F [ 11.1 + 2.41
~J
In Clauses 5.5.1 and 5.5.2:

Pmax= allowable concentrated load or reaction, pounds;
t
= web thickness, inches;
B = actual length of bearing in inches, but not to exceed h;
h
= clear distance between flanges, inches;
= basic design stress, as defined in Clause 5.1.1;
F
k
fy
33,000
n
= ratio of inside bend radius divided by web thickness.
5.5.3 Application of Clauses 5.5.1 and 5.5.2

5.5.3.1 In Clauses 5.5.1 and 5.5.2, (Pmax) represents the load or
reaction for one solid web sheet connecting top and bottom flanges. For
webs consisting of two or more such sheets, (Pmax) shall be computed for
each individual sheet and the results added to obtain the allowable load or
reaction for the composite web.
5.5.3.2 Provisions 5.5.1(b) and 5.5.2(b) apply, provided that
there is a clear distance vf not less than (1.5h) from the edge of bearing at
the load to the edge of bearing at a reaction or to the free end of a cantilever.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-450-
p
b,
19
5.6 Axially Loaded Compression Members

5.6.1 Unit Stress. The average axial stress in pounds per square inch,
(PIA), in compression members shall not exceed the value (Fa), determined
as follows:
s.
n-
of
F.
~h
)y
~d
{-
(I{~~r)2
Where P
A
Fa
L =
K =
r =
total load, pounds;

full unreduced sectional area of member, square inches;
maximum allowable average axial stress, psi;
unsupported length of member, inches;
effective length factor, as defined in Clause 5.6.3;
radius of gyration of unreduced section, applicable to
this length;
Q = shape factor (Clause 5.6.2);
F =xbasic design stress, as defined in Clauses 5.1.1 and 5.1.2;
E
29,000,000 for steels having a well-defined yield point, and
27,000,000 for steels having a yield strength defined by
0.2 per cent offset.
~d
{o
= QF (1 - 0.0035 KL/r), but not to exceed
5.6.2 Shape Factor. The shape factor Q, shall be determined as

follows:
(a) For a member composed entirely of stiffened elements, the factor
(Q) shall be the ratio of the effective design area to the gross area
of the section. In determining the effective design area of each
element (Clause 4.2.3) the stress (f) shall equal the basic design
stress (F) (Clauses 5.1.1 and 5.1.2).
.
Effecti ve Area
Lbt
Hence, for stIffened elements, Q = G
A
= -A
ross rea
(b) For a member composed entirely of unstiffened elements, the
factor (Q) shall be the ratio of the allowable compressive stress
(Fe) (Clause 5.2) for the element having the largest flat-width
ratio, to the basic design stress (F).
Hence, for unstiffened elements, Q
(c) For a member composed of both stiffened and unstiffened elements,

the factor (Q) shall be the product of an area factor (QII) and a
stress factor (Qf). The factors (Qa) and (Qf) shall be determined as
follows:
Q.
L!t where b = full

width for an unstiffened element, or
effective width for a stiffened element, the
la tter being determined as provided in
Clause 4.2.3, using for (f) the value of (Fe)
for the weakest unstiffened element in the
section;
t
thickness of an element;
A = gross sectional area of member;
Ir
ir
,r
Qf
t
t
= ~e
where Fe
F
shall be as defined in Clause 5.2;

shall be as defined in Clauses 5.1.1 and
5.1.2 ;
then for the member, Q = Q. multiplied by Qf.
20
CSA STANDARD 8136
5.6.3 Slenderness Ratios

5.6.3.1 The slenderness ratio, (the ratio of the effective length to
the applicable radius of gyration,
(~L)
of compression members shall not
exceed 200, except that when ordinarily subjected to shock or vibratory

loads the slenderness ratio shall not exceed 120.
5.6.3.2 The value of (K) to be used in the design of compression
members shall be not less than given by Table 2 and 3, for the appropriate
condition of end restraint. Length (L) shall generally be taken as the distance
between centres of members supporting the column or strut in the plane in
which buckling is being considered. At a base or cap detail, the distance
shall be measured from the outer surface of the base or cap plate.
5.6.3.3 Slenderness ratios are not generally applicable to tension
members. When the live load is preponderant or pulsating in nature and
likely to cause a reversal of stress or excessive vibration, the slenderness
ratios shall be governed by the requirements for compression members.
5.7 Combined Axial and Bending Stresses

5.7.1 Members subject to both axial compression and bending stresses
shall be proportioned so that the quantity
+ ~: shall not exceed unity

where Fa = maximum axial unit stress in compression that is permitted
by the Standard where axial stress only exists (Clause
5.6.1) ;
Fb = maximum bending unit stress in compression that is permitted by this Standard where bending stress only exists
(Clauses 5.1.1,5.1.2,5.2,5.3, and 5.7.2);
fa = axial unit stress, equal to axial load divided by full crosssectional area of member;
h = bending unit stress, equal to bending moment divided by
section modulus of member, noting that for members
having stiffened compression elements the section modulus
shall be based on the effective design widths of such
elements.
5.7.2 For primary members with effective slenderness ratio greater than
120, and subject to lateral loads, or to moments applied at the ends so that
the member deflects in single curvature, the quantity (Fb) in the formula
given above shall be replaced by
Fb [ 1 - fa
(KL/r - 120)2]
30,000,000
For compression members wherein bending moments are developed at

the ends, allowance shall be made for a bending moment at mid-length not
less than
VO.3 (Mi
Mi)
0.41\;1 1:\1 2
larger of end moments;
smaller of end moments. In this formula, the sign of M2 is
negative if lV12 causes column curvature opposite to that
caused by MI.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-452-
DESIGN OF LlGIIT GAUGE STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
to
rlOt
lon
lte
Ice
In
lce
on
nd
~ss
leS
r-
ts
21
At points where compression members are held laterally about both

axes, the allowable axial compressive unit stress (Fa) may be the maximum
permitted in Clause 5.6.1, for zero slenderness ratio. (Fa) may be assumed
to vary linearly along the length of a compression member, from a maximum
at points of lateral support to a minimum (according to slenderness ratio)
at mid-length. The allowable bending unit stress at any section may be
determined according to Clauses 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, and 5.7.
5.S Wind or Earthquake Loads
5.S.1 Wind or Earthquake Only. Members and assemblies subject
only to stresses produced by wind or seismic forces may be proportioned
for unit stresses 33 J1 per cent greater than those specified for dead and live
load stresses, provided that no increased unit stress shall exceed 0.85 times
the specified minimum yield point of the steel. A corresponding increase
may be applied to t~e allowable unit stresses in connections and details.
5.S.2 Combined Forces. Members or assemblies subject to stresses
produced by a combination of wind or earthquake and other loads may be
proportioned for unit stresses 33J1 per cent greater than those specified for
dead and live load stresses, provided that no increased unit stress shall
exceed 0.85 times the specified minimum yield point of the steel, and provided further that the section thus required is not less than that required
for the combination of dead load and live load. A corresponding increase
may be applied to the allowable unit stresses in connections and details.
5.9 Cylindrical Tubular Compression Members. The ratio, (D/t), of
mean diameter to wall thickness of a cylindrical tubular compression
member shall not exceed 2,000,000IF. For such members, the allowable unit
stress (PIA) under axial load shall be as prescribed by Clause 5.6.1, with
Q 1.
s-
'y
~s
IS
n
t
t
t
22
eSA STANDARD SI36
TABLE 2
MINIMUM DESIGN VALUES OF EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR uK"
Minimum Effective
Length Factor, K

Symbol

0.65

0.80

1.00

held in position.
1.20
Ir~
/:J~

I..so
I "-,

2.00
EtTectively held in position and restrained

against rotation at om' end but not held
in posilion nor restrained against rotation
at the other end.
2.00
* Effective length =KL,
IT
I.....,...J
I
/'
r-,
'-"T..J
I
/./
J!
11Jhere L is the unsupported length of the member in the plane of
bending.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-454-
23
TABLE 3
EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR FOR COMPRESSION
ELEMENTS OF STEEL JOISTS
Ll = Panel Length
Effective Length
for Design = 0.9L1
L2 = Panel Length
Effective Length
for Design = 0.9L2
,, . ...
Effective Length for

Design of Web ;vI em her
KL=0.9Ll
Effective Length for

Design of Web Member
6. CONNECTIONS
6.1 General
6.1.1 Stress in Connections. Connections shall be designed to
transmit the maximum stress in the connected member with proper regard
for eccentricity.
6.1.2 Connections Subject to Stress Reversal. The connections of

members subject to reversal of stress due to moving loads (with the exception of wind and seismic forces) shall be proportioned for the numerical
sum of the stresses of each sign.
6.1.3 Fastening Devices. Any suitable mechanical fastener, special
device, structural adhesive or other means may be used to join together
24
eSA STANDARD SI36
component parts. Due regard shall be given to the anticipated service conditions in choosing the means of connection. Except as specified herein or
unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction, connecting
devices shall develop at least 2% times their design value before failure.
6.2 Welded Connections

6.2.1 Fusion Welds. All fusion welding shall conform to the requirements of CSA Standard W59-1946, Welding of Steel Structures (Metallic
Electric-Arc Process), excepting such provisions of that Standard as are
clearly not applicable to material of the thickness to which this Standard
normally applies. All butt welds shall be continuous for the full length of
the joint and shall penetrate completely the joint cross-section.
6.2.2 Resistance Welds

6.2.2.1 All resistance welding shall conform to the applicable
requirements of. CSA Standard W55.2-1957, Resistance Welding Practice.
6.2.2.2 For material joined by spot welding (including projection
welding) the allowable shear per spot shall be as given in Table 4.
TABLE 4
SHEAR STRENGTH OF SPOT WELDS
Thickness of Thinnest
Outside Sheet
Allowable Shear Strentth

Per Spot
Inches
Pounds
0.010
0.020
0.030
50
125
225
0.040
0.050
0.060
350
525
0.080
0.094
0.109
1,075
1,375
1,650
0.125
0.155
0.185
2,000
3,000
4,000
725
Values for intermediate thickness may be obtained by straight-line interpolation.
6.3 Bolted and Riveted Connections

6.3.1 Materials. Bolts and nuts (7.;i inch diameter and over) shall conform to ASTM Standard A307-61T, Low-Carbon Steel Externally and
Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. High-strength bolts, nuts, and
washers shall conform to ASTM Standard A325-61T, High-Strength Steel
Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, Including Suitable Nuts and Plain
Hardened Washers.
When other than the above are used the plans shall indicate clearly
the type and size of fasteners to be employed and the allowable stresses
assumed in design.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-456-
conn or
ting
lireallic
are
lard
1 of
lble
ice.
10n
25
6.3.2 A325 High-Strength Bolts. High-strength bolts and their usage

shall conform to the requirements for same as specified by CSA Standard
516-1961, Steel Structures for Buildings, in regard to all aspects not specifically covered herein.
6.3.3 Minimum Spacing and End Distance. The clear distance
between fasteners in the line of stress, and the distance from the centre of a
fastener to the end or edge of the connected member towards which the
pressure of the fastener is directed shall be not less than 1}1 d nor less than
(P/Ft).
where d = diameter of fastener (inches);
P = force transmitted by fastener (pounds):
t
thickness of thinnest connected material;
F = allowable basic tensile stress in the connected material (psi).
6.3.4 Tensile Stress on Net Section. Tensile stress on net section of
a riveted or bolted connection shall not exceed the allowable basic tensile
stress (F) nor shall it exceed
(0.1 + 3 dis) F
where s = fastener spacing perpendicular to line of stress, or in the
case of a single line of fasteners, the width of the connected
material;
d = nominal diameter of fastener.
6.3.5 Allowable Stresses
Tension: Steel Rivets having two full heads,
based on nominal area ....................... 20,000 psi;
A307 bolts, based on nominal area ............. 14,000;
Shear:
Steel rivets, based on nominal area ............ 15,000;
A307 bolts, based on nominal area .. , .......... 10,000;
Bearing: ............ , ............................. 3.5 F.
6.4 Spacing of Fastenings in Compression Members
6.4.1 The spacing in the line of stress of fasteners and welds in compression members shall not exceed:
(a) That which is required to transmit the shear between the connected
parts wi thout exceeding the allowable stresses in the fastenings;
(b) 4000 t where t = thickness of material connected;
Vf
f = calculated design stress;
This value may be increased 50 per cent where fastenings are
staggered on adjacent gauge lines not more than 32t apart;
1-
d
d
d
n
(c) 900,00o-f-but not greater than (32t), or greater than 3 times the
flat wid th of the narrowest unstiffened compression element in that portion of the connected material tributary
to the fastening.
6.4.2 Spacing refers to centre-to-centre distance between mechanical
fastenings, and the clear distance plus one-half inch if this is less than the
centre-to-centre distance in the case of welds.
26
eSA STANDARD SI36
6.5 Connecting Two Channels to Form an I-Section. The maximum

permissible longitudinal spacing of welds or other fastenings, (Smax), joining
two channels to form an I-section shall be
(a) For compression members:
L
Smax =
rl
where L = length of compression member, inch;
rl = radius of gyration of I-section about centroidal axis parallel
to flange, inch;
r2 = radius of gyration of one channel about centroidal axis
parallel to web, inch;
(b) For flexural members:
Sma.x = L/6
In no case shall the spacing exceed the value
Slim
where L
2 c Sw
mq
span of beam, inches;
Sw = strength of connector in tension, pounds;
q
m
vertical distance between the two rows of fastenings; near

or at top and bottom flanges, inches;
intensity of load, on beam, pounds per linear inch,
(For methods of determination see below.) ;
distance of shear centre of channel from mid-plane of the
web, inch. For simple channels without stiffening lips at
the outer edges,
m
2w
+ h/3
For C-shaped channels with stiffening lips at the outer edges;

m
~~: [ wh + 2d (h -
d) ]
projection of flanges from inside face of web, inches

(For channels with flanges of unequal width, w shall be
taken as the width of the wider flange.);
h = depth of channel or beam, inch;
depth of lip, inch;
d
Jx = moment of inertia of one channel abou tits cen troidal axis
normal to the web, (inch)4.
The intensity of load, (q), is obtained by dividing the magnitude of
concentrated loads or reactions by the length of bearing. For beams designed
for "uniformly distributed load", the intensity (q) shall be taken equal to
three times the intensity of the uniformly distributed design load. If the
length of bearing of a concen tra ted load or reaction is smaller than the weld
spacing (s), the required strength of the weld or connector closest to the
load or reaction (P) is
Sw = Pm/2c
The required limiting spacing of fastening Slim depends upon the intensity of the load directly at the connection. Therefore, if uniform spacing
of fastenings is used over the whole length of the beam, it shall be deter~
mined at the point of maximum local load intensity. In cases where this
w
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-458-
F
1m
mg
leI
CIS
27
procedure would result in uneconomically close spacing either one of the

following methods may be adopted:
(a) The fastening spacing may be varied along the beam according to
the varia tion of the load in tensi ty; or
(b) Reinforcing cover plates may be welded to the flanges at points
where concentrated loads occur. The strength in shear of the
fastenings joining these plates to the flanges shall then be used for
Sw, and "c" shall represent the depth of the beam.
7. BRACING REQUIREMENTS
7.1 General
7.1.1 Structural members and assemblies shall be adequately braced in
accordance with good engineering practice. Care shall be taken to ensure
that the bracing of entire structural systems is complete, particularly when
there is interdependence on walls, floors, and roofs acting as diaphragms.
7.1.2 Engineering drawings shall show the details of the essential

bracing requirements including any detail necessary to assure the effectiveness of the bracing or bracing system.
Lr
e
t
7.1.3 The provisions of Clauses 7.2 to 7.5 cover certain minimum

requirements. The spacing of bracing in any case shall be not greater than
the unbraced length assumed in the design of the members or component.
7.2 Bracing of Compression Members and Elements
7.2.1 For columns, and other axially loaded compression members, for
compression flanges of beams and compression chords of trusses, bracing
consisting of individual steel members shall be designed for not less than
2.5 per cent of the compression force in the member or element at the brace
l)cation.
7.2.2 Bracing acting in compression shall have a slenderness ratio not

greater than 200. The bracing force may be shared proportionately by all
bracing elements acting at one location provided that the nature of the
bracing is such that combined action is possible.
7.2.3 For the compression flange of a beam or chord of a truss to be
considered laterally restrained by a slab or deck resting thereon, the slab
or deck and its method of attachment to the flange or chord shall be adequate to resist a force in the plane of the deck or slab, considered to be
uniformly distributed along the entire length of the top flange or chord, of
not less than 5 per cent of the maximum force in the flange or chord.
7.3 Box Beams. For closed box sections used as beams the ratio of the
unsupported length between points affording lateral restraint to the distance
between webs of the box section shall not exceed 75.
7.4 Special Consideration for Asymmetrical Sections. Channels,

angles, Z's and other asymmetrical sections shall be so braced that twisting
of the member under load is minimized.
7.5 Wall Studs

7.5.1 The safe load-carrying capacity of a stud may be computed on
the basis that wall material or sheathing (attached to the stud) furnishes
adequate lateral support to the stud in the plane of the wall, provided the
28
eSA STANDARD S136
wall material and its attachments to the stud comply with the following
requirements:
(a) Wall material or sheathing must be attached to both faces or
flanges of the studs being braced;
(b) The maximum spacing of attachments of waH material to the stud
being braced shall not exceed "amax " as determined from the
formula;
8E hk
a max = A2 f y 2
All terms are as defined in Clauses 7.5.3 and 7.5.4.
7.5.2 The slenderness ratio of the stud between attachments, a/r2,

shall not exceed L/2rl' Therefore, the spacing of attachments shall not
exceed that specified above nor shall it exceed
L r2
a max = -2rl
where L = length of stud, inches;
rl = radius of gyration of stud about its axis parallel to wall =
VII/A, inches;
r2
radius of gyration of stud about its axis perpendicular to
wall = Vh/A, inches.
7.5.3
7.5.3.1 \Vhether a given wall material or means of attachment,
satisfies the requirements of Clause 7 may be established by the test procedure described in Part 11 of the AISI "Light Gauge Cold-Formed Steel
Design .Manual", to determine the modulus of elastic support (k), for the
wall material.
7.5.3.2 The minimum modulus of elastic support (k) required for
adequate lateral support for wall studs by the wall material and its attachmen ts, shall be not less than
a f 2 A2
k =
y
240,000,000 h
where fy
yield point of steel in the studs, psi;
a = actual spacing of attachments of wall material to stud
measured along the length of stud (a = 1 for continuous
attachment), inches;
A = area of cross section of stud, square inches;
h = moment of inertia of cross section of stud about its axis
perpendicular to wall, (inches)".
7.5.4 The lateral force, (F), which each single attachment of the wall
material shall be capable of exerting on the stud in the plane of the wall
(in order to prevent lateral buckling of the stud) shall be not less than
keP
FmiD = ----;:=====
2 VEh k/a-P
where k = modulus of elastic support of the wall material used in the
formula to determine the maximum allowable spacing of
attachments in Clause 7.5.1(b), (pounds per inch);
Stud
e
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-460-
?
mg
or
ud
:he
29
P = design load on stud, pounds;

h = moment of inertia of stud about its axis perpendicular to
the wall, (inches)4;
a = actual spacing of attachments measured along stud, inches
(a = 1 inch for continuous attachment);
E
lVlodulus of Elasticity = 29,000,000.
8. TESTING
to
It,
0-
:el
Ie
Jr
1-
IS
8.1 General
8.1.1 Scope. The provisions of Clause 8 are intended to apply to the
following:
(a) Determination of the mechanical properties of material as received
from the steel manufacturer. When the specification to which the
material is produced specifies minimum mechanical properties,
these minimum properties may be used without additional tensile
tests for design purposes;
(b) Determination of the modified mechanical properties of material
after cold-working or cold-forming, for the utilization of the change
in strength as permitted in Clause 5.1.2;
(c) Determination of the residual ductility of all cold-formed elements
in accordance with Clauses 8.2.3 and 8.2.4;
(d) Determination of load carrying capacity of structural elements or
assemblies for which the composition or configuration is such that
calculation of their safe-load-carrying capacity or deflection cannot be made in accordance with the provisions of Clauses 2 through
5 of this Standard.
8.1.2 Laboratory Reports. Tests shall be made by an approved
independent testing laboratory or by an approved manufacturer's testing
laboratory in accordance with Clause 8.2. Copies of the certified test reports
shall be available to the purchaser on request.
8.1.3 Published Properties. The minimum guaranteed mechanical
properties of materials used for design purposes shall be established in a
published material specification. The established properties shall be available on request to purchasers and, for approval, to authorities having
jurisdiction.
8.2 Procedure
8.2.1 Testing of Plain Material. For the purposes defined in Clauses
5.1.1 and 8.1(a) the determination of the mechanical properties shall be in
accordance with the provisions of CSA Standard G40.1-1959, General
Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and
Bars for Structural Use.
8.2.2 Testing of Cold-Worked l\1aterial
8.2.2.1 For the purposes defined in Clauses 5.1.2 and 8.1(b), the
determination of the mechanical properties shall be performed on the full
sectional area of the cold-worked or cold-formed section, if practicable.
Where this is not practicable, the test shall be made on a specimen cut from
the section in such a way as to include a portion of the section in which the
amount of cold-working and welding (if applicable) is deemed to be repre-
30
e8A STANDARD 8136
sentative of the average amount of cold-working and welding in the section

as a whole.
8.2.2.2 Specifications for Testing,. Tests for the purpose of
Clauses 5.1.2 and 8.1(b) shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM Standards A37o-61T, Methods and Definitions for IVlechanical Testing of Steel Products, and E9-62, Methods of Compression
Testing of Metallic Materials.
8.2.3 Bend Test for Residual Ductility. A flat specimen at least
3 inches long, cut from a cold-formed member, shall stand being bent at
room temperature through 180 degrees to an inside diameter of lYz times
the thickness of the material or % of the sharpest bend diameter in the coldformed member, which ever is the smaller, without cracking on the outside
of the bent specimen.
8.2.4 Frequency of Tests for Cold-Worked Material. Tests for the
determination of mechanical properties and residual ductility shall be performed for each section rolled from each heat.
8.2.5 Quality Control of Members and Assemblies. For fabricated

members and assemblies after initial tests have been performed to determine
the specified mechanical properties of sections, the following test procedure
may be used for continuous quality control.
The yield strength used in design may be verified by proof-load tests
on full-size assemblies unrestrained at supports. Such tests shall be performed by the application of two consecutive proof-loads equal to 1.65
times the design load. The second application of the proof-load shall not
increase the residual deflection caused by the first application by more than
3 per cent, and the deflection recovery, upon removal of the second application of the proof-load, shall be at least 90 per cent of the total deflection.
Deflections shall be measured from a datum established before applying the
proof-loads, and shall be taken at points along the length of the member
having the greater deflection under the load.
This procedure is not intended to replace normal design procedure.
8.2.6 Load Tests for Members, Capacity of Which Cannot be
Calculated. Where tests are necessary for the purposes defined in Clause
8.1(a) they shall be conducted in accordance with the following procedure:
(a) \tVhere practicable, evaluation of test results shall be made on the
basis of the mean value resulting from tests of not fewer than three
identical specimens, provided the deviation of any individual test
results from the mean value obtained from all tests does not exceed
10 per cent. If such deviation from the mean exceeds 10 per cent
at least three more tests of the same kind shall be made. The average of the three lowest val ues of all tests made shall then be regarded as the result of the series of tests;
(b) Determination of allowable load carrying capacity shall be made
on the basis that harmful local distortions shall not develop during
the test with a total load, including the weight of the test specimen,
equal to 1.65 times total design load and that the member, assembly
or connection shall be capable of sustaining during the tests, without failure, a total load, including the weight of the test specimen,
equal to 1.9 times total design load. For members and assemblies
subjected to wind or earthquake loads, appropriate modification of
the foregoing factors shall be made in accordance with Clause 5.8.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-462-
p
31
9. ASSEMBLY
Ion
9.1 Workmanship. All workmanship shall be equal to the best prevailing

of
re'leon
iSt
at
les
Idde
he
~r-
ts
r-
.5
)t
n
L-
1.
e
~r
practice.
Cuttin~, and Punchin~. Cold-formed members shall be
shaped by press brakes or by roll forming, or by any mechanical means
which does not result in work hardening to an extent that would limit the
intended service. Components may be cut by slitting, shearing, sawing, or
flame cutting. All punched holes and sheared or flame cut edges of material
in members carrying calculated stress shall be clean and free from notches
and burred edges.
9.2 Forming,
9.3 Fasteners. lVletal components may be assembled by means of welding

or by the use of bolts, rivets, or screws. Where dissimilar metals are fastened
together caution shall be used in the selection of suitable fasteners.
Special fastening devices such as metal stitching, clinching and structural adhesives may be used. The shear and tensile strengths of any special
fastening device\must be established by test to the satisfaction of the
9.4 Strai~htenin~ and Flattenin~. All material shall be clean and
straight. If straightening or flattening is necessary it shall be done by a
process and in a manner that will not injure the material.
9.5 Provision for Expansion and Contraction. Provision shall be made

in the assembly of sheet metal components for thermal expansion and
contraction.
9.6 Profiles and Distortion. Profiles llsed structurally must be to the full
dimensions "Claimed in the manufacturer's load capacity tables. Care must
be taken not to stretch, bend or otherwise distort parts of the sections
unless such forming is an integral part of the design.
9.7 Connections. Connections and bracings for structural assemblies shall
comply with requirements of Clauses 6 and 7.
10. ERECTION
10.1 Handlin~ Requirements. Care shall be taken to avoid damage
through careless handling. Adequate precautions shall be taken when
loading, unloading, and handling long slender members.
10.2 Temporary Loads durin~ Erection. Erection and installation procedures shall be such as to avoid excessive temporary loads and deformations.
10.3 Markin~ of Members. Stamped or other injurious erection marks
shall not be used. Tags, paint or ink marks, or other approved method shall
be used to identify components.
11. PROTECTION
11.1 Corrosion of Thin Materials not Permitted. Since the design of
members is based on the thickness of steel, adequate protection against
corrosion must be provided.
11.2 Storin~ and Protective Coating. All unprotected steel stock shall
be stored in a dry place before processing and shall be protected by a rust
inhibitive coating immediately after processing.
32
CSA STANDARD SI36
11.3 Protection during Assembly, Storing, and Handling. Units shall

be adequately protected during assembly, storage, and erection from corrosion and deformation.
11.4 Quality of Protective Coating. The standard of protection to be
employed shall be that specified by the Engineer, or other authority having
jurisdiction.
11.5 Coatings. Formed light gauge steel members may be protected against
corrosion by means of paint, zinc as in the case of galvanized sheet, porcelain
enamel, or other special protective coatings.
11.6 Preparation of Surfaces for Coatings. Whatever protective scheme
is used, the surface shall be dry and clean, free from dirt, grease, loose or
heavy scale or rust, before applying the protective coating. When preparing
welded assemblies for painting, care shall be taken that the area at and near
welds is thoroughly cleaned. After surfaces have been cleaned by sandblasting or by other methods, a protective coating shall be applied as soon
as practicable and before noticeable oxidation of clean surfaces occurs.
11.7 Injuries to Coating or Members. Attention shall be paid to the
handling of formed metal components so as not to nick, gouge, or dent the
material, or injure the protective coating.
11.8 Adequate Adhesion of Protective Coatings. Careful consideration
should be given to the selection of a protective procedure so that all subsequent protective treatments form part of a co-ordinated scheme and thus
ensure adequate adhesion.
11.9 Zinc Coated Sections or Members. Zinc coated sections which are
stored in a nested position must be completely protected from the weather
to a void oxidation.
-464-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
III
)e
19
3t
(SA STANDARD SlS7-1969
,e
Ir
g
r
THE STRUCTURAL USE OF ALUMINUM

IN BUILDINGS
PUBUSHED, NOVEMBER, 1969

BY THE
(INCORPORATED 1919)
178 REXDALE 80UlEVARD
REXDALE 603. ONTARIO, CANADA
COPYRIGHT REGISTERED, CANADA. 1963
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-466-
,.
THE STRUCTURAL USE OF ALUMINUM IN BUILDINGS
CONTENTS
Page
List of Members of Committee on Structural Use of Aluminum in
Buildings... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Preface ....................... '" . .... ............ .. .... .......
Reference Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDARD
1. Scope...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1.1 Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
1.2 Aluminum Alloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11
11
2. Definitions, Units, and Nomenclature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

2.1
Definitions. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
2.2
Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
2.3
Nomenclature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
12
12
12
13
3. Plans ...................................... , ........... , . ..

3.1
Design Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.2
Erection Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
3.3 Shop Drawings...................................... "
14
14
14
14
4. Methods of Design... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.1
Elastic Analysis.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Plastic and Ultimate Load Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.2
4.3
Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
4.4 Other Methoos.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14
14
14
14
15
5. Loads and Forces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

5.1
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.2
Dead Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.3
Live and Other Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
5.4
Incidental Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Temporary Loads........ . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..
5.5
5.6 Thermal Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
6. Deflections.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.1
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6.2
Limiting Deflections in General Building Structures.. . . .. ..
15
15
15
7. Camber......................................... . . . . . . . . . ..
15
8. Materials................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.1
Identification. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8.2
Alloys .............................................. "
16
16
16
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-467-
11
CSA STANDARD S157
8.3
8.4
8.5
Physical Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Steel Bolts. ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Other Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
16
16
16
9. Material Thickness..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.1
Minimum Thickness.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2
Width-Thickness Ratios. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
16
16
16
10. Gross and Net Sections.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

10.1 General..............................................
10.2 Definitions. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.3 Application...........................................
10.4 Net Width ..... ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
10.5 Size of Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
17
17
17
17
17
17
11. Eccentrically Loaded Tension Members. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

11.1 Riveted or Bolted Members.... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
11.2 Welded Members................ , . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . ..
18
18
18
12. Effective Span and Compression Member Lengths... . . . . . . . . . . ..

12.1 Span Length.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
12.2 Compression Members............................... "
18
18
18
13. Slenderness Ratios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

13.1 General..............................................
13.2 Compression Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.3 Tension Members. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.4 Torsional Vibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
13.5 Vibration of Tubes................................... "
18
18
18
19
19
19
14. Allowable Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

14.1 General..............................................
14.2 Selected Alloys. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.3 Combinations Including Live, Wind, Seismic, Thennal, and/
or Erection Forces ................................... "
14.4 Basic Allowable Stress in Tension and Compression (F). . ..
14.4.1 Parent Metal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.4.2 Metal Within One Inch of a Weld. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.4.3 Partially Welded Cross-Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.5 Axial Compression (Fa)....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.5.1 Parent Metal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.5.2 Columns Containing Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.6 Bending (Fb)....... . . ... . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.7 Shear (Fv).... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.8 Bearing..............................................
20
20
20
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-461'-
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
23
24
p
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
l8
l8
19
19
19
!O
~o
:0
o
o
o
o
o
1
1
1
2
3
l
Local and Torsional Buckling.......................... .

14.9.1 Single and Double Angles, Tees, Cruciforms...... .
14.9.2 Open 'Shapes with Two Longitudinal Edges ....... .
14.9.3 Flat Elements of Sections ....................... .
14.9.4 Compressive Stress in Webs Due to Bending...... .
14.9.5 Tubes ........................................ .
14.9.6 Influence of Welds on Local Buckling............ .
14.10 Combined Stresses .................................... .
14.10.1 Shear with Tension or Compression..... . . . . . . . . ..
14.10.2 Transverse and Longitudinal Forces on Fillet Welds
14.10.3 Axial Compression and Bending Forces....... . . . ..
14.10.4 Axial Tension and Bending Forces..... . . . . . . . . . ..
14.10.5 Compressive and Shear Stresses in Webs. . . . . . . . . .
14.10.6 Eccentrically Loaded Columns .................. ,
14.11 Repeated Stress Fluctuation... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
14.9
15. Plate
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
5
25
25
25
26
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
Girders. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Proportioning................................... , ....
Flange Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Compressive Web Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Intermediate Stiffeners............................ ' . . ..
Bearing Stiffeners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Splices.... ..........................................
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
16. Composite Concrete and Aluminum Beams ........... ' ..... " .
16.1 General .......................... , ................ ,..
16.2 Cleaning and Painting .............................. ' . ..
16.3 Ini rial Stress ........................................ "
16.4 IMethod of Calculation .... , ................. , . . . . . . . . ..
30
30
30
30
31
17. Lacing Systems and Battens ................ , ............... "

17.1 Compression Members ......................... , . . . . . ..
17.2 Shear in Compression Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ..
17.3 Lacing Bars ......................................... "
17.4 Tie Plates............................... ' . . . . . . . . . . ..
31
31
31
31
32
Battens for Compression Members .... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

17.6 Battens for Tension 11embers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...
32
32
18. Use of Fasteners.......................................... "
33
17.5
18.1
General...................... .......................
18.1.1 Primary Joints ....... , ............... , . . . . . . . ..
18.1.2 Use of Semi-Finished Bolts. . . . . . . . . . .. . .......
18.1.3 Other Fasteners... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
18.1.4 Field Welding .......................... '. . . . . . ..
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-469-
33
33
33
33
33
eSA STANDARD S157
18.2
Rivets and Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

18.2.1 Diameter......................................
18.2.2 Effective Bearing Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
18.2.3 Long Grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
18.2.4 Edge Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
18.2.5 Checking of Nuts. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Spacing of Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
18.3.1 Minimum Spacing of Rivets and Bolts.. . . . . . . . . ..
18.3.2 Maximum Fastener Spacing in Compression
J.\tl embers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
18.3.3 Close Pitch in Compression :Members. . . . . . . . . . . ..
18.3.4 Stitch Fasteners for Two-Angle Members. . . . . . . . ..
33
34
34
19. Connections... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
19.1 Eccentric Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
19.2 Symmetry............................................
19.3 Sharing of Load ..................................... "
19.4 Placement of Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
19.5 Rivets or Bolts Through Fillers ........................ "
19.6 Milled Joints in Compression Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
20. Tests... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20.1 General..............................................
20.2 Prototype Structural Units ........................... "
20.3 Part of an Existing Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
35
35
35
35
21. Column Bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

21.1 Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
21.2 Finishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
21.3 Painting.............................................
36
36
36
36
22. Anchor Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
36
23. Fabrication....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
23.1 Handling.............................................
23.2 Storage...............................................
23.3 Layout... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
23.4 Straightening.........................................
23.5 Cutting..............................................
23.6 Finishing.............................................
23.7 Holes for Rivets and Semi-Finished Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
23.8 Holes for Finished Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
23.9 Assembly.............................................
23.10 Riveting ............................................ "
23.11 Welding of Aluminum. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
18.3
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-470-
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
p
23.12
23.13
23.14
23.15
Welding Qualification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Tolerances..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Heating.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..............
Erection Marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
39
39
39
39
24. Joint
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
Sealing and Painting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

Need for Joint Sealing........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Application of Joint Sealers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Need for Painting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Application of Paints. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24.4.1 Conditions for Painting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24.4.2 Pre-paint Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
24.4.3 Painting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
39
39
40
40
41
41
41
41
25. Erection and Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

25.1 Bracing..............................................
25.2 Adequacy of Temporary Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
25.3 Erection Loads. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
25.4 Alignment............................................
25.5 Field Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
25.6 Protection of Aluminum.. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .................
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
26. Inspection.............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
26.1 General......................... ....................
26.2 Co-operation .. " .....................................
26.3 Defects...............................................
26.4 Identification of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
41
41
41
42
42
Appendix A -
Equivalent Aluminum Alloys... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
43
Appendix B
Repeated Stress Fluctuation... . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
44
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
~4
~4
~4
l4
~4
;4
~5
:5
5
5
6
5
5
GSA
~'TANDARD
8157
COMMITTEE ON STRUCTURAL USE OF

ALUMINUM IN BUILDINGS
J. STONEHEWER (Chairman) .. . Aluminum Company of Canada, Limited, Montreal
M. FAST .................... Locweld and Forge Products (1961) Limited, Montreal
P. J. FOLBERTH .............. H. G. Acres & Company Limited, Niagara Falls, Ontario
L. G. JAEGER ................ McGill University, Montreal

D. J. L. KENNEDY ............ University of Toronto, Toronto
C. MARSH ................... Consulting Engineer, Montreal
M. R. MAYNARD ............. Dominion Aluminum Fabricating Limited, Toronto
A. MUIR .................... Reynolds Extrusion Company Limited, Oshawa
W. R. PETRI. ................ Consultant, Preston
C. J. PIMENOFF .............. Dominion Bridge Company, Limited, Montreal
J. G. SUTHERLAND ........... A1can Research and Development Limited, Kingston
D. T. WRIGHT ............... Committee on University Affairs, Toronto
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-472-
F
PREFACE
This second edition of CSA Standard S157, supersedes the previous edition issued
in 1962.
Since the issue of CSA S157-1962, The Structural Use of Aluminum in Buildings,
continuing research and testing coupled with changes in structural practice has led to the
need for some modification in the recommendations made in this Standard.
To extend the applicability of the Standard to all alloys suitable for use in buildings,
allowable stresses are given in terms of the mechanical properties, and are then evaluated
for the more popular alloys.
Other changes include those relating to combined loads, testing, deflections, welded
members, and eccentric struts and ties.
The arrangement follows as closely as is practical that of CSA SI6-1965, Steel Structures for Buildings, to facilitate its use by those familiar with the earlier Standard.
This Standard was prepared by the Committee on Structural Use of Aluminum in
Buildings under the jurisdiction of the Sectional Committee on Structures and was formally
approved by these committees and the CSA Standards Review Board.
REXDALE, NOVEMBER, 1969
NOTE: In order to keep abreast of progress in the industries concerned, CSA Publications are
subject to periodic review. Suggestions for improvement will be welcomed at all times.
They will be recorded and in due course brought to the attention of the appropriate
committee for consideration.
Also, requests for interpretation will be accepted by the Committee. They should be
worded in such a manner as to permit a simple "yes" or "no" answer based on the
literal text of the requirement concerned.
All enquiries regarding this Standard should be addressed to Canadian Standards
Association, 178 Rexdale Boulevard, Rexda,le 603, Ontario.
This Standard makes reference to the following publications, and the dates shown
indicate the latest issue available at the time of printing:
CSA Standards A23.1-1967,
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction;
A23.3-1966,
Code for the Design of Plain or Reinforced Concrete
Structures;
B33.1-1961,
Square and Hexagon Bolts and Nuts, Studs and Wrench
Openings;
B95-1962,
Surface Texture (Roughness, Waviness, and Lay);
GI64-1965,
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles;
H.1 Series-1958, Alloy and Temper Designations of Non-Ferrous Metals
and Alloys;
HA Series-1968, Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys;
S190--1968,
Design of Light Gauge Aluminum Products;
S244-1969,
Welded Aluminum, Design and Workmanship (Inert Gas
Shielded Arc Processes);
W47.2-1967,
Aluminum Welding Qualification Code;
CGSB* Specifications 1-GP-69c-1964, Aluminum Paint;
I-GP-I08b-1961, Paint: Acid and Alkali Resistant, Black;
1-GP-132b-1968, Primer: Zinc Chromate, Low Moisture Sensitivity;
ASTM t Standard A307-67, Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
*Canadian Government Specifications Board.
tAmerican Society for Testing and Materials.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-474-
f"
11
S157-1969
THE STRUCTURAL USE OF ALUMINUM
IN BUILDINGS
1. SCOPE
1.1 Application
1.1.1 This Standard applies to the design, fabrication, and erection of
the structural aluminum, composed of sheet, plate, and extrusion, used in
buildings. It covers those items which are proportioned principally as a
function of the loads they must sustain.
1.1.2 It is not intended to apply to cranes, radio and television towers,

piping, light gauge products, nor bridges or transmission towers.
1.1.3 Where reference is made to another publication such reference
shall be considered to refer to the latest edition approved by the organization
issuing that publication.
1.2 Alurnin urn Alloys
1.2.1 The requirements are written in general terms in order to be
applicable to all tempers of all alloys listed in Table 1. Design co-efficients
have been evaluated for SGllR-T6 and GS10-T6 extrusions; GS11N-T6,
GM41-H12A (up to 1.5 inch thickness) and GM41-H32A sheet and plate;
and GS11N-T6, SG11R-T6, and GS10-T6 drawn tube.
1.2.2 SG11R-T6 and GS11N-T6 are medium strength alloys used in

general structures, employed where load bearing characteristics predominate.
1.2.3 GS10-T6 is a lower strength alloy with superior surface finish
employed where the architectural requirements are of primary importance.
1.2.4 GM41-H12A and GM41-H32A are two tempers of a medium
strength sheet and plate alloy used for welded structures where maximum
welded mechanical properties are required.
1.2.5 Mechanical properties, in kips per square inch, assumed for
design purposes for the alloys and products listed in Clause 1.2.1 are given
in Table 2. Guaranteed minimum values are given for tensile ultimate and
tensile yield for non-welded material and minimum expected values are
given for compressive yield for non-welded material and for all values for
welded material.
TABLE 1
ALUMINUM ALLOYS AND PRODUCTS COVERED BY THIS STANDARD
Sheet and Plate
Bar, Rod, Wire and

Extruded Shapes
Drawn Tube
HA.7.GS10
HAA.MC10
HA.S.GS10
HAA.GM31
HA.S.GSllN
HA.7.GSllN
HAA.GM41
HA.S.SGllR
HA.7.SGllR
H-\A.GR20
HAA.GSllN
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-475-
12
eSA STANDARD S157
TABLE 2
Mechanical Properties for Aluminum Alloys and Products
Commonly Used in Buildings
Not-Welded
Alloy and Product
Tensile
Ultimate
Tensile
Yield
Welded
I've
Tensile
Ultimate
TensUe
Yield
/ Compresslve
Yield
GM41-H12A
Plate up to
1.5 Inches Thick
44
31
26
38
18
18
GS10-T6
Extrusions and
Drawn Tube
30
25
25
17
11
11
GSllN-T6
Sheet, Plate and
Drawn Tube
42
35
35
24
16
16
SGllR-T6
Extrusions
42
37
37
24
16
16
GM41-H32A
Sheet and Plate
Ultimate Shear Stresses for Fillet Welds

(Based on Throat Area)
Welding Wire
Transverse
Longitudinal
GM50P
24
18
S5
20
15
2. DEFINITIONS, UNITS, AND NOMENCLATURE

2.1 Definitions. The following definitions apply in this Standard:
Approved means approved by authority having jurisdiction or by the
purchaser's representative, as applicable;
Authority having jurisdiction means the responsible official with
legal responsibility for controlling building construction;
Purchaser's representative means the individual designated by the
purchaser to provide designs and drawings or to act on his behalf for prod ucts
covered by this Standard. When required by law or requested by the purchaser, he shall be professionally qualified.
2.2 Units. The units employed throughout this Standard are inches and
kips.
One kip = 1,000 pounds and kips per square inch is abbreviated ksi.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-476-
p
THE STRUarURAL USE OF ALUMINUM IN BUILDINGS
13
2.3 Nomenclature. The following nomenclature has been used in this
ess-
Standard. Symbols have also been defined where they are used:
A
= area of cross-section
Ae
= effective cross-sectional area in tension
Ace
= area of compression flange
An
net area of cross-section
Aw
area of cross-section within 1 inch of weld
Be, Bp
intersection of straight line strut formula with ordinate, for
columns and plates respectively
Ce , C p = value of A at intersection of straight line strut formula with
elastic buckling curve, for columns and plates respectively
D
= diameter
Dc, Dp = slope of straight line strut formula, for columns and plates
respectively
E
elastic modulus
F
allowable stress
Fa
= allowable axial stress in compression
Fb
= allowable bending stress
Fe
= half elastic buckling stress
Fp
= allowable bearing stress
Fu
ultimate strength
Fv
allowable shear stress
Fw
allowable stress at a weld
F wt
allowable transverse shear stress in a fillet weld
F wI
= allowable longitudinal shear stress in a fillet weld
F wu
= ultimate strength at a weld
F wy
= yield strength at a weld
F wv
= allowable shear stress at a weld
Fy
= yield strength
I
= moment of inertia
Iw
moment of inertia of area within one inch of any weld, about
neutral axis of section
Iy
moment of inertia about Y axis
]
= torsion constant
K
= end fixity factor
L
= length
= length in bearing of webs
N
R
= radius of curvature
Sx
section modulus about X axis
Sn
section modulus of net section
a
length of a panel
b
= bread th of flat element;
distance between fasteners
d
= web depth
e
= eccentricity;
end edge distance
f
minimum axial tension stress in service
fa
applied axial stress
fb
applied bending stress
g
= transverse gauge of fasteners
k
= factor representing end effect in bearing of webs;
ratio of filler thickness to bolt diameter
In
= factor to give slenderness ratio for local buckling;
number of lines of bolts
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-477-
14
CAS STANDARD S157
= number of rows of bolts
radius of gyration
radius of gyration of compression flange
rv
rf
s
= minimum radius of gyration

= longitudinal pitch of fasteners;
developed wid th of section

thickness
h
f t
first moment of area
= s ape ac or = section modulus
= slenderness ratio
= slenderness ratio for flexural buckling
= slenderness ratio for torsional buckling
=
3. PLANS
3.1 Design Drawings
3.1.1 Design drawings shall show the complete design of the structure
with sizes, sections, and the relative locations of members. Plans shall be
drawn to a scale large enough to convey the information adequately.
3.1.2 Plans shall include data for the design loads, and the shears,
moments and axial forces to be resisted by all members and their connections,
as may be required for the proper preparation of the shop drawings.
3.1.3 The design drawings shall carry the name and, where applicable,
the professional seal of the purchaser's representative.
3.2 Erection Diagrams
3.2.1 Erection diagrams shall show the sizes and locations of all members and give complete locations and details for all attachments and
anchorages.
3.2.2 These diagrams shall show clearly the extent of all riveted,
bolted, or welded connections with welding symbols and all other details
necessary for erection.
3.3 Shop Drawings. Shop drawings, giving complete information necessary
for the fabrication of the component parts of the structure, including the
location, type and size, of all riveted, bolted, and welded connections, shall
be prepared in advance of the fabrication. They shall clearly distinguish
between shop and field rivets, bolts, and welds.
4. METHODS OF DESIGN
4.1 Elastic Analysis. This Standard is based on the determination of
stresses using elastic analysis, and safety is assured by limiting the levels
of these stresses.
4.2 Plastic and Ultimate Load Analysis. Where an application lends

itself to the use of plastic theory or other form of ultimate load analysis,
such a method may be used if the margins of safety are demonstrably at
least equal to those implied in the Standard and subject to the approval of
the authority having jurisdiction or the purchaser's representative, as
applicable.
4.3 Testing. The adequacy of a structure may be established by direct load

tests in lieu of approved design calculations (see Clause 20).
p
15
4.4 Other Methods. Where, because of greater sophistication or later

developments in design techniques, some modification to the design method
is desired, it shall be shown to the satisfaction of the authority having
jurisdiction, or the purchaser's representative, as applicable, that the margin
of safety and standard of performance is not less than that provided for in
this Standard.
5. LOADS AND FORCES

5.1 General. Structural work in buildings shall be designed to sustain the
loads and forces stated herein.
5.2 Dead Loads. The dead loads to be used in design shall consist of the
weight of the structure and all permanent stationary construction which
is to be supported thereby.
5.3 Live and Other Loads. The live loads are those due to use, traffic,
cranes, impact, snow, and rain, or any combination of these forces which can
act simultaneously_ Other loads are due to wind, seismic, or thermal effects.
All loads shall be those stipulated by the National Building Code of Canada,
or by the Building By-Laws under which the structure is being designed, or
those determined by the authority having jurisdiction.
5.4 Incidental Loads. In all members which may be subject to man loads,
provision shall be made for a vertical load of 300 pounds applied at any point.
5.5 Temporary Loads. Provision shall be made for stresses caused by

temporary dead, live, and wind loads imposed on the structure during
erection.
5.6 Thermal Effects. Provision shall be made for thermal expansion and
contraction, or for the forces created where such thermal movements are
restrained, commensurate with the service conditions of the structure.
6. DEFLECTIONS
6.1 General. Deflection shall be limited by the function of the member, to
ensure satisfactory performance. Special consideration shall be given to
structural elements supporting machinery or other sources of shock and
vibration.
6.2 Limiting Deflections in General Building Structures
6.2.1 The deflection, under live load of beams, girders, or trusses, and
supporting floors, shall not exceed 1/200 of the span.
6.2.2 The deflection, under live load or wind, of beams, girders, or

trusses, which frame walls or roofs, shall not exceed 1/180 of the span.
6.2.3 Where deflection is limited by the possibility of cracking finishing
materials, that due to live load shall not exceed 1/360 of the span.
7. CAMBER
7.1 Cambering of trusses, beams, or girders, where required, shall be called
for on the design plans. Trusses and built-up girders with spans of 50 feet
or more shall be cambered for the deflection due to the dead load plus half
the live load.
16
CSA STANDARD S151
8. MATERIALS
8.1 Identification. Acceptability of aluminum alloy material shall be
judged on the basis of evidence of conformance to the relevant CSA Standard
of the HA Series, Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys. Temper designations
are those given in the CSA H.1 Series, Codes for Alloy and Temper Designations of the Non-Ferrous Metals and Alloys.
8.2 Alloys
8.2.1 If the alloys given in Clause 1.2.1 :ire to be employed, they shall be
supplied to one of the specifications in Clauses 8.2.2, 8.2.3, and 8.204.
8.2.2 Bar, rod, wire, and extruded shapes shall conform to CSA Standards, HA.5.SG11R-T6, or HA.5.GS10-T6.
8.2.3 Sheet or plate shall conform to CSA Standards HAo4.GSllN-T6,
HA.4.GM41-H12A, or HAA.GM41-H32A. HAo4.GM41-H12A plate shall
not be greater than 1.500 inches in thickness.
8.2.4 Drawn tubes shall conform to CSA Standards HA.7.GS11N-T6,
HA.7.SG11R-T6, or HA.7.GS10-T6.
8.2.5 Rivets and bolts shall conform to CSA Standard HA.6.GS11N-T6,
or other suitable alloy agreed to by the purchaser's representative.
8.2.6 Aluminum welding wire shall conform to CSA Standards HA.6.S5
or HA.6.GM50P.
8.3 Physical Properties. The following typical physical properties may be
used for all aluminum alloys covered by this Standard:
Unit weight
0.098 pound/cubic inch
0.000013rF
Co-efficient of linear thermal expansion
10,000 ksi
Shear modulus of elasticity
3,800 ksi
8.4 Steel Bolts

8.4.1 Finished and semi-finished bolts shall conform to CSA Standard
B33.1, Square and Hexagon Bolts and Nuts, Studs, and Wrench Openings,
for dimensions, and to ASTM Standard A307, Low-Carbon Steel Externally
and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
8.4.2 All steel bolts shall be protected by galvanizing or an acceptable
equivalent. Where used, galvanizing shall conform to the requirements of
the CSA Standard G 164, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
8.5 Other Materials. Where other materials are used in conjunction with
aluminum, they shall be proportioned in accordance wi th the relevant CSA
Standard, except as modified by this Standard.
9. MATERIAL THICKNESS
9.1 Minimum Thickness. No limit is set on the minimum thickness of
material, as structural elements will seldom be economical in very light
gauge sheet.
NOTE:
Where the function demands thin material, CSA Standard S190, Design of Light
Gauge Aluminum Products, should be used.
9.2 Width-Thickness Ratios

9.2.1 If a beam section is designed to the stresses in Clause 14.6.1, it is
anticipated that it can carry the fully plastic moment without local buckling.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-480-
17
This requires that the width-thickness ratio be not greater than:that given
below:
be
rd
b ~ 6
t "
Outstanding flanges
Ins
.a-
be
Plate elements supported at each edge
b ~ 16
Webs
E. ~
60
Tubes
.!3- ~
20
Cover plates
E. ~
16
t "
t "
d'6,
t '-;;:
t "
where t = thickness (inches)

b = width or longitudinal distance between fasteners (inches)
R = radius (inches)
all
'6,
I
'6,
9.2.2 For higher width-thickness ratios than those given in Clause 9.2.1,
the allowable stress shall be reduced according to Clause 14.9.
S5
10. GROSS AND NET SECTIONS
Je
10.1 General. The concept of gross and net sections applies to riveted and
bolted construction. The effect of welded construction is treated in
Clause 14.
:h
'd
s,
!y
Ie
)f
s.
h
t\
,f
t
10.2 Definitions. The gross section of a member at any point shall be

determined by summing the products of the thickness and the gross width
of each element as measured normal to the axis of the member. The net
section shall be determined in accordance with Clause 10.4.
10.3 Application. Unless otherwise specified, tension members shall be
designed on the basis of net section. Compression members shall be designed
on the basis of gross section. Beams and plate girders shall be designed in
accordance with Clauses 15.1.2 and 15.1.3.
10.4 Net Width. In the case of a chain of holes extending across a part in
any diagonal or zigzag line, the net wid th of the part shall be obtained by
deducting from the gross width the sum of the diameters of all the holes in
the chain, and adding, for each gauge space in the chain, the quantity:
where s
4g
longitudinal spacing (pitch) of any two successive holes
(inches)
transverse spacing (gauge) of the same two holes (inches)
The least net width so obtained shall be used in calculating the net section.
10.5 Size of Holes. In computing net section, the diameter of a hole shall
be taken as the actual hole diameter for drilled or reamed holes. In the case
of punched holes the diameter shall be assumed to be !{6 inch greater than
the actual diameter.
18
eSA STANDARD S151
11. EC CENTRI CALL Y LOADED TENSION MEMBERS

11.1 Riveted or Bolted Members. The load in a tension member with
eccen tric end connections shall not exceed:
Ae F
where F
allowable tension stress from Clause 14.4 (ksi)
Ae
effective area, given below (inches2)
Effective Area, Ae
General shapes
An/(l+ Ane)
Sn v
Single angles*
A n -2bt/3
Double angles * :
Connected to one side of the gusset
An - bt
Connected to each side of the gusset
An - bt/2
Channels fixed by the web
An - bt
where An = total net area of the member (see Clause 10.4) (inches2 )
b = width of outstanding leges) (inches)
t = leg thickness, in the case of double angles, the thickness
of one angle (inches)
e = eccen trici ty (inches)
.
shape factor of net sectIOn =
f
d I
sec IOn mo u us
This may be taken as 1.2 if no exact calculation is made.
Sn = section modulus of net section (inches3)
... The gauge line, i.e. distance from heel to fastener, must not exceed half the leg width. If detailing
requires a greater eccentricity, a further reduction in area must be made.
11.2 Welded Members. The effective areas of members connected eccentrically by welds shall, in general, be computed as in Clause 11.1 except that
the allowable stress shall be calculated using Clause 14.4.3.
12. EFFECTIVE SPAN AND

COMPRESSION MEMBER LENGTHS
12.1 Span Length. The effective lengths for computing bending moments
in beams, girders, and trusses in general shall be taken as the actual distance,
centre-to-centre, of supporting members. In special cases, modifications in
the effective length, that are approved by the authority having jurisdiction,
may be adopted. The design of the supporting members shall, in any case,
provide for any moment arising from the manner of connection.
12.2 Compression Members. The effective lengths of compression members shall be based on recognized engineering principles. For trussed structures effective lengths shall be taken from Figure 1.
13. SLENDERNESS RATIOS

13.1 General. The slenderness ratio (X) of a compression member shall be
taken as the ratio of the effective length (KL), as determined by Clause 12.2,
to the corresponding radius of gyration (r). The slenderness ratio of tension
members shall be taken as the unbraced length (L) to the corresponding
radius of gyration.
13.2 Compression Members

13.2.1 For outdoor service, or other applications where wind, shock,
vibratory, or incidental lateral loads on the member can occur, the effective
slenderness ratio, X, of compression members shall not exceed 120.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-482-
F
19
Kx
Ky
K z (Single angles)
I bolt
2 bolts
AB
-3-
AB
AC
0.8
0.7
0.5
0.5
0.45
0.4
0.5
Member
th
~71
I-kL--j
k>05
I t 2k
A/"'L
~7
ec
!/
:Ar-'
T
L
-L
~>O<
Lye
AS
I
A
L-
For internol members

Axis y -y is porollel
to the plone of bracino
T
T
-L
AB
OA5
0.5
I
I AI'LV
cPr
A
~
e
AS
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.45
0.5
OA
0.45
~I
AS
0.35
I
-'-I
Clouse 14.10.6.2
CompresSion, T Tension, T" C
FIGURE 1
EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF STRUTS
13.2.2 For compression members not governed by Clause 13.2.1,

A shall not exceed 180.
13.3 Tension Members
13.3.1 For the service conditions covered in Clause 13.2.1 the
slender~
ness ratio of tension members shall not exceed 200.
13.3.2 For tension members not governed by Clause 13.3.1 the slender~
ness ratio shall not exceed:
250+20f
where f is the minimum axial stress (ksi) sustained by the member.
13.4 Torsional Vibration. Double angle members, being prone to torsional
vibration where subjected to wind forces, shall be proportioned such that:
bL < 1 200
t
'
where b = width of longer leg, measured from the root fillet (inches)
L
length of member (inches)
t = thickness of leg (inches)
13.5 Vibration of Tubes. Tubes subjected to wind forces shall have a

slenderness ratio less than 100, unless precautions are taken to inhibit wind
induced vibrations.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-483-
20
eSA STANDARD S157

14.1 General. The several parts of the structure shall be so proportioned
that the stresses will not exceed those given in Clauses 14.4 to 14.10 except
as otherwise provided in Clauses 4, 14.3, 14.11, and 20.
14.2 Selected Alloys. The expressions in Clauses 14.3 to 14.11 are in terms
of the specified mechanical properties. Table 3 gives the evaluated allowable
stresses for the alloys referred to in Clause 1.2.1.
14.3 Combinations Including Live, Wind, Seismic, Thermal, and/or
Erection Forces
14.3.1 The allowable stresses given in Section 14 shall be used to proportion structures to resist the loads or effects given in Section 5 and shall
apply to forces caused by dead load combined with anyone of the following
design loads: live load, wind, thermal effects, seismic forces.
14.3.2 For combinations of dead load with live load plus wind, or
seismic, or thermal effects, the allowable stresses in members and fasteners
may be increased by one third, provided that the section is not less than
that required by Clause 14.3.1.
14.3.3 For combinations of dead load with live load and thermal
effects, plus wind or seismic forces, the allowable stresses may be increased
by one half, provided that the section is not less than required by Clauses
14.3.1 or 14.3.2.
14.3.4 Stresses created during erection, which will not occur again in
the life of the building, may be as allowed by Clause 14.3.2.
14.4 Basic Allowable Stress in Tension and Compression (F)
14.4.1 Parent Metal
F
where F
Fy
0.6 F y or 0.5 F u whichever is the lesser.
= allowable stress (ksi)

= specified or expected
minim urn yield strength, in tension

or compression, as applicable (ksi)
F u = specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (ksi)
14.4.2 Metal Within One Inch of a Weld

Fw
where F w
Fwy
0.6 Fwy or 0.5 Fwu whichever ii the lesser.
= allowable stress (ksi)
= expected minimum yield strength at a butt weld using a
2 inch gauge length (ksi)

expected minimum ultimate tensile strength at a butt
weld (ksi)
The val ues used for F wyand F wu shall be those specified in CSA Standard
S244, Welded Aluminum, Design and Workmanship (Inert Gas Shielded
Arc Processes).
F wu
14.4.3 Partially Welded Cross-Sections. The mean stress in direct

tension or compression on any cross-section which contains a weld shall not
exceed the weighted average of the yield strength of the unaffected parent
metal and the metal within 1 inch of the centre of a we1d, as obtained from
the expression
F wp = F- AW(F_F
)
A
w
1
t
21
where F wp
allowable mean stress (ksi)
Aw = area of cross-section within 1 inch of a weld (inches 2)
A = gross area (inches 2)
F = allowable stress in the parent metal, from Clause 14.4.1
(ksi)
Fw
allowable stress at a weld from Clause 14.4.2 (ksi)
14.5 Axial Compression (Fa)

14.5.1 Parent Metal
14.5.1.1 Columns. Axial stress, on gross cross-sectional area:
A < Ce, Fa = Be - DeA but not greater than F
A > C el Fa = 5XI04/A2
where A = slenderness ratio = KL/r
KL = effective length (inches)
r
= radius of gyration (inches)
F = allowable stress from Clause 14.4.1 (ksi)
and where for fully heat treated alloys, i.e. those bearing one of the
temper designations T5 to T9:
Be = F + 1/3 (F/5)3/2
De = (Bc/80)3/2
C e = 0.41 Be/De
and for other alloys and tempers:
Be = F + 1/2 (F/5)3/2
De = (B r)70)3/2
Ce
0.67 Be/Dc
Be may be rounded off to the nearest 0.5 ksi.
14.5.1.2 Plates. Axial stress on gross cross-sectional area:
A < Cp, Fa = Bp - DpA but not greater than F
A > C PI Fa = 5XI04/A2
where A = slenderness ratio = mb/t
b
= plate width (inches)
t
= plate thickness (inches)
m = factor from Clause 14.9.3
and where for fully heat-treated alloys, i.e. those bearing one of the
temper designations T 5 to T9:
Bp
Dp
Cp
and for all
Bp
Dp
Cp
Be may be
+ 2/3 (F/5)3/2
(B p /BO)3j2
= 0.41 Bp/Dp
other alloys and tempers:
= F + (F/5)3j2
= (B/70)3/2
= 0.67 Bp/Dp
rounded off to the nearest 0.5 ksi.
= F
14.5.2 Columns Containing Welds

14.5.2.1 Where all welds in a simple or continuous column lie
closer to a support than one tenth of the unsupported column length, or
in the case of cantilever columns closer to the free end than one fifth of the
column length, Clauses 14.4.3 and 14.5.1.1 shall apply.
14.5.2.2 Where Clause 14.5.2.1 does not apply, the allowable
stress shall be obtained by using Fwp in place of F in Clause 14.5.1.1 for
22
CSA 8TANDARD 8157
alloys which are not fully heat-treated. F wp is the minimum value in the
central 80 per cent of the length of the member given by:
F wp = F -
It (F -
F w)
where F wp = allowable mean axial stress (ksi)

Iw = moment of inertia of areas within one inch of a weld,
about the neutral axis (inches4)
I
= total moment of inertia (inches4 )
F = allowable stress in parent metal, from Clause 14.4.1
(ksi)
F w = allowable stress at a weld, from Clause 14.4.2 (ksi)
The line B - DA for any value of F wp, can be obtained by the construction
in Figure 2.
14.6 Bending (Fb)

14.6.1 For tension or compression on the extreme fibre of sections
braced against lateral buckling, satisfying Clause 9.2.1 for compact sections:
in structural shapes bent about the strong axis
Fb = 1.1F
in round or rectangular tubes
F b = 1.2F
in plates, round or rectangular solids, and structural shapes bent
about the weak axis
F b = 1.3F
.25"
II-
iii
20
en
LU
a:
Ien
;J
15
~
!XI
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
SLENDERNESS RATIO,).
FIGURE 2
CURVES FOR DETERMINING ALLOWABLE AXIAL STRESS FOR WELDED
COLUMNS FOR VARYING VALUES OF BASIC MEAN STRESS F wp
Where F is the basic allowable stress in tension or compression from Clause

14.4.1.
p
the
eld,
.4.1
ion
)Us
ns:
~nt
23
14.6.2 The compressive stress at the extreme fibre of an unbraced

lor H beam shall not exceed the allowable value obtained from the expression in Clause 14.5.1.1 using an equivalent slenderness ratio
A
= (10Ld/A fo )1/2
where L = unbraced length of beam (inches)
d
= depth of beam (inches)
A fe = area of compression flange (inches2)
14.6.3 The maximum stresses in beams not satisfying Clause 9.2.1 for
compactness shall be governed by Clauses 14.4, 14.6.2, and 14.9.
14.6.4 In plate girders the compressive stress at the extreme fibre
shaH not exceed the value obtained from the expression in Clause 14.5.1.1
using an equivalent slenderness ratio given by:
L
rf(1
(Lt/bd)2)1/4
where L
unbraced length of beam (inches)
rf = radius of gyration of compression flange,
including 1/6th of the web (inches)
= flange thickness (inches)
t
= flange breadth (inches)
b
= beam depth (inches)
d
14.6.5 For rectangular sections, tees with the stem in compression,

and narrow hollow beams, unbraced laterally, the compressive stress shall
be limited to that given by the expression in Clause 14.5.1.1 using a slenderness ratio:
)1/2
where Sx
5SxL
( (I y J)1/2
= section modulus of compression flange in plane of bending (inches3)
= moment of inertia normal to plane of bending (inches4)
= torsion constant (inches4 )
= unbraced length of beam (inches)
14.6.6 Beams Containing Welds. The bending stress at any crosssection containing a weld shall not exceed F wp as obtained in Clause 14.5.2.2,
augmented by the appropriate factor in Clause 14.6.1.
Where lateral buckling may occur, the slenderness ratios obtained from
Clauses 14.6.2,14.6.4, and 14.6.5 shall be used in conjunction with a buckling
formula obtained from Clause 14.5.2.2.
14.7 Shear (F v)
14.7.1 Shear stress in plates and shear stress due to torsion in tubes:
Parent metal: Fv = 0.4 F y or 0.3 F u whichever is the lesser.
Within 1 inch of a weld: F wv = O.4F wy or 0.3 F wu whichever is the lesser.
14.7.2 Rivets and bolts, across the shank or threaded area, as applicable:
Fv = 0.25 Fu
14.7.3 Shear stress in bars due to torsion:

Parent metal: F v
0.5 F y or 0.4 F u whichever is the lesser.
Within 1 inch of a weld: F wv = 0.5 F wy or 0.4 F wu whichever is the lesser.
24
eSA STANDARD S157
14.7.4 Unstiffened webs:

d/t < C p, F v
0.6 (Bp - Dp
d
t)
but not greater than the stress
allowed by Clause 14.7.1.

d/t
>
C p, F v
3X10"
(d/t)2
where B p, D p, and Cp are from Clause 14.5.1.2.

d
= clear depth of web (inches)
t
= web thickness (inches)
14.7.5 Stiffened webs:

Fv =
5X10"
(a/t)2 (1
+ 0.75 (ajb)2) but not greater than the stress
allowed by Clause 14.7.1.

where a and b = width and length of panel, (a<b), (inches)
14.7.6 The influence of welds can be discounted except in so far as

Clause 14.7.1 must be applied.
14.8 Bearing
14.8.1 Bolts, Rivets, and Pins (F p)
0.8 Fu
If the edge towards which the stress is directed is less than twice the fastener
diameter, D, the allowable stress shall be reduced in the ratio:
edge distance
2D
14.8.2 Where the gauge of holes in an end connection is less than 3D

the"l"'total capacity shall be checked for tear-out of the complete group,
using the expression:
P = [0.6 {e + (n-1)s - (2n-1)D/3} + 0.5 (m-1)(g-D)) F pt
where p
= total capacity of bolt or rivet groups, (kips)
= edge distance in direction of stress, (inches)
e
D = hole diameter, (inches)
s
= pitch of holes (measured in direction of load) (inches)
= gauge of holes (measured normal to direction of load)
g
(inches)
n = number of rows of holes (counted in direction of load)
m = number of lines of holes (counted normal to direction of
load)
F p = bearing stress from Clause 14.8.1.1 (ksi)
14.8.3 Accurately fitted parts in direct bearing
F
F = basic allowable stress from Clause 14.4.1.
Where a structural member bears directly onto a fully supported plate,
the stress on the plate may be increased to 0.8 F y, where F y is the yield
strength of the plate material.
14.8.4 Concentrated Loads or Reactions in the Plane of a Web.

The stress calculated by dividing the load, or reaction, by an area of web
given by:
teN
+ kd)
2
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-488-
p
25
THE STRUCTURAL USE OF ALUMINUM IN BUILDINC.S
shall not exceed:

ress
5 X 10'
(2 d/t)2
nor shall the stress obtained by dividing the load or reaction, by an area
of web given by:
t(N
kR)
exceed F from Clause 14.4.1 or 14.4.2.
where N = length of bearing (inches)
d
= clear web depth (inches)
t
= web thickness (inches)
R
radius of root fillet (inches)
k
= 1 where centre of bearing is less than (N
d)/2 from
the end of the member
= 2 when centre of bearing is greater than (N + d)/2 from
the end.
~ess
as
ler
;D
p,
14.9 Local and Torsional Buckling

14.9.1 Single and Double Angles, Tees, Cruciforms. The axial
compressive stress shall not exceed that given by Clause 14.5.1.1 using a
slenderness ratio:
).
= 5 bIt
where b
= length of longest leg measured from the edge of the root
fillet (inches)
t
= leg thickness (inches)
14.9.2 Open Shapes with Two Longitudinal Edges. The axial

compressive stress in channels, hats, lipped angles and other shapes formed
from a single strip, shall not exceed that given by Clause 14.5.1.1 for a
slenderness ratio:
).
= 2.5 sIt
where s
= the developed width of the section (inches)
t
= mean section thickness = A/s (inches)
A = area of cross-section (inches)
l)
l)
)f
26
eSA STANDARD S157
I
I
TABLE 3
ALLOWABLE STRESSES IN SELECTED ALLOYS
SGllR-T6
(Extrusions)
GSllN-T6
(Sheet and
Plate)
GM41-HllA*
GM41-H31A
(Sheet and
Plate)
GSlO-T6
(Extrusions)
Tension, F:
21
13
19
Compression, F:
21
13
16
24
0.165
60
14
0.075
79
18
0.13
91
26.5
0.19
57
15
0.08
77
20
0.15
87
Bending, Fb:
Structural Shapes
Tubes
Bars and Plates
23
25
27
14
15.5
17
Shear, Fv:
Plates in Shear and
Tubes in Torsion
Bars in Torsion
Rivets and Bolts
12
15
10
8
10
11
14
10
Bearing, Fp:
Bolts, Rivets and Pins
Direct Bearing
34
21
22
13
35
16
Welded Connections:
Butt "Velds:
Tension and Compression,
Fw
Shear, Fwv
10
6
Columns Bo
Do
Co
Plates
Bp
Dp
Cp
Fillet Welds:
Filler Alloy
Transverse, F wt
Longitudinal, F wi
*For
GM50P
10
7
Tens.
21
23
25
6
3.5
Compo
17.5
19
21
11
6.5
S5
8
6
material up to 1.500 inches thick.
14.9.3 Flat Elements of Sections. The axial compressive stress on

flat plates shall not exceed that given by Clause 14.5.1.2 using a slenderness ratio:
A
= mb/t
where b
= width measured from fillets or fasteners, or longitudinal
distance between fasteners (inches)
plate thickness (inches)
t
1.5 when both longitudinal edges are supported, 4 when
m
one longitudinal edge is supported and the other longitudinal edge is free,
1.5 for cover plates buckling between fasteners.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-490-
F
27
14.9.4 Compressive Stress in Webs Due to Bending. The maximum

compressive stress in an unstiffened web shall not exceed:
12 X 104
but not greater than F
(d/t)2
where d
= clear web depth (inches)
t
web thickness (inches)
F = allowable stress from Clause 14.4 (ksi)
14.9.5 Tubes
14.9.5.1 The axial stress in a tube or other curved wall shall
not exceed that given by Clause 14.5.1.2 for a slenderness ratio:
A = 5.7 (R/t)lf2
where R = radius of curvature (inches)
t
thickness (inches)
14.9.5.2 For tubes in bending the allowable stress obtained
from Clause 14.9.5.1 may be multiplied by:
5).
for A < C p
where A is from Clause 14.9.5.1
and C p is from Clause 14.5.1.2.
14.9.6 Influence of Welds on Local Buckling. The influence of

longitudinal and transverse welds on local buckling may be disregarded,
except that for transverse butt welds in tubes the slenderness ratio from
Clause 14.9.5.1 shall be used in conjunction with the buckling formula in
Clause 14.5.1.2 for non-heat treated plates.
B p , D p , and C p shall be obtained using F w from Clause 14.4.2.
14.10 Combined Stresses
14.10.1 Shear with Tension or Compression. All stress-bearing
parts, rivets, and bolts, subject to shearing and direct stresses shall be
proportioned so that:
(fyfFy)2
(fdF)2 is not greater than one
where fy = applied shear stress (ksi)
f t = applied tension or compression stress (ksi)
Fy
allowable shear stress from Clauses 14.7.1, 14.7.2, and
14.7.3 (ksi)
F = allowable tension stress from Clause 14.4.1 (ksi)
14.10.2 Transverse and Longitudinal Forces on Fillet Welds.

Where a fillet weld carries a combination of transverse and longitudinal
forces, the weld shall be proportioned so that
(f ifF wi)2
(ft/F wt)2 is not greater than one
where f 1 = applied longitudinal stress (ksi)
ft
applied transverse stress (ksi)
F wi
allowable longitudinal stress from Table 3 (ksi)
F wt = allowable transverse stress from Table 3 (ksi)
14.10.3 Axial Compression and Bending Forces

14.10.3.1 Members, subjected to both axial and bending forces
shall be proportioned such that the following conditions are satisfied:
For failure by bending in the plane of the applied moment:
28
eSA STANDARD S1.57
+
where fa
fb
F
~ F
fb
(1 -i:) "
= applied axial stress (ksi)

= applied bending stress (ksi)
= allowable stress from Clause 14.4.1 or as reduced by
Clauses 14.9.3 to 14.9.5; or, in latticed columns, the

allowable stress in the cord as given by Clause 14.5.1.1
(ksi)
5 X 104 *
Fe - (KL/r)2
KL = effective length in the plane of the applied moment
(inches)
r
= radius of gyration in the plane of the applied mom en t
(inches)
For failure by buckling at right angles to the plane of the applied moment:
fb
~ 1
fa-) -..-:
Fb (1
Fe
where fa = applied axial stress (ksi)
fb = applied bending stress (ksi)
Fa = allowable ax~al stress for buckling as a column about the
weak axis from Clause 14.5.1.1 or 14.5.2.2 (ksi)
fa
Fa
* If advantage is taken
the value oJ F.
Fb
of Clause 14.3, the increase in allowable stress must also be applied to
= allowable bending stress for lateral buckling as a beam
from Clauses 14.6.2, 14.6.4, 14.6.5, or 14.6.6 (ksi)

Fe = as for Clause 14.10.3.1 (ksi)
14.10.3.2 For non-uniform moments, fb is computed using the bending
moment at the centre of the unrestrained length, or one-third of the maximum moment, whichever is the greater.
14.10.3.3 At no section shall the direct combination of stresses exceed
the allowable value in Clause 14.4, or as reduced by Clauses 14.9.3 to 14.9.5.
14.10.4 Axial Tension and Bending Forces. The maximum stress
due to tension and bending shall not exceed F from Clause 14.4. The
stabilizing effect of the tension force on beams prone to lateral buckling
shall be discounted, and Clause 14.6 shall be satisfied.
14.10.5 Compressive and Shear Stresses in Webs. In a web, the
combination of compressive stress, due to axial load or bending, and shear
stress shall be such that:
(i:r + (i:r ~
where fa = applied compressive stress (ksi)

fv = applied shear stress (ksi)
Fa = allowable compressive stress from Clause 14.9.4 (ksi)
Fv = allowable shear stress from Clause 14.7.4 or 14.7.5 (ksi)
14.10.6 Eccentrically Loaded Columns
14.10.6.1 In general, eccentrically loaded columns shall be
proportioned to satisfy Clause 14.10.3.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-492.-
p
29
14.10.6.2 Discontinuojl~ single angle struts bolted through one

flange only shall carry a mean axial stress not greater than that given by
Clause 14.5 for a slenderness ratio:
A = (At2
(KAf)2)1/2
where At = 5 bit
Al = KL/r v
b
= leg wid th measured from root fillet (inches)
= leg thickness (inches)
t
L = length of strut (inches)
rv = minimum radius of gyration (inches)
K = Given in Figure 1.
In no case shall the mean axial stress exceed 0.3 F y for single bolt connections or 0.4 F y for double bolt connections.
Jy
he
.1
at
rlt
t:
14.11 Repeated Stress Fluctuation. Members designed in accordance

with this Standard, and constructed so as to be free from severe re-entrant
corners and other unusual stress raisers, will safely withstand at least
100,000 repetitions of maximum live load if non-welded and at least 20,000
repetitions of maximum live load if welded, regardless of the ratio of minimum to maximum load. For repetitions of loads in excess of these values,
allowable stress shall be determined by analysis based on relevant research.
NOTES:
1. Whenever possible prototype testing under cyclic loading to different levels or preferably under variable loot! patterns expected to occur in service, should be conducted.
2. See Appendix B for additional information on repeated stress fluctuation.
15. PLATE GIRDERS

15.1 Proportioning
\5.1.1 Plate girders shall be proportioned by the moment of inertia
method, with the gross section used to determine the moment of inertia.
is
15.1.2 For riveted or bolted construction the stress on the net section
-of the tension flange shall be found by multiplying the stress on the gross
section by the ratio of the gross section of the tension flange to the net
section as given by Clause 10. In determining this ratio the tension flange
shall be considered to consist of the flange angles and cover plates plus
-one-sixth of the web.
15.1.3 For welded construction the stress in the flanges shall not
exceed the value of F wp given by Clause 14.5.2.2.
15.2 Flange Construction

15.2.1 Flange coverplates shall be connected at their ends with suf-
ficient fasteners or welds to develop fully the plate beyond the end of the
next outside coverplate. In outside coverplates there shall be sufficient
fasteners or welds to develop fully the plates in 1/3 of their length at each
end. In no case, however, shall the pitch exceed the values required by
Clauses 9.2.1 or 14.9.3 as applicable.
15.2.2 Fasteners or welds connecting the flanges to the webs of plate

girders shall be proportioned to carry the resultant of the longitudinal and
vertical shear on such fasteners.
15.3 Compressive Web Stresses. In plate girders with unstiffened webs
Clause 14.9.4 shall apply. In girders with stiffened webs, where d/t exceeds
100, sixteen times the web thickness instead of 1/6th of the web depth shall
30
CSA STANDARD S157
be used when computing the sectiorr modulus of the cross-section, but the
full web shall be included in the moment of inertia when calculating
deflection.
15.4 Intermediate Stiffeners

15.4.1 Where the web is to be considered as stiffened, the distance
between vertical stiffeners shall not exceed 1.5 times the web depth.
15.4.2 Stiffeners applied to plate girder webs to resist shear buckling
shall be sufficiently strong to carry the maximum shear force at the stiffener,
the stiffener being treated as a column of length equal to the web depth,
buckling normal to the web.
15.4.3 For a stiffener composed of members of equal size on both

sides of the web, the moment of inertia shall be taken about the cen tre-line
of the web. For a stiffener composed of a member on one side only, the
moment of inertia shall be taken about the face of the web in contact with
the stiffener. A strip of web of width equal to 25 times the web thickness
may be included with intermediate stiffeners, or 12 times the web thickness
with end stiffeners.
15.4.4 The connection of intermediate stiffeners to the web shall
be sufficient to carry at least 1/3 of the maximum shear force at the stiffener. Not less than four fasteners shall be used.
15.5 Bearing Stiffeners. When required (refer to Clause 14.8.3), bearing
stiffeners shall be placed in pairs at end bearings of plate girders and at
points of concentrated loads. The connection to the web shall be adequate
to transmit the load. Such stiffeners shall have a close bearing against the
loaded flanges. Only that part of the stiffener cross-section which lies
outside the fillet of the flange angle shall be considered effective in bearing.
The stiffener, acting as a column of effective length equal to the web depth,
buckling normal to the web, shall have a moment of inertia not less than
that required to carry the load applied at the stiffener, or the maximum
shear force immediately adjacent to the stiffener, whichever is the greater.
When computing the strength of a bearing stiffener, Clause 15.4.3 shall
apply.
15.6 Splices. Web splices in plate girders and in beams shall be proportioned to develop the full applied shear and moment in the web at the
point of splice. Flange splices shall'develop the strength required to resist
the total bending moment developed in the beam or girder at the centreline of the splice location.
16. COMPOSITE CONCRETE AND ALUMINUM BEAMS
16.1 General. Subject to the provisions of Clauses 16.2, 16.3, and 16.4,
allowances may be made for the strengthening effect of concrete encasing
the compression flange of an aluminum beam, or of a concrete slab bearing
on the compression flange of a beam, provided the concrete conforms tothe requirements of CSA Standard A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods.
of Concrete Construction, and does not contain calcium chloride admixtures.
16.2 Cleaning and Painting. The contact surfaces of the aluminum in

composite beams shall be cleaned and painted in accordance with Clause 24.
16.3 Initial Stress. If the concrete, or any other load, causes stresses
in the aluminum beam before the concrete has set, such load shall be assumed
31
to be supported by the aluminum only. Composite action may be assumed

only for that portion of the load carried by the beam after the concrete
has set.
:e
19
r,
1,
16.4 Method of Calculation

16.4.1 Allowance may be made for the strengthening effect of the
concrete by assuming that the aluminum and the concrete' act together
elastically, in which case the stresses in the aluminum shall not exceed those
permitted in Clause 14. The concrete shall be proportioned in accordance
with the requirements of CSA Standard A23.3, Code for the Design of
Plain or Reinforced Concrete Structures.
16.4.2 All horizontal shear forces between the concrete and aluminum
shall be transferred by the use of approved shear connectors.
is
;S
16.4.3 The design shall also take into account the stresses created
due to the difference in thermal expansion between aluminum and concrete, using established engineering principles and in accordance with
Clause 16.4.1.
11
'g
,t
e
e
s
,.
"
11
1
.1
e
t
,
r)0
r
)
)-
;.
;.
17. LACING SYSTEMS AND BATTENS

17.1 Compression Members. Built-up compression members with open
sides or with no continuous web shall have at least one shear-resisting
system consisting of lacing, batten plates, or a continuous perforated plate.
For any member carrying a calculated bending stress, batten plates shall
not be used, unless approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
17.2 Shear in Compression Members. Shear systems for compression
members, carrying axial stress only, shall be designed to resist a transverse
shear load equal to 272 per cent of the axial load in the member. This shear
shall be considered as distributed to all shear systems in parallel planes
in proportion to their rigidities. Shear systems in a compression member
carrying calculated bending stress shall be designed to resist a shear load
given by:
= Qa/(l -
~:)
where Q = design shear load (kips)

Qa = applied shear load (kips)
fa
applied axial stress (ksi)
Fe = as for Clause 14.10.3.1 (ksi)
17.3 Lacing Bars

17.3.1 Lacing bars shall have a maximum slenderness ratio of 150.
For double lacing, where the lacing bars are joined at their intersections,
the effective length of the brace shall be taken as 0.7 times the full length.
17.3.2 The maximum spacing of lacing bars shall be such that the
ratio L/r for that portion of single flange between consecutive connections
shall not be greater than 0.75 of that of the member as a whole, about its
weaker axis.
17.3.3 The inclination of lacing bars to the axis of the member shall
not be less than 45 degrees.
32
eSA STANDARD S157
17.4 Tie Plates

17.4.1 Tie plates shall be provided at the ends of lacing
Sy~tems,
and at each point where the system is interrupted. End tie plates shall have
a length not less than the perpendicular distance between the lines of
fasteners connecting them to the flanges. Tie plates shall have a thickness
not less than 1/50 of the distance between the connecting lines of fasteners.
17.4.2 Not less than two fasteners shall be used to attach the tie
plate to each flange.
17.5 Battens for Compression Members
17.5.1 When battens are used in a compression member, they shall be
provided at the ends of the member and at points where the member is
stayed in its length, and shall, as far as practicable, be spaced and proportioned uniformly throughout.
17.5.2 The spacing of battens shall be such that the slenderness ratio
of the individual members between battens is less than 0.75 of that of the
member as a whole about its weaker axis and the allowable stress for
buckling in the plane of the battens shall be given by Clause 14.5.1 using
a slenderness ratio:
KrL =
where L
r
a
rc
[(~)' + (~)'J f>
= overall effective length (inches)

radius of gyration of composite section (inches)
= length centre-to-centre of battens (inches)

radius of gyration of individual member (inches).
17.5.3 Battens may be plates or shapes and shall be fastened to the

main components such that the connection between a batten and one main
component can resist simultaneously:
a longitudinal shear force = Qd/na (kips)
a moment
= Qd/2n (inch kips)
where d
= the longitudinal distance centre-to-centre of battens
(inches)
a
minimum distance between centroids of groups of
fasteners measured across the member (inches)
Q
2~ per cent of total axial force in the member (kips)
n
= number of parallel planes of battens.
17.5.4 Battens shall be proportioned such that the length, measured
along the member is not less than the wid tho
17.5.5 The thickness shall not be less than the width/50 unless the
edges perpendicular to the axis of the member are lipped. In the latter case
the batten shall be shown to be capable of carrying the specified shear force.
17.5.6 Not less than two fasteners shall be used to attach the batten
plate and end plates to each flange.
17.6 Battens for Tension Members. When battens are used to secure
the parts of built-up tension members, they shall conform to the requirements specified for battens on compression members, except that their
lengths may be two-thirds of those specified. The maximum spacing centreto-centre shall be such that the slenderness ratio for the individual members
33
does not exceed 0.75 of that for the member as a whole about its more
slender axis.
:s
;.
18. USE OF FASTENERS

18.1 General
18.1.1 Primary Joints. Primary joints in the main structural mem-
bers shall be made with aluminum rivets, steel or aluminum finished bolts,
or welds, except as otherwise noted in this Standard. Steel bolts shall be
used when steel and aluminum are to be joined together.
18.1.2 Use of Semi-Finished Bolts. Semi-finished bolts may be used

in all field connections other than covered in Clause 18.1.1. Semi-finished
bolts may also be used in shop connections where approved.
18.1.3 Other Fasteners. Other fasteners may be used at the discretion of the authority having jurisdiction.
)
.,.
)
18.1.4 Field Welding. Field welding may be used subject to the

approval of the authority having jurisdiction.
18.2 Rivets and Bolts
18.2.1 Diameter. In proportioning and spacing rivets and bolts, the
nominal diameter of the fastener shall be used.
18.2.2 Effective Bearing Area. The effective bearing area of pins,

bolts, and rivets, shall be the diameter multiplied by the length in bearing,
except that for countersunk rivets half the depth of the countersink shall
be deducted.
18.2.3 Long Grips. Rivets which carry calculated stress and the grip
of which exceeds five diameters shall be designed for a safe stress reduced
by 10 per cent for each additional diameter in the rivet grip.
18.2.4 Edge Distance. The edge distance from the centre of a hole to
an edge shall be not less than 1.25 diameters except that for sheared edges,
where the load is directed toward the edge, the edge distance shall be not
less than 1.5 diameters. For edge distances less than 2 diameters, Clause
14.8.1.1 applies.
18.2.5 Checking of Nuts. For structures which may be subject to
vibration or where required by the purchasers representative, the nuts on
all bolts shall be prevented from becoming loose by burring the bolt thread
or by use of lock washers, lock nuts, cotter pins, or welds.
18.3 Spacing of Fasteners
18.3.1 Minimum Spacing of Rivets and Bolts. The distance
between centres of rivets and bolts shall be not less than 2.5 times the
nominal diameter of the fastener. For spacing less than 3 diameters, Clause
14.8.1.2 applies.
18.3.2 Maximum Fastener Spacing in Compression Members

18.3.2.1 If two or more plates or shapes are used in contact
making one structural member, they shall be joined together by fasteners
of adequate strength to make the parts act in unison.
18.3.2.2 When rivets or bolts are used, the pitch shall mean
the distance centre-to-centre on any gauge line. When welds are used,
the pitch shall mean the clear distance between welds.
34
eSA STANDARD S157
18.3.2.3 For fasteners that are not staggered, the maximum

pitch in the direction of stress shall be such that the calculated stress
does not exceed the allowable stress on the individual plate or shape,
treated as a column in accordance with Clause 14.9.3. When two or more
gauge lines are used, with fasteners staggered, the above pitch may be
increased by 50 per cent.
18.3.2.4 The maximum distance between gauge lines, measured
across the direction of stress, shall not exceed that permitted for longitudinal pitch as determined in Clause 14.9.3.
18.3.3 Close Pitch in Compression Members. The pitch of rivets
or bolts at the end of a built-up compression member shall not exceed
four diameters for a length equal to 1.5 times the maximum width of the
member. Close pitch shall also be used at intermediate points if required
to distribute the stresses received from a connecting member.
18.3.4 Stitch Fasteners for Two-Angle Members. In tension and
compression members composed of two angles, whether back to back or
spaced by fillers, the ratio L/r for each angle between stitch fasteners shall
not exceed 3/4 of that for the whole member about its more slender axis.
19. CONNECTIONS
19.1 Eccentric Connections. Members of a framework, meeting at a
joint, shall, if practicable, be arranged so that their neutral axes intersect
at a point. If this is not practicable, provision shall be made for the effect
of the resulting eccentricity.
19.2 Symmetry. Members in general shall be of symmetrical section. All
connections and splices shall be, as nearly as practicable, symmetrical
about the axis of the members connected thereby.
19.3 Sharing of Load. Welds, rivets, and bolts shall not be called upon
to share load.
19.4 Placement of Fasteners. Groups of fasteners, or welds, at the ends

of any member, which transmit stresses into that member, should have
their centres of gravity on the gravity axis of the member, otherwise provision shall be made for the effect of the resulting eccentricity.
19.5 Rivets or Bolts Through Fillers. In riveted or bolted construction,

when fasteners carrying computed stress pass through fillers, the fillers,
where possible, shall be extended beyond the connected member and the
extension secured by enough fasteners to distribute the total stress in the
members uniformly over the combined sections of the member and filler.
Alternatively, the capacity of the fasteners shall be limited to 1/(1 + 2k)
of the normal value where k = ratio of filler thickness to bolt diameter.
19.6 Milled Joints in Compression Members
19.6.1 Where compression members are in full-milled bearing on base
plates, there shall be sufficient fasteners to hold all parts securely in place.
19.6.2 Where compression members are spliced by full-milled bearing,
the splice material and its fasteners shall be arranged to hold all parts in
line and shall be proportioned for 50 per cent of the computed load.
19.6.3 All such joints in compression members shall be proportioned

to resist any tension that would be developed by specified wind or other
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-498-
f'
urn
"ess
pe,
ore
be
'ed
di~ts
ed
he
ed
ld
or
111
:t
:t
11
11
35
forces acting in conjunction with 75 per cent of the calculated dead load
stress and no gravity live load, if this condition will produce more tension
than will full dead load and live load applied.
20. TESTS
20.1 General. Tests are an acceptable alternative to calculation.
20.2 Prototype Structural Units
20.2.1 Structural test units shall be made from material produced
to the same specification, and fabricated in the same way and to the same
tolerances as proposed for the final structure. Samples of materials from the
lots used for expected critically stressed members shall be subjected to
tension tests in accordance with CSA Standard HA.1.3, or, alternatively,
material properties may be established from manufacturers' release notes
for the lots of materials involved.
20.2.2 During testing, a structural unit shall be supported in a manner

that is no more sustaining to the unit than will be the supports available
to it when it is in service, and the loading shall be applied in a fashion that
reasonably approximates the application of the loading during service.
20.2.3 The basic test load is equal to the design load, including dead
weight and impact allowances where required, except that where design
stresses are allowed to be increased by one-third under combinations of
loading, as in Clause 14.3, the basic test load may be taken as three-quarters
of the design load. The weight of the test unit can be included as part of
the test load.
20.2.4 Loads shall be applied and measurements made as follows to
verify the adequacy of the structural unit:
(a) Upon application of the basic test load, the deflections shall not
exceed the limits given in Clause 6. This test load shall then be
removed to establish a base (zero) for subsequent deflection
readings;
(b) The unit shall be re-Ioaded to 1.4 times the basic test load increased
in proportion to the amount by which the average actual yield
strength of the materials in critically stressed areas exceeds the
guaranteed value. During this loading there shall be no sign of
distress and after removal of the load, the recovery of deflection
shall be at least 90 per cent; and
(c) The uni t shall finally be loaded to 1. 75 times the basic test load
without failure.
20.2.5 One prototype structural unit may be used for a number of
different design load conditions, provided the first two loadings are done
successfully, one after the other for each condition in turn, before any of
the tests are done to 1. 75 times the basic test loads.
20.3 Part of an Existing Structure. Testing as follows shall be considered
an acceptable method for establishing the adequacy of an existing structure
for required working loads:
(a) Loads shall be applied, in addition to any existing dead loads on
the structure or part, so that the total load shall be equal to the
required working load, including impact allowances where required,
36
CAS STANDARD S157
or three-quarters of this total if combinations of loading, as in

Clause 14.3 are involved for which design stresses are allowed
to be increased by one-third. Under this loading change, the deflection changes shall not exceed the limits given in Clause 6;
(b) This live load shall then be removed to establish a base for subsequent deflection readings; and
(c) The structure or part shall be re-loaded to 1.5 times the total
dead plus live loading above and shall show no sign of distress
under this load. After removal of this load, the recovery of deflection shall be at least 90 per cent.
21. COLUMN BASES

21.1 Loads. Proper provisions shall be made to transfer the column loads
and moments if any, to the footings and foupdations.
21.2 Finishing. Aluminum bearing plates may be used without planing,

provided that a satisfactory contact bearing is obtained. The bottom
surfaces of bearing plates and column bases which rest on masonry foundations and are grouted to ensure full bearing need not be planed.
21.3 Painting. Surfaces of aluminum base plates which are in contact

with concrete shall be painted in accordance with Clause 24.
22. ANCHOR BOLTS

22.1 Anchor bolts shall normally be steel and be designed to provide resistance to all conditions of tension and shear at the bases of columns not
otherwise provided for, including the net tensile components of any bending
moments which may result from fixation or partial fixation of columns.
23. FABRICATION
23.1 Handling. Care shall be taken in handling to prevent scratching or
nicking of the aluminum. When required, pieces of wood or other soft
material shall be inserted between the aluminum and contacting objects
such as steel slings, metal working tables, and the like.
23.2 Storage. Structural aluminum may be stored outdoors. Architectural

aluminum, for which the surface finish is important, shall be uncrated
immediately and stored under cover in a manner to permit air circulation
between pieces.
NOTE:
Condensation may cause staining. When temperature and moisture conditions are suck
that condensation may occur, heated and ventilated storage should be provided, if suck
condensation stains would be objectionable.
23.3 Layout
23.3.1 Hole centres may be centre-punched and cut-off lines may be
punched or scribed. Centre-punching and scribing shall not be used where
such marks would remain on fabricated material.
23.3.2 As the linear co-efficient of expansion of aluminum, 0.000013

per degree F, is about twice that of steel, a temperature correction shall be
applied when necessary in the layout of critical dimensions.
23.4 Straightening. If straightening or flattening is necessary, it shall be
done by a process and in a manner that will not injure the material. Sharp
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-500-
f
:; in
37
lec-
kinks or bends shall be cause for rejection. If heating is used, Clause 23.14
shall apply.
ub-
23.5 Cutting
23.5.1 Material of all thicknesses may be sawn. Shearing shall not
wed
>tal
'ess
lec-
be used on material greater than Y2 inch in thickness. Gas tungsten arc

cutting may be used on all thicknesses. The influence of arc cutting on the
strength of the material can be neglected. Gas or flame cutting shall not
be used.
23.5.2 Re-entrant cuts shall be avoided wherever possible. If used

they shall be filleted by drilling prior to cutting.
23.6 Finishing
23.6.1 Finishing of sheared edges of plates or shapes will not be
ng,
)m
:la-
lct
,IS-
lot
ng
or
)ft
:ts
required, unless specifically called for on the drawings, for plate thickness
Y2 inch or less. Planing or finishing of sheared edges may be required on
thicker plate. Edges of material cut by gas tungsten arc need not be dressed
if the edges are to be welded; otherwise at least Ys inch shall be removed.
23.6.2 The edges of all plates which transmit loads directly by edge
bearing shall be planed or milled. Compression joints of built-up members
depending upon contact bearing shall have the bearing surfaces machined
to a common plane after the members are completed.
23.6.3 The surface finish of bearing surfaces which are to come into
contact with each other shall meet the finish requirements of CSA Standard
B95, Surface Texture (Roughness, Waviness and Lay),
23.6.4 Compression joints which depend upon contact bearing, when
assembled in the shop, shall bear evenly with respect to the centroid of the
contact area. At least 75 per cent of the entire contact area shall be in full
bearing and the separation of any remaining portion shall not exceed 0.01
inch except adjacent to toes of flanges where a localized separation not
exceeding 0.025 inch is permissible.
23.6.5 The ends of members and lacing bars shall be neat and free
from burrs.
23.7 Holes for Rivets and Semi-Finished Bolts

23.7.1 Holes for rivets shall be 1.04 times the nominal rivet diameter
ch
ch
)e
re
.3
Ie
Ie
to the nearest ~ inch; holes for semi-finished bolts shall be bolt diameter
plus }82 inch for holes less than Y2 inch in diameter, and bolt diameter
plus Ks inch for holes ~ inch or more in diameter.
23.7.2 Drifting to enlarge unfair holes shall not be permitted. Holes

that must be enlarged to admit the fastener shall be reamed. Poor matching
of holes shall be cause for rejection.
23.8 Holes for Finished Bolts. Holes for finished bolts shall be drilled or
reamed truly cylindrical and not more than W4 inch larger than the nominal
diameter of the bolt. Drilling or reaming for finished bolts shall be done
after the parts to be connected are assembled; except that if such drilling
or reaming after assembly is impracticable, it may be done before assembly
through metal templates fitted with hardened steel bushings.
23.9 Assembly. All parts of riveted members shall be well pinned or bolted
and rigidly held together while riveting. Drifting done during assembling
of any connection shall not distort the metal or enlarge the holes.
38
CSA STANDARD SI57
23.10 Riveting
23.10.1 Aluminum rivets shall be driven cold using power riveters of
either compression or manually-operated type, employing pneumatic,
hydraulic, or electric power. After driving, they shall be tight and their
heads shall be in full contact with the surface. Special care shall be used in
driving rivets whose grip exceeds five diameters.
23.10.2 Finished heads shall be flat, cone, or annular in shape, with a

head depth at the periphery of the shank not less than O.4D and a head
diameter not less than lAD, where D is the nominal diameter of the rivet.
The head shall be of uniform size throughout the work for the same size
rivet, full, neatly finished, and concentric with the holes.
23.10.3 Defective rivets shall be removed by drilling.
23.11 Welding of Aluminum
23.11.1 All welding shall be done with an inert gas shielded arc process t
either tungsten inert gas (TIG) or metal inert gas (MIG).
23.11.2 Metal arc welding with flux coated electrodes shall not be permitted.
23.11.3 Filler and electrode wire alloys shall be compatible with the
parent metal alloys.
23.11.4 Filler and electrode wire shall be stored in the unopened
original containers in a manner to prevent contamination by moisture and
other foreign substances. It shall be kept clean and dry at all times.
23.11.5 Shielding gases (argon and helium) shall be of welding grade.
23.11.6 All areas to be welded shall be clean, dry and free from burrs,
slivers, and crevices that could entrap foreign matter. Solvent degreasing
should extend sufficiently far back from the joint to avoid grease or other
foreign matter flowing back into the joint during welding. Scratch brushing
may be used to reduce the oxide film thickness just prior to welding.
23.11.7 All joints shall have the required edge preparation and joint
spacing and shall be jigged to maintain alignment during welding. Tack
welds used for jigging shall be fully penetrated and of good quality so that
they do not represent defects in the weld of which they become part.
23.11.8 All butt joints shall have full penetration. The reinforcement
beads shall be uniform and with smooth transition from bead to parent
metal. The bead height shall be limited to %2 inch for U inch material and
lighter, VB inch for V2 inch material, %2 inch for ~ inch material, and
~ inch for 1 inch material and thicker. Intermediate thicknesses may be
determined by interpolation.
23.11.9 Fillet welds shall be of the required size and shall avoid severe
concavity or convexity. They shall be fused to the joint faces and penetrate
to the root intersection.
23.11.10 All welds shall be free from cracks, lack of penetration, lack
of fusion and essentially free from porosity and undercutting.
23.11.11 Weld starts and stops shall be made with a technique which
eliminates lack of penetration and fusion at the start and a crater at the
stop.
f
r
1
39
23.11.12 Defective areas in welds shall be repaired. The defects shall

be removed by gouging and the area rewelded.
23.11.13 For exposed applications in corrosive environments welds
shall be arranged to avoid leaving unsealed crevices.
23.11.14 For welding under this Standard, sufficient supervision shall
be provided to ensure compliance with its requirements.
23.12 Welding Qualification. Welding operators and procedures used
shall be qualified to CSA Standard W47.2, Aluminum Welding Qualification
Code.
23.13 Tolerances
23.13.1 Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists,
bends, and open joints.
23.13.2 Compression members may have a lateral variation not
greater than 1/480 of the axial length between points which are to be
laterally supported.
23.13.3 A variation of ~ inch is permissible in the overall length of

members with both ends milled.
23.13.4 Members without milled ends which are to be framed to other
parts of the structure may have a variation from the detailed length hole
to hole not greater than !{6 inch for members 30 feet or less in length, and
not greater than VB inch for members over 30 feet in length. The distance
between holes within a single group of fasteners shall have a variation from
detailed dimensions not exceeding ~ inch.
23.14 Heating. Forming of aluminum shall generally be carried out cold.
Where heating is necessary, aluminum may be heated to 400 F for a period
not exceeding 30 minutes. Such heating shall be done only when proper
temperature controls and supervision are provided to ensure that the
limitations on temperature and time are carefully observed.
23.15 Erection Marks. Starn ped erection marks shall not be used on
stressed parts of the member.
NOTE:
Paint or ink erection marks are preferred.
24. JOINT SEALING AND PAINTING

24.1 Need for Joint Sealing
24.1.1 Aluminum in contact with aluminum does not require joint
sealing under normal indoor or outdoor conditions in rural and industrial
atmospheres.
24.1.2 In severe industrial atmospheres where there is specific chemical

pollution and in marine atmospheres, aluminum-to-aluminum faying
surfaces shall be coated with sufficient good quality sealing compound
to fill all crevices. Sealants and caulking compounds based on polysulfides,
butyl rubber, silicones, urethanes, etc., are available commercially that
have proven records of service in the building industry. Lead-base compounds shall not be used with aluminum. Proprietary resilient non-absorbent, moisture-excluding, electrically-insulating, gasket materials in sheet
or tape form shall be considered a satisfactory alternative to the sealing
compound provided such materials have a satisfactory service life.
NOTE:
A marine atmosphere means within ontwquarter mile of the seacoast.
40
eSA STANDARD S157
24.1.3 Structural aluminum in contact with other commonly used

ma terials shall be treated as follows:
(a) Wood. For aluminum in contact with wood, the wood shall be
given two thorough coats of a good quality lead-free paint, such
as covered in CGSB Specifications 1-GP-69c, Aluminum Paint,
and 1-GP-108b, Paint: Acid and Alkali Resistant, Black. Asphalt
saturated-and-coated building paper or felt or proprietary gasket
materials in sheet or tape form as described in Clause 24.1.2 shall
be considered a satisfactory alternative to painting of the wood
provided such materials have a satisfactory service life;
(b) Steel. For aluminum in contact with bare, primed, painted or
galvanized steel and stainless steel under norma] indoor and outdoor conditions in rural and industrial atmospheres, no joint
sealing is required except for aesthetic reasons. Lnder marine
conditions or where exposed to chemically polluted atmospheres
all faying surfaces shall be treated as in Clause 24.1.2;
(c) Other Metals. For aluminum in contact with copper, brass,
bronze, lead, and other dissimilar metals (stainless steel excepted),
under normal indoor conditions the faying surfaces of these other
materials shall be painted before assembly with one coat of zinc
chromate primer meeting the requirements of CGSB Specification
1-GP-132b, Primer: Zinc Chromate, Low Moisture Sensitivity,
or one coat of bituminous paint meeting the requirements of CGSB
Specification 1-GP-108b. l nder all other conditions the faying surfaces shall be treated as in Clause 24.1.2; and
(d) Concrete. For aluminum in contact with, or embedded in, concrete, mortar, plaster, or other masonry for outdoor service or
where these masonry materials are damp or wet, the aluminum
shall be given two thorough coats of alkali-resistant bituminous
paint meeting the requirements of CGSB Specification 1-GP-108b.
Aluminum shall not be embedded in concrete containing calcium
chloride admixtures.
24.2 Application of Joint Sealers. Joint surfaces shall be free of moisture
and clean. Cleaning shall be done immediately before application of the
sealant or gasket by using a suitable grease solvent such as mineral spirits
or aromatic petroleum naphtha with or without wire brushing. Flame
cleaning of aluminum shall not be permitted. When mastic sealants are
used, the manufacturer's recommendations regarding temperature of
application shall be followed.
24.3 Need for Painting

24.3.1 Structural aluminum does not require general protective
painting in normal indoor and normal outdoor rural, marine, and industrial
atmospheres.
24.3.2 For general protection in indoor or outdoor atmospheres, where

there is specific chemical pollution, the aluminum shall be primed with
zinc chromate primer meeting the requirements of CGSB Specification
I-GP-132b, Primer: Zinc Chromate, Low lVloisture Sensitivity, and coated
with a paint system selected on the basis of the nature of the corrosive
chemical. Indoors, where appearance is not important or where a black
colour is acceptable, two thorough coats of bituminous paint meeting the
requirements of CGSB Specification 1-GP-108b, Paint: Acid and Alkali
r
41
sed
Resistant, Black, shall be considered acceptable in lieu of the primer and

subsequent paint system.
be
lch
nt,
alt
{et
all
od
24.4 Application of Paints

24.4.1 Conditions for Painting. Painting shall not be done outside
or
Itnt
ne
'es
:;s,
I),
er
tlC
)ll
y,
;B
r-
[1-
in wet or freezing weather. Surfaces shall be free from moisture or frost,

and material painted under cover in freezing weather shall, before painting,
be brought to a temperature above freezing, and be so maintained until
the paint is dry.
24.4.2 Pre-paint Cleaning. Immediately before painting or joint

sealing, the surfaces to be coated shall be cleaned using a suitable grease
solvent such as mineral spirits or aromatic petroleum naphtha. Flame
cleaning of aluminum shall not be permitted.
24.4.3 Painting. The paint shall be of the proper working consistency. Each coat shall be thoroughly brushed out or sprayed by approved
methods and shall be carefully worked into all joints and open spaces. Each
coat shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before application of the next coat.
The shop coat shall be dry before loading for shipment.
25. ERECTI()N A:r\D I:r\STAILATICN
25.1 Bracing. The structure shall be true and plumb. Temporary bracing
shall be introduced wherever necessary to take care of all loads to which
the structure may be subjected, including wind loads, temporary loading
due to materials, and equipment and its operation. Such bracing shall
be left in place as long as required for safety.
)r
25.2 Adequacy of Temporary Connections. As erection progresses, the
11
work shall be securely connected with sufficient fasteners to take care of

all dead load, erection loads, and wind.
IS
).
n
'e
e
:s
e
e
.f
e
I
25.3 Erection Loads. Wherever piles of material, erection equipment, or

other loads are carried during erection, proper provision shall be made to
take care of stresses caused thereby.
25.4 Alignment. No riveting, welding, or final tightening of fasteners

shall be done until as much of the structure as will be stiffened thereby
has been properly aligned.
25.5 Field Assembly. All field assembly shall be executed in accordance
with the requirements for shop fabrication, except those which manifestly
apply only to shop condi tions.
25.6 Protection of Aluminum. Precautions shall be taken to avoid

marking by mortar or cement splashes and the like, or damage to the
aluminum components arising from the use of erection equipment.
26. INSPECTION
26.1 General. lVlaterial and workmanship at all times shall be subject to
inspection by qualified inspectors representing the purchaser's representative or the authority having jurisdiction.
26.2 Co-operation. All inspection as far as possible shall be made at the

place of manufacture, and the contractor or manufacturer shall co-operate
with the inspector in permitting access for inspection to all places where
-505-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
42
eSA STANDARD S157
work is being done. The inspector shall at all times co-operate with the
contractor in order to avoid undue delay in the fabrication or erection of
the structure.
26.3 Defects. The purchaser's representative, at any time during the

progress of the work, may reject, or require to be rectified, any material or
workmanship not conforming to the provision of this Standard.
26.4 Identification of Material. The contractor shall satisfy the purchaser's representative that the material used for the work meets the
requirements of this Standard. Where required by the purchaser's representative, the alloy and temper of aluminum material shall be marked on
components until such components are identified for erection purposes.
43
THE STRU(''TURAL USE OF ALUMINUM IN BUILDINGS
APPENDIX A
EQUIVALENT ALUMINUM ALLOYS
le
)r
rle
eIn
NOTE:
eSA-HA Serlee -1968
CANADA
Commercial
HA.4
GSllN-T6
HA.5
SGllR-T6
HA.5
GSlO-T6
HA.4
GM41-HllA
-H32A
6061-T6
6351-T6
6063-T6
5083-H12A
or H32A
65S-T6
B51S-T6
50S-T6
D54S-HI2A
H32A
GREAT BRITAIN
BS (General Engineering)
HS20-WP
HE30WP
HV9-WP
NP8*
U.S.A.
ASTM,
AA and Commercial
6061-T6
6351-T6
6063-T6
5083-H321
Alcan (International)
FRANCE
AFNOR
A-SGM*
A-GS*
GERMANY
DIN
AIMgSi 1*
3.2315
AIMgSi 0.5* AIMg 5*

3.3206
3.3555
ITALY
UNI
Pe/AISi 1
MgMn*
3571
Pe/AlSi 0.4
Mg*
3569
SWITZERLAND
VSM
AISiMg*
10850
Extrudal*
The temper and composition of these alloys is to be such that the mechanical properties are no'
inferior to those required by CSA for the materials they replace.
44
eSA STANDARD S157
APPENDIX B
REPEATED STRESS FLUCTUATION
NOTE:
Bl. GENERAL
Bl.l Twenty thousand repetitions of maximum live load represents 2
load cycles every day for over 27 years, and 100,000 repetitions of
maximum live load represents 10 loading cycles every day for over
27 years.
The maximum design loading rarely occurs in the life of a structure.
However, where a structural member is subject to a very large number
of repeated loadings or load fluctuations the possibility arises of its
failure occurring at a nominal stress, usually tensile, appreciably lower
than that permissible for static loading. When they occur, fatigue
cracks generally originate at a point of high stress, such as are-entrant
corner or a weld bead.
Care should be taken to avoid induced vibrations at a natural frequency of a structure or structural member. Vibration can result
in a large number of cycles of stress in a relatively short time.
To design against fatigue calls for good practice based upon experience
and testing. Careful detailing and fabrication are of major importance;
alloy choice is of much less significance.
,.
....
DESIGN OF LIGHT GAUGE

ALUMINUM PRODUCTS
PUBUSHED, APRIL, 1961

IY THE
(INCORPORATED 1919)
77 SPENCER STREET
OTTAWA 3, CANADA
COPYRIGHT REGISTERED, CANADA, 1961
-509-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
DESIGN OF LIGHT GAUGE ALUMINUM PRODUCTS
CONTENTS
List of Ivlembers of Committee on Light Gauge Aluminum Products. .
Page
5
Preface. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ., .... , ...... , .......... ,..........
Reference Publications .. , .. , , . . . . . . .. . .... , .. ,.' .. , ......... ".
STANDARD
1. Scope ....... , , , , "
2. General.... . . .. ".' ...... .
3. Definitions.............. . ...... ,' ............ ,""........
4. l\.1aterials ............................ ' .. , , , . . . .. ...... '"

4.1 Sheet, Plate and Extrusions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Rivets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Bolts .............................. , , ......... , , .... , , ,
4.4 Filler Wire ....... , . , . , ................... , ........... , .
4.5 Alternative Alloys ...... , , , . , . , , ... , , .. , .. , , , , .. , .... , . .
4.6 Physical Properties ...... , ., , .. , ... , ....... , ....... '".
4.7 Steel Rivets and Bolts ... " ... , , , .. , ............. , , . , . , ..
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
5. Tests ................... , , . , , , ......... , .. , , . , ..... , . . . . . ..
10
6. Allowable Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ........... .

6.1 General...............................................
6.2 Tension and Compression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......... .
6.3 Shear ............................................... .
6.4 Bearing ............ ,........................... . .... .
6.5 Stresses at \Velds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......... . ..... .
6.6 Stresses in Fillet Welds ............... , ... .
6.7 Fasteners ...................... , ...... .
6.8 Combined Stresses .................... .
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
7. Tension lVlcmbers ............ , . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ........... .

7.1 Net Width - Riveted or Bolted Joints ................. .
7.2 Eccentrically Loaded l\lembers .............. .
13
8. Compression l\lembers ...................................... .

8.1 Struts Failing by Flexural Buckling ...................... .
8.2 Built-up Struts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ........... . .. .
8.3 Struts Failing by Torsional Buckling ........... .
14
14
14
15
9. Beams.... . . .. . . . . . . . . .. ..... . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.1 Effective Section for Bending Strength.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
9.2 Deflection ........... , ........ , .... , .... " ........ "...
15
15
15
- 511-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
13
13
e8A STANDARD 8191
9.3
9.4
9.5
Shear Webs ........................................... .

Local Loads on Webs .................................. .
Lateral Buckling ...................................... .
16
17
17
.
.
.
.
18
18
18
18
11. l\1embranes ................................................ .
19
12. Flat
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
10. Beam - Columns ...........................................

10.1 Maximum Stress ......................................
10.2 Shear Load ...........................................
10.3 Beam - Columns Failing Laterally .......................
Walls .................................................
Initial Buckling of Flat Walls in Compression .............
Effective Width of Flat Walls in Compression .............
Effective Section, Axial Compression .....................
Effective Section, Bending ..............................
Influence of Lips, Stiffeners, and Ribs ....................
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
19
20
21
21
21
13. Walls of Stiffened or Formed Sheet ...........................

13.1 Longitudinal Compression ..............................
13.2 Transverse Compression ................................
13.3 Shear Loading .........................................
.
.
.
.
22
22
22
23
14. Curved Walls ........... " ................................

14.1 Axial Compression .....................................
14.2 Radial Compression ....................................
14.3 Shear Loading .........................................
.
.
.
.
23
23
24
24
15. Curved Walls of Stiffened or Formed Sheet .................... .

15.1 Axial Compression ..................................... .
15.2 Radial Compression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .
24
24
25
16. Flat
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
.
.
.
.
.
25
25
25
26
26
17 . Fastener Spacing ........................................... .

17.1 Edge Distance .......... , . . . . . . . . .. . ................. .
17.2 Spacing .............................................. .
26
26
26
18. Fabrication and Workmanship ...............................

18.1 General ..............................................
18.2 Welding
Qualification of Welders ......................
Appendix A - Equivalent Aluminum Alloys. . . . . . . . . .. . .........
.
.
.
.
27
27
27
Allowable Stresses in Compression .................. .
29
Sandwich Panels ........ , .............................

General ..............................................
Panel Buckling ........................................
Skin Buckling .........................................
Bond Strength ........................................
Appendix B
- 512Copyright NRC-CNRC
28
F
5
DESIGN OF LIGHT GAUGE ALUMINUM PRODUcrS
16
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
COMMITTEE ON LIGHT GAUGE ALUMINUM PRODUCTS
19
20
21
21
21
P.
J.
HARRIS (Chairman) .. ....... McGill University, Montreal
C. D. CARRUTHERS
J.
C. CLARK ..
... C. D. Carruthers and \Vallace, Consultants Limited,

Toronto
... Robertson-Irwin Limited, Hamilton
L. G. JAEGER ..
McGill University, Montreal
22
D. JOSEPH ... .
Canadair Limited, Montreal
22
22
G. P. KOENS ..... .
\"esteel-Rosco Limited, Toronto
23
C. MARSH ....... .
23
23
J. STONEHEWER ....
24
]. G. SUTHERLAND ..
... Aluminium Laboratories Ltd., Kingston
24
E. O. THOMAS.
... Reynolds Aluminum

Cap-de-la-Madeleine
H. L. LEVELT. .... .
A. N. SHERBOURNE
... \Vesteel-Rosco Limited, Toronto

Consulting Engineer, Montreal
University of Waterloo, Waterloo
.. :\luminull1 Company of Canada Limited, :\Iontreal
Company
of
Canada
24
24
25
25
25
2S
26
Z6
Z6
~6
!6
!7
!7
!7
!8
:9
- 513-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Ltd.,
eSA STANDARD SI90
PREFACE
Since the publication of the first edition of CSA Standard S157-1962, The
Structural Use of Aluminum in Buildings, it has been apparent that there was
a need for a second Standard which would apply to the many aluminum
products which are either extruded or formed from sheet whose shape is dictated primarily by function rather than structural requirements. This new
Standard thus supplements CSA Standard S157-1962 and where possible, the
methods in the two Standards are similar.
The material in this Standard has been drawn from many sources. Since
the exact theoretical calculation of post-buckling strengths is an extremely
difficult procedure, the over-riding consideration has been to achieve maximum
simplicity consistent with economy and structural adequacy.
This Standard was prepared by the Committee on Light Gauge Aluminum
Products, under the jurisdiction of the Sectional Committee on Structures and
was formally approved by these Committees and the CSA Technical Council.
OTTAWA, APRIL, 1968
NOTE:

Publications are subject to periodic review. Suggestions for improvement
A II enquiries regarding this Standard should be addressed to the General
"Manager, Administration Division, Canadian Standards Association,
77 Spencer Street, Ottawa 3.
This Publication makes reference to the following:
CSA Standards B33.1-1961
- Square and Hexagon Bolts and Nuts,
Studs, and Wrench Openings;
G40.2-1959
Structura I Rivet Steel;
G164-1965
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped
Articles;
HA Series-1968 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys;
S157-1962
- The Structural Use of Aluminum In
Buildings;
W47.2-1967
- Aluminum Welding Qualification Code;
ASTM * Standard A307-65
Low-Carbon Steel ExternaIlv and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
*American Society for Testing and }vlaterials.
-------...r--'
---""=-"-'-,,---
~~"'~"-"-~-'"~--
S190-1968
DESIGN OF LIGHT GAUGE
ALUMINUM PRODUCTS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This Standard shall apply to the structural design of light gauge
aluminum products, either extruded or formed from sheet, whose overall
dimensions are dictated by their practical function, and where load carrying
ability is a necessary consideration. The requirements relate typically to
webs and flanges with width to thickness ratios greater than 40 and 15
respectively.
1.2 The products falling within the field covered by this Standard include
such items as formed roofing and siding, floor decking, curtain wall panels,
shear panels, folded sheet structural trim, ducting, sandwich panels, vehicle
bodies, and shipping containers.
1.3 This Standard does not cover loadings, protection, fabrication or suitability of the materials for any intended application.
1.4 Where a requirement is not covered by this Standard, the relevant
Clause in CSA Standard S157-1962, The Structural Use of Aluminum in
Buildings, shall apply.
2. GENERAL
2.1 Buckling of a wall is not regarded as the equivalent of collapse and such
buckling may occur in the working range. If, because of some requirement
for flatness, this buckling cannot be tolerated, the working stress shall be
kept below that causing initial buckling (see Clause 12.1.1).
2.2 The aluminum alloys referred to in this Standard are not intended to
be exclusive but have been selected from those most likely to be employed;
the methods are applicable to any alloy.
2.3 The design expressions adopted in this Standard do not exclude the use
of more accurate treatments approved by the Engineer.
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 The following definitions apply in this Standard:
Approved means approved by the Engineer;
Effective shape means a shape in which only the effective widths are
considered ;
Effective width, h. Owing to local buckling of a wall in compression it

is necessary to discount some of the material which is remote from the
supported edges. To do this only a certain width of the wall is treated as
active. This active width is called the Ueffective width";
Engineer means the designated representative of the authority having
jurisdiction, or the representative of the purchaser, as applicable;
Flange means a wall with one longitudinal edge supported and the
other edge free;
- 515-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
eSA STANDARD SI90
Lip means reinforcement to the free edge of a flange;

Partially stiffened edge means an otherwise unsupported edge of a
flange which has a lip or reinforcement added to increase its stability;
Slenderness ratio, A, (lambda). No matter what type of buckling
is involved, the buckling stress is related to a "slenderness ratio" which is a
function of the geometric proportions of the component, the distribution of
stress, and the conditions of support;
Stress is the unit stress in kips per square inch, written ksi; i.e. 1,000
pounds per square inch = 1 ksi;
Supported edge means that the stiffening to the edge of a flange is
such that the flange will be fully restrained against translation;
Ultimate load is the maximum static load a part can support;
Wall means any flat or curved element of a section, such as a flange or
web, which can be treated as a plate;
Web means a wall with both longitudinal edges supported.
4. MATERIALS
4.1 Sheet, Plate and Extrusions. Aluminum alloys shall conform to the
requirements of the pertinent CSA Standard of the HA Series-1968, Specifications for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys (HA.4 and HA.S) and shall
preferably be selected from those given in Table 1. (See Appendix A for
equivalent alloy designations.)
TABLE 1
ALLOYS AND TEMPERS
Minimum Mechanical Properties
Ksf
Alloy. Temper
Parent Metal
Welded
F"
Fy
Fsu
F. y
FB
HAA.MCI0-H14
HA.4.MC10-H16
20
24
17
21
12
14
10
12
40 l
HAA.GM41-H llA
HA.4.GM41-H32
42
45
25
34
25
27
15
20
90
HAA.GR20-H32
HA.4.GR20-H34
31
34
23
26
19
20
HA.5.GSI0-T5
HA.5.GS10-T6C
22
26
16
21
*HA. 5.sG 11 R-T6
42
38
HAA and HA.5.GSIIN-T6
Fu
Fy
F.u
14
38
18
23
14
15
62 }
68
25
10
15
13
16
10
13
44 ~
52 )
17
10
10
37
25
22
84
24
16
15
35
23
21
76
24
16
15
48
84 l
Was HA.5.GSllR-T6 in CSA HA Series-1958.

Fu = tensile ultimate, ksi
F 1J = tensile yield, ksi
F.u
shear ultimate, ksi
F';1J = shear yield, ksi
FB = bearing ultimate, ksi (see Clause 6.4)
NOTE:
Compressive yield is assumed to be equal to tensile yield. Yield point is

the stress at which the material exhibits a permanent strain of 0.2 per cent in
a 2-inch gauge length.
4.2 Rivets. Aluminum alloys shall conform to CSA Standard HA.6-1968,

Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Rivet, Welding and Brazing Rod and Wire,
and shall preferably be as in Table 2.
TABLE 2
10
RIVET ALLOYS
IS
Ksi
MelO
GM4l
GR20
or
GSlO
SGllR
GSll1\
Minhnum Ultimate
Shear Strenl!1th
Rivet Alloy
HA.6-
Parent Metal
HA.4- or HA.5-
990-F
10
GMSOR-F
GSI1P-T6A
24
20
GSllP-T6A
20
l-
II
r
4.3 Bolts. The aluminum alloy for bolts shall preferably be HA.6.GSllNT6, for which Fsu = 25 ksi.
4.4 Filler Wire. The aluminum alloy for filler wire in welds shall usually be
selected from those given in Table 3, which gives the filler alloy when joining
dissimilar alloys.
TABLE 3
FILLER ALLOYS
Minimum Ultimate Shear Strenl!1th
Filler Alloy
HA.6-
Parent Alloys
HA.4- or HA.5-
Ksl
Lonl!1ltudinal
Transverse
MelO
GM4l
GR20
to
\
GSIO
SGllR
GS111\
:\ OTE:
to
MelO
GM4l
GR20
GSlO
SGllR
GSll1\
GSlO
SGllR
GSl11\
GMSOR
18
24-
S5
15
20
Special conditions may demand the use of other filler alloys.
4.5 Alternative Alloys. Where alloys other than those given in Clauses 4.1
to 4.4 are to be adopted, it shall be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer
that their use in the particular design provides a margin of safety and
standard of performance not less than those provided for by this Standard.
- 517-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
10
eSA STANDARD S190
4.6 Physical Properties. The following typical physical properties may be

used for all aluminum alloys covered by this Standard:
Unit weight. ............................... 0.098 pound/cubic inch
Coefficient of linear thermal expansion ......... 0.000013;oF
:Modulus of elasticity ........................ 10,000 ksi
Shear modulus of elasticity ................... 4,000 ksi
4.7 Steel Rivets and Bolts

4.7.1 Steel for rivets shall conform to CSA Standard G40.2-1959,
Structural Rivet Steel.
4.7.2 Finished and semi-finished bolts shall conform to CSA Standard

B33.1-1961, Square and Hexagon Bolts and Nuts, Studs, and \Vrench
Openings, for dimensions, and to ASTlVI Standard A307-65, Low-Carbon
Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
4.7.3 All steel bolts shall be protected by galvanizing or an equivalent
acceptable to the Engineer. \Vhere used, galvanizing shall conform to the
requirements of CSA Standard G164-1965, Hot Dip Galvanizing of
Irregularly Shaped Articles, as applicable.
5. TESTS
5.1 In lieu of design calculations the adequacy of a structural assembly
may be proved by tests. The allowable load shall not exceed the ultimate load
divided by 1.75, and the assembly must sustain a load equal to 1.5 times the
allowable load without impairing its functional capabilities. Dead weight of
the structural assembly may be disregarded.
Where the loads are due to wind the above factors may be reduced to
1.4 and 1.2.
5.2 In evaluating test results, due consideration must be given to any

differences that may exist between the yield point of the material from which
the tested sections are formed and the minimum yield point specified for the
material which the manufacturer intends to use.
5.3 The number of tests shall be decided by the Engineer. If more than one
test is performed, the lowest value shall be used to determine the safe load.
6.1 General. The allowable stresses given are those applicable under the
worst combina tion of dead, live and im pact loading specified for the prod ucts.
These stresses may be used for vehicles and other products subjected to
dynamic loading, but care must be taken to ensure that re-entrant corners,
bends, changes of section, welded attachments, and other discontinuities do
not introduce serious stress-raisers that can lead to fatigue failures. Stresses
due to wind forces, or load combinations including wind, may be 33 per
cent higher.
6.2 Tension and Compression. The applied stres3 in tension on the net
cross-sectional area or in compression on the gross area shall not exceed the
applicable value given in Table 4. A safety factor of 1.65 on the guaranteed
yield strength or 2 on the guaranteed ultimate strength, whichever gives the
lesser stress, shall be employed for those alloys not included in Table . 1.
r
11
TABLE 4
ALLOWABLE STRESSES, Ksi
Alloy
Tension
Compression
F
Shear
F.
Constants for
Bucklina Formulaet
Bearina*
FB
HA.4.MC10-H14
HA.4.MC10-H16
10
12
6
7
16
19
11
13
0.06
0.08
100
100
HA.4.GM41-H11A
HA.4.GM41-H32
15
21
9
12
24
34
17
25
0.12
0.215
100
80
HA.4.GR20-H32
HA.4.GR20-H34
14
16
8
10
22
26
16
18
0.11
0.13
100
100
HA.5.GSI0-TS
HA.S.GSI0-T6
10
13
6
8
16
21
11
14:
0.05
0.075
87
79
HA.S.SGI1R-T6
21
13
34
23
0.155
61
HA.4 and HA.S.GSllN-T6
19
11
30
21
0.135
63
---
4
10
8
Rivets
Bolts
HA.6.990-F
HA.6.GMSOR-F
HA.6.GSll P-T6~\
HA.6.GSI1N-T6
-----
10
*See Clauses 6.4 and 17.1.

tSee Clause 8.1.
6.3 Shear. The applied shear stress shall not exceed the values given in
Table 4. For other alloys the allowable shear stress shall be taken as 60 per
cen t of the allowable tensile stress.
6.4 Bearing
6.4.1 The applied bearing stresses for bolts, rivets, and pins, shall not
exceed the values given in Table 4. For other alloys the allowable bearing
stress shall be taken as 1.6 times the allowable tensile stress.
6.4.2 The safe bearing stress given in Table 4 applies for compressive
loads, or for tension loads when the end distance, measured from the centre
of the hole to the end, is at least twice the fastener diameter. For lesser end
distances the safe bearing stress for tension loads is:
e
25
where e
= end distance, measured from the centre of the hole, not less
than 1,!i 0, inches

D = fastener diameter, inches
F B = allowable bearing stress from Table 4, ksi
6.5 S tresses a t Welds

6.5.1 For welds transverse to the direction of stress, the stresses in the
parent metal at welds, and in butt welds, shall not exceed the values given in
Table 5.
- 519-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
12
eSA STANDARD S190
6.5.2 For other alloys the safety factors in Clause 6.2 shall be applied
to the welded strength.
6.5.3 The influence of welds parallel to the direction of stress may be
disregarded.
TABLE 5
ALLOWABLE STRESSES AT WELDED JOINTS
Tension
Compression
Shear
Ksi
Kst
Mel0
GM41
GR20
3
11
GSI0
SGllR
GS11N
10
10
4
6
6
Parent Alloys
HA.4- or HA.S-
6.6 Stresses in Fillet Welds. The stress in a fillet weld, computed by

dividing the load by the throat area of the weld, shall not exceed the appropriate value in Table 6.
TABLE 6
ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESSES IN FILLET WELDS
Filler Alloy
HA.6-
Transverse
Shear
Lonlitudlnat
hear
Kst
Ksi
10
7,
GMSOR
S5
When welding MC10, GR20, and GS10 the shear stress in the parent
metal may govern.
For other filler alloys the safe shear stress shall not exceed the minimum
ultimate shear stress divided by 2.5.
6.7 Fasteners. The shear stress in a rivet or bolt shall not exceed the appropriate value given in Table 4. For other alloys and other types of fastener the
safe load shall give a safety factor of not less than 2.5 on the ultimate load
of the fastener.
6.S Combined Stresses

6.S.1 A part carrying direct tension or compression stress with shear
stress shall be proportioned such that:
(;)2+(i:)2 ~ 1
where f = applied tension or compression stress, ksi
f. = applied shear stress, ksi
F = allowable tension stress from Table 4, ksi
FII = allowable shear stress from Table 4, ksi
13
6.8.2 For cases of combined loads or stresses, except those covered by

Clauses 6.8.1 and 10.3, the parts may be proportioned such that:
LiF<
where f = a component of the combined stresses, ksi

F = the allowable value for the type of stress, f, considered
separately, ksi
Where warranted less conservative expressions may be used subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
7. TENSION MEMBERS
7.1 Net Width - Riveted or Bolted Joints. The net section for concentrically loaded members shall be the gross section minus the area removed
by the holes in line across the section.
In the case of a chain of holes extending across a part in any diagonal or
staggered line, the net width of the part shall be obtained by deducting from
the gross width the sum of the diameters of all the holes in the chain, and
adding, for each gauge space in the chain, the quantity:
S2
where s
longitudinal spacing (pitch) in inches of any two successive

holes
g = transverse spacing (gauge) in inches of the same two holes
The least net width so obtained shall be used in calculating the net section.
7.2 Eccentrically Loaded Members. The load in a tension member with

eccentric end connections shall not exceed:
AeF
where F = allowable tension stress from Table 4, ksi
Ae = effective area, given below, inches2
Effective Area, Ac
General shapes ........................... .
e)
n
An/(1+A
Zn ll
An 2 wt/3
Single angles* ........................... .

Double angles *
Fixed to one side of the gusset. . . . . . . . . . .. An - wt
Fixed to each side of the gusset. . . . . . . . . .. An -wt/2
Channels fixed by the web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. An -wt
where An = total net area of the member (see Clause 7.1), inches2
w
width of outstanding leg, inches
t
leg thickness, inches
e
eccentricity, inches
.
shape factor of net sectIon =
.
d I
sectIOn mo u us
This mav be taken as 1.2 if no exact calculation is made
Zn = section ~odulus of net section, inches3
*The gauge line, i.e. distance from heel to fastenu, must not exceed half the leg width. If detailing
requires a greater eccentricity, a further reduction in area must be mc.de.
- 521-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
14
eSA STANDARD S190
8. COMPRESSION MEMBERS
8.1 Struts Failing by Flexural Buckling. The allowable axial stress on
the effective area of a concentrically loaded strut shall be given by:
). < C, Fe = B-D)' :::; F
5 XI0 4
). > C, Fe -).-2where Fe
F
allowable applied stress on the effective area, ksi

allowable compressive stress from Table 4, ksi
).
= KL/r
slenderness ratio
length of strut, inches
L
r
= appropriate radius of gyration for the effective area, inches
K = a factor dictated by the degree of restraint, as assessed
by the designer
KL = effective length, inches
B, C and D are given for each alloy in Table 4
(See also Appendix B)
For other alloys the values of B, D and C are given by:
For fully heat treated alloys ( - T5 and higher tempers)
B
F+~y/2
( ~)3/2
D
80
C = 0.41 BID
For other tempers and other alloys:
2
B = F+-1 -
(F)3/
2 5
D =
(7~y/2
C = 0.67 BID
B shall be rounded down to the nearest 1 ksi
8.2 Built-up Struts

8.2.1 Axial Stress. Struts composed of two or more longitudinal elements shall have at least four shear resistant connectors between the elements, usually one at each end and each third point, such that the slenderness ratio of the individual elements between centres of connections does
not exceed 0.75 of the overall slenderness ratio. The axial stress shall not
exceed that associated with the slenderness ratio:
).
where
0 21+),22)1/2
slenderness ratio of the whole member taken about the

principal axis for which bending results in shear in the
connectors
= slenderness ratio of one element between connectors, about
an axis through its centre of gravity and parallel to the
axis used for calculating ).1
),1 =
),2
8.2.2 Design of Connectors. The connectors at anyone point shall be

together capable of transmitting a total shear load equal to 2.5 per cent of
the total axial load.
r
J
15
8.3 Struts Failing by Torsional Buckling

8.3.1 In any strut with a cross-section of an open shape which has two
edges and an axis of symmetry (L C J1. C, etc.) the axial stress shall
not exceed that given by Clause 8.1 using a slenderness ratio:
S
). = 2.5
where S = developed length of the cross-section wall, inches

t = mean thickness = A/S, inches
area of the cross-section, inches2
A
In open shapes this requirement, rather than local buckling, will usually
govern.
8.3.2 In struts of extruded angle, T, or cruciform shape, the slenderness
ratio for torsional buckling shall be taken as the highest value of:
).
where w
t
Sw
t
length of a leg measured from the root fillet, inches

leg thickness, inches
8.4 Eccentrically Loaded Struts

8.4.1 General. Struts 'with eccentric end connections shall be proportioned such that:
ft~<F
a,_
fa I-Fe
where fa. = mean axial stress, ksi
fb = bending stress due to eccentricity, ksi
Fe
5 X 104/).2
F = allowable stress from Table 4, ksi
8.4.2 Single Angles. Single equal leg angles and unequal leg angles
connected by the longer leg shall be proportioned such that:
where fa = mean axial stress

Fe = allowable compression stress for the strut if concentrically
loaded
F
allowable stress from Table 4
9. BEAMS
9.1 Effective Section for Bending Strength. In a beam cross-section, the
width of flat walls subjected to uniform compressive stress shall be replaced
by an effective width (Clause 12.2); the thickness of walls subjected to a
stress varying from tension to compression shall be replaced by an effective
thickness (Clause 12.4.2). The section modulus of the effective section shall
be such that the maximum bending stress does not exceed the value given
i~ Table 4 for tension and compression.
9.2 Deflection. The gross cross-section of a beam may be assumed to be

active when computing the moment of inertia to establish the deflection in
the working range.
16
eSA STANDARD S190
9.3 Shear Webs

9.3.1 Unstiffened Shear Webs. The shear stress in a long unstiffened
web shall not exceed 60 per cent of the value obtained using the expression
of Clause 8.1 for a slenderness ratio of:
A= w
t
where w = clear web depth, inches

t
web thickness, inches
9.3.2 Stiffened Shear Webs

9.3.2.1 If no buckling is to be permitted in the working range, the
shear stress in a stiffened web shall not exceed:
6 104
where A
a and b = the width and length of the panel, a < b, inches
= thickness, inches
t
In any event, Clause 9.3.2.2 shall be satisfied.
9.3.2.2 The web, and its connection to the flange, shall carry
safely a load given by:
V~l +k)
kips/inch
applied either as shear parallel to the flange or tension perpendicular to

the flange,
where V
applied shear force, kips
w = clear web depth, inches
1-(i~y/3
k
=
buckling stress obtained from Clause 9.3.2.1, ksi
~ ksi
wt'
thickness, inches
9.3.2.3 Stiffeners
9.3.2.3.1 If the web does not buckle, each stiffener shall
be designed to carry safely, acting as a strut equal in length to the web
depth, a load equal to the maximum shear force at the stiffener.
9.3.2.3.2 If buckling is permitted, then the stiffener shall
be designed to carry safely an axial load of:
F~wt+kV~
where Fs
shear buckling stress from Clause 9.3.2.1, kSl
V = maximum shear load at the stiffener, kips
a = stiffener spacing, inches
k is from Clause 9.3.2.2
The effective length of the stiffener shall be taken as:
w
KL
[1+k2(3-2a/w) JI/2
17
9.3.3 Welded Plates in Shear. Where buckling dictates the allowable

shear stress, welds may be disregargep except that the applied shear stress
shall not exceed the appropriate value in Table 5.
9.4 Local Loads on Webs
9.4.1 \Vhere point loads or reactions are applied to a beam flange it will
be usual to stiffen the web. For unstiffened webs the local load shall not
exceed that given by:
(N +w)t Fe or
NtF
whichever is the lesser.
where N = bearing length plus twice the flange thickness, inches
t = web thickness, inches
Fe
F
,ksi
T
allowable compressive stress from Table 4 .
stress obtained from Clause 8.1 using A
.-\t the ends of beams the load shall not exceed half the value given by
the above expression, or N t F, whichever is the lesser.
9.4.2 \Vhen radiused bends between web and flange are used to transmit
local loads, the load shall not exceed that given by Clause 9.4.1 reduced by:
R
10- per cent
t
where R = inside radius of bend, inches

t = wall thickness, inches
9.5 Lateral Buckling

9.5.1 Hollow Shapes. N"o examination of the possibility of lateral
buckling need be made for shapes which are of a closed type, so long as any
seams are capable of resisting longitudinal shear stresses, unless the shape
is of a rectangular form with a depth in the plane of bending greater than
three times the breadth, when the bending stress shall not exceed that given
by Clause 8.1 using a slenderness ratio:
(5SL)1/2
A = (I y J)lI4
where 5
L
]
section modulus about the strong axis, inches3

length of beam, inches
moment of inertia about the principal axis lying in the
plane of bending, inches 4
= torsion constant (St. Venant) inches 4
9.5.2 Open Shapes. The compressive stress due to bending shall not
exceed the value obtained from Clause 8.1 using the slenderness ratio:
A=
0.8!::
ry
)!
_
Lt.
J1/4
[(4r yd +C
-515-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
18
eSA STANDARD S190
where L = laterally unrestrained length, inches

ry
radius of gyration about the axis lying
bending, inches
d = beam depth, inches
C = 1 for I beams
0.6 for channels
0.4 for zeds
t = flange thickness, inches
In
the plane of
For angles and T's the expression for the slenderness ratio given in
Clause 9.5.1 shall be used.
Lateral restraint shall be provided at all points of loading; otherwise a
full analysis shall be made to show the stability of the system.
10. BEAM - COLUMNS

10.1 Maximum Stress. For members subjected to axial compressive load
and bending moment, causing failure in the plane of bending, the maximum
compressive stress on the effective section shall be given by:
f max = f a
+f b/(I-;:) or (fa+fm)
whichever is greater,
where fmax = maximum compressive stress, which shall not exceed the
allowable stress for the material in prismatic beams or
for the chord in latticed beams, ksi
L~
= applied axial stress, ksi
fb = applied bending stress in the span. It is due to the
maximum moment in the span when the end moments
are zero, or the mid-span moment when end moments are
applied, but not less than half the maximum end moment,
ksi
fm = stress due to moment at a support, ksi
Fe
5 X 104;;'2 ksi
A = slenderness ratio for buckling in the plane of bending as
defined in Clause 8.1
10.2 Shear Load. The maximum shear load in the plane of bending shall
be given by:
Vmax V/(I-;:)
=
where V max = maximum shear force for which the member shall be
designed, kips
V
= applied shear load, kips
fa and Fe as in Clause 10.1
10.3 Beam - Columns Failing Laterally. When axial load and bending
moment cause failure by lateral buckling, the combination of stresses shall
be such that:
-516-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
?
19
where fa
applied. axial stress, ksi
Fa = axial stress to cause failure as a column about the weak
axis, ksi
fb
applied bending stress, ksi
F b bending stress to cause fateral buckling with the applied
moment distribution, ksi
Fe
5Xl0 4/),2
),
slenderness ratio for buckling in the plane of the applied
moment, as defined in Clause 8.1
11. MEMBRANES
11.1 A flat panel carrying a uniformly distributed load normal to its surface,
and acting as a membrane, shall be designed
fastening, can resist safely a force given by:
Circular plates
so
that the sheet, and the edge
4.5t(~y/3 kips/inch
Rectangular plates [8-2(~y}(:)"\ips/inch

where W
=
t
=
R
,=
a and b
total load, kips

sheet thickness, inches
radius of circular plate, inches
dimensions of rectangular plate, a
< b,
inches
12. FLAT WALLS

12.1 Initial Buckling of Flat Walls in Compression
12.1.1 The compressive stress which first causes buckling in a flat wall,
long relative to its width, subjected to uniform axial stress, shall be taken
to be:
), < C, Fe = 2(B-DA) ~ Fy
106
), > C, Fe ="F
where C, Band D are the constants for the alloy from Table 4, or
Clause 8.1
Fy = compressive yield stress (see Table 1), ksi
). = mW
t
m = a constant, appropriate to the conditions of edge support
for the wall, given in Table 8
w = width of wall, inches
TABLE 8
V ALUES OF m FOR LOCAL BUCKLING
Ed~e
support
(a)
(b)
2.9
0----0
1.6
-527-
(d)
(c)
I"".:
...,
1.4
~
1.2
Copyright NRC-CNRC
20
eSA STANDARD S190
12.1.2 When the applied stress is greater than one half the critical
value obtained by Clause 12.1.1, then Clause 12.2 shall be satisfied.
12.1.3 Where the wall is part of a shape the values of m shall be
taken as:
webs
1.5
flanges 4 ..
12.2 Effective Width of Flat Walls in Compression

12.2.1 A long flat wall subjected to a nominally uniform axial compressive stress shall be replaced by an effective width:
w h en wt
when
< 2bt
~ > 2;,
h fectlve
f'
tee
WI'd t h'IS
(B-F-- D A)w <_ w
the effective width is b
where bit is obtained from Table 9

true width, inches
w
F
allowable compressive stress from Table 4, ksi
A = m~
t
t
thickness, inches
m is from Clause 12.1.3
The stress caused by the applied load on this effective width shall not
exceed the allowable compressive stress from Table 4.
The safe load obtained represents one half the ultimate load, and local
buckling may occur in the working range (see Clause 2.1).
TABLE 9
LIMITING WIDTH TO THICKNESS RATIOS
bit
Webs
Flanlle&
hit
Webs
MC1O-H14
MC10-H16
33
29
13
11
55
50
Gl\I41-H11A
GM41-H32
26
23
10
8
45
38
GR20-H32
GR20-H34
27
26
10
10
46
43
GS10-T5
GS10-T6
SG11R-T6
GS11N-T6
40
33
27
28
15
13
10
11
55
48
38
40
Alloy, Temper
For other alloys, or other conditions of edge support:
B F
The effective width of webs shall be distributed equally between the supported edges.
The effective width of flanges shall be adjacent to the supported edge.
- 528Copyright NRC-CNRC
p
DESIGN OF LIGIIT GAUGE ALUMINUM PRODUCTS
21
al
12.3 Effective Section, Axial Compression

12.3.1 If overall buckling occurs in a column at a stress less than that
)e
which causes local buckling of the walls, the gross section shall be assumed
to be active.
1-
12.3.2 Any flat wall in a column section which buckles at a stress less
than the applied axial stress shall be replaced by its effective width as
obtained using Clause 12.2 and the section properties shall be computed
using the resulting effective section. The applied stress on the effective
section shall not exceed the value obtained using Clause 8.1.
12.4 Effective Section, Bending
12.4.1 The elements of beams subjected to uniform compressive stress
shall be treated as walls in columns (Clause 12.2).
12.4.2 1n those walls of a section in which the stress varies from tension
to compression, the breadth of the wall shall be maintained, but the thickness shall be reduced in the ratio:
te = 3 X 10 < 1
t
F(h/t)2 where te = effective thickness, inches
F = allowable compressive stress from Table 4, ksi
h = distance from the neutral axis to the extreme compressive
fibre, inches
For values of h/t less than those given in Table 9 no reduction need
be made.
4
12.4.3 The properties of the effective section shall be computed using

the effective breadth and thickness, and the stresses due to bending on the
effective section shall not exceed the allowable value in Table 4.
12.5 Influence of Lips, Stiffeners, and Ribs
12.5.1 Flanges with Lips. The slenderness ratio of a flange with a lip,
of the same thickness, at the unsupported edge shall be the greater of:
).
(4w-7c)/t
). = 4 c/t
where w = flange wid th, inches
c = lip width, inches
t = thickness, inches
This value of ). will give the initial buckling stress, The safe load on the
wall will be obtained from Clause 12.2 using:
Flange m = (4-7;)
Lip
1.5
m = 4
12.5.2 Webs with Longitudinal Stiffeners or Ribs. The slenderness

ratio of a flat wall reinforced by longitudinal ribs shall be taken as:
(a) For the ribs:
). =
rL but not greater than k W(wt3)1/4

t -1-529-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
22
C8A STANDARD 8190
(b) For the wall between ribs:

A = 1.~
t
where L = length of stiffened element, inches

r
radius of gyration of stiffener about an axis coinciding with
the face of the web, inches
w = developed width of the wall, inches
i.e. if the ribs are formed from the sheet, w is the original
width of sheet
if stiffeners are fixed to a fla t sheet, w is the actual wid th
t = thickness of wall, inches
I = moment of inertia of stiffener about the face of the web,
inches4
S = free flat width of the wall between stiffeners, inches
k = 1.1 for a single central rib
1.0 for two equally spaced ribs
If the value of A given by (a) governs, i.e. the ribs buckle with the wall,
then Clause 8.1 will give the allowable stress. If the value of A given by (b)
governs, i.e. the wall buckles between the stiffeners, then if advantage is to
be taken of any post buckling strength, the value of Agiven by (a) must not
exceed Bj2D where Band D are taken from Table 4.
13. WALLS OF STIFFENED OR FORMED SHEET

13.1 Longitudinal Compression. The safe axial stress in a panel with
multiple stiffeners or a< corrugated panel, loaded in the direction of the
stiffening, which buckles as a column, shall be given by Clause 8.1, using
the slenderness ratio:
~r but not greater than 1.3~(~)1/4

r t
stiffened sheet
A=
formed sheet
A = L but not greater than
1.3~(11r)1/2
r t
where L = panel length, inches
w = panel width, inches
I = moment of inertia of the stiffened panel per unit width,
inches4 jinch
r
radius of gyration of the cross section, inches
11 = ratio of deveJoped width to net width of the corrugated
profile
t
r
13.2 Transverse Compression. The compressive stress in a stiffened plate,

loaded at right angles to the stiffeners, shall not exceed the value from
Clause 8.1 using the slenderness ratio:
A = 3.3~
t
or A
1.3~( ~) 1/4
whichever gives the lower stress.
-530-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
p
DESIGN OF LIGIIT GAUGE ALUMINUM PRODUcrS
23
where a = stiffener spacing, inches

t = sheet thickness, inches
w
panel width measured in the direction of the stiffeners,
inches
I
moment of inertia of stiffened panel per unit width,
inches4/inch
Formed sheet shall not be used to carry applied stress, in the plane of
the sheet, at righ t angles to the corrugations.
13.3 Shear Loading. The shear stress in a panel of stiffened or formed sheet,
shall not exceed 60 per cent of the value obtained from Clause 8.1 using
the slenderness ratio:
Stiffened sheet
a
A = 1.5 t{P/2
Formed sheet
A=
0.45~( ~y/2
where a = length in direction of stiffening, inches

r = radius of gyration of formed profile, inches
1] = ratio of developed width to net width of formed profile
fJ =
1.8(~ y/4 for stiffened sheet
1.8( 1]~y/2 for formed sheet

= momen t of inertia per unit width of stiffened sheet,
inches4/inch
Should the length of the panel exceed fJw, where w is the panel width
measured across the stiffening, then 'a' shall be replaced by fJw in the above
expressions.
14. CURVED WALLS

14.1 Axial Compression
14.1.1 The axial compressive stress on a tube or curved panel shall
not exceed the value obtained from Clause 8.1 using the slenderness ratio:
A = 4(~)1/2(1
.
+ (R/t)1/2)
35
or A = ~
t
whichever is the
where R =
t =
w
lesser,
radius of curvature, inches
arc length of panel, inches
14.1.2 In shallow curved panels, where w < 4(Rt)1/2, the axial stress
shall not exceed that given by Clause 8.1 using the slenderness ratio:
Al
A = [ 1 + (At! A2)4 ]1/2
-531-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
24
eSA STANDARD S190
3.3~
t
where Al
A2
a
w
1+(;)2
=
=
or 1.6w/t
whichever is the lesser
5. 7(R/t) 1/2
panel length in the direction of a generator, inches
arc length of the panel, inches
14.2 Radial Compression. The compressive stress in a radially loaded

tube or curved panel shall not exceed the value given in Clause 8.1 using a
slenderness ratio:
i > 3.3(~)1/2, A = 6~
i < 3.3(~)"'. , 3.3m"2(~r
=
where a
length of wall along a generator, inches
R = radius of curvature, inches
t = sheet thickness. inches
14.3 Shear Loading

14.3.1 The shear stress in the wall of a tube, due to lateral forces or
torque, shall not exceed 60 per cent of the value obtained from Clause 8.1
using a slenderness ratio:
or 5(R)3/4
( R)3/8(a)1/4
t
t
t
3 whichever is the
where R =
a
t =
lesser,
radius of curvature, inches
length of generator, inches
14.3.2 For a curved panel the slenderness ratio shall be given by:
Al
[1+(;")'J"
14.3.1
where Al is obtained from Clause

for a tube of the same radius
and length
w = the lesser dimension of the panel measured on the surface,
inches
15. CURVED WALLS OF STIFFENED

OR FORMED SHEET
15.1 Axial Compression. Longitudinally stiffened curved walls with transverse stiffeners shall carry an axial stress not in excess of that given by
Clause 8.1 for a slenderness ratio:
Al
A = {1 + (AI/ A2)2 JI/2
-532-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
25
where Al
a
r
air
length of wall between transverse stiffeners, inches
radius of gyration of stiffened sheet, inches
,1.2 = 5.7(1']R/t)1/2
= ratio of developed width to net width of formed profile
1']
The wall between stiffeners shall satisfy Clause 14.1.2, or shall be treated
as flat and use made of Clause 12.2.
15.2 Radial Compression. Circumferentially stiffened curved walls or

formed sheet shall carry a stress, due to radial compressive loading, not
greater than that given by Clause 8.1 for a slenderness ratio:
A = 1.8
where R = radius of curvature~ inches

r = radius of gyration of stiffened sheet, inches
16. FLAT SANDWICH PANELS

16.1 General. In sandwich panels, composed of aluminum sheets bonded to
a core material having a modulus of elasticity less than 100 ksi the following
treatment shall be used unless a full study of the composite action is carried
out.
Only the skin shall be assumed to resist axial loads or bending moments,
the stress in the skin being taken as:
Axial load
Bending
f =
(tl +t2)W
M
dwt
where P
total axial load, kips
w
wid th of panel, inches
tl and t2
thicknesses of the two skins, inches
d
= overall thickness of the panel, inches
t
= thickness of the skin considered, inches
lVl
= total applied moment, kip inches
16.2 Panel
16.2.1
Bucklin~
Ri~id Cores. The stress on the skins of a panel, due to axial

compressive load, shall not exceed that given by Clause 8.1 for a slenderness
ratio:
2L
Longitudinal edges unsupported ),
2L
Longitudinal edges supported,
<
w, ),
-L)~3JI/2-
=--[- (
1 + 1.18w
> w,
A = 1.2(i
where L = panel length, inches

w = panel wid th, inches
d
panel thickness, inches
26
C8A STANDARD 8190
16.2.2 Flexible Cores. For flexible core materials the stress obtained
from Clause 16.2.1 shall be divided by:
1+ 2 Fet)
God
stress obtained by applying Clause 16.2.1, ksi
skin thickness, inches
panel thickness, inches
shear modulus of the core, ksi
(
where Fe =
t =
d =
Ge =
16.3 Skin Buckling. The stress in the skin due to axial load, bending
moment, or shear, shall not exceed the value obtained from Clause 8.1 using
a slenderness ratio of:
100
i.
-:-=---;;::-~
where Ee = elastic modulus of the core for stress normal to the surface,
ksi
G e = shear modulus of the core in a plane normal to the skin, ksi
Aluminum skins bonded to more rigid materials, such as timber or
honeycomb cellular cores, may be designed to the safe stress given in
Table 4, so long as the cell width, or the width in the direction of stress of
any unsupported area, does not exceed lOt in extent, where t is the skin
thickness. For larger unsupported areas Clause 12.2 shall apply.
16.4 Bond Strength

16.4.1 Shear. The shear strength of the bond between core and skin,
and of the core itself, shall give a safety factor of 2 on the shear stress
com pu ted by:
V
fs = wd
where V = maximum shear load, kips
w = panel wid th, inches
d = panel thickness, inches
16.4.2 Tension. The ultimate strength of the bond between the skin
and core material, and the ultimate tensile strength of the core material
itself, for a direction of stress normal to the surface, shall not be less than:
3/2
500
kSl
where f = the maximum applied stress in the skin, ksi
17. FASTENER SPACING

17.1 Edge Distance. The distance from the centre of a fastener to the edge
of the material it connects, measured in any direction, shall not be less than
1}4' times the fastener diameter.
17.2 Spacing. The distance between fasteners shall not be less than
times the fastener diameter, nor greater than:
lOOt
1/2
where t = sheet thickness, inches

f = applied compressive stress, ksi
272
f
27
18. FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP

18.1 General. Fabrication and workmanship shall conform to the requirements of CSA Standard S157-1962, The Structural Use of Aluminum in
Building, where applicable.
18.2 Welding - Qualification of Welders. \Velders shall meet the
requirements of CSA Standard W47.2-1967, Aluminum Welding Qualification Code.
-535-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
\II
Copyright NRC-CNRC
NIC
Great Britain
BSI
Hll
N3
3003
l\IC10
D3S
H32
N8
5083
GM41
D54S
H14,
H34
N4
5052
GR20
57S
H16
H9
6063
GS10
50S
T4
H30
6351
T5
H2O
6061
tThis is the customary filler alloy in the USA and can be assumed to have the same properties as GM50R.
tWas GSllR in CSA HA Series-1958.
6053
SGllRt GSllN GS11P

B51S
55S
65S
1\1
P
Great Britain
'vV
UH
~4H
>'2H
*Alcan is discontinuing the use of these designations and is adopting those of the Aluminum Association.
Canada and USA
Tempers
1100
990
2S
USA
Aluminum Association
and ASTM
Canada
CSA - HA Series 1968
Alcan*
Alloys
WP
T6
N6
5356t
N21
4043
GM50R S5
33S
56S
Alloy designations accepted as equivalent to those given in this Standard. Composition and properties may not be identical
in all cases, and the allowable stresses may require some adjustment.
~OTE:
APPENDIX A
EQUIVALENT ALUMINUM ALLOYS
'=
:lI-
:lI-
:lI-
I!.":l
IX>
F
29
DESIGN OF LlGIIT GAUGE ALUMINUM PR.ODUCTS
APPENDIX B
ALLOWABLE STRESSES IN COMPRESSION
(See Clause 8.1)
NOTE:
_ - - - - SG11RT6
_---GM41H32
GS11~-T6
GR20-HH
G~I.t 1-1-1 11:\ ~--..rP>r--.....pilk"""'r'-i
GR20-H32
GSIO-T6
~ICIO-HI6
10
Vi
GSIO-T5 - -
MCIOHI4--
:.::
of----!ir-"
~+----+--'
Q::
!;;
~~-+----r-~---+----~
-l
co
.(
-l
-l
.(
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
SLENDERNESS RATIO, A
-537-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
200
220
-538-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-540-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
f'
PART C
COl\1MENTARIES ON PART 4 OF THE NBC
The commentaries in this Part apply only to the size and occupancy classification of
buildings regulated by Part 4.
C1.
C2.
C3.
C4.
CS.
C6.
C7.
Wind Loads by A. G. Davenport and W. A. Dalgliesh

Snow Loads by W. R. Schriever, D. A. Lutes and B. G. W. Peter
Earthquake Loads by R. H. Ferahian
Serviceability Criteria for Deflections and Vibrations by D. E. Allen
Ponding Loads on Flat Roofs by D. E. Allen
Load Combinations for Structural Design by D. E. Allen
Structural Integrity by D. E. Allen, W. R. Schriever and W. G.
Plewes
C8. Temperature Changes in Building Components by W. R. Schriever
-541-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
r
SUPPLEMENT No. 4
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
COMMENTARY NO.1
WIND LOADS
by
A. G.
DAVENPORT
Director, Boundary Layer Wind Tunnel Laboratory

University of Western Ontario, London
and
W. A.
DALGLIESH
Building Structures Section

Division of Building Research
National Research Council of Canada
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Reference Wind Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 544
Exposure Factor .............................................. 545
Gust Effect Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 546
Sample Calculation of Gust Effect Factor ........................ 547
Vortex Shedding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 548
Pressure Coefficien ts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 549
Rounded Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 549
Icing ......................................................... 549
Structural Members, Trusses ............................. " .... 550
Shielding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 550
Lateral Deflection of Tall Buildings Under Wind Loading .......... 550
Construction Stages ........................................... 550
References ................................................... 550
SUPPLEMENT No.4
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
COMMENTARY NO.1
WIND LOADS
by
A. G. Davenport and W. A. Dalgliesh
Three different approaches to the problem of determining design wind loads on buildings
are mentioned in Subsection 4.1.6., "Effects of Wind", of the 1970 edition of the National
Building Code(t).
The first approach, called "simple procedure", is similar to that in the 1965 and 1960
editions of the NBC. It is supplied along with numerical values for all the factors involved,
except for climatic data (given in Reference 2, the tables of which are contained in Part D
of this Supplement for the convenience of the user) and pressure coefficients (given in this
Commentary). This simple procedure gives approximately the same wind pressures and
suctions as the earlier editions and is intended for the majority of buildings for which wind
loading doe!'! not have a major effect on the structural design.
The two other approaches to wind load analysis are referred to in Article 4.1.6.2. of the
1970 NBC, where the designer is required to use either (a) special wind tunnel tests or
other experimental methods, or (b) a dynamic approach to the action of wind gusts to be
called "detailed procedure", whenever the building is likely to be susceptible to windinduced vibration. This may be true, for example, of tall and slender structures or doubly
cantilevered canopies, for which wind loading plays a major role in the structural design.
Background information on the need for, and development of, new and more accurate
methods of predicting wind loading effects on structures can be found in references 3, 4 and 5.
Special wind tunnel tests in which the relevant properties of the building plus immediate
surroundings and of the oncoming flow must be adequately represented are recommended
whenever the cost, the unusual nature of the building or site, or other such considerations
can justify the expense involved. For many cases for which the simple procedure is inadequate, however, there is still no clear indication of the need for a special wind tunnel test.
The third approach, the "detailed procedure", was devised(6) specifically for this intermediate category of wind loading problems, although it can be used in other situations if
its scope and limitations are recognized. The detailed procedure consists of a series of
calculations involving (i) the intensity of wind turbulence for the site as a function of
height and of the surface roughness of the surrounding terrain, and (ii) properties of the
building sllch as height, width, natural frequency of vibration and damping. The endproduct of the calculations is the gust effect factor, Cu, which is multiplied by the reference
wind pressure, g, and the exposure factor, CII , to give that static design pressure which
is expected to produce the same peak load effect as the actual turbulent wind for the
appropriate probability level. The format of the simple procedure in the NBC has been
arranged to permit an easy transition to this more detailed consideration of wind effects.
REFERENCE WIND SPEED, V, AND PRESSURE, q

The reference wind speed, V, is determined by extreme value analysis of meteorological
observations of hourly mean wind speeds, taken at sites (usually airports) chosen in most
cases to be representative of a height of 30 ft in an open exposure. The reference wind pressure, g, is determined from V by the following equation:
g (in psf) = C ii1
(1)
The factor C depends on the atmospheric pressure and the air temperature. The atmospheric pressure in turn is influenced mainly by elevation above sea level, but also varies
somewhat in accordance with changes in the weather.
The following value of C is chosen to represent Canadian conditions:
if is in miles per hour, C=0.0027
if is in feet per second, C = 0.00125
r
r
The Climatic Information Supplement (Supplement No.1) to the 1970 edition of the
NBC contains a description of the procedures followed in obtaining the reference wind
pressures, g, for three different levels of probability of being exceeded per year (1/10, 1/30
and 1/100), that is, the values commonly referred to as having return periods of 10, 30
--..
---------------~---'-"""."..
r-
"-'".".
and 100 years respectively. These values of q are tabulated in Supplement No.1 for many
Canadian locations along with other climatic design data; these tables are contained ir.
Part D of this Supplement for the convenience of the user. A reference giving more detail
on the choice of the conversion factor, C, from wind speed to velocity and a table for
converting from pressure in pounds per sq uare foot to speed in feet per second are also
supplied in Supplement No.1 to the NBC.
EXPOSURE FACTOR, C,
Simple Procedure
s
.1
I)
l,
)
s
1
1
e
r
In the simple procedure of the 1970 Code(l) the exposure factor, C., is exactly the same
as the old height factor, C", in the earlier editions of the Code. The name has been changed
to describe better the function of this factor when applied in the detailed analytical procedure where it reflects not only changes in wind speed with height, but also the effects of
variations in the surrounding terrain. For the simple procedure, CIS is based on the 1/5
power law which is appropriate for wind gust pressures in open terrain (1/10 power law for
wind gust speeds). The Wind gust referred to is thought to last about 3 to 5 seconds and to
represent a "parcel" of wind which is assumed effective over the whole of most ordinary
buildings.
Detailed Procedure
For the detailed procedure the exposure factor, CIS' is based on the mean wind speed
profile, which varies considerably depending on the general roughness of the terrain over
which the wind has been blowing before it reaches the building. This dependence on terrain
is much more significant than is the case for the gust speed profile, i.e., variation of gust
speed with height, and hence three categories have been established as follows.
Exposure A (open or standard exposure).--open level terrain with only scattered buildings, trees or other obstructions, open water or shorelines thereof. This is the exposure on
which the reference wind speeds are based.
C.
Z)O.28
= (30
' C"
~ 1. O.
(2)
Exposure B.-suburban and urban areas, wooded terrain, or centres of large towns.
CIS
Z)O.IiO
= 0.6 (60
' C. ~ 0.5.
(3)
Exposure C.-centres of large cities with heavy concentrations of tall buildings. At

least 50 per cent of the buildings should exceed four storeys.
CIS = 0.4
c~or72,
C"
0.4.
(4)
In Equations (2) to (4), Z is the height above ground in feet.

Exposure B or C should not be used unless the appropriate terrain roughness persists
in the upwind direction for at least one mile, and the exposure factor should be varied
according to the terrain if the roughness differs from one direction to another. Abrupt
changes in ground slope near the building site may result in significantly higher wind speeds
than over level ground, and thus exposure A may have to be applied in such situations
even though the surface roughness may seem appropriate for B or C.
Use of Exposure Factors

Exposure factors can be calculated from Equations (2) to (4) or obtained directly from
the graphs in Figure Cl-l. They should be applied to the wind pressure rather than to
speed; where it is necessary to determine the hourly mean wind speed at height, k, use the
square root of CIS'
The exposure factor is needed in three different capacities in the detailed procedure.
First, the square root of CIS is needed to determine the hourly mean wind speed at the top
of the structure being designed, VH:
VH= iT . VC;
(5)
The reference wind speed iT can be obtained from the reference wind pressure and the
conversion table in Supplement No.1 or by applying Equation (1).
Secondly, CIS appears in Equation (7) used for calculating the gust effect factor, Cgo
Here again, C. is calculated using the height H of the structure.
Thirdly, CIS is used in the calculation of pressure coefficients for the windward and leeward faces of tall, slender buildings. For the windward face, CIS varies continuously with
the height, Z, to the elevation in question; for the leeward face, C. is evaluated once at ~
the height, H, of the building.
GUST EFFECT FACTOR, CD

Simple Procedure
The implied gust effect factor of the earlier editions of the Code varied from 2.04 at 60
mph design gust wind speed to 1.84 at 120 mph design gust wind speed, and was the same
whether the whole structure was being designed, or some part of it such as a window or a
wall panel. In the 1970 NBC(l) the gust effect factor for the simple procedure is 2.0 for the
structure as a whole, and 2.5 for cladding or windows. On the other hand, the consequences
of wind damage to cladding are less serious than structural damage and the risk may be
considered acceptably small if a probability of 1/10 is used for cladding design wind pressures
rather than the 1/30 or 1/100 specified for design of the structure. The net result is that,
although smaller, more severe gusts can be expected over small areas (and hence a larger
gust effect factor of 2.5 is specified) the use of a more probable (and hence lower) reference
wind pressure gives approximately the same design pressure for a panel or window as for
the structure.
Detailed Procedure
The calculation procedure for the gust effect factor, Cg , is given in detail below, including
a sample calculation of Cg worked out in complete detail. In the detailed procedure the
gust effect factor is the ratio of the expected peak loading effect to the mean loading effect.
Cg therefore makes allowances for the variable effectiveness of different sizes of gusts and
the load magnification effect caused by gusts in resonance with the structure vibrating as
a single-degree-of-freedom cantilever. Co is defined as follows:
Cg =1+g (;)
(6)
where
(T = standard deviation of total loading effect
M= mean value of total loading effect
g = peak factor of total loading effect.
The standard deviation divided by the mean, (T/M, is the "coefficient of variation" for the
total loading effect:
(7)
where
=a factor related to the surface roughness coefficient of the terrain
K
=0.08 for Exposure A
=0.10 for Exposure B
=0.14 for Exposure C
=exposure factor, previously defined, obtained from Figure C1-1
=background turbulence factor, obtained from Figure Cl-2 as a function of height
H and width D of the windward face of the structure
=size reduction factor, obtained from Figure C1-3 as a function of the ratio of
s
width D to height H of the windward face of the structure and the reduced
frequency.
F =gust energy ratio at the natural frequency of the structure, obtained from Figure
C1-4 as a function of the wave number (natural frequency (cycles/sec) divided
by mean wind speed Cft/sec) at height H of structure)
= critical damping ratio.
Suggested values for buildings are 0.01 for steel frames and 0.02 for reinforced concrete
frames. On the other hand, the critical damping ratio for welded steel stacks may go as
low as 0.001 for moderate amplitudes of displacement. Prestressed concrete structures
having no microcracks due to tension may also have very low values for structural damping.
The peak factor, g in Eqtiation (6), gives the number of standard deviations by which
the peak load effect is expected to exceed the mean load effect, and is given in Figure C1-S
as a function of the average fluctuation rate. The average fluctuation rate, U, can be estimated as follows:
(8)
\\'h,,;;:,"
:ldtural frequency of vibrati,on, cycles/sec.

s, F, p, B as defined for Fqllation (7).
1:,}
r
Explanatory Notes Regarding q/J1. and g
The response of a tall, slender building to a randomly fluctuating force can be evaluated
rather simply by treating it as a rigid, spring~mounted cantilever whose dynamical properties are specified by a single natural frequency and an appropriate damping value. The
variance of the output quantity, or loadin~ effect, is the area under the spectrum of the
input quantity (the forcing function) after It has been multiplied by the transfer function.
The transfer function is the square of the wel1~known dynamic load magnification factor
for a one~degree~of-freedom oscillating mechanical system.
In the case of wind as the random input, the spectrum of the wind speed must first be
multiplied by another transfer function, called the "aerodynamic admittance function"
which in effect describes how the turbulence in the wind is modified by its encounter with
the building, at least insofar as its ability to produce a loading effect on the structure is
concerned.
For the purposes of calculating trIp., the spectrum of the wind speed is represented by an
algebraic expression based on observations of real wind. The aerodynamic admittance
function is also an algebraic expressi on, computedon the basis of somewhat simplified assumptions but appearing to be in reasonable agreement with the limited experimental
evidence at present available. The spectrum of wind speed is a function of frequency having
the shape of a rather broad hump (Figure Cl-4). The effect of the aerodynamic admittance
is to reduce the ordinates of the curve to the right of the hump more and more as the frequency increases. This is partly a reflection of the reduced effectiveness of small gusts in
loading a large area. The effect of the dynamic load magnification factor, or mechanical
admittance, is to create a new peak, or hump, centred at the natural frequency of the structure, usually well to the right of the broad peak which represents the maximum density
of input power of the wind.
The area under the loading effect spectrum, the square root of which is the coefficient
of variation trIp., is taken as the sum of two components: the area under the broad hump,
which must be integrated numerically for each structure, and the area under the resonance
peak, for which a single analytic expression is available. These components are represented
10 Equation (7) by Band sFI/3 respectively. The factor KICII can be thought of as scaling
the result for the appropriate input turbulence level. If resonance effects are small, then
sFI/3 will be small compared to the background turbulence B and vice versa. Note that
although CII is normally a function of height, in Equation (7) it is evaluated at a particular
height (usually H, the hei.vht of the building) and is treated as a single-valued parameter
for calculating CuIf this method for calculating Cu is used for buildings or parts of buildings that are not
well represented by the simple model of a rigid cantilever oscillating about a spring-mounted
base, additional sources of error will be introduced, although these are perhaps not very
important when resonance effects are small. In the absence of a more precise analysis the
present method can serve as a guide to the peak gust loading on buildings that are not
tall and slender, or even for windows or wall panels located on the windward sides of buildings. In considering a portion of the windward face, use the dimensions of the element
for D and H in Equations (7) and (8), the natural frequency of the element itself for no,
and the velocity Vz (where Z is the height of the element above ground) rather than VB,
the velocity at the top of the structure. Similarly, CII should in this case be evaluated at
height Z for Equation (7).
The peak factor, g, depends on the average number of times the mean value of the loading
effect is crossed during the averaging time of one hour (3600 seconds). The functional
relationship in Figure CI-5 was shown by Davenport(7) to hold when the probability distribution of the mean loading effect was normal (Gaussian).
As stated in Article 4.1.6.3. of the 1970 Code, structures must be able to withstand
partial, or unbalanced loading as well as the full design load. All structures, particularly
those susceptible to unbalanced loading due to wind, such as double overhang girders and
canopies, members subject to stress reversal, and structures with broad frontal area, should
be capable of withstanding the effects of a reduced dynamic factor equal to 0.75 Cu acting
over any portion of the structure.
Sample Calculation of Cg
To illustrate the calculation of a gust effect factor the following sample problem will be
worked in detail:
Required: To obtain the gust effect factor for a building with the following properties:
Height
- 600 ft
Whlth
-100ft
Depth
- 100 ft
Fundamental natural frequency
0.2 cps
Critical damping ratio
0.015
Terrain for site
Exposure B
Reference wind
at 30 ft open terrain 90 ft/sec.
Step 1: Calculate required parameters

Mean wind speed at top of building V600, from Eq. (5)
=90 X V1.90 = 123 ft/sec. (figure C1-l)
Aspect ratio D/H = 100/600 =0.17
Wave number for calculation of F: no/Veoo=0.00163
Reduced frequency for calculation of s:
nJI/V6OO=0.975
Step 2: Calculate (I/p., from Eq. (7)
(1) K =0.10 for Exposure B
(2) C, = 1.90 (from Fig. C1-1)
(3) B =0.62 (from Fig. Cl-2)
(4) s =0.11 (from Fig. C1-3)
(5) F =0.28 (from Fig. C1-4)
(6) fJ =0.015 (given)
(7)
(1/
~!Y-0-.1-0(-0-6-2-+-0-.-11-X-0-.2-8) = 0.375
,1.90'
p.
0.015
Step 3: Calculate u, from Eq. (8)

(1) no = 0.2 cycles/sec. (given)
(2) v
0.2
0.11 XO.28
= 0.17 5/sec.
"0.11 X 0.28 + 0.015 X 0.62
Step 4: Obtain peak factor g:

(1) g=3.75 (from Fig. C1-5)
Step 5: Cg (from Eq. (6) )=1+3.75XO.375=2.41
VORTEX SHEDDING
Slender exposed structural elements and tall slender cylindrical structures such as chimney
stacks, observation towers, and in some cases, high-rise buildings, should be designed to
resist the dynamic effects of vortex shedding. When the wind blows across a slender prismatic or cylindrical body, vortices are shed alternately from one side and then the other
giving rise to a fluctuating force acting at right angles to the wind direction along the length
of the body. A structure may be considered slender in this context if the ratio of height to
diameter exceeds 5. The frequency n of the vortex shedding and of the force fluctuations
is given by:
(9)
n =the frequency, cycles/sec.

S=the Strouhal number given below
V = the mean wind speed, ft/sec.
D = the diameter, ft.
For circular cylinders
S=0.18 for R e < 2 X 1O~
S=0.25 for R,> 2 X 10'
where
where, Reynolds' number, R.
VD X 1~.
For bodies with angular sections such as a rectangular, rolled steel shape and the like,
S=0.15.
If the structure is free to oscillate in the plane normal to the wind, large oscillations
will develop when the vortex shedding frequency is resonant with the natural frequency
of the structure. The dynamic influence will be approximately equivalent to the influence
of a static force per unit height, FL, acting in the direction of oscillations:
FL=
0;/ C~ qcr
(10)
where
fJ
CL
qcr
=the critical damping ratio as defined for Eq. (7).

=0.2 for circular cylinders
=velocity pressure for the mean wind speed which produces resonance.
For tapered stacks there is some reduction in the effective length over which thf> vortex
shedding forces act. If the diameter of a section of the stack at height Z is Dz then the
velocity at which vortices are shed from this section resonant with the structure is given
by the Equation (9), where n is set equation to the resonance frequency of the stack. The
F
height over which these resonant eddy sh~~ct(1mg forces then act is determined by the
of stack over which the diameter only changes
5 per cent from the value D z.
on tapered stacks the vortex excitation can take
over a range of wind velocities
sponding to the variation in diameter of the
For each velocity the fluctuation
only acts over a limited section of the stack.
PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS
Pressure coefficients are the non-dimensional
of ,,"ind-induced pressures on a buildthe wind speed that would be measured
ing to the dynamic pressure (velocity pressure)
(usually) at the top of the building in the undisturbed air stream. Pressures on the surfaces
of structures vary considerably with the shape. wind direction and the profile of the wind
velocity. Pressure coefficients are usually determined from wind tunnel experiments on
small-scale building models, although in a few recent instances measurements on full-scale
cases tha t these pressures be measurbuildings have been used directly. I t is essen tial in
ed in a wind tunnel in which the correct velocity
is simulated; experiments in uniform
flow can be highly misleading lU).
The pressure coefficients given in Figures Cl-6 to Cl-20 are all time-averaged values,
that is, they refer to the mean value of the pressure on a surface. In addition, all pressure
coefficients except the local pressure coefficients Cp '" usually represent a spatially averaged
pressure. The local maximum and minimum
acting over a small area are designated by Cp * and are appropriate for cladding
'I
)
The internal pressure coefficients Cpi define the

of wind on the air pressure inside
the building and are necessary for the design of
and secondary supporting members
for wall and roof systems. Like the external pressure coefficients, the Cpi are time-averaged
values, but unless there are large openings joining the interior to regions of extreme wind
speed, pressure or suction (windward and side walls) the maximum instantaneous internal
pressures will not be appreciably different from the time-averages. On the other hand, if
the permeability of the building is gradually increased, the gustiness in the wind will have
an increasing effect in causing peaks and lulls in the internal pressure. At present it must
be left to the designer to decide in doubtful cases whether or not the gust effect factor Cg
should be applied to internal pressure coefficients (formula (b) in Sentence 4.1.6.1.(2) of
the NBC).
Values of pressure coefficients sufficient for general purposes for two classes of structures
are given in Figures Cl-6 to Cl-8. The pressure coefficients, unless otherwise noted, are
based on the velor:ity pressures at the top of the building. Pressure coefficients for various
other structures that have been tested in turbulent shear flows may be obtained from reference 8.
Figures Cl-9 to C1-20 are based on wind tunnel
in which the correct velocity
should therefore be regarded with a
profile and wind turbulence were not simulated
certain measure of caution. These figures are the same as in Tables 20 to 31 in the 1961
and 1965 editions of Supplement No.3 for use with the 1960 and 1965 National Building
Codes respectively, except for some deletions, and a few corrections. They are based on
the Swiss Association of Engineers and Architects Standards, S.I.A., No. 160, published
in 1956(10).
Rounded Structures
For rounded structures (in contrast to sharp-edged structures) the pressures vary with
the wind velocity, depending on the Reynolds' number, Re. (defined following Eq. (9,
In Figures Cl-ll, Cl-12, Cl-15, and Cl-20, which have been translated and reproduced
from the Swiss
(10), the Reynolds' number is expressed by dvqwhere d is the diameter
of the sphere or
in feet and q is the velocity pressure in pounds per square foot.
To convert to R e, multiply dVq by 1.8 X 105
The roughness of rounded structures may be of
importance. Common
well-laid brickwork without parging can be considered as
a "moderately smooth"
surface (Figure C1-11). Surfaces with ribs projecting more than per cent of the diameter
are considered as "very rough". In case of doubt, it is recommended to use those Cn values
which result in the greater forces. For cylindrical and spherical objects with substantial
stiffening ribs, supports, and attached structural members,
pressure coefficients depend
on the type, location, and relative magnitude of these
Icin~
In locations where the strongest winds and icing may
members, cables and ropes must be calculated assuming an
and local experience. For the iced condition values of
wire cables for a "rough" surface should be used.
en
-549-
simultaneously. structural
covering based on climatic
in Table Cl-15 for thick
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Structural Members, Trusses, etc.

In Figures C1-16, C1-17, C1-19, and C1-20 pressure coefficients with the subscript
are used to indicate that they apply to structural members of infinite lengths and this is
multiplied by a reduction factor k for finite lengths of members. If a member projects
from a large plate or wall, the reduction factor k should be calculated for a slenderness
based on twice the actual length. If a member terminates with both ends in large plates
or walls, the reduction factors for infinite length should be used.
(Xl
Shielding,
For members that are located behind each other in the direction of the wind the shielding
effect may be taken into account. The windward member and those parts of the leeward
member that are not shielded should be designed with the full pressure q, whereas the
shielded parts of the leeward member should be designed with the reduced pressure lJ.z
according to Figure C1-18.
For constructions made from circular sections with dv'i< 2.5 and A./A ::::;;0.3, the shielding
factors can be taken by approximation from Figure C1-18. If dv'q>2.5, the shielding
effect is small and for a solidity ratio A./A ::::;;0.3, it can be taken into account by a constant
shielding factor k:r; =0.95.
LATERAL DEFLECTION OF TALL BUILDINGS UNDER WIND

LOADING
Lateral deflection of tall buildings under wind loading may require consideration from
the standpoints of serviceability or comfort criteria. There is a general trend toward more
flexible structures, partly because adequate strength can now be achieved by using higher
strength materials that may not provide a corresponding increase in stiffness.
One symptom of unserviceability may be the cracking of masonry and interior finishes.
Unless precautions are taken to permit movement of interior partitions without damage
a maximum lateral deflection limitation of 1/250 to 1/1000 of the building height should
be specified. According to Sentence 4.1.1.5.(3) of the 1970 NBC, 1/500 should be used
unless a detailed analysis is made.
When the amplitude of acceleration reaches about 1 per cent of the acceleration due to
gravity (1/3 ft/sec 2) the building movement may be perceptible(ll, 12). The lateral deflection
of a tall building in response to turbulent wind action consists of a fluctuation about a
mean deflected position with maximum lateral accelerations usually occurring at the funda
mental resonant frequency of the building. The peak acceleration in the direction of the
wind can be related to the maximum lateral deflection by the following approximation:
A =
(4rno2g~KSF).1
ell
C.13
(11)
where
A
.1
CII
no
Cg
= peak acceleration in wind direction, ft/sec 2

=maximum lateral deflection, ft
= gust effect factor, previously defined
=fundamental natural frequency (cycles/second)
=exposure factor, previously defined
g, K, s, F, 13 = defined previously in connection with Eq. (7).
CONSTRUCTION STAGES
It should also be noted that the shape of a structure may change during erection. The
wind loads, therefore, may be temporarily higher during erection than after completion
of the structure(13). These increased wind loads should be taken into account using the
appropriate coefficients from Figures C1-6 to C1-20.
References
(1) National Building Code of Canada, 1970. National Research Council of Canada
Associate Committee on the National Building Code, Ottawa, NRC No. 11246.
(2) Climatic Information for Building Design in Canada. Supplement No.1 to the Na
tional Building Code of Canada, 1970. National Research Council of Canada,
Associate Committee on the National Building Code, Ottawa, NRC 11153.
(3) Dalgliesh, W. A. and \V. R. Schriever. Recent Research on Wind Forces on Tall
Buildings. Proc., Canadian Structural Engineering Conference, Toronto, 19/20
February 1968, University of Toronto Press.
s
s
s
s
gj
5
5
(4) Davenport, A. G. New Approaches to the Design of Structures Against Wind Action.
Proc., Canadian Structural Engineering Conference, Toronto, 19/20 February
1968, University of Toronto Press.
(5) Proceedings, International Research Seminar on Wind Effects on Buildings and
Structures. Ottawa, 1967-published September 1968 by University of Toronto
Press.
(6) Davenport, A. G. Gust Loading Factors. Journal Structural Division, Proc., Am.
Soc. Civ. Engrs., Vol. 93, June 1967, pp. 12-34.
(7) Davenport, A. G. Note on the Distribution of the Largest Value of a Random Function
with Application to Gust Loading. Proc., Institution Civil Engineers, Vol. 28,
June 1964, p. 187-196. London.
(8) Jensen, M. and N. Franck. Model Scale Tests in Turbulent Wind, Part II. Danish
Technical Press, Copenhagen, 1965.
(9) Leutheusser, H. J. and W. D. Baines. Similitude Problems in Building Aerodynamics.
Journal of Hydraulics Division, Proc., Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs., Vol. 93, May 1967,
p.35-49.
(10) Normen fur die Belastungsannehmen, die Inbetriebnahme und die Uberwachung
der Bauten. (Standards for Load Assumptions, Acceptance and Inspection of
Structures). Schweizerischer Ingenieur und Architekten Verein (Swiss Association
of Engineers and Architects), No. 160, Zurich, Switzerland, 1956.
(11) Chang, F. K. Wind and Movement in Tall Buildings. Civil Engineering, Am. Soc.
Civ. Engrs., VoL 37, p. 70-72, August 1967.
(12) Vossers, G. Fundamentals of the Behaviour of Ships in \Vaves. International Shipbuilding Progress, VoL 9, No. 93, May 1962, p. 197-230.
(13):;"Walshe, D. E. Measurements of Wind Force"on a Model of a Power Station Boiler
House at Various Stages of Erection. National Physical Laboratory, NPL Aero
Report 1165, September 1965, Teddington, England.
-551-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
1000
800
300
c; 200
0:::
(.!)
>
0
al
<
I::J:
(.!)
L!.I
:I:
II
100
80
"
it J
E~
BV r{
~/'
~
J
II
1/
60
50
40
III
II ,
II
1/
EXPOSURE C, V
0
LI.I
V~
I
/
;::)
,. III I
till
U-
600
500
400
I-
I
I
IJ
"
..l
I~~
30
I
20
1-11-1-
10
1
.2
.3.4.5.6.81
10
EXPOSURE FACTOR, Ce
Figure Cl-l
Exposure factor as a function of terrain roughness and height above

ground
r
1000 ~~=4~+=~~==~=r==c=~~==~~~~
:::
500
400
I-
u....
,,"""~----'3I1r+-->!r-+
4/3 f[;O~O~~~o ][,
~~~~~~~+-~~
~XO~ ][,
:,>4/3]
dx
--__~--__--r__T--~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~--+--4--~--r--+--~~--~
200
U.I
0:::
:::>
I-
:::>
0:::
l-
100
V')
u....
0
80
I-
:c
<.!)
60
U.I
:c
50
40
30
20
10 ~~--~~--~--~~--~~--~--~~~~~~~
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
BACKGROUND TURBULENCE FACTOR, B
Figure Cl-2
Background turbulence factor as a function of width and height of structure
-553-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
...I
VI
VI
Copyright NRC-CNRC
0::::
I.I.J
U
:::J
I.I.J
LL..
0::::
I.I.J
C1
:::J
I.I.J
:z
>-
c:
xl >:1:
. 002
1'-..
~-..
.02 .03
I"
f'
1'",-
"'~
~,
"'~
'\
""\.
I,
.2
I"r\ 1\
\.
,
"
.3 .4.5.7
~~
1"-
i\ ~~
~\ ~ ~ ~~
'"
"I"
I\.
"
,
1\
"~ r\~
"I\..
"-"~
1"'-
'""-"" "
~~
", 1'- '\
~r\.
I"
,
,
i ' '"
""" , ""
,q~
... ,
.05.07.1
"-
"',,-
"-
"'"'
O.~ ~
f'
SIZE REDUCTION FACTOR,
.007.01
~"
I~
"" ~
r"""
",
Size reduction factor as a function of width, height and reduced frequency of structure
. 004
'" '""
1.0
""~
1BnoH ] [
110noD ]
1+~
1+v;-
r--~
~""
'"
~""
"'
,
"
"" 'OS
=~.~
~t....
I' ~t....
~,
.... ~
D/H
"'
s-~[
- 3
.... ~
'-
,~
'" ~
Figure Cl-3
'"
1
.001
.2
.3
5
4
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
1.0
VI
VI
VI
Copyright NRC-CNRC
.2
07
.0
.0
.0
"
~".
., .... '" '-oL-....
10- 4
~. 04
t;; . 05
I...L.I
~.
e::::
(!)
>- 1
<
e::::
I-
LL...
.3
.5
.4
.7
1.0
1/ ",...
vl~
x2 )
4/3
"'-
""'11110.
Gust energy ratio as a function of wave number
"' '" '-
"--..
nO/VH
8 10- 2
"
WAVES/FT,
'"' '- ~1Io..
WAVE NUMBER,
8 10- 3
, -..-,
"- ..
(4000 no/V H )
(1 +
Figure C14
Xo
F ..
x2
-- "'-
'"
IaCtOr as a function 01 width, height and reduced frequency of structure
-~ '--.
u:um.:uon
8 10- 1
'-II
'-II
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Cl
a..
LLJ
:::.::::
LI...
IU
e::::
. 02
1.0
2. 0
3. 0
4. 0
5.0
6. 0
. 04
...
-- e
.4
.6.81.0
2.
Figure Cl-5
f 17 tttt
tts -
'Mitome - '-c?'''
4.
6.
f"'>f.tr*,*Hn\Jt.J"'&flli[WiWbM&#8'1#t::fttiMt&ir-ifli,Wryw:*'!lii"'i,(fuMt')&;Y\f2-ftt~k\TM'- -ill,,-Fffl'';:%hNt-i-39>it%'!t1:iiMXft+'
Peak factor as a function of average fluctuation rate
V, AVERAGE FLUCTUATION RATE, CYCLES/SECOND
.2
'-'
..
0.577
)2 log v T +
e
/2 log 1.IT
...-
T = 3600 sec.
------
.06.08.1
-I.-
----t
Cp
+0.7
ELEVATION OF BUILDING
+0.8
+0.4
o
-0.4
0..
(..)
-0.8
~O.'6,
I~""""y
1.0 tan a,
rise
run
~ c1 varies dependi ng on
surroundings - roof
should be checked for
the range of pressures
and suctions indicated
by the shaded area
-1. 2
-1. 6
GRAPH OF Cp FOR WINDWARD ROOF SURFACE,

WIND NORMAL TO RI DGE
Figure Cl-6
Pitched roof buildings of height less than twice the width
Notes to Figure Ct-6

1. Wind parallel to ridge: Use D as width and proceed as in the case of a flat roof (tan a = 0)
2. Wind normal to ridge: The width is B (not shown on the figure, see Figure Cl-8) and values of Cp for windward roof surface must be read from the graph below the figure.
3. Wind at an angle to the ridge: Normally does not give the most serious loading of building as a whole but
does produce severe local suctions along the edges of the roof surface. For local suction maxima on roofs.
use the Cp * given in Figure Cl-S. These local maximum coefficients Cp *, should be considered for the design
of roofing attachment but need not be added to the Cp for determining over-all loads.
4. End walls: (those walls parallel to the wind direction), Cp are given in Figure Cl-S.
5. Interior pressure: Coefficients Cpi, are given in Figure Cl-S.
6. Eaves: Positive pressure on the windward wall also causes an upward force on roof overhangs which should
be considered in addition to suction from above.
7. Exposure factor: For calculating C., exposure factor use height H.
-557-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Cp
-1.0
-0.5
CP '" 0.8
'-..-----~r=======~--~-------~
ELEVATION OF BUILDING
Figure Cl-7
Flat roof buildings of height greater than twice the width
Notes to Flaure Ct-?

1. Wind perpendicular to one wall: For width use the dimension perpendicular to the wind direction.
2. Wind at an angle to the Ulall: This condition produces high local suctions at the leading edge of the wall
which isat a slight angle to the wind. The coefficient Cp applies over the shaded area on the figure for the
design of cladding, but need not be considered in conjunction with the Cp for over-all loading. The coefficient Cp for the roof are given in Figure Cl-S.
3. End walls: Pressure coefficients for end walls (parallel to wind direction) are given in Figure Cl-8.
4. Interior pressure: Coefficients Cpl for interior pressures are given in Figure Cl-S.
S. Exposure factor: For the calculation of exposure factor C use ~ the height H for the leeward wall, the
height H for the roof, and the actual height Z to the level under consideration for the windward wall.
6. Height HI: The height to which C. is constant is 30 ft for the simplified method and exposure A, 40 ft for
exposure B, and 100 ft for exposure C.
Cp
-0.7
- O. 7
l~
0.1 D
.1
PLAN VIEW OF BUILDING
l.
INTERIOR PRESSURES
Cpi
Openings mainly in windward

wa II.
+0. 7
2. Openings mainly in leaward
-0.5
wa II.
Figure Cl-8
3.
Openings mainly in walls

parallel to wind direction
-0.7
4.
Openings uniformly distributed

in all 4 walls
-0. 3
End wall pressure coefficients, local suction maxima on the roof, and
interior pressures for use with Figures Cl-6 and Cl-7
Notes to Flllure CI-8

1. Local mazimum suttions: The coefficients Cp * for the roof surface occur for wind at an angle to one corner,
and are used in the design of the roofing itself and its anchorage to the structure. Cp * are not to be added
to the Cp for determining total uplift on the roof.
2. End walls: The end walls are the ones parallel to the wind direction and have a uniform pressure distribution
over the whole building height except for local maximum suction as indicated in Figure C1-7.
3. Exposure factor: For the calculation of the exposure factor C., for end walls, use the total height H of the
building.
-559-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
20
CLOSED PASSAGE
BETWEEN LARGE WALLS
n:b:l : 1:1:10
EXTERNAL PRESSURE
COEFFICIENTS
pe
C .: INTERNAL PRESSURE
pl
COEFFICIENTS
=0
OPENINGS
Figure Cl-9
2I
FREE STANDING
PLATES, WALLS
AND BILLBOARDS
Uniformly distributed
-0,5
Predominating on side "A"
+0,7
Predominating on side "B"

Predominating on side "C"
-1. 1
-1. 3
Closed passage between large walls
' q. h L
n
- FORCE COEFF. FOR
F n ::: C
C
P-i
EI;gl/hct
~fn fi1
n
WALLS ABOVE GROUND
l/h
-0
a :::. sl
10+00
End wAils)
2.,0
=40
a :::. 3L
10
1.3
1. IS
1.6
=SO
a =, 4L
1.8
C - FORCE COEFF, FOR

n
WALLS ON THE GROUND
h~/h=l
l/h
&~d::;
10
L I p :::0
1 2.
1. Z. 1. 1
IFn I
a=.SL
I
0.1.
f:> =40
r-a =, 3L
I, 5
~~
~p~=5=0~r---+---~~
~
.a =.4L
1.5
Figure Cl-l0
Free standing plates, walls and billboards
-560-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
22
d.h
F
C n q C e A where A
C , FORCE COEFFICIENT FOR
d,/7f>25
n
Slenderness hid
--II"'
2.S
7
1
Cn
Cn
Cn
Cross sect. and roughness
TOTAL FORCE
CYLINDERS,
CHIMNEYS,
TANKS
hid. 25
Moderately smooth,
0.7
(metal, timber, concrete~
0.6
O.~
Rough surface
(rounded ribs h
0.9
O.S
0, 7
Very rough surface

(sharp ribs h
S%d)
1.2.
1.0
O.S
Smooth and rough

surface sharp edges
1.4
1.2.
1.0
:0
~~ tliao~'",~i
. o
_
~
C'I
II
-I
('4
h"
~-cr
t-,..c:.3d
:0"
.r:
Pl
1=00:
,_
"
t+l
.-~.-
L /d ol=
50
Cpe
14
2.
C pe
C pe
CQ.e: EXTERNAL PRESS. COEFF. FOR

h/d
2.5
= 2.%d)
d..rq> 2.5
and moderately smooth surface
90 105 0112.0' 13S ISO' 165" 180

O' 15 30 45' 60'
+1.0 +0. sl+O. 1 -0.9 -1. 9 -2.. S -2..6 -1.91-0.9 -0.7 -0.6 0.6 1-0.6
+1. 0 +0.8 +0.1 -O.S -1. 7 -2..2. -2..2. -1.71-0.S -0.6 -0. 5 O. 5 0,5
7S0
+1.0 +0. sl+o. 1 -0,7 -1. 2. -1. 6 -1. 7 -1. 2.1-0. 7 -0. S -0.4
Stack fully operating C pi +0, 1
Cpl. ' q
Pi
-0,8
Stack throttled C pi
Pe C pe ' q
0.4
0.4
Ap
=Pi
- Pe
Figure Cl-11
23
SPHERES
Cylinders, chimneys and tanks
F = C
TOTAL FORCE
for
dfq>
' q' C e ' A;
A=
rrt'Z
1'2 and moderately smooth surface
C n: FORCE COEFFICIENT
C
Pi for closed tanks = working press,
pe
0.2.
d {(l>
EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFF. for
Figure Cl-12
1'2.
and moderately
smooth surface
Spheres
-561-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
,
I
24
.1
HANGAR, CURVED ROOF

C :
MOO. SMOOTH SURFACEpe
RAO.
r~%b h:b:L .. I:I'2:12
~b
if
A-~/BJ
/
0 ~
AN'
P
Q
ARE.A TO 5CALe
Figure Cl-13
25
C
L
P
A
B
D
M
0
Q
N
90 -0.3 -0.3 +0.9 -0.3 -0.8 -0.7 -0.5 -0.3 -0.1 -0.1
30 Section "m" C '" = -1. 8 with C pe "'min.
-2.5
oe
C .: INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS

pl
OPENINGS
=90
=0 =30
Uniformly distributed
.0.2 :!:.O.2 .0.2
Window Y open on side "A II
+0.4 +0.7 -LO
"c"
All doors open on side
D
5I1AD.E.D
30 +0.6 -0.3 +0.2 -0.4 -0,1 -0.4 -0.7 -0.9 -0.7 -0.4
y~~]
O +0.7 -0,2 -0,3 -0, 3 -0.1 -0,5 -0.8 -0.8 -0.4 -0. 1
.L ~ ~ G!~ J-k'fQQh
EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS
- 0.1
-1.5
Only door X open on side "C"
+0.6
+0.7
+ O. 8
+0.4
Hangar, curved roof with moderately smooth surface
ROOF LOAD ON SMOOTH

CLOSED TANK
h:d:r:: 1:\:1-,5
Total force on roof

working pressure in p. s. f.
-'it"- 01 d
Fn~
,fr!ll
~~
...!!:..
pe
q' C
C
pe
external pressure
coefficient
-1. 0
dZ
Figure Cl-14
Roof load on smooth closed tank
-562-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
POLES, RODS
26
a WIRES
l/d >100
C: FORCE COEFFICIENTS
n
d-Iq
<2.5 >25
Total force Fn =CnqCeA
= d
Smooth wires, rods. pipes
.,
0
Mod. smooth wires and rods

Fine wire cables
Thick wire cables
Figure CI-1S
STRUCTURAL MEMeERS
SINGLE a ASSEMeLED
SECTIONS
27
L =
Length of member
and C
+Ft.
0_
=;?-
+F~
t.
45" +1. 8 +0.8
k CtcoqCeA
,~
h -!-42.43h
+Z.O
-1. 9
-1. 0 +0.1 +1. 75 -0.95 +0. 7
-Z.O
+0.3 -0.75 +0.75 -0.5 +1. 05 -1. 1
80 -Z.O +0.1
-1.4
-1. 4 -1. 75 -0. 1 -1. 5
~ +Ft
if+Ft.
1JJE+ n oojI~
~y
,h ~
O!4~h
~
C
too
noc
tZ.05
too
1f+Ft.
t+Ft.
1f+Ft
noo
+1. 6
-+/1+-
f.:h-J
olh
too
0
noo
O'Sh
too
+Z.O
+1. 9
noc>
+Z.1
+0.1
too
nca
too
+Z.O
+1. 4 +0. 7 +1. 55 +1. 55

0
1+0.75
+Z.O
~res k: Reduction factor for members of
//
DO~
I. l .I~
r ex:
Figure Cl-16
+0.4
0_,
2: 0. 5
+0.9
+0.6
+Z.4 -1. 6
~+F.
~-I~ 0011~ o~~~
-t+
90
For slenderness,
hOC i. to b . . . ,d,
-1. 6 +Z. 1 ~
*+Ft
+1. 95 +0.6 +1. 5 +1. 5 +1. 8 1+0.1
+Z.Z
_
t
0
-1. 7 .::!:Z.1 -1. 8
45" +1. Z +1. 6

0
noo
toO
0
+Z.05
+Z. 1 +1. 8 +0.85 +0.85 +1.5 -0. 1 +1. Z +0.9 +1. 85 +0.6
-0.1
o +1.4
no<>
35 -1. 8
00
1t
ibJ 0>13*
-UfO'lh
~Ih
O45h
/lh
90 +Z.O +1.7
1.1
+Ft
~
o"1L!~ O~h+~Fnc:t>
OC C n
1.3
+Ft
C
C
C
C
C
C
too
nco
no<> too
too
no<>
nO<:! ~too
0" +1. 9 +0.95 +1. 8 +1.8 +1. 7'"' +0.1 +1. 6
0
0/
0.9
k. CnooqCeA
11 F hFti
rL13 Hn o.-~ frin

h
1.Z
: Force coefficients for an infinitely long member
too
+~h
oc.
0.7
= Area
Tangential force
noo
0.5
l.Z
Poles, rods and wires
For wind normal to axis of member: Normal force F
l.Z
finite length and slenderness
Fn
llha:
k
10
ZO
35
50
100
00
0.60 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.0
Structural members, single and assembled sections
PLANE TRUS'E'
28
MADE FROM
SHARP-EDGED SECTIONS
= Section area
.L
A =h
t
A / A = Solidity ratio
s
For wind normal to surface A: Normal force F =k C
n
n
I[Q]~ ~l2JI~t
lC
noo
o.
1 O. 15
0.2
Cnoo 2.0 1.9 1.8
SHIELDING
~r~r
t>'I.
..:-
~ 0.25
2.0
i. t>q
0.5 0.9 0.95 1.0
0.96 0.9 0.87 0.77 0.6C

0.7~
20
0.98 0.9i 0.94 0.89
50
0.99 0.9E 0.97 0.95 0.9C
00
1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0
SHIELDING FACTOR
~ 0.1
PLANE 01
MEMBER II
qx =k x . q
k: Reduction factor for trusses of

finite length and slenderness
Plane trusses made from sharp-edged sections
0.5
ht
0'8 0.95 1.0
FACTORS
PLANE OF
MEMBER I
~Fn
03 to
1.7 1.6 1.8
Figure Cl-17
29
. q. C e As
.1
l
D
: Force coef. for an infinitely

long truss, 0 ~ A /A ~ 1
s
AYA
00
0.2 p.3
0.4 0.5
0.93 0.75 0.56 0.38 0.19
0.6 0.8
0
1.0
0
0.99 ~.8l 0.65 0.48 0.32 O. 15 0.15 0.15
1. 00 ~.87 0.73 0.59 0.44 0.30 0.30 O. 30
1. 00 ~.90 0.78 0.65 0.52 0.40 0.40 0.40
1. 00 ~.93 0.83 0.72 0.61 0.50 0.50 0.50
Figure Cl-18
Shielding factors
-564-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
30
~~~;:R A:~I;~:~E
Length of bridge
k, C noo ' As' kx from Figs. CI-17 & CI-H
WITHOUT VEHICLES
CASE I
lB
It
1~ F,
ht
F d
~
Windward girder F I
k C
Leeward girder FU
k C
= Length
:at.
't
.. - ~ ~~
~F.
hv
Do
lB
=h
.
vl
k C
v
q' As
noo
Leeward girder FII = k C
' kxq As
noo
Deck horiz. load
=1.l q' d'
B
0.8. q. b.L
Deck vert, load F
vert.
B
Traffic load F
=C qA
n
1
vI
F
C . 2/3 q A2
n
v2
l
~lhv~ ~ ~
e4~;j
Fvert
Cn
Railway vehicle
1l. S'
1.S
Highway vehicle
10.0'
l.l
5.6'
1.0
Pedestrian
Figure Cl-19
Height and force coefficients
31
q' A
0' vohiel., Al = h vI l v ,
Windward girder FI
~ WITH VEHICLES
q'
0.6 q' b . LB
Deck vert. load F vert.
ver~
. k
noo
= 1.0
Dock hor'z. loa. Fh
q' As
noO
Truss and plate girder bridges
or h L
length of member
= angle formed by wind direction and the
normal to member axis
k x - a function of A/A and x/b
THREE - DIMENSIONAL
TRUSSES
AsiA ~ 03
L = true
f'
L Fm
FORCE ON MEMBER
TOTAL LOAD IN WIND DIRECTION F

F
m
F m = k Coo~ q. C e' Acos ~
(Shielded member F
k
oot3 :
Coeff.
Coef.
Coo
m
kxq
Coo~'
Ce'AcoS~)
For sharp-edged members Coo~
:: k\3' C
and \.,.C
noo
too
,k, kx: SEE FIG. Cl-16 FOR C n oe and C too
values
ROUND MEM6E.~S, SMOOTH ROUND ME.M6ERS, MOI1EI\AULY
4~OUGH SU~J!ACf..S d C!. <'2'5 511100TH SURFACES d,[q >2'5
k" Coo
kx
Coo
kx
1. 00
ISO
0.98
See
See
See
O. 58
0.9
Fig.
0.53
for
Cl-16
30
0.93
Fig.
Fig.
4S
0.88
CI-l6
C1-l6
60
0,80
0.95
OlStant
0.4l %=l5
0.l8
Figure Cl-20
Three-dimensional trusses
-565-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
r
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
SUPPLEMENT No. 4
COMMENTARY NO.2
SNOW LOADS
by
W. R.
SCHRIEVER AND
D. A.
LUTES

and
B. G. W.
PETER
formerly with
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Variations of Snow Loads on the Ground and on Roofs ............ 568
Design Roof Loads in the National Building Code ................ 570
Determination of Design Snow Loads on Roofs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 570
Detailed Explanations of Figures C2-1 to C2-9 ... ................ 571
References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 573
-567-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
SUPPLEMENT No. 4
COMMENTARY NO.2
SNOW LOADS
by
W. R.
SCHRIEVER,
D. A.
LUTES, AND
B. G. \V.
PETER
VARIATIONS OF SNOW LOADS ON THE GROUND AND ON ROOFS

Snow loads on roofs vary according to geographical location (climate), site exposure,
shape and type of roof, and of course from one winter to another.
Before the roof snow loads can be discussed,however, the ground loads must be considered since they are the basis for the determination of the roof loads. Ground snow loads,
forming part of the basic climatic information needed for building design in Canada, are
dealt with in Supplement No.1 to the National Building Code(1). There, the snow loads
on the ground are given both in form of a chart (Chart 9) and in form of a table of "Design
Data for Selected Locations in Canada". This table is reproduced in Part D of this Supplement for the convenience of the user.
Climate Variation
The wide climate variations existing in Canada produce wide variation in snow load
conditions across the country. Coastal regions (both Atlantic and Pacific), because of
frequent thaws during the winter, are usually characterized by snow loads of short duration,
often caused by a single storm. The mountainous regions of British Columbia and Alberta
experience the heaviest snow loads in the country, lasting the entire winter and varying
considerably with elevation. Prairie and northern regions have very cold winters, with
small annual snowfalls; owing to frequent strong winds there is considerable drifting of
snow both on roofs and on the ground. Finally, the central region, including Ontario and
Quebec, is marked by varying winds and snowfalls, and sufficiently low temperatures in
many places to allow snow accumulation all winter. In this area high uniform loads as
well as high drift loads occur.
Local Variations. Mountain Areas

I t should be noted that charts on such a small scale as those in Supplement No. 1(l)
cannot show local differences in the weather elements even where these are known to exist.
Practically all observations used in preparing Chart 9 were, of necessity, taken at inhabited
locations and hence the Chart applies essentially to permanently populated areas. This
should be noted by designers particularly for mountainous areas because ground snow
loads are known to increase with elevation. In mountain areas therefore, the snow loads
of Chart 9 and the Table apply only to the populated valleys not to the mountain slopes
and peaks with higher elevations. For the latter areas, local experience should be taken
into account. For some mountain areas water equivalent data, collected for hydrological
purposes, are available from which the relationship between elevation and ground snow
load can sometimes be determined for a given climatic zone.
Specific Gravity of Snow

Snowflakes of falling snow consist of ice crystals with their well-known complex pattern.
Owing to their large surface area to weight ratio they fall to the ground relatively slowly.
Freshly fallen snow is very loose and fluffy, with a specific gravity of about 0.05 to 0.1
(1/20th to l/lOth of water). Immediately after falling, however, the snow crystals start to
change: the thin, needle-like projections begin to sublime and the crystals gradually become
more like small irregularly shaped grains. This results in settlement of the snow and after
a few days or weeks the specific gravity will usually have increased to about 0.2 or higher,
even at below freezing temperatures. The specific gravity of old snow generally ranges
from 0.2 to 0.4. Since maximum snow loads nearly always occur irdmediately after an unusually heavy snowfall and hence a large proportion of the snow has a low density, a mean
specific gravity of about 0.2 was used to calculate the weight of the whole snow cover in
Supplement No. 1. The actual value used was 0.192, since it was found convenient to
assume that one inch of snow cover corresponds to a load of one pound per square foot.
To this was added the weight of the maximum one day rainfall in the period of the year
when snow depths are greatest.
-568-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
T
Effect of Wind on Snow Accumulation on Roofs
In perfectly calm weather falling snow would cover roofs and the ground with a uniform
blanket of snow. If this calm continued, the snow cover would remain undisturbed and
the prediction of roof loads would be relatively simple; the design snow load could be
considered as a uniformly distributed load and equal to a suitable statistical maximum
of the ground snow load.
Truly uniform loading conditions, however, are rare and have been observed only in
certain areas of the British Columbia mountains and occasionally in other areas on roofs
that are well sheltered on all sides by high trees. In most regions snowfalls are accompanied
or followed by winds. Snowflakes, having a large surface area for their weight, are easily
transported horizontally by the wind. Consequently since many roofs are well exposed to
the wind little snow will accumulate on them.
Over certain parts of roofs the wind speed will be slowed down sufficiently to let the
snow "drop out" and accumulate in drifts. This can be visualized by reference to the action
of snow fences which cause the snow to "settle out". These areas on roofs could be called
"areas of aerodynamic shade", and occur mostly behind vertical projections on the roof.
An example of this is the area behind a penthouse on a flat roof where drifts often accumulate. Naturally, since the wind direction is not always the same drifts on all sides of a
penthouse would generally have to be considered.
Lean-to roofs, i.e., roofs situated below an adjacent higher roof, are particularly susceptible to heavy drift loads because the upper roof can provide a large supply of snow.
Canopies, balconies and porches also fall into this category. The drift loads that accumulate
on such roofs often reach a multiple of the ground load and depend mainly on the difference
of elevation of the two roofs and on the size of the upper roof. The distribution of load depends on the shape of these drifts which varies from a triangular cross-section (with the
greatest depth nearest to the higher roof) to a more or less uniform depth.
Flat roofs with projections such as penthouses or parapet walls often experience triangular
snow accumulations that reach the top of the projections on the building, but usually the
magnitude of the load is less than on lean-to roofs.
Peaked and curved roofs subjected to winds at approximately right angles to the ridge
provide aerodynamic shade over the leeward slope. This sometimes leads to heavy unbalanced loads, since most of the snow is blown from the windward slope to the leeward
slope, producing loads that exceed the ground load on occasions. Curved roofs show similar
or even more unbalanced distributions (little snow on top and heavy snow near the base
of the arch). On the other hand it is true that many small peaked roofs on residences, in
exposed areas, usually (but not always) accumulate little snow compared with that on
the ground.
Solar Radiation and Heat Loss

Various other factors, besides wind, modify snow loads, although some of these factors
are effective only under special conditions. It has been found, for example, that solar
radiation has little effect in reducing loads in cold weather. Similarly, in cold weather,
heat loss from the roof is not very effective in melting the snow particularly with the present
trend to better insulated and ventilated roofs. These two factors cannot, therefore, be
relied upon to reduce the snow load significantly during the colder periods. During thaws
and toward the end of the winter, however, when the air temperature rises nearer to the
freezing point, solar radiation and heat loss do contribute to the melting of the snow.
In special cases roofs have been designed with reduced design loads for areas with large
snow loads by incorporating in the roof a method of clearing the roof of snow periodically
during the winter by the deliberate heating of the roof ("thermal unloading").
Redistribution of Load from
Meltin~
Snow
Redistribution of snow load can occur not only as a result of wind action. On sloped
roofs there are two problems connected with the melting of snow at temperatures slightly
below freezing. Firstly, melt water can refreeze on eaves and cause high ice loads (also
water back-up under shingles). This can at least partly he solved by taking steps to decrease
the heat loss from the upper parts of the roof. Secondly, if a roof slopes and drains on to a
lower one, melt water sometimes accumulates by refreezing on the lower roof or it is retained
in the snow.
Since flat roofs in general do not provide as good drainage as that naturally obtained
with sloped roofs, snow and ice will remain on flat roofs longer than on sloped roofs. On
large flat roofs of industrial and commercial buildings, heavy loads are observed near projections such as air ducts (which sometimes act like snow fences in retaining snow). When
this snow melts it may drain into the lower areas in the centre of bays (i.e., areas of maximum
-569-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
deflection) because usually the drains are located at columns (high points). This redistribution of load causes further deflection and can lead to a very dangerous situation.
Snow Removal
Although it is fairly common practice in some areas to remove snow from roofs after
heavy snowfalls, the NBC does not allow a reduction of the design snow load to account
for this for the following reasons:
(a) Snow removal cannot be relied upon. Experience in several countries has shown that
during and after extreme snow storms traffic is at a standstill and snow removal crews
cannot be obtained.
(b) Snow cannot be effectively removed from the centre of large roofs.
(c) Unbalanced loading can occur as a result of snow removal from one side although
actually the NBC guards against this possibility by requiring each roof member and
roof structural assembly to be designed for full load on any portion of the area and
zero load on the remainder of the area.
DESIGN ROOF LOADS IN THE NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
I
I'
Historical Notes
In the past, e.g. in the 1953 National Building Code of Canada(2), design snow loads
were often considered to be equal to the ground snow load with reductions allowed for
sloped roofs only. Such design load values were admittedly rough and have resulted in
overdesign in some roofs while allowing underdesign in others, particularly in areas subject
to high drift load. Information on which to base a more refined assessment of the loads
was, however, not available until a countrywide survey of actual snow loads on roofs was
undertaken by the Division of Building Research with the help of many volunteer observers(3). This survey provided evidence on the relationship between ground and roof loads
and enabled the committees responsible for the 1960 revision of the National Building
Code (4) to make some changes in the roof loads compared with the ground load. The roof
load was set at 80 per cent of the ground load, the ground load being based on a return
period of 30 years and adjusted to allow for the increase in the load caused by rainwater
absorbed by the snow (see Ref. 5).
With the advent of the 1965 Code some further changes were made by the Revision
Committee on Structural Loads and Procedures which have led to a more rational approach
to snow loads for the design of roofs. All roof loads were directly related to the snow load
on the ground and consequently the column for the roof snow load in the table of Design
Data for Selected Locations in Canada in Supplement No.1 was omitted. The basic roof
load was again 80 per cent of the ground load except that for roofs exposed to the wind a
roof load of 60 per cent of the ground load could be used under certain conditions described
further below. This reduction of roof load for exposed roofs to 60 per cent of the ground
load was only made because at the same time allowance was made for a variety of influences
causing accumulations of snow loads on roofs. This was done by means of "snow load coefficients" or shape factors which are shown in the form of diagrams and simple formulae
in Figures C2-1 to C2-7. Explanations of the use of these coefficients are given in following
sections.
Chan~es
in the 1970 National Bui1din~ Code

No major changes have been made in the snow load requirements for the 1970 Code.
DETERMINATION OF DESIGN SNOW LOADS ON ROOFS

Basic Snow Load Coefficients and Modifications to the Coefficients
The minimum design snow loads on a roof area or any other area above ground which is
subject to snow accumulation is obtained by multiplying the snow load on the ground, g.
specified for the municipality or area considered by the snow load coefficient, C applicable
"
to the particular roof area considered
s=C.g
s = design snow load in psf
g = ground snow load in psf
Ca =snow load coefficient.
The basic snow load coefficient is 0.8, except that for roofs exposed to the wind, under
certain conditions to be described, this value may be reduced to 0.6. These coefficients
are to be further modified (increased or decreased) to account for the influences provided
for in Article 4.1.5.3. of tLe NBC and discussed earlier in this commentary. Such modified
snow load coefficients C, PtE; gi'/en in figures C2-1 to C2-7 for vari0W'; fairly common
roof shapes. For other roof shapes, other coefficients may have to be used if ccnsidered
by the designer and the authority having jurisdiction to be more appropriate for the particular roof being designed and if based on applicable field observatlOns or on model tests.
In an effort to provide guidance to designers, the Division of Building Research has published a collection of case histories of interesting non-uniform snow loads(6),
Figures C2-! to C2-3 are for the basic roof shapes. These are the simple Bat and shed
roofs, simple gable and hip roofs and thirdly simple arch and curved roofs. These roofs
can be loosely classified as single span roofs. More complex roof shapes can then often be
considered as combinations of these three roofs shapes. The basic roof shapes can be either
combined with equal eave heights producing a valley or unequal eave heIghts resulting in
a multi-level roof.
Valleys in two-span and multi-span roofs lead to increased loads in the troughs from the
influence of the wind and, with steeper slopes, from sliding, creeping or melting snow.
Coefficients for valley areas are presented in Figure C2-4.
On multi-level roofs the areas on the lower roofs that are adjacent to the higher roofs
are subjected to heavier snow loads due to drifting. The coefficients for the increased load
on the lower level of multi-level roofs are provided in Figure C2-5.
Where the upper roof is sloped towards the lower roof so that snow may slide or melt
onto the lower roof, the lower roof should be designed for increased loads. This is specified
in Figure C2-6.
Finally, the snow load distribution is influenced by vertical projections. The coefficients
for this condition are provided in Figure C2-7.
Reduction of Snow Loads for Exposed Roofs

Numerous observations in most areas of Canada have shown that where a roof or part
of a roof is fully exposed to wind, part of the snow is blown off under most conditions.
For such exposed roofs the coefficients may be reduced 25 per cent. The conditions permitting this reduction are given in Article 4.1.5.4. of the National Building Code.
Jt may be difficult for the designer in practice to make a clear distinction between those
roofs that will be fully exposed to the winds and those that will not. To guard against the
danger of a roof designed with the reduced coefficients becoming sheltered by future higher
building and causing possibly higher loads, it would be prudent for the designer to require
a distance of at least 15 ft from the property line to make the roof eligible for the reduction.
This corresponds to the distance used in Article 4.1.5.3. for multi-level roofs. It should be
noted that it is the designer's responsibility to use his own judgement in arriving at the
best possible design snow load assumption.
Where a roof has projections, such as parapet walls, the reduction of 25 per cent should
only be applied to roof areas that are relatively well exposed, i.e. those areas that lie outside
a strip 10 times the height of the vertical projection.
Alternatin~
Strip Loads (with Full and Zero Load)
I t should be noted that on all roof areas, including those to be designed for increased or
decreased loads according to Figures C2-! to C2-7, the design snow load shall be applied
(a) with the full load on the entire area, or
(b) with the fun load distributed on any portion of the area and zero load on the
remainder of the area,
whichever produces the greatest effects on the members concerned (see Sentence 4.1.5.2.(2)
of the NBC). The reasons for this overriding requirement are that snow very seldom accumulates evenly and to guard against unbalanced loading by snow removal from one
side. Consequently, since certain structural members (such as certain diagonals of trusses)
are subject to stress reversals or otherwise sensitive to changes in load distribution, nonuniform loading must always be considered by the designer in addition to uniform loading.
DETAILED EXPLANATION OF FIGURES C2-1 TO C2-9

(I) Flat and Shed Roofs-Slope Reduction (Figure Cl-I)
Since, under most conditions, steeper roofs tend to accumulate less snow than flat and
moderately sloped roofs because of sliding and better drainage, the coefficients are reduced
for slopes exceeding 30 degrees as shown in Figure C2-! and for slopes exceeding 70 degrees,
no snow load need be considered.
For multi-level flat or shed roofs and for roofs with vertical projections, Figures C2-5,
C2-6 and C2-7 should be referred to.
-571-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
(2) Gable or Hip Roofs (Figure C2-2)

For gable or hip roofs both uniform loads and unbalanced loads should be considered.
A load 25 per cent greater than the uniform load on one side and no load on the other is
recommended to account for the snow blown from the windward side over to the leeward
side. An unbalanced load is also justified on this type of roof because of the possibility of
snow being removed by sliding from one side only.
The same reductions as in Figure C2-1 in the coefficients for slopes exceeding 30 degrees
are permissible.
\Vhen gable or hip roofs are adjacent to higher roofs or have projections, reference must
also be made to Figures C2-5 to C2-7.
(3) Arch Roofs (Figure C2-3)

For arch roofs both uniform and unbalanced triangular loads are given. The coefficients
for the unbalanced load are 0 at the ridge and 2.0 at the eave. The unbalanced load is based
on the theoretical consideration of higher wind velocities at the peak and also from field
observations of this type of load. The coefficients are based on the U.S.S.R. snow load
requirements.
Where there are adjacent higher roofs or projections reference must also be made to
Figures C2-5 to C2-7 for further coefficients.
(4) Valley Areas of Two-Span and Multi-Span Curved

or Sloped Roofs (Figure C2-4)
For valley areas of two-span and multi-span roofs a uniform load with appropriate slope
reductions is used, as well as two types of nonuniform load to account for drifting and
sliding snow. Slope reductions of the coefficients for cases II and II I are not allowed since
melting or sliding snow will tend to accumulate in the valleys. These coefficients are based
on field observations in Canada and the U.S.S.R. snow load requirements.
Should there be adjacent higher roofs or projections reference must also be made to
Figures C2-5 to C2-7.
(5) Lower Roofs of Multi-Level Roofs (Figure C2-5)

The design load for roofs adjacent to higher roofs is recommended to be taken as a triangular load with a maximum (in pounds per square foot) equal to 15 times the difference in
roof elevation (in feet) reduced to the normal snow load at a distance from the higher
roof of twice the difference in elevation. This load is based on the assumption of a triangular
snow drift extending to the top of the higher roof. Such drift loads occur not only when
the upper roof is part of the same building, but also when it is on an adjacent building
not more than some 15 ft away.
An upper limit of three times the basic snow load has been suggested in Figure C2-5.
It should be noted, however, that higher loads have been observed where an upper roof
was very long (measured perpendicularly to the step between the upper and lower roofs).
On the other hand, for relatively short upper roofs (say less than 50 ft) a reduction below
the value calculated from Figure C2-5 may be judged adequate by the designer.
The reduction of 25 per cent for exposed roofs should only be considered applicable to
the areas of the roof further than 10 times the difference of roof height from the upper roof.
(6) Lower of Multi-Level Roofs with the Upper Roof

Sloped Toward the Lower Roof (Figure C2-6)
\Vhere snow is likely to slide onto a lower roof from an upper roof the lower roof should
be designed for the load as provided for in Figure C2-5 plus an additional load produced
by the snow that may slide from the upper roof. It is not possible at the moment to provide
coefficients for this problem but the following guide is recommended. Because of the remote
probability that both upper and lower roofs will have their full load over the full areas
simultaneously when sliding occurs, it may be assumed that the lower roof would be carrying
its full load according to Figure C2-5 and that sliding of 50 per cent of the design load from
the upper roof would occur. The distribution should be made depending on the relative
sizes, slopes and positions of the two roofs. If, because of a relatively small lower roof, all
the sliding snow cannot be retained on it, appropriate reductions may be made. The density
of sliding snow may be rather high.
(7) Areas Adjacent to Roof Projections (Figure C2-7)
Triangular drift loads are recommended adjacent to vertical projections from roofs,
with a maximum (in pounds per square foot) equal to 10 times the projection height h
(in feet), reduced to the normal load at a distance of twice the projection height. This is
equivalent to a depth of snow of two-thirds of the projection height (See IV,<S.
r
r
!
Limits have been placed on the coefficients so that they will not be less than the basic
coefficients nor greater than 2. The reduction of 25 per cent for exposed roofs should be
considered applicable only to areas of the roof that are unprotected, i.e. some distance
(estimated at 10 times the height h) away from the projection. Since narrow projections
seldom produce significant snow accumulations, drift load from projections need only be
considered when the length of the projection in feet exceeds one-sixth of the specified ground
snow load in pounds per square foot.
(8) Example Sheet 1 (Fi~ure C2-8)

Example sheet No.1 has been added to show in graphical form the snow load coefficients
C. for uniform and unbalanced load conditions on gable and hip roofs with varying slopes
according to the slope reduction formula of Figure C2-2. It will be noted that for the lower
slopes (0 to 20 degrees) the imbalanced load is given by the requirements of Sentence
4.1.5.2.(2), i.e. with zero and full load, whereas for the steeper slopes (greater than 20
degrees) it is given by load case II of Figure C2-2.
(9) Example Sheet 2 (Fi~ure C2-9)
Example sheet No.2 shows the design snow loads in psf for various differences in roof
elevation for multi-level roofs according to Figure C2-5 for three typical ground snow loads.
It will be noted that 25 per cent reduction for exposed roofs according to Article 4.1.5.4.
should be considered applicable only to areas of the roof that are unprotected, i.e. some
distance estimated at 10 times the difference in elevation, away from the upper roof.
REFERENCES
(1) Climatic Information for Building Design in Canada, Supplement No.1 to the National
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Building Code of Canada, issued by the Associate Committee on the NBC,

National Research Council, Ottawa, Canada, 1970 (NRC No. 11153).
National Building Code of Canada 1953, issued by the Associate Committee on the
NBC, National Research Council, Ottawa, Canada (NRC No. 3188).
Variations of Snow Loads on Roofs by Peter, B. G. W., Dalgliesh, "V. A., and Schriever,
\V. R. Trans. Engineering Instit. of Canada, Vol. 6, No. A-1, April 1963 (NRC
No. 7418).
National Building Code of Canada 1960, issued by the Associate Committee on the
NBC, National Research Council, Ottawa, Canada (NRC No. 5800).
l\laximum Snow Depths and Snow Loads on Roofs in Canada by Boyd, D. \V. Proc.
29th Annual Meeting, Western Snow Conference, April 1961 (NRC No. 6312).
Snow Accumulations in Canada: Case Histories: I, by W. R. Schriever, Y. Faucher
and D. A. Lutes. National Research Council, Canada, Division of Building
Research, January 1967 (NRC No. 9287).
-573-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
T
I
I
ROOF SHAPES
Simple flat and

shed roofs
Simple gable and

hip roofs
Simple arch and

curved roofs
SNOW LOAD DISTRIBUTIONS AND COEFFICIENTS.

CASE I
CASE I
Ii 1! ! i ! i i ! I 1~
Ii 11 II! l!: illct
LIMITATIONS
! Jc s*
Ii i: i!: I! 11!! ilo.8*
CASE II
for o(~ 20 0 use Case I only
d>
for
20 0
use Case I and II
Typical values:
o to
30 0
40
50 0
60 0
70 0 to 90 c
shelt
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
for ~
for
A >1..
R.
expd
0.6
0.45
0.3
0.15
Figure C2-1
Flat and shed roofs
< 1.. use
1 - 10
Case I only
use Case I and II
10
Case I
*.
Cs
c(.30
O. 8 --;0-
Case II
es#
1.25 (0.8 _
~~30
Figure C2-2
Gable or hip roofs
Figure C2-3
Arch roofs
Notes:
*For roofs exposed to wind according to Article 4.1.5.4., aU values of C. marked with an asterisk (*) may
be reduced by 25 per cent.
All load distributions shown in these Figures are also to be applied as strip loading (full and zero load)
according to Sentence 4.1.5.2.(2).
In Figures C2-1 and C2-2. note that the term (0: - 30)/50 is only valid for slopes 0: greater than 30
as provided in Sentence 4.1.5.3.(a).
-574-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
r
I
ROOF SHAPES
Lower level of ITlUlti-level roofs

(when upper roof is part of the
same building or on an adjacent
building not more than 15 ft away)
Valley areas of two-span and

multi-span sloped or curved
roofs
SNOW LOAD DISTRIBUTIONS AND COEFFICIENTS.
LIMITATIONS
CASE I
CASE II
.15
hg
15..h
when
15 ...b... > 3.
=2
0.8*
use
use
Cs
0.8*
Cs
3.0
when
CASE III
<
when
h
h
< 5
>
ft use
15 ft use
W=lO
W" 30
h" difference of roof heights in it

g"
ground snow load in psf
W width of drift from higher building in It
a distance between buildings

for
for
lor
f3!:
100
<
f3
10 0 use Case I only

0
<. 2 0 use Case I and II
.? 20 0 \15e Case!, II and III
Figure C2-4
Valley areas of two-span and multi-span
curved or s10ped roofs
<
15 It
For load on upper roof

use Figures C2-1 to CZ-4
Figure C2-5
Lower roofs of multi-level roofs
Notes:
*For roofs exposed to wind according to Article 4.1.5.4.. all values of C. marked with an asterisk ("')
may be reduced by 25 per cent.
All load distributions shown in these Figures are also to be applied as strip loading (full and zero load)
according to Sentence 4.1.5.2.(2).
In Figure C2-4 note that the term (a - 30)/50 is valid only for slopes a greater than 30 a!l provided in)
Sentence 4.1.5.3.(a).
-575-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
ROOF SHAPES
---
Roof areas adjacent to

projections and obstructions
on roofs
Lower of multi-level roofs with

upper roof sloped towards lower
roof
SNOW LOAD DISTRIBUTIONS AND COEFFICIENTS. LIMITATIONS

LOAD FROM
DRIFT LOAD
Design lower roof for loads

according to Figure CZ-5 plus a
portion of the sliding snow from
the upper roof according to text.
c s lOllg
when 10h<0.8*
g
when 10h>2.0
g
when Q < g
Design upper roof for loads

according to Figures CZ-l to CZ-4
"6
<;= O.
use
Cs
8~'
2.0
use C s = 0.8*
Z h
when
when
h
Figure C2-6
Lower of multi-level roofs with the
upper roof sloped toward the lower roof
use
h
h
< 5 ft use
> 15 ft use
W= 10
W 30
g.
height of projection in ft
ground snow load in psf
W'"
width of snow drift in ft
J...
length of projection in ft
Figure C2-7
Areas adjacent to roof projections
Notes:
*For roofs exposed to wind according to Article 4.1.5.4 .. all values of C. marked with an asterisk (*) may
be reduced by 25 per cent.
All load distributions shown in these Figures are also to be applied as alternating strip loading (full and
zero load) according to Sentence 4.1.5.2.(2).
VI
......
......
I
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Figure C2-8
Ii
iii
0.8*
21 to 30
i i ' i"
40
0.4
50
0.5
I :W,I
II: !
ffiTTiililiil
60
70
Example Sheet 1: Snow load coefficients C. for uniform and unbalanced load conditions on gable and hip roofs with varyipg slopes.
0 to 20
0.25*
o I:rn
0.2*
fTTTJ I I
*FOT roofs exposed to the wind according to Article 4.1.5.4. all values marked with an asterisk (*) may be reduced by 25 per cent.
All load distributions sbown in these Fi(Ures are also to be applied as alternating strip loading (full and zero load) according to Sentence 4.1.5.2.(2).
Notes:
i' i'
CS
~~~I\
UNBALANCED LOADS
UNIFORM LOADS
iii
0.8*
SNOW LOAD COEFFICIENTS
GO
--.
VI
Copyright NRC-CNRC
48
30
24
24*
50'
~24
'
I I
::II
~l) f"'););
--.lh =5'
,/777n))
h=IO'
"l71
2d
~!' ~.
I: ro~1 .1
80
30'
200'
.1
roofs with three
I'
to Article 4.1.5.4. all values marked with an asterisk (.) may be reducedby 25 per cent.
are also to be applied as alternating strip loading (full and zero load) according to Sentence 4.1.5.2.(2).
multi~tevel
I..
~,.*
~':rm
Example Sheet 2: Design snow loads in psf for various differences in roof elevations for
typical ground snow loads.
I-~
WI
TIDJII!!ill il!
2t
! [" !Iii !Pffll
i'!' i 1111
80*
r
I: i I !III! i!] I
III I
Notes:
"'For roofs exposed to the wind
All load distributions shown in
Figure C2-9
30 PSF
60 PSF
100 PSF
GROUND
SNOW
SUPPLEMENT No. 4
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
COMMENTARY NO.3
EARTHQUAKE LOADS
by
R. H.
FERAHIAN

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Objectives of Earthquake Design ............................... 581
Seismic Regionalization ........................................ 581
Definition of Seismic Zones ..................................... 582
Structural Response to Ground Motion .......................... 582
Direction of Earthquake Forces ............................... " 583
Minimum Earthquake Forces (NBC 1970) ....................... 583
Coefficient C. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 583
Coefficient K. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .................................. 584
Importance Factor 1. ......................................... 585
Foundation Factor F. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..... .................... 585
Vertical Accelerations ......................................... 586
Distribution of the Base Shear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 586
Overturning Moments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 587
Torsional Moments ........................................... 587
Setbacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 588
Drift and Separation of Buildings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Design Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 588
Special Provisions ............................................. 589
Dynamic Analysis. . . . . . . .. .................................. 589
Acknowledgement ............................................. 590
References. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 590
-579-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-580-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
SUPPLEMENT No. 4
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
COMMENTARY NO.3
EARTHQUAKE LOADS
by
R. H.
FERAHIAN
OBJECTIVES OF EARTHQUAKE DESIGN

The earthquake-resistant design requirements of the National Buildin~ Code of Canada
1970 provide minimum standards to assure public safety by safeguardmg against major
failure and loss of life. Structures designed in conformance with its provisions should be
able to resist minor earthquakes without damage and resist major catastrophic earthquakes
without collapse. (Collapse is defined as that state when egress of the occupants from the
building has been rendered impossible because of failure of the primary structure.)
Structures could be designed to resist catastrophic earthquakes with no damage at all;
this, however, would be prohibitively expensive and unwarranted for the small probabilities
of occurrence of such catastrophic earthquakes. Instead, the objective is to reduce the
probability of fatalities due to earthquakes to an appropriately small value. Although
such random hazards cannot be predicted precisely, it is considered that the load requirements for earthquakes are reasonably consistent with those for wind, from the viewpoint
of the probability of collapse.
Damage caused by landslides such as occurred in Anchorage, Alaska (1), or damage due
to earth consolidation or liquefaction as in Niigata, Japan (2) , will not be prevented by
conformance with the design requirements of the NBC. These regulations provide the
structures with resistance to typical earthquake ground movements in the absence of
slides, subsidence or active faulting in the immediate vicinity of the structure. In most
structures when designed according to the NBC with due attention paid to site and foundation selection, details of connections, and good control of materials and construction, it is
expected that the structural damage due to the majority of earthquakes could be limited
to repairable damage.
To design an earthquake~resistant structure, one needs to know the characteristics and
probability of occurrence of the "design" earthquake, the properties of the structure and
the foundation including their interaction, the allowable stresses in the materials of construction including the foundation soils under the conditions of loading, and the amount
of damage tolerable. Even if all these factors were known, the optimum aseismic design
of the structure would be a complex problem.
I t is beyond the scope of the NBC to cover the range of problems involved in the aseismic
design of all possible structures. Unusual structures, highly irregular buildings, and specialpurpose industrial structures, such as nuclear reactors, power plants, and stacks, should
be treated as special problems with special design criteria in each instance usually determined by dynamic analysis of the structure. The judgement of an experienced structural
engineer must be relied upon to adapt the basic principles to such special structures.
The design must provide not only sufficient structural strength to resist the ground
motion, but also the proper stiffness to limit the lateral deflection, or drift. Damage to
nonstructural elements may be minimized by proper limitation of distortions and byattention to the details of their connection to the primary structure. In the past, major damage
in structures has occurred because of poor detailing of the nonstructural elements.
SEISMIC REGIONALIZATION
Major earthquakes have occurred, and are likely to occur in Canada, in two regions:
along the West Coast and in the St. Lawrence and Ottawa River valleys(3.4). Detailed
information on the occurrence of earthquakes is given in seismic resionalization maps
which are derived from an analysis of the seismicity of the various reglons of Canada(6.7).
From these studies has emerged the present seismic probability map for Canada prepared
by W. G. Milne and A. G. Davenport(S).
The new map is based on a computer analysis of the past earthquakes throughout the
country, The data are handled as statistical samples in the same manner as the maximum
floods or snow loads are calculated, making use of the extreme-value theory of statistics.
The seismic sample used is for the period 1899-1963. The results for this sample are cor-
-581-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
roborated by those from a larger but less reliable sample dating back to 1638. The intensities
and horizontal ground accelerations corresponding to certain probabilities of annual exceedance are given in Table C3-A for some representative cities in Canada. Comparable
data are shown also for representative cities in California. If similar acceleration values
are needed for any locality in Canada, they can be obtained at a nominal charge from the
Dominion Observatory, Ottawa, by arrangement through
The Secretary,
Associate Committee on the
National Building Code,
National Research Council,
Ottawa 7, Ontario.
Instrumental seismic recording in Canada is only 70 years old and there are no Canadian
records of strong motion earthquakes. Because of this limitation on the seismic sample,
and other uncertainties, the values quoted in Table C3-A are subject to certain confidence
limits. For example, for Vancouver the horizontal ground acceleration based on a probability of annual exceedance of 1/100 is given as 8 per cent of gravity; in fact it could lie
anywhere within 5 and 20 per cent of gravity.
In order to apply these accelerations directly to the design of a structure in a given locality
it would be necessary to estimate the magnification of the ground motions due to the nature
of the soil, to estimate the damping and ductility (i.e. energy-absorptive capacity) of the
structure, and to know the behaviour of the multi-degree-of-freedom structure under the
probable range of earthquake disturbances. The state of knowledge at present is such that
a large element of engineering judgement is involved in estimating the effects of these
factors on the structural behaviour.
DEFINITION OF THE SEISMIC ZONES

Having established the probable distribution of earthquake forces in Canada, the next
step is the selection of appropriate design probabilities and thus the delineation of zones
and associated design loads. To this end, a careful comparison was made with the more
extensive earthquake experience in California. Similar seismic analysis was made of California earthquakes, and it was found that for a city on the West Coast and in an area north
of Quebec City the probabilities of earthquake occurrence are generally comparable to the
probabilities of a city of similar size in California. Montreal and Ottawa and their environs
were, by comparison with the California situation, less active seismically. The en~ineers
in California have been using seismic zone 3 in their aseismic design and this practIce has
stood the test of time. It seems reasonable, therefore, on the basis of the DBR seismic
study, to require that the West Coast and the area north of Quebec City be designed for
zone 3, whereas lower design loads are appropriate for other regions.
From this consideration, the choice may be made of the design earthquake or seismic
acceleration for zoning purposes. It is recommended that a "100-year" earthquake be used.
i.e., an earthquake which on the average has an annual probability of exceedance of 1 in
100. As still another basis of assessing the proposed earthquake load requirements, a comparison was made with the NBC treatment of wind loads. It will be noted that whereas
design loads for earthquakes are based on the "100-year" earthquake, those for wind are
based on "30-year" wmd speeds. There is, however, a great difference in the probability
distribution of earthquakes and winds, and it can be shown(9) that although the probable
occurrence of design loads is different in the two cases, the probabilities of collapse are quite
comparable for typical cities in zone 3.
From these considerations the seismic zones have been defined as shown in Table C3-B.
These bounds have been used in the preparation of Chart No. 12 and in the evaluation of
the factor R, the seismic regionalization factor, appearing in Supplement No.1 of the NBC.
STRUCTURAL RESPONSE TO GROUND MOTION

It is well known(lO,ll) that the response of a single degree-of-freedom system to ground
motion depends on the fundamentals frequency of the system and the frequency content
of the ground motion. It can also be shown that the response as measured by the base
shear. V. can be expressed as
V= W 2'l'C S(t)
(1)
g
Where
\V = the weight of the system

g =the acceleration of gravity
T =the period of the system (See equations (4) and (5)
Set) =a function of time, dependent on the characteristics of the
ground motion. (This function is known as the velocity
spectrum of the ground motion, and details of its deviation
can be found in reference 12.)
-582-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Similar base shear force relations apply with reasonable accuracy to multi-storey buildings
having many modes of vibration. For usual buildings of moderate-heights (up to 20 or
30 storeys) the principal earthquake response is associated with the fundamental mode of
vibration, and the base shear is dependent primarily on the period of this mode.
The base shear values induced by a moderate-size earthquake such as EI Centro, 1940,
exceed the requirements imposed by modern building codes. This discrepancy appears
justified by past experience which shows that buildings designed according to such codes
have resisted intense ground motions with little distress. It is now recognized that structures
designed to withstand elastically the relatively smaller loads specified by such codes suffer
plastic deformation during even moderate earthquakes. The energy dissipated in plastic
deformation thus reduces the structural responses. The lower base shears specified in the
codes are only justified if a structure possesses ductility, i.e. the capacity to deform and
absorb energy without major structural failure(ll,13,14).
DIRECTION OF EARTHQUAKE FORCES

The base shear for any structure subjected to earthquake ground motion is a vector which
is a function of time. At any given instant during the earthquake it is the sum of the inertia
forces acting on the structure at that instant. The inertia forces act through the centre of
gravity of the masses at their respective levels and in the direction of the earthquake
shock; and the state of stress in the structure will depend on the mass and stiffness distribution of the structure at each level, i.e. on the position of the principal axes. In the most
general case seismic analysis would involve the simultaneous translation about the two
principal axes plus torsional motions. Normally for buildings, independent design about
each of the principal axes together with torsional forces duly considered will provide adequate resistance for forces applied in any direction. Particular attention should be paid,
however, to the effect of the combined stresses at the external and re-entrant corners,
which are especially vulnerable to the effect of concurrent motions about both principal
axes, (see, for example, reference 46).
MINIMUM EARTHQUAKE FORCES (NBC 1970)
The NBC (1970) specifies that a structure should be designed for a minimum earthquake
force given by
1
(2)
V=iRKCIFW
This is essentially equation (1) modified to take into account the most important factors
involved in the response of buildings to earthquakes. The factor S(t) in equation (1),
which expresses the characteristics of the earthquake disturbance, is replaced by the regionalization factor, R, as has already been described. Each of the other factors will now be
discussed.
COEFFICIENT C
The coefficient C is given by the formula
C= 0.05
(3)
3VT
which is an empirical formula recommended by the Seismology Committee of the Structural
Engineers Association for California(15), It was chosen to reflect the dependence of spectral
acceleration on the fundamental period of the structure.
The period need not be determined precisely, only accurately enough to establish proper
values of C which is not very sensitive to small changes in the period T. In lieu of more
accurate estimates, the following empirical equations can be used for buildings:
T=O.~~n
(4)
(where T, h n and D are terms as defined in Sentence 4.1.7.1.(2) of Part 4 of the NBC), or
T=Ql~
These equations generally give values of T that are low. Equation (4) was proposed by
and it is a result of approximately 1600 vibration observations made in 430
buildings, 150 observations on 42 elevated tanks, and 250 special observations. Eighty
per cent or the observed periods fall above those calculated from the recommended formula,
10 per cent are subject to a possible error of less than 25 per cent on the unsafe side, and
the remaining 10 per cent are in error between 25 to 40 per cent. Equation (5) is found to
give similarly reliable results for multi-storey buildings with moment-resisting frames.
U~CGS(29),
If the designer wishes, he may submit properly substantiated technical data for establishing the period T for the contemplated structure, It will be a rather unusual building
-583-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
that would make this calculation neccessary. Even then the analysis can only account for
some of the multiplicity of variables in the structure. The difficulty is especially magnified
in buildings that depend on the interaction of the frame and the core for the resistance
of the lateral forces. Sometimes the formula would give better agreement with the measured
periods than the analysis(lil). At present considerable information is being gathered about
the actual behaviour of buildings by measurement of their periods(f>2-M), damping, and
characteristic modes. Research is also being done on the effect of the structure foundation
interactions(25). It is believed, however, that the effect of structure foundation interaction
on the period will be of practical significance only in a few exceptional cases which are
beyond the scope of codes.
COEFFICIENT K
The coefficient K assigned to different types of structural systems is a judgement factor
that reflects experience in design and construction, as well as analysis for the evaluation
of the performance of structures in major and moderate earthquakes in California
and Alaska. I t endeavours basically to account for the energy-absorptive capacity of
the structural system by damping and inelastic action. Types of construction that are
recognized to.have performed well in earthquakes are assigned lower values of K. The K
values of Table 4.1.7.A of the NBC specifically recognize the following:
(1) The capability of a structure to absorb energy, within acceptable deformations and
without failure, is a very desirable characteristic of any earthquake-resistant design.
(2) In buildings where shear walls resist the seismic forces, a second line of seismic re
sistance is desirable to provide stability in cases of damage to a portion of the shear wall
system. This may be accomplished by a combination of walls acting as the primary bracing
system together with a complete frame, ductile moment-resisting or otherwise, acting as
a second line of seismic resistance.
(3) The K values assigned to buildings are lower than those assigned to other structures
because buildings by their nature are normally endowed with a multiplicity of nonstructural
and noncomputed resisting elements which effectively give the building large damping
during critical vibrations; thus buildings have an actual lateral force-resisting capacity
greater than that of the assumed lateral force-resisting system acting alone.
The following should be noted when choosing the K value for the structure:
(1) In considering the completeness of a space frame it could be assumed that the action
of a multi-storey building frame is not significantly influenced by the presence of a minor
portion of bearing walls, e.g. around a stair well. Basement walls, and walls not more than
one storey high that are supported directly on foundation walls, need not be frame sup
ported.
(2) For structures to qualify for K values of 0.67 and 0.8 they should have ductile
moment-resisting, complete space frames(14-Ul). The ductility exhibited by moment-resisting
space frames of structural steel conforming to ASTM A36-69, ASTM A441-68, CSA
G40.4-1959 or CSA G40.12-1964 has long been accepted as the desirable standard. The
ductility factor for these structures is approximately four for some visible nonstructural
damage (possibly with minor structural damage) and greater for structural damage. (See
also the section in this Commentary on dynamic analysis.) In fact, until the acceptance of
ductile reinforced concrete in the Uniform Building Code(16) and California's SEAOC
Code(l6J, systems using materials other than steel had to be tested and studied to prove
that they provide energy-absorptive capacity equivalent to that of steel. A more direct
approach would be to require that the engineer prove that his structure has the energy
absorptive capacity-needed to withstand the appropriate design earthquakes. Some forms
of timber construction also exhibit adequate ductility. On the other hand, many of the
commonly used constructions lack this quality, e.g. poorly designed shear walls in reinforced
concrete, precast concrete, and unreinforced or inadequately reinforced masonry.
The 1970 edition of the National Building Code does not give rules for the detailing of
reinforced concrete structures for the ductility required to qualify them for K values of
0.67 and 0.8. Rules for such structures, however are given in Sections 2630,2631 and 2632
of the Uniform Building Code(16).
(3) In the case of both moment-resisting ductile or non-ductile space frames, it is essential
that it be shown that neither the elastic nor inelastic action including failure of the more
rigid elements, will impair the vertical or lateral load-carrying capacity of space frames,.
(4) In order to qualify for K = 0.8, the structure must have a complete ductile moment
resisting space frame and shear walls designed so that the total required lateral force is
resisted in accordance with the relative rigidities of the walls and the space frame. In
addition, the following must be satisfied:
1I

(a) the complete ductile moment-resisting space frame shall be designed to carry as
a system separate from the shear walls the total vertical loads and at least 25
per cent of the total required lateral force, Le., 25% of
(~ (0.8)' CIFW)
(b) the shear walls when acting alone (i.e. independent of the ductile moment-resisting
space frame), must be capable of carrying the total lateral force. In essence these
walls have to be provided at their edges with encased structural steel elements
of ASTM A 36-69, A 441-68, CSA G40.4 or CSA G40. 12 or with built-in concrete
columns specially detailed for ductility. These encased elements have to be designed to carry the appropriate tributary dead and live loads plus the vertical
loads resulting from the prescribed horizontal forces on the shear walls. These
edge members and other built-in elements can form constituent members of the
space frame. When the rules given in references 15 and 16 are complied with in
the design of the shear walls, then it may be assumed that the action or failure
of these walls will not impair the vertical and lateral load-resisting ability of the
embedded members of the space frame.
(5) K will be taken as 1 for all buildings that do not qualify for K =0.67 or K ==0.80,
and do not require that K be equal to 1.33. Thus for a building to qualify for K = 1 it
must have a complete vertical load-carrying space frame which does not meet the requirements of a ductile moment-resisting space frame. A reinforced concrete building deSigned
according to the requirements of Section 4.5 of the NBC of Canada would qualify for
either K = 1.00 or 1.33.
Although there is no requirement to provide lateral moment resistance in such frames.
it is strongly recommended that nominal moment resistance be incorporated in the design.
In structural steel, this might be in the form of top and bottom clip angles at beam-tocolumn connections. In reinforced concrete, continuity and good anchorage of longitudinal
steel, and stirrups over the length of beams framing into columns would be good design
practice. This provides a nominal secondary line of defence even though all required lateral
forces are resisted by other shear-carrying structural systems.
(6) K will be taken as 1.33 for structural systems without a comrlete load-carrying
space frame, characterized by shear walls carrying usually all the latera forces and bearing
walls carrying substantially vertical dead and live loads. The bearing walls mayor may not
be a significant part of the shear wall system.
(7) Cross-braced towers supporting elevated water tanks required K to be equal to 3.00.
This high value is considered appropriate because of the poor performance of such structures, and the special importance of maintaining their integrity in case of fire following an
earthquake.
IMPORTANCE FACTOR I
Some structures are designed for essential public services such as electrical generating
stations, fire stations, and hospitals and schools. It is imperative that these structures be
operative after an earthquake. These structures are assigned an I factor of 1.3. This importance factor is based on the judgement that these structures should be designed with higher
factors of safety. This factor is not intended to cover the design considerations associated
with special purpose plants such as nuclear power plants(20).
FOUNDATION FACTOR F
Many codes do not introduce a variation in the base shear coefficients for different soil
conditions. The basic reasons for this are:
(1) the lack of strong motion records for widely varying soil conditions;
(2) the complex inter-relationship between the response of the structure and the characteristics of the associated soil;
(3) the difficulty in assessing simple soil parameters to define the dynamic characteristics
of different soil conditions(21) and layering (22).
Quantitative knowledge of soil behaviour during earthquakes is still in the research
phase and direct applications have been limited to critical projects such as nuclear power
plants. As a first approximation the NBC introduces the factor F which is made equal to
1.5 for soils having low dynamic shear modulus such as highly compressible soils. This is
again a judgement factor that recognizes that the seismic ground motion is magnified on
loose and compressible soils(23) and also that most of the damaged buildin~s have been on
such soils(U). There are no detailed descriptions of foundations or soil studies at such sites
to enable the investigating engineer to probe exhaustively the cause of the failure. Poor
detailing, factors unaccounted for in the design, and also long-term soil distress. e.g. settle..ment, could have been the reasons for the numerous failures of structures on compressible
-585-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
soils. Nevertheless, experience indicates that the designer should exercise extra care when
dealing with structures on such soils.
It is quite possible that on these loose soils the structure-foundation interaction (26)
might, due to the increasing damping and the rocking of the structure, reduce the base
shears, especially for stiffer structures. This may well compensate for the magnified ground
motion caused by the looseness of the foundation soil. There is not enough information at
present to back this hypothesis, but in the meantime, it is believed that the retention of
the foundation factor errs on the side of safety.
I t should again be emphasized that in addition to the influence of the site conditions on
the predominant periods of the ground motion and the magnitude of the seismic forces,
the designer should consider the possibility of ground failure beneath the structure due to
slides on slopes, active local fault displacements, and liquefactions of sands(l,2.26) in areas
of high water table. The advice of an experienced soils engineer is recommended for evaluation of the suitability of the site and the nature of its behaviour under the anticipated
seismic forces and movements.
VERTICAL ACCELERATIONS
Ground motion due to earthquake is three-dimensional with horizontal, transverse, and
vertical components. I t is found, however, that outside the epicentral zone the vertical
accelerations are 30 to 60 per cent of the horizontal accelerations. In the immediate vicinity
of the epicentre the vertical acceleratioQs could be higher.
Under abnormally high vertical accelerations, columns at the higher floors, especially
at the roof level, could be adversely affected. There is not enough information at present
to warrant including in the NBC of Canada rules treating the vertical accelerations, even
though some codes(21) have such rules. Certain special structures have been noted (28) where
these accelerations may have led to instability or unusual reductions in the factors of safety.
DISTRIBUTION OF THE BASE SHEAR

The base shear is the sum of the inertial forces acting on the masses of the structure
caused by the motion of the base. The motion of the structure is complex(1l12.16) involving
the superposition of a number of modes of vibration about several axes. For the translational
vibratlOns, the addition of the spectral modal responses results in a lateral inertial force
distribution practically triangular in shape. If it is assumed that the greatest contribution
to the base shear comes from the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure, and the
fundamental mode can be approximated by a linear lateral deflection, zero at the base and
maximum at the top, then for a lumped mass system,
F = Vwxh x
(6)
x
:Z;wih i
i=l
Jn practice, the assumption of linear deflection is a close approximation to the average

of the shear deflection and the moment deflection of the structure in the fundamental
mode(29). The use of this equation is reasonable for more rigid structures, i e. for heightto-width ratio less than 3, or fundamental periods less than about 1 second. For more flexible
structures, however, the shape of the fundamental mode generally departs from the straight
line with increasing deflections at the top of the structure(30). Also in these structures the
higher modes become more significant in the response under earthquake ~round motions.
Both of these factors can be accounted for if more of the base shear is assigned to the top
of the structure than would be obtained using the equation given earlier; consequently a
fictitious force, F t, is assigned to the top of the structure as an expedient to allow for the
effect of the higher modes of vibration.
Where the lateral force-resisting system is composed of several elements of different plan
dimensions, an equivalent dimension D. should be determined that will represent the action
of the building as a whole.
The designer should remember that V n , the shear force for the top storey, and V,., the
shear force transmitted to the supporting structure just below the level i = x, are given by
VD == F,
+F
DoD
(7)
Vz=F,+~Fi
(8)
i=x
In two-storey buildings an exception to the triangular distribution of the base shear is

permitted and the forces at each floor are proportional only to the masses on that floor.
If the designer elects he may use the triangular distribution, but this would be more conservative than the minimum requirements of the Code.
OVERTURNING MOMENTS
Of the many tall slender structures that have been subjected to violent earthquakes,
none has been recorded as having simply toppled over asa unit. The seismic codes have
generally required the calculation of and the provision for overturning moments, assuming
that the building is a fixed-ended cantilever beam loaded with static lateral earthquake
forces acting in the same direction. The NBC in the past had followed this simple procedure.
The application of this concept to tall or slender structures is generally over-conservative(30),
because the maximum total mcments and shears at a given level of the building do not
occur for the same combinations of modal components. A more realistic determination of
the maximum overturning moment can be made by the methods of dynamic analysis, but
such computations are generally unnecessary if judicious reduction factors are applied to
the bending moments calculated from the equivalent static shears.
If a structure did respond in the fundamental mode exclusively, then the overturning
moment at the base would be the sum of the moments corresponding to the forces Fx about
the base. However, since some part of the base shear represents contributions from modal
responses higher than the fundamental, the base moment would most probably be less than
that calculated using the equivalent static shears. This perhaps more clearly indicated by
Table C3-C which shows the base moment in terms of the base modal shear for an idealized
uniform structure.
Considering the case of pure triangular distribution of a base shear, without the assignment of any of the base shear to the top of the structure, then the base moment would be
M = 0.667 V h n This is between the coefficients in the fundamental mode for a sheardeflecting and a moment-deflecting structure. The base shear actually represents the sum
of shears of several modes; thus the base overturning moment should be something less
than M = 0.667 V h n Similarly, the overturning moment M can be represented as
(9)
where
J is a
reduction factor.
The NBC 1970 does allow reduction of bending moments calculated from the equivalent
static shears but it is more conservative than SEAOC or the UBC (Figure C3-1). Observations at Anchorage(l) and Caracas(31) corroborate the need for this extra safety. The
NBC 1970 does not allow J to be less than 0.5.
TORSIONAL MOMENTS
When the base of a structure is set into motion by an earthquake, the mass of the structure
tries to keep to its state of rest with the force of its inertia acting in a direction opposite to
earthquake motion. These inertial forces act through the centre of gravity of the masses,
e. g. at each floor level. If the centre of mass and the centre of rigidity(15,32) do not coincide
due to the asymmetrical arrangement of the structural elements, then torsional stresses
will be generated. The designer should endeavour to make the structural system as symmetrical as possible and should consider the effect of torsion on the behaviour of the structural elements.
A realistic approach to aseismic torsional design should consider the effect of the dynamic
magnification(33,34) of the torsional moments as calculated by methods of statics, the effect
of simultaneous action of the two horizontal components of the ground disturbance, and
accidental torsion. Accidental torsional moments are those included to account for the
possible additional torsion that can arise due to errors in the estimates of the relative
rigidities, errors in the estimate of dead and live loads at the floor levels, addition of wall
panels and partitions after completion of the building, dependence of the stiffness on the
mode of vibration and its variation with time and inelastic or plastic action.
Most of these concepts and effects have to be accounted for by use of arbitrary factors
until more information and better theoretical methods of analysis become available.
The provisions of the NBC reflect the practice in Mexico City(34). It recognizes the
dynamic nature of the torsion and the effect of the simultaneous action of the two horizontal
ground components of motion by increasing the comp'uted torsion by 50 per cent. It recognizes the part played by accidental torsion by specIfying an additional torsion due to an
eccentricity of 0.05 times the plan dimension in the direction of the computed eccentricity.
The NBC also specifies that when the total torsional eccentricity exceeds 25 per cent of the
appropriate plan dimension, a dynamic analysis shall be mandatory or the effects of torsion
in the static analysis shall be doubled. This recognizes the importance and complexity
of the torsional resistance under these conditions and also probably accounts for the larger
dynamic magnification.
-587-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
The elements that resist torsion depend upon the stiffness of the diaphragm, as well as
the rigidities and locations of the resisting elements. Torsional-resisting elements as part of
the lateral load-resisting system should preferably be provided near the periphery of the
building, further from the centre of rotation than the centre of gravity of the tributary
load. For complete diaphragms interconnecting all resisting elements in both directions
(such as a complete reinforced concrete floor slab), all elements can be marshalled to resist
torsion resulting from shears in any direction.
Torsional effects are particularly significant in the core-type buildings (all stiffening
elements in a central core away from the periphery), in odd-and irregularly-sha~d buildings
(such as the L-shaped buildings), and in buildings with the core located at one Side or corner.
These are some examples of torsional situations that should be avoided in building layouts.
Torsional effects should also be evaluated carefully and dynamically for parts of structures
relative to the whole. For example, it is important that the torsional effects of projecting
wings on buildings be considered in relation to the motion of the building as a whole.
SETBACKS
A setback is any horizontal offset in the plane of an exterior wall of a building. The shear
and overturning moment from the upper wall should be transferred across the setback to
the wall below. The effects of setbacks on the dynamic response characteristics of buildings
are very complex(35). It is believed, however, that the specifications of the NBC of Canada
1970 are simple and adequate for the design of most structures.
A building with relatively small setbacks can most convieniently be treated as a uniform
building.
A more comprehensive analysis of setbacks has been made by the Seismology Committee
of SEAOC(l6). The results given therein are more consistent with the true nature of the
behaviour of buildings with setbacks and are recommended as an alternative basis for
design. The analysis, however, is rather complicated for the purposes of a code. Dynamic
analysis could always be used, but it need not be a rigorous mathematical study, as this is
unwarranted.
DRIFT AND SEPARATION OF BUILDINGS

Drift refers to the lateral deflection at any point in the structure relative to the ground
due to design lateral forces. Incremental drift refers to the lateral deflection of a storey
relative to the one just below it. It is generally agreed that drift caused by wind forces(36)
is of more concern than drifts caused by the less probable and less frequent earthquake
forces. The limits are not generally spelled out, even in cities like New York. It is for this
reason that the NBC of Canada only cautions that drift shall be considered according to
accepted engineering principles. What follows is presented as a guide for the designer.
Drift limitations should be enforced not only to ensure comfort of the occupants(36), but
also to restrict damage to the nonstructural components, e. g. fragile glass panels(37.38),
plaster walls, and other partitions. In some cases strict drift limitations may need to be
Imposed to avoid pounding between adjacent structures. The effect of the drift on the capacity of the lateral force-resisting system should be considered by the designer.
The following limitations can be taken as a guide(15.38):
(1) The incremental earthquake drift should be limited to 0.005 times the storey height.
This can be compared with the wind requirement of 0.002 times the storey height.
(2) Generally, drift need not be considered for buildings less than 13 storeys high, if the
height-to-width ratio is 2.5 or less, the width being the over-all dimension of the structural
bracing system.
The NBC of Canada requires that all portions of a structure be designed to act as an
integral unit in resisting horizontal forces unless separated by a distance sufficient to avoid
contact under deflection due to seismic action or wind forces. The amount of separation
recommended, or in some cases required, depends upon the movement to be accommodated
and is thus connected with the drift limitations. As a guideline for the more flexible types
of construction, the separation should be taken as at least 1~ times the expected combined
deflections of the units under consideration(15).
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The nonstructural components of the structure should be so detailed as not to transfer
to the structural system forces unaccounted for in the design. If they are designed as isolated
components, then the connections should be designed accordingly(39), so that they are
capable of accommodating the anticipated movement due to drift and temperature changes.
If, on the other hand, these components are rigidly attached to the structure, then their
-588-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
effect on the behaviour of the structure should be studied and allowed for in the elastic,
plastic, and fracture stages. A classic example is the stair that may act as a stiffening
element only for a portion of the structure. Failures of buildings in the Caracas 29 July,
1967 earthquake (31,40) were caused by the partition tile walls which acted as shear walls
until failure, changing the relative rigidity of the bents from those assumed in the design.
Most of the failures in structures under seismic loading are due to poor detailing, especially
at beam and column connections. This becomes the governing factor in good aseismic
behaviour of buildings built of precast elements. Special attention should be paid to these
connections(l41) .
Diaphragms should be carefully studied to ensure their capability of load distribution(42).
When the shear wall incorporates numerous openings, the design should account for its
real behaviour under lateralloads(43}, i. e. whether the wall acts as a unit or as a number of
units because of the reduced rigidities due to the openings. Overstress at the openings
should be examined. This is a common cause of damage to lintels(44) above door openings
and to piers between window openings.
Construction joints should be designed to transfer earthquake forces without transverse
or rotational slippage(45).
Attention should be paid to the combined stresses at the external and re-entrant corners(46).
Unreinforced masonry buildings have fared very badly when subjected to earthquakes(l).
In reinforced masonry structures, the presence of reinforcing will provide ductIlity and
will ensure against brittle failure. Examples and Detail Sheets for the aseismic design of
reinforced masonry can be found in the handbook "Seismic Design of Buildings"(39}.
Part 4 of the National Building Code of Canada 1970 through reference to the section
uPlain and Reinforced Masonry" in this supplement requires that all masonry in zones
3 and 2 (with few exceptions) be reinforced. These elements include exterior loadbearing
and non-Ioadbearing walls, parapet walls, interior loadbearing walls, as well as non-load.
bearing partitions which weigh more than 40 psf or are more than 10 ft high. Masonry
elements around stair and elevator shafts are required to be reinforced to ensure a safe
means of egress from the structure. It is provided, however, that unreinforced masonry
may be used in zone 2 if it can be proved to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction that the proposed structure can withstand the design earthquake forces.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The NBC specifies that except in zone zero and for those cases listed in the next paragraph, buildings higher than 200 ft shall have structural systems for which K is either
0.67 or 0.80. Analyses (47) of buildings of about 200 ft in height has shown that if damage is
to be minimized in a moderate earthquake, the structure must incorporate the ductile
features associated with these low K values.
In order not to stifle innovation and impose undue restrictions on the designer, the NBC
allows other structural systems that have been approved by the authority having jurisdiction when evidence is provided to show that the proposed system can withstand the
appropriate design earthquake with ductility and energy-absorptive capacity equivalent
to that for structures with K = 0.67 and 0.8. This requirement is further reduced for
seismic zone 1 in that buildings higher than 200 ft with shear walls carrying the total
lateral forces are permitted in lieu of a ductile complete moment-resisting space frame if
the ductility of these walls is ensured by proper detailing(Ui.16).
DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
The NBC allows the use of dynamic analysis for the evaluation of the seismic design
loads. For conventional multi-storey buildings the NBC approach is quite adequate but
some buildings higher than 200 ft may require dynamic analysis to verify the seismic
adequacy of their structural systems. Similarly buildings with irregular layouts, large
setbacks or unusual taper, or uncommon industrial structures should be designed on the
basis of dynamic analysis.
The seismic static loads given by the Code may be used as a preliminary estimate for the
evaluation of the member sizes of these structures. The judgement of an experienced
structural engineer must be relied upon to decide when dynamic analysis is needed.
Dynamic analysis requires the choice of the design earthquake, acceptable damage
criteria, and the prediction of the structural response for the chosen design earthquakes.
Strictly speaking ,dynamic analysis is a mathematical prediction of the structural response(ll,47J. Even if a good representative mathematical model of the structure is available
the results of the analysis are only as good as the choice of the probable design earthquakes
-589-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
and the structural parameters such as damping, ductility, and the period of the structure.
The certainty with which these parameters can be estimated provides a measure of the
accuracy of the analysis.
As already mentioned, there are no Canadian records of strong motion earthquakes;
consequently, after establishing the probable design ground acceleration, an appropriate
seismic record must be chosen based on earthquakes from other parts of the world or some
other form of simulation. It is probably appropriate to use California earthquakes(lo.12.4S)
for the west coast of Canada since they are both part of the circum-Pacific belt of seismicity.
Earthquakes in Eastern Canada, however, appear to have unique characteristics(4) which
may not be accurately simulated by the California earthquakes. Nevertheless, the universal
practice is to use certain California earthquake records, which are in convenient form for
computer analysis(49.50).
For major earthquakes in zone 3, in lieu of more reliable local data, the estimated maximum intensity, as measured on the modified Mercalli Scale (1931), falls between VIII and
IX and the corresponding horizontal ground acceleration may be taken as 50 per cent of
gravity. Housner gives similar estimates of maximum earthquakes and their corresponding
ground accelerations for other zones(55).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The Section of the National Building Code dealing with loads due to earthquakes
has llsed the results of the recent research and experience in earthquake engineering in
Canada, California, Japan and Mexico. In particular, except when more recent evidence
suggests otherwise, it closely parallels the recommendations of the Seismology Committee
of the Structural Engineers Association of California as set out in their" Recommended
Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary, 1967",
REFERENCES
(1) The Prince \Villiam Sound, Alaska, Earthquake of 1964 and Aftershocks, Vol. II,
Research Studies, Seismology and Marine Geology. U.S. Department of Commerce,
U.S. Environmental Science Services Administration, U.S. Coast and Geodetic
Survey, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, 1967.
(2) The Niigata Earthquake, 16 June 1964, and Resulting Damage to Reinforced Concrete Buildings. International Institute of Seismology and Earthquake Engineering,
Tokyo, Japan, February 1965.
(3) Hodgson, J. H. There are Eearthquake Risks in Canada. Canadian Consulting
Engineer, Vol. 7, No.7, July 1965.
(4) Hamilton, Angus C. Seismic Regionalization of Eastern Canada, Proc. Symposium on
the Design for Earthquake Loadings, McGill University, Sept. 1966.
(5) Smith, W. E. T. Earthquakes of Eastern Canada and Adjacent Areas, 1534-1927.
Publications of the Dominion Observatory, Ottawa, Vol. 26, No.5, 1962.
(6) Smith, W. E. T. Earthquakes of Eastern Canada and Adjacent Areas 1928-1959.
Publications of the Dominion Observatory, Ottawa, Vol. 32, No.3, 1966.
(7) Milne, \V. A. and K. A. Lucas. Seismic Activity in Western Canada 1955 to 1959
Inclusive. Publications of the Dominion Observatory, Ottawa, Vol. 26, No.1, 1961.
(8) Davenport, A. G. and W. G. Milne. Distribution of Earthquake Risk in Canada.
4th World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, Santiago, Chile, January 1969.
(Also Bulletin, Seismological Society of America, Vol. 59, No.2, p. 729-754, April
1969.)
(9) Ferahian, R. H. Comparison of the Probabilities of \Vind and Earthquake Loads in
the NBC 1970. National Research Council of Canada, Division of Building Research,
Building Research Note 72, Ottawa, 1970.
(10) Housner, G. W. Behavior of Structures During Earthquakes. Journal of the Engineering Mechanics Division, Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs., October 1959.
Cherry,
S. Basic Dynamic Principles of Response of Linear Structures of Earthquake
(11)
Ground Motions. Proc. Symposium on Earthquake Engineering, Vancouver,
September 1965.
(12) Housner, A. W. et a1. Spectrum Analysis of Strong Motion Earthquakes. Bulletin,
Seismological Society of America, Vol. 43, 1953.
(13) Penzien, J. Dynamic Response of Elasto-Plastic Frames. Trans. Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs.,
Paper 3284, Vol. 127, 1962, Part II.
(14) Blume, J. A. et al. Design of Multistorey Reinforced Concrete Buildings for Earthquake Motions. Portland Cement Association, Skokie, Illinois, 1961.
(15) Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary. Seismology Committee.

Structural Engineers Association of California, 1967.
(16) Uniform Building Code, Vol. 1, 196~ Edition, International Conference of Building
Officials. Pasadena, California.
(17) Hanson, N. W. and H. W. Conner. Reinforced Concrete Beam-Column Connections
for Earthquakes. A report of studies and tests by the Portland Cement Association,
November 1965.
(18) Galambos, T. V. and M. G. Lay. The Ductility of Steel Structures. A report for the
Welding Research Council and the Department of Navy, on work done at Lehigh
University, March 1964.
(19) Papers in the Proceedings of the 34th Annual Convention of The Structural Engineers
Association of California, 1965, as follows:
Povov, E. P. and H. A. Franklin. Steel-Beam-to-Column Connt'ctions Subjected
to Cyclically Reversed Loadings. Berg, G. V. A Study of the Earthquake Response
of Inelastic Systems.
Bouwkamp, J. G. and R. W. Clough. Dynamic Properties of a Steel Frame
Building.
Beedle, L. S. Reversed Loading of Steel Frames, Preliminary Tests.
(20) Nuclear Reactors and Earthquakes, TID 7024, U.S. Department of Commerce,
Washington, D.C. August 1963.
(21) Seed, H. B. and I. M. Idriss. The Influence of Soil Conditions on Ground Motions
During Earthquakes. Presented at the State of the Art Symposium - Earthquake
Engineering of Buildings, San Francisco, 5-6 February 1968
(22) Idriss, I. M. and H. B. Seed. Seismic Response of Horizontal Soil Layers. Proc. Am.
Soc. Civ. Engrs. Journal of the Soil Mechanics Division, No. SM4, July 1968.
(23) Gutenberg, B. Effects of Ground Conditions on Earthquake Motion. Bulletins Seismological Society of America, July 1957.
(24) Rosenblueth, E. The Earthquake of 28 July, 1957 in Mexico City. Proc. 2nd \Vorld
Conference on Earthquake Engineering, japan, 1960, Vol. 1, p. 359-379.
(25) Perelman, D. S. et al. Seismic Response of Single-Story Interaction Systems, Proc.
Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs., Journal of the Structural Division, Nov. 1968.
(26) Seed, H. B. Landslides During Eearthquakes Due to Liquefaction. Proc. Am. Soc.
Civ. Engrs, Journal of the Soil Mechanics and Foundation Division, Vol. 94, No.
SM5, September 1968.
(27) Regles Relatives Aux Constructions a Edifier Dans Les Regions Sujettes aux Seismes.
Earthquake Resistant Regulations, A World List 1960, compiled by International
Association for Earthquake Engineering, Tokyo, Dec. 1966.
(28) Jaeger, L. G. and A. D. S. Barr. Parametric Instabilities in Structures Subjected to
Prescribed Periodic Support Motion. Proc. Symposium on Design for Earthquake
Loadings, McGill University, September, 1966.
(29) Anderson, A. et al. Lateral Forces of Earthquake and Wind. Paper No. 2514, Trans.
Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs, Vol. 117, 1952.
(30) Bustamante, J. I. Seismic Shears and Overturning Moments in Buildings. Proc.
Third World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, New Zealand, 1965, Session
IV.
(31) Sozen, M. A. et at. Engineering Report on the Caracas Earthquake of 29 july 1967.
National Academy of Sciences, Washington, D.C. 1968.
(32) Timoshenko, S. and Goodier. Theory of Elasticity. McGraw-Hili, 1951.
(33) Housner, G. W. and H. Outinen. The Effect of Torsional Oscillations on Earthquake
Stresses. Bulletin, Seismological Society of America, Vol. 48, No.3, July 1958,
p.221-229.
(34) Bustamante, j. I. and E. Rosenblueth. Building Code Provisions on Torsional Oscillations. Proc. Second World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, Japan, 1960,
Vol. 2, p. 879-892.
(35) Biot, M. A. Analytical and Experimental 'Methods in Engineering Seismology. Trans.
Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs., Paper 2183, Vol. 108, 1943.
(36) Chang, Fu-Kuei. Wind and Movement in Tall Buildings. Civil Engineering, August
1967, p. 70.
-591-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
(37) Robertson, L. E. and P. W. Chen. Glass Design and Building Code Implications of
Recent Wind Load Research for Tall Buildings. Conference on Glass in Building
Design and Construction, Washington, D.C., 1966.
(38) Bouwkamp, J. G. Behavior of Window Panels Under In-Plane Forces. A report to
the Division of Architecture, Dept. of Public Works, State of California, February
1960.
(39) Seismic Design for buildings. Dept. of Army Technical Manual TM5-809-10, Washington, D.C., March 1966. Plate 2-16, p. 2-62.
(40) Degenkolb, H. J. Seismic Tremor Shook Caracas Severely. Eng. News-Record, August
1967.
(41) As in Ref. 39, Plates 2-44 to 2-47.
(42) As in Ref. 39, Plates 2-19 to 2-40.
(43) Same as Ref. 1, pages 200-202, 206-213.
(44) Same as Ref. 1, pages 76-95, 194, 195.
(45) Same as Ref. 1, page 144.
(46) Same as Ref. 1, pages 81-83.
(47) Clough, R. W. and K. Lee Benuska. FHA Study of Seismic Design Criteria for High
Rise Buildings. A report prepared for the Technical Studies Program and the
Federal Housing Administration, HUD TS-3, August 1966.
(48) Seed, H. B. et al. Characteristics of Rock Motions During Earthquakes. Journal of
the Soil Mechanics and Foundations Division, Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs., Sept. 1969,
p. 1100-1218.
(49) California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California, July 1969, "Strong Motion
Earthquake Accelogramme" Digitized and Plotted Data.
(50) Imperial College of Science and Technology, Engineering Seismology Department,
London SW7, Great Britain, "Digitized Earthquake Records".
(51) Crawford, R. and H. S. Ward. Determination of the Natural Periods of Buildings.
Bulletin, Seismological Society America, Vol. 54, No.6, December 1964, p. 17431756.
(52) Ward, H. S. and R. Crawford. Wind-Induced Vibrations and Building Modes. Bulletin,
Seismological Society of America, Vol. 56, No.4, August 1966, p. 793-813.
(53) Cloud, W. K. Forced Vibration of the Mt. McKinley Building p. 333-356 of Ref. 1.
(54) Ward, H. S. Dynamic Characteristics of a Multi-storey Concrete Building. Proc.
Institution of Civil Engineers, Vol. 43, August 1969, p. 553-572.
(55) Housner, G. W. Engineering Estimates of Ground Shaking and Maximum Earthquake
Magnitude. Fourth World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, Santiago,
Chile, 1969.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
o
2. 0
Figure C3-1
1.0
4. 0
5. 0
6. 0
Variation of the moment reduction coefficient with period
PERIOD T, SEes
3. 0
7.0
8. 0
\II
-0
Copyright NRC-CNRC
VI
II-III
VI-VII
VI-VII
VI
1.0
<0.5
1.0
1.5
1.5
V
V
V
1(2)
IV
II
A(3)
VIII
VI
V
V
V
V
IV
V-VI
VI
1/10
3.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
1.0
VI
V
IV
IV
III-IV
IV
III
IV
IV-V
1(2)
1/30
4.5
4.5
4.0
3.0
<0.5
12.0
2.5
1.5
2.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
A(3)
VIII
VIII
VII-VIII
VIII
III
X
VII
VI
VI
V-VI
VI
V
VII
VII-VIII
1(2)
1/100
ESTIMATED PROBABILITY(l)
Notes to Table C3-A

(llEstimated probability of exceedance on an annual basis.
(~)l = intensity measured on the modified MercaJli Scale (1931).
(alA
horizontal ground acceleration expressed as a percentage of gravity.
La Mal Baie
Quebec City
Montreal
Ottawa
Toronto
Saint John
Halifax
Vancouver
Victoria
Prince
Rupert
Calgary
San
Francisco
Los Angeles
San Diego
Locality
20.5
16.0
11.0
11.0
<0.5
50.0
6.5
3.0
4.5
2.5
4.5
2.0
8.0
10.0
A(3)
EARTHQUAKE INTENSITIES AND GROUP ACCELERATION FORCES
TABLE C3-A
X
IX
VIII-IX
IV
III
50.0
34.0
20.5
26.5
0.5
11.0
5.0
7.0
4.0
8.0
~ 3.0
17.0
21.0
VIII
VI-VII
VII
VI
VII
VI
VIII
VIII-IX
A(3)
1/200
1(2)
TABLE C3-B
DEFINITION OF SEISMIC ZONES
TABLE
DEFINITION OF SEISMIC ZONES
Zone
Seismic Factor
R
A100;:: 6
6 > A 100 ~ 3
3 > A 100 ~ 1
1 > A 100
Range of A100
(Percent of Gravity)
TABLE C3-C
RATIO OF BASE MOMENT TO BASE SHEAR
TIMES HEIGHT (M/V'h n ) FOR IDEALIZED STRUCTURE
TABLE
RATIO OF BASE MOMENT TO BASE SHEAR

TIMES HEIGHT (M/V'h n ) FOR IDEALIZED STRUCTURE
Mode
MomentDeflecting Structure
ShearDeflecting Structure
o. 729
0.636
0.209
0.212
0.127
O. 127
-59.5-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
,
I
-596-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
f
!
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
SUPPLEMENT No.4
COMMENTARY NO.4
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA FOR DEFLECTIONS
AND VIBRATIONS
by
D. E.
ALLEN

The advent of stronger materials, lighter more rigid cladding, smaller damping and more
accurate strength calculations taking account of interaction of components means that
excessive deflections and vibrations now have a greater influence in structural design
than before. Excessive deflections and vibrations are usually controlled in codes by limiting
the member deflection under specified load to some ratio of the span (L), for example,
L/.360*. Table C4-A summarizes deflection criteria in this form in various standards
pertinent to the National Building Code of Canada, 1970. These deflection criteria depend
on the tpes of construction and materials and on the conditions of use. As an aid to the
designer, the problems associated with excessive deflection and excessive vibration are
briefly discussed and references are given.
For cantilevers, L may be taken as twice the span.
DEFLECTIONS
Excessive structural deflections can create a variety of problems: cracks or crushing in
non-structural components such as partitions; lack of fit for doors, etc.; walls out of plumb
or eccentricity of loading caused by rotation; unsightly droopiness; and ponding. Cracks,
besides being unsightly, may transmit unwanted sound through partitions or water and cold
air through exterior surfaces and, as a result, promote corrOSlOn. Control of cracking in
structural concrete is separately covered in CSA A23.3-1970, "Code for the Design of
Plain or Reinforced Concrete Structures".
There are usually a number of alternative design solutions to problems caused by excessive
deflection. Partition cracking, for example, can be avoided either by making the supporting
structure stiff enough or by providing flexible joints in the partitions. Similarly, to avoid
cracking, plastered ceilings should be hung from the floor beams, not rigidly attached to
them.
The deflection criteria in Table C4-A apply to conventional forms of construction under
conventional conditions of use. The most severe deflection requirement, 1/360, for members
supporting plastered ceilings, partitions, etc.(l), may not be sufficient for cracking of plaster
or rigid partitions(lI). As an aid to the designer for new or unusual cases, more detailed
deflection criteria are suggested in Ref. (2); case histories of damage due to excessive
deflections (including also differential settlement and temperature movements) are given
in Refs. (4) to (7).
VIBRATIONS
Two types of vibration problems arise in building construction: "resonance" problems
and translent problems. "Resonance" problems can be caused by periodic forces (usually
generated by machines or persons) synchronizing with a natural frequency of vibration
of the structure. Resonance problems caused by machines can be avoided by special design
provisions, whereas resonance problems caused by persons will not occur if the natural
frequency of the floor is greater than about 5 cycles per second(8,lll). This latter condition
is satisfied by most floor systems but may be a problem for long-span systems.
Transient vibrations in floor systems due to foot impact may cause discomfort to the
occupants or annoyance as a result of china rattling, etc. In Table C4-A, the deflection
criteria of 1/360 for wood floors(l) and 1/320 for steel floors which do not support brittle
components essentially attempt to govern such vibration effects. These figures apply to
conventional construction for conventional use and may not be adequate for new types of
construction, especially those without partitions, or for special conditions of use such as
gymnasium floors.
-597-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
The criteria in Table C4-A control vibration effects due to foot impact by control1ing
the stiffness of the floor and hence its amplitude of vibration. Other ways of avoiding
vibration effects due to foot impact are to increase the damping(lO) or to increase the mass.
Partitions and other non-structural components are very helpful in reducing discomfort(SI).
Further information on vibration characteristics and design considerations are given in
Refs. (8) to (15),
REFERENCES
(1) Russell, W. A. Deflection Characteristics of Residential Wood-Joist Floor Systems.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Housing and Home Finance Agency, Housing Research Paper 30, Washington,
D.C., Apri11954.
Allowable Deflections. Subcommittee 1, ACI Committee 435. Journal, Am. Concrete
Inst., Vol. 65, No.6, June 1968, p. 433.
Plewes, W. G. and G. K. Garden. Deflections of Horizontal Structural Members.
National Research Council of Canada, Division of Building Research, Canadian
Building Digest No. 54, Ottawa, June 1964.
Mayer, H. and H. Rusch. Bauschaden als Folge der Durchbiegung von Stahl betonBauteilen (Building Damage Caused by Deflection of Reinforced Concrete Building
Components). Deutscher Ausschuss fUr Stahlbeton, Heft 193, Berlin 1967. National
Research Council of Canada Technical Translation TT1412, 1970.
Pfeffermann, O. Les Fissures dans les Constructions Consequences de Phenomenes
Physiques Naturels. Annales de l'lnstitut Technique du B.timent et des Travaux
Publics, No. 250, October 1968.
Skempton, A. W. and D. H. MacDonald. The Allowable Settlements of Buildings.
Proc., Institution of Civil Engineers, Vol. 5, Part III, 1956, p. 727.
Khan, F. R. and M. FinteL Effects of Column Exposure in Tall Structures
Design
Considerations and Field Observations of Buildings. Journal, Am. Concrete Inst.
Vol. 65, No.2, February 1968, p. 99.
Vermeyden, I. P. Strength and Stiffness of Wood Joists. Heron, Vol. 9, No.2, (1961).
Hurst, H. T. The Wood-Frame House as a Structural Unit. National Forest Products
Assoc., Techn. Services Div., Tech. Report No.5, Washington, 1965.
Lenzen, K. H. Vibration of Steel Joists - Concrete Slab Floors. Engineering Journal
of Am. Inst. Steel Const., Vol. 3, No.3, July 1966, p. 133.
"Full-Scale Testing of New York World's Fair Structures - Vol. I. The Bourbon
Street Structure". Building Research Advisory Board, National Academy of Sciences
Pub. 1720, 1969.
Floor Joist System Saves Steel. Engineering News-Record, Vol. 181, No.4, July 25,
1968, p. 19.
Vibration Problems in Prestressed Concrete. Netherlands Committee for Concrete
Research, C.U.R. Report No. 17, The Hague, 1960.
Nelson, F. C. The Use of Viscoelastic Material to Damp Vibration in Buildings and
Large Structures. Engineering Journal of Am. lnst. Steel Const. Vol. 5, No.2,
April 1968, p. 72.
Onysko, D. M. Performance of Wood-Joist Floor Systems. Forest Products Laboratory Information Report OP-X-24, Canadian Forestry Service, Department of
Fisheries and Forestry, Januray 1970, Ottawa.
-598-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
VI
-0
-0
Copyright NRC-CNRC
TABLE C4:-A
Notes:
Wall members
Roof members (not supporting

plastered ceiling, etc.)
Floor members (not supporting

plastered ceiling, partitions, etc.)
Roof or floor members supporting

plastered ceiling, partitions, etc.
(1)
(1) Deflection under

dead plus live load.
Modulus used for
calculation based on
short term test but
there is a warning
clause on creep
deflection.
1 (1)
180
1 (1)
180
180
(1)
(2)Immediate live
load deflection plus
creep deflection due
to dead load plus
permanent live load.
(3)Immediate live
load deflection.
1 (3)
360
1 (3)
180
(2)
CSA A23.3-1970
Reinforced Concrete
CSA 086-1970
Timber
(6)
built-up roofs. There is

a warning clause on
ponding.
and 2!0 to asphaltic
(5)
1 app rles to
180
sheet metal or elastic
membrane roof cover
(4)There is a warning
clause on vibrations.
1 (6)
or
180
1
360
1 (')
320
CSA S16-1969
Structural Steel
1
180
1
180
1
200
1
-360
CSA S157-1969
Structural Aluminum
SUMMARY OF MAXIMUM DEFLECTION/SPAN RATIOS IN STANDARDS PERTINENT TO PART 4: OF NBC 1970

No deflection criteria stipulated in e5A 5136-1963 (light gauge steel), e5A 5190-1968 (light gauge aluminum), or e5A A135-1962 (prestressed
concrete).
Deflection under live load onlv unless otherwise noted.
--
SUPPLEMENT No.4
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
COMMENTARY NO.5
PONDING LOADS ON FLAT ROOFS
by
D. E.
ALLEN

If a flat roof is too flexible an instability condition can occur in which rain water forms
ponds causing local increase in deflection and further ponding which may result in failure.
In the case of one-way roof beams simply supported on rigid supports, this instability condition occurs when the beam stiffness is less that the critical stiffness given by(l):
(El) erit = ...s(~)
(1)
where: E
I
L
S
modulus of elasticity
moment of inertia of the beam
span
beam spacing
unit weight of water.
'Y
F or a series of parallel beams, when the stiffness is less than the critical value, rain water
will accumulate in local areas, and thereby overload one or more beams. Even if a roof
beam is stiffer than critical by Eq. (1), calculated moments and deflections may be amplified
due to ponding effect.
The occurrence of ponding depends not only on the flexibility of the roofing system, but
also on the location of roof drains, and the slope and camber of the roof. Location of roof
drains should take into account not only the roof slope but also deflection of the roof
system under rain and snow. If roof drainage is effective, ponding due to excessive flexibility will not be a problem. Further information is given in Refs. (1) to (7).
A practical criterion against ponding problems is to require member stiffness to be at
least twice the critical stiffness given in Eq. (1). In terms of the allowable deflection/span
ratios in the National Building Code of Canada (see Commentary No.4: Serviceability
Criteria for Deflections and Vibrations - Table C4-A), this criterion can be expressed as
follows:
WL
~ 98.4L(~) allowable
(2)
where W L is the design load in psf specified for deflection calculations and ([) allowable is
the allowable deflection span ratio. Critical values of WL in Eq. (2) are given in Table C5-A.
When WL is less than the critical value in Table C5-A, the effects of ponding should be considered. This applies particularly to large flat roofs in areas of heavy rainfall. Table C5-A
is based on the assumption of beams simply supported on rigid supports; further information
for two-way systems (beams on flexible supports) is given in Refs. (3) and (4).
REFERENCES
(1) Sawyer, D. A. Ponding of Rainwater on Flexible Roof Systems. Proc. Am. Soc. Civ.
Engrs., Journal of Structural Division, Vol. 93, ST1, February 1967, p. 127.
(2) Haussler, R. W. Roof Deflection Caused by Rainwater Pools. Civil Engineering,
Vol. 32, October 1962, p. 58.
(3) Marino, F. J. Ponding of Two-Way Roof Systems. Engineering Journal of Amer.
Inst. of Steel Const., Vol. 3, No.3, July 1966, p. 93.
(4) Commentary on the Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings. Amer. Inst. of Steel Construction, New York, 12 February 1969.
(5) Salama, A. E. and M. L. Moody. Analysis of Beams and Plates for Ponding Loads
Proc., Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs., Journal of Structural Divi'5ion, Vol. 93, ST1, February
1967, p. 109.
-601-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
(6) Chinn, J., A. H. Mansouri and S. F. Adams. Ponding of Liquids on Flat Roofs. Proc.,
Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs., Journal of Structural Division, Vol. 95, ST5, May 1969, p. 797.
(7) Sawyer, D. A. Roof-Structural Roof-Drainage Interactions. Proc. Am. Soc. Civ.
Engrs., Journal of Structural Division, Vol. 94, ST1, January 1969, p. 175.
TABLE C5-A
CRITICAL VALUES OF W L IN PSF FOR PONDING
Deflection/Span Ratio
(See Table C4-A)
1
180
1
240
20 ft
= 40 ft
L = 60 ft
L = 100 ft
11
22
33
55
16
24
41
- 602.-Copyright NRC-CNRC
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
SUPPLEMENT NO. 4
COMMENTARY NO.6
LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL DESIGN
by
D. E. ALLEN
Article 4.1.2.3. of the NBC of Canada, 1970, is intended to provide an acceptable and
relatively uniform degree of safety in the design of structural members under different load
combinations. The rules are to be used for strength considerations, i. e. allowable stress,
plastic or ultimate strength design, and not for serviceability considerations such as deflection. The rules take into consideration the probability of simultaneous occurrence of
the design loads stipulated in Subsections 4.1.3. to 4.1.8. They are not intended to take
into account the change in material strengths with changes in duration of loading.
The rules for load combinations given in the design procedures referred to in Clause
4.1. 1.4. (a) have the same intent as Article 4.1.2.3. and therefore are not to be applied
simultaneously with Article 4.1.2.3. The modification factor for duration of load in CSA
086-1970, "Code of Recommended Practice for Engineering Design in Timber", however,
is applied simultaneously with Article 4.1.2.3., since this factor takes into account change
of material strength with changes in duration of loading.
SIMULTANEOUS LOADS
As dead load is nearly constant throughout the life of a structure, a combination of dead
load with any other load constitutes a basic combination in which the basic safety factors
are applicable*. When dead load is combined with two or more other loads the simultaneous
occurrence of the full design values of each of the load effects is less likely to occur than the
basic combination above. Sentence 4.1.2.3.(2) takes this into consideration by allowing
reductions in the total effect due to combinations of the dead load effect with two or more
other load effects.
"'The only exception to this is for ultimate strength design of reinforced and prestressed concrete as given
in CSA A23.3-1970, "Code for the Design of Plain or Reinforced Concrete Structures", and in CSA
A135-1962. "Prestressed Concrete", where the safety factor for dead load is less than the safety factor
for live load.
Because of the very short duration of some design loads, the probability of their simultaneous occurrence is extremely small. Thus, according to Sentence 4.1.2.3.(1), earthquake
load is not considered simultaneously with wind load. In load combinations (v) and (viii),
however, horizontal crane loads (part of L) are combined with wind or earthquake loads.
This was considered necessary because in certain industrial buildings cranes are continuously
in use.
So far the discussion is concerned with load effects which are additive. Stress reversal,
overturning and sliding, discllssed in the following, are cases where the load effects are
counteracting.
STRESS REVERSAL (Sentence 4.1.2.3.(3) )

Stress reversal may occur at a critical section of a member when the dead load effect is
counteracted by a load effect of opposite sign, such as in a truss member which is in tension
under dead load but undergoes compression due to wind load or non-uniformly distributed
snow load. Probability calculations(l) show that unless special care is taken in applying
the safety factors for stress reversal, unsafe designs may result. This is because many existing
design rules make the mistake of applying the usual safety factor to a small difference
between two independent load effects. The collapse of cooling towers at Ferrybridge,
England(2) was found to be, to a considerable extent, due to strict application of allowable
stress design for stress reversal.
This error can be avoided by considering that the safety factor is made up of two factors:
one a factor to take into account overloads (load factor) and the other a factor to take
into account strength less than calculated (structure or workmanship factor). In the
example of stress reversal due to wind load, a safe design results if the usual load factor is
applied to the wind effect and a load factor of somewhat less than 1.0 is applied to the dead
load effect.
Since this approach to the safety factor is not at present used in the 1970 National Building
Code, empirical rules are given in CSA A23.3-1970, "Code for the Design of Plain or Reinforced Concrete Structures", and in CSA SI6-1969, "Steel Structures for Buildings". In
any case, for structures such as towers that are subject primarily to wind load and dead
load only, the designer should take special precaution in designing members subject to
stress reversal. A safe empirical rule is to apply the usual safety factor to the full design
wind effect minus half the dead load effect. For reinforcing steel in a beam, column, or
shell this gives an ultimate strength required for stress reversal, U, given by
U = 1.8W - 0.9D
where W is the wind load effect and D the dead load effect, (compare with Eq. (45) of CSA
A23.3-1970, "Code for the Design of Plain or Reinforced Concrete Structures"). A similar procedure should be used for prestressing steel.
Overturning and Sliding (Sentence 4.1.2.3.(4) )

In the case of overturning and sliding the stabilizing effect of the dead load is overcome
by the counteracting effect of a load such as wind, earthquake, earth pressure or eccentric
live load. In this sense overturning and sliding are similar to stress reversal and the reasoning
given above regarding the safety provisions for stress reversal also applies to overturning
and sliding. Sentence 4.1.2.3.(4) requires a safety factor of not less than 2.0 on the loads
tending to cause over-turning or sliding.
With regard to overturnin~, it is assumed that the designer considers that: (1) unless the
foundation material has a hIgh strength the point of overturning is not at the toe of the
building; (2) for flexible structures the dead load acts through the centre of gravity of
the deflected structure.
REFERENCES
(1) Allen, D. E. Safety Factors for Stress Reversal. Publications, International Association
for Bridge and Structural Engineering, Vol. 29/11.
(2) Report of the Committee of Inquiry into Collapse of Cooling Towers at Ferrybridge,
Monday, 1 November 1965, Central Electricity Generating Board, London.
Copyright NRC-CNRC
1
SUPPLEMENT No. 4
NBC OF CANADA, 1970

COM~[ENTARY
NO.7
STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY
by
D. E.
W. R. SCHRIEVER, AND W. G. PLEWES

ALLEN,
A new article has been introduced in the 1970 edition of Section 4.1 of the Code as follows:
"4.1.1.7. Building and structural systems shall provide such structural integrity that
the hazards associated with progressive collapse due to local failure caused by severe
overloads or abnormal loads not specifically covered in this Section are reduced to a level
commensurate with good engineenng practice."
The intent of this clause is to ensure that in the event of a reasonably foreseeable overload
or abnormal circumstance such as an explosion, fire or impact, a local failure will not
result in collapse of the whole building or a large part of it.
PROGRESSIVE COLLAPSE
Progressive collapse is the phenomenon in which local failure results in the collaese of a
whole building or large parts of a building remote from the original point of failure. A
notable example occurred in a 22-storeyapartment block built from precast concrete loadbearing panels at Ronan Point{l), England, when a local domestic gas explosion on the 18th
storey blew out one panel wall, which in turn led to the collapse of the whole corner of the
building in the fol1owing manner. The removal of the wall panel led to the collapse of the
slab and wall panels immediately above and the failure progressed upwards to the top
floor. The falling panels broke the floor below, which resulted in progressive collapse of
wall and floor below, which resulted in progressive collapse of wall and floor panels of
that corner right down to the bottom.
Another example(2) was the collapse of an arena roof under snow load. Fracture of one of
the laminated wood roof trusses led to a lateral progressive failure of the whole roof. There
are also examples of progressive collapse during construction.
STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY
For a structure not to be susceptible to progressive collapse, it must have certain properties denoted by the term "structural integrity" as follows:
(I) Alternative paths of support.
In the event of failure of a loadbearing element, the
structure will bridge or cantilever over the local failure with the result that, at most, only
members immediately adjacent to the local failure will be affected. In addition to this,
the structure below should be able to withstand the falling elements without collapse.
This property is achieved by suitable arrangement and interconnection of components,
and by the provision of ties in the structure as a whole and across the joints. In the case of
one-way systems such as long-span trusses or girders, for example, the components can be
inter-connected by cross-bracing.
(2) Ductility in the members and joints. - Energy generated by impact, explosion or
expansion due to fire is absorbed locally if the members and connections behave in a ductile
manner when overloaded. Joints relying on friction due to gravity only are brittle in nature.
Ductility is also an important structural property for earthquake resistance.
ABNORMAL LOADS TO BE CONSIDERED
It is obviously not economical, in fact it is impossible, to design structures for absolute
safe t>.' , i.e. for any possible situation that could occur, such as an aeroplane crashing into
a budding. Abnormal loads, overloads or understrengths to be considered in causing local
failure leading to progressive collapse should be reasonably foreseeable, that is, have some
reasonable probability of occurrence. Internal explosions, impact from vehicles, falling
objects during construction or as a result of local failure, fires, defects such as excessive
settlement or construction deviations can in certain situations be of this category.
-605-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
1
I
Information on the incidence of explosions(l) showed that in England the number of

explosions of a size to cause structural damage was 3.5 per year per million dwelling units
usmg manufactured gas. In a 110-unit apartment such as Ronan Point this means that there
is a 2 per cent chance of a gas explOSion in 60 years. Available information for Canada
indicates probabilities that are somewhat less but of the same order of magnitude.
Fires have a greater probability of occurrence than gas explosions. Provided the structure
is well tied together and has an adequate fire resistance rating, however, progressive collapse
is unlikely. Furthermore, except for very tall buildings, evacuation in the case of fire can
be carried out before progressive collapse occurs and so the danger to public safety is not
as great as in the case of progressive collapse due to explosion or impact. On the other hand,
an explosion may damage the fire protective covering of structural members and a subsequent fire may cause progressive collapse earlier than expected.
During construction, impact as a result of construction accidents may be a reasonably
foreseeable abnormal load. The risk of local failure in the structure as a result of such
impacts may have to be accepted, but progressive collapse must be avoided.
BUILDING STRUCTURES SUSCEPTIBLE TO PROGRESSIVE COLLAPSE

Many existing forms of construction, are not susceptible to progressive collapse, except
possibly during construction. On the other hand, buildings of large precast panel construction such as Ronan Point(l) or of loadbearing masonry construction may be susceptible to
progressive collapse unless adequately designed against this hazard.
In Great Britain, recommendations(lI,4,1;,6) have been issued for the design of large panel
construction against progressive collapse following the failure at Ronan Point. As a result,
a number of large panel buildings in Great Britain have required remedial work(7). The
design of large panel concrete structures is in general covered by CSA A197-1968, "Precast Concrete Wall Panels". References (5) and (8) give additional detailed information
for the design of such structures against progressive collapse.
In Great Britain, guidance recommendations(9) have been issued for the design of loadbearing masonry construction against progressive collapse as a result of internal explosions.
Further design considerations are given in Ref. (10).
Other structures that may be susceptible to progressive coJ]apse are long-span roofs
and structures in the process of construction.
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Each problem will have to be solved in its own way, but in general the design approaches
to the danger of progressive collapse can be categorized as follows:
(1) Elimination of Certain Risks or Loads
It may be expedient not to permit the use or storage of substances that can readily
result in explosive mixtures in buildings susceptible to progressive collapse. Alternatively,
it may be possible to design for explosion pressure relief(ll,12). Some structural members
such as critical columns can be protected from vehicle impact by means of fenders.
(2) Desig,n of Structures to Resist Abnormal Load
If the nature and magnitude of the abnormal load can be foreseen, it may be possible
to design the structure to resist it. In the case of gas explosions, for example, British recommendations() give design pressures of 720 psf, or 360 psf if there is adequate pressure
relief(9).
(3) Structural Integrity
It may be stated in very general terms, that since both the nature and magnitude of
abnormal loads are often not predictable, structural integrity appears to be a better principle to follow than designing for the abnormal load.
(4) Increased Reliability of Key Members
It is not always possible to provide alternative paths of support in the event of failure
of certain key members. Such key members, e. g. lower storey columns in a tall building
or primary members in a long-span roof, should be more reliable than other structural
members. Greater reliability can be achieved by (a) the use of increased safety factors;
(b) consideration of the effects of possible abnormal loads; (c) better control of materials
and workmanship by inspection and testing.
Further discussion on the implications of progressive collapse, gas explosions, etc. in
structural design is given in Refs. (12) to (14),
-606-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
References
(1) Report of Inquiry into the Collapse of Flats at Ronan Point, Canning Town. Ministry
of Housing and Local Government, H.M.S.O., London, 1968.
(2) Morrison, C. F., W. R. Schriever, and D. E. Kennedy. The Collapse of the Listowel
Arena. Canadian Consulting Engineer, Vol. 2, No.5, May 1960, p. 36.
(3) Structural Stability and the Prevention of Progressive Collapse. Institution of Structural Engineers Memorandum RP /68/01. London, December 1968.
(4) Institution of Structural Engineers Memorandum RP/68/02. Notes for Guidance
Which May Assist in Interpretation of Appendix I to Ministry of Housing and
Local Government Circular 62/68, London, Decerpber 1968.
(5) British Standard Code of Practice for Large Panel Structures. Addendum No.1 to
CP116 The Structural Use of Precast Concrete. British Standards Institution, London.
(6) The Building (Fifth Amendment) Regulations 1970. Ministry of Housing and Local
Government, London, April 1970.
(7) Larsen-Neilson Flats - GLC to begin work on Strengthening. Building, 21 March
1969, p. 121.
(8) Recommandations Internationales Unifiees pour Ie Calcul et l'Execution des Constructions en Panneaux Assembles de Grand Format. Comite Europeen du Beton, Bulletin d'Information No. 60, Paris, 1967. (English translation by Cement and Concrete Association, London, 1968).
(9) Guidance on the Design of Domestic Accommodation in Load-Bearin~ Brickwork
and Blockwork to Avoid Collapse Following an Internal ExplOSiOn. Institution of Structural Engineers Memorandum RP/68/03. London, 1969.
(10) Haseltine, B. A. and K. Thomas. Load Bearing Brickwork - Design for Accidental
Forces. Clay Products and Technical Bureau Technical Note, Vol. 2, No.6, July
1969.
(11) Astbury, N. F. Brickwor~and Gas Explosions. The British Ceramic Research Assoc.,
Tech. Note No. 146, September 1969.
(12) Rasbash, D. J. and K. L. ~tretch, Explosions in Domestic Structures. The Structural
Engineer, Vol. 47, No. 10, October 1969, p. 403.
(13) The Implications of the Report of the Inquiry into the Collapse of Flats at Ronan
Point, Canning Town. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 47, No.7, July 1969, p. 255.
(14) Comments of the Institution of Structural Engineers to the Ministry of Housing and
Local Government on the Proposed (Fifth) Amendments to the Building Regulations. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 47, No.9, September 1969, p. 376.
-608-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
SUPPLEMENT No. 4
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
COMMENTARY NO.8
TEMPERATURE CHANGES IN BUILDING
COMPONENTS
by
W. R. SCHRIEVER
When building materials expand and contract due to temperature changes, considerable
forces may be produced in restrained structural elements, I.e., in those elements that are
not free to expand and contract with the changes in temperature. Often these forces are
compounded with those produced by shrinkage, by creep and by moisture content changes
and are, therefore, difficult to analyse or predict. In many situations, however, it is very
important for the structural designer to consider the probable structural effects of the
forces produced by temperature changes along with all other forces; indeed the designer is
required to do so by Sentence 4.1.2.1.{l) of the National Building Code (1970).
In addition to expansion and contraction, temperature changes may produce differential
deformation, or warping, of materials as a result of a gradient in temperature through the
thickness of materials or assemblies. Again this may tend to complicate the assessment of
deformations or stresses, but a rational judgement must be made in design if building
elements are to perform in a satisfactory manner.
If these forces are not properly considered, the stresses resulting from such forces can lead
to serious failures (usually cracking) in materials and structural members. Failures occur
when clearances are insufficient, when fasteners do not allow movement or deformations,
or, in the case of restrained elements, when the elements are not strong enough to withstand
the stresses induced. An elementary review of the phenomenon of thermal and moisture
deformations in building materials is given in reference (I), from which Table C8-A is
reproduced to give an indication of the order of magnitude of movement to which various
materials are liable.
-609-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
....
o
Copyright NRC-CNRC
0.024
0.056
0.08
0.056
0.08
0.11
3 X 10-6
7 X 10-6
10 X 10-6
7 X 10-6
10 X 10-6
14 X 10-6
Marble
and Dense
Limestone
Sandstone
Reinforced
Polyester
Steel
Copper
Aluminum
0.024
0.05
3 X 10-6
6 X 10-6
Per
Cent
0.13
0.10
0.07
0.10
0.07
0.03
0.03
0.06
In./
10 ft
of 80F
0.32
0.23
0.16
0.23
0.16
0.07
0.07
0.14
Per
Cent
0.38
0.28
0.19
0.28
0.19
0.08
0.08
0.17
In./
10 ft
of 230F
Deformation Due to
Temperature Change
Brick
Normal
Dense
Concrete
Coefl. of
Thermal
Expansion
per deg F
none
none
none
<.001
0.07
<.001
0.007
0.03
Per
Cent
30 X 106
17 X 106
10.3 X 106
15X106
5 X 106
10 X 106
3 X 106
2.5 X 106
Modulus of
Elasticity
E
0.08
0.008
0.04
In./
10 ft
Moisture
Deformation
on Wetting from
Dry to Saturated
(or Vice Versa)
40000T
50000T
40000T
(yield point)
15000T
0.39
0.29
0.13
1.00
0.008
0.24
12000C
400T
0.006
600T
0.25
25000C
0.47
0.35
0.15
1. 20
0.01
0.29
0.007
0.30
0.02
0.24
0.016
0.20
6000C
500T
0.01
0.12
In./
10 ft
0.01
0.10
Per
Cent
250T
2500C
Failing
Stress
Compo or
Tension
Deformation
Required to
Cause Failure
TEMPERATURE AND MOISTURE DEFORMATIONS FOR SOME COMMON BUILDING MATERIALS
TABLE C8-A
...
The daily temperature changes that should be considered will depend on the climate
of the locality and may often be as much as 80 F degrees in materials exposed to outside
weather conditions. The seasonal temperature changes are considerably larger and, as
explained(2), may be as much as 230 F degrees for dark-coloured materials backed by
insulation. Considering the 80 F degree change, the corresponding deformation in reinforced
concrete would be of the order of 0.05 per cent. It may be noted that this temperature
deformation is five times the strain necessary to cause tension cracking in concrete if fully
restrained.
An example of the importance of considering temperature variations is the case of multistorey apartment and office buildings with exterior columns partially, and in some cases
fully, exposed to the weather. Exposed columns, when subjected to seasonal temperature
variations, change their length relative to interior columns, which remain unchanged in a
controlled environment. Although in low buildings, this causes insignificant structural
problems, in tall buildings temperature stresses become significant and must be investigated
thoroughly.
Dimensional changes occur not only as the result of temperatures changes, but also from
shrinkage, moisture content changes, chemical processes and creep deformation in the
component materials of a building. If the building or component is not free to contract
or expand, tensile or compressive stresses result. These stresses can be relieved or reduced
to tolerable limits by contraction and expansion joints. Such joints are particularly important to allow contraction to take place along certain preselected lines rather than to produce
cracks along accidental lines of least resistance.
Short Bibliography on Temperature Effects on Structures

(1) Baker, M. C. Thermal and Moisture Deformations in Building Materials, Division
of Building Research, Canadian Building Digest 56, National Research Council of
Canada, August 1964.
(2) Stephenson, D. G. Extreme Temperatures at the Outer Surface of Buildings. National
Research Council of Canada, Division of Building Research, November 1963. Canadian
Building Digest 47, Nov. 1963.
(3) Khan, F. R. and M. Fintel. Effects of Column Exposure in Tall Structures. Paper in
three parts. (a) Temperature Variations and Their Effects, (b) Analysis of Length
Chan~es in Exposed Columns, and (c) Design Considerations and Field Observations
of Butldings. Jour. American Concrete Inst., Vol. 63, No.8, August 1966 and Vol. 65,
No.2, February 1968.
(4) Weidlinger P. Temperature Stresses in Tall Reinforced Concrete Buildings. Civil
Engineering, New York, Vol. 34, No.8, August 1964.
(5) Jones K. Restraint of Structures Attached to Mass Concrete. J. Structural Divisioll,
Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs., Vol. 87, No. ST8, December 1961.
(6) Marshal W. T. Shrinkage and Temperature Stresses in Reinforced Concrete. Civil
Engineering, London, Vol. 56, No. 665, December 1961.
(7) Fischer, P. Differential Temperature Movements in Rigid Frame. Jour. American
Concrete Inst., Vol. 59, No.6, June 1962.
(8) Allen, D. W. The Calculation of Temperature Stresses. Concrete & Constructional
Engineering, Vol. LVII, No.9, September 1962.
(9) England, G. L. and A. D. Ross. Reinforced Concrete under Thermal Gradients.
Magazine of Concrete Research, Vol. 14, No. 40, March 1962.
(10) Principles of Modern Buildings, Vol. 1, British Building Research Station, HMSO,
London, 1959.
(11) Slack, J. H. and M. J. Walker. Movement Joints in Concrete. Concrete Society
Limited, Grosvenor Gardens, London, S.W.l, Technical Paper, 1967.
- 611-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-612-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Supplement No.4
NBC OF CANADA, 1970
PART D
DESIGN DATA FOR SELECTED LOCATIONS IN CANADA
This Part contains a table of climatic design information reprinted from
Supplement No.1 of the NBC of Canada, 1970.
-613 -
Copyright NRC-CNRC
-614-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Province
and
Location
I
!
Design Temperature
January
July 2iti%
2%% 1%
Dry Wet
OF OF . OF
OF
Degree
Days
below
65F
15
One Ann.
Min. Day I Tot.
Rain Rain Pcpn.
in.
in.
in.
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
Hourly Wind
Pressures
1/10 1/30
psf
psf
1/100
psf
Earth
quake
R
factor
British Columbia
Abbotsford. ......... ,
Agassiz . ...............
Alberni ..................
Ashcroft ................
Beatton River..........
13
7
22
-14
36
11
4
20
-19
-40
84
87
87
95
78
68
69
65
69
64
5735
5464
5865
7452
12831
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.5
4.0
4.5
4.5
2.0
2.0
60
60
67
9
17
50
60
52
27
60
8.7
11.5
9.8
5.9
4.6
11.5
15.6
12.1
7.3
5.7
14.9
20.8
14.7
9.0
7.0
4
2
4
1
1
Campbell Rivet .......

Carmi ....................
Chilliwack .... .........
Cloverdale
Comox..... . ... ., ....
18
11
10
17
18
15
-16
7
14
15
79
91
86
84
80
64
69
68
67
64
5900
9565
5496
5600
5980
0.3
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.3
4.5
2.0
(5
4.0
4.0
55
21
59
50
53
58
80
55
40
57
9.5
5.1
9.9
9.5
9.3
12.1
6.9
13.2
12.1
12.1
15.1
9.1
17.2
15.1
15.4
4
1
2
4
4
Courtenay ... ..........

Cranbrook ........ ....
Crescent Valley
Crofton ..................
Dawson Creek ........
18
-17
5
21
35
15
-22
-II
19
-40
81
89
88
81
81
64
66
67
64
64
6000
8743
7946
5800
10800
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.3
0.6
4.0
2.5
2.0
4.0
2.5
53
15
29
38
15
57
"4
67
35
49
9.3
4.7
4.7
10.1
6.5
12.1
6.1
6.1
12.1
7.8
15.4
7.8
7.8
14.3
9.2
4
0
0
4
1
Dog Creek
Duncan
Elko
Fernie .... ...........
Fort Nelson ... ......
-20
21
20
21
-41
-24
19
24
-25
-44
87
85
85
84
84
68
64
66
66
64
9383
5900
9000
9144
12777
0.4
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
2.0
4.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
15
32
20
41
16
37
35
50
80
44
6.5
10.1
5.6
6.8
4.0
7.8
12.1
7.8
8.9
5.0
9.2
14.3
10.4
11.5
6.2
1
4
0
0
1
Fort St. John ..... ,<

Glacier
Golden ..... ... .. ....
Haney
Hope. ..... , ... .. .......
34
-17
-19
15
2
39
-22
23
12
-3
80
8f
86
85
89
64
64
64
67
69
10874
10504
9093
6055
5808
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.3
0.5
2.5
3.5
2.5
4.5
4.0
15
52
18
65
62
53
161
75
45
69
6.4
5.0
5.6
9.8
8.5
7.5
6.1
6.7
12.6
11.5
8.8
7.3
8.0
16.1
15.2
1
1
0
4
2
Kamloops ..... .. , . .... . .

Kelowna
Kimberley. ..... , ......
Kitimat Plant
Kitimat Townsite ..
-10
0
-16
2
2
16
-5
21
1
1
94
91
88
76
76
69
69
66
62
62
6799
6776
8965
7562
7600
0.5
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.5
6.0
10
12
15
97
88
35
41
38
70
90
6.4
7.1
4.7
7.9
7.9
7.8
8.9
6.1
9.4
9.4
9.4
11.1
7.8
11.2
11.2
1
1
0
4
4
Langley. .... ,. .........

Lytton ............. .....
McLeod Lake .....
Ma5sett ......... ...... " ..
Mission City .. .........
17
-3
-32
18
14
14
8
-37
15
11
84
95
81
66
85
67
69
64
68
5500
5934
10500
6839
5500
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.4
4.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
5.0
60
17
18
56
70
44
60
55
30
50
9.5
6.5
5.1
10.2
9.7
12.1
8.2
6.1
12.1
12.6
15.2
10.3
7.3
14.3
16.2
4
1
1
4
4
Nanaimo ....... ........

Nelson
New Westminster ....
North Vancouver ....
Ocean Falls
20
-5
19
19
9
17
11
15
15
5
78
88
84
78
76
64
67
66
66
62
5554
7200
5412
5700
6472
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.4
0.5
3.0
2.5
4.5
5.0
9.2
37
29
55
70
177
46
65
40
40
60
9.8
4.7
9.2
9.2
9.7
12.1
6.1
11.5
11.5
11.5
14.8
7.8
14.2
14.2
13.6
4
0
4
4
4
Osoyoos ..................
Pentieton ................
Port Alberni.. ..........
Port Hardy ............
Port McNeill ..... ....
3
3
22
21
21
2
-1
20
19
19
91
91
87
70
73
69
69
65
61
62
6500
6522
5865
6730
6400
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.5
0.5
2.0
2.0
4.5
5.5
5.0
11
12
67
60
50
30
27
52
53
52
6.3
8.3
9.8
10.1
10.1
8.9
11.0
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.3
14.2
14.7
14.3
14.3
1
1
4
4
4
Powell River ............

Prince George .........
Prince Rupert.. .......
Princeton
Quesnel ..................
15
31
15
-16
-29
12
37
11
23
34
79
82
71
90
87
64
65
60
69
66
5362
9755
7029
8368
9072
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.4
4.0
2.0
5.5
4.5
2.5
35
22
94
13
19
65
59
33
49
58
8.8
4.4
8.8
7.4
5.2
11.5
5.3
10.4
9.4
6.1
14.8
6.4
12.3
11.9
7.1
4
1
4
1
1
Revelstoke ..............
Riehmond ..............
Salmon Arm ............
Sandspit. ......... .......
Sidney ....................
16
19
10
20
21
21
15
15
18
19
91
81
92
63
77
68
66
69
63
7756
5400
7530
6705
5700
0.6
0.3
0.6
0.5
0.2
4.0
4.5
2.0
4.0
4.0
39
57
20
70
31
88
34
50
28
25
5.0
9.3
6.0
11.2
9.6
6.1
11.5
7.3
13.2
11.5
7.3
14.1
8.9
15.5
13.7
2
4
1
4
4
Smithers ..................
Smith River ............
Squamish
Stewart.. .................
TayloI .....................
.. 22
51
12
10
-34
26
54
8
13
-39
79
80
84
76
80
63
63
67
61
64
9693
13917
5800
8648
10800
0.4
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.6
2.5
2.0
4.5
3.5
18
18
100
72
15
39
48
63
160
55
6.6
4.0
7.9
6.8
6.6
7.8
5.3
10.4
8.2
7.8
9.2
6.8
13.5
9.9
9.1
2
2
4
4
1
2.S

,,-p~~gn
Temperature
January
July 2%%
Dry Wet
2'1z% 1%
of
of
of
of
Province
and
Location
Degree
Days
below
65F
IS
One Ann.
Tot.
Min. Day
Rain Rain Pcpn.
in.
in.
in.
Hourly Wind
Pressures
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
1/10
psf
1/30
psf
1/100
psf
Earth
quake
R
factor
Terrace
Tofino .. ...... , ............
Trail ...... ........ ........
Ucluelet
Vancouver ................
-5
27
3
27
19
-10
26
-2
26
15
80
66
91
66
78
66
8300
6000
6711
6000
5515
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.5
0.3
4.5
6.0
2.5
5.5
4.5
47
95
24
106
57
75
40
62
40
34
7.5
11.3
4.9
11.3
9.3
8.9
13.2
6.7
13.2
11.5
10.6
15.4
8.9
15.4
14.1
2
4
0
4
4
Vernon ...................
Victoria ....................
Williams Lake ..........
Youbou ....................
-5
23
-23
22
-10
20
-28
20
91
76
87
87
69
62
67
65
7420
5579
9300
6200
0.6
0.2
0.4
0.4
2.0
3.5
2.0
4.5
16
26
65
41
25
44
50
6.6
9.9
6.2
9.6
8.2
12.1
7.3
1l.5
10.1
14.5
8.6
13.7
4
1
4
Alberta
Athabaska ................
BanfL ......................
Beaverlodge ..............
Brooks ..... ..............
Calgary. .... ..... ..........
-32
-22
-35
-26
-25
-37
-26
41
-31
-29
82
81
82
90
85
67
64
64
67
64
11493
10551
10682
9700
9703
0.1'
0.7
0.6
0.6
0.9
3.5
2.5
3.0
3.5
3.5
17
18
17
13
17
40
56
47
20
19
6.4
8.1
5.7
8.2
8.3
7.8
9.4
6.9
9.9
9.7
9.4
11.0
8.4
12.0
11.3
0
0
0
0
0
Campsie ..................
Camrose ..................
Cardston ......... , .......
CI'fGsholm . ............
Cold Lake
-30
-28
-24
-26
-33
-35
-33
-29
-31
-38
82
85
85
85
83
66
67
65
65
68
11019
10500
8863
9400
11800
0.8
0.7
0.5
0.6
0.6
4.0
3.5
4.0
3.5
3,0
18
15
18
17
17
42
27
30
15
41
6.6
4.5
15.5
13.7
6.5
8.2
6.1
19.3
16.6
7.8
10.1
8.1
24.0
20.0
9.2
0
0
0
0
0
Coleman
Coronation
Cowley
Drumheller
Edmonton .....
..
-25
-24
-26
25
-26
-30
28
-31
-29
29
83
87
84
86
83
65
67
65
66
67
9400
10624
9446
10200
10268
0.5
0.6
0.5
0.7
0.9
4.0
2.5
3.5
2.5
4.0
20
14
19
14
18
45
30
37
21
27
11.2
4.9
15.2
6.6
6.6
14.4
6.7
19.0
8.2
8.5
18.2
8.9
23.5
10.1
10.7
0
0
0
0
0
Edson .............. ., ...

Embarras Portage ....
Fairview
Fort Saskatchewan.
Fort Vermilion ........
-30
43
-38
-27
42
35
47
43
-30
46
83
82
80
83
84
64
66
65
67
65
10837
13700
11307
10800
13113
0.6
0.4
0.6
0.8
0.3
3.0
2.5
2.0
4.(}
2.5
20
15
18
18
13
46
32
44
30
50
7.6
6.4
5.5
6.6
4.5
8.9
7.8
6.7
8.2
5.5
10.5
9.4
8.1
10.2
6.6
0
0
0
0
0
Grande Prairie
Habay
Hardisty .. ...... .........
High River ................
Jasper ............. ......
37
42
27
-25
-28
43
45
-31
29
32
81
84
87
84
84
64
65
67
64
64
11129
12900
10900
9752
10112
0.6
0.4
0.5
0.8
0.4
3.0
2.5
2.5
5.0
3.0
18
14
14
20
14
46
50
25
38
52
7.7
4.2
5.0
10.6
7.6
9.2
5.0
6.7
12.6
8.9
10.9
6.0
8.8
15.0
lOA
0
0
0
0
0
Keg River ................

Lac la Biche.. ............
Lacombe ..................
Lethbridge ..............
McMurray ..............
40
32
28
-24
39
44
-38
-33
-31
42
83
83
86
88
84
65
67
66
66
67
12500
11256
10527
8644
12462
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.5
0.6
2.5
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
15
17
18
17
16
52
40
30
22
42
4.1
6.5
4.9
13.4
6.5
5.0
7.8
6.5
16.0
7.8
6.1
9.2
8.4
19.0
9.2
0
0
0
0
0
Manning....................
Medicine Hat ............
Peace Rivet ...............
Penhold ................. ,
....
Pincher Creek
39
-26
-37
-28
26
43
-30
43
-33
-31
82
93
80
85
85
65
69
65
65
65
12100
8852
11700
10602
9198
0.5
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.5
2.0
3.0
2.0
4.0
3.5
14
14
13
16
21
50
27
47
30
37
4.5
8.2
4.9
6.5
14.7
5.5
10.2
6.1
7.8
18.3
6.7
12.5
7.4
9.3
22.6
0
0
0
0
0
Ranfurly .................. 30
Red Deer .................. 28
Rocky Mountain Hou e 25
Slave Lake ................ 34
Stettler .................... -27
-35
33
28
40
-32
86
86
83
81
87
67
65
64
66
66
10964
10302
10167
11385
10243
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.7
0.7
3.5
4.5
4.0
3.0
3.0
17
16
23
18
16
31
30
41
42
25
4.9
6.5
5.5
5.8
5.0
6.1
7.8
6.7
7.1
6.7
7.5
9.3
8.1
8.6
8.8
0
0
0
0
0
Suffield ....................
Taber ........................
Turner Valley ............
Valleyview ................
Ve.neville ..................
-26
-25
-25
36
-29
-31
-31
-29
42
-33
92
89
83
81
85
69
67
64
65
67
9820
8703
10445
11200
11000
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.7
0.7
2.5
3.0
4.0
2.0
3.5
13
15
23
18
17
22
22
35
44
31
9.0
12.0
10.7
7.4
5.3
11.0
14.4
12.6
8.9
6.7
13.3
17.2
14.9
10.8
8.4
0
0
0
0
0
Vpnnilion ................
W.i.;;ner ......................
Wainwright ..............
Wetaskiwin ..............
Whitecourt ..............
Wimborne ................
-31
-34
-28
-27
32
26
36
40
32
-31
-38
30
86
81
86
85
82
85
68
66
67
66
65
65
11253
11316
11000
10383
11229
10300
0.6
0.7
0.6
0.8
0.7
0.7
3.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
2.5
3.5
17
17
15
17
21
17
28
43
26
28
48
27
4.8
5.8
5.1
5.0
6.7
6.4
5.9
7.1
6.7
6.7
8.2
7.8
7.2
8.6
8.6
8.7
10.1
9.4
0
0
0
0
0
0
62
68
-616-
Hi
Copyright NRC-CNRC
'F
Province
and
Location
Design Temperature
January
Juiy2'h%
2WYo 1%
Dry Wet
OF OF
OF
OF
Degree
Days
below
65F
15
One Ann.
Min. Day Tot.
Rain Rain Pcpn.
in.
in.
in.
Hourly Wind
Pressures
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
1/10
psf
1/30
psf
1/100
psf
Earth
quake
R
factor
Saskatchewan
Assiniboia ................
Battrum ...................
Biggar
Broadview ................
Dafoe
25
26
29
29
32
29
30
33
33
38
89
89
88
85
84
71
70
69
72
70
9800
9900
10805
11147
11640
0.6
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.6
3.0
2.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
14
14
14
17
16
24
30
36
41
33
9.2
lO.2
9.9
5.8
5.9
11.0
12.6
12.6
6.7
7.1
13.1
15.5
15.9
7.7
8.6
0
0
0
0
0
Dundurn .................
Estevan ....................
Hudson Bay
Humboldt ................
Island Falls ..............
30
-25
33
32
-38
-34
-30
-37
-37
-41
87
89
84
83
80
70
73
71
70
69
10714
9950
11842
11500
13000
0.4
0:8
0.7
0.6
0.4
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
14
17
16
15
19
35
43
50
35
36
8.2
8.8
5.8
6.1
9.4
9.9
10.7
7.1
7.5
1l.8
11.9
13.0
8.6
9.2
14.6
0
0
0
0
0
Kamsack ..................
Kindersley ................
Lloydm instet ...........
Maple Creek ............
Meadow Lake
-29
27
-30
-25
-33
-33
-32
-35
29
-38
85
90
85
89
83
'72
69
68
70
69
11517
10450
11500
9500
12000
0.7
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.6
3.0
3.0
2.5
3.0
2.5
16
13
15
14
15
50
35
31
32
42
6.6
9.4
6.2
9.8
7.6
7.8
12.1
7.8
12.1
9.4
9.1
15.2
9.7
14.7
11.6
0
0
0
0
0
Melfort ...................
Melville ....................
Moose Jaw................
Nipawin ..................
North Battleford ......
34
-28
27
-36
-29
-40
-33
-32
-41
-33
83
85
89
82
86
70
71
71
70
69
11700
11300
9894
12000
11082
0.6
0.7
0.5
0.6
0.6
3.0
3.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
16
16
15
16
13
38
47
28
43
;9
5.4
6.7
7.5
5.6
9.4
6.7
7.8
8.9
7.1
12.9
8.3
9.1
10.6
8.9
17.3
0
0
0
0
0
Prince Albert ..........

Qu'Appelle ..............
Regina
Saskatoon ................
Scott ...................
-35
-29
-29
30
28
-41
-34
34
34
-32
84
85
88
86
88
70
71
71
69
69
11630
11100
10806
10856
11460
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.6
3.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
16
17
15
14
14
44
41
35
35
35
5.5
7.1
7.1
7.5
9.1
7.1
8.2
8.2
9.2
12.1
9.1
9.5
9.5
11.2
15.6
0
0
0
0
0
Strasbourg
Swift CUrrent
Uranium City ..........
Weyburn ..................
Yorkton ..................
-29
25
-47
27
28
-34
-29
-50
-32
33
86
89
79
89
85
71
70
66
72
72
10800
9849
15000
10500
11362
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.7
0.7
3.5
2.5
2.0
3.0
3.5
15
15
13
16
17
41
24
37
35
50
7.0
9.5
7.8
8.0
6.6
8.2
1l.8
9.4
9.4
7.8
9.7
14.4
11.4
11.0
9.1
0
0
0
0
0
Manitoba
Beausejour ..............
Boissevain ................
Brandon ..................
Churchill..................
Dauphin .................
26
-24
26
38
26
29
28
29
-40
29
83
89
87
75
86
73
74
73
66
72
10700
10269
10828
16728
10798
0.6
0.9
0.8
0.3
0.6
3.5
4.0
4.0
3.5
3.5
20
19
19
14
18
46
40
46
66
52
6.4
9.1
7.8
10.0
6.6
7.8
11.0
9.4
12.3
7.8
9.4
13.1
11.3
15.1
9.2
0
0
0
0
0
Flin Flon ................

Gimli ......................
Island Lake ..............
Lac du Bonnet ........
Lynn Lake ..............
36
28
-32
28
-40
-40
-30
-35
-30
-43
81
83
78
82
81
69
73
69
73
68
12414
11057
13200
10900
14300
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.3
3.0
4.5
2.5
3.0
2.0
17
19
20
20
16
45
45
62
48
38
8.7
6.3
7.6
5.9
9.8
11.0
7.8
8.9
7.1
12.1
13.6
9.5
10.4
8.6
14.8
0
0
0
0
0
Morden ....................
Neepawa
Pine Falls ................
Portage Ia Prairie ....
Rivers ....................
-22
25
28
22
27
25
-29
30
25
30
89
86
81
87
85
74
73
73
74
73
10068
10899
11000
10800
10884
0.9
0.7
0.5
0.7
0.8
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
21
20
19
20
19
38
53
46
40
47
8.3
7.0
6.0
7.5
7.5
9.9
8.5
7.3
8.9
8.9
11.8
10.2
8.9
10.7
10.6
0
0
0
0
0
St. Boniface ............

St. Vital ..................
Sandilands ..............
Selkirk ....................
Split Lake ..............
25
-25
25
26
-35
-28
28
28
29
38
87
87
85
84
80
74
74
74
74
68
10700
10700
10800
10800
14400
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.6
0.4
3.5
3.5
3.5
3,.5
f'1.0
20
20
22
20
16
45
45
47
45
56
7.3
7.3
6.5
6.8
10.7
8.7
8.7
7.8
8.2
12.6
10.3
10.3
9.2
9.9
14.9
0
0
0
0
0
Steinbach ................
Swan River ..............
The Pas ....................
Thompson ..............
Transcona ................
-25
30
32
35
25
-28
33
35
38
28
87
84
81
80
87
74
72
71
69
74
10700
11500
12281
13900
10700
0.7
0.6
0.6
0.6
3,5
3.0
3.0
2.0
3.5
21
17
17
17
20
45
52
59
50
45
6.5
6.2
7.3
10.1
7.3
7.8
7.3
8.9
12.1
8.7
9.3
8.7
10.8
14.3
10.3
0
0
0
0
0
Virden
Whiteshell
Winnipeg
27
28
-25
30
30
28
86
82
87
73
73
74
10800
10900
10679
0.8
0.6
0.6
4.0
3.0
3.5
18
20
20
46
48
45
7.4
5.9
7.3
8.9
7.1
8.7
10.7
8.5
10.3
0
0
0
OA

Design Temperature
January
July2'h%
~ Wet
of
F
F
F
21'%
Province
and
Location
II'
Degree
Days
below
65F
15
Min.
Rain
in.
~~n.
m.
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
Tot.
P~pn.
Hourly Wind
Pressures
1/30
pst
1/100
psf
Earthquake
Rfactor
Ontario
Ailsa Craig. ...............
Ajax ........................
Alexandria ..............
Alliston ....................
Almonte ..................
-2
-11
-7
-14
1
5
-16
-11
-18
88
87
86
85
86
74
75
74
74
74
7300
7500
8400
8300
8700
1.2
1.1
0.9
1.1
1.0
3.5
3.0
3.0
4.5
3.0
38
32
37
30
33
40
43
58
65
60
8.3
9.0
6.4
4.6
6.2
10.4
11.0
7.8
6.1
7.8
12.9
13.3
9.4
7.9
9.6
1
1
2
1
2
Ansonville ..............
Armstrong ..............
Arnprior ..................
Atikokan ................
Aurora ....................
27
38
-16
-29
4
-32
44
-20
-34
-8
86
83
87
85
86
71
71
74
72
74
11400
12458
8800
11066
7900
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.1
2.5
4.0
3.0
3.5
4.0
30
27
31
25
29
69
82
60
65
48
6.4
4.3
5.7
4.2
6.4
7.8
5.1
7.1
5.1
8.2
9.4
6.0
8.7
6.0
10.5
1
0
2
0
1
Bancroft ..................
Barrie ......................
Barriefield ................
Beaverton ............
Belleville ................
-15
9
-7
-10
7
-19
-13
-10
14
11
84
85
82
86
86
73
73
75
73
75
9100
8200
7800
8400
7709
1.1
1.1
0.9
1.1
1.3
2.5
5.0
4.5
5.5
3.0
30
32
34
34
32
73
60
50
50
50
4.8
4.4
7.3
5.0
6.7
6.1
6.1
8.9
6.7
8.2
7.6
8.1
10.8
87
10.1
1
1
1
1
1
Belmont ..................
Bowmanville ............
Bracebridge ............
Bradford ..................
BramptoJl ...............
4
-3
-13
-7
0
0
-17
-11
4
88
86
84
86
87
75
75
72
74
75
7300.
7600
8800
8100
7721
1.2
1.1
1.0
1.1
1.1
3.5
3.0
4.5
4.5
6.0
37
32
40
30
31
38
44
69
52
50
7.3
9.6
4.0
5.0
6.6
9.4
11.5
5.3
6.7
8.2
12.0
13.7
6.8
8.8
10.2
1
1
1
1
1
Brantford ................
Brighton ..................
Brockville ................
Brooklin ..................
Burks Falls ..............
3
-5
9
3
-14
1
8
-13
7
18
88
86
85
87
84
75
75
75
75
71
7202
7800
7900
7800
9300
1.1
1.3
1.0
1.1
1.1
4.0
3.0
3.5
3.0
4.0
31
32
38
31
36
48
48
54
44
106
6.5
8.7
6.6
8.0
4.2
7.8
10.4
8.2
9.9
5.5
9.2
12.4
10.1
12.2
7.1
1
1
2
1
1
Burlington ..............
Caledonia ................
Campbellford ..........
Camp Borden ..........
Cannington ..............
3
4
9
8
9
0
1
13
-12
13
88
88
87
85
86
75
75
74
73
74
6800
7200
8100
8200
8400
1.0
1.1
1.3
1.1
1.1
4.0
4.0
3.5
4.5
5.0
31
31
31
28
32
40
46
55
65
50
7.5
6.6
6.1
4.5
5.1
8.9
7.8
7.8
6.1
6.7
10.5
9.2
9.8
8.1
8.7
2
2
1
1
1
Carleton Place ........

Cavan ......................
Centralia
Chapleau ................
Chatham ..................
13
-7
4
31
6
-17
11
1
-36
3
86
87
88
82
90
74
74
74
71
75
8600
8200
7243
10900
6503
1.0
1.2
1.2
0.9
1.1
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
33
31
38
30
30
58
52
41
64
27
6.2
6.5
7.8
4.0
6.7
7.8
8.2
9.9
5.1
8.2
9.7
10.3
12.5
6.3
10.1
2
1
1
1
1
Chelmsford ..............
Chesley....................
Clinton ....................
Coboconk ................
Cobourg ..................
15
0
4
12
4
20
4
0
16
7
86
86
86
85
86
70
72
73
73
75
9700
7800
7600
8700
7700
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
3.0
3.0
3.5
5.0
3.0
30
35
35
38
32
55
100
50
60
45
6.0
6.9
7.8
4.7
9.7
8.2
8.9
9.9
6.1
11.5
11.0
11.4
12.5
7.8
13.6
I
I
I
1
1
Cochrane ................
Colborne ................
Collingwood ............
Cooksville ................
Cornwall ..................
-28
-5
-32
-6
2
9
10
2
-14
85
86
84
87
86
71
75
72
75
75
11412
7700
8400
7000
8200
0.9
1.2
1.1
1.0
1.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.5
2.5
31
32
32
31
38
68
45
85
40
55
5.4
9.2
5.3
7.7
6.3
6.7
11.0
7.1
9.4
7.8
8.2
13.0
9.3
11.5
9.5
I
1
1
1
2
Corunna ..................
Deep River ..............
Deseronto ..............
Dorchester Sta . ......
Dorion ....................
6
-20
7
3
27
2
24
11
1
32
90
88
84
88
82
74
73
75
75
70
7000
9500
7500
7400
10800
0.9
0.9
1.1
1.3
0.7
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
32
29
33
36
29
30
56
50
42
68
7.3
4.2
6.7
6.9
5.2
8.9
5.0
8.2
8.9
6.1
10.8
6.0
10.1
11.5
7.1
I
2
Dresden ..................
Dryden ....................
Dunbarton ..............
Dunnville ................
Durham ..................
5
29
1
7
2
2
32
4
4
-6
90
78
87
87
85
75
72
75
75
73
6800
11147
7400
7000
8474
1.1
0.9
1.1
1.0
1.1
3.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
3.0
31
25
32
35
35
29
62
42
48
110
6.7
4.2
9.0
7.0
6.5
8.2
5.1
11.0
8.2
8.2
10.1
6.0
13:3
9.7
10.3
I
0
1
2
1
Dutton ....................
Earlton
Edison ....................
Elmvale....................
Embro ....................
5
-26
28
9
3
2
32
32
13
1
89
87
82
84
86
75
71
72
72
"5
6900
10792
11000
8400
7600
1.1
3.5
3.5
3.5
5.0
3.5
35
29
2S
33
35
32
53
62
75
52
7.1
6.6
4.2
4.9
6.9
8.9
8.5
5.0
6.7
8.9
11.1
10.7
6.0
8.9
11.3
1
1
0
1
1
~.
.~ u
-6
.g
1.(i
0.9
1.1
1.3
-618-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
1
1
1
Province
and
Location
Design Temperature
January
July2~%
2~1% A%
'tFet
F
F
Degree
Days
below
65F
15
One Ann.
Min. Day Tot.
Rain Rain Pcpn.
in.
in.
in.
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
HoudyWind
Pressures
1/10 1/30
psf
pst-
1/100
psf
Earth
quake
R
factor
Englehart ..................
Espanola ..................
Exeter ......................
Fergus ....................
Fonthill ..................
26
13
4
2
6
32
17
1
-6
3
87
84
88
85
87
71
70
74
74
75
10900
9300
7500
8452
6800
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.0
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
4.0
29
32
38
33
33
56
55
45
85
50
6.1
5.9
7.8
5.4
7.0
7.8
7.8
9.9
6.7
8.2
9.8
10.1
12.5
8.3
9.7
1
1
1
1
2
Forest ......................
Fort Erie ..................
Fort Frances ............
Fort William ............
GalL ........................
6
7
27
-23
1
2
5
-31
-27
3
89
87
85
83
86
74
75
73
70
75
7031
6600
10700
10405
7600
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.7
1.2
3.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
4.0
34
34
28
28
33
35
55
62
73
55
8.1
7.6
4.2
5.2
5.5
9.9
8.9
5.1
6.1
6.7
12.1
10.5
6.0
7.1
8.1
1
2
0
1
1
Gananoque ..............
Georgetown ............
Geraldton ................
Glencoe ....................
Goderich ..................
7
0
31
5
4
-11
-4
36
2
1
83
86
83
90
85
75
75
71
75
73
7800
7817
12000
7000
7712
0.9
1.1
0.8
1.1
1.1
3.5
5.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
36
32
27
35
31
52
55
63
34
50
7.3
5.7
4.2
6.5
8.3
8.9
7.1
5.0
8.2
10.4
10.9
8.8
6.0
10.3
13.0
1
1
0
1
1
Gore Bay..................
Graham ....................
Gravenhprst ............
Grimsby ..................
Guelph ....................
-9
35
13
5
0
-13
-40
17
2
-4
86
84
84
88
85
70
71
72
75
75
9009
11838
8700
6592
7749
1.0
0.9
1.1
1.0
1.2
2.5
4.0
4.5
4.5
4.5
32
27
40
31
33
45
70
62
38
60
6.3
4.3
4.0
7.6
5.2
7.5
5.1
5.3
8.9
6.3
9.0
6.0
6.9
10.5
7.5
1
0
1
2
1
Guthrie ....................
Hagersville ..............
Haileybury ..............
Haliburton. ...............
Hamilton ................
10
5
25
-15
3
-14
2
30
19
0
85
88
87
84
88
73
75
71
73
75
8300
7200
10700
9038
6821
1.1
1.1
1.0
1.1
1.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
33
33
29
34
31
56
44
56
75
40
4.5
7.0
6.6
4.0
7.6
6.1
8.2
8.2
5.1
8.9
8.1
9.7
10.2
6.5
10.5
1
1
1
1
2
Hanover. ...................
Hastings ..................
Hawkesbury ............
Hearst ......................
Honey Harbour ........
0
9
-13
28
-10
-4
13
-18
32
13
87
87
86
04
84
73
74
74
71
72
8000
8200
8800
11900
8400
1.1
1.3
0.9
0.8
1.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
2.5
5.0
36
31
39
28
35
106
55
62
56
80
7.0
6.1
6.5
4.2
5.3
8.9
7.8
7.8
5.3
7.1
11.3
9.8
9.3
6.6
9,4
1
1
2
1
1
Hornepayne ............
Huntsville ................
Ingersoll ..................
Jarvis ......................
Jellicoe
35
14
3
5
32
-40
-18
1
2
37
84
84
87
88
83
71
71
12066
8726
7400
7100
11800
0.8
1.0
1.3
1.1
0.8
3.0
4.0
3.5
4.0
3.0
25
36
35
34
28
54
104
46
41
65
4.0
4.0
6.9
6.9
4.2
5.1
5.2
8.9
8.2
5.1
6.3
6.7
11.3
9.7
6.0
0
I
I
I
0
Kapuskasing ............
Kemptville................
Kenora ....................
KilIa10e
Kincardine ..............
28
12
-28
18
3
31
16
31
22
0
84
86
83
87
84
71
75
73
73
72
11560
8338
10796
9074
7800
0.8
1.1
0.9
1.0
1.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
3.0
3.0
28
34
25
28
35
56
57
62
55
75
4.8
6.2
4.2
4.9
8.4
5.9
7.8
5.0
6.1
10,4
7.2
9.7
6.0
7.5
12.8
1
2
0
1
1
Kingston ..................
Kinmount ................
Kirkland Lake ..........
Kitchener ................
Lakefield ................
7
13
27
1
10
-10
17
32
-3
-14
82
85
87
85
86
75
73
71
75
74
7724
8800
11269
7566
8500
0.9
1.1
1.0
1.3
1.2
4.5
4.0
3.5
4.0
3.5
34
38
29
33
30
50
65
62
60
60
7.3
4.2
6.2
5.7
5.5
8.9
5.5
7.8
7.1
7.1
10.8
7.0
9.7
8.7
9.0
Lansdowne House ....

Leamington ............
Lindsay ......... *."
lions Head ..............
Listowel ..................
38
7
9
-1
0
-44
4
13
5
-4
82
90
87
82
85
70
75
74
71
74
13021
6547
8400
8000
8500
0.7
1.1
1.2
1.0
1.3
2.5
3.5
4.0
3.0
3.0
24
30
32
35
38
69
22
55
75
94
5.0
7,4
5.5
6.9
7.1
6.1
8:9
7.1
8.9
8.9
7.3
10.8
9.0
11.3
11.1
0
1
1
1
London ....................
Lucan ......................
Maitland ..................
Markdale
Martin ......................
3
4
9
3
32
1
0
13
7
37
88
88
85
84
84
75
75
75
73
72
7349
7395
7900
8600
11600
1.3
1.0
1.1
0.9
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
4.5
38
38
38
33
26
42
42
54
100
67
7.6
8.2
6.6
6.0
4.3
9.9
10,4
8.2
7.8
5.1
12.8
13.1
10.1
9.9
6.0
1
1
1
1
0
Matheson ................
Mattawa ..................
Midland ..................
Milton ......................
Milverton ................
27
19
9
1
0
32
23
13
3
-4
86
87
84
87
85
71
72
11400
9800
8400
7500
8300
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.3
3.0
3.5
5.0
5.0
3.0
29
31
34
31
38
68
55
80
6.3
5.1
5.3
6.7
6.5
7.8
6.1
7.1
8.2
8.2
9.5
7.3
9.4
10.0
10.3
1
2
1
1
1
..................
..................
.................
72
75
75
72
75
74
1.3
SO
80
1
1
1
1

Design Temperature
January
July 2%%
Wet
2~% A%
OF
F
F
Degree
Days
below
65F
15 One Ann.
Tot.
Min. Day
Rain Rain Pcpn.
in.
in.
in.
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
Minden ............. ......

Mitchell ..................
Moosonee ................
Morrisburg ..............
Mount Forest ..........
-14
2
-32
-9
-2
-18
-2
-36
-14
-6
84
86
84
86
84
73
74
70
75
74
8900
8076
12723
8105
8800
J.l
1.3
0.7
1.0
1.2
4.0
3.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
38
38
31
38
33
65
60
56
55
110
4.0
7.3
4.1
6.3
6.1
5.2
9.4
5.0
7.8
7.8
6.6
12.0
6.1
9.6
9.7
1
1
1
2
1
Muskoka Arpt.
Nakina ....................
Napanee ..................
Newcastle ................
New Liskeard ..........
-13
-30
-7
-3
-25
-17
-34
-11
-6
-30
84
83
84
86
87
72
71
75
75
71
8758
11969
7600
7600
10700
1.1
0.8
1.1
1.1
1.0
4.5
3.0
3.5
3.0
3.5
40
28
33
32
29
62
65
50
44
56
4.0
4.2
6.7
9.6
6.6
5.3
5.0
8.2
11.5
8.2
6.8
6.0
10.1
13.7
10.2
0
1
1
1
Newmarket
Niagara Falls ............
North Bay ................
Norwood
Oakville ..................
-6
5
-17
-10
2
-10
2
-21
-14
-1
86
87
84
87
87
74
75
70
74
75
8000
6881
9677
8300
6700
1.1
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.0
4.0
3.5
4.0
3.5
4.5
30
32
33
32
31
50
48
54
60
40
5.4
6.9
5.4
6.1
7.8
7.1
8.2
6.5
7.8
9.4
9.3
9.7
7.8
9.8
11.3
1
2
2
1
1
Orangeville ..............
Orillia ......................
Oshawa ....................
Ottawa ..................
Owen Sound ..........
-4
-11
-2
-13
-1
-8
-15
-5
-17
5
85
85
87
87
84
74
73
75
74
72
8526
8463
7600
8693
7762
1.2
1.1
1.1
0.9
1.0
3.0
5.0
3.0
3.5
3.0
33
34
32
35
33
80
52
42
60
87
5.2
4.0
9.0
6.2
6.9
6.7
5.5
11.0
7.8
8.9
8.5
7.4
13.3
9.6
11.4
1
1
2
1
Pagwa ......................
Paris ........................
Parkhill ....................
Parry Sound ............
Pembroke ................
-29
3
5
-10
-18
-33
1
2
13
-22
83
87
89
83
88
71
75
74
71
73
11599
7400
7300
8480
9100
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.0
0.9
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
30
37
37
38
29
63
50
40
85
55
4.0
6.5
8.4
5.1
4.5
5.2
7.8
10.4
7.1
5.5
6.6
9.3
12.8
9.7
6.7
0
1
1
1
2
Penetanguishene ......
Perth ........................
Petawawa ................
Peterborough ..........
Petrolia
9
12
-19
-9
5
-13
16
23
-13
2
84
86
88
87
90
72
74
73
74
75
8400
8300
9200
8300
6900
1.0
1.1
0.9
1.2
1.0
5.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.0
34
34
29
31
32
80
58
56
60
31
5.3
6.2
4.1
6.1
7.3
7.1
7.8
5.0
7.8
8.9
9.4
9.7
6.1
9.8
10.9
1
2
2
1
1
Picton
Plattsville ................
Point Alexander ......
Porcupine ................
Port Arthur ............
-5
2
20
28
-23
-9
-2
-24
-33
27
85
85
88
87
83
75
75
73
71
70
7500
7600
9500
11400
10405
1,1
1.3
0.9
0.9
0.7
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
33
33
29
28
28
48
58
56
68
73
7.8
6.2
4.2
5.7
5.2
9.4
7.8
5.0
7.1
6.1
11.4
9.7
6.0
8.8
7.1
1
1
2
1
1
Port Burwell ............

Port Colborne
Port Credit ..............
Port Dover ..............
Port Elgin ................
6
7
2
6
2
3
4
-2
3
1
88
87
87
88
83
75
75
75
75
71
7000
6700
6800
7046
7800
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
4.0
4.0
5.5
4.0
3.0
36
34
31
34
36
32
55
40
38
87
7.2
7.6
7.7
7.5
8.3
8.9
8.9
9.4
8.9
10.4
11.0
10.4
11.5
10.7
12.9
1
2
1
1
1
Port Hope ................

Port Perry ................
Port Stanley ............
Prescott ..................
Princeton ................
-4
-6
6
9
3
-7
10
3
13
-1
86
87
89
85
85
75
74
75
75
75
7700
8100
7000
8000
7400
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.2
3.0
3.5
4.0
3.0
3.5
32
31
36
38
33
45
45
32
54
50
9.7
6.5
7.1
6.6
6.3
11.5
8.2
8.9
8.2
7.8
13.6
10.3
11.1
10.1
9.6
1
1
1
2
1
Raith .......................
Red Lake ................
Renfrew ..................
Ridgeway ................
Rockland ................
-30
29
17
7
14
35
-32
-21
5
-18
83
82
87
87
87
71
72
74
75
74
11100
11400
8787
6600
8800
0.8
0.7
0.9
1.0
0.9
3.0
4.0
3.0
4.0
3.5
27
21
30
34
36
70
62
62
55
62
4.3
4.6
5.4
7.6
6.3
5.1
5.5
6.7
8.9
7.8
6.0
6.5
8.2
10.4
9.5
0
0
2
2
2
St. Catharines ..........

St. Marys ................
St. Thomas
Sarnia
Sault Ste. Marie ......
5
3
5
6
-15
2
-1
1
2
20
88
87
89
90
85
75
75
75
74
70
6537
7600
7073
7061
9500
1.0
1.3
1.0
0.9
1.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3,5
2.5
31
38
36
32
32
38
50
35
30
50
7.6
7.3
6.9
7.3
6.7
8.9
9.4
8.9
8.9
7.8
10.5
12.0
11.3
10.8
9.1
2
1
1
1
Schreiber ................
Seaforth ..................
Simcoe ....................
Sioux Lookout ........
Smiths Falls ............
-30
3
5
-29
12
34
-1
2
32
-16
81
87
88
83
86
70
74
75
11131
7800
7100
11313
8300
0.8
1.2
1.1
0.9
3.0
3,5
4.0
4.5
3.0
31
36
35
27
34
48
53
38
63
57
5.2
7.8
6.9
4.3
6.2
6.1
9.9
8.2
5.1
7.8
7.1
12.5
9.8
6.0
9.7
1
1
1
0
2
Province
and
Location
........... ,
........ H
72
75
1.1
- 62.0-
Hourly Wind
Pressures
1/10 1/30
psf
psf
1/100
psf
Copyright NRC-CNRC
Earthquake
Rfactor
Hourly Wind
Pressures
Design Temperature
January
July 2Va%
2i?% 1% ~ Wet
F OF
I"
OF
Days:
below
65F
I~. One Ann.

Mm.: Day Tot.
Rain Rain Pcpn.
in.
in.
in.
Smithville. ............... ..
Smooth Rock Falls. .. .
Southampton ......... .
South Porcupine ..... .
Stirling.................... ..
5
-28
2
-28
-9
2
-32
-2
-33
-13
87
85
83
87
86
75
71
71
71
74
7200
11500
7811
11400
7976
1.0
0.8
1.0
0.9
1.3
4.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
32
30
37
28
31
41
62
87
68
51
7.0
4.9
7.9
5.7
5.9
8.2
6.1
9.9
7.1
7.5
9.7
7.5
12.4
8.8
9.5
2
1
Stratford ................... I
Strathroy ................ .
Sturgeon Falls ........ ..
Sudbury.................. ..
Sundridge ............ .
2
4
-16
-15
-15
-2
1
-20
-20
-19
85
90
85
86
84
75
75
70
70
71
7900
7200
9500
9600
9400
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
1.1
4.5
3.0
3.5
3.0
4.0
38
37
33
29
36
61
38
55
55
94
7.0
7.4
5.3
6.1
4.8
8.9
9.4
6.7
8.5
6.1
11.3
1l.8
8.3
11.4
7.6
1
1
1
1
1
Tavistock
Thamesford ............. .
Thedford ................ ..
T~llsonbu:g ............ ..
Tunagaml.. .............. ..
2
3
5
5
-22
-2
-1
2
1
-26
85
87
89
88
87
75
75
74
75
71
7700
7400
71 00
7200
10200
1.3
1.3
1.1
1.1
1.1
3.5
3.5
3.5
4.0
3.5
35
36
34
35
29
60
46
37
38
60
7.1
6.9
8.5
6.5
5.7
8.9
8.9
10.4
8.2
7.1
11.2
11.4
12.8
10.3
8.8
1
1
1
Timmins ................ ..
Toronto ................... .
Trenton ................ ..
Trout Creek
Trout Lake ............ ..
-28
1
-5
-16
-36
-33
-3
-9
-20
40
87
87
86
84
77
71
75
75
71
68
11400
6827
7510
9600
14040
0.9
1.0
1.3
1.1
0.5
3.0
5.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
28
31
32
34
25
68
40
50
80
78
5.3
8.1
7.3
4.9
7.0
6.7
9.9
8.9
6.1
8.2
8.3
12.1
10.8
7.5
9.7
Uxbridge ................ ..
Vanier ..................... .
Vittoria .................. ..
Walkerton ............... .
Wallaceburg ............ ..
-7
-13
-11
-17
3
-3
86
87
88
88
90
74
74
75
73
75
8170
8600
7100
7647
6668
1.2
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.1
4.0
3.5
4.5
3.5
3.0
31
35
35
36
31
44
60
40
100
27
6.0
6.2
7.4
7.4
6.7
7.8
7.8
8.9
9.4
8.2
9.9
9.6
10.8
11.9
10.1
1
2
1
1
1
Waterloo.. ................
Watford ....................
Wawa .. ...... ..............
Weiland ....................
West Lorne ..............
1
5
-32
6
5
-3
2
-37
3
2
85
90
81
87
89
75
75
70
75
75
7566
7000
10331
6691
6900
1.3
1.1
0.9
1.0
1.1
4.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
33
34
36
34
35
60
35
50
52
30
5.7
7.1
5.0
6.9
7.2
7.1
8.9
5.9
8.2
8.9
8.7
11.1
6.9
9.7
11.0
Whitby....................
White River ..............
Wiarton .... ................
Windsor ....................
Wingham ..................
-2
39
1
7
2
-5
44
-3
4
2
87
84
83
90
87
75
71
71
75
73
7500
11674
8063
6579
7800
1.1
0.8
1.0
1.1
1.1
3.0
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
32
30
37
33
36
43
46
80
22
81
9.0
4.2
6.9
6.1
7.3
11.0
5.0
8.9
7.5
9.4
13.3
6.0
11.4
9.2
12.0
Woodstock................
Wyoming ..................
3
5
1
2
85
90
75
74
7542
7000
1.3
1.0
3.5
3.0
34
32
50
33
6.4
7.3
8.2
8.9
10.4
10.9
Arvida ......................
-12
-21
-28
-13
-20
-17
-25
-32
-19
-24
85
85
84
82
85
74
71
71
73
71
8600
10700
11537
9372
10528
0.8
0.7
0.9
0.8
0.7
3.5
3.0
3.0
4.0
3.0
41
38
33
41
39
60
72
69
81
75
4.9
4.9
5.0
8.0
5.2
6.1
6.1
6.1
9.9
6.7
7.4
7.5
7.4
12.2
8.5
Asbestos ..................
Aylmer.....................
Bagotville ................
Baie Comeau ............
Beaconsfield..............
-14
-13
22
-16
-10
-19
-17
-26
-20
-16
84
87
84
76
86
73
74
71
67
74
8800
8700
10734
10400
8200
0.9
0.9
0.7
0.6
0.8
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
42
35
38
35
38
70
60
74
102
54
5.4
6.2
5.5
11.4
6.6
6.7
7.8
7.1
14.4
7.8
8.2
9.6
9.0
17.9
9.2
Bedford ....................
Beloeil......................
Brossard ................ ..
Buckingham ............
Cacouna ..................
-10
11
-11
-14
-13
-15
-16
-16
-18
-18
85
85
85
87
80
74
74
74
74
71
8200
8400
8300
9000
9900
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.7
3.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
38
39
37
36
35
55
58
58
62
85
6.4
5.9
6.5
6.4
8.6
7.8
7.1
7.8
7.8
11.0
9.4
8.5
9.2
9.4
13.8
Campbells Bay..........
Camp Valcartier .......
Chicoutimi
Coaticook ................
Contrecoeur ...........
-18
-13
-20
-12
-12
-22
-19
-24
-17
-17
88
82
83
83
85
74
73
71
73
74
8900
9400
10104
9194
8800
0.9
3.5
0.8 . 4.0
0.7
3.0
0.9
3.0
3.5
0.8
30
41
35
39
38
58
81
75
55
70
4.9
8.0
5.2
5.6
5.6
6.1
9.9
6.7
7.1
6.7
7.4
12.2
8.5
8.9
8.0
4
2
2
Cowansville ..............
Dolbeau ...... ............
Dorval......................
Drummondville .......
Farnham ..................
-11
-23
-10
-16
84
73
8400
10900
8203
8700
8418
0.9
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.9
39
32
38
43
38
55
75
54
72
55
6.4
4.5
6.6
5.0
6.5
7.8
5.5
7.8
6.1
7.8
9.4
6.7
9.2
7.4
9.3
Province
and
Location
Quebec
Acton Vale ..............
Alma ........................
Amos ......................
Ancienne Lorette......
!---.-:==-.--r:-::;;-::-;;o;-r;;r-! Degree
6
1
-13
-11
J! I ii
-16
85
I!
H
74
3.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
3.0
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
1/10 1/30 1/100

.psf
psf
psf
Earthquake
R-
factor
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
o
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
4
4
2
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Province
and
Location
Fort Olimo ...........
Fort Coulonge .......
Gagnon ...................
Gaspe ......................
Gatineau ................
Design Temperature
hffi
Dry
OF
74
88
76
79
87
-9
13
-32
-13
-17
GatinealrPointe ......
Gentilly ....................
Gracefield ..............
Granby ....... ............
Great Whale River ....
-13
13
-19
-12
-34
-18
23
-17
-37
87
85
86
84
76
Harrington Harbour .
Havre St. Pierre .........
Hemmingford ..........
HuU ........................
Iberville ..................
-16
-9
-13
-10
18
-21
-14
-17
-15
64
74
85
87
85
-18
-24
-24
-40
-16
85
85
85
76
84
-39
-16
-18
-16
-19
58
86
85
85
81
-16
-24
-17
-18
15
86
86
85
84
85
82
82
82
85
84
Joliette ....................
Jonquiere ................
Kenogami ................
Knob Lake ..............
Knowlton ................
Kovik Bay ...............
Lachine ..................
Lachute ..................
Lafleche . .................
La Malbaie ..............
La SaUe ....................
La Tuque ................
Laval ......................
Lennoxville
Lery ........................
-13
-13
-20
20
37
-11
-37
10
-13
-11
-14
-10
-19
-11
-13
-10
-13
-17
IS
Min.
Degree
Days
be1ew
65F
74
67
67
74
in.
One
Day
Rain
in.
Ann.
Tot.
Pcpn.
in.
15445
8900
13700
9800
8700
0.2
0.9
0.4
0.4
0.9
2.0
4.0
2.5
4.5
3.5
74
65
8700
8900
9300
8400
14843
0.9
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.3
64
74
74
74
11194
11200
8400
8700
8500
0.4
0.4
0.9
0.9
0.9
8954
10500
10515
14880
8500
July2'h%
~et
74
74
73
74
71
71
66
73
-
74
74
74
71
74
73
74
73
74
Hourly Wind
Pressures
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psC
1/10
psC
1/30 1/100
psf
psf
16
30
33
35
35
75
58
112
120
62
11.2
5.0
7.6
17.0
6.2
13.8
6.1
8.9
20.4
7.8
16.9
7.3
10.4
24.4
9.6
1
2
1
1
2
3.5
4.5
3.5
3.0
2.5
35
42
32
39
26
62
85
60
56
60
6.2
4.8
5.0
5.5
13.3
7.8
5.9
6.1
6.7
16.0
9.6
7.1
7.3
8.1
19.1
2
2
2
2
0
3~0
50
38
39
35
38
lOB
3.5
3.0
3.5
3.0
125
55
62
55
15.0
15.7
6.4
6.2
6.5
19.7
19.3
7.8
7.8
7.8
25.5
23.7
9.4
9.6
9.3
1
2
2
2
2
0.8
0.7
0.7
0.3
0.9
4.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
3.0
33
35
35
28
39
81
75
75
90
55
5.2
5.3
5.3
7.0
5.8
6.3
6.7
6.7
8.2
7.1
7.5
8.4
8.4
9.7
8.6
2
4
4
1
2
17400
8200
8900
8300
9800
0.2
0.8
0.9
0.8
0.8
2.0
3.0
3.5
3.0
4.5
13
38
40
37
32
70
54
65
58
85
14.1
6.6
6.5
6.5
8.2
17.6
7.8
7.8
7.8
10.4
21.9
9.2
9.2
9.2
13.1
2
2
2
2
4
8200
9818
8400
8893
8300
0.8
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.9
3.0
3.0
3.5
4.0
3.0
38
34
42
40
38
54
75
60
55
55
6.6
4.2
6.6
4.9
6.5
7.8
5.0
7.8
6.1
7.8
9.2
6.0
9.1
7.5
9.2
2
2
2
2
2
9200
9000
9400
9200
8680
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
4.0
4.5
4.0
4.5
3.0
41
45
41
39
39
81
84
81
82
55
8.0
8.0
8.0
4.5
5.4
9.9
9.9
9.9
5.5
6.7
12.2
12.2
12.2
6.6
8.2
4
4
4
2
2
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.6
0.9
3.0
3.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
34
31
36
35
39
65
59
62
106
78
5.0
4.9
6.3
11.1
9.4
6.1
5.9
7.8
14.4
12.1
7.4
7.0
9.5
18.4
15.3
1
2
2
2
2
Rain
Earthquake
Rfactor
Les Saules ................

Levis ........................
Loretteville ..............
Louiseville ..............
Magog ......................
-13
-13
-12
19
-19
-19
-18
-17
Malartic ....................
Maniwaki ................
Masson
Matane ....................
Megantic ..................
-27
-20
-14
11
-16
-31
-24
-18
-15
-20
85
85
87
75
81
Mont loti
Mont Laurier
Montmagny ...... .......
Montreal ........ .........
Montreal Nord ........
-12
-20
-13
-10
-10
-16
-24
-19
-16
-16
74
84
82
86
86
69
73
73
74
74
9924
9793
9000
8203
8200
0.7
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.8
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
35
33
38
42
42
103
65
85
54
54
11.3
5.0
8.2
6.6
6.6
14.7
5.9
10.4
7.8
7.8
18.8
6.9
13.1
9.2
9.2
2
2
4
2
2
Mount RoyaL .........

Nitchequon ............
Noranda
Outremont
Pierrefonds
-10
-37
-27
-10
-10
-16
-40
-32
-16
-16
86
75
85
86
86
74
67
71
74
74
8200
14398
11400
8200
8200
0.8
0.3
0.9
0.8
0.8
3.5
2.0
3.5
3.5
3.0
42
31
32
42
38
54
103
65
54
54
6.6
6.0
5.4
6.6
6.6
7.8
7.1
6.7
7.8
7.8
9.2
8.4
8.2
9.2
9.2
2
1
1
2
2
Pi nco urt
Plessisville ................
Pointe Claire ............
Port Alfred
Port Cartier ..............
-10
-14
-15
-19
-16
-23
-26
85
84
86
83
78
74
74
74
71
65
8300
9400
8200
10500
11000
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.7
0.5
3.0
4.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
38
43
38
37
42
55
80
54
75
115
6.5
5.4
6.6
5.2
14.0
7.8
6.7
7.8
6.7
17.3
9.2
8.2
9.2
8.5
21.2
2
2
2
4
4
-39
-16
-19
18
16
63
85
82
84
74
74
73
73
69
16549
8300
8937
8700
9900
0.2
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.7
2.0
3.0
4.5
3.5
3.5
15
37
45
41
35
43
58
84
63
92
13.2
6.5
8.0
4.9
10.0
16.9 121
7.8
9.9 12.2
6.1
7.5
12.6 15.7
1
2
4
2
4
Port Harrison ............

Preville ................ ...
Quebec
Richmond ............ ...
Rimouski .... ...........
-13
-10
-19
-21
-36
-11
-13
13
-12
73
73
73
74
73
71
73
74
68
73
-622-
Copyright NRC-CNRC
- - - - - - - - _...._ - .
DESIGN DATA FOR SELECTED WCATIONS IN CANADA

Design Temperature
July 2'12%
January
Dry Wet
2'12% 1%
of
of of
of
Province
and
Location
Degree
Days
65 F
'one Ann.
i Day Tot.
Rain Rain! Pcpn.
in.
in.
in.
bel~w
15
Min.
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
Hourly Wind
Pressures
1/10 1/30 1/100
psf
psf
psf
Earth
quake
R
factor
Riviere du Loup ........

Roberval .. ...............
Rock Island ..............
Rosemere ..................
Rouyn ......................
-13
22
-11
-11
-27
18
-26
-16
17
32
80
84
83
85
85
71
71
73
74
71
9900
10521
9000
8400
11400
0.7
0.7
0.9
0.8
0.9
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
3.5
35
29
39
42
32
85
72
55
60
63
8.6
4.5
6.3
6.6
5.4
1l.0
5.5
7.8
7.8
6.7
13.8
6.6
9.5
9.1
8.2
4
2
2
2
1
Ste. Agathe des Mont

Ste. Anne de Bellevue
SL Canut ..................
St. Feliciel'L ...............
Ste. Foy ....................
-16
-10
-13
-23
-13
20
15
-18
-28
-19
81
85
85
84
82
73
74
74
71
73
9871
8300
9000
11000
9000
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.7
0.8
3.5
3.0
3.0
2.5
4.5
38
38
42
30
45
79
55
70
75
84
5.6
6.5
5.9
4.6
8.0
6.7
7.8
7.1
5.5
9.9
8.0
9.2
8.5
6.5
12.2
2
2
2
2
4
St. Hubert
St. Hubert de
Temiscouata ........
St. Hyacinthe ............
St. Jerome ................
St. Johns ..................
-11
-16
85
74
8337
0.8
3.0
37
58
6.5
7.8
9.2
-14
-12
-13
78
85
84
85
71
74
74
74
10600
8524
9283
8500
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.9
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
36
40
42
38
85
60
70
55
8.6
5.6
6.0
6.5
11.0
6.7
7.1
7.8
13.8
8.0
8.4
9.3
4
2
2
2
-10
-18
-17
-18
-15
St. Jovite ..................

St. Lambert ..............
St. Laurent ..............
St. Nicolas ................
Schefferville ............
-17
10
-10
-13
37
-21
-16
16
-19
-40
82
86
86
82
76
73
74
74
73
66
9700
8200
8200
8900
14880
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.3
4.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
2.5
37
42
42
44
28
70
54
54
84
90
5.3
6.6
6.6
7.6
7.0
6.3
7.8
7.8
9.4
8.2
7.5
9.2
9.2
11.5
9.7
2
2
2
4
I
Senneterre
...
Seven Islands ..........
Shawinigan ..............
Shawville ..................
Sherbrooke ..............
-28
-22
-15
-17
-13
-32
-27
-20
-21
-18
85
78
85
88
84
71
64
74
74
73
11400
11327
9380
8900
8490
0.9
0.5
0.8
0.9
0.9
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
4.0
40
42
36
30
39
70
116
81
58
55
5.0
14.3
4.1
5.4
4.3
6.1
17.6
5.0
6.7
5.5
7.3
21.5
6.1
8.2
6.9
1
4
2
2
2
SilIery........................
Sorel ........................
Sutton
Tadoussac ................
Temiscaming ............
-13
-12
-11
-15
-21
-19
-17
-16
-19
-25
82
85
84
80
87
73
74
73
70
71
9000
8868
8600
9871
9581
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.7
1.1
4.5
4.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
45
36
39
32
32
84
80
55
85
60
8.0
5.0
6.4
8.4
5.0
9.9
6.1
7.8
10.7
6.1
12.2
7.3
9.4
13.5
7.3
4
2
2
4
2
Thetford Mines. .........

Three Rivers ..............
Thurso ......................
Vald'Or ....................
Val1eyfield ................
-14
-13
-14
-27
-9
-19
-18
-18
-31
-14
83
85
87
85
85
73
74
74
71
74
9815
9306
8900
11169
8300
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.9
4.0
4.5
4.0
3.0
3.0
41
40
36
35
38
81
84
62
64
54
7.6
4.5
6.4
5.0
6.5
9.4
5.5
7.8
6.1
7.8
11.6
6.6
9.4
7.3
9.3
2
2
2
1
2
Varennes ..................
Vercheres ................
Verdun......................
Victoriaville ..............
Ville d' Anjou ............
-11
-11
-10
-14
-10
-16
-17
16
-19
-16
85
85
86
84
86
74
74
74
74
74
8500
8700
8200
9250
8200
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
40
38
42
43
42
60
65
54
80
54
5.9
5.6
6.6
5.4
6.6
7.1
6.7
7.8
6.7
7.8
8.5
8.0
9.2
8.2
9.2
2
2
2
2
2
Ville Marie
Waterloo ..................
WestmounL ..............
WiudsorMills
-24
-12
-10
-13
-28
-17
-16
-18
87
84
86
84
71
73
74
73
10557
8400
8200
8500
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.9
3.5
3.0
3.5
5.0
28
39
42
40
62
55
54
60
6.3
5.4
6.6
4.9
7.8
6.7
7.8
6.1
9.5
8.2
9.2
7.5
1
2
2
2
New Brunswick
Alma ........................
Bathurst ....................
Campbellton. .............
Chatham ...................
Edmundston ............
-5
-10
-14
-10
-16
-10
-15
18
-15
-20
80
86
84
87
81
69
71
71
71
72
8400
9462
9358
9065
9796
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.8
4.5
3.0
4.5
3.0
3.0
39
35
40
37
36
60
80
112
62
69
7.9 ~0.4
8.9
7.0
7.8
9.9
6.1
7.8
6.3
8.2
13.6
11.3
12.5
9.8
10.6
1
2
2
2
2
Fredericton ..............
Gagetown -
Grand Falls ..............
Moncton ..................
Oromocto ................
-10
-9
-16
-7
-9
16
15
-21
-12
-15
86
84
82
85
85
70
70
72
71
70
8671
8235
9635
8711
8700
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.7
0.9
4.5
4.0
3.0
3.5
4.5
41
41
38
39
41
60
60
66
75
60
6.2
7.5
6.0
9.6
7.4
7.8
9.9
7.8
12.1
9.4
9.7
12.9
9.9
15.0
11.9
2
2
2
1
2
Sackville....................
Saint John ................
St. Stephen ..............
Shippigan ..................
Woodstock ................
-5
-7
-8
7
14
-10
12
-13
-12
19
83
79
82
84
87
70
68
69
69
71
8420
8453
8400
9500
8756
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.5
0.9
4.0
5.0
5.0
2.5
3.5
38
48
45
35
37
63
53
50
92
63
8.6
8.0
9.4
10.8
5.7
11.0
9.9
11.5
13.2
7.1
13.9
12.2
14.0
16.0
8.7
1
2
2
1
2
u~~~
. . . u
~.*
DESIGN DATA FOR SELECfED LOCATIONS IN CANADA
Design Temperature
DegreeDays
15
Min.
One
Day
~et
bel~w
Rain
65 F
in.
Rain
in.
Ann.
Tot.
Pcpn.
in.
5
-3
5
2
4
-10
8
1
-2
0
82
82
82
79
80
70
70
69
68
68
8400
8400
7700
8100
7718
0.6
0.4
0.6
0.5
0.6
4.0
4.0
5.0
4.5
5.5
40
46
52
53
54
Deber!
Digby .. ...............
Greenwood
Halifax
Kentville
-7
5
1
4
0
-12
1
2
0
4
82
77
83
80
83
70
69
70
68
70
8399
7076
7591
7361
7792
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.5
4.0
5.0
5.0
5.5
5.0
Liverpool
Lockeport ..
Louisburg
Lunenburg
New Glasgow
7
7
6
6
5
3
3
1
2
10
82
78
80
81
81
68
68
69
68
70
7362
7300
8100
7700
8400
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.6
0.4
North Sydney
PictOLl ..
Port Hawkesbury ..
Springhill ..
Stewiacke ...
5
-5
1
-4
5
0
-10'
-6
9
-10
82
81
82
82
82
70
70
70
70
70
8100
8400
8200
8400
8300
5
-5
-7
-1
9
0
-10
-12
-5
5
82
83
81
82
73
70
70
70
70
68
8049
8400
8226
7900
7340
-3
-1
-3
.J
-6
5
8
8
81
81
81
82
70
70
70
69
5
2
5
20
6
1
2
12
24
2
75
76
81
80
69
67
67
68
62
5
1
25
7
5
10
5
27
3
10
81
82
81
71
81
68
68
67
32
7
11
6
1
36
2
17
2
6
75
68
63
77
76
66
32
5
32
35
1
36
46
56
45
60
41
51
42
Province
and
Location
Nova Scotia
Amherst ,.'.
Antigonish
Bridgewater
Canso ....
Dartmouth
Sydney
Tatamagouche
TrLlfo ...
Wolfville
Yarmouth
January
2W;;'
OF
...
...
Prince Edward Island

Charlottetown ...
Souris
....
Summerside
Tignish
Newfoundland
Argentia ..
Bonavista
Buchans
Cape Harrison
Cape Race ......
Corner Brook
Gander
Goose Bay
Grand Bank
Grand Falls ..
...
...
Labrador City ..
Port aux Basques ....
St. Anthony
...
St. John's
Stephenville
...
Twin Falls
Wabana
Wabush Lake
...
...
Yukon
Aishihik
Dawson
Destruction Bay
Watson Lake
Whitehorse .. ............
.%
July 2\1,,%
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
Hourly Wind
Pressures
Earthquake
R
factor
1/10
1/30
1/100
psf
psf
psf
60
65
45
55
45
8.6
8.6
8.5
10.1
11.0
lOA
11.0
12.1
11.0
13.9
12.6
13.9
14.3
14.0
42
44
41
54
41
53
48
58
45
56
8.1
8.3
7.6
lOA
13.3
13.0
12.8
14.0
13.0
1
2
5.5
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
57
57
53
55
45
1
1
2
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.5
3.5
4.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.5
8486
8400
8440
8900
804
I
I
I
1
1
804
704
10.4
9.9
11.0
9.9
37
40
45
45
58
9.1
9.3
10.8
8.9
11.5
12.6
11.5
804
lOA
14.4
14.2
14.8
14.6
12.8
50
45
50
45
42
50
60
65
55
63
9.7
8.4
12.3
8.0
8.1
1l.5
10.4
14.4
10.4
10.4
13.6
12.8
16.8
13.3
13.3
2
I
1
1
1
3.5
3.5
4.0
5.0
4.5
51
44
41
41
49
49
58
53
56
55
9.7
8.3
7.7
7.4
8.6
11.5
13.6
13.0
12.6
13.0
13.1
2
1
9.9
9.9
10.7
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
4.0
3.5
4.5
4.0
43
43
39
37
66
68
62
75
8.6
8.7
9.4
12.7
10.4
10.4
11.5
15.0
12.7
12.5
14.0
17.8
I
I
I
8440
9200
10138
12603
9190
0.6
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.6
4.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
4.5
57
48
36
29
54
47
72
91
128
48
11.9
10.8
9.6
9.6
16.4
14.4
13.2
11.5
11.5
20.1
17.4
16.0
13.7
13.7
24.3
2
2
1
1
2
8978
9254
11887
8378
9352
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.4
3.5
4.0
2.5
4.0
90
62
103
55
~.O
45
40
29
54
37
12.0
9.6
6.0
12.3
9.6
14.4
1l.5
7.1
14.4
11.5
17.2
13.7
8.4
16.8
13.7
1
2
1
2
1
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.3
2.5
4.0
3.0
4.0
3.5
31
56
32
57
40
110
75
111
68
68
14200
8800
10896
8991
8717
86
6.6
11.4
11.9
12.6
12.9
7.8
13.2
16.0
15.3
15.0
9.2
15.3
21.0
18.6
17.5
1
2
2
2
1
75
77
75
66
68
66
14300
8900
14200
0.3
0.6
0.4
2.5
4.0
2.5
29
55
31
110
60
110
6.6
11.7
6.6
7.8
14.4
7.8
9.2
17.6
9.2
1
2
1
49
59
48
63
45
72
79
74
74
76
61
61
60
61
61
14747
15067
14300
15768
12898
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
10
13
12
14
13
26
58
50
50
34
6.0
4.2
6.2
4.2
4.0
7.3
5.0
7.3
5.0
5.4
8.9
6.0
8.7
6.0
7.1
4
2
4
4
4
54
45
78
75
63
60
13740
12475
0.3
0.2
2.0
17
11
54
27
4.0
5.8
5.0
7.1
6.2
8.7
4
4
68
004
1.5
1.5
-624-
72
72
11.5
lOA
Copyright NRC-CNRC
I
1
I
I
I
1
2
1I

Design Temperature
January
July 2Y2%
2W;;
Dry Wet
of
of
of
Province
and
Location
!;
Northwest Territories
Aklavik
Alert
Arctic Bay ...
Baker Lake ..
Cambridge Bay .... ".
-48
48
-46
76
54
55
71
60
61
43
68
57
67
63
70
-50
-50
-50
-48
-52
-48
-50
-40
-43
-46
-49
Chesterfield ..
Clyde ....., ., ., , . ...
Coppermine .. .....
Coral Harbour
Eskimo Point. ...
-43
-47
-38
-40
Eureka
Fort Good Hope
Fort Providence ....
Fort Resolution ..
Fort Simpson .....
-49
-51
-46
-44
-50
-51
-53
-49
-47
-53
55
81
75
79
82
Fort Smith
Frobisher..
Hay River
Holman 1sland ..
Inuvik
-46
-42
-41
-46
48
-49
-45
-45
-48
-50
83
59
81
64
77
51
-49
-52
-37
-48
-53
-51
-55
-39
I-50
51
49
81
56
71
>
......
lsachsen
Mould Bay ..
Norman Wells
Nottingham Island ....
Port Radium
Rae .. .......... ..... , ....
Rankin Inlet . ..... ..
Resolute
Resolution Island ..
...
Yellowknife
-48
-40
-47
-32
47
-40
-50
-43
-49
-35
-49
75
68
51
45
76
Degree
Days
below
6SoF
18017
23488
20933
19790
21628
-
19568
19881
19484
19452
18200
IS
Min.
Rain
in.
0.2
1.5
II
2.0
50
54
45
61
56
9.2
12.8
6.9
18.5
10.2
11.0
16.6
8.7
25.0
12.3
13.0
21.2
10.9
33.2
14.9
0
4
1
1
0
0.1
63
13.0
12.4
8.2
4
0
2
0
2
0.2
0.2
2.5
10
II
9
12
1.5
2.5
3.0
1.5
2.5
3
12
10
II
12
25
60
48
45
56
9.9
9.9
5.5
6.1
6.3
12.6
14.1
6.7
7.5
7.8
15.9
19.3
8.1
9.2
9.5
I
I
0
0
1
1.5
13
14
12
5
10
37
50
50
25
46
6.3
11.8
5.5
13.3
8.1
7.8
14.4
6.7
16.3
11.5
9.5
17.5
8.1
19.9
15.8
0
2
0
2
4
4
3
13
12
9
30
22
63
85
54
9.5
9.9
8.6
9.6
7.9
12.1
12.6
12.1
12.1
9.9
15.2
15.9
16.4
15.0
12.4
2
I
2
1
48
52
27
Il'l
42
7.2
9.6
8.3
17.7
7.2
11.0
13.8
13.0
29.5
11.0
0
0
2
2
0
0.1
0.1
15800
19300
22673
16021
15634
IjlOO
psf
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
24269
23594
16111
17705
16726
1/30
psf
15.1
18.3
0.3
0.2
0.3
O. I
0.2
63
1/10
psf
11.0
14.4
10.4
10.4
7.1
14176
17876
14518
19926
18200
Earth
quake
R
factor
7.7
1\.2
8.3
8.8
6.2
65
62
Hourly Wind
Pressures
46
43
19
32
32
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
61
Gnd.
Snow
Load
psf
10
6
6
7
6
17028
14651
147%
146511
64
Day Tot.
i Pcpn.
in.
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.5
1.0
0.2
0.1
62
63
64
63
24220
~IAn".
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.2
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5
2.0
- 62.5-
9
11
5
16
8
8.9
11.5
10.4
23.1
8.9
Copyright NRC-CNRC

ASSOCIATE COMMITTEE ON THE NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
19681970
C. D. Carruthers (Chairman from July 1970)
R. F. Legget (Chairman to July 1970)
D. C. Beam*
G. C. Lount
J. D. Beaty
I. Maclennan
R. A. Bird
D. A. Matheson
S. D. C. Chutter
H. H. G. Moody
W. G. Connelly
A. T. Muir
R. F. DeGrace
L. P. Picard
H. B. Dickens (Vice Chairman)
K. R. Rybka
S. A. Sasso*
R. A. W. Switzer
I. Campbell (ex officio)
P. Dobush (ex officio)
C. G. E. Downing
T. R. Durley (ex officio)
L. A. Kay (ex officio)
A. F. Duffus
J. J. Dussault
W. R. Edmonds*
H. Elder
J. L. Jolicoeur
H. A. Lawless
R. S. Ferguson (Research Advisor) J. M. Robertson (Secretary)

* Deceased
Copyright NRC-CNRC

NBC - 1970 - Structural Design and Commentaries

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

NBC - 1970 - Structural Design and Commentaries

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

CANADIAN STRUCTURAL

SUPPLEMENT No.4 TO THE

ASSOCIATE COMMITTEE ON THE NATIONAL aUI LDING CODE

NRC No. 11530

Th. N.tlon.1 BuDding Cod nd It uppl.m.nt. m.y b. obt.lned

CANADIAN STRUCTURAL DESIGN

SUPPLEMENT No. 4 TO THE

ASSOCIATE COMMITTEE ON THE NATIONAL BUILDING CODE

Prin ted in Canada

NRC No. 11530

@ National Research Council of Canada 1970

-111- Copyright NRC-CNRC

CANADIAN STRUCTURAL DESIGN

PART A - PART 4, DESIGN, NBC, 1970

PART B - DESIGN CODES

PART C - COMMENTARIES ON PART 4 OF THE NBC

PART D - DESIGN DATA FOR SELECTED LOCATIONS

STRUCTURAL LOADS AND

STRUCTURAL LOADS AND

SUBSECTION 4.1.1. GENERAL

(2) All permanent and temporary structural members of a buildillg shall

4.1.1.4. Buildings and their structural members shall be designed by one of

-3- Copyright NRC-CNRC

4.1.1.5.(1) Structural members shall be designed so that their deflections and

4.1.1.6. Provision shall be made to ensure adequate stability of the structure

Drawings and Calculations

SUBSECTION 4.1.2. DESIGN LOADS AND EFFECTS

(Information on effects due to temperature changes can be found in NBC Supplement

(2) If it can be shown by engineering principles, or if it is known from

4.1.2.3.(1) In designing buildings and their structural members all of the

lowing load combination probability factors:

-5- Copyright NRC-CNRC

(3) When loads other than D counteract D in a structural member or

(4) A bUilding shall be proportioned to resist an overturning moment and

(a) the weight of the member itself,

(4) Where a structural member supports a tributary area of floor, roof, or

Use of Area of Floor or Roof

Use of Area of Floor or Roof

Grandstands, stadia, rinks, arenas, reviewing stands

Forming Part of Article 4.1.4.4.

Area of Floor or Roof

SUBSECTION 4.1.5. LIVE LOADS DUE TO SNOW AND RAIN

to snow accumulation shall be determined by multiplying the ground snow

(Information on pondinar on roofs can be found in NBC Supplement No.... Canadian

4.1.6.1.(1) The design external pressure or suction due to wind on a building

as a whole or on cladding shall be calculated from:

normal to the surface either as a pressure (directed towards

internal pressure acting statically and in a

(Information on pressure coefficients can be found in the chapter on

(3) The reference velocity pressure q is the appropriate value specified in

(4) The exposure factor C. shall be:

(5) The gust effect factor C g is one of the following values:

4.1.6.3. Buildings and structural members shall be capable of withstanding

SUBSECTION 4.1.7. EFFECTS OF EARmQUAKES

(3) Earthquake forces shall be assumed to act in any horizontal direction.

for all buildings designed for post disaster services and

F/ need not exceed O.ISV and may be considered as zero for

Type or Arrangement of Resisting Elements

Buildings with a ductile moment resisting space frame

Buildings with a dual structural system consisting of a

All building framing systems except as hereinafter

Buildings with a box system(3)-

Structures other than buildings and other than those set

Elevated tanks plus full contents, on four or more